fi  s 


^ 


'""M 


'C 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive  I 

in  2007  with  funding  from  | 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation  \ 


http://www.archive.org/details/frenchexercisesfOOchariala 


FRENCH    EXERCISES 


ADVANCED    PUPILS. 


CHARDENAL'S  FRENCH   SERIES. 


First  French  Course;  or,  Kules  and  Exercises  for 
Beginners.     16mo.     230  pages. 

Second  French  Course;  or,  French  Syntax  and 
Reader.     16mo.     250  pages. 

Complete  French  Course;  based  on  the  First  and 
Second  French  Courses.     16nio.     360  pages. 

Exercises  for  Advanced  Pupils,  containing  Eules  of 
Syntax,  numerous  Exercises  on  Rules  and  Idioms, 
and  a  Dictionary  of  nearly  Four  Thousand  Idio- 
matical  Verbs,  Phrases,  and  Proverbs.  16mo. 
332  pages. 


French  exercises 

FOB 

ADVANCED   PUPILS. 

OONTAINIMO 

THE  PRINCIPAL  RULES  OF  FRENCH  SYNTAX,  NUMEROUS 

FRENCH  AND  ENGLISH  EXERCISES  ON 

RULES    AND    IDIOMS, 

*ASD   A 

WCnONARY^  OF  NEARLY  FOUR  THOUSAND  IDI0MATICA1> 

VERBS  AND  SENTENCES,  FAMILIAR  PHRASES, 

AND    PROVERBS. 

BT 

C   A.  CHARDENAL. 

A    HSW    EDITIOn. 


Baston 

ALLYN    AND    BACON 


A  FEW  HINTS  TO  TEACHERS  AND  PUPILS 
ON  THE  USE  OF  THIS  BOOK. 


PAET  FIEST. 

(From  Page  1  to  Page  9i.J 

A^'T  pupil  having  a  good  knowledge  of  the  anxiliary 
verbs  etre  and  avoir,  of  the  four  regular  conjugations, 
and  the  principal  irregular  verbs,  and  having  written  a 
few  exercises  on  the  way  to  translate  and  place  pronouns, 
may  with  advantage  begin  these  ' '  Exercises."  So  much 
may  easUy  have  been  learned  in  two  sessions  by  young 
ladies  and  boys  at  school,  and  in  one  by  young  men  in 
business. 

For  a  week  or  two,  it  would  be  well  to  revise  the 
rudiments,  especially  the  verbs  and  pronouns.  The  best 
way  for  the  teacher  to  exercise  his  pupils  upon  verbs,  is 
to  give  them  a  tense  to  be  translated,  vivd  voce,  from  each 
of  the  four  conjugations ;  for  example —  JFould  you 
praise?  Would  you  punish?  Would  gou  receive?  Would 
you  lose  ?  Then —  Would  you  he  praised  ?  Would  you  he 
punished  ?  Would  you  he  received  ?  Would  you  he  lost  ? 
Then —  Were  they  praising  ?  Are  they  praising  ?  Were 
they  punishing  ?  Are  they  punishing  ?  etc.,  and  so  on, 
varying  the  questions  upon  every  tense,  person,  and 
mood,  until  the  four  conjugutions  are  thoroughly,  known. 


VI 


HINTS  ON  THE  ITSE  OF  THIS  BOOK. 


If  a  similar  process  be  pursued  with  the  personal 
pronouns,  the  method  of  their  arrangement  may  be 
acquii'cd  in  an  hour  or  two.  Let  the  pupil  learn  first 
how  they  must  be  translated  when  placed  before  the 
verb,  and  how  when  placed  after  it  (Rule  34) ;  he  will 
then  have  only  to  remember  that  a  personal  pronoun 
must  always  be  placed  immediately  before  the  verb, 
except  vafour  cases.  ^  If  there  are  two  pronouns  to  be 
placed  before  the  verb,  the  pupil  will  learn  them  by 
heart,  in  the  order  in  which  they  are  placed  in  Rule  35. 
The  whole  difficulty  with  respect  to  personal  pronouns 
being  to  know  exactly  the  way  of  translating  them,  the 
teacher  must  devote  a  part  of  each  lesson  for  one  or  two 
weeks  to  exercise  his  pupils  by  asking,  "  how  do  you 
translate  Mm  before  the  verb?  him  after  it?  them  before? 


1  The  following  tableau  will  show  the  place  of  personal  pronouns  according 
to  the  general  rule  :— 

A»FIK?'ATIVB 

Pronoun*. 

Vtrh. 

Je 

tu 
il 
mon  frfera 

VOUB 

me 

lelul 

noosle 

al 

donneras 
a 
montrera. 

Tn. 

tonltTi& 

vendo. 

NE0A1 

PronounM. 

IVE. 

Verb. 

Jene 

tu  ne 
line 
mon  frfere  ne 

Toua 
m' 
les 
leslal 

IMTBRSOO 

ai 
as 
perdrft 

a 

>ATIVB. 

pasm. 
rien  dit 
pas. 
pas  donnA. 

Prowyunt. 

r<!r6. 

votrefrtoa 

vous 
me 
lelui 
nooalfl 

INTBREOOATIV 

al-Je 
donneras- 1« 

a-t-n 

montrera-t- 

B  TJKOATIVB. 

vn? 

tonlivrer 
venduJ 
U? 

Pronount. 

Va-b. 

ne 

ne 
ne 
mes  fribres  ne 

nous 
vonsl' 
lul 
tele 

aver-Toni 
al-je 

1        ont-ils 

1        doneront-ils 

pasTusf 
pas  donn^f 
pab  dit? 
pas? 

HINTS  Oil  THE  P8E  OF  THIS  BOOX.  Vli 

them  after  ?  to  her  before  ?  to  him  before  ?  <o  them 
before  ?  i<  ^o  them  f  them  to  him  ?  her  to  them  f  them  to 
her  ?  her  to  you  f  them  to  you  ?  etc." 

Tliis  revisal  over,  the  Exercises  on  the  principal  Rules 
of  Syntax  (p.  49)  should  be  begun.  It  will  be  seen  that 
each  French  paragi-aph  is  headed  by  the  indication  of 
some  rules.  These  rules  should  always  be  learnt  by 
pupils,  not  word  by  word  (with  the  exception  of  the 
pronouns),  but  in  such  a  way  that  they  may  be  able  to 
translate  at  once  any  example  illustrating  the  rule. 
Then  proceed  with  the  reading  and  translation  of  the 
French  and  Engli-^h  paragraphs,  or,  if  the  whole  would 
be  too  much  for  certain  classes,  of  the  half  of  each.  Wo 
generally  translate  the  English  twice,  so  that  the  pupils 
may  bring  a  pretty  good  exercise  to  be  corrected  by  me 
at  the  beginning  of  the  next  lesson.  For  the  last  quarter 
of  an  hour,  all  the  pupils  having  shut  their  books,  I  read 
in  French  the  English  sentences  we  have  translated  (or 
others),  and  each  pupU  must,  in  his  turn,  give  me  the 
English  translation.  This  exercise,  which  I  have  long 
experienced  as  the  best  to  accustom  their  ears  to  French 
sounds,  I  use  with  beginners  from  the  very  first  lesson, 
increasing  gradually  in  rapidity  of  reading,  and  I  con- 
tiaue  it  in  this  advanced  book  till  we  begin  exercises  on 
conversation. 

PART  SECOKD  AlO)  INDEX. 

In  the  second  Part,  the  pupils  will  have  to  study, 
instead  of  rules,  the  whole  or  part  of  the  paragraph  in 
the  Index  (both  in  the  Idiomatical  Verbs  and  the  Idi'i- 
matical  Sentences  J  coiresponding  to  the  chapter  they  have 
to  translate.     They  will  observe  that  in  such  idioms  as 


▼m  HIHTS  OK  THB  USE  OF  THK  BOOK. 

faire  voir  qu'fonj  a  du  coeur,  en  passer  par  ou  (Von)  veut, 
etc.,  on  must  be  replaced  by  the  subject  of  the  verb ;  like- 
wise amener  d.  sa  suite,  trainer  apres  sot,  revenir  sur  set 
pas,  will  become,  according  to  the  case,  amener  a  leur 
suite,  a  ma  suite,  trainer  apres  eux,  aprcs  elles,  revenir 
sur  nospas,  sur  leur  spas,  etc.  Also  that  the  preposition 
de  OT  d  placed  in  the  Index  at  the  end  of  the  verbs,  does 
not  necessarily  make  part  of  the  idiom,  but  shows  that,  if 
the  verb  be  followed  by  a  complement,  de  or  a  must  be 
used.  Lastly,  if  there  be  in  the  idiom  a  noun  expressive 
of  a  part  of  the  body,  the  pupil  must,  for  the  translation, 
remember  the  27th  Eule.  Example :  She  lauc/hed  in 
Johi's  face,  will  be  Elle  a  ri  au  nez  de  Jean,  but  Sht 
laughed  in  my  face  will  be  translated  by  Elle  m'o  ri  au  ne%. 
When  the  teacher,  after  the  correcting  of  the  preceding 
exercise,  asks  questions  on  the  Idioms,  he  will  do  well  to 
introduce  some  changes  in  the  tenses  and  persons  of 
verbs,  and  to  form  a  few  sentences  of  his  own.  Take,  for 
instance,  the  7th  paragraph  in  the  Index  of  Idiomatical 
Verba  (p.  191) :  Does  he  not  hear  ill  will  to  me  ? — Did  ho 
hear  will  ill  to  you  ? — Bear  up  against  misfortune — He 
legged  me  to  tell  you — /  thinh  she  has  a  heo  in  her  bonnet 
— Are  you  sure  she  is  better  ?  etc. 

CONYEESATIONAL  EXERCISES.* 
Let  the  pupil  bear  in  mind  that  the  only  way  to  attain 
that  chief  and  most  attractive  part  of  his  study,  con- 

^  Je  prends  la  liberty  d'appeler  I'attention  de  mos  confreres 
Bur  ce  paragraphe,  ct  do  les  prior  do  tenter  cettc  sorte 
d'exercice  durant  quelques  semaines  dans  une  do  Icurs  classes. 
Toutes  les  combinaisons  qu'on  a  essay^es  mo  semblcnt  rcunies 
dans  cette  m^thode  :  lo  travail  iutcllectuel  de  I'el^ve,  travaiJ 


HTNTS  OK  THE  USE  OP  THIS  BOOK.  IX 

rersation  in  French,  is  mental  work.  From  the  very 
beginning,  and  even  before  the  teacher  can,  in  a  mixed 
class,  introduce  such  a  subject,  the  pupil  ought  to  trans- 
late mentally,  and  repeat  as  often  as  possible  during  the 
day,  such  sentences  as  he  can  do  easily,  especially  those 
which  illustrate  important  rules.  A  few  months  of  that 
practice  would  be  the  best  of  all  preparations. 

I  generally  commence  exercises  upon  conversation 
when  we  have  translated  the  exercises  in  this  book  upon 
personal  pronouns.  I  ask  each  pupil  to  prepare  at  home 
a  few  short  sentences  (say  five  or  six  to  begin  with)  upon 
any  subject  he  likes,  to  translate  them  into  French  »wn- 
tally,  and  to  repeat  them  often  enough  duiing  the  day, 
80  as  to  be  able  to  teU  me  them  fluently  at  the  end  of 
the  class.  Afterwards,  from  six  sentences  he  goes  on  to 
ten,  twelve,  fifteen,  etc.,  until  he  does  not  require  any 


auqucl  est  astreint  quiconque  veut  s'exprimer  dana  one  langtte 
qui  lui  est  pcu  fainili^ro,  I'iraitation  a  n'importc  quelle  dose 
on  la  desire,  rexercico  in3tantan6  que  lo  maltre  peut  imposer  k 
cfaaque  eI6ve  en  allongcant  d'un  on  de  deux  membres  la  phrase 
preparee  par  celui-ci,  la  revision  constante  et  pratique  des 
regies  de  la  syntaxe,  la  possibilite  pour  lea  el6vcs  de  choisir 
la  forme  et  le  fond  qui  leur  plaiscnt,  questions,  reponses, 
reflexions,  anecdotes,  etc. 

II  va  sans  dire  que  les  elAves  no  preparent  de  phrases  que  aur 
lea  idiotismes  qu'ils  coinprennent  parfaitement,  qu'ils  les  pre- 
parent courtes  et  simples  pour  commencer,  et  qu'ils  ne  risquent 
des  phrases  plus  compliquees  qu'aprfes  quelqucs  somainea  d'un 
travail  plus  humble  et  plus  sdr. 

Pour  qui  vcut  bien  reflechir  un  instant,  11  est  evident  qu'un 
excrcicc  ainsi  gradue  ne  peut  manquer  de  produire  d'excellenta 
resultals  au  bout  de  quelqucs  mois. 

(Note  de  la  3»  Edition.) 


X  HINTS  ON  XH£  USE  OJP  THIS  BOOK. 

more  preparation,  but  is  ready  to  answer  me  and  con- 
verse with  me  on  any  subject  whatever. 

The  object  of  this  preparation  at  home  is  to  induce 
the  personal  -labour  of  the  pupil. 

The  Index  must  become,  for  that  laboiir,  his  dictionary. 
Let  him  take  evciy  morning  two  or  three  verbs  and  as 
many  sentences,  and  turn  them  mentally  in  every  possible 
way  during  the  day,  or  at  night,  in  bed,  before  sleeping. 
This  practice,  if  persisted  in  for  two  or  three  months,  will 
undoubtedly,  as  I  have  proved  by  an  experience  of  many 
years,  enable  him  to  speak  French  with  a  certain  ease 
and  to  see  the  way  before  him  clearly.  Let  him  not  bo 
discouraged  by  the  apparent  difficulty  of  his  task.  The 
forms  of  sentences  in  constant  use  being,  after  all,  very 
limited  in  number,  the  great  point  is,  not  to  gather  up  a 
large  stock  of  words,  but  to  get  familiar  with  those  few 
forms.  Those  fonns  are  in  fact  mere  tools,  which  he 
has  simply  to  learn  to  handle  with  ease  and  skilL 

COMPOSITION  OE  LETTERS  AND  ESSAYS,  AND 
GENERAL  TRANSLATION. 

The  French  language  is  so  exact,  that  to  write  a  page 
of  good  French  is  by  no  means  an  oiisy  matter.  Frequent 
translation  of  Eytnicts  and  the  slow  and  attentive  read- 
ing of  good  authors  will  greatly  assist  in  acquiring  a  good 
style. 

Let  the  pupil,  when  translating  or  writing  a  letter, 
remember  that  long  and  complicated  sentences  are  con- 
trary to  the  nature  of  the  French  language  ;  that  his 
ideas  must  be  deduced  logically  ;  that  the  repetition  of 
the  same  words  must  be  avoided  ;  that  the  forms  of  his 
Bcatences  should  likewise  be  all  different;  that,  if  he  ia 


HnfTS  ON  THE  USE  OF  THIS  BOOK.  XI 

absolutely  obliged  to  repeat  himself,  the  repetition  should 
be  in  more  energetic  and  nervous  terms  than  the  original 
expression;  lastly,  that  the  best  written  French  is  short, 
simple,  and  clear. 

In  advanced  classes  all  young  ladies  should  write  a 
letter  in  French  every  week.  As  for  young  men,  I 
advise  them  to  prepare  themselves  for  the  competitions 
of  the  Society  of  Arts,  the  programme  of  which  is  pub- 
lished every  year  in  August  or  September.  The  exercises 
upon  Idioms  and  translations  of  Extracts  which  it  re- 
quires, the  numerous  essays  upon  history  and  literature 
which  must  be  written,  the  good-humoured  competitions 
they  excite  among  the  pupils,  and  the  object  in  view,  are 
all  calculated  to  bring  about  the  best  results  and  to  crown 
appropriately  a  young  man's  French  studies. 


I  cannot  conclude  without  acknowledging  that,  for  the 
compilation  of  Idioms  at  the  end  of  this  book,  besides 
French  grammars  and  dictionaries,  I  have  largely  con- 
sulted the  best  and  most  modem  authorities  in  the 
matter,  such  as  Brasseur,  Wattez,  Mariette,  Duverger, 
Dufief,  Merlet,  Spiers,  Tarver,  etc. 

C.  A.  Chaddeital. 


SIGNS  AND  ABBREVIATIONS. 


]_ 

represents 

familiar  style. 

„ 

little  osed,  antiquated. 

p- 

stands  for 

■  person. 

th. 

thing. 

m. 

masculina 

f. 

feminine. 

imp. 

impersonal. 

Bubj. 

subjunctive. 

r- 

part.   „ 

present  participle, 

figuratively. 

gen. 

generally. 

r- 

particularly, 
literally 

Numbers  after  words  refer  to  rules. 

English  words  within  brackets  are  not  to  be  translated. 


FIRST    PAET. 


I.- PRINCIPAL   RULES  OF  SYNTAX. 


THE  ARTICLE. 

Rule  1. — The  article  is  used  in  French  before  sub- 
stantives used  in  a  general  sense,  and  must  be  repeated 
before  each  ;  as  - 

Men  fade  away  likejlotoers,        Les    hommes   pasnent  eomme 

LES  Jleurs. 
Moderation  is  the  wise  man's    La  modiration  est  le  tr6sor  du 

treasure,  sage. 

The  father  and  mother  of  that    li&jyh-e  et  la  wiire  de  cet  en/atU 
^      child  are  old,  sont  dg6s.   ix^ 

ExcEPTioifS. — The  article  is  omitted  - 

(1)  Before  substantives  in  an  enumeration;  as- 

y    Children,  parents,  friends,  Enfan^,   parents,   amis,    i- 

strangers,  all  bewailed  him,       trangers,  ious  le  pleurtrent. 

(2)  Before  substantives  used  adverbially ;  as  - 

(^  He  acts  with  integrity,  H  agit  avec  pbobitb. 

^   I  am  friendless  and  penniless,  Je  suis  sans  ami,  sans  argent. 

Rule  2. — The  article  is  used  in  French  before  names 
of  countries,  provinces,  rivers,  and  mountains  ;  as  - 

i^    Scotland  has  magnificent  VEcosse  a  de  magnijiques  pay- 

scenery,  sages. 

y^  Did  you   ever  see  Loch  Lo-     Avez-vous  jamais  vu  le  lot 

mond  7  Lomond  i 


2  OV   IH£I   AUTICLB. 

ExcBPTioNS. — Names  of  countries  in  Europe  governed 
by  verbs  of  residence  or  nioti6n,  or  preceded  by  the 
preposition  en,  or  used  adjectively ;  as- 

She  comes  from  Scotland,  Elle  vient  d'Ecosse. 

i^         He  is  gone  from  England  to  Jl  est  all4  d'Angleterre  en 

'Spain,  Espagne. 

^  The  Queen  of  England,  La  reine  d'Angleterre. 

Scotch  pig-iron,  De  la /ante  cCEcoaae^ 

RxTLE  3. — The  article  le,  la,  les,  is  used  instead  of  a  or 
an  signifying  per  before  nouns  of  weight,  measure,  or 
number ;  "bvA, par  is  used  for  a  or  an  before  time;  as  - 

Three  francs  a  yard,  Troia  francs  le  mdtre. 

t^  Fivepence  a  pound,  Cinquatite  centimes  LA  livre. 

Ten  francs  a  hundred,  Dix  francs  lb  cent. 

^  A  guinea  a  mouth,  Urve  guin6e  par  mois. 

Rule  4. — The  article  used  in  English  to  denote  quali- 
ties, or  a  person's  country,  business,  title,  etc.,  is  omitted 
in  French ;  as  - 

Augustus,  the  nephew  of  Ceesar,     Auguste,  nevbu  de  Cisar. 
He  ia  a  clergyman,  II  est  eccUsiastique. 

She  is  a  Frenchwoman,  Elle  est  Frangaise.* 

RtTLE  5. — The  article  is  omitted  in  proverbial  sen- 
tences, and  also  in  the  enumeration  of  princes ;  as  - 

t^      A  good  name  is  better  than  a    Bonne  rbnommee  vaut  mieux 
golden  girdle,  f/ue  ceintube  dokee. 

Henry  the  Fourth,  Henri  quatre, 

1  As  it  is  sometimes  difflcolt  to  ascertain  when  the  name  of  a  country  it 
used  adjectively,  observe  that  de,  between  two  nouns,  makes,  as  It  were,  an 
adjective  of  the  second  noun,  and,  therefore,  that  tlie  real  and  chief  object  in 
the  mind  is  pointed  out  by  the  first  noun,  and  qualified  by  the  second.  In 
un  appartement  de  roi,  the  chief  olyect  ia  an  apartment,  the  beauty  of  which 
is  woi  thy  of  a  Icinfc ;  whereas,  in  tappartement  du  roi,  roi  is  pointed  out  by 
the  article  as  the  individual  who  is  the  owner,  which  individual  serves  also 
to  distinguish  that  apartment  from  others;  as— 

Le  roi  de  France,  Le  roi  des  Franqa.is. 

Les  vins  de  France,  La  avantages  db  la  France. 

Les  pobts  ct Anglelerre,     Let  ric/iesses  dk  l'Angletbrrb. 
Do  P0I8S0N  rf«  mer,  Du poision  d%  la  ueb.  dtj  f(oRi>.--{iferM.) 

•  But  the  article  must  be  used  before— 

(1)  Names  of  some  notorious  persons,  those  of  celebrated  actresses,  and  • 
few  Italian  names,  such  as  la  Brinvilliers,  la  ChnmpmesU,i,B  Tasse,  VArioate. 
(3)  Proper  noons  denoting  an  individual  distinction,  as  lb  Cinna  dt  Cor- 
neiJle. 
C)  A  saint's  day,  la  SainUPierre,  la  St.  Jean. 
(*)  Proper  names  in  the  plunU,  as  les  CicSroni  tont  rart*. 


OF   THE    AETICXE. 


RtTLE  6. — The  article  is  omitted   after  que  or  qtiel 
used  as  an  exclamation ;  as  - 

What  a  noise  for  nothing  1       Que  de  bruit  pour  rien  ! 
What  a  bad  day  !  Quelle  affrev^e  joamie  ! 


The  Partitive  Article. 

Rule  7. — Some  or  any,  expressed  or  understood  before 
a  noun,  must  be  tianslated  by  du,  de  la,  de  l\  or  des ; 
as — 

I  have  eaten  bread  and  cheese,  tPai  mangi  Dvpain  et  vv/romage. 
That  man  has  courage,  Cet  homvie  a  du  cceur. 

Exceptions. — (1)  De  only  is  used  when  the  noun  is 
preceded  by  an  adjective  ;  as  - 

Some  good  bre^_^         De  bon  pain. 

But  if  the  adjective  and  the  noun  form  one  expres* 
sion,  as  beaux-arts,  belles-lettres,  bon  mot,  (/rand  hotnme, 
grandpere,  jeunes  gens,  etc.,  du,  de  la,  de  V,  or  des,  must 
be  used;  as- 

Some  fops,        Des  pelits-maitres. 

(2)  De  only  is  used  when  the  verb  is  negative ;  a»— 

He  has  no  courage,         //  n'a  pas  de  coeur. 

If,  however,  the  noun  be  followed  and  modified  by 
an  adjective  or  a  subordinate  sentence,  the  article  should 
be  used  ;  as — 

I  have  not  such  mean  feelings,     Je  ri'ai  point  DBS  sentiments  si 

bas. 
Nevergiveadvicewhichitmay    Ne  donnez  jamais  des  conseiU 
be  dangerous  to  follow,  qu'U soit dangereux de suivre.^ 

1  The  article  Is  also  used  in  interrogative  and  necative  sentencf » to  exprcM 
«N  affirmation,  but  it  is  oinitted  to  express  a  doubt;  as— 

(AffliTTiation)  (Doubt) 

Pourquoi  vous  chaf/rmtz-vousf  n'avez-vou$    Quoit  n'ttvez-vow  paa  J>'amiit 

pas  iiES  amis  pour  vous  distrairel 
In  like  manner  we  say  :— //  ne  peut  parler  sans /aire  Dr.a/auies ;  that  is,  it 
Jbit  desfnules  ;  the  sense  is  afflrmative  in  spite  of  the  ncsation.     Ilparlesant 
/aire  Dv.fautes;  tlial  is,  ilnefaitpat  VE/auut;  the  seu^u  is  negative  In  syiW 
ot  the  attirmaiiou. 


OF  THE   ABTICLE. 


jUhe  Article  used  before  "Plus,"  "Mieux,"  "Moins." 

Rule  8. — The  article  le  is  invariable  when  it  forma 
with  plus,  mieux,  mains,  an  adverbial  expression  modify- 
ing an  adjective,  a  verb,  or  an  adverb;  as- 

She  is  happiest  when  with  her  Cest    auprh  de    sea    enfanti 

children,        •  qvJelle  est  le  plus  heureuse. 

It  is  for  music  that  they  have  C^est  pour  la  unusique  qu'ellea 

the  greatest  talent,  sont  lb  pltia   heureiisemeni 

dou4es. 

It  is  she  who  expresses  herself  CPest  elle  qui  s'exprime  JJKplua 

the  most  eloquently,  4loquemment. 

It  is  what  she  likes  best,  C'esf  ce  qu'elle  aime  le  mieux. 

But  the  article  is  variable  when  there  is  a  comparison 
between  persons  or  things ;  in  this  case  a  noun  is  always 
understood ;  as  - 

Of  all  women  she  is  the  hap-  De  toutes  les  femmes,  c^est  la 
piest,  plus  heureuse  (femme). 

The  most  useful  arts  are  not  Les  arts  les  plus  utiles  ne  sont 
the  most  esteemed,  pas  (les  arts)  L£s  plus  con- 

sidiria. 


THE  SUBSTANTIVE. 
English  Compound  Substantives. 

RtJLE  9. — The  preposition  de  is  always  put  between 
the  name  of  a  thing  and  the  name  of  tiie  substance  of 
which  it  is  made  ;  aa  - 

A  marble  table,  Une  table  de  inarire. 

A  gold  pen,  Une  plume  vi'or. 

Rule  10. — The  qualifying  noun  is  united  to  the 
principal  noun  by  au,  a  la,  a  V,  aux,  when  the  former 
expresses /oot;?  or  liquids,  or  to  make  a  distinction;  and 
by  the  preposition  d  to  denote  use  or  purpose ;  as  - 

The  milk  jug,  Le  pot  au  lait. 

The  oyster- woman,  La  femme  aux  huitre$, 

A  dining-room,  Une  salle  a  mam/cr. 

A  steamboat,  Un  bateau  A  vapeur. 

Obseeve  that,  in  the  first  case,  the  principal  noun 
must  be  preceded  by  the  article  le,  la,  les. 


OP   THE   ST7BSTAKT1VJL  5 

Plural  of  French  Compound  Substantives. 

Rule  11. — French  compound  substantiyes  must  be 
analyzed  in  order  to  see  wliether  the  sign  of  the  plural 
must  or  must  not  be  used,  observing  that  substantives 
and  adjectives  used  m  compound  nouns  alone  take  the 
mark  of  the  plxiral ;  as  - 

Garde-fou,  plaral  des  garde-fous  ;  that  is,  rails  to  protect  fools, 

hand-rails. 
Oarde-sulsse,  plural  des  gard^-svisses ;  that  is,  Swisn  Guards. 
Avantcoureur,  plural  des  avant-coureurs ;  that  ia,  fore-runners. 
Reveille-matin,  plural  dfg  reveille-matin  ;  that  is,  clocks  which 

awaken  one  in  the  morning,  alarm-clocks. 
Coj-d-Fdne,  plural  des  coqd-V&ne  ;  that  is,  rambling  discourses 

in  which  the  speaker  wanders  from  one  subject  to  another 

quite  different,  du  coq  d  rdne. 
Pied-d-terre,  plural  des  pied-d-terre  ;  that  is,  places  where  on« 

dwells  temporarily,  where  oue'has  only  one  foot  alighted. 
Oure-dents,  plural  des  cure-dents;  that  is,  an  instrument  for 

picking  the  teeth,  a  toothpick. 
Tite-d-teie,  plural  dest/te-d-tete;  that  is,  an  interview  between 

two  persons,  face  to  face. 


Collective  Substantives. 

RxTLB  12. — Nouns  collective  gen&ral  (that  is,  repre- 
senting the  whole  of  the  persons  or  things  mentioned, 
aa  Parmee,  lafamille,  le parlenient,  /e  ^^«//?^«)  require  their 
verb,  adjective,  and  pronoun,  to  be  put  in  the  singular; 
as- 
The  people  have  been  conquered,     Le  peuple  A  4td  vaincu. 

RtTLE  13. — !Noun8  collective  partitive  (such  as  un« 
foule,  un  certain  nombre,  une  infinite,  une  douzaine,  etc.), 
require  their  verb,  adjective  and  pronoun  to  be  put  in 
the  singular,  if  they  are  preceded  by  le  or  la;  but  when 
they  are  preceded  by  un  or  tme,  their  verb,  adjective 
and  pronoun  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the  noun 
following  de;  as  - 

The  crowd  of  spectators   ap-  La  foulb  des  si}ectateurs  ap. 

plauded,  plaitdit. 

A  crowd  of  children  followed  Une  foule  c/'enfants  le  sui- 

him,  VAIBNT. 
3 


6 


THE   ADJECTIVE. 

The  Agreement  of  Adjectives. 

Rule  14. — When  the  substantives  are  of  different 
genders,  the' adjective  or  participle  is  put  in  the  mascu- 
line and  in  the  plural ;  as  - 

My  father  and  mother  are  old,     Mon  ptre  et  r.ia  mtre  sont  Xois. 

Exceptions. — An  adjective  placed  after  two  or  more 
substantives  agrees  with  the  last  in  the  two  following 
cases :  - 

(1)  Wlien  the  substantives  are  synonymous ;  as  - 

An  astonishing  valour  and       Un  courage,  une  bravoure 
bravery,  etonnante. 

(2)  T\Tien  the  substantives  are  united  by  the  conjunc- 
tion ou  ;  as  - 

A.n  astonishing  courage  or  pro-     Un  courage  ou  une  prudence 
dence,  etonname. 

Rule  15. — Adjectives  used  adverbially,  that  is  modi- 
fying a  verb,  are  invariable ;  as  - 

How  sweet  these  flowers  smell !   Que  ceafleurs  sentent  bon  ! 

She  sings  false,  Elle  chante  FAUX. 

These  paintings  cost  dear,  Cea  peitUures  coQient  cbeb. 


The  Place  ot  Adjectives. 

Most  adjectives  may  indifferently  be  placed  before  or 
after  their  nouns  ;  but  some  are  subject  to  certain  rules, 
which,  though  not  absolute,  are  very  important. 

Rule  16. — (1)  The  following  adjectives,  used  singly ^ 
generally  precede  the  noun :  - 


jolt, 

pretty. 

ancte% 

ancientk 

beau. 

tine. 

bon. 

good. 

brave. 

brave. 

mauvaui. 

bad. 

grand. 

great,  big. 

michant. 

wicked. 

gro8. 

large,  stout. 

triste. 

sad. 

petit. 

little. 

vilain, 

ugly. 

jeune. 

young. 

premier. 

first 

vievx, 

old. 

demi&r. 

last 

OP   THE   ADJECTITR.  7 

(2)  "WTien  the  substantive  is  followed  by  a  preposi- 
tion, the  adjective  always  comes  before ;  as  - 

The  splendid  speech  of  that        Le  MAONifiQUE  diacoura  de  eet 
orator,  orateur. 

(3)  When  an  adjective  has  fewer  syllables  than  itt 
noun,  it  generally  comes  before  ;  as  - 

Vne  faunae  modestie,  un  juste  chdtiment,  une  basse  intrigue, 
une  liaute  monfagne. 

Rule  1", — Adjectives  of  co^oMr./o'rm,  taste,  dcoAnation- 
ality ;  participles  used  adjectively ;  two  or  more  adjec- 
tives qualifying  the  same  noun;  lastly,  an  adjective 
having  more  syllables  than  its  noun — are  usually  placed 
after  the  noun ;  as  - 

The  red  coats,  Les  habits  RonOES. 

A  round  table,  Une  table  ronde. 

A  bitter  orange,  Une  orange  amere. 

An  English  poem,  Un  po^me  anglais. 

An  accomplished  roan,  Un  homme  accompli. 

An  industrious  and  prudent  lad,  6'n  garfon  LABOKiEDXet  SAOB.' 


The  Government  of  Adjectives. 

Rule  18. — The  prepositions  of ,  from,  hy,  with,  placed 
after  an  adjective  or  a  participle,  aregenei^y  translated 
by  de  only ;  as- 

He  is  a  young  man  endowed  (Test  un  jeune  homme  dou6  db 
with  great  qualities,  grandes  qualMs. 

But  if  the  noun  is  taken  in  a  determinate  sense,  the 
article  must  be  used  with  de  ;  as  - 

He  is  a  young  man  endowed  CPest  un  jeune  homme  dou4  pes 
with  the  qualities  requisite  qvalitis  requises  pour  cetle 
for  such  an  office,  fonction, 

*  In  addition  to  these  few  rnles.  observe  that,  when  an  adjective  is  a  mere 
orr  ament.  which  could  be  suppressed  without  altering  the  meaning  of  the 
sentence,  it  generally  comes  before  tlie  noun,  as  it  thus  gives  more  energy  to 
the  expre>8ioii,  as  un  vil  scelerat  If,  on  the  contrary,  the  adjective  is  abso- 
lutely  neco^ary  to  complete  the  expression  and  give  a  clear  meaning  to  it,  it 
U  placed  a/ltr  the  noun,  as  un  huiunit  vil. 


8  OF   IHE   ABXECTIVE. 

Rule  19. — Adjectives  and  participles  expressing  want, 
scarcity,  plenty,  capability,  satisfaction,  absence,  separa- 
tion, desire,  require  the  preposition  do  before  their  com- 
plement; as- 
Full  of  wit,  Plein  v/'esprit. 
Proud  of  his  coat,             Fier  de  son  habit. 
Eager  for  honours,             Avide  v^honneurs. 

Rule  20. — Adjectives  and  participles  expressing  apt' 
ness,  fitness,  ease,  readiness,  usefulness,  necessity,  resem- 
blance, inclination,  disposition,  end,  tendency,  or  ant 
HABIT,  require  the  preposition  d  before  their  comple- 
ment; as- 

Fit  for  war,  Propre  k  la  guerre. 

Useful  to  his  country,  Utile  A.  son  pays. 

Ready  to  go,  PrSt  a  ^artir. 

Incliued  to  idleness,  Enclin  A  la  paresse. 

"Rule  21. — If  two  adjectives  qualifying  the  same  noun 
require  diiFcrent  prepositions  before  their  complements, 
each  adjective  must  have  its  separate  complement;  as  - 

He  is  useful  to  and  loved  by    II  e3t  utile  k  sa  famillb  et  ex 
his  family,  est  ch6ri. 

Obsebve. — This  rule  applies  equally  to  verbs  and 
prepositions.  Thus,  do  not  say,  il  aime  et  obiit  d,  ses 
parents,  but  il  aime  ses  parents  et  leur  obeit,  as  aimer 
requires  no  preposition  after  it,  whilst  obeir  is  always 
followed  by  d.  Do  not  say,  Plaider  contre  ou  ek 
FAVETJB  DB  qwlqu'un,  but  pluidcr  centre  ftUELau'uN  ou  en 
BA.faveur. 

Rule  22. — ^An  adjective  after  the  impersonal  il  est 
requires  de  before  an  infinitive;  as  - 

It  is  glorious  to  die  for  one's    II  est  (/lorietix  db  mourir  powr 
country,  son  pays. 


The  Comparison. 
Rule  23. — By  alter  a  comparative,  in  after  a  super- 


OP   THE   ADJECTITE.  9 

lative,  and  than  before  a  number,  are  translated  by  de; 

as- 

I  am  Btronger  than  he  by  far,        Je  suis  DE  beaueoup  plus  fort 

que  lui. 
He  is  the  best  man  in  the  world,     C^est  le    meiUeur  homme  DU 

moiide. 
It  is  more  than  three  o'clock,        11  est  plus  de  trots  heures. 

RuiE  24. — Than  before  an  indicative  is  translated  by 
que...ne;  aa- 

She  is  poorer  than  you  think,       Elle  est  plus  pauvre  QUE  voub 

NE  pensez. 

Exception. — If  the  first  clause  of  the  sentence  is  nega- 
tive or  interrogative,  or  if  there  is  an  adverb  between 
que  and  the  verb,  the  ne  is  left  out;  as  - 

One  cannot  lose  a  kingdom  On  ne  pent  perdre  un  royaume 
more  gaily  than  you  do,  plus gaiement  que  votts  le/aites. 

Is  it  worse  weather  than  you  Est-ce  qu^il  fait  plus  mauvaia 
were  told  ?  temps  qiCon  vous  le  disait  ? 

He  is  better  than  when  he  was  II  se  parte  mievx  qua  qqand  U 
in  London,  Halt  a  Londres. 

EiTLE  25. — Than  before  an  infinitive  is  translated  by 
qiie  de  or  by  yw'd,  according  as  the  preceding  verb  re- 
quires de  ox  a;  as  - 

It  is  easier  to  say  it  than  to  do  Rest  -plus  ftwHe,  de  le  dire  que 

it,  DE  le/aire. 

He  is  thinking  more  of  playing  II  pense  plus  kjouer  QU'A.  tra- 

than  working,  vailler. 

Rule  26. — Ths  before  a  comparative  is  not  expressed 
in  French ;  as  - 

The  richer  a  man  is,  the  more  Plfs  un  homme  est  riche,  plus 
cares  he  has,  U  a  de  soucia. 


Possessive  Adjectivea 

Rttle  2Y. — (1)  When  a  possessive  adjective  {my,  thy, 
his,  her,  our,  your,  their)  is  placed  before  a  noun  expres- 
sive of  a  part  of  the  body  or  an  intellectual  faculty, 


10  OP   THE    ADJECTIVE. 

governed  by  a  verh,^  it  is  expressed  by  to  me,  to  thee,  to 
him,  to  her,  to  us,  to  you,  or  to  them ;  as- 

He  broke  my  finger,     fl  vCa  cass6  le  doigt. 

(2)  If  the  possessor  is  clearly  shown,  suppress  the 
pronoun  to  me,  to  thee,  to  him,  to  her,  etc.;  as- 

He  lost  his  right  leg  in  the    II  a perdm.A.jamhe  droite  ilana 
battle,  la  bataille. 

(3)  With  the  three  words  mal  (pain),  froid  (cold), 
and  chaud  (warm),  translate  by  the  verb  avoir,  makinj; 
the  person  subject  of  the  verb ;  as- 

Her  feet  are  sore,  Elle  a  mal  aux  pieds. 

My  hands  are  very  cold,      J'ai  bien  froid  aux  mains. 


Indefinite  Adjectives. 

Rttle  28. — (1)  QuELQUE  (whatever,  however,  some,  a 
few),  is  spelt  in  one  word,  and  varies  when  followed  by 
a  noun,  whether  qualified  by  tin  adjective  or  not ;  as- 
Whatever  faults  you  havecom-     QcELQUE8/oM<e«  qu6  vous  ayez 

mitted,  I  forgive  you,  commises,  je  vous  pardonne. 

(2)  QiTELQTJE,  placed  before  a  participle  or  an  adverb, 
or  an  adjective  not  followed  by  its  noun,  is  an  adverb, 
and  consequently  iuvariable  ;  as- 

However  powerful  they  are,     Quelque  puissants  quails  soient. 

(3)  Quelque,  placed  before  a  number,  is  an  adverb, 
and  invariable ;  as- 

We  fired   about  five  or  aix     Noua  avons  tir6  quelque  driq 
thousand  shots,  ou  six  mille  coups  de  canon. 

(4)  Quel  que,  placed  before  a  verb,  is  spelt  in  two 
"words  {quel,  variable,  and  que) ;  as  - 

Whatever  be  his  inclinations,     Quels  que  soient  ses  penchants, 
the  wise  man  surmounts  them,     le  sage  les  surmonte. 

1  We  say  governtfi  by  a  verb,  because,  when  subject,  mon,  ton,  son,  etc.,  cao 
be  used ;  as  Sajigwe  tst  en/iee,  mon  bras  riefait  nu»L 


OP   THB   ADJECTITB.  11 

RuuE  29. — (1)  Tout  is  an  adjective,  and  consequently 
Taries,  when  it  means  wery,  each,  or  all ;  as  - 

Every  womaD,  TouTK/cmTne. 

All  men,  Tous  let  hommo. 

(2)  Toxrr  is  an  adverb,  and  consequently  invariable, 
when  it  means  quite,  entirely,  however  ;  it  then  precedes 
an  adjective,  a  participle,  or  an  adverb  ;  aa-^ 

We  are  quxtt  exhausted,  Nous  sommes  TOUT  4pui96». 

These  flowers  are  quite  as  Ces  fleurit  sont  tout  ausn 

fresh  as  yesterday,  fraic/ies  qu'hier. 

She  is  entirely  yuura,  EUe  est  tout  a  vous. 

Exception. — The  adverb  tout  varies,  for  the  sake  of 
euphony,  when  placed  before  an  adjective  or  participle 
feminine  beginning  with  a  consonant  or  an  aspirate  h ; 
as- 

She  is  qaite  stnnned,         EUe  est  toutb  stup4/aite. 

(3)  Tout,  followed  by  autre,  is  invariable  if  it  meana 
quite,  but  it  varies  if  it  means  any  ;  as  - 

I  have  quite  a  different  ambition,  J'aiune  TOUT  autre  amhition. 
Jealousy  misleads  more  than    La  jalousie  igare  plus  que 
any  other  passion,  toutb  autbb  passion. 

(4)  Tout,  placed  before  the  name  of  a  town,  agrees 
with  the  word  peuple  understood,  and  is  therefore  mas- 
culine ;  as  - 

All  Rome  is  overwhelmed  with    Tout  Romb  est  consterM. 
grief, 

Rule  30. — MfiitE  is  used  either  as  an  adjective  or  an 
adverb. 

It  is  an  adjective,  and  varies - 

(1)  Before  a  noun  ;  as- 

All  nations  are  alike :  the  same    Les  peuples  «e  ressemblent  par- 
vices,  the  same  virtues,  tout :   hSmes  vices,   U&UK 

vertus, 

1  Toot  sometimes  modifle*  a  noun  nscf)  fiparafively  as  an  adjective;  It  ti 
then  invariable;  as,  des  etofes  tuut   lai.sb,  tout  soie;  a*  gent  $'mt  tuui 

TBUX,  TOUT  OKBILLKs. 


12  OP   THE    ADJECTIVB. 

(2)  After  a  pronoun ;  as  - 

Edx-m£mbs,  blles-m£hes,  cedx  utiaa. 

(3)  AjCter  a  single  noun ;  as- 

The  Greeks  themselves  ore    Les  Grecs  m£mes  sont  laa  de 
wearied  of  him,  lui. 

MfiME  is  an  adverb,  and  invariable  - 

(1)  When  it  means  even;  as  - 

His  remorse  was  evident  even  8es  remords  ont  paru  mSmb  d 

to  our  eyes,  nos  yeux. 

Every  citizen  ought  to  obey  Tout citoyendoit ob4ir aux Ims, 

the  laws,  even  when  unjust,  meme  injustes. 

(2)  When  it  means  also,  besides,  which  happens  when 
it  comes  after  two  or  more  nouns  ;  as  - 

Les  animaux,  les  plantes  mI:me,  6taient  au  nombre  des  diviniUa 
igyptienne*. 


Numbers. 

RtTLE  81. —  Vingt  and  cent  take  the  mark  of  the  plural 
when  they  are  multiplied  by  another  number ;  as  - 

Quatre-yvtiQ'T&.        Trois  cents, 

ExcKPTioxs. — (1)  If  vtnfft  and  cent  are  followed  by 
another  number,  they  do  not  take  the  mark  of  the 
plural;  as- 

Quatre-vjuoT-huU  soldata.        Trois  cent  un. 

(2)  Vingt  and  cent  used  for  vingtieme,  centiime,  are 
invariable;  as- 

Chapiire  gMa<rp- vingt.         Page  trois  cent. 

Observe. — If  cent  is  used  for  centaine,  it  is  then  a 
noun,  and  takes  the  mark  of  the  plural  as  well  as  millior, 
million,  milliard,  etc.;  as  — 

Two  hundred  lots  of  fagots,  Devx  cents  de  fagots. 

Three  hundred  bundles  of  straw,     Trois  cents  de  paille. 

RcHLE  32. — When  a  number  is  followed  by  an  adjec- 


OT   THB   AD/ECtlTB.  13 

tive  or  a  participle,  de  is  put  before  the  latter ;  as  - 
There  were  five  houses  bamt,     Ilyaeu  cinq  viaisona  DK  BBf^- 

LEES. 

ExTLE  33. — Premier  is  the  only  ordinal  nnmber  used 
for  a  date  or  in  the  enumeration  of  princes  ;  beyond  the 
first,  the  cardinal  numbers  must  be  used  ;  as  - 

The  tenth  of  Ausust,  Le  dix  aoilt. 

January  the  twenty  Jirat,       Le  vingt  et  \j^  jcmvitr. 

Fius  the  ninth.  Pie  mbuv. 


THE  PRONOXTN. 
Place  of  Personal  Pronouns. 

Rttle  34. — Personal  pronouns  ia  the  objective  case 
must  be  placed  immediately  before  the  verb  in  simple 
tenses,  and  before  the  auxiliary  in  compound  tenses. 

The  pronouns  must  then  be  translated  by  - 

MK,  me,  to  me.  Kous,  as,  to  us. 

TK,  thee,  to  tliee.  vous,  you,  to  you 

LUI,  tohim,toher,toitb  leur,  to  them. 

LE,  him,  it.  LES,  them. 

LA,  her,  it.  Lss,  them. 

I  see  him,  Je  le  voig. 

I  have  seen  him,  Je  jJai  vu. 

I  have  not  seen  him,  Je  tie  L'aj  pa»  mi. 


As- 


ExcEPTioirs. — The  pronoun  stands  after  the  verb,  and 
is  translated  by  - 

MOI,  Tne.  K0TT8,  tw. 

TOi,  thee.  vers,  you. 

LUI,  him.  Ecx,  them. 

XLLE,  her.  ELLES,  them.* 

1  The  following  should  also  be  learnt  by  beai-t  and  known  perfectly  : — 
Before  tfit  Verb  After  the  Verb. 

MK,    myself. 


IK,     thyself.  Mot-MfisiK,    myself.  NOcs-MenES,  ourselves. 

BE, himself  herseHone'«»elf.  Toi-MEME,    thyself.  TOM-MfiMEs,  yourselvei. 

Kons.  ourselves.  lui-m&uk,    himself,  edx-uemks,    themselves 

Tocs,  yourselves.  kllb-kImk,  herself.  eu,B8-m&)1£s,  themselves 

SK,      themselves. 


14  OP   THE    PEONOtmr. 

(1)  WTien  the  pronoun  is  preceded  by  any  preposition 
but  to  ;  as  - 

They  came  after  «»,        lis  sont  venus  apres  novs. 
Go  with  him,  Allez  aveo  lui. 

Observe. — The  English  preposition  to  does  not  come 
under  this  exception,  as  the  French  have  retained  from 
the  Latin  the  simple  words  nous  (nobis),  vous  {vobis), 
ME  {mihi),  TE  {tihi),  Ltn  {ei),  to  express  the  relation 
marked  in  English  by  the  two  words  to  us,  to  you,  to  me, 
to  thee,  to  him,  etc. 

However  «  is  expressed  with  the  pronouns  after  the 
following  verbs : — Accourir  a,  oiler  a,  en  appeler  d, 
hoire  d,  courir  o,  /aire  allusion  d,  /aire  attention  a, 
marcher  d,  parvenir  d,  penser  d,  tenir  d,  songer  a,  prendre 
garde  d,  recourir  d,  renoncer  d,  retourner  d,  revenir  d, 
venir  a,  riser  a,  voler  d,  etre  d,  and  all  verbs  in  which 
avoir  enters,  as  avoir  recours  a,  avoir  affaire  d,  a/voir  igard 
a,  etc. 

(2)  When  the  pronoun  is  governed  by  a  pronominal 
verb  ;  as  - 

You  may  trust  me,         Vous  j)ouvez  vousfier  1  Moi. 

(3)  When  the  verb  governs  several  pronouns  in  the 
same  case  ;  as  - 

I  speak  to  you  and  to  bim,  Je  parte  A  vous  et  X  lui. 

They  have  invited  me,  you,         Oti  a  invito  moi,  toi  et  nos  amis. 
and  our  friends, 

(4)  When  the  verb  is  in  the  imperative  mood  with- 
out a  negation  ;  as  -^ 

Give  me,  Donnez-KOl.         Give  him,  Lonnez-hvi. 

Give  it  to  me,  Z>onnez-LE-MOi,    Give  it  to  him,  Z)o?»ie2-LE-LUl. 

OsspEVE. — Pronouns  used  with  the  imperative  mood 
without  a  negation,  must  be  translated  as  in  Rule  38. 


1  If  there  are  two  imperatives  united  by  et  or  ou,  the  pronoun  may  be 
piticed  before  the  second,  as  in  tliia  line  of  BoHkhu— Polissez-lt  sans  cesse  «(  U 
repolitset. 


OP   III£   PBOKOCN.  15 


Order  of  Personal  Pronouns  when  placed  before  the 
Verb. 

Rule  35. — When  two  personal  pronouns  to  be  placed 
before  the  verb  are  governed  by  the  same  verb,  they 
stand  in  the  follo\ving  order :  — 

Mk  le,      it  to  me.  Nous  lb,      it  to  ns. 

Me  les,     them  to  me.  Nous  les,     them  to  na. 

Te  le,        it  to  thee.  Vous  lb,      it  to  you. 

Te  les,      them  to  thee.  Vous  les,     them  to  yoa. 

Le  lui,     it  to  him,  to  her.         Le  leur,      it  to  them. 
Les  lui,   them  to  bim,  to  her.     Lss  leur,    them  to  them. 

As- 

He  will  grant  it  to  us,  II  NOUS  'L^accordera. 

I  bad  not  asked  it  of  (to)  you,  Je  ne  vous  V avals  pas  demandt. 

He  has  not  promised  Ihtiii  to  II  ne  les  leur  a  pas  promis. 
them. 

Observe. — (1)  Htm  to  me,  him  to  thee,  etc.,  are  trans- 
lated the  same  as  it  to  me,  it  to  thee,  etc — If  the  pro- 
noun it  has  to  be  put  in  the  feminine  in  French,  it  be- 
comes la  ;  aa  me  la,  te  la,  nous  la,  etc. 

(2)  When  two  pronouns  have  to  be  placed  before  the 
verb,  the  pronoun  representing  a  person  stands  first,  if 
it  is  the  1st  or  2nd  persons  (as  tne,  te,  nous,  vous)  ;  and 
last  if  it  is  the  tliird  (as,  lui,  leur).^ 

RvLE  36. — When  the  adverb  y  (there)  is  used  con- 
jointly with  the  above  pronouns,  it  comes  after  them ; 
as- 

I  will  carry  them  to  you  there,     Je  vous  les  t  porterai. 

Rule  37. — En  (some,  of  it,  of  them)  used  with  any 
pronoun  or  with  i/,  comes  after  them  ;  as  - 

He  will  give  some  to  Jam,        II  lui  en  donnera, 
I  saw  three  there,  J'y  en  ui  tnt  trois. 

1  In  the  rare  cases  when  we  have  to  translate  mt  to  thee,  to  him,  to  her,  to 
fou,  to  them,  or  thee  to  me,  to  him,  to  her,  to  us,  to  them,  etc..  we  place  the  direct 
object  beiure  the  verb,  and  the  indirect  after  ;  ms,  you  have  not  yet  introduced 
na  to  them,  Vous  ne  kous  avex  p<u  encore  presents  A  kdx 


16  OF   THE  PEONOUIf. 


Order  of  Personal  Pronouns  when  placed    after  the 
Verb   (Imperative  Mood.) 

Rule  38. — When  the  verb  is  in  the  imperative  mood 
affirmative,  the  personal  pronouns  are  translated  and 
disposed  as  follows:  - 

Give  it  to  ine,  Z)oranez-LE-MOl.* 

Give  them  to  me,  i)o«ne2-LES-Mor. 

Give  it  to  us,  Donnez-iM-TSOu^. 

Give  them  to  aa,  Donnez-JSES-'SOVS. 

Give  it  to  him,  to  her,  Z)oww«2-le-lui. 

Give  them  to  hira,  to  her,  Domiez-i^KS-xxsi. 

Give  it  to  them,  Z)o««f'2-LE-LEtJR, 

Give  them  to  them,  Z>o»7iez-LES-LBDB. 

BuiiE  39. — The  same  with  en:  - 

Give  some  to  me,  Donnez-tiC'ES. 

Give  some  to  him,  to  her,  Donnezi.vi-v.'s. 

Give  some  to  U3,  ZJonnez-NousKir. 

Give  some  to  them,  X^onnez-LsaK-Eif. 

Rule  40. — The  same  with  t:  - 

Carry  me  there,  Portez-Y-viOl, 

Carry  him  there,  Portez-Y-hJt. 

Carry  us  there,  PorCez-aovs-Y. 

Carry  tliem  there,  Por<e2-Y-LES. 

Observe. — T  used  with  moi,  toi,  le,  la,  and  le$,  pre- 
cedes them  by  exception,  for  the  sake  of  euphony. 


En  and  Y. 

Rttle  41. — En  is  sometimes  a  pronoun,  sometimes  a 
preposition  (Rules  97  and  98).  AVhen  a  pronoun,  it 
means  of  him,  of  her,  of  it,  of  them,  some,  any,  sutne  of  it, 


1  The  same  for  him  to  me,  her  to  me,  etc.,  us,  Seixl  her  to  me,  envovez-f%- 
moi;  send  her  to  us  envoyez-la-nous;  bend  htr  to  bim,  envoy et-la-lui;  sead 
her  to  them,  envoyeg-la-Uur,  etc. 


OP  THE    PEONOXUJ.  17 

tome  of  them,  hence,  thence,  for  that,  etc.    It  is  generally 
applied  to  things,  i)ut  sometimes  to  persons  also;  as-^ 

Have  they  spoken  of  my  mis-  A-t-on  parU  de  mon  malheurf 
fortune?    Yes,  they  have,  Oui,  on  EN  a  parl6. 

We  expect  nothing /rom  it,         Nous  n'EN  attendona  rien. 

I  complained  q/'/ier  yesterday,  Je  me  suis  plaint  d'ellk  hier, 
and  shall  again  to-day,  et  je  to'en  plaindrai  encort 

aujourd'hui. 

EtJLE  42. — "When  a  number  is  not  followed  by  the 
noun  to  which  it  refers,  the  French  generally  put  en 
before  the  verb;  as-^ 

Have  you  any  brothers?      Avez-vous  des/Hresf 
Yes,  I  have  one,  Oui,  /en  at  un, 

N.B.— See,  besides,  Rules  37  and  39. 

RtTLE  43. — Y  is  sometimes  a  pronoun,  sometimes  an 
adverb.  When  a  pronoun,  it  means  to  it,  to  them,  in 
speaking  of  things,  but  sometimes  it  is  also  applied  to 
persons;  as-^ 

Do  you  trust  that  man  !  Vous  fezvotis  A  cet  homme  t 

Yes,  I  do.  Oui,  je  m'v  fie. 

When  an  adverb,  t  means  in  it,  there,  thither,  here, 
whether  expressed  or  understood  in  English;  as- 

Ib  your  cousin  in  your  room?  Voire coudneest-elle dans votre 
She  was,  but  now  she  is  no  cJuimbre  ?  Elk  Y  6taU,  viais 
longer,  maintenant  elle  w'y  ait  plus. 

Observe. — There  (expressed  or  understood)  is  trans- 
lated by  LA,  when  pointing  to  a  place,  and  by  t,  when 
alluding  to  a  place  mentioned  before ;  as  - 

Do  you  see  that  house  ?  Voyez-vous  cette  maison-hkl 

I  lived  there  three  months,  J'y  ai  demeur4  trois  moia. 

N.B.— See,  besides,  Rules  36,  37,   and  40. 

1  En  and  y  apply  to  persons  (1)  to  avoid  the  repetition  of  <fe  /«i,  dTeZfe,  <r«Mr, 
feiles,  or  i  lui.  a  elle,  h  eux,  &  elies;  (2)  when  persons  are  spoken  of  vaguely. 

*  The  same  rule  applies  to  adverbs  of  quantity,  (combien,  beaucoup,  astet, 
etc.),  also  to  nouns  expressing  a  quantity,  (un  quart,  vne  moitie,  une  douzaint, 
*ne  tingtaine,  etc),  and  to  the  indefinite  pronouns  auctm  and  qmUqtitt-mu,  or 


18  07   THE   VROTHOXnX. 


The  Pronoun  soi. 


lluLE  44. — Soi  stands  for  (1)  a  noun  representing  a 
thing,  (2)  a  noun  of  person  used  in  a  vague  sense,  (3)  a 
^oun  of  person  used  in  a  determinate  sense  to  avoid  an 
equivoque;  as- 

Crime  brings  remorse  in  its  Le  crime  tratne  apria  soi  den 

train,  remords. 

Every  one  for  himself,  Chaoun  pour  soi. 

This  young  man,  while  obey-  Ce  jeune  homme,  en  obiissant 

ing  his  father,  is  working  a  son  pire,   travaille  pour 

for  himself,  soi. 


The  Pronoun  le  (so). 

Rule  45. — The  pronoun  le,  which  is  sometimes  ren- 
dered in  English  by  so,  and  generally  omitted,  may  re- 
late (1)  to  a  substuntive;  (2)  to  an  adjective;  or  (3) 
even  to  a  whole  sentence. 

(1)  When  it  represents  a  substantive,  or  an  adjective 
used  substantively,  it  agrees  in  gender  and  number ; 
as- 

Are  you  Mr.  Smith's  friends  ?  Etes-vous    les   amis    de    M. 

Yes,  we  are.  Smith?  Oui,  nous h^somnies. 

Are  you  the  sick  woman  they  Etes-vous  la  malade  dont  ila 

speak  of  ?    Yes,  I  am,  parlent  ?  Oui,  je  la  suis. 

(2)  When  it  represents  an  adjective,  or  a  substantive 
used  adjectively,  it  is  invariable;  as- 

Are  you  sick?     Yes,  we  are,     Etes-vous     malades?      Oui, 

nous  LE  sommes. 
Are  you   brothers  ?     No,  we    Etes-vous  fr^res  ?   Non,  nou^ 
are  not,  ne  le  sommes  pas. 

(3)  When  it  represents  a  whole  sentence,  it  is  invari- 
able ;  as  - 

Did  your  sister  go  to  the  ball    Mademoiselle  votre  sceur  est- 
yesterday  ?     I  do  not  know,         elle  alUe  au  bal  hier  f  Jene 

le  sais  pas 


OF   THE    PBONOUW.  19 

Possessive  Pronoiins. 
RiTLE  46. — Mine^  thine,  etc.,  after  the  verb  to  he,  are 
generally  expressed  by  d  vioi,  a  toi,  etc. ;  otherwise  they 
are  translated  by  le  mien,  les  tm'ens,  le  tien,  lea  tiens,  etc. ; 

03- 

Tbis  hat  is  mine,  Ce  chapeau  est  k  MOI. 

These  gloves  are  liera,  Ces  ganta  sont  1  elle. 

Where  did  you  see  mine  ?    Oil  avez-vouavu  les  miens? 

Rule  47. — The  possessive  pronouns  are  expressed  by 
mon,  ma,  mes,  ton,  ta,  tea,  etc.,  when  used  witii  of  after  a 
substantive;  as- 

A  friend  ofyoura,  Un  de  vos  amis. 

What  do  you  say  of  that  hat        Que  dites-vous  de  MON  cha>- 
of  mine?  peaitf^ 


Demonstrative  Pronouns. 

tfEST,    CE  SONT. 

Rule  48, — C^eat  or  ce  sont  are  used-* 

(1)  Before  a  substantive';  as- 

They  are  joiners,         Ck  sont  des  menuisiers. 

Obseeve. — Tliis  sentence  may  also  be  translated 
thus : — Ils  soxt  menuisiers  ;  but  then  menuisiers  is  used 
adjectively. 

(2)  Before  a  pronoun  ;  as  - 

It  is  I,  C'est  mol 

Is  it  you  ?  EsT-CE  vous  t 

It  is  mine,  C'est  a  mot,  or  c'est  le  mien. 

(3)  Before  a  superlative  of  things,  and  often  before  a 
■uperlative  of  persons ;  as  - 

This  is  the  best  of  my  hats,     C'ES'tlemeilleurde  mes  ehapeaux. 
Heis  the  bestlad  in  the  world,    C^  EST  lemeilleurgargondumonde, 

1  Somcrimea  we  jocosely  say  un  mien  ami,  un  tien  cousin,  tme  sienne  niict. 
This  familiar  expression,  however,  does  not  ai>ply  to  noire,  voire,  lew.— 
(Marietle.) 

2  When  c  tst  or  ce  sont  nmst  be  used,  put  ce  sont  before  a  third  person  plural 
only,  in  all  other  cases  use  c'est. 

*  liy  a  very  rare  exception,  il,  elle,  ils,  elles,  are  used  instead  of  c*  when 
emphasis  it  laid  upon  the  pronouns  he,  she.  it,  they.    Ex  — \lthough  adversity 


20  OF  THB   PKONOmr. 

(4)  When  the  impersonal  verb  it  w*  is  placed  before 
an  adjective  not  followed  by  the  idea  of  the  sentence ; 
as- 

-It  is  impossible,         C'est  impossible. 
It  is  true,  C'est  vrai,  or  (by  exception) 

U  est  vrai. 

Bnt  should  the  idea  foUow  the  adjective,  e^est  cannot 
be  used  ;  as  - 

It  is  glorious  to  die  for  one's    II  est  glorieuxde  mourirpom 
country,  son  pays. 

(6)  When  ce  qui  or  ce  que  begins  a  sentence,  e^est  or 
ee  soni  generally  begins  the  second  clause ;  as  ~ 

What  is  of    consequence    to  Ce    qui    importe    A  Vhomme, 

man,  is  to  fulfil  his  duty,  c'est  de  remplir  ses  devoirs. 

What  grieves  him  is  your  being  Ge  qui  Vafflige,  o'bst  que  vou» 

angry  with  him,  lui  en  voulez. 

(6)  Between  two  infinitives,  c'est  is  generally  used  for 
m;  as- 

Travelling  on  foot  is  travelling  like  Thales,  Plato,  and  Pytha- 
goras, 

Voyager  A  pied,  c'est  voyager  comme  Thalha,  Platon  et  Pyiha- 
gore. 

Where  there  is  a  will,  there  is       Vouloir,  o'est  pouvoir. 
a  way. 

Obseeve. — C'est  and  ce  sont  are  often  used  to  give 
more  energy  to  the  style.  Thus  the  sentence,  L'orgueil 
perdit  une  pwrtie  des  anges,  is  more  strongly  and  elegantly 
expressed  by  c'est  Vorgueil  qui  perdit  une  par  tie  des 


Is  an  erll,  it  Is  often  a  remedy  against  the  vices  of  prosperity,  Quoiqut 
Vadvertiti  toil  un  mal,  bllb  est  sowoent  un  rtmkdt  eontre  lei  vices  de  la  prot- 
pirite. 

1  Tlie  prononn  that  (and  it  standing  for  that)  is  also  rendered  by  ee  (or  ccte) 
before  ttre  and  dtfotr,  but  by  ee/a  only  before  any  otlier  verb ;  as  - 

Tliat  Is  useless,  C'est  inutile,  or  cela  est  inutile. 

Tf  yon  go  out  for  an  boor,  it  will  do  yon    iSt  vous  sortex  une  heure,  C£LA  vous/era 
good,  du  bitn. 


or   THE   PBONOUIT.  21 

anffen.     (Test  is  much  like  a  finger  pointing  to  the  prin- 
cipal word  of  the  sentence.* 

KuLE  49. — (1 )  In  asking  a  question  to  ascertain  some- 
thing, we  generally  use  est-ce  f  est-ee  ici  f  est-ce  Id  f 
as- 

Does  your  brother  say  that  ?       Est-ck  votrefrh-e  qui  dit  cela  ! 
Do  you  live  here?  Est-ce  ici  que  voiis  demeurezt 

[a  that  what  he  told  you  ?  B^t-CE  iA  ce  qu'U  voua  a  dit  t 

(2)  To  express  astonishment,  we  use  «st-c«  quo  ?  aa  - 

Do  yon  pretend  that  I  am  un-    E1st-ck  cue  voiis  pritendez  que 
well  ?  je  »uis  malade  ? 

Obskbve. — Est-ce  que  stands  for  is  it  possible,  or  is  it  a 
fact,  or  is  it  true  that,  etc.  Est-ce  que  votis  pretendez  que 
je  suis  malady  ?  means  Is  it  true  that  you  pretmd  that  1 
am  unwell,  or  You  do  not  pretend  thai  I  am  unwell,  do 
you  ? — All  sentences  having  this  last  fonn  (that  is,  a 
negative  proposition,  followed  by  Have  I?  Haveycv  ? 
Do  I?  Does  hef  Do  youY  etc.)  should  thus  be 
translated  by  est-ce  que  without  the  negation :  You 
won't  come,  will  you  ?  Est-ce  que  votis  viendrez  ?  He 
does  not  understand  what  I  tell  him,  does  he  ?  Est-ce 
qu'il  comprend  ce  queje  lui  dis  ? — It  follows  that  est-ce 
que  is  used  when  one  has  either  nearly,  or  altogether, 
made  up  his  opinion  on  the  subject  in  question,  and  only 
wants  that  opinion  to  be  confirmed. 

1  We  extract  from  Merlet'ii  "Dictionary  cf  Difficulties"  a  few  •entencei 
Uliutrating  tlie  preiedini;  obseiration:  — 

Tou  walk  to  London  to-inorrow,  Cut  voos  jut  allex  demain  &  Londrt*. 

You  tealk  to  London  to-morrow,  Cat  A  pied  que  vout  oIUm  demain  A 

Londret. 
Yoa  walk  to  London  to-morrow,  Cest  A  Loxdeks  que  vout  allet  demain. 

Yon  wallc  to  London  to-morrow,  Cttt  dkxaih  qtit  vota  aOet  a  l/mdrtt. 

Tbe  same  rule  applies  to  the  InterrogatiTe:  — 

Do  yon  walk  to  London  to-morrow  t    Est-cb  qui  vom  aUet  dtmain  it  Im*> 

drul 
Do  you  walk  to  London  to-morrow  ?    Ett-ce  vocs  qm  allez  demain  a  Londre** 
Do  you  tealk  to  London  to-morrow  T    Ett-ce  A  pied  que  vout  alltt  demain  k_ 

Londret  t 
Do  yoa  walk  to  London  to-morrow  f     Ett-ce  A  Lokpbes  que  vout  allet  demain  t 
Do  Ton  walk  to  London  to-morroHt    Ett-ce  dbkai.s  que  vout  alUt  a  Londret  f 
3  C 


22  or  THE   PEONOim. 

(3)  To  call  the  testiinony  of  another  in  support  of 
our  own  opinion,  rCest-ce  pas  f  or  iCent-ce  pas  que  f  as  - 

!/'at  Vair  bkn  pdle,  n'est-ce  pas  ? 
or  n'est-ce  pas  que  fai  Pair 
bien  jxcle  P 

Obsekve. — N^est-ce  pas  que  stands  for  is  it  not  true 
that,  etc.  IPest-ce  pas  que  fai  Vair  bien  pdle  ?  means 
Is  it  not  true  that  I  look  very  pale  ? — Wlion  the  form  of 
a  principal  proposition,  altliough  affirmative,  implies 
thus  an  interrogative  idea,  and  that  idea  is  summed  up 
by  the  following  expressions:  Save  I  not?  Is  if  not  ? 
Are  you  not  ?  Do  I  not  ? — and  such  like,  they  are  all 
rendered  hy  n^est-cepas  que,  as  in  the  preceding  example, 
or  by  est-ce  que  with  a  negative  verb;  as,  Ed-ee  queje 
rCai  pas  Vair  malade  ?  You  will  come,  will  you  not  ? 
N^ est-ce  pas  que  vous  viendrez?  or,  Est-ce  que  vous  nevien- 
drez  pas  ?  He  understands  what  I  say,  does  he  not  ? 
N'est-ce  pas  quHl  comprend  ce  queje  dis?  or,  Est-ce  qu'il 
ne  comprend poi  ce  queje  dis  ? 


Interrogative  and  Relative  Pronouns. 

WHO  ?      WHAT  ?      WHICH  ? 

Rule  50. —  Wlio,  used  interrogatively,  is  very  often 
rendered  by  qui  est-ce  qui  (when  subject),  and  qui  est-ce 
yi^  (when  object);  as- 

IVho  will  come  with  me  ?        Qui  est-CB  qui  veut  vcnir  avec 

mot? 
Wlwm  did  I  insult  ?  Qui  est-ce  que /ai  insulU  ? 

Observe. —  Qui  est-ce  qui  and  qui  est-ce  que  only  apply 
to  persons. 

RuleSI.— (1)  The  pronoun  what,  used  interroga- 
tively, is  very  often  rendered  by  qu'est-ce  qui  (when 
subject),  and  qu' est-ce  que  (when  object);  as- 

Wliat  has  prevented  him  from    Qu'est-ce  qui  Va  cmpiclii  dt 

coming?  venir? 

^F/ta<  do  j'ou  mean ?  Qu'est-ce    que   v(us  voulez 

dire  ? 


OF   THE   PEONOUK.  23 

(2)  If  the  verb  following  the  interrogative  what 
should  reqiiire  the  preposition  a  or  de,  what  must  be 
translated  by  quoi  Avith  d.  or  de  before  it ;  as  - 

What  are  you  tbiiiking  of?  A  QOOi  paisez-vous  f 

What  are  yox;  meddling  with  ?    De  quoi  vous  mSlez-voua  t 

(3)  What,  used  interrogatively,  is  also  translated, 
when  object,  by  que,  Avith  de  before  the  following  adjec- 
tive, if  there  is  one  ;  as  - 

What  are  the  news  !        Que  dit-on  db  nouveau  f 

(4)  When  suhjed,  and  placed  before  an  adjective, 
v}hat  may  be  translated  by  quoi  with  (?e  before  the  adjec- 
tive ;.  as  -^ 

What  is  more  amiable  than  an     Quoi   de  pltis  aimable  qu'un 
industrious  child  ?  evfant  laborieitx  ? 

Obseeve. —  Qu^est-ce  qui,  qu'est-ce  que,  que  and  qitoi, 
apply  to  things  only. 

Rule  52. —  Which  followed  by  of  is  translated  by 
leqtiel,  laquelle,  lesquels,  lesqtceEes ;  as  - 

Which  o/"  these  books  do  you      Lequel  de  ces  livrea  ■pr^f^ez- 
prefer  ?  vous  ? 

Rule  53. —  Wliich,  after  a  preposition,  often  means 
where,  and  is  translated  by  oil,  d'ou,  par  oil,  etc. ;  in 
other  cases,  translate  it  by  lequel,  laquelle,  etc. ;  as  - 

Name  the townmir/ticAhe  was  Nommez  hi>  vUU  ot  il  est  n6. 

born, 

That  is  the  bridge  aZon^  wAtcA  Voild  lepont  par  ou  nous  a- 

we  passed,  vons  pass4. 

Drunkenness  is  the  most  shame-  L'ivresse  est  Vital  leplushon- 

ful    state  in  which  a  man  teux      dans      lequel     u» 

can  fall,  homme  puisse  iomber. 

Rule  64. —  Whose,  of  tchom,  of  which,  may  be  ex- 
pressed by  dont  for  both  genders  and  numbers  ;  as  - 

The  gentleman  whose  wife  you    Le  monsieur  dont  vous  venez  de 
have  justseen,  is  very  clever,        voir  lafemme  est  tris-hahile. 

1  Observe  that  this  way  is  used  as  an  exclamation,  rattier  tlian  a*  an 
interrocatlon. 


24  OF  THE   PEONOmr. 

Rule  55. — The  relative  pronoun  and  the  conjunction 
that,  often  understood  in  English,  must  always  be  ex- 
pressed in  French ;  as  - 

The  watch  I  have  bought  is      La  montre  avufai  achetie  iu 

good  for  nothing,  vaut  rien. 

Do  you  thiok  lie  will  come  ?    Pensez-vous  Qu'ti  vienne  f 

Rule  56. — A  relative  pronoun  must  always  be  placed 
immediately  after  the  noun  to  which  it  relates ;  as  - 

I  bought  a  book  yesterday,       J'ai  acheU  hier  UN  LIVBK  QUI 
which  is  very  interesting,  est  trisinUressant. 


Indefinite  Pronouns. 

ON. 

Rule  57. — The  pronouns  we,  you,  they,  ona,  and  the 
word  people,  used  indefinitely,  are  translated  by  oir, 
which  must  be  repeated  before  each  verb  ;  as  - 

We  do  not  always  do  what  we    On  ne  fait  pas    tovjour$    oe 

ought  to  do,  ,  gii'ON  doit /aire. 

They  say,  On  dU. 

Rule  58. — The  passive  voice  is  considered  in  French 
as  rather  heavy  ;  when  a  passive  sentence  can  be  turned 
into  an  active  one,  with  on  for  subject,  it  must  be  done  ; 
as- 
Some  books  have  been  given      On  leur  a  donn6  dea  livres. 
them. 

Observe. — On  often  becomes  Fon  for  the  sake  of 
euphony  after  ef,  si,  ou,  qui,  que,  except  when  followed 
by  a  word  beginning  with  an  /  ;  as  - 

Si  l'on  me  voit.         Si  on  le  voit. 

N.B. — See,  besides,  for  the  translation  of  passive 
verbs,  Rules  66  and  67. 

PEESONNE. 

Rule  59. — ^Peksonne,  an  indefinite  pronoun,  is  used 
without  article  or  adjective ;  then  it  means  nobody  or 
anybody,  and  is  masculine  ;  as  - 
There  is  nobody  but  is  vexed    II  n'y  a  pbrsonnb  qui  n'en  aoit 

at  it,  FA.CHE. 


or  THE  PEONOTTW.  •  25 

PEESoinrE,  a  substantive,  is  always  accompanied  by 
an  article  or  adjective  ;  then  it  means  a  person,  and  is 
feminuie;  as- 

There  is  not  one  person  who  is  II  n'y  a  pas  one  personkk 
not  vexed  at  it,  qui  n'en  soil  facuek. 

Rule  60. — Chacttn,  preceded  by  a  word  in  the  plural, 
requii-es  after  it  sometimes  son,  sa,  ses,  sometimes  leur, 
lews. 

(1)  It  requires  son,  sa,  ses,  when  there  is  no  direct 
object,  or  when  chacun  comes  after  it;  as- 

They  brought  oiFeriugs  into  lis  ont  apport4  des  offrandes 
the  temple,  each  according  au  temple,  CHACUN  selon  SBS 
to  his  means,  moyens. 

(2)  It  requires  leur,  leurs,  when  CHACUir  precedes  the 
direct  object;  as- 

Each  gave  his  advice,      Us  ont  donni  CHACvy  leub  ayu. 
L'uif  l'axjtee — l'uw  et  l'atjtee. 

E.TJLE  61. — L'rN  L'AtrrRE  {one  another)  implies  recipro- 
city,^ and  is  different  from  l'tjn  et  l'aittee  {both).  The 
reciprocity,  when  there  are  more  than  two  persons  or 
two  things,  is  expressed  by  les  uns  les  autres ;  as  - 

The  king  and  the  emperor  fear    Le  rot  et  Pempereur  se  crai- 

each  other,  gnent  l'un  l'autrk. 

The  soldiers  excite  each  other,     Les  soldats  s'excitent  les  uns 

LES  autkes. 
Both  came  to  my  honse,  h'vN  et  l' autre  vinretU  chez 

moL 


THE  VERB. 

The  A^eement  of  Verbs  having  several   Subjects. 

Rule  62. — If  a  verb  has  several  nouns  or  pronouns 
for  subjects,  it  agrees  with  all  of  them,  except  in  the 
three  following  cases,  when  it  agrees  only  with  the  last 
one;- 

1  See  Rule  Rfl 


26  OF  THE  VE&B. 

(1)  When  the  subjects  are  synonymous  and  not  united 
by  and  (see  Rule  14);  as- 

At  all  ages  the  love  of  labour,  Dans  tons  les  dges,  Vamour  du 
a  taste  for  study,  is  a  bless-  travail,  h  goM  de  Vititde, 
ing,  '  EST  un  bien. 

(2)  "When  they  are  placed  according  to  the  gradation 
of  ideas;  as- 

A  single  word,  a  pleasant  smile,  Une  seule  parole,  un  sourire 
a  look,  is  suflScient,  gracieux,  UN  beqard  sof- 

fit. 

(3)  When  the  last  subject  contains  in  itseK  all  the 
preceding  ones;  as- 

Remorse,  fear,  danger,  nothing  Bernards,  crainte,  p6ril,  kibh 
restrained  me,  ne  m'A  retenu. 

Rule  63. — When  the  different  subjects  of  the  same 
verb  are  united  by  ou  or  ni,  the  verb  is  put  in  the  plural, 
if  the  action  relates  to  all  the  subjects;  in  the  singular, 
if  it  refers  to  only  one ;  as  - 

Luck  or  rashness  may  have  Le  bonJieur  ou  la  t4m4rit4  OUT 

made  heroes,  pufaire  des  hdros. 

His  ruin  or  his  safety  depends  Sa  perie  ou  son  salut  depend 

on  his  answer,  de  sa  r4ponse. 

Neither  the  sun  nor  death  can  Le  soleil  ni  la  viort  ne  pbuvent 

be  steadily  regarded,  se  regarder  Jixement. 

Neither  George    uor  Charles  Ni  Georges  ni  Charles  n'AURA 

will  get  the  prize,  le  prix. 

Obseeve. — (1)  If  the  subjects  united  by  ou  are  of 
different  persons,  the  verb  is  put  in  the  plural,  and  agrees 
with  the  principal  person ;  as  - 

You  or  he  will  go  to  the  coun-  Vmis  ou  lui  vous  irez  d  la 
try,  campagne. 

(2)  If  the  subjects  are  united  by  ni,  and  if  one  at  least 
is  a  pronoun,  the  resuming  pronouns  notta  and  vous  can- 
not be  used ;  as  - 

Ni  vous  ni  lui  nHrez  d  la  campagne. 


The  Place  of  the  Subject. 
RiTLE  64. — The  subject  is  generally  placed  before  the 
verb. 


Ot  THE  TKHB.  27 

Exceptions. — (1)  When  the  verb  is  used  as  a  paren- 
thesis ;  as  - 

Go  away,  said  he,         Allez-vous-en,  dit-iu 

(2)  When  the  verb  ia  preceded  by  an  interrogative 
word — qui  ?  que  f  ou  ?  quand  ?  comment  ?  eombien  f  etc. ; 
as- 

What  are  these  children  doing  T  Que  font  ces  enfants  ? 

Where  are  these  shepherds  going!  Oil  vont  CKS  bergers  ? 

When  will  your  father  coine  Quand  reviendra  M.  V0TR8 

back  ?  PERE  ? 

(3)  In  a  subordinate  sentence,  beginning  by  que,  dont, 
comme,  ainsi  que,  lorsque,  quand,  or  o^,  or  generally, 
when  the  subject  cannot  be  placed  before  the  verb  with- 
out suspending  the  sense  of  the  sentence  too  long ; 
as- 

Here  is  the  picture  of  which  my  Void  le  tableau  dont  vous  a 

mother  has  spoken  to  you,  parl6  ma  mere. 

All  was  done  when  your  father  Tout  itait  Jini  quand  arriva 

arrived,  votre  pere. 

What  is  the  matter  with  your  Qu'est-ce  qu'a  votke  maman  ! 
mamma  ? 

Observe. — This  construction  is  necessary  in  the  last 
example,  as  the  verb  a,  falling  so  sliort  at  the  end  of  the 
sentence,  would  sound  very  badly  to  a  French  ear. 

(4)  When  the  sentence  begins  with  tel  or  ainsi;  as- 

Sach  was  the  way  be  set  aboafc    Telle  vot  la  mani&re  dont  U 

it,  «'j/  2^r  j<. 

Thus  ends  the  story,  Ainsi  finit  rhistoire. 

Rule  65. — When  the  verb  is  preceded  by  aussi  (there- 
fore), encore  (yet),  peut-etre  (perhaps),  a  peine  (scarcely), 
en  vain  (vainly),  au  moins  (at  least),  the  subject,  if  a 
pronoun,  is  placed  after ;  as  - 

Therefore  I  don't  believe  yon,     Aiissi  ne  vous  crois-J^  pas. 
Scarcely  had  he  arrived  when    A  peine  fut-ih  arriv6  qu^il 
he  fell  ill,  tomha  malade. 


Passive  Verbs. 
RtTLE  6G. — It  has  been  said  (Rule  58)  that  the  passive 


28  OF   THE   VE^B. 

voice  Is  seldom  used  in  French,  and  that,  whenever  it 

can  be  turned  into  the  active  fcrm  with  the  indefinite 

pronoun  o?»  for  subject,  it  must  be  done. 

If  the  expression  is  not  indefinite,  turn  the  verb  into 

the  active  voice,  making  the  agent  of  the  passive  verb 

the  subject  of  the  active  ;  as  — 

He  has  been  abandoned  by  his    Sbs  amis  I'ont  ahandonnf. 
friends, 

Rule  67. — The  passive  voice  is  also  elegantly  ren- 
dered in  French  by  the  pronominal  form,  in  speaking  of 
inanimate  objects  ;  as  — 

That  lace  is  sold  very  cheap,       Cette  dentelle  ss  vend  a  tria- 

bon  march€. 

Pronominal  Verbs. 

Rule  68. — Pronominal  verbs  are  those  conjugated 
with  two  pronouns  of  the  same  person  —  je  me,  tu  le,  U 
»€,  nous  nous,  vous  vous,  ils  se. 

There  are  two  kinds  of  pronominal  verbs  :  — 

(1)  Reflective  verbs,  that  is,  verbs  expressing  an  action 
reflected  upon  him  who  does  it ;  as  — 

They  are  washing  themselves,     Ils  se  la  vent. 

(2)  Reciprocal  verbs,  that  is,  verbs  expressing  an  action 

reciprocated  between  two  or  more  subjects  ;  as  — ^ 

They  flatter  each  other,        Ils  se  flattent  l'on  l'actbb. 
They  fought  for  an  hour,     Ils    se    sont    battus  pendtmt 
une  heure.^ 

1  With  reclpi  ocflJ  verb*  we  add  Pun  Tautre.  Ics  uns  Us  autres,  etc.,  whpn  we 
want  to  avoid  fln  equivoque.  lU  se  flattent  may  mean  either  lltey  flutter  tliem- 
telvfs,  or,  tliey  flatter  each  other. 

>  Compare  the  following  constructions  of  reflective  and  reciprocal  verbs  :— 

(1)  They  linrt  tliemselvea,  Us  se  blessertt. 

(2)  They  hurt  tliemseltei  (with  emphasis  or  contradistinction),  tbM  Neisent 
eux-riieinei 

(3)  Tliiy  hurt  each  other,  iU  u  Messent  tun  Fautre,  or  (If  more  than  two) 
let  uns  let  autres. 

Observe  also  that.  If  a  preposition  precede  each  of  er  or  one  another  in  Eng- 
lish, It  must,  in  French,  be  placed  between  run  »nd  i'uuire,  or  Ics  uns  and  Its 
mulres;  hs— Tliey  have  I'oncht  against  euch  other,  tit  se  sont  iMxttui  Pun  eoir- 
•m  P autre,  not  conlre  Pun  Pautre.—  fJUwutteJ 


or   THX    YEBS.  29 

The  Past  Tenses. 

Rttlb  69.^ — To  express  the  past  tenses,  Ispole,  T  was 
'i;nHikmg,  I  used  to  speak,  I  did  speak,  the  French  have 
three  ways — 1st.  The  imperfect;  2nd.  ^Yie preterite  or 
past  definite;  3rd.  The  preterite  indefinite,  or  com2)ound 
tense. 

Ist.  The  Imperfect  (je  pabxais). 

The  imperfect,  which  is  also  called  the  descriptive 
tense,  is  used  only  in  two  cases :  - 

(1)  To  express  a  state  or  an  action  which  waa  habi- 
tual ;  as  - 

When  I  was  young  I  lUced  to    Quand  f4tais  jeune,  j'aihais  d 
play,  jouer. 

(2)  To  express  a  state  or  an  action  going  on  at  the 
time  when  another  action  took  place  ;  as  - 

It  was  raining  when  I  went  out,  II  plectvait  quand  je  suis  sorti. 

Obsebve. — The  use  of  the  imperfect  may  be  simply 
reduced  to  these  two  cases: — (1)  When  the  English 
tense  may  be  tm-ned  into  used  to.  (2)  When  it  can  be 
turned  into  the  present  participle  with  /  was,  thou  wast, 
he  was,  etc. 

2nd.  The  Preterite  Definite  (je  paelai). 

The  preterite  definite  can  onlt/  be  used  to  express  fa 
action  which  took  place  in  a  tims  quite  past,  as  last  year, 
fust  month,  last  iceek,  yesterday  ;  as  -^ 

I  received  a  letter  from  my    Je  REyus  hier  une  lettre  de  mon 
father  yesterday,  ph-e. 

1  Tlic  most  simple  way  to  apply  this  IJuleln  every  day  practice  Is  this: — 

Wlicii  yon  have  to  traiislatc  an  Knglisli  past  tense  into  French,  try  first 
if  It  may  be  cliangcd  into  usfd  to,  or  into  the  present  participle  with  /  aas, 
Otou  wast,  h*  va%.  etc.  If  citlicr  of  these  two  thanees  may  bo  made,  nse  the 
Imperfect;  if  neither  can  be  made,  the  impeifect  cannot  be  used. 

It  then  remains  to  sec  wlicilicr  tlic  EnKli^i  past  tense  is  part  of  a  historical 
narration,  or  of  a  familiar  conversation.  In  the  first  case,  use  tlie  preterits 
definite  ;  in  tlie  second,  the  preterite  indffiinte. 

*  The  present  is  often  used  instead  of  tlie  p)W*n<«  to  Rive  more  animation  to 
■  narrative  In  tliis  case,  all  liie  verbs  in  the  sentence  must  be  put  in  the 
prestnl;  as  — On  chehcTie  'Vatel;  on  coruT  a  sa  c/iambre;  on  hbdbtb;  on 
BHFONCE  sa  porte;  on  le  ticocve  noye  Jans  son  sang. 


80  or  XBB   V££B. 

But,  generally,  the  preterite  definite,  -which  is  also 
called  the  historical  tense,  is  replaced  in  familiar  conver- 
eation  by  the  following  tense  - 

3rd.  The  Preterite  Indefinite  (j'ai  PAStfe). 

The  preterite  indefinite  is  used  to  express  an  action 
which  took  place  in  a  time  either  quite  past  or  not  yet 
quite  past ;  as  last  year  or  this  year,  last  month  or  this 
month,  last  week  or  this  wetk,  yesterday,  this  morning ; 
aa- 

J'ai  REyu  une  lettre  de  mon  ph'e  Fannie  demih-e,  U  mois  der- 
nier, ce  7nois-ci,  hie,;  ce  matin. 

Obseete. — It  follows  that,  when  the  English  past 
tense  cannot  be  translated  by  the  French  imperfect,  it 
must  generally  be  rendered  in  historical  narrations  by 
the  preterite  definite,  in  familiar  conversation  by  the 
preterite  indefinite.^ 


The  Futtire  and  the  Conditional. 

Rule  70. — The  future  mA.  the  conditional  are  never 
used  in  French  after  si  beginning  a  sentence  or  a  clause 
of  a  sentence ;  we  then  use  the  present  instead  of  the 
future,  and  the  imperfect  instead  of  the  conditional ;  as  - 

If  you  wUl  come,  1  will  tell  you  it,     Si  i;ows  venez,  je  vous  le  dirai. 
If  you  wotdd  come,  I  would  tell    Si  vuua  veniez,  je  vous  le 
you  it,  dirais. 

Obseeve. — If  SI,  instead  of  beginning  a  sentence  or 

1  When  reading  an  account  of  a  man's  life,  the  student  will  often  meet  with 
the  preterite  used  to  mention  actions  that  must  have  been  done  frequently, 
and  even  habitually,  and  which,  therefore,  according  to  the  given  rules,  ouglit 
to  be  In  the  imperfect;  but,  in  such  a  case,  he  will  perceive  that  the  author 
does  not  Intend,  by  so  doing,  to  describe  or  delineate  these  actions  in  particu- 
lar, but  that  be  merely  enumerates  them, ..as  being  the  result  of  Uabitaal 
actions;  as— 

Socrate  appkit  it  tt»  compatriotes  a  raisonner  sw  rimmortalite  de  Vdrnt:  tl 
KfiLssiT  d  leur  donner  da  idees  sublimes  d'un  liieu  createur  de  fvnivers. 

Apphit  expresses  an  action  that  must  have  occurred  several  times;  bat 
here,  this  word,  as  well  a<<  k^cssit,  is  taken  for  the  retult  of  the  iustructioo 
giveu  by  Socrates  —(ilerlet.) 


OF   THE   TE&B.  31 

a  clause  of  a  seutence,  is  brought  in  by  a  preceding  verb, 
the  future  and  the  conditional  may  then  be  used  ;  aa  - 

I  do  not  know  whether  he  will    Je  ne  saia  s'il  viendra. 

come, 
I  did  not  know  whether  he    /«  ne  savais  s'lL  vieni>rait.* 

would  come. 

Rule  71. — If  the  future  is  meant  after  when,  as  soon 
as,  do  as,  it  will  be  as,  it  must  be  expressed  in  French  ; 
as- 

As  soon  as  it  is  dark,  we  shall  AussiTdT    qtt'il    fera  nvit, 

go  out,  nous  sorlirons. 

Shall  I  go  with  you  ?    As  you  Sortirai-je  avec  vous  ?  C!ommk 

liie,  iL  vous  plaira.* 

BrxE  72. — Instead  of  the  future,  the  French  often 
use  the  verb  aller,  when  the  action  is  to  be  done  imme- 
diately ;  as  - 

/  shall  go  out  (immediately),        Je  vais  sortol 

Rule  73. — When  will  and  would  may  be  changed 
into  to  he  willing,  or  to  wish,  translate  them  by  vouloir  ; 
when  should  may  be  changed  into  ought,  translate  it  by 
devoir,  using  the  present  if  the  duty  is  absolute,  and 
the  conditional  if  there  is  some  condition  expressed  or 
understood  ;  when  may,  might,  and  could,  are  not  pre- 
ceded by  anything  requiring  the  subjunctive,  translate 
them  by  pouvoir ;  aa  - 

He  xBovld  not  come  with  me,     II  n'A  pas  voulu  venir  avec 

moi. 
Children    should    obey    their    Les  en/ants  doivent  ob4ir  a 

J  la  rents,  leurs  parents. 

Tell  him  he  may  come  with  us,     D'Ues-lui  qu'il  peut  venhr  avec 

nous. 

1  The  way  to  ascertain  whether  ii  is  hrouRht  in  by  a  preceding  verb  or  not, 
is  to  try  to  put  it  in  the  beginning  o£  tlie  seiiience  by  means  of  an  inversion. 
If  it  can  be  put  in  llie  beginning,  then  tlie  future  and  the  conditional  cannot 
be  ni-ed  after  it.  "I  will  tell  you  it,  if  you  will  come,"  may  be  turned  into^ 
"If  you  will  come,  I  will  tell  yon  it."  Je  voiu  It  tUrai  ti  tout  tenez,  ot  m 
toui  retiez,  je  vouf  le  dirai.  But  if  the  inversion  cannot  take  place,  li 
is  certainly  bioiivl  t  in  l>y  a  preceding  verb.  Je  ne  sais  s'O  viendra  cannot 
be  turned  into  s'il  ciendraje  ne  saispas. 

s  This  Rule  and  the  preceding  one  may  be  expressed  In  <mt:  the  fiittir* 
must  always  be  expressed  in  French  when  the  idea  of  futurity  is  Implied, 
except  alter  ti  OcKinning  a  sentence  or  a  ciansc  of  a  sentence. 


82  OF  THB  rEKU. 

The  Subjunctive. 

Rttle  74. — Impersonal  verbs,  and  verbs  used  im per- 
sonally, require  the  following  verb  in  the  subjunctive 
mood;  as-- 

It  is  proper  for  him  to  come,       11  convknt  quHl  viexnb. 
It  is  right  that  that  should  be    II  est  juste  que  cela  se  fassk. 
done, 

Exceptions. — A  few  impersonal  verbs  expressing  cer- 
tainty or  probability,  such  as  II  y  a,  il  resuUe,  il  est  cer- 
tain, il  par  alt,  ilestvrai,  tl  est  probable — and  also  il  sem- 
ble  accompanied  by  a  pronoun — govern  the  indicative. 

RtTLB  75. — Yerbs  used  negatively  or  interrogatively 
govern  the  subjunctive;  as- 

I  do  not  believe  he  will  come,     Je  ne  crois  pas  quHl  viennk. 
Do  you  believe  he  will  come  ?     Groyez-vous  qu'il  vienne  ? 

Exception. — The  interrogative  verb  does  not  require 
the  subjunctive  when  the  speaker  has  no  doubt  of  the 
facts  mentioned  in  the  question;  as- 

Do  you  know  that  your  father  Savez-vous  que  votre  ptre  est 

is  unwell  ?  malade  ? 

Do  you  forget  that  Theseus  ia  Oubliezvous   que   Tk6s6e    est 

my  father  ?  mon  pire  ?     . 

Obseeve. — The  subjunctive  is  not  used  after  est-ce 
que?  n^ est-ce  pas  que?  qui  est-ce  qui?  qui  est-ce  que? 
qvHest-ce  qui?  qu^est-ce  que?  nor,  generally,  after  the 
verbs  savoir,  faire  savoir,  dire,  apprendre,  informer,  and 
such  like,  used  interrogatively. 

Rule  76. — Verbs  expressing  doubt,  will,  wish,  order, 
fear,  complaint,  joy,  sorrow,  surprise,  or  akt  emotion  of 
THE  MEND,^  govem  the  subjunctive;  as- 

I  wish  him  to  come,  Je  desire  quHl  vienne. 

He  will  have  you  to  do  your    II  veut  que  vous  passiez  votre 
duty,  devoir. 

1  Except  only  tspirtr.  Croire  and  peruer  do  not  express  an  emotion 
Bnd  require  the  iudicatire,  unless  used  interrogatively  or  negatively.  Tti* 
same  witli  xe  douter  (not  douter).  s'atUndre,  s'imaginer.  pr&umer  etc 


OF   IHB   VEBJS.  38 

Odseuvb. — The  six  verbs,  craindre,  avoir  peur,  trem- 
bler, ajjprehender,  prendre  garde,  and  empecher,  being 
followed  by  qm,  require  ne  before  tbe  subjunctive  if  the 
verb  be  affirmative ;  when  negative  or  interrogative,  ne  is 
suppressed  ;^  as  - 

I  am  afraid  he  will  do  it,  J^aipeur  qu'il  ne  lefasse. 

1  do  not  fear  that  be  will  Bcold    Je   ne    craim    pas    qu^U  me 
me,  gronde. 

Rule  77. — The  subjunctive  is  required  after  a  relative 
pronoun,  or  the  adverb  ou,  preceded  by  U  seul,  Vvniquc, 
le  premier,  le  dernier,  pas  un,  aucun,  nul,  personne,  rien, 
peu,  guere,  or  a  superlative  ;  as  - 

Wisdom  is  the  only  thing  the  La  sagesse  est  LA  seule  chose 

possession  of  which  is  certain,  dost  la  possessiori  son  cer- 

taine. 

There  are  few  men  who  know  II  y  a  peu  d'hommes  qui  sa- 

bow  to  bear  adversity,  chent  supporter  Uadvers'M. 

She  is  the  happiest  woman  I  C^est     la     plus     heuredsi 

know,  /emwte  QUBj'e  connaisse. 

Obseevb. — Should  the  second  verb  be  introduced 
into  the  sentence  by  a  genitive  plural,  the  indicative 
should  be  used,  as  there  would  not  be  then  any  doubt 
implied;  as- 

The  Paradise  Lost  is  the  best    Le  Paradis  Perdu  est  le  mieiut 
boundoftbebooksthatlhave,        re/i^  des  livres  que  j'al 

Rule  78. — When  a  relative  pronoun  preceded  by  its 
antecedent  is  placed  between  two  verbs,  the  second 
verb  is  put  in  the  subjunctive  ;  as- 

l  lAvise  yon  to  marry  a  woman    Je    vous    conseille    d'EPOUSEB 
who  knows  how  to  cook,  unb  femmb  qui  SACUEyatne 

la  cuisine. 

Rut  if  there  is  no  uncertainty  implied,  the  indicatiye 
must  be  used ;  as  - 

/  have  married  a  woman  who    J'ai  tvovsk  unb  temhb  qui 
knows  how  to  cook,  s  a  it /aire  la  cuisine. 

1  After  tmpecher  used  negatively,  ne  may  or  jbkj  not  be  used.— (iloeh 


34 


OP   THE    VEBB. 


Rule  79. — The  subjunctive  is  governed  by  the  follow- 
ing words:  Quelque — que,  quel  que,  quoique,  qui  que;  as- 


However  learned  he  may  be, 
Whatever  it  is, 
Whatever  you  say, 
Whoever  you  are,  stop, 

Rule  80. — (1)  The  following  conjunctions  govern  the 
subjunctive  :  - 


QcELQUE  savant  Qu'iL  soit. 

QUKL  QU'IL  SOIT. 
QUOI  QUB  VOUS  DISIBZ. 

Qui  que  tu  sois,  arrSte. 


not  that. 

far  from, 
provided, 
without. 
8ui)i)0se  that, 
whether. 

if... ever  so  little. 


afnque,  I  j^  order  that.      «^"  2«*' 

pour  que,  )  non  pas  que, 

avant  que,  before.  luin  que, 

au  cas  que,  )  j^  ^^^^        pourvu  que, 

en  cas  que,  \  sans  que, 

quoique,  J  suppose  que, 

bien  que,  >  although.  soil  que, 

encore  que,  )  pourpeuque, 

jusqu^d  ce  que,  until.  si  peu  que, 

(2)  The  thi'ce  following  conjunctions  req^uire  not  only 
the  subjunctive,  but  also  ne  before  it :  - 
d  moins  que,  unless. 

de  crainte  que,        for  fear. 
de  peur  que,  lest. 

(8)  The  four  conjunctions,  de  sorte  que,  en  sorte  que, 
telleriibnt  qm,  de  maniere  que,  all  meaning  so  that,  in  such 
a  way  as,  sometimes  govern  the  indicative,  and  some- 
times the  subjunctive ;  the  indicative,  when  there  is  no 
uncertainty  implied ;  the  subj  iinctive,  when  there  is ; 
as- 


He  behaved  in  such  a  way  aa 

to  merit  the  esteem  of  all 

honest  men, 
Behave  in  such  a  way  as  to 

merit    the     esteem    of    all 

honest  people. 


II  s'est  conduit  de  telle  maniere 
Qu'iL  s'est  attire  Veslime 
de  tous  les  honnete.s  gens. 

Conduisez-vous    de    maniere 

QUE  VOUS  VOUSATTIRIEZZ'es- 

timedetous  les  honnetes  gens. 


(4)  The  conjunction  que   governs  the   subjunctive 
only  when  it  stands  for  a  conjunction  requiring  the 
subjunctive  (Rule  101)  or  for  si  ;  as- 
I  will  not  set  oat  till  he  comes, 


If  be  comes,  and  should  I  not 
be  at  home,  send  for  my 
brother, 


Je  ne  partirai   pas  Qv'il  ne 

VIENNE. 

S'il  vicnt,  et  que  je  ne  sois 
pas  A  la  maison,  /aites 
venir  mon/rire. 


Oif  XnE  VERB.  86 

(5)  The  conjunction  si  does  not  govern  the  subjunc- 
tive, but  the  subjunctive  is  used  in  the  subordinate 
clause  depending  on  si,  if  there  is  a  doubt  in  the  speaker's 
mind  as  to  the  fact  mentioned;  as  - 

Had  I  known  that  things  would  Si  f  avals  su  que  lea  choses  SB 

havetakeu  that  turn,  I  would  PASSASSiSNT  ainsi,  faurais 

have  taken  my  measures  ac-  pris  mes  mesures  en  con- 

cordingly,  s6quence. 

But  if  there  is  no  doubt  as  to  the  actuality  of  the 
thing  asserted,  the  indicative  is  used;  as- 

If  I  had  known  that  it  was  you,  ^t  f  avals  su  que  c^&TArr  vous, 
I  would  not  have  put  myself  jeneme  serais  pas  (Urang6. 
about, 

(6)  The  conjunction  d  condition  que  may  be  followed 
by  either  the  indicative  or  the  subjunctive;  as- 

I  give  you  this  money,  on  con-  Je  vous  donne  cet  argent,  d 
dition  that  you  will  leave  to-  condithn  que  vous  partikez 
morrow,  dtmain,  or  que  vous  partibz 

demain. 


Use  of  the  Tenses  of  the  Subjunctive. 

Rule  81. — If  the  first  verb  is  in  the  present  or  the 
future  of  the  indicative,  the  second  must  be  put  in  the 
present  of  the  subjunctive  to  express  a  present  or  futxire 
time;  in  the  compound,  to  express  the  past;  as- 

J    I    ter  '\  ^"*^  "'"**  ETUDiiEZ  maintenatU,  deinain. 


jI  dZ'^rai  \  ?"«  *^'  ^^^  ^^'^^^^  ^^»"- 


Exception. — If  the  subjunctive  is  followed  by  a  con- 
ditional expression,  the  imperfect  or  the  pluporfect  must  be 
used;  as- 

[  do  not  believe  that  he  would  Je  ne  croia  pas  quHl  vInt,  si 

come,  if  he  were  not  obliged,  or,  ne  Cy  /orgait. 

I  do  not  believe  he  would  have  Je  lie  crois  pas  qu'il  f&t  vknu, 

come  if   he   had   not   been  ij  on  ne  C y  a-miU  forcL 
obliged, 


36  OF  TnE  VERB. 

Rule  82. — If  the  first  verb  is  in  a  past  tense  or  the 
conditional,  the  second  must  be  put  in  the  imperfect  of 
the  subjunctive  to  express  the  present  or  the  future,  in 
ihQ  pluperfect  to  express  the  past;  as- 

Je  doutais^ 
Je  doutai 

Jai  aoute         \  qwv<m8is,TXiT>ikasis.zaiijourd^hui,  de-main. 

Je  douterais 
J'aurais  doui4 

Je  doutais 
Je  doutai 

A>^L  •^"il,  fA    \  ?"«  wiM  BussiEZ  iTVDit  Mer. 
J  avais  doute    [  ^ 

Je  douterais 

J'aurais  dout4 

Exception. — If  the  action  expressed  by  the  subjunc- 
tive is  contiauous,  the  present  must  be  used ;  as  - 

God  has  given  us  reason  in  Dieu  nous  a  donni  la  raison 
order  that  we  may  discern  afin  que  nous  disceknions 
the  good  from  the  evil,  le  Men  d'avec  le  mal. 

General  oBSEjiVATioN  on  the  use  of  the  subjunctivb 
MOOD. — When  the  subjunctive  mood  can  be  avoided  by 
putting  the  verb  in  the  infinitive,  as  in  the  following 
cases,  it  must  be  done,  because  the  frequent  use  of  the 
subjunctive  makes  the  style  heavy  and  diffuse :  - 

(1)  When  tvro  verbs  have  the  same  person  for  sub- 
ject, the  second  may  and  must  generally  be  put  in  the 
infinitive;  as- 

/  fear  /  will  arrive  too  late,        Je  crains  d'arriver  trop  tard. 
I  wish  /  were  in  your  place,        Je  voudrais  bien  etre  A  voire 

place. 

(2)  If  the  two  verbs  having  the  same  person  for 
subject  are  united  by  a  conjunction,  this  conjunction 
may  often  be  changed  into  a  preposition;  as- 

Come  to  see  me  before  you        Yenez  me  voir  avant  dk  lui 

write  to  him,  4crire. 

Every  power  is  weak  unless        Toute  puissance  est   faihle.  A 

united,  moins  qde  D'etre  wnie. — (La 

Fuutainu.) 


OF   THE   PAEHCUPLE.  37 

(8)  "WTicnit  is  clear  who  must  or  must  not  do  a  thing, 
the  pronoun  subject  of  must  is  not  translated,  and  the 
next  verb  is  put  in  the  infinitive  ;  as  - 

We  must   always  speak  the      Ilfaut  toujoura  dire  la  vMU. 

truth, 
You    must    not   break    this     Jl  ne/aut  pas  casser  ce  verre, 

glass, 

The  Infinitive. 
RrxE  83. — All  prepositions  govern  the  following  verb 
in  the  infinitive,  except  en,  which  requires  the  present 
pailiciple ;  as  - 

Of  seeing,  De  voir.  In  seeing,  A  voir. 

In  order  to  see,     Povr  voir.        Without  seeing,     Sans  voir. 
While  seeing  En  voyant. 

Rule  84. — When  two  verbs  come  together,  the  second 
is  put  in  the  infinitive,  unless  the  first  is  etre  or  avoir, 
which  require  the  past  paiiiciple  ;  as  - 

Let  us  know  how  to  conquer    Sadions  vaincrk  ou  sachona 
or  to  die,  hourir. 

E.ui£  85. — To  get  (or  to  have,  meaning  to  get  or  to 
eausej,  followed  by  a  past  participle,  is  translated  by 
faire,  wliich  requires  immediately  after  it,  in  the  infini- 
tive, the  English  participle  ;  as  - 

Oet  my  linen  ironed,  Faites  kepasser  mon  linge. 

I  am  going  to  have  a  new  dress    Je  vais  me  faire  faire  unt 
made,  robe  neuve. 

Obskrve. — This  very  important  rule  applies  to  anj 
expression  signifying  to  cause  ;  such  as  - 

Aak  the  gentleman  up  stairs,  that  1 
is  to  say,  Cause  tlte  gentleman  >  Faitbs  momtsb  monsieur, 
to  come  up  ataira,  ) 


THE  PARTICIPLE. 
The  Participle  Present. 
RtTLR  86. — Tho  participle  present,  which  is  an  essential 


38  OF   THE   PARTICIPLK. 

part  of  a  verb,  must  not  be  confounded  with  the  verbal 
adjective,  that  is,  an  adjective  derived  from  a  verb  (such 
as,  un  animal  ra7npant,  une  mere  prevoyante,  une  passion 
dominante.) 

The  participle  present  always  expresses  an  action,  and 
is  invariable ;  as  - 

Tliese  men,  foreseeingthedan-  Ces  hommes,  prevoyant  le 
ger,  put  themselves  od  their  dain/er,  se  mirent  sur  leurs 
guard,  gardes. 

The  verbal  adjective  always  expresses  a  quality  of  the 
noun  which  it  qualifies,  a  state,  a  manner  of  being,  and 
agrees  like  all  adjectives;  as- 

Thesefarsigbted  men  perceived  Ces  hommes  prAvoyants  t)H< 
the  danger,  aper<;u  le  danger. 

Rtrti;  87. — The  present  participle  is  seldom  used  in 
French,  When  it  can  be  avoided  by  changing  the 
English  participle  into  a  tense  of  the  indicative  with  qui, 
or  into  a  substantive,  or  by  giving  the  sentence  a  differ- 
ent turn,  it  must  be  done ;  as  - 
I  hear  your  father  cdUing  you,     J^entends  votre  pire  QtJi  voua 

APPELLE. 

Yonr  father  being  angry  with  La  colere  de  voire  p^re  contre 

me  is  the  cause  of  my  sad-  moi  est  la  caufe  de  ma  tris- 

ness,  tesse. 

My  Bcolding  of  you  is  of  no  II  ne  me  sert  de  rien  de  voua 

use,  gronder. 


The  Past  Participle. 

Rule  88. — The  past  participle,  used  without  an  auxi- 
liary verb,  or  with  the  auxiliary  verb  etre,  agrees,  like 
an  adjective,  with  the  noun  or  pronoun  to  which  it 
relates  ;  as  -  ^ 

Concealed  enmity  is  danger-     Les    ininf,iti4s    oach^gs    aoiU 

oiis,  dangereuses. 

Selfish  men  are  despised,  Les  igolstes  sont  MEPRisi». 

1  The  participles  atUndii,.excepU,  out,  passe,  suppose,  vtf,  non  eompris,  p 
eoti'pri-t,  are  invariable  wlicii  tliey  precede  the  noun  {avoir  is  then  under- 
itoc  ) ;  but  they  vjry  whi'n  they  come  after  (eire  is  then  understood) ;  as — 
Je  puis  tout  souffrir,  except*  Votrb  onLftRK;  Je  puis  t<mt  touffrir,  votri 

COLtoii  BXCEFTiB. 


OF   THE   PAKTICIPLE.  39 

ExcTTpnoN. — The  past  participles  oi  pronominal  verba 
being  conjugated  with  the  meaning  of  avoir,  though 
always  with  etre,  do  not  come  under  this  rule,  but  under 
the  following  one  (the  past  participle  conjugated  with 
avoir.) 

Rule  89. — The  past  participle  used  with  awtr  agrees, 
not  with  its  subject,  but  with  its  direct  object,  when  this 
object  is  placed  before  it;  as- 

Here  is  the  watch  I  bought,  Voici  la  mmUre  QVKfai  ache- 
tee. 

They  have  rejoiced  at  yonr  lis  se  sont  rejocis  de  voire 

happiness,  bonheur. 

They  have  shown  it  to  each  77  se  [.a  sont  hontr^e. 

other. 

How  many  books  have  yon  Cojicien  de  livres  avez-vous 

read  ?  LOS  ? 

Obsebve.  ^ — (1)  Past  participles  of  impersonal  verbs, 
or  verbs  used  impersonally,  are  invariable;  as- 

The  heat  which  we  had,     Les  chcUeurs  qu'il  a  fait. 

(2)  A  past  participle  between  two  qtie  is  invariable; 
as- 

The  answer  which  I  foresaw    La  riponse  que  f  avals  vvkva 
they  would  give  yon,  qv'on  vous  ferait. 

(3)  The  participle  preceded  by  l'  is  invariable,  when 
l'  represents  a  clause  of  a  sentence,  or  that,  or  so;  os- 

The  affair  is  more  important     Cette  affaire  est  plus  importante 
than  I  hatl  thought,  que  je  ne  \!avais  fensb. 

In  this  sentence,  l'  means  it  to  be. 

(4)  A  past  participle  having  en  for  its  apparent  <?t>tfc< 
object  is  invariable;  as- 

I  am  fond  of  flowers ;  I  have    J'aime  beaucoup  les Jleurs ;  fvx 
gathered  some,  at  cueilli. 

(5)  The  participles  ^M,  dA,  voulii,  are  invariable  when 
an  infinitive  is  understood  after  them ;  as  - 

I  have  rendered  him  all  the    Je  lui  ai  rendu  tous  les  servlcet 
services  that  I  could,  quefai  PD  (lui  rendre). 

1  These  ohfercationt  are  not  exceptioiu.  Their  oblect  U  merely  to  illus- 
trate tlie  mo»t  difficult  cue* 


40  OP   TILE   PAKTICIPLE. 

(6)  As  intransitive  verbs  can  have  no  direct  object, 
their  participles  used  with  flwotr  remain  invariable;' 
as- 

The  three  leagues  I  walked  this    Lea  troia  Ikuea  que  fai  fait 

morning,  ce  matin. 

The  hours  1  have  been  running,     Les  heures  que  fai  OOURU. 

(7)  A  past  participle  followed  by  an  infinitive  agrees 
when  the  preceding  pronoun  is  its  direct  object,  but  re- 
mains invariable  if  its   direct  object  is  the  infinitive, 
as- 
Poor  innocent  women !  I  have     Pauvres  innocentea  I   Je  les 

seen  them  dying,  at  vdes  mourir. 

Poor  innocent  women  I  I  have      Pauvres  innocentea  !  Je  lea  ai 
seen  them  cast  into  prison,  vu  Jeter  en  prison. 

As  these  examples,  and  such  like,  present  the  greatest 
difficulties  of  the  past  participles,  observe  that  a  past 
participle  followed  by  an  infinitive  agrees  whenever  the 
infinitive  can  be  turned  into  a  present  participle. 

(8)  In  exception  to  what  precedes,  the  participle /«»'< 
followed  by  an  infinitive  is  always  invariable;  as- 

He  has  had  her  put  to  death,      II  Va  fait  mourir. 

(9)  The  past  paiticiple  preceded  by  an  adverb  of 
quantity,  always  agrees  with  the  complement  of  the 
adverb;  as- 

Many  errors  have  slipped  into    Beattcoup  d'erreurs  se  sont 
this  story,  glissees  ftows  cette  histoire. 

(10)  The  past  participle  preceded  by  two  nouns  united 
by  de,  agrees  with  that  noun  to  which  it  relates.     If 


1  According  to  the  Academy,  the  participles  coUte  and  valu,  used  In 
their  proper  meaning,  are  invariable,  as  a  preposirion  is  thcri  understood; 
but  tliey  are  variable,  wlien  used  flciirattvely  I-"o)  example: -We  sliould 
write  Nvltiiout  agreement,  Les  mille  francs  que  in  a  coOtb  mon  toijaye;  lei 
tnille  fiarcs  quk  ce  clieval  a  valp.  And  with  iigret'ment— /.m  peines  quh  celtt 
affaire  ni'a  coOtAics  ;  les  gratifications  que  voire  protection  m'a  valviu 
\jruniniaritui8,  however,  dider  on  this  ix>int 


OF  THE   PAKTICTPLB.  41 

instead  of  the  first  noun  there  ia  fo  peu  de,  the  same  rule 
applies;  as- 

The  great  number  of   faults  Le  grand  nombre  de  fautes 

which  I  have  observed,  pro-  QUE/ai  b.ei,i arqu ± provient 

ceed  from  your  inattentiou,  de  votre  inapplication. 

A  great  many  faults  h&ve  slip-  Une  multitude  de  fautes  se 

ped  into  your  letter.  sont  glissees  dana  votre  let- 

tre. 

The  little  attention  that  he  has  Le    peu    cC attention    Qu'iZ   o 

given  shows  that  he  is  un-  MONTRi:  fait  voir  qu'il  ext 

worthy  of  your  interest,  indigne  de  votre  intirSt. 

(Even)    the    little    attention  Le  peu  cT attention  qv'U  a 

which  he  has  given  will  be  montbes  lui  aervira.^ 
useful  to  him. 


THE      ADVERB. 

Place  of  Adverbs. 

Rule  90. — The  simple  adverb  usually  stands  after  the 
simple  tense;  if  the  tense  is  compound,  after  the  auxi- 
liary; aa- 

I  am  always  thinking  of  them,     Je  pense  TOUJOURS  d  eux. 
We  have  often  spoken  to  him    Nous  lui  en  avons  souvbnt 
about  it,  parl6. 

Obsp:rve. — (1)  Bien,  mal,  mieux,  jamais,  and  trop 
generally  precede  the  infinitive,  as  se  blen  conduire, 
uiEUX  ecrire,  trov  parler. 

(2)  In  French  the  adverb  is  never  put  between  the 
subject  and  the  verb,  as  it  is  in  EngKsh ;  as- 

1  often  see  him,      Je  le  voia  souvent. 

Rule  91. — Adverbs  compounded  of  several  words  are 
placed  after  the  participle ;  as  - 

I  did  it  hastily,      Je  Vaifait  k  la  hats. 


1  The  simplest  way  to  ascertain  wliethei  tt  fttu  Is  the  principal  word,  ii 
to  suppress  it.  If  it  can  l>e  suppressed  witliout  altering  tlie  wlio!e  mean- 
ing, tlien  ;lie  noun  following  It  peu  is  the  principal  word;  if  it  cannot,  then 
It  1%U  peu  \Ue\t 


42  OP   THB   ADVEKB. 

.  Obsekte, — Adverbs  of  order,  and  those  which  denote 
time  in  a  determinate  manner,  are  placed  either  before 
or  after  the  verb ;  as  - 

To-day  it  is  fine  weather ;  it    AuJotTRD'HUi  U  fait  beau ;  U 

will  rain  perhaps  to-morrow,        pleuvra  peut-Stre  demain. 
He  came  to  me  first,  II  vint   d'abord  d  moi,    or, 

o'aboro  U  vint  d  moi. 


Particular  Rules  on  ne.* 

RuLK  92. — ^Ne  is  commonly  used  without  pas  or 
point  - 

(1)  TVith  the  verbs  cesser,  oser,  pouvoir,  and  savotr 
(meaning  pov/voir  or  followed  by  a  conjunction)  '^  as  - 

I  am  always  scolding  you,  Je  ne  cesse  de  vous  grander. 

I  dare  not  go  there,  Je  N'ose  y  alter. 

1  could  not  do  it,  Je  ne  saurais  lefaire, 

I  don't  know  if  he  will  come,  Je  ne  sais  s'il  vlendra. 

(2)  Before  a  subjunctive  used  negatively,  when  the 
first  verb  is  followed  by  personne,  nul,  aucun,  rien,  nulle- 
ment,  jamais,  guere,  B.rv3ipeu;  as- 

I  see  nobody  but  loves  you,        Je  ne  vols  personnk  qui  nb 

vous  aime. 
He  envies  everything  he  sees,     II  vk  voit  rien  qui  ne  lui/asse 

envie. 
There  are  few  pleasures  that    II  y  a  peu  de  plaisirs  qui  ne 
are  not  bought  too  dear,  soient  achetds  trop  cher. 

(3)  Before  the  second  verb  of  an  interrogative  sen- 
tence, when  the  interrogation  is  used  less  as  an  interro- 
gation than  as  a  more  expressive  way  to  communicate 

1  Pai  and  point  must  of  course  be  suppressed  when  tliere  Is  In  the 
»enfeiiee  such  a  negative  expn-ssion  as  aiicun,  nul,  personne,  fftdre.  jamaii, 
nullenent,  ni...ni...,  plus,  rien,  ne  que  (only),  and  also  in  such  sentences  as 
the  following:— /iNB  »oit  gouttk,  he  does  not  see  at  all;  /I  nk  Jit  mot, 
be  Fpeaks  not  a  word ;  je  nk  Tai  vu  he  ma  vib,  I  never  saw  him ;  je  h'en 
par2erat  d  AUB  QUI  VIVE,  or,  &  qui  qce  ok  soiT,  I  shall  Dot  speak  of  it  to 
anybody. 

*  In  familiar  style  we  add  also  bouger.    Nt  bougtt,  do  not  stir. 


0»  THE   ADVERB.  43 

Bomcthing,  and  also  before  the  first  ve/b  of  such  a  sen- 
tence if  it  begins  with  qui  ;  as  - 

Is  there  a  man  wlio  does  not  T  a-t-il  un  homme  qui  ne  se 

complain  of  his  fellow-crea-  plaigne  de  ses  seiriblablcs? 
tures  ? 

Have  you  a  friend  who  is  not  Avez-vous  un  ami  qui  nb  soil 

mine  also  ?  aussi  le  mien  ? 

Who  has  not  heard  all  that  T  Qui  N'a  enteiulu  dire  tout  cela  ? 

(4)  Before  the  subjunctive  used  affirmatively,  when  it 
IB  required  by  a  verb  or  a  conjunction  implying /ear,  or 
by  the  verbs  empecher  and  prendre  garde^ ;  as- 

We  fear  he  will  come,  Nous  craignons  'iu'Unb  vienne. 

For  fear  he  will  come,  De  peur  qu'il  n  e  vienne. 

(5)  After  the  verbs  ddsesperer,  douter,  disconvenir  and 
nier,  used  negatively  and  followed  by  que  ;  as  - 

I  have  no  doubt  but  you  are    JenedoutepaaqtvevouavCayez 
right,  rainon. 

(6)  After  pliis,  mains,  autre,  and  autrement,  followed 
by  que,  and  placed  before  an  indicative ;  as  - 

He    writes    better  than  you    //  icrit  miecx  qcb  voua  nk 
think,  penisez. 

Observe. — If  the  first  verb  is  negative  or  interroga- 
tive, or  if  there  is  an  adverb  between  que  and  the  verb, 
the  ne  is  left  out  (see  Rule  24.) 

(7)  After  d  moins  que  (unless)  used  affirmatively  ;  as  - 

I  will  go  to  him,  unless  you     J^irai  le  trouver,  k  moinsque 
yourself  go,  voua  N'y  alliez  vous-mime. 

(8)  After  si  used  negatively,  and  meaning  a  mains  que  ; 
as- 

I  will  go  to  him,  if  you  your-     J'irai  le  trouver  si  vous  tt'y 
self  do  not  go,  allez  voiis-meme. 

(9)  After  que  beginning  a  sentence,  and  meaning 
pourquoi ;  as  - 

Why  do  you  not  come  with  ua  T    .Que  nb  venez-vous  avec  nous  / 
I  See  ObserTation,  Rule  7S. 


44  OF   TUE    ADVERB. 

Observe. — This  way  of  speaking  is  used  only  to  liint 
a  reproach  or  a  regixt. 

(10)  After  depuis  que,  il  y  a... que,  followed  by  a  pasl 
tense,  with  a  negative  meaning ;  as  - 

How  have  you  been  since  I  saw  Comment  vous  Stes-vous  porti 
you  ?  DEPUIS  QUK  je  ne  vom  ai 

vu? 

Ifc  ia  three  months  since  I  met  It  y  a  trois  inois  quk  je  ne 
him.  I'ai  rencontri. 

Observe. — If  the  verb  is  in  the  present,  pas  or  point 
must  be  used  ;  as  - 

Now  that  I  do  not  see  him,         Depuis  que  je  ne  le  vols  pas. 
We  have  not  spoken  to  each      II  y  a  nn  an  que  nous  ne  nouf 
other  for  a  year,  parlous  point. 

(11)  After  the  impersonal  verbs  «7  s'«» /fitM^  $'«<«,  US' en 
faut  heaucoup  or  de  beaucoup  que,  peu  s^enfaut  que,  il  tient 
cL  moi,  a  lui,  etc.. .que,  used  negatively  or  interroga- 
tively; as- 

Little  would  make  me  strike    II  ne  tient  A  rien  qvs  je 

you,  NE  vous/rap2)e. 

He  almost  named  you,  Peu  s'en  est  fallu  qu'U  N« 

vous  nommdt. 

(12)  See  Rule  101  (2). 


THE  PREPOSITION. 

De. 

Rule  93.— (1)  It  has  been  said  (Rule  32)  that  d«  is 
used  after  numbers,  before  the  following  adjective  or 
participle;  as- 

One  man  killed,         Un  homme  db  tui. 

(2)  It  is  also  used  between  quelque  cho  gg  ^/^, 
quelqu'un,  personne,  que  (inten-ogative),  quoi,   ^,<gj-  f.^g  Je 


OF   THE   PKEPOSniO.V.  45 

noit,  qtioi  que  ce  fut,  and  the  following  adjective  or  part? 
ciple ;  as  - 

U  there  anything  new  ?  T  a-t-U  QneLQCB   CHOSB   db 

NOUVEAD? 

On  a.  withered  trunk  nothing    Sur  un  tronc  desxichi  rien  de 

good  can  grow,  BON  ne  pent  nuttre. 

Is  anyboily  ill  in  your  house  T     T  a-til  qdelqp'un   db  ma- 
lade  chez  V0U8  ? 
There  was  nobody  wounded,       II    n't/    a    eu    personnb    de 

BLESSE. 

What  are  the  news  !  Qv'y  a-l-il  db  novvbau  1 


The  Preposition  to. 

RtJT.E  94. — (1)  The  preposition  to  placed  before  an 
infinitive  is  translated  by  pour  when  it  means  in  order 
to;  as- 

She  said  so  to  please  you,  Elk  Va  dU  pour   vous  faire 

plaisir. 

(2)  It  is  translated  by  de  when  it  can  be  changed 
into  of  or  from  ;  as  - 

We  hau  the  pleasure  to  see  our    Nous  avons  eu  le  plaisir  db 
unule,  voir  notre  oncle. 

(3)  It  is  translated  by  d  when  it  can  be  changed  into 
in,  and  also  when  the  infinitive  active  may  be  changed 
into  the  infinitive  passive  ;  as  - 

H.C  encouraged  me  to  persevere,     II  m'encouragea  k  per84v4rer. 

A  house  to  let,  Une  malion  A  louer. 

The  advice  is  not  to  be  despised,     L'avia  n'est  pas  k  mdpriser. 


Depuis,  Pendant,  Pour,  (for). 

Rule  95. — Depuis  marks  the  beginning  of  a  period  of 
time ;  as  - 

From  ten  o'clock  till  twelve,       Depttis    dix    heures    jtisqu'd 

midi. 
I  have  had  this  cold /or  eight     Je  8uia  enrhunU  depuis  huit 
days.  jours. 


i6  OF  THE   PEEPOSITION. 

Pendant  marks  the  duration,  and  may  often  be  under- 
stood ;  as  - 

It  rained  for  two  months,  II  phd  pendant  deux  mo'm. 

I  worked  (for)  twelve  hours,     J^ai  travailU  duuze  heures. 

Pour  denotes  the  end ;  ns  - 

I  am  going  away /or  six  weeks,     Je  pars  pour  six  sematnea. 
1  have  enough  paper/or  three     J'ai   du  papier   POU&   iroit 
mouths,  mois. 


Dans  and  En. 

Ettle  96. — Bans  has  a  precise  and  determinate  sense, 
whilst  en  is  vague  and  undeterminate.  In  other  words, 
in  is  expressed  by  dans  before  the  article,  the  demonstra- 
tive and  possessive  adjectives  and  pronouns,  and  by  en  iu 
the  other  cases  ;  as  - 

In  the  last  war,  Dans  la  demih-e  guerre. 

In  time  of  war.  En  temps  de  guerre. 

In  this  garden,  Dans  cejardin. 

1  have  confidence  in  you,  J'ai  confiance  kn  voua. 

KuLE  97. — When  used  to  express  time,  dans  marks 
the  epoch,  and  en  the  duration ;  as  - 

He  will  arrive  in  three  days,  II  arrivera  dans  trois  jours. 

(when  three  days  are  elapsed), 

[t  will  take  him  three  days  to  II  arrivera  en  trois  jour*. 

arrive, 


A  and  En. 

E.TJI.E  98. — lu",  placed  before  names  of  towns,  is  tran- 
slated by  d ;  as  - 

He  died  in  London,  H  eM  mart  a  Londres. 


OF   THE    PREPOSITION.  47 

In,  placed  before  names  of  countries,  is  translated  by 
*»* ;  as  - 

1  was  born  in  France,        Je  suis  n6  EN  France. 
He  lives  in  Italy,  II  demeure  EN  Italie. 

Should  the  name  of  a  country  be  accompanied  by  an 
adjective,  or  any  attribute,  dans  must  be  used ;  as- 

I  lived  three  years  in  North      J^ai  demeur6  trois  ans  dans 
America,  l'Amekique  dp  Nord. 


From. 

RiTLE  99. — Fro7n  (a  person's  house)  is  translated  by 
de  cliez ;  as  - 

We  covaefrom  our  uncle's,      Nous  venons  de  CHEZ  notre  otiele. 

From  (a  person)  is  translated  hj  de  la  part  de ;  as  - 

Go  from  me  to  your  mother's,     Allez  de  ma  part  cluz  madame 

voire  mire. 

Repetition  of  Prepositions. 
RcLE  100. — Prepositions  are  generally  repeated  before 
each  noun,  unless  the  different  nouns  are  synonymous ; 
as- 

Tbe  same  prejudices  are  to  be  fotmd  in  Europe,  Asia,  Africa, 
and  even  America, 

On  Irouve  les  memes  pr6jugis  en  Europe,  en  Asie,  en  Afrique, 
etjusqu^ii  Am6ruiue. 

Obskkve. — The  prepositions  d,  de,  and  en  are  always 
repeated. 


THE    CONJUNCTION. 

Observations  on  the  Conjunction  que. 

Rule  101. — (1)  Que  is  often  used  instead  of  the  con- 
junctions afm  que,  a  mohvt  que,  atant  que,  aussitdt  que, 

1  But,  with  certain  distant  conntries,  i  is  nsed  (with  the  article),  as  etr% 
or  alter  au  Mtxif/ue,  au  Perou,  au  C/i^li,  it  la  Jamntque,  a  la  ifartinique,  o 
Ui  Ouadelfjvi",  au  Huraguay,  au  ISretil,  au  Japon,  aux  Jnde$. 


48  OP   THE   CONJUNCTION, 

cependant,  comme,  de  crainte  que,  de  peur  que,  depuis  que^ 
des  qm,  de  ce  que,  jusqu  a  ce  que,  puree  que,  quand,  quoi- 
que,  sans  que,  soit  que  ;  as  - 

Come  till  I  speak  to  you,  Venez,  QxjEJe  vous  pnrle. 

Not  a  day  passes  but  it  rains,      Pas  un  jour  ne  se  passe  Qu't/ 

NE  plewve. 

(2)  Ne  is  required  before  the  following  verb  when 
que  stands  for  A  moins  que,  avant  que,  de  peur  que,  de 
crainte  que,  depuis  que  (or  il  y  a.. .que),  sans  que,  j'usqu'a 
ce  que  ;  as  - 

I  will  not  set  out  till  he  arrives,    Je  ne  partirai  pas  Qv'il  n'ar- 

rive. 

Observe  that  this  form  of  expression  is  to  be  used  only 
when  the  first  clause  of  the  sentence  is  negative. 

RtTLE  102. — Que  is  also  used  for  how,  how  much,  how 
many,  and  expresses  wonder,  irony,  indignation.  The 
adjective  following  it  must  be  translated  without  trh, 
hien,  ov  fort ;  as- 

How  (very)  unhappy  that        QuB  cettefemme  a  I'air  mal- 
woman  looks  !  heureux  ! 

Obskeve. — The  noun,  adjective,  or  adverb,  following 
how,  how  much,  Iww  many,  is  often  put  after  the  verb  in 
French ;  as  - 

Wliat  power  virtue  has  over    Que  to  i'er<u  a  de  pou voir  «ur 
the  most  ferocious  minds  !  hs  Cunts  Its  plus  f6roces  ! 

Rule  103. — When  the  conjunction  and  with  a  verb 
foUows  the  verbs  to  go,  to  come,  to  run,  the  French  omit 
the  conjunction ;  as  - 

Oo  and  tell  him,  Allez  lui  dire. 

Will  you  come  and  take  a  walk  Voulez-vons  venirfaire  un  tout 

with  me  ?  avec  inoi  ? 

Run  aud  fetch  my  spectacles,  Courezmecherchermeslunctlea 


49 


EXEECISFS   ON    THE    PRINCIPAL 
EULES  OF  SYNTAX. 


(Bales  1,  2,  3,  4,  6,  6.)  . 

1.  La  vertu,  dit  Platon,  c'est  la  ressemblance  h  Dieu 
par  la  justice,  la  saintet(?  et  la  sagesse,  dans  la  mesure  do 
nos  forces.  2.  II  faut  toujoura  agir  avec  franchise,  si  Ton 
vent  etre  sincferement  heureux.  3.  Siijets,  amis,  parents, 
tout  I'a  trahi.  4.  Quand  j'^tais  en  pension,  j'avaia  deux 
francs  cinquante  centimes  par  semaine  pour  mes  menus 
plaisirs.  5.  Combien  se  veudent^  les  cerises  et  les  fraises 
dans  ce  pays  ?  6.  Les  cerises  se  vendent  dix  centimes  le 
demi-kilo,  et  les  fraises  vingt  centimes.  7.  Ne  in'avez- 
VOU3  pas  dit  que  M.  votre  pfere  est  mddecin  ?  8.  Non, 
monsieur,  il  est  avocat,  mais  il  a  fait  des  etudes  de  mede- 
cine.     9.  Quelle  triste  matinee  ! 

10.  Les  horn  mes  sont  ^gaux  ;  ce  n'est  point  la  naissance, 
C'est  la  seule  vertu  qui  fait  leur  difference. — (  Voltaire.) 

11.  Patience  et  longueur  de  temps 

Font  plus  que  force  ni  que  rage. — (La  Fontaine.) 


Spanish,  espagnol.  to  resolve,  r4soudre. 

(lurman,  aUinnnnd,  Ireland,  Irlande. 

prayer,  prlere  (f.)  contemporary,  contempnraim., 

reproach,  reproche  (m.)  to  earn,  gaf/ner. 

to  move,  6movvoir.  grocer,  Spicier. 

contentment,  contentement  (m.)  cruelty,  a^auti  (I.) 

riches,  richesses  (f.)  in  the  sight  of,  aux  yeux  de. 

1.  The  Wise  (man)  prefers  \Trtue  to  beauty.  2.  History 
is  the  portrait  of  men  and  times.  3.  Spanish  is  easy,  but 
German  is  difficult.  4.  Neither  prayers  nor  reproaches 
could'''  move  him.    5.  Contentment  is  better  than  f passe  J 


50  EX££CISES. 

riches.  6.  In^'  time  of  war  the  savages  of  America  are 
armed  with^^  tomahawks.  7.  When  we  arrived  from 
Holland,  we  resolved  to  go  to^^  Ireland.  8.  Louis  the 
Eighteenths^,  king  of  France,  and  George  the  Foiirth'^^ 
of  England  were  contemporaries.  9.  He  is  a  physician, 
and  his  brother  a  grocer.  10.  It  is  almost  impossible 
to  hide  en\y,  malice,  cruelty,  avarice,  and  anger.  1 1 . 
Glory,  riches,  genius,  honours,  are  nothing  in  the  sight 
of  God.*  12.  Centurions  and  soldiers,  each  murmured^^ 
against  the  general's  orders.     13.  Poverty  is  no  vice. 

14.  Alexanders  and  Caesars  are  always  fatal  to  the  world. 

15.  What  a  fine  coat  you  have  (got)!  16.  In  France, 
St.  Nicholas'  day  is  the  fete  of  the  boys,  and  St.  Cather- 
ine's day  that  of  girls.  17.  The  gentleman'^^  you  see  is 
a  Dutchman.  18.  The  Athalie  of  Eacine  is  the  master- 
piece of  the  French  theatre.  Jl^' 

8. 

(Bules  7,  8.) 

1.  Je  veux  ^  la  campagne  du  petit-lait,  de  bon  potage. 
2.  J'ai  vu  dans  ce  mus^e  des  bas-reliefs  magnifiques.  3. 
Oe  sont  des  gens  de  bien  ;  ce  sont  de  braves,  d'excellentes 
gens.  4.  AUez-vous-en  tous,  je  ne  veux  pas  de  bruit  chez 
moi.  5.  Je  ne  vols  dans  sa  conduite  que  de  ces  in^galit^s 
aiixquelles  les  femmes  les  mieux  n^es  sont  le  plus  sujettes. 
6.  Dans  les  traductions,  il  n'est  gufere  possible  de  rendre 
un  vers  par  un  vers,  lorsque  cette  precision  est  le  plus 
desirable.  7.  Les  Francs,  peuple  sauvage,  ne  vivaient  que 
det  Mguraes,  de  fruits,  de  racines  et  des  animaux  qu'ila 
avaient  pris  k  la  chasse.  8.  Les  grands  ont  des  plaisirs, 
le  peuple  a  de  la  joie. 

«  "  Enumeration  "  is  a  figure  of  rhetoric  which  consists  In  going  over  tht 
principal  suMivisions  of  one  idea.  There  is  nothing  of  any  value  in  the 
sight  of  God,  is  the  idea  developed  in  the  llth  sentence  by  enumeratiug  in 
succession  the  things  wliich  are  deemed  most  valuable  by  man  Again,  in 
the  12th  sentence,  there  i<  only  one  idea  expressed,  that  is  "  each  nmrmui'td 
•gainst  the  general,"  with  the  development  "from  the  officers  to  the  private 
soldiers."  Hut  there  is  no  " enumcratiim  "  in  the  10th  sentence:  thevicei 
quoted  there  do  not  form  a  whole,  other  vices  may  be  hidden,  such  as 
hypocrisy ;  consequently,  there  being  no  •'  enumeration,"  the  article  must  be 
osed.  whilst  it  is  omitted  in  the  lltli  and  12th. 

t  Soint  it  not  expre«»ed  in  French  when  it  is  preceded  by  the  preposition  de 


ii-XLliCISKS  ■  51 

9.  C'est  (le  sang  qu'ils  ont  soil,  c'est  du  sangqu'ils  demandent. 

—(Delille.) 

10.  n  est  guind^  sans  cesse,  et  dans  tous  ses  propos 

On  voit  qu'il  se  travaille  i  dire  des  bons  mots. — (Moliire.) 

11 Entre  nos  enuemis 

Les  plus  k  craindre  sont  sou  vent  les  plus  petits. 

— (La  Fontaine.  J 


to  dry  up,  dessicher. 

ostrich,  autruche  (f.)* 

to  swallowr,  avaler. 

to  be  enough  for  (p.),  suffire  d. 

numerous,  nombreux. 

witness,  t&moin. 

Jtraise,  louanye  (f.),  4loge  (m.) 

oolishly,  follement. 

change,  monnaie  (f.) 

to  beg  one's  pardon,  demander  pardon  a  (pw) 

how  it  is,  comment  cela  aefaii. 

counsel,  conseUs  (m.  pi. ) 

I.  There  are  winds  which  pass  over  the  country  and 
dry  up  plants.  2.  He  says-^^  he  has  no  money,  but  don't 
believe  him.  3.  Ostriches  often''"  swallow  iron,  copper, 
stones,  glass,  and  wood.  4.  liread  and  water  will  be 
enough  for  me.  5.  In  order  to^^  write,  one  must  hare 
paper  and  ink.  6  In  order  to  write  well,  one  must  have 
good  paper  and  good  ink.  7.  He  who  has  numerous  wit- 
nesses of  his  death,  dies  with  courage.  8.  I  have  made 
use  of  the  fine  books  you  gave  me.  9.  There  are  praises 
which  blame,  and  reproaches  that  praise.   10.  Do  not  give 

•  We  give  below  the  sliortest  »nd  moit  fatisfactory  rule  yet  given  for 
mastering  tlie  geuder  of  French  noous.  It  Is  due  to  M.  Albitfes,  formerly 
teatlier  of  French  in  Birmiiigham. 

(Observe  that  the  rule  does  not  apply  to  nouns  evidently  denoting  females, 
as  prineesu,  daint;  nor  to  nouns  evideutly  denoting  males,  as  prince,  homm*, 
«tc.) 

^oiiuB  baving  the  follpwing  terminations  are  feminine : — 

ALE,       OLB,       dlb;  urr,      iRK,       BUS; 

sue:,     ixb,      IE,  orii;    tE,        UB,        lo>r; 

BE,  CE,  DB;  FB,  KB,  FB ; 

8E,       TE,       t£;  tb,       he,       Aisoir;  — 

(as:  eaOMralt,  ecole,  nature,  /aveur,  terre,   eonvtrtation,  eUmenct,    btanU, 
murcht,  niaiton.) 

Nuuns  not  havinK  these  terminations  are  uascdunb,  »aport,  etitval,  ea/i, 
crime,  village. 

Tliere  are,  of  course,  exceptions  to  the  rule,  but,  according  to  M.  Albit^ 
Lt  holds  bood  in  99  ca&es  out  of  100. 


53  BXEBCISE8. 

her  any  money,  she  would  go  and^®^  spend  it  foolishly. 
11.  He  has  always  good  reasons  to  give  us.  12.  Did 
you  not  say  that  you  had  some  people*  at  your  house  to- 
night? 13.  That  gentleman  has  grandcliildren  who  are 
taller  than  you.  14,  I  hope  you  have  some  change? 
16.  I  beg  your  pardon,  sir,  I  have  none.  16.  I  don't 
know  how  it  is,  I  never  have  any  change.  17.  It  is  this 
thought  thatf  torments  her  the  most.  18.  Do  not  give 
your  Mend  the  most  agreeable  counsel,  but  the  most  xiseful . 

6. 

(Sules  9,  10,  11,  12,  18.) 

1.  Cette  jeune  fille  va  tous  les  dimanchea  h,  la  grand' 
messe  avec  sa  grand'mbre  et  sea  deux  grand'pferea.J 
2.  Presque  toua  les  tableaux  de  ce  peintre  sont  dea  chefa- 
d'ceuvre.  3.  Allez  dana  la  prairie,  et  vous  pourrez  admirer 
k  la  foia  mille  arcs-en-ciel  paints  sur  chaque  goutte  de  ros^e. 
4.  Lea  vers  k  aoie  sont  si  commans  h  Tonquin  que  la  sole 
n'y  eat  pas  plua  chfere  que  le  coton.  6.  Allez  au  marchd 
au  bM,  voua  y  verrez  I'homme  au  mauteau  noir  qui  demeure 
prfes  de  la  maiaon  de  campagiie  de  M.  votre  pfere.  6.  Ceux 
qui  viennent  interrompre  dea  t6te-k-tSte  ennuyeux  sont 
toujours  les  bienvenus.  7.  Une  infinite  de  jeunea  gena 
ae  perdent  parce  qu'ila  fr^quentent  de  mauvaisea  aoci^t^s. 
8.  La  plupart§  croient  que  le  bonheur  est  dans  la  richease ; 
ila  se  trompent.  9.  Quelques  aagea  ont  cette  opinion,  le 
reste  dea  hommea  eat  de  men  avis. 

10.  Le  reste  pour  son  Dieu  montre  on  oabli  fatal. — (Radne.) 

11.  La  moiti6  des  humains  rit  aux  d^pens  de  I'autre. — 

(DenUmcliea) 

12.  Ciel  !  qnel  pompeux  amas  d'esclavea  k  genoux 

Est  aux  piedsde  ceroiqui  les  fait  trembler  tous ! — ( Voltaire.) 

*  Translate  people  by  monde  when  it  means  company. 

t  When  yon  have  to  translate  the  relative  that  or  tchich,  put  qui  If  that  or 
wMch  in  next  tlie  verb  In  English,  and  qtie  if  it  is  separated  from  the  verb  by 
one  or  more  words. — Exception :  When  which  is  preceded  by  a  prepodtion, 
translate  it  according  to  Rule  53. 

{  With  some  feminine  nonns  in  daily  use,  the  e  mute  of  grawU  ia  sap. 
pressed  and  an  apostrophe  is  pnt  instead.  G^andt' is  then  inrariable;  SO  we 
ny,  4et  grandruu,  da  grancT messes,  etc. 

i  Tbe  verb  Is  put  in  the  plural  after  la  plupart  used  without  comptaaMnt 
and  in  the  ttngular  after  h  rttte,  wbateTer  be  its  complement 


EXEBCISE8.  3«i 


6. 

marble,  tnarbre  (m.)  orefecture        \  «^«/''^'*  (™-) 

mill,  moulin  {m.)  ^  '        (  de  prefecture. 

farm,  /erme  (f.)  masterpiece,  ektf-dceuvre  (m.) 

gown.  ro6e  (f.)  to  rear,  Clever. 

to  be  west  from,  Stre  a  Vouest  de.  mulberry  bush,  mUrier  (m. ) 

to  defeat,  baltre,  difaire.  velvet,  velours  (m.) 

crowd,  foule  (f.)  lace,  dentelle  (f.) 

to  impede,  retarder.  veil,  voile  (ni.) 

annexation,  annexion.  Turkey,  Turquie  (f.) 

Savoy,  Savoie  (f.)  fig,  ^mc  (f.) 

1.  Has  your  servant  washed  the  marble  table  ?  2.  We 
have  bouiiht  a  coflfee-mill  yesterday,  which^^  goes  very 
well.  3.'nierearetwowatermillsonthat*fann.  4.  Have 

•  Here  are  the  different  ways  of  translating  this,  that,  thest,  those  :— 

1.  When  they  are  adjectives,  that  is,  when  they  stand  b^/im  a  noun,  trans- 
late them  by  ce,  cet.  cette,  ces ;  as  — 

This  or  tliat  book,      Ce  livre.  This  or  that  girl,         Cette  JUU. 

This  or  that  child,     Cet  enfant.  These  or  those  men,    Ces  hoi^mes. 

2.  When  they  are  prononus,  that  is,  when  they  stand  m  Vie  place  of  nottas, 
translate  them  by  celui,  celle,  ceux,  celles;  as — 

My  pen  is  better  than  my  brother's    Ua  plume  est  meHleure  que  cellm  de 

(tlian  that  of  my  brother),  numfrire. 

Tour  horses  are  larger  than  those     Vos  (hevaux  sont  pha  grands  gin 

we  saw,  CEUX  que  notis  awms  «m. 

5.  To  compare  two  persons  or  two  things  (or  two  sets  of  persons  or  things), 
(he  English  have  two  prononns  (this  and  that,  these  and  those) ;  but  the  French 
^ave  only  one  for  the  masculine  singular  {celui),  only  one  for  the  feminine 
singular  (celle),  one  masculine  plural  (cetix),  and  one  feininiue  plural  (celles). 
So  when  they  want  to  compare  or  to  make  a  distinction,  they  add  to  the  first 
pronoun  ci  (here),  and  to  the  second  lA  (there) ;  as  — 

This  one  is  little,  that  one  is  large,     Ce/ui'-ci  est  petit,  cetui-vA  est  grand. 
The.«e  ones  are  little,  those  ones  are    Ceux-CJ  sont  petits,  ceux-ij^  sont 
large,  grands, 

4.  Tbe  same  process  is  usod  for  the  adjectives  this,  that,  these,  those;  as— 

This  house  is  larger  than  that.  {^"cXH!"'^'"  *"  """  ^""^  ^ 

Those  people  are  richer  than  these,  CKsgens-L/.sont  plus  richesqtieceuxci. 

6.  This,  that,  are  translated  by  ctci,  cela,  when  pointing  to  something  with- 
out naming  it,  or  when  referring  to  an  idea  expressed  (eeia).  or  about  to  be 
expressed  (ceci) ;  as  — 

Give  me  this,  give  me  that,  JJonnez-moi  ceci,  donnez-moi  celk. 

My  mistress  is  dying  — What!   is  Ma  MAiTRESSK  S8  mkcet.— Qmoi/ 

that  all  ?  n'est-ee  que  cei-a  ?—  (A/oliire.) 

There  was  this  pecnliarity  about  II  y  avail  ceci  de  particuliei-  •liet 

the   Romans,    that    they  mixed  Us  Komains :    qu'ils    mSlaient 

some  religious  feiling  with  the  quelqi7b  sentiment  kklioieux 

love  which  they  liail   for  their  A  l'amour  qu'ils  avaibht  i'oub 

country,  uiur  VA-nnt.— (Montesquieu.) 

OI)serve  that  fo  (contraction  of  eeto)  is  often  used  in  (aminar  ^-tylat— 
OoHnet-moi  fa ;  tl  n'v  a  pas  de  mat  it  ca 

K 


64  EXKBCISDS. 

you  seen  my  silk  gown  and  my  gold  watch  ?  5.  The  forest 
of  the  Ardennes  is  west  from  the  Luxemburg  province. 
6.  The  army  of  the  infidels  was  entirely  defeated.  7.  The 
crowdofc^iTiages  impeded  our  march.  8.  Theannexation 
of  Savoy  and  Nice  has  given  France  three  new  prefectures. 
9.  Le  Cid  and  Athalie  are  dramatic  masterpieces.  10. 
In  warm  countries  silk- worms  are  reared  on  mulberry 
bushes.  1 1 .  Most  men  recollect  the  services  tliey  render, 
better  than  those  they  receive.  12.  Most  people  desire 
old  age,  and  complain  when  they  have  reached*^  it.  13. 
The  troop  of  soldiers  of  which  they  have  spoken  to  you, 
has  entered^^  into  the  village  and  plundered^^  it.  14. 
Why  has  not  your  sister  a  velvet  bonnet?  15.  She  has 
bought  a  silk  gown  and  a  lace  veil.  16.  The  Clyde-built 
steam-boats  axe  famous  over  all  the  world.  17.  The 
English  import  a  gi'eat  quantity  of  Malta  oranges  and 
Turkey  figs.  18.  The  family  is  in  the  country ;  they 
will  not  come  back  before  the  10th  of  next  month. 


7. 

(BtQes  14, 15, 16,  17,  18, 19,  80,  21,  22.) 

1.  Sur  le  continent  presque  toutes  les  horloges  publiques 
sonnent  les  quarts  et  les  demies.  2.  La  demie  est-elle 
sonn^e  ?  3.  Les  montagnards  qui  ont  en  toutes  saisons 
les  jambesnues,  marchentrarementnu-tSte.*  4.  Vousn'en 
avez  pris  qu'uue  demi-livre,  niais  moi  j'en  ai  achate  una 
livre  et  demie.  5.  Les  Polonais  netrou vent  pas  I'huile 
bonne  si  **  (^°)  elle  ne  sent  fort.  6.  N^ion  etait  aussi 
odieux  aux  sdnateurs  et  aux  simples  citoyens  qu'il  ^tait 
cruel  envers  eux.  7.  II  est  necessaire  ^  I'homme  de  tra- 
vailler  et  de  prendre  de  I'exercice  et  dn  repos.  8.  II  est 
beau  de  mourir  pour  la  defense  de  son  pays.  9.  Voua 
avez  deux  fils  et  deux  filles  trbs-spirituels  et  tr^s-jolis. 

10.     n  me  semble  deja  que  ces  murs,  que  ces  vofites. 
Sent prfits  im 'accuser.     .     .     .     — (Racine.) 


*  Demi  and  nu  are  variable  when  following  the  substantive,  and  invariable 
when  preceding  it 


KXEBCISES.  65 

11.  .     .     .  Le  fer,  le  bandeau,  la  flamrae  est  toute  prftte. 

—(Jtacine.) 

12.  Qae  '*"  d'autres  i  ma  place  aorsieut  pu  rester  court! 

— (C.  Delavigne.) 


to  ahow,  movtrer,  fahre  voir,  wholesome,  tcAn. 

Fenelon,  Fcudon.  leaf,  fenille  (f.) 

by  turns,  tour  d  tour.  holly,  houx  (m.) 

to  astonish,  itonner.  edged,  borcU. 

loud,  haut.  spine,  ipine  (f.) 

to  stop,  s^arreter.  deception,  imposture  (f.) 

misconduct,  mauvaise  conduite.  guinea,  guinie  (f.) 

bitter,  a/mer.  at  once.  Unit  de  suite, 

1.  His  father  and  mother  are  dead.  2.  Fenelon  haa 
shown  by  turns  astonishing  virtue  or  genius.  3.  These 
girls  speak  too  loud.  4.  She  stopped  short.  5.  That 
flower  smells  bad.  6.  A  good  king  often  loses,  by  the 
misconduct  of  his  ministers,  the  affection  of  his  best 
subj  ects.  7 .  Have  you  never  read  any  French  poem  ?  8. 
Bitter  fruits  are  often  the  most  wholesome.  9.  The 
green  leaves  of  the  holly  are  edged  with  spines.  10. 
An  stffected  simplicity  is  a  delicate  deception.  11.  I 
like  the  simple  and  cordial  manners  of  the  Scotch.  12. 
I  am  fatigued  with  running.  13.  Voltaire  was  greedy 
of  praise,  and  insatiable  of  glory.  14.  That  is  easy  to 
say,  but  difficult  to  do.  15.  He  walked  barefooted  for 
an  hour  and  a  half,  for  half  a  guinea.  16.  She  is  a 
good,  amiable,  and  virtuous  woman.  17.  It  is  necessary 
to  go  there  at  once.  18.  He  respects  and  obeys  hi 
uncle. 

9. 

(Boles  23,  24,  25,  26.) 

1.  Pins  un  homme  ade  vrai  m^rite,  plus  11 1'applauditdans 
ies  autres.  2.  Qu'il  ne  lise  pas  plus,  mais  qu'il  lise  mieux 
qu'il  ne  fait.  3.  II  assure  qu'il  ferait  bien  un  kilometre  en 
cinq  minutes,  mais  cela  est  bien  plus  facile  k  dire  qu'k  faire. 
i.  Hon  voyage  m'a  coiite  beaucoup  plus  cher  que  je  ne  m'y 


56  EZBBCISBS. 

attendais.  5.  Moins  on  pense,  pl«8  on  parle.  6.  Vona  fitea 
plus  grand  que  moi  de  toute  la  tete.  7.  Je  voudrais  bien 
savoir  si  elle  se  porte  mieux  que  quand  elle  dtait  en  Hol- 
lande.  8.-  Etes-vous  plus  savant  qu'il  IMtait  ?  9.  C'eet 
tout  autre  chose  que  je  ne  croyais.  10.  Plus  vous  lui  ferez 
de  reproches,  moins  11  travaillera  ;  le  mieux  est  de  ne  hu 
rien  dire.  11.  Ce  que  vous  me  dites  de  mon  frferemefait 
bien  plaisir,  11  s'est  comports  beaucoup  mieux  que  je  ne 
I'aurais  cm. 

12.  Je  vous  entends  ici  mieux  que  vous  ne  pensez  — (Eadne.  j 


obli^ng,  obligeant 

it  is  better  (im  p. ),  il  vaut  mieux. 

I  had  rather,  j'aimerais  ?»,>?«*. 

to  do  a  service,  rendre  service  d. 

cure,  souci  (m.) 

artless,  naif. 

to  endure,  supporter. 

to  get  rid  of,  se  d6faire  de. 

1.  He  is  older  than  you  by  three  years,  and  taller  by 
the  whole  head.  2.  You  are  the  most  obli^ng  man  io 
the  town.  3.  He  has  gained  this  year  more  than  a 
thousand  pounds.  4.  It  is  better*  to  suffer  than  to  act 
unjustly.  5.  I  had  rather  die  than  do  it.  6.  That  girl 
speaks  better  than  she  writes.  7.  I  am  better  than  when 
I  was  in  France.  8.  The  more  difficult  a  thing  is,  the 
more  honourable  it  is.  9.  Russia  is  the  greatest  empire 
in  the  world.  10,  The  poorer  people  are,  the  fewei 
cares  they  have.  1 1 .  His  sister  is  the  prettiest  girl  in  the 
town.  12.  France  has  more  than  jfive  hundred  thousand 
soldiers.  13.  The  more  we^'^  read  the  fables  of  the  good 
and  artless  La  Fontaine,  the  more  we  are  convinced  that 
they  are  the  manual  of  a  man  of  taste.  14.  It  is  more 
difficult  to  endure  misfortune  tlian  to  get  rid  of  it.     16. 


•  Although  vaWr  mieux  and  aimermieux  require  no  rrepositlon  after  then, 
yet,  by  exception,  titan  fQllowlng  tUem  w  translated  by  que  tU  before  an  ay 
anitive. 


EXERCISES. 


57 


Fenelon  said  it  was  better  to  prevent  evil  than  to  be 
obliged  to  punish  it.  16.  The  more  diflS:cult  a  thing  is, 
the  more  attention  we^'^  must  give  to  it.  17.  Since  the 
invention  of  gunpowder,  battles  are  less  bloody  than  they 
wetv.     18.  I  have  not  seen  him  for  more  than  two  years. 


U. 

(BtdeB  87,  28,  29,  80.) 

1.  J'al  mal  auz  dents.  2.  J'y  ai  mal  ausai.  3.  Les 
n^gres  ont  la  tete  ronde,  le  nez  ^pat^  et  le  frunt  saillant. 
4.  Lorsque  Charles  Xll  re^ut  le  coup  qui  termina  dans 
Qu  instant  ses  exploits  et  sa  vie,  il  porta  la  main  sur  son 
6p4e.  5.  Je  souflfre  k  mon  genou.*  6.  Toute  fifere  qu'elle 
est,  il  hil  a  fallu  boire  I'affront.  7.  Nous  avons  fait 
prisonuiers  quelque  mille  hommeset  sommes  testes  maltres 
du  champ  de  bataille.  8.  Quelle  que  soit  votre  impatience 
et  quelque  ennuyeuses  que  soient  ces  d-marches,  il  faut 
qu'elles  se  fassent.  9.  La  valeur,  tout  hdroique  qu'elle 
est,  ne  suffit  pas,  a  dit  Massillon,  pour  faire  des  h^ros. 

10.  On  I'a  trouvde  tout  en  pleurs. 

1 1.  Rome  n'est  plus  dans  Rome,  elle  est  toute  oti  je  suis. 

— (ComeiUe.) 

12.  Un  toutpetit  enfant  demande  qu'on  I'assiste, 

En  suumaut  daus  ses  maius  tauten  rouges  de  froid. 

— (A.  Qwraud.) 


U 


to  break, 

ball, 

cannon, 

to  take  off, 

to  shoot  off, 

arm, 

to  sprain, 

wrist, 

gout, 

to  make  mistakes, 

to  leave, 


18. 

boulet  (m.) 
canon. 

emporter. 

bras  (m.) 
demettre. 
poignet  (m.) 
gmitte  (f.) 
«e  trinnper. 
quitter. 


to  split, 

to  hear,        | 

the  back, 

perishable, 

wet, 

to  boast, 

shoulder, 

to  stand  by, 

ashes, 

shepherd. 


fendre. 

entendre  dire, 

apprendre. 

le  dos. 

pMaaable. 

mouilU. 

$e  vanter  de. 

4paule  (f.) 

se  ienir  pr^  de. 

cendres  (f.  pi.) 

berger. 


*  The  possessive  mon,  ton,  ton,  etc.,  may  be  used  when  speaking  of  an 
hnTtltnil  onJn 


58  EXERCISES. 

1.  My  brother  broke  his  leg  yesterday.  2.  A  caimoii 
ball  took  off  his  arm.  3.  She  has  sprained  her  wrist.  .  4. 
His  gout  has  not  left  him.  5.  Do  not  speak  so  loud,  you 
split  my  head.  6.  Your  hands  are  always  cold — in  sum- 
mer as  in  winter.  7.  Their  hands  were  warm,  but  their 
feet  were  cold.  8.  Have  you  heard  that  she  has  lost  her 
reason?  9.  My  back  is  very  sore  to-day.  10.  Whatever 
your  fortune  is,  it  is  perishable.  11.  My  sister  is  quite 
wet.  12.  Her  face  is  quite  scorched.  13.  However* 
eminent  your  talents  may  be,  do  not  boast  of  them.  14. 
However  prudently  men  act,  they  always  run  the  risk 
of  making  mistakes.  15.  Whatever  your  virtues  are,  do 
not  believe  yourself  better  than  others.  16.  In  the  last 
engagement  our  general  lost  his  right  leg.  17.  My 
brother  was  wounded  in  his  shoulder,  and  I,  who  stood 
by  him,  had  my  arm  taken  off.  18.  The  ashes  of  the 
shepherd  and  of  the  king  are  alike. 

18. 

(Btiles  31,  32,  33.) 

1 .  Le  froid  fut  trfes-grand  en  1789.  2  Tl  y  a  en  France 
35,000,000  d'habitants.  3.  L'arm^e  de  Se'sostris,  com- 
pos^e  de  600,000  homraes  de  pied,  de  24,000  chevaux  et 
do  27,0fX)  chars,  ^tait  command^e  par  1,700  officiers  choiais 
parmi  les  comj^agnons  de  son  enfance.  4.  L'homme  ne  vit 
pas  aujourd'hui  au-delk  de  80  ans  ;  il  vivait  autrefois  plus 
de  300  ans.  5.  Les  premiers  chr^tiens  faisaient  enterrer 
avec  euxle  livre  des  Evangiles,  6.  Do  quel  c6t4  se  trouve 
le  nnm^ro  200  ?  7.  On  fait  par  le  cherain  de  fer  plus  de 
trente  milles  par  heure.  8.  Vous  apprendrez  cent  lignes 
par  coeur  pour  vendredi.  9.  Napoleon,  Chateaubriand  et 
M"'  de  Stael  naquirent  en  1769.  10.  Dans  la  bataille  il 
y  eut  600  hommes  de  t\i^8  et  3,000  de  blesses.  11.  Les 
debris  du  colosse  de  Rhodes  furent  vendus  k  un  marchand 


•  The  final  «  of  qudque  (when  wi-ittcn  In  one  word)  is  never  elided— ^^l^ut 
autre,  queJque  aimable,  qiielque  enfant.  But,  when  it  is  comljined  with  un,  they 
form  a  sinple  word,  and  are  wi'itteii  qmlqu'un,  quelqu'une,  quelques-uns,  quel- 
ques-unes.    For  the  suppression  of  the  vowel  €,  see  Note,  page  129. 


EXEBCISE8.  59 

juif  qui  en  eut  la  charge  de  200  chameanx.  12.  L'airain 
<Ie  ce  colosse  montait  encore,  880  ana  apr^  sa  chute,  k 
720,000  livres  ou  k  7,200  quintans. 

14. 

Lacedaemon,  Lac4d4mcne  (f.) 

Athens,  A  tlitnea  (f. ) 

to  found,  Jonder. 

to  declare  war  against,     declarer  la  guerre  d. 

warrior,  guerrier. 

to  be  compared,  d  comparer. 

the  Bastile,  la  Bastille. 

engineer,  inginieur. 

was  born,  ruLqvit. 

Troy,  Troie  (f.) 

Greek,  grec. 

to  intend,  avoir  Vintention  de;  compter. 

1 .  You  will  receive  three  htiTidred  and*  eighty  francs 
to-morrow.^^  2.  There  are  twenty-five  pupils  in  this 
class.  3.  Lacedaemon  was  built  onef  thousand  five 
hundred  and  sixteen  years  before  Jesus  Christ.  4.  Athens 
was  founded  one  thousand  five  hundred  and  eighty-two 
years  before  Christ.  5.  In  the  year  one  thousand  J  seven 
hundred  and  fifty-five,  §  England  declared  war  against 
France.  6.  Louis  the  Fourteenth  was  a  great  warrior ; 
but  he  wag  not  to  be  compared  to  Francis  the  First  nor 
to  Charles  the  Twelfth.  7.  The  Bastile  was  taken  by 
the  people  on||  the  fourteenth  of  July,  seventeen  hundred 
and  eighty-nine.  8.  They  arrived  in  Paris  on  the  first 
of  June,  and  they  left  on  the  tenth,  9.  There  are  ten 
boxes  sent,  and  three  left.  10.  Date  your  letter  from 
May  the  eleventh.  1 1.  Marshal^  Vauban,  the  greatest 
engineer  who'^  ever  lived,   was  bom  in  one  thousand 


•  The  conjunction  et  is  only  nsed  in  six  nmnbers:  21  (Tlngt-et-tm),  81,  il. 
»I.  61,  and  71. 

t  Neither  a  nor  one  are  expressed  before  miHe  and  cent. 

i  MiLLK  (Mouranrf)  Is  written  m»7  in  reckoning  the  years  of  the  Christian  era. 

I  The  hyphen  is  used  to  connect  the  different  parts  of  u  h'rench  nninber 
only  from  17  to  99. 

I  The  word  on  used  before  days  and  dates,  Is  never  translated  in  French. 

^  The  article  le,  la,  let,  is  used  in  French  before  nonns  of  title  or  rtijjnity, 
«hen  these  are  not  used  adjectirely:  so  we  say — Le  marechal  Vauban,  U 
in-tew  J:  etc 


60  BZGfiCISBS. 

six  hundred  and  throe.  12.  He  fortified  three  hundred 
old  towns.  13.  He  was  present  at  one  hundred  and 
forty  engagements.  14.  This  rule  is  to  be  found  in  the 
hundred  an^  eightieth  page.  15.  It  was  about  the  year 
two  thousand  seven  hundred  and  ninety-six  of  the  crea- 
tion that  Troy  was  taken  and  destroyed  by  the  Greeks. 
16.  I  intend  to  go  to  Edinburgh  on  the  first  or  the  third 
of  next  month.  1 7.  They  were  only  three  hundred  and 
twenty,  and  in  spite  of  their  inferiority  they  attacked 
and  beat  the  enemy.  18.  Have  you  begun  your  letter  ? 
There  are  onlv  three  lines  written. 


15. 

(BtQe  84.) 

1.  Voye^que  de  beaux  livrea  on  m'a  donnefsi !  mais  aussi 
j'ai  bien  travailid  pour  las  gagner.  2.  Si  seulement  elle  me 
faisait  voir  la  lettre  que  son  irhre  lui  a  ^crite,  je  saurais  ce 
qu'il  faut  r^pondre.  3.  Finissez  done,*  vous  lui  faites  mal. 
4.  lis  sont  trop  fiers  pour  m'^crire  aprfes  I'affront  que  je 
lesr  ai  fait.  5.  Je  ne  le  regrette  pas,  ils  ne  m'onfc  jamais 
fait  que  de  la  peine.  6.  Si  vous  ne  leur  dcrivez  pas,  ou  si 
du  moins  vous  ne  passez  pas  chez  eux,  ils  ne  voudront  plus 
vous  voir.  7.  Je  suis  forcd,  Monsieur,  de  m'adresser  k 
vouf  puisque  je  ne  puis  avoir  recours  h  elle.  8.  Ne  lui 
parlez  jamais  de  moi,  elle  me  d^teste,  et  je  le  lui  rends  bien. 
9.  Quand  on  sent,  dit  Vauvenargues,  qu'on  n'a  pas  de 
quoi  se  faire  estimer  de  quelqu'un,  on  est  bien  pr^s  de  le 
hair.  10.  Je  vous  donnerai  un  conseil  salutaire,  et,  pour 
recompense,  je  ne  vous  deniande  que  le  secret. 

11.  Dissipe  tea  douleurs, 

Et  ne  me  trouble  pas  par  ces  indignes  pleura.  — (BoUeau. ) 

12,  Je  vous  Vai  d^ji  dit,  aimez  qu'on  vous  censure  ; 
Mais  ne  vous  reudez  pas  d6s  qu'un  sot  vous  reprend. — 

(BoUeau.) 

*  Done  l8  often  nsed,  especially  after  an  boperative,  to  give  more  energy 
to  tlie  expression,  to  mark  some  Impatience,  etc 


XXXBCISES.  61 


16. 


ibimble,  d6  (m.) 

work-box,  ho'Ue  d  ouvrage  (f.) 

to  leave  it  to^  «'ew  remettre  d. 

to  lay  it  to,  s'en  prendre  A. 

to  appeal  to,  en  appeier  <L 

to  trust  (p.),  sejitr  d. 

to  come  ami  meet,  vcnir  au-devant  de. 

to  be  quite  (l;irk,  falre  tout  dfait  nuit. 

to  apply  to  (p.),  8'adre88er  d ;  avoir  reeours  A. 

to  succeed  (to  be  successful),  riussir. 

to  inquire  for,  demander  (p.) 

to  be  out,  Stre  sorti. 

1.  She  gave  me  a  silver  tMmble,  and  I  gave  her  a 
work-box.  2.  Do  you  not  speak  to  him  when  you  meet 
him  ?  3.  No,  my  mother  has  forbidden  me  to  speak  to 
him.  4.  Tour  brother  wrote  to  you  three  months  ago ; 
have  you  not  yet  replied  to  him  ?  5.  Did  you  think  of 
her  when  you  wrote  to  John  ?  6.  Do  not  go  with  him ; 
you  would  arrive  after  us.  7.  That  does  not  belong  to 
you,  it*  belongs  to  me.  8.  He  leaves  it  to  me.  9.  She 
lays  it  to  us.  10.  I  was  coming  to  you  when  they 
obliged  me  to  go  to  her.  11.  I  appeal  to  them.  12,  I 
speak  to  him,  and  not  to  them.  13.  You  have  deceived 
me,  I  shall  not  trust  you  any  more.  14.  You  should''^^ 
come  and  meet  us  before  it  is  quite  dark.  15.  If  you  apply 
to  him  you  will  not  succeed.  16.  He  inquired  for  me, 
but  he  was  told^**  that  I  was  out.  17.  I  wonder  if  she 
will  come  to  rae  when  she^*  sees  me.  18.  You  are  hurt- 
ing my  leg. 

17. 

(Bole  85.) 

1.  Aves-vous  quelques  v^rit^a  ^faire  entendre  aux  roist  1 
ne  lea  leur  dites  pas ;  vous  ^prouveriez  bientot  les  effets  de 
leur  courroux.  2.  Ella  ne  vous  I'aurait  pas  ^crit,  si  "*  (^) 
elle  n'avait  cru  vous  etre  utile.    3.  Ma  sceur  aurait  voxilu 

*  See  Note,  page  20.  t  See  Note,  page  63. 


b2  £X£ECISE». 

que  je  lui  pretasse  lea  deux  livrea  dont  vous  m'avez  fait 
cadeau.  4.  Je  ne  les  lui  donnerai  pas,  car  elle  ne  me  les 
rendrait  jamais.  5.  La  dernifere  fois  que  j'ai  eu  le  plaisir 
de  vous  voiFi  vous  avez  promis  de  m'aider  de  vos  condeils, 
ne  vous  le  rappelez-vous  pas  ?  6.  Je  lui  enverrai  ce  paqiiet 
Bans  qu'U  ait  besoin  de  me  le  demander.  7.  Faites-moi  le 
plaisir  de  dire  k  M™^  voire  mere  que  je  compte  aller 
lui  presenter  mes  respects  un  de  ces  jours.  8.  Veuillez 
m'entendre,  je  vous  en  supplie ;  ne  me  renvoyez  pas  ainsi 
^  lui ;  il  se  fait  uu  jeu  de  nus  priferes.  9.  Est-ce  que  vous 
n'avez  pas  vu  le  livre  que  je  lui  ai  pretd  ?  10.  Pardon,  Mon- 
sieur, elle  me  I'a  fait  voir  hier  matin.  11.  Auriez-vous  la 
bont^  de  me  preter  cet  album  j  usqu'k  demain  soir?  j'anrai 
soin  de  vous  le  renvoyer. 

J 2.  Manger  I'herbe d'autrai  I  quel  crime  abominable! 
Rien  que  la  mort  n'dtait  capable 
D'expiersouforfait.  Oulelui  &thiea  voit,~-(La FoiUawe, J 


la 

to  bring  (here),  apporter.  to  repeat,  r6p4ter. 

to  keep,  garder.      toha-veaiancyior,  avoir  dugoiU  pour. 

to  confess,         avouer,      without  ceasi'ig,    aaiis  cease. 

1.  If  you  had  asked  it  from  me,  I  should  have  given  it 
to  you  with  pleasure.  2.  I  shall  not  speak  to  him,  but  I 
shall  write  him  a  long  letter.  3.  Do  not  give  it  to  her  ; 
keep  it  lor  yourself.  4.  They  would"'^  not  show  them  to 
us.  5.  You  must  bring  it  to  them.  6.  They  must  not 
say  so.  7.  That  box  is  very  pretty  ;  I  don't  think  he 
will  give  it  to  us.  8.  He  intends  to  ask  you  (for)  your 
flowers ;  give  them  to  him.  9.  Do  not  give  them  to  him. 
10.  Keep  them  for  me.  11.  Believe  me,  confess  your 
fault  to  me.  12.  Do  not  repeat  that  to  him.  13.  I 
should  never  have  given  it  to  her,  if  she  had  not  asked 
me  for  it.  14.  Here  is  some  good  cloth  which  is  not 
very  dear ;  I  shall  give  it  to  you,  if  you  will  lend  me  three 
hundred  and  seventy  francs.  15.  Please  lend  me  your 
pencil,  I  shall  returnitto  you  to-morrow.    1 G.  They  have 


KXEBCISE8.  6b 

oeen  sought  for  everywhere,  and  have  not  been  found. 
17.  I  have  no  more  fancy  for  these  books;  put  them 
elsewhere.  18.  I  do  not  understand  you;  you  do  it, 
undo  it,  and  do  it  again  without  ceasing. 


10. 

(BtQes  36,  87,  38,  39,  40,  41,  42,  48.) 

1.  Fais-leur*  observer  que  rien  ne  contribue  plus  k  V4co- 
nomie  et  k  la  propretd  que  de  tenir  chaque  chose  k  sa  place. 
2.  N'accordez  pas  toute  votre  attention  k  cat  enfant;  parta- 
gez-la  entre  tous.  3.  Nous  aimons  mieux  voir  ceuxk  qui 
nous  faisons  du  bien  que  ceux  qui  nous  en  font.  4.  Ne 
craignez  pas  de  multiplier  vos  bienfaits,  mais  ne  les  repro- 
chez  jamais,  si  vou.s  voulez  en  goAter  le  fruit.  5.  "Vous 
de'cidez  sans  examen  qu'il  a  eu  tort  de  tenter  cette  entre- 
prise  ;  et  je  ends,  moi,  qu'il  en  retirerahonneuret  profit. 
6.  Je  re§oi3  votre  lettre,  et  je  me  h4te  d'y  r^pondre.  7. 
Quant  k  la  raison  que  vous  m'alleguez,  je  m'y  rends.  8. 
Je  vous  laisserai  ce  livre  pour  quiuze  francs  ;  il  m'en  a 
coute  vingt.  9.  Je  vous  recommande  encore  ce  jenne 
horame,  et  tachez  de  vous  occuper  de  lui  plus  activement 
que  vous  ne  vous  en  etes  occup^  jusqu'k  present.  10.  Si 
vos  amis  commettent  des  fautes  graves,  reprochez-les-leur 
franchement. 


1  When  /aire  is  followed  by  an  Infinitive,  It  must  be  accompanied  by  the  pro- 
nonn  hri,  lexr.  if  the  infinitive  has  a  dir'>ft  o^j  ot.  Kx.  I  can«e<l  himtodrink 
a  jrlass  of  wine,>e  lui  ai/ait  boire  un  venedt  vin.  Tliey  procured  eraiiloyment 
for  him,  on  luifit  oblenir  un  emploi.  But  il  the  infinitive  has  no  direct  object, 
put  U,  la.  /«.<.  i"steati  of  lui.  /«ur.— £x.  They  made  him  consect  to  that  re- 
q'lest,  on  UAl  eonsentir  a  cette  demande. 

When.  l!ist*ad  of  a  pronoun  placed  before,  there  is  a  noun  placed  after, 
put  4  in  tlic  cases  whieli  would  require  ftft,  2eur,  and  no  preposition  in  the 
cases  which  would  require  le,  h.  /ei.— Kx.  I  rao-sed  that  man  to  drink  a 
glass  of  vine,  fai  fait  boire  un  verre  de  vin  a  crt  hommt.  I  shall  make  that 
man  consent  to  that  request,  je  ferai  contenhr  cet  hommt  a  cette  demande. 
Cet  homme  is,  in  the  first  ciise,  indirect  object  ot/aire  boirt;  in  the  second, 
direct  object  of /aire  eonsentir. 

A  is  also  used  after  s'<me  other  French  locations  which  would  require 
the  accusative  in  Kncli-li,  snch  as  outr  dirt,  entendre  dirt,  voir  faire,  voir 
donner,  etc. —  Ex.  I  heaid  yoor  brother  xay  that  you  wonld  come, /m  «»- 
lendu  dire  a  voire  frere  que  vous  viendriet. 


64  EXERCISES. 

1 1.  La  fortune  a  son  prix  ;  I'imprudent  en  abnse, 
L'bypocrite  en  m^dit,  et  I'bonn^te  homme  en  nse. 

—(Deinie.) 

12.  Li,  regardez-moi  1&.  durant  cet  entretien, 

Et  jusqu'au  moindre  mot  imprimez-le-voos  bien. 

— (Mol'Uire.) 

80. 

plate,  assiette  (f.) 

for  (conjunction),  car. 

to  keep  away,  e^iloigner;  at  tenir  ^ignA 

spirited,  ardent. 

to  go  near,  s'approcher  de, 

to  devote,  conaacrer. 

fit  for,  propre  d,. 

to  do  witbout,  se  passer  de, 

to  bring  back,  ramener. 

frame,  cadre  (m.) 

to  bring  (to  take),  porter. 

1.  Bring  me  a  clean  plate,  for  this  is  dirty.  2.  This 
road  is  very  dangerous ;  keep  away  from  it.  3.  You  have 
got  fine  cloth;  give  me  some.  4.  Buy  some,  if  you  wish 
to  have  it.  5.  That  horse  is  too  spirited,  don't  go  near  it. 
6.  This  science  is  very  important,  I  sbul I  devote  all  my 
time  to  it.  7.  You  know  this  man,  do  you  put  trust  in 
him  ?  8.  Yes,  I  do  trust  him.  9.  He  askod  me  (for) 
money,  hut  I  shall  not  lend  him  any.  10.  It  is  a  mis- 
fortune; don't  think  of  it  any  more,  11.  He  does  not 
like  his  husiness ;  he  is  not  fit  for  it.  12.  When  a  man 
is  dead,  he  is  no  longer  thoutrht  of.  13.  When  I  have 
wine,  I  drink  some.  14.  When  I  have  none,  I  easily 
do  without  it.  15.  If  you  go  to  Edinburgh,  I  go  there 
also.  16.  Go  there,  and  do  not  forget  to  bring  back 
your  brother.  17.  This  picture  is  good ;  put  a  frame  to 
it.  18.  When"  you  are  in  the  country,  if  you  have  need 
of  money,  I  shall  bring  you  some  there. 

21. 

(Bnles  44,  46,  46,  47.) 

1.  Chacun  ne  songe  qu'k  soi.     2.  Oeux  qui  sont  amis  de 
tout  le  monde  ne  le  sont  de  personne.      3.    Pourquoi  les 


EX£BCIS£S.  65 

riches  sont-ils  si  durs  envers  les  pauvres  ?  C'est  qu'ils  n'ont 
pas  peur  de  le  devenir.  4.  Le  dieu  lui  rdpondit :  Les  tiens 
cesseront  de  r^gner  quand  un  Stranger  entrera  dans  ton  lie 
pour  y  faire  regner  les  lois.  5.  C'est  un  de  vos  parents 
qui  a  re^u  la  pension  qu'un  de  mes  frferes  a  perdue  I'ann^e 
dernifere.  6.  11  depend toujoursdesoid'agirhonorablement. 
7.  Vous  ditesque  ce  jeune  homme  aime  beaucoup  son  frere ; 
detrompez-vous,  il  u'aime  que  soi.  8.  Leur  fille  est  uiorte 
k  la  campagne  il  y  a  deux  ans,  chez  un  de  nos  amis. 

9.  Qui  ue  songe  qa'k  soi  quand  la  fortune  est  bonne 

Dans  le  malheur  n'a  point  d'amis. — (Florian.) 

10.  J'aime  done  sa  victoire,et  je  le  puis  sans  crime.  — (Comeille. ) 

11.  H  les  prend  pour  des  rois. — Vous  ne  vous  trompez  pas  ; 
Us  le  sont,  dit  Louis,  sans  en  avoir  le  titre. — (  Voltaire.) 

12.  On  pent  toujoura  trouver  plus  malheureux  que  soL 

-^La  Fontaine.^ 

22. 

to  be  angry  at  or  with  (p.),  itre/deh6  centre  ;  en  vouUnrd. 

to  honour,  honorer. 

to  beseech,  supplier. 

populous,  populeux. 

to  live  together  on  good  terms,  ^tre  bien  ensemble, 

temper,  caract^e  (m.) 

1.  Why  axe  you  angry  with  him?  he  loves  you,  ne 
honours  you,  he  respects  you.  2.  He  beseeches  and 
conjures  me  to  go  and^"^  see  him.  3.  Ai'e  you  the 
mistress?  Yes,  I  am.  4.  She  is  happy,  at  least  she 
looks  80.  5.  Friends,  are  you  ready  to  go*  ?  Yes,  we 
are.  6.  And  you,  madam,  are  you  ready  ?  No,  I  am 
.  not.     7.  This  town  is  more  populous  than-"'  she  thinks. 

8.  This  gentleman  wishes  me  to  go,'^^  and  you  don't. 

9.  Our  friends  are  wealthy,  but  we  are  not ;  you  ought 
to  know  it.  10.  When  one  is  sick,  he  is  best  at  home.f 
1 1 .  This  table  is  ours,  and  not  yours.  12.  I  have  found, 
to-day,  a  handkerchief  of  yours  amongst  mine.  13.  A 
handkerchief  of  mine,  you  say  ?  it  is  not  mine,  it  is  your 

•  See  Note  t,  page  106. 
t  See  Role  48,  Observatioa. 


66  EXEBCISES. 

fiicnd's.  14.  A  sister  of  Ms  is  dead.  15.  Is  it  your 
temper  or  hers  that  hinders  you  fi-om  living  together  on 
good  terms  ?  1 G.  She  went,  a  few  days  ago,  to  see  a 
child  of  hers.  17.  Your  boots  are  clean,  but  his  and 
mine  are  not.  18.  Where  have  they  put  those  papers 
of  hers  ? 

28. 

(Rule  48.) 

1.  Je  ne  puis  vous  rieu  promettre  ;  ce  seront  les  circon- 
stances  qui  de'cideront.  2.  Chez  eux  ces  hommes  scut  des 
despotes,  k  la  cour  ce  sont  des  valets.  3.  Platon  disait  de 
I'homme  que  c'etait  un  animal  h}"  deux  jambes  sans 
plumes.  4.  Bien  loin  d'etre  des  demi-dieux,  ce  ne  scut 
pas  meme  des  hommes.  5.  C'est  se  tromper  grossifere- 
ment  que  de*  penser  que  les  richesses  nous  rendent 
heureux.  6.  C'est  un  bien  aimable  garjon  que  votre  frfere. 
7.  C'est  ce  qui  a'appelle  agir  en  ami.  8.  C'est  un  trdsor 
qu'un  ami.  9.  Ce  qui  iniporte  k  tout  homme,  c'est  de 
remplir  ses  devoirs  but  la  terre. 

10.  Ce  que  je  sais  le  mieoz,  c'est  mon  commencement. 

— (  Racine. ) 

11.  Le  plaisir  des  boos  coeurs,  c'est  la  reconnaissauce. 

— (La  Harpe.) 

12.  La  vie  est  un  d^pdt  con  116  par  le  ciel ; 

Oser  en  disposer,  c'est  6tre  crimineL— -f^G'ressef,^ 

M. 

carriage,  voUure  (f.) 

to  stop  the  way,  fermer  le  pasaaga. 

to  judge,  juger. 

to  betray,  trahir. 

to  conquer  (to  take  possession  of),  conqtiirir. 

to  conquer  (to  defeat),  vaincre,  battre. 

a  good  fellow,  un  bon  enfant;  un  bon  garfojk 

to  meet  with,  rencontrer. 

to  contribute,  contribuer. 

to  make  a  fool  of,  «e  moquer  de. 

*  After  e'at  we  put  7U<  de  before  an  infinitive,  and  que  before  a  noon. 


KxzBcist;-*.  67 

1.  It  is  the  king's  carriages  which  stop  the  way.  2. 
It  is  not  you,  it  is  not  we,  that  can  judj^e  them.  3.  This 
is  tlie  best  book  I  ever  read.""  4.  He  is  a  very  learned 
man.  5.  They  are  very  respectable  people.  6.  Can  one 
behave  so?  It  ia  unworthy  of  a  man.  7.  It  is  (a) 
shameful  (thing)  to  betray  faTith.  8.  It  is  to  them  I 
have  applied.  9.  It  is  (a)  glorious  (thing)  to  conquer 
one's  enemies.  10.  To  think  much  is  to  live.  11.  They 
are  the  best  fellows  I  ever  met  with.  12.  Is  it  your 
Mends  that  I  am  to  see  to-morrow  ?  18.  What  contri- 
butes most  to  health  is  temperance.  14.  It  is  useless  to 
speak  to  her;  she  will'^^not  do  it.  15.  A  name,  famous 
too  soon,  is  a  very  heavy  burden.  16.  What  pleases 
me  most  is  that  you  are  coming  to  see  me.  17. 
What  grieves  him  most  is  that  you  make  a  fool  of  hiTti- 
18.  Is  it  to  him  that  they  have  given  bo  much  praise  ? 


SB. 
(Hnles  49,  60,  6L) 

1.  Qu'est-ce  qui  vous  empeche  de  yenir  avec  nous  I  9. 
Est-ce  que  par  liasard  vous  avez  peur  de  rencontrer  voire 
here  ?  3.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  vous  a  fait  ?  4.  A  quoi  pensez- 
VOU8  donc^  ?  5.  De  qui  vous  moquez-vous?  6.  Est-ce 
que  vous  parlez  serieusement  ?  7.  N 'est-ce  pas  que  vouB 
viendrez  avec  nous  ?  8.  II  me  semble  que  vous  Stes  bien 
poltron?  de  quoi  ou  de  qui  avez- vous  peur?  9.  Est-ce 
que  c'est  de  moi,  on  de  voire  soeur,  ou  de  voire  ombre  ? 

10.  La  source  tombait  da  rocher, 
Goutte  k  goutte,  4  la  mer  aflfreuse. 
L'Oc^an,  fatal  an  nocher, 

Lui  dit :  "  Que  me  veax-ta,  pleureaaet 

11.  "  Je  suis  la  tempfite  et  I'effroi  ; 
"  Je  finis  oti  le  ciel  commence. 
"  Est-ce  que  j'ai  besoin  de  toi, 

"  Petiie,  moi  qui  snis  I'immense  ?* 

1  See  Note,  pace  Ml 


68  EXEECISES 


12.  La  source  dit  au  goufFre  amer  : 
"  Je  te  donne,  sans  bruit  ni  gloire^ 
"  Ce  qui  te  manque,  6  vaste  nier, 
**  Une  goutte  d'ean  qu'on  peut  boire  I " 

— (Victor  H-ugo.) 


86. 

to  care  about,    sesoucierde.     to  hurt,  /aire  maid. 

to  knock,  frapper.  to  frighten  (p.),   /aire  peur  d. 

to  mean,  vouloir  dire,      to  complain  of,      se  plaindre  de. 

1.  "Who  told  you  so  ?  2.  To  whom  are  you  speaking? 
3.  Who  will  do  that  for  me  ?  4.  Who  cares  about  it  ? 
5.  Who  knocks?  6.  Whom  did  I  offend ?  7.  Who 
hurt  that  cHld?  8.  Who  is  living  there  ?  9.  What* 
do  you  say?  10.  What  is  he  going  to  do?  11.  What 
prevented  you  from  going?  12.  What  is  the  matter 
with  your  mamma ?^*  13.  What  does  he  mean?  14. 
Should  such  a  thing  happen, f  what  would  you  do?  15. 
Whom  did  you  frighten  ?  16.  Does  he  not  look  un- 
well? 17,  Do  you  not  believe  me  ?  18.  What^  have 
I  to  complain  of? 


•  Different  ways  of  translating  tehat:— 

1   When  placed  btfore  a  nottn,  it  is  translated  by  qutl,  quelle,  quels,  queUes; 

dS  — 

I  don't  know  what  book  yon  mean,       Je  ne  sais  de  quel  livrb  vous  vou/et 

parler. 
What  book  do  yonmean?  De  quki,  livrb  touJez-vous parler f 

2.  When  placed  before  a  verb,  nsed  afHrmatiyely  or  nesatlvely  (but  no» 
interrogatively),  it  is  translated  liy  ee  qui  or  ee  que;  by  ee  qui,  if  what  is, 
in  Kngllsh,  next  the  verb;  by  <•«  que  in  every  other  case;  as — 
What  vexes  me,  is  that  he  will  not    Ck  qci  me  f  Ache,  e'est  qu'il  ne  veut  pas 

study,  Audier. 

Do  you  hear  what  tee  say  7  Entendet-vous  cb  que  nous  disons  t 

The  same  what  is  translated  by  ee  dont  when  followed   by  of,  and  by  ec 
it  quoi  when  followed  by  to : — 

It  is  what  you  may  be  sure  of,  Cett  Ob  dost  vous  pourez  Mre  sHr. 

What  you  trust  to  is  very  uncertain,    Cb  AQtJoirowPotM/ez  est  trh-incertain 

9.  When  placed  before  a  verb  used  interrogatively,  it  is  translated  accoidiiif. 
to  the  61st  Knle  of  this  book. 

t  Turn  this  sentence  and  all  such  into  if:  If  such  a  thing  happened,  et<' 
Had  he  been  more  prudent,  S"«7  avait  dtSplus  prudent. 

X  With  the  verbs  servir  and  seplaindre,  que  is  often  used  instead  of  i  qw ' 
and  de  quoi,  as — Qua  sert  voire  mauvaise  huiueurt 


XXEBCISEa.  09 

27. 

(RtQes  52,  53,  64,  55,  50.) 

1.  Par  ou  Stes-vous  venu,  par  Carlisle  ou  par  Newcastle  1 
2.  Vous  n'avez,  si  je  ne  me  trompe,  que  deux  paires  de 
souliers,  une  bonne  et  une  mauvaise ;  laquelle  mettrez- 
vous  aujourd'hui  ?  3.  Si  c'est  ]k  I'ami  dont  vous  vou» 
vantiez  tant,  je  ne  voua  en  fais  pas  mon  compliment.  4. 
II  y  a  deux  frferes  Matthieu,  I'un  gros  et  court,  I'autre 
grand  et  mince  :  duquel  voulez-vous  parler  ?  5.  Je  parle 
de  celui  dont  la  femme  vient  de  mourir.  6.  Pour  les- 
quelles  de  ces  dames  aviez-vous  des  lettrus  ?  7.  La  ville 
d'oii  vons  venez  n'est  pas  en  Ecosse,  mais  en  Angleterre. 
8.  Je  m'arretai  un  peu  pour  voir  d'ou  il  venait.  9.  Quand 
on  est  roi,  on  depend  de  tons  ceux  dout  on  a  besoin  pour 
86  faire  obdir.  10.  La  bonne  dont  nous  veuuus  de  nous 
ddfaire  nous  a  vole  plusieurs  choses. 

11.  Arri^re  ceux  dont  la  bouche 

.Souffle  le  froid  et  le  chaud. — (La  Fontaine.) 

12.  Toi,  dont  le  monde  encore  iguore  le  vrai  nom, 
t^sprit  myst^rieux,  mortel,  auge,  on  d^muu. 
Qui  que  tu  sois,  Byron,  boa  ou  fatal  g^uie, 

J  'aime  de  tes  concerts  la  sauvage  harmonie. 

—( Lamartine, ) 

28. 

•ngraving,         gratntns  (£.)        to  endeavour,      ie§(/rcer  de, 

to  like  best,      prtf^rer.  task,  tdche  (f.) 

to  travel,  voyager.  to  set  dre  to,       wieWrefe/euA. 

1.  Which  of  these  engravings  do  you  like  best?  2. 
To  which  of  these  gentlemen  did  you  speak  ?  3.  With 
which  of  these  ladies  did  you  travel  ?  4.  Here  are  two 
hats ;  which  will  you  put  on  ?  5.  Here  is  the  street  in 
which  I  was  bom.  6.  That  is  the  road  by  which  we 
came.  7.  What  does  your  mother  say?**  8.  Which 
way  do  you  pass  to  go  to  school  ?  9.  Our  friend  has 
taken  our  pencils;  which  has  he  taken?     10.  The  lady 


70  BXEBCISES. 

you  speak  of  is  dead.  1 1.  Do  you  think  he  will  come  ? 
12.  The  vsdfe  of  the  gentleman  of  whom  you  have  just 
spoken  is  very  clever.  18.  Endeavour  to  finish  the  task 
which  you  have  begun.  14.  He  is  engaged  in  writing 
the  history  of  which  you  saw  the  beginning.  15.  Of 
which  of  these  two  men  are  you  afraid?  16.  In  what 
have  I  oifended  you?  17.  This  is  the  way  through 
which  I  passed.     18.  To  which  house  did  ho  set  fire  f 

29. 

(Hules  97,  58,  69,  60,  61.) 

1.  On  m'a  dit  ce  matin  que  Gustavo  et  son  frfere  ont  en 
chacun  leur  maison  pillee  par  des  voleurs.  2.  L'un  et 
I'autre  avaient,  dit-on,  de  I'argent  cach^  :  ce  sont,  sans 
doute,  ces  deux  trdsors  que  les  voleurs  auront*  flair^s.  3. 
Que  f era-t-on  de  tous  ces  prisonniers  qu'on  a  faits  h,  I'en- 
nemi  ?  4.  Les  gardera-t-on  jusqu'k  la  fin  de  la  guerre,  ou 
les  renverra-t-on  dans  leur  pays  en  ^change  des  ndtres  ? 
5.  Quene''*(*)signe-t-on  la  paix  tout  de  suite,  au  lieu  de 
86  tuer  ainsi  les  uns  les  autres  ?  6.  La  guerre  est  la  plus 
grande  calamity  qui  puisse  affliger  I'humanit^.  7.  On  n« 
devrait  y  avoir  recours  que  quand  on  a  ^puis^  tous  les 
autres  moyens.  8.  Chacun  a  sa  manifere  de  voir.  9. 
Quand  ou  est  jeunes,  riches  et  jolies  comme  vous,  mes- 
dames,  on  n'est  point  r^duitesf  h,  I'artifice. 

10.  A  votre  d,ge,  ma  fille,  on  est  bien  curieuse. — ( Marmontel,  J 

11.  On  doit  consid^rer,  pour  son  proprc  int^rfit, 
Et  les  temps  oil  I'on  vit,  et  les  lieax  oti  Ton  est. 

— (OomeUle. } 
12    Tout  annonce  d'nn  Diau  I'^ternelle  existence  ; 
On  lie  peut  le  compreudre,  on  ne  peat  I'ignorer. 

— f  Voltaire.  J 

•  Besides  its  nsnal  meaning:,  the  future  often  Implies  in  French  doubt 
«n<l  surmise.  Had  the  precedinc  facts  been  certain,  the  usual  past  tense 
would  have  been  used.    In  Eiiglisli,  the  past  is  used  in  both  cases. 

t  When  on  stands  dearly  as  a  definite  pronoun  for  a  woman  or  several 
Ihilividuals.  the  adlectivc  is  put  in  ibe  feminine  or  the  plural,  according 
to  the  COM}. 


KXSACISB8.  71 


80. 


to  hide,  cofher.  to  injure  (p.),        nuire  A  (p.) 

result,  r6sultat  (m.)     in  one's  turn,        d  son  tour. 

circumstance,  circoH.slance{{.)to  delight  in,         se  jjlaire  d. 
wager,  pari  (in,)  to  master,  dompter. 

share,  part  (f . )  to  be  in  want  of,  avoir  besoin  dt 

1.  You  have  been  seen  going  out ;  I  was  told  so.  2 
Hide  yourself,  or  you  will  be  ordered  to  remain.  3. 
People  don't  like  to  be  told  their  faults.*  4.  In  every 
circumstance  we  should"^  do  our  duty,  whatever  be  the 
results.  5.  It  is  said  that  he  has  lost  his  wager.  6.  We 
do  not  always  do  what  we  ought  to  do.  7.  They  have 
each  given  me  his  share.  8.  Both  are  mad.  9.  My 
iamUy  has  been  injured  by  you.f  10.  They  like  each 
other.  II.  Tliey  all  spoke,  each  in  her  turn.  12.  In- 
dustrious scholars  are  Uked,  and  people  delight  in  prais- 
ing them.  13.  People  say  so,  r.nd  it  is  thought  that  the 
news  is  true.  14.  They  praise,  blame,  threaten,  caress 
him,  but,  whatever  they  may  do,  they  cannot  master 
him.  1 5.  Do  you  know  if  the  letters  have  been  received 
which  were  expected?  16.  We  learn  more  easily  what 
we  understand,  than  what  we  do  not  understand.  17. 
Do  you  know  what  is  said  of  you?  18.  We  are  often 
in  want  of  experience,  however^^  old  we  may  be. 

81. 

(Sules  62,  63,  64,  66.) 

1.  Les  sciences,  les  arts  at  les  lettres  sont  pour  ITiomme 
des  ^l^ments  de  bonheur.  2.  La  vivacity  ou  la  langueur 
des  yeux  fait  un  des  principaux  caract^res  de  la  physi- 
onomie.  3.  C'est  dans  cette  vaste  plaine  que  s'est  Uvr^e 
la  bataille ;  ici  campaient  nos  troupes  ;  \k  s'^levaient  les 


*  On  Ii  used  only  In  the  nominative  case,  and  can  never  be  replaced  by 
s  personal  pronoun.  The  third  sentence  must,  therefore,  be  turned  into . 
Wt  do  not  /tie  that  one  should  tell  us  our  faults. 

t  Verba  requiring  a  can  never  be  used  in  the  passive :  all  such  verbs  muit 
absolutely  be  torned  into  the  active  voice. 


72 


BXEBCISES. 


tentes  de  I'ennemi.  4.  II  ne  me  teste  qne  deux  francs  : 
encore  n'en  suis-je  pas  bien  siir.  5.  Aussi  ne  ferai-je  plus 
de  ddpenses  inu tiles.  6.  Tout  le  monde,  noble,  bourgeois, 
artisan,  laboureur,  y  devientsoldat.  7.  S'il  n'est  pas  fort 
riche,  du  moins  a-t-il  de  quoi  vivre.  8.  DAt-il  oublier 
tout  ce  que  j'ai  fait  pour  lui,  je  ne  regretterai  jamais  de 
lui  avoir  4t6  utile.  9.  Une  4p4e  nue,  qui  ne  tenait  qu'k 
un  fil,  fut  suspendue  sur  la  tSte  de  Daraoclfes,  durant  le 
magnifique  banquet  que  lui  donna  Denys  le  Tyran. 

10.  Le  vers  le  mieux  rempli,  la  plus  noble  pens^e 

Ne  peut  plaire  k  I'esprit  quand  I'oreille  est  bless^e. 

—(Boileau. ) 

1 1.  Ou  ton  sang  ou  le  mien  lavera  cette  injure.  — (  Voltairp.  J 

12.  Le  del  ^blouissant,  ce  ddme  luminenx, 

Laisse  6chapper  vers  moi,  du  centre  de  ses  faux, 

Un  rayon  pr^curseur  de  la  gloire  supreme. — ( Colardeau. ) 


gentleness, 

threat, 

prayer, 

look, 

subject, 

fate, 


douceur  (f.) 
menace  (f.) 
prUre  (f.) 
regard  (m.) 
sujet  (in.) 
sort  (m.) 


82. 

envy, 

hold! 

it  is  all  over, 

relations, 

to  require, 

to  determine, 


envie  (f.) 
tenez! 
tout  estfini. 
parents  (m.) 
enAger. 
vouLoir. 


1 .  The  gentleness,  the  kindness  of  the  great  Henry  haa 
been  celebrated  by*  a  thousand  praises.  2.  A  threat,  a 
prayer,  a  look  is  enough.  3.  Great,  rich,  small,  and  poor, 
none  can  escape  death.  4.  Subjects,  friends,  relations,  tiU 
f  tout  J  betrayed  him.  5.  We  had  scarcely  set  out  whenf  he 
was  thirsty.  6.  Perhaps  you  were  wrong  not  to  answer 
his  letter.  7.  Neither  your  fate  nor  mine  is  worthy  of 
envy.     8.  What  is  the  matter  with  your  brother  ?    9. 


*  Pass've  verbs  require  de  or  par  before  the  noun  or  pronoun  whleli 
foUowi  them;  de  when  the  verb  expresses  an  action  in  which  the  body  is  not 
conieriied.  and  par  when  the  verb  expresses  an  action  of  the  body,  or  in 
which  both  the  body  and  mind  are  concerned;  as— 

She  Is  liked  by  everybody,  EOe  est  aimA  de  totU  le  mondt. 

The  Prussians  were  often  beaten  by    Les  Pntssient  ont  Hi  MmvetU  bathu  nv 

the  French,  les  Franfais. 

t  When  after  tearcelf,  is  translated  by  (fue. 


EXERCISES.  73 

Perhaps  lie  will  come  Iw-morrow.  10.  Hold,  here  is  the 
money  which  yoiir  father  ha,s  given  me.  11.  I  have 
visited  the  field  where  the  battle  of  "Waterloo  was  fought 
(se  livrer).  12.  When  your  father  arrived,  all  was  over. 
13.  (Either)  you  or  your  brother  will  come.  14.  This 
sacrifice,  your  interest,  your  honour,  God  requires  it. 
15.  Time,  wealth,  life,  everything  belongs  to  one's 
country.  16.  You  were  scarcely  gone  out  when  she 
arrived.  17.  Thus  his  fate  determiued  it.  18.  Perhaps 
I  shall  send  you  to  Paris. 

88. 

(BtQas  66,  67,  68.) 

1.  Dfes  que  s'ouvre  la  bouche  du  m^chant,  les  noirceurs 
et  les  ddsordres  se  r^jDandent  dans  la  soci^t^.  2.  Vous  ne 
savez  pas,  ce  me  semble,  la  maniere  dont  cela  se  fait,  il 
faut  vous  y  prendre  autrement,  3.  II  y  a  longtemps  qu'ils 
ne®^  /io°^  ge  gont  parld.  4.  lis  ne  se  voient  plus  depuis  la 
mort  de  leur  mfere.  5.  Ne  vous  flattez  pas  d'en  etre  quitte 
k  si  bon  march^.  6.  Vous  6tes  toujours  k  vous  flatter  I'un 
I'autre.  7.  II  n'est,  comme  Ton  dit,  pire  eau  que  celle 
qui  dort.  8.  En  fran^ais  on  ne  met  jamais  le  quantiferae 
apr^s  le  mois,  mais  avant.  9.  Dans  les  billets  la  date  se 
met  g^ii^ralementk  la  fin.  10.  Dans  les  lettres  d'affaires 
on  la  met  toujours  en  tete. 

11.  Rends-moi  chr^tienne  et  libre,  k  tout  je  me  soumets. 

— (Voltaire.) 

12.  L'un  et  I'aatre  rival,*  a'arr^tant  an  passage, 

Se  meeare  des  yeoz,  s'observe,  Bi^enviB&ge.--( BoUeau, ) 

84. 

key,  clef  or  cU  (f.) 

to  gain  a  victory  remporter  une  victoire  ;  gagner 

une  bataille. 
to  wound,  blesser. 

in  presence  of,  en  presence  de. 

*  A  Donn  coming  after  Tun  et  Fautrt  !•  always  pnt  In  the  singular. 


74 


SXEBCI8SB. 


boxer, 

to  try  a  cause, 


boxeiir. 

jtujer  un  proein. 


1.  Your  friends  arrived* last  night;  they  were  well 
received  by  everybody.  2.  French  is  spoken  here.  3. 
The  key  will  be  found  easily.  4.  Several  victories  have 
been  gained  by  the  French  in  the  last  war.  5.  He  has 
been  punished  by  his  father.  6.  •  Health  is  maintained 
by  temperance.  7.  These  young  people  have  wounded 
each  other  in  our  presence.  8.  These  boxers  have 
punished  each  other  severely.  9.  They  would  have 
killed  each  other  if  the  police  had  not  shown  themselves. 
10.  Butter  sells  very  dear.  11.  Everything  is  sold  in 
this  country.  12.  Why  do  you  not  go  there  since  you 
were  told  so?  18.  The  battle  was  fought  at  three 
o'clock.     14.  We  have  been  cheated.     16.  How  is  that 


•  The  following  verbs  are  always  oonjagated  with  Stre  In  their  compound 

tenses  :— 

accourir,        to  run  to. 

retoumer. 

to  retnm. 

oiler,             to  KO. 

totnber. 

to  fall. 

arriter,         to  arrive. 

rttomber, 

to  relapse. 

ehoir,             to  fall. 

$ortir, 

to  go  oat. 

dMder,          to  die. 

venir. 

to  come. 

ddchoir,         to  decay. 

devenir. 

to  becoroe. 

4choir,           to  fall. 

intercenir. 

to  interpose. 

0Urer,           to  come  in. 

parvenitf 

to  attain. 

Mourtr,         to  die. 

provcfitr^ 

to  proceed. 

naltrt,           to  be  bom. 

rtckvenir. 

to  become  again. 

partir,          to  set  out 

revenir. 

to  come  bade 

retUrer,         to  come  in  a^ia. 

iurvenir, 

tobefal. 

rttter,           to  stay. 

The  following  verbs  are  sometimea  conjugated  with  avoir,  and  aometimei 

with  Ara,  hut  in  a  diiferent  sense:— 

with  avoir. 

with  itrt. 

eonvenir,             to  suit. 

to  agree. 

demeurtr,            to  remain  no  longer. 

to  remain  still. 

to  end. 

deseendrt,            to  take  down. 

to  come  down. 

monttr,                to  take  up  stairs. 

to  go  np  staira. 

Lastly,  some  verbs  take  avoir  or  Hrt  according  as  they  express  an  action 

m  a  itate.    They  are  :— 

apparattre,    to  appear. 

empirer, 

to  make  or   to   get 

thcmger,         to  change. 

worse. 

toucher,         to  pnt  in  bnd,  to  Ue. 

grandir. 

to  enlarge,  to  grow. 

trottre.          to  increase. 

passer. 

to  pass,  to  cross. 

iibordtr,       to  overflow. 

raieunir. 

to  make  or  to  grow 

dieamp«r,      to  decamp. 

young  again. 

disparattre,    to  disappear. 

vieillir. 

to  make  or  to  grow 

ec/uxpoer,        to  escipe. 

old. 

HXEHCISES.  75 

made  ?     16.  His  cause  will  be  tried  to-morrow.     17. 
This  wood  will  not  bxim.    18.  That  is  sold  veiy  cheap. 

86. 

(Bule  69.) 

1.  Dieu  a  dit,  et  les  choses  ont  4t4  faites  ;  U  a  com- 
maiidd,  et  elles  ont  4t4  crepes.  2.  La  force  des  exercices 
auxquels  on  accoutumait  les  soldats  remains,  les  chemina 
admirables  qu'ils  avaient  construits,  les  mettaient  en  ^tat 
de  faire  des  marches  longues  et  pdnibles.  3.  Qaand  les 
Remains  avaient  plusieurs  ennerais  sur  les  bras,  lis  accor- 
daient  une  trfeve  aix  plus  faible,  qui  se  croyait  trop  heureux 
de  I'obtenir.  4.  Turenne,  dans  le  sifecle  le  plus  f^cond  en 
grands  homraes,  n'eut  point  de  8ui)^rieur  et  ne  compta 
qu'un  rival.  5.  L'empire  qu'Alexandre  avait  conquis  ne 
dura  pas  plus  que  sa  vie,  qui  fut  courte.  6.  Les  hommes, 
oubliant  I'auteur  de  I'univers,  adorferent  le  soleil  qui  les 
^clairait  et  la  lune  qui  prdsidait  h  la  nuit.  7.  Napoleon 
^tait  petit,  mais  ses  yeux  lan9aient  des  dclairs.  8.  Lors- 
qu'il  parlait,  tous  I'dcoutaient  avec  respect.  9.  Aussitot 
qu'il  fut  consul,  il  partit  pour  Dijon  ;  il  rassembla,  il 
organisa  I'arm^e' ;  il  marcha  contre  les  Autrichiens  et  les 
vainquit  a  Marengo.  10.  Mon  pfere  me  fit  jurer  sur  les 
autels  que  je  serais  jusqu'^  la  mort  ennemi  des  Komains  ; 
je  le  jurai,  je  I'ai  accompli. 

11.  Graces  4  mon  amour,  je  me  suis  bien  servie 

Du  pouvoirqu'Amurat  me  donna  sur  sa  vie. — (Racine.) 

12.  La  Mollesse,  k  ces  mots,  sent  sa  langae  glac^e, 
Et,  lasse  de  parler,  .succombant  sous  I'emjrt, 

Soupire,  ^tend  les  braa,  ferme  roeil  et  s'endort. — (BoUeau.) 

86. 

to  bid,  thnrger,  dirt. 

to  give  one's  love,  fairt  «c«  compliments 

to  undergo,  aubir. 

change,  changement  (m.) 

conquest.  eonqiidte  (f.) 


76 


KXEBCISES. 


trouble,  peine  (f . ) 

Norman,  Normand, 

to  free  one's  self  with  difficulty,  se  tirer  difficilemeni. 

to  pass,  se  passer. 

vine,    .  vigne  (f.) 

to  bear,  porter. 

drunkenness,  ivresse. 

politician,  politique. 

plaything,  jouet  (m.) 

to  inculcate  morality,  former  les  bonnes  mofurx 

to  take  (p. )  to  (a  place),  emmener,  mener. 

1.  I  have  seen  your  mother  to-day;  she  told  me  to  give 
you  her  love.  2.  Europe  has  undergone  great  changes 
since  the  Norman  conquest.  3.  I  received  a  letter  this 
morning.  4.  They  wept  the  whole  morning.  5.  Has 
not  your  brother  been  playing  with  Henry  to-day  ?  6, 
Have  you  begun  your  exercise  ?  7.  No,  sir ;  we  have 
not  begun  yet.  8.  Nobody  has  begun.  9.  She  freed  her- 
self with  great  difficulty  from  the  danger.  10.  We  left 
Glasgow  in  the  beginning  of  this  week.  1 1 .  I  made  this 
year  a  large  profit  on  the  grain  which  I  bought  last  year.* 
12.  The  day  has  passed  without  rain.  13.  Anacharsis 
used  to  say  that  the  vine  bears  three  kinds  of  finiit — 
drunkenness,  sensuality,  and  repentance.  14.  Philip, 
the*  father  of  Alexander  the  Great,  was  the  greatest 
politician  of  his  time.  15.  He  said,  people  amuse  chil- 
dren with  playthings,  and  men  with  oaths.  16.1  was 
at  dinner  when  you  entered  my  house.  17.  All  that 
Socrates  said,  all  that  he  did,  tended  to  inculcate 
morality.  18.  I  was  going  to  see  you  when  I  met 
your  brother,  who  took  me  to  the  country. 

87. 

(Same  Rule.) 
1.  Ce  fut  sur  la  fin  d'une  nuit  du  mois  de  septembre 


*  Latt  year,  last  month,  last  tceei,  are  translated  by  rating  demiire,  U  moii 
dernier,  laiemaine  demiere.  But  the  a^ective  dernier  Is  placed  before  the 
noun,  when  th«  last  of  a  number  of  years,  months,  or  weeks,  is  meant  as— 
la  derniire  annh  de  sa  vie,  le  dtmier  mots  de  Vannee.  la  dutiifre  femaine  dts 
mtunet$ 


■XERCI8B8.  77 

qne  je  sortls  da  soaterrain  avec  lea  voleurs.  8.  J'^tais 
arm6  coinme  eux,  et  je  montais  un  assez  bon  clieval  qu'on 
avait  pris  au  lueme  gentilhomme  dont  je  portais  les  habita. 
3.  II  y  avait  si  longtemps  que  je  vivais  dans  les  t^ndbres 
que  le  jour  naissant  ne  maaqaa  pas  de  m'6blouir ;  mais 
peu  h.  peu  mes  yeux  s'accoutumdrent  k,  le  souflFrir.  4.  Nous 
all&nies  nous  mettre  en  embuscade  dans  on  petit  bois  qui 
bonlait  le  grand  chemin  de  L^on.  5.  lA  nous  attendions 
que  la  fortune  nous  offrlt  quelque  bon  coup  k  faire,  quand 
nous  aper9uraes  un  religieux  monte  sur  une  mauvaise  mule. 
6.  Dans  un  caf6  on  parlait  d'un  vers  obscur  d'Horace.  7. 
Un  jeune  oflBcier  fit  remarquer  qu'un  point  d'interrogation 
mis  h,  la  fin  rendrait  le  vers  tres-clair.  8.  Pope,  petit, 
contrefait...et  vexe,  lui  dit :  Mais  savez-vous,  Monsieur, 
ce  que  c'est  qu'un  point  d'interrogation  ?  9.  Oui, 
Monsieur,  c'est  une  petite  chose  crochue  qui  fait  uim 
question. 

10.  Mes  enfants,  dans  ce  village. 
Suivi  de  rois,  il  passa  ; 
Voila  bien  longtemps  de  9a  I 
Je  venais  d'entrer  en  manage. 

11.  A  pied,  montant  le  cotean 
Oil  pour  voir  je  m'^taia  miso, 
H  avait  petit  chapeau 
Avec  redingote  grise. 

12.  Pr^  de  lui  je  me  troublai ; 

n  me  dit :  "  Bonjour,  ma  chfere, 

Bon  jour,  ma  ch^re. " 
n  vous  a  parl^,  grand'm^re, 

D  vous  a  parl6  ! — (B^anger.') 

sa 

it  ma  cuBtomary  with  Frederick,    Frid&ric  avait  eoutume  {de\ 

to  appear,  paraiire. 

viz.,  ^  savohr, 

to  ask  (p. )  questions,  /aire  de»  questions  A 

to  happen,  arriver. 

to  enlist,  if  engager. 

the  German  dialect  VaUemand. 

to  give  notice  to,  avertir  (p.) 

tongue,  kaigw  (f.) 


78  KXJBBCISB8. 

to  cantioD,  priveniir. 

at  the  ganie  time,  en  meme  tempi. 

accordingl}-,  en  cons6qiuiiice. 

the  next  day,  le  lendemain. 

to  strike,  /rapper. 

plainly,  clairemaU. 

to  bear,  porter. 

musket,  mousquet  (m.) 

to  cry  (to  exclaim),  s'^crier. 

to  be  bereft  of  one's  senses,  avoir  perdu  la  tUe. 

It  was  customary  with  Frederick  the  Great,  whenerer 
a  new  soldier  appeared  in  his  guards,  to  ask  him  three 
questions,  viz. — "How  old  are  you?  How  long  have 
you  been  in  my  service  ?  Are  you  satisfied  with  your 
pay  and  treatment  ?  "  It  happened  that  a  young  soldier, 
bom  in  France,  who  had  served  in  his  (own)  country, 
desii'ed  to  enlist  ia  the  Prussian  service.  His  figure 
caused^  him  to  be  immediately  accepted ;  but  he  was 
totally  ignorant  of  the  German  dialect,  and  his  captain 
giving  him  notice  that  the  king  would  question  him  in 
that  tongue  the  first  time  he  should  see  him,  cautioned 
him  at  the  same  time  to  learn  by  heart  the  three  answers 
that  he  was  to  make  to  the  king.  Accordingly,  he 
learnt  them  by  the  next  day ;  and  as  soon  as  he  appear- 
ed in  the  ranks,  Frederick  came  up  to  interrogate  him ; 
but  he  happened  to  begin  with  the  second  question,  and 
asked  him,  "  How  long  have  you  been  ia  my  service  ?** 
"  Twenty-one  years,"  answered  the  soldier.  The  king, 
struck  with  his  youth,  which  plainly  indicated  that  he 
had  not  borne  a  musket  so  long  as  that,  said  to  him 
much  astonished,  "How  old  are  you?"  "One  year, 
an't  please  your  majesty"  fn^en  deplaise  a  Voire  MajesteJ. 
Frederick,  more  astonished  stiU,  cried,  "  You  or  I  must 
certainly  be  bereft  of  our  senses !"  The  soldier,  who 
took  this  for  the  third  question,  replied  fiimly  faveo 
aplomb  J,  "  Both,  an't  please  your  majesty." 

39. 

(Bxiles  70,  71,  72,  78.) 
1.  Econtez,  parlez,  lisez,  ^rivez  frangais  le  plui  que 


EXEKCI8E8.  79 

vovis  pourrez.  2.  Domandez-lui  s'il  serait  venu  avec  nous 
s'il  n'avait  eu  rien  h  faire.  3.  lis  n'auraient  pas  dft  aller 
ail  bal  sans  vctre  permission  ;  c'est  fort  mal  k  eux.  4. 
Coranient !  j'aurais*  travaill^  toute  ma  vie  pour  si  peu  ! 
5.  Dnss^-je  y  perir,  j'irai.  6.  Quandj'auraifini  lea  Merits 
d'Hoinere  et  de  Virgile,  et  que  je  me  serai  bien  pdn^tr^  de 
toutes  leurs  beaut^s,  je  me  mettrai  aux  autrea  pofemes 
^piques.  7.  Si  vous  allez  k  la  canipagne,  j'irai  avec  vous  : 
je  ne  veux  plus  vous  quitter,  8.  Si  vous  vendiez  ce  piano, 
vous  en  auriez  bien  300  francs.  9.  S'il  venait  k  passer 
chez  moi  et  que  je  n'y  fusse  pas,  mes  gens  lui  diraient  oil 
nous  somnies  all^s.  10.  Je  serais  tr^s  honor^  si  voiu 
m'accordiez  voire  protection,  et  si  vous  pouviez  m'obtenir 
un  emploi  prfes  de  vous.  11.  Je  voudrais  bien  que  M. 
voire  frfere  pfit  nous  accompagner.  12.  Aussitot  qu'il 
arrivera,  veuillez  me  prdvenir.  13.  Dans  sa  trage'die  d© 
Cviitia,  Comeille  fait  dire  ^f  Augusta,  empereur  dcs 
Rom&ais,  maitrisant  I'orage  do  sa  colore  : 

Je  sais  maltre  de  moi  comme  de  I'aniven  i 
Je  le  euia — je  le  venx  1 

40. 

task,  tAche  (f.),  travaM  (m.) 

to  take  a  walk,  faire  une  promenade. 

to  take  (p.),  cf'iidvire, 

to  do  a  servioe,  rendre  un  service. 

1.  Nobody  knows  if  he  will  die  to-day  or  to-morrow. 
2.  The  soldiers  will  do  their  duty  well,  if  they  are  well 
commanded.  3.  I  sliould  be  pleased  if  I  saw  you  doing 
your  duty.  4.  When  he  has  finished  his  task,  he  will 
take  a  walk.  5,  As  soon  as  you  have  done  writing,  we 
shall  dine.  6.  When  you  are  ready,  we  shall  begin.  7. 
Will  you  come  with  me  ?  As  you  like.  8.  I  shall  leave 
in  a  moment.  9.  We  should  always  do  our  duty.  10, 
Will  you  do  your  sister  this  service  ?    11.  I  should  do  it 

*  The  conditional,  besides  its  a«nal  Import,  often  means  surprise ;  a»- 
Oonl'l  yon  ever  be  Riiilty  of  that,  Tu  aurait/ait  cela,  toil — MerJ  i. 

♦  M-tf  Note  |Mj;e  tj!i. 


M  EXESCISE8. 

if  I  could.  12. 1  shall  take  her  there  if  she  will  go.    13. 

I  should  take  her  there  if  she  would  go.  14.  You 
should  write  more  than  you  do.  15.  They  are  not 
wUling  to  come.  1 6.  Should  I  go  there  ?  17.  He  should 
have  paid  the  debt.*     18.  I  shall  retomui  one  moment. 

41. 

(Rules  74,  75,  76.) 

1.    n  veut  qo'aprfes  avoir  sdjounid  quelques  mois  en 
Suisse,  nous  visitions  ensemble  tout  le  nord  de  I'ltalie.  2. 

II  semble,  en  vous  lisant,  que  vous  me  parliez,  que  vous 
me  donniez  de  sages  conseUs.  3.  C'est  une  erreur  bien 
deplorable  que  les  hommes  aient  attach^  des  noma 
pompeux  aux  plus  foUes  entreprises.  4.  II  faudra  qu'ils 
■)beissent  s'ils  ne  veulent  pas  qu'on  les  punisse.  5.  Je  ne 
ioute  pas  qu'avant  deux  ann^es  cette  ville  n'ait  beaucoup 
4tendu  son  commerce.  6.  Croyez-vous  qu'ils  aient  re9u 
ma  lettre  ?  7.  Quelque  obstind  qu'on  soit,  il  faut  bien 
que,  bon  gr4  mal  grd,  on  se  rende  h.  I'^vidence.  8.  Dieu 
exige  que  nous  employiona  au  soulagement  de  uoa  sem- 
blables  les  richesses  qu'il  nous  a  d^parties.  9.  II  se  plaint 
qu'on  I'ait  calomni^.  10.  Ce  magistrat  se  plaint  que  vous 
avez  mdconnu  son  caract^re.t 

11.  Craignez,  seigneur,  craignez  que  le  ciel  rigoureox 

Ne  vous  haisse  assez  pour  exaucer  vos  voeux  ! — (Racine.) 

12,  Mais  il  me  semble,  Agn6s,  si  ma  m^moire  est  bonne, 

Que  j'avais  d^fendu  que  vous  vissiez  personne. — (MoliircJ 

42. 

tower,  tour  (f.)  round,  rond. 

devotion,       devoutment  (m.)  to  deny,  nier. 


•  When  thovld,  might,  could,  and  might,  are  followed  by  a  past  indefinite, 
they  are  translated  by  the  conditional  past  of  devoir,  vouioir  or  pouvoir,  and 
the  English  participle  is  put  in  the  infinitive:  il  adkait  o6  patkk  la  dette. 

t  Observe  that,  in  the  9th  sentence,  the  subjunctive  is  required  after  m 
plaindre  because  there  is  some  doubt  implied  upon  the  subject  of  the  com 
plaint,  whilst  in  the  10th,  aa  there  ia  do  doubt  whatever  in  the  magistrateV 
miad,  the  indicative  is  used. 


KEEBCISE8.  81 

1.  It  is  better  that  you  should  come  with  me.  2.  II 
seems  that  you  have  forgotten  to  write  to  her.  3.  It  seems 
to  me  that  this  tower  is  round.  4.  Will  you  go  to  the 
country  this  morning  ?  No,  I  am  afraid  it  will  rain.  6. 
I  fear  she  will  not  come.  6.  Is  it  possible  that  that  ha;* 
happened?  7.  I  am  eistonished  that  you  have  not  seen 
him.  8.  I  have  been  walking  in  the  Champs-Elyseea 
this  afternoon,  and  whom  do  you  think  I  met  as  I  waj 
coming  back  ?  9.  Do  you  doubt  that  I  am  your  friend, 
after  so  many  proofs  of  devotion?  10.  We  hope  he  wil' 
soon  come  back  from  America.  11.  I  am  glad  that  you 
are  so  well.  12.  I  deny  that  that  is  true.  13.  They 
are  afraid  that  the  general  has  not  experience  enough. 
14.  You  do  not  think  he  has  won  the  prize.*  15.  Take 
care  lest  he  should  see  you  here.  16.  Do  you  forget 
that  I  am  older  than  you  ?  17.  Do  you  wish  me  to  come 
to  your  house  to-naght?f  18.  The  law  of  God  orders 
QB  to  love  our  enemies. 

4a 

(T  Ues  77,  78,  79,  80.) 

1.  11  n'y  a  pas  nn  homme  qui  n'ait^  {*')  ses  d^fauts  ;  ie 
meilleur  est  celui  qui  en  a  le  moins.  2.  Rome,  sous  quel- 
que  gouverneraent  qu'elle  ait  ^t^,  a  4i6  heureuse  dans  ses 
entreprises.  3.  L'empereur  Antonin  est  un  des  plus 
grands  princes  qui  aieut  r^gud.  4.  II  n'est  metal  si  dur 
que  le  feu  n'auioUisse.  5.  On  ne  pent  juger  votre  travail 
avant  que  vous  I'ayez  accompli.  6.  Peut-on  livrer  des 
batailles  centre  une  nation  aguerrie  qui  se  defend 
courageusement,  sans  qu'il  y  ait  de  part  et  d'autre  da 


•  This  sentence  may  be  translated  in  two  difTerent  ways:  L  If  I  simply 
recapltuluie  or  repeat,  for  argument's  sake,  my  interlocutor's  opinion  withont 
Implying  tlie  least  doubt  about  it,  I  shall  s&y,  Vout  ne  croj/ez pas  qu'il  a  rem- 
porte  le  prix.  2.  But  if,  on  the  contrary,  I  am  questioning  my  interlocator 
kbuut  bis  opinion,  then  I  must  use  tbe  subjunctive. 

t  After  veriis  expressing  wish  or  tptU,  the  following  Terb  must  always  be 
put  in  tlie  snbjunitlve,  unless  tbesul'jects  of  both  verbs  should  be  in  the  same 
peritun ;  in  which  case  tiie  second  is  put  in  the  intiuitire,  as:  /  wish  I  wera 
neb.  J*  toudrai*  gi  BB  richt.    See  Obeervationi  of  Rule  83. 


82  KXEBCISEB. 

Bang  r^pandu  T  7.  Thal^s  est  le  premier  des  Grecs  qui  ait 
enseignd  que  Ics  4ines  sont  immortelles.  8.  Je  ne  sache 
pas*  un  pays  plus  agrdable  que  le  v6tre.  9.  Le  meilleur 
usage  que  I'on  puisse  faire  de  sou  esprit,  dit  Fduelon, 
c'est  de  s'en  d^fier. 

10.  II  faat  des  ch&timeuts  dont  I'anivers  fr^misse. — (Radne.) 

11.  Un  homme  en  vaut  un  autre,  k  moins  que,  par  malheur, 
L'lm  d'eux  n'ait  corrompn  sou  esprit  et  sou  coeur. 

— (Destouchea.  J 

12.  Quel  indigne  plaisir  peut  avoir  l'avaric«  ? 
Etqne  sert  d'amafiser  &  moins  qu'on  ne  jouisse  ? 

—(Jiour«a,uil.) 

44. 

drobkennan^  tvre«M(l) 

sbameful,  honteux. 

to  be  proved,  itre  6prouv6,  4tr«  d  fjjprnum. 

to  soften,  adoucir. 

motive,  motif  (m.) 

couduct,  eonduite  (1) 

to  marry  (p.),  ipouser. 

retreat,  retraite  (f.) 

1 .  You  will  not  be  esteemed  unless  you  are  modest. 
2.  Drunkenness  is  the  most  shameful  state  into  which"  a 
man  can  fall.  3.  One  may  say  that  the  dog  is  the  only 
animal  whose  fidelity  is  proved.  4.  There  is  no  grief  that 
time  does  not  ^^  (*)  soften,  6.  We  must  leave  before  it  is 
night.  6.  The  merit  of  having  done  a  good  action,  is  the 
only  good  that  cannot  bo  taken  from  us.  7.  Whoever  you 
meet,  don't  stop.  8.  Whatever"  your  motives  may  be, 
your  conduct  will  be  condemned.  9.  Come  here,  that  I 
may  speak  to  you.  10.  Although  adversity  is  ane\il,  it 
is  often  a  remedy  against  the  vices  of  prospei'ity.  II.  Go 
away,  lest  he  should  come.  12.  He  is  the  only  man  that 
I  can  trust.  13.  There  are  few  men  who  know  where 
to  look  for  true  glory.  14.  She  will  never  marry  a  man 
who  does  not  fetu'  God.  15.  She  has  married  a  man  who 
fears  God.    16.  Look  for  a  retreat  in  which  you  may  be 

•  We  gay  in  the  subjunctive,  Je  ne  taehe  pat,  que  je  sacAe,  fotfe  m  tonnau 
pot,  and  this  idiom  gives  tlie  sentence  an  Idea  of  doubt. 


EXEKCISES. 


8a 


qniet.  17.  The  •wise  (man)  behaves  in  such  a  way  that 
men  caunot  reproach  him  with  anything.  18.  Behave 
BO  that  your  parents  may  glory  in  having  such  a  son. 


48. 

(Rules  81,  82.) 

1,  Je  n'anrais  pas  cru  qu'il  eM  4t4  possible  d'apporter 
an  anssi  prompt  remfede  au  mal.  2.  Je  u'avais  pas  pens^ 
qu'il  efit  apportdsi  promptement  tout  ce  que  nous  I'avions 
chargd  d'acheter.  3.  Les  magistrats  craignaient  que  de 
plus  grands  d^sordres  n'aiTivassent,  4.  Qui  de  noua 
croyait  qu'ils  eussent  rempli  aussi  exactenieut  leurs  en- 
gagemeuts  1  5.  Aprfes  avoir  travailM  toute  ma  vie  au 
profit  des  autres,  il  serait  temps  que  je  sougeasse  h.  moi  et 
que  je  pourvusse  aux  besoins  qui  peuvent  survenir  un 
jour.  6.  Nous  nous  soncierions  ])ea  qu'ils  se  fachassent 
centre  nous.  7.  II  faudraib  qu'il  achev4taujourd'hui  son 
travail,  afin  que  demain  je  le  revisse  et  que  tu  pusses 
aussitot  le  transcrire.  8.  A  peine  suis-je  arriv^  que  d^jk 
11  voudrait  que  je  repartisse.  9.  II  suffirait  que  vous 
parussiez  un  moment,  pour  qu 'aussitot  chacuu  dispanit. 
10.  Je  ne  crois  pas  que  vous  eussioz  eu  plus  de  patience 
que  raoi.  11.  Sparte  ^tait  sobre  avaut  que  Socrate  eut 
loud  la  sobridtd. 


12.  J'ai  mfime  d^fendu  par  une  expresse  loi 
Qu'oD  os&t  pronoucer  votre  noin  devaut 


moi. — (Racine.) 


46. 


fellow-citizen, 

concitoyen. 

bare. 

ntt. 

to  cut  oflf, 

couper. 

regulation, 

rdglement. 

blow, 

coup  (m.) 

to  be  married, 

se  marier. 

bones, 

OS  (m. ) 

dowry, 

dot{f.) 

Salamis, 

Salamine. 

to  scatter. 

Jeter,  disperser. 

to  burn, 

br&ler. 

to  pay  honours, 

rendre  les  hoiineura 

ashes, 

cendresii.) 

to  be  enough. 

svffire. 

Lycurgus, 

Lycurgue. 

to  court, 

/aire  la  cour  a. 

to  lie. 

coHclier. 

for  the  sake  of, 

pour  tamour  de. 

^ 


84  EXEBCISES. 

1.  I  should  like,  my  son,  that  you  would  learn  yout 
lessons  better,  in  order  to  please  your  teachers.  2,  What 
man  would  like  to  be  reproached  for  a  small  fault  ?  3.  It 
was  necessary  that  I  should  go  there.  4.  Trajan  wished 
that  his  fellow-citizens  should  love  him  as  a  father. 

5.  Caligula  wished  that  the  Roman  people  had  only  one 
head,   in  order  to  be  able  to  cut  it  off  with  one  blow. 

6.  Solon,  when  dying,  ordered  that  his  bones  should  be** 
taken  to  Salamis,  that  they  should  be  burned,  and  that 
their  ashes  should  be  scattered  over  the  country.  7.  The 
laws  of  Lycurgus  ordered  that  children  should  lie  upon 
the  bare  ground.  8.  They  required  them  to  be  brought 
up  in  common,  and  that  the  sons  of  magistrates  should 
be  subjected  to  that  regulation.  9.  They  prescribed 
also  that  women  should  be  married  without  a  dowry. 

10.  Do  you  think  I  might  speak  to  her,  if  I  went  now? 

11 .  I  did  not  think  they  would  write  to  your  sister.  1 2. 
I  am  afraid  she  will  think  that  I  have  forgotten  her. 

13.  I  did  not  know  that  you  had  studied  mathematica 

14.  Caligula  ordered  that  the  Romans  should  pay  him 
divine  honours.  15.  Was  it  not  enough  that  you  should 
send  somebody  there  ?  16.  It  is  a  mollifying  thing  for 
a  youBg  lady  that  a  man  should  court  her  for  the  sake 
of  her  fortune.  17.  He  was  the  only  man  whom  I 
could  trust.  18.  I  could  never  have  believed  that  you 
would  have  spoken  so. 

47. 

(Bnles  83,  84,  85.) 

1 .  Hire  haut  est  un  ridicule  et  une  sottise.  2.  Celul 
qui  a  t4chd  de  vivre  de  niani^re  k  n'avoir  pas  besoin  de 
Bonger  h,  la  mort,  la  volt  venir  sans  effroi.  3.  Je  suis 
vraiment  d^sold  de  ne  pas  pouvoir  faire  ce  que  vous  me 
demandez.  4.  Je  voudrais  ne  pas  savoir  ^crire,  disait 
N^ron,  forc^  de  signer  un  arret  de  mort.  6.  La  religion 
nous  apprend  k  respecter  nos  maltres,  k  souflfrir  nos  ^gauz, 
h.  etre  atfables   envers  nos  inf^rieurs,   k  aimer  tons  les 


^ 


KXERCISESi  86 

hommea  comrne  nous-mSmes.  6.  II  faut  rougir  de  com- 
mettre  des  fautes  et  non  de  les  avouer.  7-  Voas  avez 
tort  de  penser  que  vous  pouvez  faire  trembler  I'Europe 
aux  premiers  pr^paratifs  de  guerre.  8.  J'ai  fait  parler 
hier  k  M.  votre  pfere,  raais  il  a  fait  la  sourde  oreille.  9. 
Mon  amitid  ne  vous  est  pas  suspecte,  et  j'ai  acquis  asaei 
d'exp^rience  pour  faire  ^couter  mes  avis. 

10.  Qui  pardonne  aisement  invite  i  I'ofifenser. — {GomeUle.) 

11.  Vouloir  tromperle  ciel,  c'est  folic  i  la  tene. — ( La  Fontaine. ) 

12.  Dieu  t'a  fait  pour  I'aimer,  et  uou  puur  le  comprendre. 

-~(  Voltaire.  J 

48. 

to  reflect,  r4JUchir. 

to  walk  in,  enfrer. 

to  inquire  particularly  into  (th.),  examiner  (th.)  de  pris. 

to  procure  (tli.).for  (p.),  /aire  avoir  (th.)  A  (p.) 

to  send  for,  envoyer  cherclier,  /aire  venir. 

close  by,  tout  pr^. 

1.  Experience  will  prove  to  you  the  necessity  of  re- 
flecting before  you  speak,  and  yet  more  before  you  write. 

2.  He  wishes  to  see  you  before  you  go  ;  please  walk  in. 

3.  I  thought  I  sliould  never  see  you  again.  4.  Do  you 
not  remember  meeting  him  at  the  Louvre  ?  5.  A  teacher 
must  ptmish  the  child  who  dares  to  disobey  him.  6.  I 
want  to  inquire  particularly  into  that  affair,  before  tell- 
ing you  what  I  think  of  it.*"  7.  It  is  very  difficult  to 
please  everybody.  8.  An  old  proverb  says,  'It  is  better 
to  give  than  to  receive."  9.  Do  not  trust  him;  he  wants 
to  deceive  you.  10.  Here  are  some  young  ladies  who 
delight  in  singing,  playing,  chatting,  and  laughing.  11. 
Show  me  that.   1 2. 1  shall  procure  that  situation  for  you. 

13.  If  you  like  I  shall  send  for  the  doctor.  14.  Do  you 
want  to  get  your  throat  cut  ?  15.1  shall  have  three  new 
gowns  made  next  week.  16.  He  has  had  a  new  house 
built  in  London.  17.  Where  do  you  get  your  shoes  made  ? 
18.1  get  them  made  at  the  slioemaker's  who  lives  close  by. 

•  Teenier  requires  de  after  it  wlicn  it  mcai)&lo  have  an  opinion  of,  or,  inothar 
words,  wlien  it  bas  a  direct  object ;  It  takes  it  wlieu  it  iiieaiis  to  apply  onii 
wUnd  to 

3  O 


86  EISBCISES. 

40. 

{Rules  86,  87.) 

1.  Elle  gravissait  dans  les  teuebresjsaisissant  tour  li  tour 
les  bra-nches  et  les  racines  qu'elle  rencontrait.  2.  Toutes 
les  planfetes  circulant  autour  du  soleil  paraissent  avoir  e't^ 
miaes  en  mouvement  par  une  impulsion  commune.  3.  Les 
trois  voyageura  p^liasants  voyaient  k  la  clart^de  lafoudre 
passer  le  lion,  le  tigre,  le  lynx,  le  leopard,  tremblants  com- 
me  eux.  4.  Une  humeur  plaisante  n'est  pas  celle  des 
vieillards  souffrants.  5.  Nous  avons  ^prouv^  une  inexpri- 
mable  joie  en  apercevant  le  port  que  nous  n'espdrions  plua 
revoir.  6.  lis  ont  eu  la  tem^rit^  de  s' engager  sur  cette 
mer  mugissante.  7.  Point  d'importuns  laqnais  dpiant  nos 
discoura,  comptant  nos  morceaux  d'un  ceil  avide  et  mur- 
murant  d'un  trop  long  diner.  8.  lltrouvales  Mac^doniena 
non  seulement  aguerris,  maia  encore  triomphants.  9. 
C'est  une  personne  d'un  naturel  doux,  ne  grondaut,  ne 
contredisant,  ne  desobligeant  jamais.  10.  II  y  a  des 
peuples  qui  vivent  errants  dans  les  ddserta. 

11.  Je  peindrai  les  plaisirs  en  foule  renaissants, 

Les  oppresseurs  du  peuple  k  leur  tour  g^missants. 

— (Boileau.) 

12.  J'entends  des  oris  de  guerre  au  milieu  des  nauf  rages, 

Et  les  sons  de  I'airain  se  m^Iant  aux  orages. — (La  Harpe,) 


60. 


to  cry  out, 

crier. 

to  smoke. 

fumer. 

to  purpose, 
lowing, 
ox, 
bleating. 

se  proposer  de. 
mugissaut. 
bosuf  (ill.) 
belant. 

pipe, 

disposition, 
to  banter, 
while. 

pipe  (f.) 
carartire  (m.) 
railler. 
tout  en. 

1.  I  saw  her  arriving.  2.  I  hear  somebody  crying  out. 
8.  Early  rising  is  very  good  for  the  health.  4.  I  pui-pose 
going  to  London  next  week.  5.  I  remember  it  without 
your  telling  me.  6.  Those  wretches  are  trembling  with 
fear.  7.  Lowing  oxen  and  bleating  sheep  came  in  crowds. 


EXERCISES.  87 

8.  You  will  find  them  smoking*  their  pipes.  9.  1 
hear  him  rising  every  morning  at  a  quarter  past  five. 

10.  "We  have  obtained  peace  by  making  great  sacrifices. 

11.  This  woman  is  of  a  good  disposition,  obliging  every 
one  whenever  she  can,  12.  He  tells  him  the  truth, 
while  bantering  him.  13.  I  doubt  his  coming.  14.  I 
am  not  afraid  of  his  forgetting  me.  15.  I  am  thinking 
of  that  poet's  having  finished  so  long  a  poem  in  so  short 
a  time.  16.  I  see  him  playing  in  the  street.  17.  I  saw 
him  playing  in  the  street.  18,  You  laugh  at  my  not 
being  able  to  speak  French ;  don't  you  ? 

61. 

(Bales  88,  89.) 

1.  Us  ont  4t4  exempt^s  des  charges  publiques,  attendn 
leurs  infirmit^s.  2.  Pass^  dix  heures,  je  ne  vous  attends 
plus.  3.  Nous  sommea  trois,  y  compris  voire  soeur,  4. 
Vous  avais-je  accord^  toute  ma  confiance  pour  la  voir  si 
indignement  trahie  ?  5.  La  justice  est  due  aux  pauvres 
aussi  bien  qu'aux  riches,  6,  Le  champ  de  bataUle  ^tait 
couvert  de  morts  et  de  mouranta  ^tendus  lea  una  sur  le» 
autres.  7.  Lea  assi^gda  n'ont  rendu  la  villa  qu'aprfea  avoir 
defendu  longtempa  contre  una  arm^e  entifere  leura  families, 
leurs  biena  et  leur  liberty.  8.  Lea  meilleurea  harangues 
sent  celles  que  la  cceur  a  dict^oa,  9.  II  a  eu  toua  lea  d^sa- 
gr^ments  que  noua  aviona  pens^,  10.  Parmi  cetto  foule 
de  princea  que  I'abus  du  pouvoir  a  pr^cipit^a  du  trone, 
plusieura  ont  p^ri  pour  expier  dea  in  j  urea  peraonnellea  dont 
ila  s'etaicnt  rendus  coupablea  ou  qu'ila  avaient  autoris^es. 

11.  II  balance  dans  I'air  sa  redontable  ^p^ 
Fumante  encoH-  du  sang  dont  il  I'avait  tremp^e. 

—(C.  Delavigne.) 

12.  0  soeurs,  6  pales  soeurs  I  sur  qui  done  priez-vous  ? 
Qui  de  vous  va  mourir?  Qui  de  vuus  abandonne 
Un  vain  reste  de  jours  oubli^s  et  perdus  ? 


•  Translate  a»  if  it  were  in  the  act  oj  tmoking,  en  train  de  fumer. 
t  Tlie  «  ut  encore  may  t>e  «lided  iu  poetry. 


88  EXRBCISES. 

Car  Toas,  tilles  de  Dieu,  vous  ne  les  comptez  plus. 

(A.  de  Mvsaet.  j 

62. 

to  tear,  ddehirer. 

to  keep  op,  entretenir. 

to  separate  (from  each  other),     se  s4parei 

tight,  combat  (m. ) 

to  conceive,  concevoir. 

Caesar,  Cesar. 

to  ravage,  ravager. 

like,  ressembknit, 

Aristides,  Aristide. 

fellow-citizena^  concitoyen». 

injury,  offense  (f). 

to  apply  (tb. ),  appliquer. 

blue-stocking,  jenime  xavante,  has-hlen. 

weak-minded  people,  esprita  faibles. 

1.  How  many^"^  praises  have  been  given  to  Washing- 
ton !  2.  Spain  is  almost  always  torn  by  intestine  wars 
kept  up  by  ambition.  3.  The  armies  having  separated, 
the  fight  ceased.  4.  We  have  read  tlie  books  which  you 
have  lent  us,  and  we  should  have  read  them  again,  if  you 
had  not  asked  them  back  so  soon.  5,  I  do  not  doubt^^ 
but  you  will  use  all  your  efibrts  to^*  fulfil  the  hopes  which 
I  have  conceived  of  you.  6.  How  many^*^'  provinces  has 
not  Cajsar  ravaged !  7.  Wc  have  examined  the  portraits 
which  the  painter  has  sent  us ;  we  have  not  found  them 
like.  8.  Aristides  pardoned  his  fellow-citizens  the  in- 
jury which  he  had  received  from  them.  9.  You  do  not 
always  apply  the  rules  which  I  have  given  you.  10. 
Where  are  the  rewards  you  have  promised  me?  11. 
The  letters  which  M"*  de  Sevigne  has  written  are 
admired  by  everybody.  1 2.  The  comedies  which  Moliere 
has  composed,  the  portraits  which  he  has  given  us  of  the 
miser  and  of  the  blue-stocking,  have  made  him  many 
enemies  among  weak-minded  people.* 


•  Although  the  wording  of  this  paragraph  and  of  the  54th  Is,  In  sonn 
teTitence!<,  contrary  to  the  rates  of  Kiiglish  grammar,  it  ia  used  here  to  Uitt» 
Irate  butter  the  french  rules 


l:xj:;£cisi:9.  89 

63. 

(Same  Hules.) 

1.  Les  grands  orateurs  que  j'ai  entendus  parlor  m'ont 
rallid,  un  muraent  du  moins,  aux  opinions  que  jo  leur*  ai 
entendu  soutenir  tour  k  tour.  2.  Pour  etre  sfir  de  la 
v^rit^  de  ces  choses,  il  faut  lea  avnir  vues  s'accomplir.  3. 
Vous  avez  aim^  votre  prochain  si  vous  lui  avez  rendu  toua 
les  services  que  vous  avez  pu  et  que  vous  avez  dii.  4. 
Cette  femme  est  plus  instruite  que  je  ne  I'aurais  cru.  6. 
11  est  vrai  que  lui  et  moi  nous  uous  sommes  parl^  des 
yeux.  6.  La  haine  s'est  emparde  de  leurs  ames  :  quelles 
dures  choses  ils  se  sont  dites  !  7.  Les  honneurs  que  j'ai 
re^us,  c'est  men  talent  qui  me  les  a  valus.  8.  Combien 
d'erreurs  n'a-t-on  pas  signages  dans  les  travaux  qu'on  les 
avait  charges  de  faire  !  9.  Le  pen  de  troupes  qu'il  a 
rassembl^es  ont  tenu  ferme  dans  leur  poste.  10.  Lea 
Russes  ont  fait,  en  quatre-vingts  ans  que  les  vues  de  Pierre 
ont  6t4  suivies,  plus  de  progr^s  que  nous  n'en  avons  fa.it 
en  quatre  siecles. 

1 1 .  Que  de  soins  m'etlt  coftt^s  cette  tfite  charmante  I — (Bacine.) 

12.  II  est  si  beau,  I'enfant,  aveo  son  doux  sourire, 
Sa  douce  bonne  foi,  sa  voix  qm  veut  tout  dire, 

Ses  pleurt  vite  apaia«<  ^ ; 
Laissant  errer  sa  vue  Atonn^p  ot  ravie, 
Offrant  de  toutes  parts  sa  juune  4me  a  la  vie 

Et  sa  bouche  aux  baisers  ! — f  Victor  Hugo. ) 

54. 

good  works  fgood  actions),  bonnes  oBuvre*. 

puuishiuent,  punition  (f.) 

to  help,  servir,  aider. 

to  make  (before  an  adj.),  rendre. 

to  relieve,  soulager. 

biuebeard,  Barbebleue. 

delicacy,  dilicatease  (f.) 

to  make  (p.)  ashamed,  faire  honte  a. 

to  pass  away,  s^icouler. 

•  See  Not».  page  tiS. 


90  EXEfiCISSS. 

1.  The  lessons  that  I  have  learned,  the  exercises 
that  I  have  written,  the  rewards  that  I  have  received, 
the  punishments  they^"^  have  given  me,  have  helped 
to  make  me  useful  to  society.  2.  How  many  good 
works  that  great  man  has  done !  3.  How  many  un- 
foitunate  (people)  he  has  relieved  !  4.  The  bells  which 
we  have  heard  ringing,  are  those  which  we  have  seen 
cast.  5.  The  swallows  which  I  have  seen  coming  back 
have  announced  to  me  the  return  of  spring.  6.  Gen- 
tlemen, where  are  the  books  that  I  have  seen  you 
reading,  the  songs  that  I  have  heard  you  singing,  the 
music  books  that  I  have  given  you  yestei-day  ?  7.  AVe 
have  made  them  laugh  when  we  have  told  them  the 
story  of  Bluebeard.  8.  These  pupils  have  more  books 
than  I  have  given  them.  9.  Vauban  has  fortified 
more  towns  than  others  have  destroyed.  10.  The 
tragedies  of  Crebillon  are  not  so  good  as  we  had 
thought.  11.  The  English  have  gained  on  land  more 
victories  than  I  had  thought.  12.  Do  you  remember 
the  intense  heat  which  there  was  in  Belgium  three  years 
ago  ?  1 3.  The  little  affection  which  you  have  shown  me 
proves  that  you  are  no  longer  a  friend  of  mine.  14.  The 
little  delicacy  which  you  have  evinced  in  this  affaii 
should  make  you  ashamed.  15.  The  few  days  which  I 
tuve  hpeiit  in  your  house  have  soon  passed  away. 

65. 

(BnlesQO,  91,  92.) 

1.  n  marche,  dort,  mange  et  boit  tout  comma  les  autres, 
mais  cela  n'empeche  pas  qu'il  ne*  soit  fort  malade.  2. 
Nous  Bommes  plus  riches  que  nous  ne  peiisons.  3.  11  ne 
tient  pas  h  moi  que  cela  ne  se  f asse .  4.  Peu  s'en  est  fallu 
qu'il  ne  ffit  tu^.  5.  Peut-on  nier  que  la  sant^  ne  soit 
preferable  aux  richesses  ?  6,  Je  tremble  que  votre  irhre 
n'arrive  en  ce  moment.     7.  On  ne  peut  pas  douter  que  les 

*  For  the  a«e  of  this  ne.  s»e  Note,  page  33. 


cxEucie:».  91 

[>61es  ne  suient  couverts  d'une  coupole  de  glace.    8.  Voiis 
•vez  bien  peur  que  je  ne  change  d'avis. 

9.  Mais  il  ne  tient  qu'4  voua  qae  son  cLagrin  ne  pas^e. 

—  (jfollere.) 

10.  Et  qae  faire  en  an  glte  k  moius  que  I'on  ue  soiigu  ' 

—  {La  FuitLalnt.) 

11.  Deux  m^decins  n'ont  pa  lui  donner  le  tr^pas  : 
II  ne  mourra  jamais  ! — {De^touches.) 

12.  Ni  I'aveiigle  liasard  ni  I'aveugle  matifere 
N'out  pa  former  mon  ame,  esseuue  de  lumiire. 

— (Laviartint.) 

66. 

fluently,  eourammetU. 

to  scold,  grander. 

to  speak  one's  mind,  dire  safa<;on  de  penaer. 

to  come  and  fetch,  venir  prendre. 

the  fancies,  les  idees. 

to  take  into  one's  head,  se  viettre  dans  la  tite, 

1 ,  I  nnderstand  French  pretty  well,  but  I  hare  not 
yet  learned  it  long  enough  to  speak  it  fluently.  2.  Did 
you  not  speak  ill  of  me  last  night  ?  3.  Ko,  I  always 
speak  well  of  you.  4.  You  should  write  youor  exercises 
better.  5.  We  have  amused  ourselves  very  well  last 
night.  6.  1  do  not  dare  to  speak  to  him.  7.  Take  care 
lest  he  see  you.  8.  I  do  not  deny  that  this  is  true.  9. 
You  will  be  soolded  if  you  don't  take  care.  10.  Why 
(jtt«)  do  you  not  speak  your  mind  to  him  ?  11.  I  will 
not  go  out  if  you  do  not  come  and  fetch  me.  12.  I  shall 
not  go  out  unless  you  come  and  fetch  me.  13.  We  have 
not  seen  him  for  a  fortnight.  14.  We  despise  those 
who  speak  differently  from  what  they  think.  15.  You 
look  better  than  when  you  came  from  Edinburgh.  16. 
Who  does  not  know  the  fancies  which  she  has  taken  into 
her  head?  17.  Take  care  lest  that  child  should  lulL 
18.  It  is  I  who  prevent  his  coming. 

57. 
(Rulea  03,  94,  95,  96,  97,  98,  99,  100.) 
I,  Y  a-t-il  rien  de  plus  rare  qu'un  denii-savani  xnodeste  •' 


92  EXEKCISES. 

2.  Venez  done  voir  la  belle  robe  que  ma  mfere  s'est  ache- 
t(?e  ;  je  n'ai  rien  vu  de  si  joli.  3.  Je  ne  coiinais  personne 
de  si  aimablo  qii'Aiiguste  ;  tout  le  monde  en  rafFoIe.  4. 
En  tout  temps  la  vertu  s'est  fait  estimer.  5.  II  y  a  trois 
mois  que  je  vous  ai  ^crit  pour  vous  avertir  du  danger  que 
vous  couriez.  6.  Venez  passer  deux  ou  trois  semainea 
chez  nous,  vous  ne  vous  en  trouverez  pas  plus  mal.  7. 
Je  finirai  bien  cela  en  quinze  jours.  8.  Alors,  si  vous 
commencez  demain  en  huit,  vous  serez  tout-k-fait  libra 
dans  trois  semaines.  9.  II  y  a  ici  quelqu'un  de  trop ; 
combien  devons-nous  etre  ?  10.  Nous  devrions  etre  dix, 
mais  Henri  est  parti  pour  six  semaines. 

11.  Pendant  ces  jours,  durant  ces  tristes  scenes, 

Que  faisiez-vous  dans  vos  cloltres  deserts. — fCfresset.) 

12.  Voici  trois  m^decins  qui  ne  nous  trompent  pas  : 
Galt6,  doux  exercice  et  modeste  repas. — ( Dumoustier. ) 

58. 

to  let  see,  faire  voir. 

to  fall  ill,  tomher  malade. 

to  be  so  kind  as  to^  avoir  la  bont4,  Vobligeance,  de. 

to  allow,  laisser. 

1 .  I  have  bought  something  very  pretty ;  I  shall  let 
you  see  it  to-night.  2.  If  you  fall  ill  while  trying  to 
complete  that  work  in  a  month,  you  will  not  he  the  richer 
for  it.*  3-  She  is  going  to  write  to  you  to  beg  a  favour 
of  you.  4.  He  will  do  anything  to  oblige  you.  5.  It  is 
necessary  to  know  the  humanheartto  judge  well  of  others. 
6.  I  forbid  you  to  do  that.  7.  Would  you  be  so  kind 
as  to  help  me  ?  8.  I  think  I  had  better  allow  you  to  do 
it  yourself. f     9.  It  has  been  raining  for  three  days. 

•  The  more  or  Oie  less/or  it  is  translated  In  French  by  davantage,  plus  or 
tnoins,  witli  en  before  the  verb. 

t  When  one  or  two  pronouns  are  to  be  placed  before  the  verb.  If  there  are 
two  verbs,  place  them  before  the  last,  unless  the  first  In  faire  or  laisser;  as— 
She  wants  to  plve  it  to  yon.  Bile  veut  vocs  le  donner. 

She  will  let  you  see  them,  Elle  vous  les /era  voir. 

However,  In  the  best  authors  of  the  17th  century,  the  pro)  oiin  or  pronouna 
are  cenerally  place-l  before  the  first  verb;  aa—SoleilJe  tb  vient  voir  pour  la 
derniire  foi*'—{,tiacint.) 


EXEBCISKS.  08 

10.  I  study  for  ten  hours  every  day.     11.  He  has  not 

been  able  to  get  provisions  for  the  winter.  12.  Did 
you  live  in  South  America?  13.  Do  you  not  find  a 
great  charm  in  her  society  ?  14.  It  will  take  you  two 
or  three  sessions  to  learn  French.  15.  We  shall  arrive 
in  Paris  in  two  days.  16.  How  long*  have  you  been 
living  in  Scotland  ?  17.  I  do  not  live  in  Scotland,  but 
in  England,  at  Bristol.  18.  I  met  your  sister  to-day 
coming  from  your  uncle's  hoase. 

59. 

(Rules  101,  103,  103.) 
1.  II  en  sera  ainsi,  que  vous  le  vouliez  ou  non.  2.  Je 
n'aurai  point  de  repos  que  je  n'aie  la  certitude  de  r^ussir 
3.  Quo  d'amis  vous  avez  !  4.  Vous  ne  partirez  point  que 
je  ne  le  sache.  5.  Attendez,  que  nous  venions.  6.  Je  ne 
Baurais  voir  d'honnetes  pferes  chagrin^s  par  leurs  enfanta 
que  cela  ne  m'^meuve.  7.  Je  ne  puis  travailler  qu'aussi- 
tot  je  ne  sois  malade.  8.  Je  ne  leur  donnai  point  de 
repos  qn'ils  ne  m'eussent  fait  venir  un  fripier.  9.  Per- 
sonne,  dit  M™"  de  Sdvignd,  n'apprit  la  mort  de  M.  de 
Turenne  qu'il  ne  crut  I'armde  tailMe  en  pieces.  10.  Allez 
fite  porter  cette  lettro  et  ce  journal  h,  la  poste. 

11.  Je  ne  vous  quitte  point, 

Seigneur,  que  mon  amour  n'ait  obtenu  ce  point. — [Comeille. ) 

12.  Que  la  terre  est  petite  ^  qui  la  voit  des  cieux  ! — (DeliUe.) 

60. 

fco  go  a  journey,  /aire  un  voyage. 

equally,  4(jalement. 

to  favour,  favormr. 

•  Bow  long  \»  translated  In  three  different  ways:— 

1.  My  combien  de  temps  with  the  compound  tense  (past  indefinite)  to  expreai 
a  past  action ;  as— 

How  long  did  you  live  In  France?  Combien   db   temps  Avsz-Tons 

DSHEUHE  en  Francet 

2.  By  depuis  qvaud  with  the  present,  if  the  action  Is  st'.Il  goinff  on ,  a»— 
HOW  long  liavo  you  been  here  ?  IJehuis  yuAND  ftxES-voas  ici  t 

9.  By  combien  de  tewps  witli  tlie  future  to  express  a  future  tense;  us  - 
Wow  long  will  you  stay  there?  Comuikn  le tkmis ]/  rksterbz-vous? 


94  EXBSCISES. 

to  persecute,  persieuter. 

morality,  morale  (f.) 

to  teach,  enseifjner. 

to  be  engaged,  ilre  occupi. 

.     no  matter,  il  nHmporte. 

1.  Tie  never  goes  a  journey  but  he  comes  back  with  a 
cold.  2.  If  you  read  history,  and  if*  you  look  for  a 
prince  equally  favoured  and  persecuted  by  fortune,  you 
will  find  him  in  the  person  of  Henry  FV".,  emperor  of 
Germany.     3.  He  will  not  write  to  you  until  you  come. 

4.  How. much  injustice  that  magistrate  has  committed! 

5.  How  many  prejudices  the  Revolution  has  destroyed 
in  France  !  6,  I  hope  you  will  come  and  tell  me  aU  that 
you  know  about  it.  7.  Run  and  fetch  my  book.  8.  How 
fine  and  noble  is  the  morality  taught  by  Chiist !  9.  It  is 
six  years  since  I  have  seen  my  country.  10.  I  arrived 
the  day  you  left.  .11.  She  never  comes  to  our  house  with- 
out bringing  a  plaything  to  my  chikb-en.  1 2.  If  you  don't 
see  me  oftener,  it  is  because  I  am  very  much  engaged- 
13.  He  never  gets  up  before  it  is  light.  14.  Whethei 
you  write  or  not,  it  is  no  matter.  15.  How  veiy  un- 
happy that  woman  looks  !f  16.  Go  and  wash  your 
hands.     17.  Go  and  beg  his  pardon. 


•  See  Rule  80  (4). 

t  The  adjective  used  with  avoir  fair  agreps  with  Tair,  that  Is,  Ib  mascu- 
line, though  speaking  of  a  woman,  when  Vair  refers  to  outward  appear- 
ance; bnt  if  Tair  refers  to  a  physical  defect  or  qnalitv,  it  is  better  to  use  Hr* 
or  some  other  equivalent  exp'pss'on,  such  as  senibler,  parnitre;  as — C«iM 
iktnoiselle  a  I'air  dCiln  bouue,  ces/iuiu  meparaUsent  bom.-  -(JJerlelJ 


SECOND    PAET. 


EXERCISES  ON   IDIOMS. 

61. 

(Index,  I.) 

1.  II  s'y  est  mis  de  bonne  heure.  2.  H  s'y  fera  tot  on 
tard.  3.  Restez  assis,  voua  n'etes  pas  en  dtat  de  marcher. 
4.  A  I'entendre,  c'esttoujoursmoiqui  ai  tort.  5.  Faites- 
vou8-y.  6.  Je  me  soucie  fort  pen  de  vos  affaires ;  adressez- 
vous  k  d'autres.  7.  Si  vous  voulez  savoir  de  quoi  il  s'agit, 
ne  commeucez  pas  par  me  dire  des  injures.  8.  Mettons- 
nous  au  travail  avec  ardeur  ;  ne  nous  d^courageons  pas  ; 
Paris  n'a  pas  etd  fait  en  un  jour.  9.  Expliquez-uous 
comment  la  chose  s'est  passee.  10.  Je  lui  ai  dit  d'abord 
que  les  bons  comptes  font  les  bons  amis ;  sur  ce,  il  s'est 
mis  k  m'injurior.  11.  Je  ne  m'eu  suis  pus  mis  fort  en 
peine.  12.  J'ai  tenu  bon,  et  je  lui  ai  fait  reudre  compte, 
jour  par  jour,  de  tout  ce  qu'il  a  ddpens^  depuis  un  mois. 
13.  II  me  semble  que  vous  pouvez  d^daigner  ce  qu'il  dit 
contre  vous.  14.  N'est-ce  pas  qu'il  vous  a  tout  avou^  de 
son  propre  mouvemeiit  ?  15.  J'en  etuis  sur  ;  c'est  un 
gar9on  ploin  de  franchise  ;  il  a  un  coeur  d'or.  16.  Cette 
lettre  n'est  pas  d'elle,  elle  n'est  pas  en  e'tat  d'en  faire  ime 
pareille.     17.  Soyez  trauquille,  je  suis  fait  k  sou  badinago. 


•6  EXERCISES   ON  IDIOMS. 

18.  La  pauvre  fiUe  !  ces  gens-lk  peuvent  bien  la  tounnei*" 
*-er  k  Iqur  aise,  elle  est  trop  fifere  pour  se  plaindre. 

62. 

1.  I  hope  you  are  going  to  set  about  work  with  fresh 
courage.  2.  You  may'^^  find  it  rather  dificult  in  the 
beginning,  but  j  ou  will  get  accustomed  to  it.  3.  Can  he 
not  give  an  account  of  what  has  passed  ?  *  4.  You  had 
better  not  speak  to  him  any  more  about  that  affair,  he  will 
not  abate  an  inch.  5.  It  is  to  be  hopedf  they  will  take 
our  expenses  into  account.  6.  Do  not  care  about  what 
they  say.  7.  He  has  abused  the  confidence  his  father 
had  placed  in  him.  8.  What  are  you  to  be  about  to- 
morrow? 9.  I  did  it  of  my  own  accord.  10.  WhyJ 
do  they  not  accustom  themselves  to  our  way  of  living  ? 
11.  I  shall  call  him  to  an  account  for  this  shameful 
behaviour.  12.  We  must  not  abuse  the  mercies  God 
sends  us.  13. 1  shall  forgive  you  your  fault,  if  you  con- 
fess it  of  your  own  accord.  14.  Are  you  able  to  do  this 
work  well?  15.  He  is  the  most  ignorant  man  in  the 
town ;  he  does  not  know  A  from  B.  16.  I  hope  she  will 
accustom  herself  to  it.  17.  Let  us  take  her  youth  into 
account,  she  did  it  to  the  best  of  her  ability.  1 8.  As  for 
you,  you  will  easily  accomplish  whatthey  have  given  you 
to  do.  19.  Did  she  not  abuse  the  kindness  which  every- 
body had  for  her  ?  20.  This  is  the  only  way||  I  can^'^ 
account  for  it.  21.  He  got  accustomed  to  her  bad  telnper. 

22.  According  to  you,  this  would  have  been  impossible. 

23.  I  gave  an  account  of  myself  (quite)  of  my  own 
accord.  24.  He  does  not  look  as  if  he  cared  about  his 
punishment.  25.  I  had  scarcely  entered,  when  he 
launched  into  abuse  against  me.  26.  Is  it  thus  you 
always  abuse  people  ?  27.  He  cares  about  nothing  but 
eating  and  diinking.  28.  Are  you  not  afraid  to  abuse 
her  patience  ?  29.  According  to  them,  no  historian  is 
con-ect.     30.  I  don't  see  that  it  is  possible  to  account  for 


•  iSe  patser.  f  H  est  a  esp^er.  t  Rule  92,  (9o), 

I  We  never  say  dans  unt  maniere,  bat  cTunt  maniirt. 


EXERCISES  ON  IDIOMS.  97 

it.  31.  His  brother  called  him  to  account  for  the  way 
he  spent  his  sister's  money.  '  32.  Of  her  own  acccwd  she 
told  us  all  that  had  passed.  33.  I  wanted  him  to  give 
an  account  of  his  disbiirsements,  but  he  would^^  not. 
34.  How  do  you  account  for  the  earthquakes  that  take 
place  ?  35.  He  set  about  teaching,  bnt  did  not  succeed 
36.  Try  to  accustom  yourself  to  his  ways. 


68. 

(Index,  H.) 

1.  NoTis  avons  ITionneur,  Monsieur,  de  vousaccnserrd- 
ception  de  la  lettre  que  vous  avez  bien  voulu  nous  adresser 
le  13  courant.  2.  Ne  lui  faites  pas  part  de  ce  qui  a'est 
pass^,  je  vous  prie  ;  il  sera  toujours  temps  qu'il  le  sache. 
3.  La  semaine  derniere,  nous  avons  jou^  entre  nous  un 
Proverbe  de  Souvestre  ;  c'est  moi  qui  faisais  le  papa,  at 
ma  soeur  Louise  qui  faisait  la  maman.  4.  Si  vous  faites 
connaissance  avec  lui,  vous  vous  en  mordrez  les  doigts  plus 
tard.  5.  Laissez-nous  done  tranquilles  avec  ceite  lettre  ; 
que  de  bruit  vous  faites  pour  une  misfere  !  6.  Celui  qui 
meut  fait  le  brave  avec  Dieu,  et  le  poltron  avec  les  honi- 
mes.  7.  Aliens  !  faites  voir  que  vous  avez  du  coeur,  et  ne 
vous  effrayez  pas  pour  si  peu  de  chose.  8.  Si  vous  faites 
ea  connaissance,  il  ne  cesserade  vous  emprunter  de  I'argent, 
il  est  toujours  sans  le  sou.  9.  Que  ne  lui  faites-vous 
part  de  ce  qui  s'est  passd  1  10.  Vous  lui  avez  fourni  un 
pr^texte  dont  il  a  bien  profits  ;  attendez-vous  maintenant 
k  recevoir  de  ses  nouvelles  tous  les  deux  ou  trois  jours. 
11  Maintenant  que  le  voici  riche,  il  ne  me  salue  plus 
dans  la  rue  ;  il  tranche  du  grand  seigneur.  12.  Si  voua 
avez  encore  mal  au  doigt,  n'dcrivez  pas,  mais  pr^parez  bien 
votre  lefon.  13.  Veuillez,  je  vous  prie.  Monsieur,  m'ao- 
cuser  reception  de  raon  billet  aussitot  qu'il  vous  sera 
parvenu.  14.  Je  n'en  ferai  ni  une  ni  deux  ;  je  le  consi- 
gnerai  k  ma  porte.  15.  Ca,  9a  change  la  these,  mais  ne 
craignez-vous  pas  les  suites  de  sa  colore  ?    16.  Moi  I  j'en 


08  EXERCT8ES  OK  IDIOMS. 

ai  vubien  d'autres  ;  on  ne  m'effraie  pas  si  facilement.  17. 
Permettez ;  il  a  tort,  je  le  "Sais,  mais  il  me  semble  qvie 
vous  n'auriez  pas  d(i  lui  dire  tant  de  sottises.  18.  G'^tait 
lui  donnor  prise  sur  vous. 

64. 

1.  After  acting*  so  foolishly^  you  need  not  ■wonder  that 
your  head  aches.  2.  I  shall  acknowledge  his  letter,  and 
liope  by  this  means  to  get  acquainted  with  him.  3.  Go  to 
liim,  and  act  like  a  man.  4.  Did  she  not  personate  that 
character  beautifully  ?  5.  To  add  to  his  misfortunes,  he 
found  no  buyer  for  his  house.  6.  I  must  not  take  advan- 
tage of  his  absence  to"^  injure  him.  7.  Is  your  head  aching 
yet  ?  8.  I  hope  soon  to  get  acquainted  with  that  lady.-  9. 
He  affects  the  manners  of  an  aristocrat.  10.  I  cannot 
afford  to  visit  Switzerland  this  summer.  11.  Do  not  be 
afraid  of  that  dog ;  he  will  not  bite  you.  12.  I  shall  not 
have  to  acquaint  him  with  this  melancholy  fact.  13. 
What  is  the  use  of  making  so  much  ado  about  nothing  ? 
14.  "Why  did  you  not  acknowledge  the  letter  I  sent  you  a 
week  ago  ?  15.  He  pretends  to  be  deaf,  but  he  hears  all 
we  are  saying.  1 6.  I  am  afraid  we  shall  not  reach  our 
destination  to-night.  17.  My  dear  sir,  if  you  do  not  take 
advantage  of  that  opportunity,  it  will  be  acting  contrary 
to  reason.  1 8.  To  add  to  his  misfortunes,  he  went  and^*^^ 
told  his  friend  all  that  had  taken  place.  19.1  cannot 
consent  to  take  advantage  of  his  innocence  in  this  manner.f 
20.  That  gold  watch  suits  me  very  well,  but  I  cannot 
afford  to  buy  it  now.  21 .  How  was  it  you  did  not  get  ac- 
quainted with  that  gentleman?  22.  Do  not  look  for  Jules ; 
he  has  got  the  advance  (of  us.)  23.  My  teeth  ache  so  much 
that  I  have  scarcely  slept  these  three  days.  24.  He 
always  made  much  ado  about  nothing.  25.  He  counter- 
feits lameness.  26.  You  ought  to  be  able  to  afford  to  buy 
it,  after  making  so  much  money.  27.1  shall  not  be  afraid, 


*  Tlie  preposition  apres,  placed  before  a  verb,  requires  the  compound  of  tkt 
itifinitiie. 
t  III  this  maimer,  amti. 


EXEECISES   ON   IDIOMS.  99 

even  though  I  sliould^^  lose  all  my  money.  28.  Hewas*^ 
a  man  that  took  advantage  of  eveiy  opportunity.  29.  I 
ought  to  have  acknowledged  his  letter  a  month  ago.  30. 
As  affairs  stand,  you  should  not  address  her.  31.  If  you 
do  not  act  like  a  man,  how  can  you  hope  that  any  one 
eliould  respect  you  ?  32.  Ought  we  not  to  get  acquainted 
with  such"'  excellentpcople  ?  33.  To  add  to  his  misfortune, 
h(5  was  taken  in  the  very  act.  34.  Do  not  make  so  much 
ado  about  nothing.  35.  I  know  you  do  not  like  me,  but 
your  sentiments  are  well  repaid.  36.  You  are  among 
acquaintances,  he^^  said;  don't  be  any  longer  afraid. 

65. 

(Index,  III.) 

1.  Est-ce  bien  k  cela  qu'il  vise  ?  2.  Cast  d'elle  qu'il 
tient.  3.  Bien  certainement  je  I'auraia  fait,  s'il  u'avait 
tenu  qn'h.  cela.  4.  Laissez-nous  done  tranquilles,  voiis  ne 
savez  ce  que  vous  dites.  5.  Prenez  garde,  mon  cher  ;  je 
crois  que  c'est  h  voire  position  qu'il  en  veut.  6.  Est-ce 
que  cela  ne  m'est  pas  dgal  ?  7.  Si  je  vous  en  fais  des  re- 
proches,  c'est  h  contre-coeur,  croyez-le  bien.  8.  Ne  crai- 
gnez  pas  de  lui  proposer  un  engagement,  il  en  passera  par 
oil  vous  voudrez.  9.  Pardon,  Monsieur,  je  suis  stranger, 
et  je  ne  suis  pas  bien  siir  du  sens  qu'il  me  faut  attacher  k 
vos  expressions  :  que  voulez-vous  dire  par  ces  paroles  : 
"  II  en  passora  par  oil  vous  voudrez  ?  "  10.  Je  veux  dire 
que  vos  conditions  seront  les  siennes,  et  qu'il  signera  tout 
les  j-eux  fermes.  11.  Je  suis  parfaitement  d'accord  aveo 
vous  lh,-dessus.  12.  II  ^tait  Evident  que  ce  pauvre  enfant 
BouftViiit,  mais  nous  ne  pouvions  deviner  ce  qu'il  avait. 
13.  Vous  avez  beau  dire  et  beau  faire,  je  n'admettrai 
jamais  qu'on  se  conduise  avec  une  telle  impertinence.  14. 
Ce  n'est  peut-etre  pas  une  impertinence  rdelle  ;  peut-etre 
a-t-il  cru  bien  faire  ;  les  coutumes  diffferent  comme  lea 
langues,  et  il  faut  savoir  passer  quelque  chose  h.  un  Stranger. 

*  Such,  before  an  adjective,  is  always  rendered  b7  si. 


100  EXEHCISES   ON    TDI0M8. 

15.  Reconnaissez  maintenant  quo  voiis  etes  un  peu  trop 
vif  ;  en  convenez-vous  enfiii  ?  16.  Si  cela  ne  vous  fait  paa 
de  bien,  9a  ne  peut  paa  vous  faire  de  nial.  17.  Cela  iri* 
mal,  inon  cher,  j'en  ai  bien  penr.  18.  Ah  bah  !  vous  aver 
toujours  peur,  vous  ;  on  voit  bien  que  vous  ne  teuez  pat< 
de  votre  m^re. 

66. 

1 .  Leave  her  alone ;  is  she  not  of  an  age  to  know  (how) 
to  behave  herself  ?  2.  I  cannot  ask  him  to  do  it  against 
his  will.  3.  Do  these  suppers  agree  with  you  ?  4.  He 
was  not  able  to  tell  what  ailed  him.  5.  Do  it  as  you  like, 
it  is  all  one  to  me.     6.  Did  she  not  do  it  against  her  will  ? 

7.  You  must  not  always  agree  to  whatever  she  proposes. 

8.  Let  me  alone ;  I  want  to  enjoy  the  fresh  air.  9.  I 
allow  that  I  was  wrong ;  what^^  do  you  conclude  from  it  ? 
10.  He  takes  after  his  father  in  that.  11.  If  that  is  all, 
we  will  do  so  immediately.  12.  Whaf'^ailsyou?  13.  She 
has  rather  an  agreeable  person,  has  she  not  ?  14.  It^-'  must 
be  done  after  the  English  fashion.  15.1  never  could  agree 
with  him  on  any  subject.  16.  Let  him  alone,  he  is  not  of 
an  age  to  understand  you.  1 7.  It  was  all  one  to  me.  1 8. 
If  that  was  all,  why  did  you  not  give  it  to  him  ?  19.  Try 
to  persuade  him  that  I  do  it  against  my  will.  20.  She 
takes  after  her  mother  in  her  taste  for  dress.  2 1 .  It  is  tire- 
some to  walk  the  same  road  every  day.  2'2.  Doyou  allow 
that  the  thing  took  place  as  I  say  ?  23.  What  ails  your 
father  ?  24.  Is  it  not  aU  one  to  me,  whether^"^  he  goes  or 
remains?  25.  Is  it  to  me  that  you  allude  ?  26.  Come  with 
us,  you  will  see  that  the  sea  air  will  agree  with  you.  27. 
He  must  agi'ee  to  whatever  I  propose.  28.  Ale  does  not 
agree  with  me.  29.  Does  he  not  take  after  his  cousin? 
30.  The  Queen  allows  him  two  hundred  a  year.  31.  It 
is  to  that  story  that  he  alludes.  32.  They  found  no  lodg- 
ings uponf  their  ai-rival,  and  were  obliged  to  sleep  in  the 


*  When  the  pronoun  t'Ms  used  in  English  for  that,  it  ntast  be  rendered  Ir 
French  by  cela.    See  Note,  page  20. 

i  Vponheioie  arrival,  dcparlure,  rtlurn,  is  translatcit  by  A 


UX£BCIS£S   OS    IDIOUS.  101 

open  air.  33.  We  soon  agreed  on  this  matter.  34.  He 
aimed  at  that  situation,  but  could  not  get  it.  35.  What 
ails  your  dog  ?  36.  I  was  forced  to  agree  to  whatever 
he  proposed. 

67. 
(Index,  rv.) 

1.  Vous  anriez  tort  de  lui  en  vouloir,  elle  n'a  jamai* 
Bong^  k  vous  nuire.  2.  A  qui  vous  etes-vous  adress^  t 
Est-ce  It  la  maitresse  de  la  maison  ?  3.  Vous  me  faitea 
honte  avec  vos  coudes  perc^a ;  allez  changer  de  paletot,  4. 
C'est  a  eux  que  j'aurai  recours  pour  vous  faire  avoir  cette 
place.  5.  Cela  ue  va  pas  trop  mal ;  de  ce  train-Ik  nous 
aurous  tini  dans  la  quinzaine.  6.  Je  recompense  Paul, 
qui  a  bien  travailld  ;  quant  k  Pierre,  je  le  punirai  quand 
je  reviendrai.  7.  Est-ce  que  tous  ces  reproches  ne  vous 
font  pas  honte  ?  A  votre  place,  j'irais  me  fourrer  je  ne 
sais  oil !  8.  Voyons,  est-ce  que  cela  ne  reviendra  pas  au 
meme  au  bout  du  compte  ?  9.  Ce  n'est  plus  k  vous  qu'il 
en  veut,  k  ce  qu'il  parait ;  c'est  bien  h,  moi.  10.  Ne  vous 
faites  done  pas  tant  de  mauvais  sang ;  vous  verrez  que 
cela  n'ira  pas  si  mal  que  vous  croyez.  11.  Je  ne  vous 
savais  pas  ici ;  je  croyais  que  vous  deviez  aller  voir  M. 
votre  oncle  ce  soir.  12.  J'ai  changd  d'idde  j  je  n'irai  que 
demain.  13.  Je  ne  sache  pas  qu'il  m'en  veuille,  mais, 
quand  cela  serait,  ga  m'est  parfaiteraent  ^gal.  14.  Avec 
ces  gens- Ilk  U  ne  faut  pas  parler  k  mots  converts,  il  faut 
aller  droit  au  but.  15.  II  est  tomb^  des  nues  quand  je 
lui  ai  dit  pourquoi  M°'  votre  mfere  s'^tait  mise  en  colere 
centre  moi.  16.  Restez-en  1&,  il  est  Evident  que  cela  le 
tracasse.  17.  J'ai  peur,  mon  cher  Monsieur,  que  vous  ne 
vous  y  soyez  pris  trop  tard  ;  il  y  a  toute  apparence  que  la 
place  est  prise.  18.  Osez-vous  bien  me  dire  cela,  k  moi 
qui  ai  tou jours  en  k  coeur  de  voos  prot^er  ? 

68. 

1 .  Are  you  not  very  angry  with  your  brother  ?   2.  Tou 

3  H 


102  ETEBCISES   ON    LUIOAIS. 

ought  to  be  ashamed  of  your  laziness.  3. 1  do  not  approve 
of  your  going^''  out  with  him.  4.  Did  you  not  apply  to 
your  uncle  for  that  ?  5.  It*  anwunts  to  the  same  thing. 
6.  He  win  alter  his  mind  when' ^  he  has  well  considered 
the  thing.  7.  You  must  not  be  angry  at  his  departure. 
8.  "Were  you  not  very  anxious  about  the  success  of  that 
enterprise  ?  9.  Your  remarks  do  not  apply  to  this  sub- 
ject. 10.  My  conduct  makes  me  ashamed.  11.  That  is 
not  amiss  for  a  beginner.  12.  The  battle  is  lost,  as  it 
seems.  1 3 .  We  ought  to  be  more  anxious  about  our  health 
than  our  wealth.  14.  Let  that  alone,  you  annoy  him.  15. 
Does  it  not  amount  to  the  same  thing  ?  16.  Women  alter 
their  minds  every  hour  of  the  day.  17.  Do  you  approve 
of  her  coming  to  see  you  ?  18.  What  is  it  makes  you 
ashamed?  1 9.  From  what  I  see,  you  do  not  wish  to  do  it. 
20.  I  cannot  apply  to  one  who  has  always  treated  me  so 
disrespectfully.  21.  Ishallbe  very  angry  with  you  if  you 
pull  that  flower.  22.  The  rule  you  mention  does  not  apply 
to  this  case.  23.  Have  you  not  cause  to  be  ashamed  of 
your  conduct  ?  24.  That  would  not  have  been  amiss  if 
you  had  set  about  it  sooner.  25.  Were  you  not  always 
very  anxious  about  your  son  when  he  was  at  sea '?  26. 
Now,  don't  alter  your  mind,  as  you  always  do.  27.  After 
this  misadventure  he  did  not  apply  to  him  again.f  28. 
You  must  not  apply  to  me  again.  29.  I  was  ashamed  of 
not  having  more  money  to  give  him.  30.  Amuse  your- 
self to  your  heart's  content,  after  working  so  well.  31. 
How  can  you  be  angry  at  such  an  innocent  joke?  32. 
If  it  is  an  annoyance  to  you,  sir,  I  will  let  it  alone.  33. 
He  is  very  apt  to  slander  people.  34.  It  will  amount 
to  the  same  thing  one  hundred  years  hence.  35.  As  it 
appears,  you  have  made  up  your  mind.  36.  He  will 
apologize  to  you  for  his  conduct,  I  answer  for  it. 

69. 
(Index,  V.) 
1.  A  quoi  bon  vous  tourmenter  1   Vous  voilk  bien  avanotf 

•  See  Note  (*1,  page  100. 

t  Again,  witb  i  uegation,  must  be  translated  by  plu$. 


EXERCISES   ON   IDIOMS.  103 

avec  tons  vos  beaux  projets  !  2.  Vous  avez  beau  prier  et 
supplier  ;  tout  cela  ne  servira  de  rien.  3.  S'il  s'informe 
de  moi,  dites-lui  que  je  vais  tout  doiicemenfc.  4.  Si  nous 
I'invitions  h  diner  pour  saniedi,  qu'en  pensez-vous  ?  5.  II 
n'en  revenait  pas.  6.  II  avait  si  faim  qu'il  a  mang^ 
comme  quatre.  7.  Soyez  tranquille,  j'ai  votre  gudrison  b, 
cojur.  8.  Vous  n'ignorez  pas,  Monsieur,  je  suppose,  ce 
qui  s'est  passd  hier  dans  cette  fatale  soirde  ;  comment  cela 
pourra-t-il  s'arranger  ?  9.  Vouloir  arranger  une  affaire 
comme  celle-lh,,  Monsieur,  c'est  vouloir  prendre  la  lune 
avec  les  dents.  10.  Veuillez  me  prSter  la  plus  grande 
attention,  je  vous  prie  ;  ce  que  je  vais  vous  dire 
est  de  la  plus  haute  importance.  11.  A  quoi  bon  vous 
mettre  h.  genoux  devant  lui  ?  toutes  vos  supplications  ne 
vous  serviront  de  rien.  12.  EUe  a  eu  la  bontd  de  s'in- 
fornier  de  moi ;  rappelez-moi  k  son  bon  souvenir  la  pre- 
miere fois  que  vous  la  verrez.  13.  Quelle  foUe  rdsolution 
il  a  prise  lb, !  c'est  k  n'en  pas  revenir.  14.  Si  vous  vous 
dtiez  occupd  davantage  de  vos  affaires,  vous  n'en  seriez  pas 
rdduit  k  ce  ddnfiment.  15.  N'dtait-il  pas  prdvenii  de  ce 
mallieur  avant  mon  arrivde  ?  16.  Que  si*  vous  rn'objectea 
que  M.  votre  frere  tient  k  I'avoir  chez  lui,  jen'ai  plus  rien 
h,  dire.  17.  Ddciddment  ce  monsieur  s'en  fait  trop  accroire ; 
voyez  done  comme  il  se  rengorge  ;  il  se  croit  le  premier 
moutardier  du  pape.  18.  Faites-la  entrer  au  salon  ;  je 
Buis  k  elle  dans  une  minute. 


70. 

1.  If  you  are  not  much  attached  to  your  dog,  you 
would  do  well  to  give  it  to  me.  2.  That  femalef  is  all 
attention  to  her  mistress.  3.  "Why  did  you  not  ask  him 
to  dinner  ?  4.  He  was  perfectly  astounded  at  the  in- 
telligence.    6.  He  pays  attention  to  all  that  is  said  to 


•  Que  »»'  is  sometimes  placed  in  the  be);lnning  of  a  sentence  to  connect  what 
precedes  with  wliat  follows;  hut  tliis  expression  is  falling  into  disnse. 

t  The  wori/emale,  tliough  admissible  In  Enghsh,  is  in  French  appliedonly 
to  the  females  of  animals.  Use  femme,  dame,  danoiselU,jtlU,  bonne,  etc. 


104  ETEBCISES    ON    IDIOUS. 

him.  6.  He  never  availed  himself  of  the  many  chances 
he  had.  7.  Were  you  not  aware  of  that?  8.  They 
took  from  him  all  that  he  possessed.  9.  Such  a  thing 
happens  ojice  a^  year  on  an  average.  10.  Your  evidence 
avails  notliing  in  this  case.  11.  He  attended  to  his 
business,  and  I  to  mine.  12.  He  was  asked  to  dine  with 
us,  but  refused.  13.  I  am  perfectly  aware  of  that.  14. 
Why  do  you  not  pay  attention  to  the  orders  of  your 
officers?  15.  He  is  astounded  at  the  results.  16. 
Ought  I  to  ask  her  to  come  in  for  a  few  minutes  ?  17. 
If  you  avail  yourself  of  aU  these  chances,  you  must* 
succeed.  18.  It  wiU  avail  you  nothing  to  go  there. 
19.  He  should'^^  attend  more  to  his  business.  20.  Have 
you  asked  after  the  sick  lady  who  has  come  to  live  beside 
us?  21.  Not  to  be  aware  of  so  important  a  historical 
event  as  that,  betrays  gross  ignorance.  22.  How  very 
awkward  that  young  man  looks !  23.  "Were  you  not 
aware  of  these  things  when  she  called?  24.  Ask 
him  to  dine  with  us  on  Monday.  25.  You  must  go  to 
ask  after  the  ladies  this  evening.  26.  If  they  call,  ask 
them  in.  27.  Take  two  from  seven,  five  remain.  28. 
I  wish  I  hadf  availed  myself  of  that  opportunity  to^ 
see  the  emperor.  29.  All  his  perseverance  availed  no- 
thing. 30.  You  must  pay  attention  to  what  is  said  to 
you.  31.  If  he  had  attended  to  his  business,  he  would 
now  be  rich.  32.  Shut  the  window,  that  music  takes 
off  your  attention.  33.  We  shall  invite  them  to  dine 
with  us.  34.  We  were  not  aAvare  of  these  facts  before. 
85.  As  we  were  not  aware  of  it,  we  could  not  have  acted 
differently.  36.  Drunkenness  is  attended  by  all  kinds 
of  evlL  37.  Whilst  I  was  speaking,  he  was  all  atten- 
tion. 

71. 

(Index,  VI.) 
1.  Ella  a  un  oncle  fort  riche  dent  elle  doit  h^riter. 

•  Translate  must  by  devoir,  not  falloir:  (Ist)  When  it  expresses  a  eonse- 
quenre.  as  in  the  above  sentence ;  (ind)  When  it  implies  supposition,  as:~  You 
must  be  ill  after  so  much  fatigue,  vom  deve*  ttre  malade  apris  tant  de/aHgacs. 

t  See  Note  (t),  page  8L 


EXE11CISE3-  OK  IDIOMS.  lOd 

2.  Ou  il  n'y  a  rien,  dit  un  vieux  proverbe,  le  roi  i)erd  sea 
droits.  3.  Quand  vous  y  etes-vous  trouv^s  ?  4.  Ne  devez- 
vous  pas  partir  demain  ?  5.  C'est  M  qui  vous  a  tenu  lieu 
de  pfere.  6.  Trouvez-vous-y  k  sept  heures.  7.  Comment 
pouvez-vous  vous  bien  porter  ?  vous  ne  faites  que  boire 
et  manger  toute  la  journee.  8.  II  parait  qu'il  y  a  dans  le 
cerveau  des  femraes  une  case  de  moins,  et  dans  leur  coeur 
une  fibre  de  plus,  que  chez  les  hommes.  9.  11  en  est  d'un 
secret  comme  d'un  trdsor  ;  dfes  qu'une  fois  on  sait  oil  il 
est,  on  ne  tarde  pas  h,  le  d^couvrir.  10.  Le  roi  demandait 
un  jour  h,  un  littdrateur  fran^ais  s'il  croyait  en  Dieu  : 
"Oui,  Sire,  j'aime  k croire,"  repondit  I'^rivain,  "qu'il  y  a 
un  Etre  au-dessus  des  rois."  11.  Je  me  trouve  heureux 
chez  moi ;  j'y  vis  selon  mes  goiits,  je  ne  depends  de  per- 
sonne.  12.  Mai  lui  a  pris  de  s'attaquer  k  elle.  13.  Nous 
vivons,  a  dit  Massillon,  comme  si  tout  ceci  ne  devait  jamais 
finir.  14.  II  en  est  de  la  reputation  comme  de  I'esprit  : 
plus  on  la  cherche,  moins  on  la  trouve.  15.  Si  vous  lui 
dites  9a,  vous  allez*  vous  le  mettre  k  dos.  16.  Voyons, 
dites-moi  ce  dont  il  s'agit ;  ne  me  tenez  pas  plus  longtemps 
le  bee  dans  I'eau.  17.  J'ai  quitl^  Londres  pour  New 
York  il  y  a  de  cela  quelques  ann^es,  mais  j'avoue  que  j'ai 
perdu  au  change.  18.  Je  suis  k  vous  k  I'iustant,  je  ne 
fais  qu'aller  et  venir. 

7a 

1.  He  is  badly  off  for  money  now,  his  father  has  jtist 
oeen  bankrupt.  2.  Take  care  not  to  bring  him  upon  your 
back.  3.  It  is  too  bad  to  treat  bini  so  disrespectfully. 
4.  1  should  have  been  bankrupt  the  week  afterf  if  money 
had  not  come  in.  5.  Be  that  as  it  may,  you  were  wrong 
from  the  first4  6.  Ought  we  not  to  be  at  the  Exchange 
an  hour  before  the  mail  arrives  ?    7.  He  was  a  father  to 


*  Alter  is  sometimes  ased  to  impart  more  energy  to  a  sentence;  aat—' 
Vallez  pat  rout  imayiner,  iJon't  fancy. 

t  The  week  after,  la  ttnaine  iTopret.  If  money  had  net  come  in,  $'0  i^^lmt 
pat  rtnlre  (Taryent. 

I  From  ttie  bvst,  dit  U  eommenctmmt. 


106  EXEECISES   ON    IBrOMS. 

those  poor  children.  8.  They  are  always  talking  nonsense. 
9.  What  is  that  to  me  whether^"^  he  comes  or  not  ?  10. 
We  thought  it  would  he  had  weather,  hut,  on  the  con- 
trary, we  had  fine  sunshine.  11.  You  are  always  com- 
plaining ;'  is  it  not  with  you  as  with  others  ?  12.  Why  are 
we  always  scolded,  and  our  cousins  never  ?  13.  He  is  said 
to  have  heen  hankrupt  five  years  ago.  1 4 .  That  precious 
friend  of  yours*  is  eating  and  drinking  the  whole  day. 

15.  What  is  that  to  me,  provided  he  does  it  honestly  ? 

16.  Instead  of  treating  his  brothers  so  harshly,  he  should'^^ 
have  heen  a  father  to  them.  1 7.  We  were  not  at  the  rail- 
way in  time.  18.  It  is  too  had  to  say  that  she  stole  that 
money.  19,  It  is  always  bad  weather  in  that  horrid 
countay.  20,  Do  not  he  afraid,  I  shall  back  you.  21. 
There  are  many  people  in  this  world  who  never  trouble 
themselves  about  the  morrow.  22.  You  ought  to  write 
to  him,  he  is  badly  off.  23.  When  was  he  bankrupt 
before?  24.  Is  it  not  with  you  as  with  me?  25.  Be 
that  as  it  may,  you  were  wrong  in  the  whole  aifair.  26. 
Now  you  have  the  ball  at  your  foot,  you  can  make  (your) 
fortune.  27.  What  can  prevent  our  being ^'^  at  the 
station  in  time?  28.  You  are  to  be  taken  there  at 
once.  29.  It  would  be  as  well  to  let  it  alone;  letusgo.f 
80.  Why  is  it  always  such  bad  weather  in  March?  31. 
Is  it  not  too  bad  to  behave  so  ?  32.  What  is  that  to 
me,  provided  I  get  my  money?  33.  You  are  always 
slandering  your  brother.  8i.  Was  he  not  a  father  to 
those  children?  35.  There  would  be  more  apples  if  the 
boys  I  had  not  stolen  so  many.§  36.  Please  ||  wait  for 
me,  I  shall  be  back  presently. 

78. 

(Index,  VH.) 
1.  A  qui  en  voulez-vous  ?    2.  Allona  !  qu'on  se  mette  k 

•  That  precious  friend  of  yours,  votre  M  ami. 

t  When  to  go  means  to  go  aaay,  translate  It  by  pariir;  when  Itmeans  to  go 
eut,  translate  It  by  sortir ;  when  it  means  to  go  someic/iere,  translate  it  by  allers 
but  then  the  name  of  the  place,  which  may  be  understood  in  English,  is  r^ 
placed  In  French  by  jr. 

t  Boys,  gatnim.    It  is  translated  by  garcons  in  opposition  toJUUi 

I  See  Note  2,  page  17.  |  Please,  veuitttt. 


EXKRCISE8   ON  IDIOMS.  107 

I'onvrage,  et  qu'on  se  d^peche  !  3.  J'esp^re  que  voiis 
n'allez  pas  vous  mettre  k  travailler,  malade  comme  vous 
etes  !  4.  Vous  feriez  bien  mieux  de  garder  le  lit.  5.  Ne 
m'en  sachez  pas  mauvais  gr6,  je  I'ai  fait  pour  le  mieux. 
6,  Ce  n'est  pas  k  vous  que  j'en  veux,  c'est  k  Ini.  7.  La 
belle  id^e  qu'il  a  eue  de  se  faire  soldat !  8.  II  vous  sied 
bien  de  trouver  k  redire  k  sa  conduite  !  9.  D'avocat 
que  vous  ^tiez,  ne  vous  etes-vous  pas  fait  marchand  de 
vin  ?  10.  Mettez-vous-y  tout  de  suite,  je  vous  prie. 
11.  tPai  entendu  dire  qu'elle  va  mieux.  12.  Couchez-vous 
de  meilleure  heure  afin  de  vous  lever  plus  tot.  13.  Notre 
malade  allait  un  peu  mieux  tantdt,  mais  ce  soir  il  est  pis 
que  jamais.  14.  Non,  non,  je  ne  vous  en  veux  pas  pour 
ce  que  vous  avez  dit,  c'est  contre  votre  soeur  que  j'ai  de  la 
rancune.  15.  Eh  bien  !  trouvez-vous  cela  difficile  main- 
tenaut  ?  vous  voyez  qu'il  n'y  a  que  le  premier  pas  qui 
cofLte.  16.  II  parait  que  I'affaire  s'emnianche  mal  ;  k  en 
croire  votre  frfero,  mieux  vaudrait  nous  en  tenir  \k.  17. 
Puisque  j'ai  encore  un  bout  de  temps,  je  porterai  ma  lettre 
k  la  poste,  et  je  verrai  votre  soeur  en  passant ;  ce  sera  faire 
d'une  pierre  deux  coups.  18.  J'ai  beau  faire,  je  ne  puis 
pas  lui  fourrer  cela  dans  la  tdte. 


74. 

1.  How  can  that  be,  if  you  don't  know  the  way  to  sot 
ahout  it  ?  2.  Would  it  not  be  better  to  set  out  now  ?  3. 
"Wli y  should  she  bear  ill-will  to  her  sister  ?  4.  From  (a) 
surjjcon  he  became  (a)  soldier.  5.  I  mxist  beg  of  him  to 
do  it  at  once.  6.  You  should  not  begin  to  work  so  late. 
7.  Did  you  believe  all  he  said  on  that  subject?  8.  I  do 
not  think  your  mother  is  better.  9.  Would  it  not  be 
better  to  set  out  for  New  York  by  the  first  mail  packet? 
10.  Between  this  and  Wednesday  we  have  plenty  of 
time  to*  think  over  the  matter.  1 1 .  Was  she  not  in  bed 
the  greater  part  of  the  day  ?     12.  I  have  never  bom  ill- 

*  We  bare  plestr  of  time  to.  notu  avovi  tout  le  temps  de. 


If 

108  EXEBCISES  ON  IDIOUS. 

will  to  him.  18.  Let  us  go  in;  I  am  benumbed  with 
cold.  1 4.  How  long  were  you  confined  to  your  bed  with 
that  illness?  15.  He  confesses  that  he  had  a  hand  in 
it;  it  cannot  be  better.  16.  How  is  it  that  he  does  not 
believe  what  you  say  ?  17.  Did  you  not  beg  of  him  to 
«ay  nothing  about  it?  18.  He  begins  to  work  at  a 
quarter  past  five.  19.  If  you  were  better,  we  would  go 
back  to  him.  20.  Had  she  not  better  go  away  before 
her  brother  arrives  ?  21.  Between  this  and  to-morrow 
many  things  may  happen.  22.  Do  you  believe  what  he 
is  saying?  as  for  me,  I  have  no  confidence  in  him.  23. 
In  spite  of  the  promises  which  he  had  made,  he  began 
again  worse  than  ever.  24.  Between  this  and  Sunday 
you  will  have  to  finish  that  task.  25.  He  bears  ill- will 
to  no  one.  26.  That  may  be,  but  he  speaks  very  ill  of 
his  friends.  27.  He  has  a  mind  to  become  a  sailor.  28. 
May  I  beg  of  you  not  to  keep  us  waiting  so  long  ?  29. 
It  becomes  you  indeed  to  speak  so !  30.  He  wishes  to 
go ;  let  it  be  so ;  he  will  soon  repent.  31.  I  shall  not 
be  better  till^°^  I  am  out  of  thishonid  place.  32.  Had 
we  not  better  walk  over  to  your  uncle's  this  evening  ? 
33.  Your  bonnet  becomes  you  very  much.  34.  He  is 
ordered  ^^  to  stay  here,  but  it  shall  not  be  so.  35.  WiU 
you' not  bear  witness  to  what  took  place  ?  36.  He  is  a 
man  who  is  bent  upon  making  (his)  fortune. 

76. 
(Index,  VIH.) 

1.  II  doute  que  j'en  vienne  k  bout.  2.  Elle  partait  d'un 
eclat  de  rire  au  moment  oil  j'ouvrais  la  porte.  3.  Est-ce 
\k  ce  que  vous  appelez  bon  ton  ?  4,  Le  corbeau  avait  au 
moins  cent  ans  ;  nous  I'aurionn  fait  bouillir  vingt-quatre 
heures,  qu'il  aurait  encore  ^t^  dur  comme  du  boia.^  5.  Le 
feu  a  pris  ce  matin  au  theatre  ;  en  moins  de  trois  heures 
ce  vaste  Edifice  n'dtait  plus  qu'un  amas  de  cendres  et  de 
mines.  6.  C'est  pour  vous  jeter  de  la  poudre  aux  yeux 
qu'il  vous  dit  cela  ;  ne  croyez  pas  un  mot  de  ce  qii'U  vou.s 


EXEECTSES   ON   IDIOMS.  109 

conte.  7.  Si  c'est  comnie  cela  que  vous  vous  y  prenez, 
vous  n'en  viendrez  jamais  h  bout.  8.  On  n'est  pas  oblig^ 
de  tout  croire.  9.  Ce  secret  doit  vous  etre  k  charge ;  ne 
pouvez-voua  me  le  coufier  ?  10.  On  prit  la  ville  sans  coup 
f^rir.  11.  N'est-ce  pas  chez  vous  que  le  feu  a  pris  hier 
soir  ?  12.  Je  ne  me  soucie  pas  plus  de  votre  colore  que 
de  I'an  quarante  ;  est-ce  que,  par  hasard,  vous  croyez  ma 
faire  peur  avec  votre  grosse  voix  ?  13.  Je  n'entre  pas  dans 
tout  cela  ;  je  veux  qu'il  s'en  aille  au  plus  t6t.  14.  Par 
exemple  !  a-t-on  jamais  vu  pareille  chose  !  15.  O^  etes- 
vous  done  alld  ce  matin,  mon  petit  bonhommc  1  vona 
n'^tiez  pas  h.  I'^cole,  c'est  mon  petit  doigt  qui  me  I'a  dit. 
16.  Venezmetrouvercesoirksix  heures  ;  je  vous  mettrai 
en  rapport  avec  lui,  et  vous  pourrez  en  de'coudre  ensemble 
tant  qu'il  vous  plaira.  17.  11  est  venu  me  dire  de  but  en 
blanc  que  je  n'^tais  pas  bien  61ev6  et  qu'il  allait  cesser 
tout  rapport  avec  moi.  18.  II  doit  y  avoir  quelque  chose 
Ik-dessous,  car  hier  encore  il  me  parlait  de  vous  en  fort 
bons  termes. 


76. 

1.  Docs'*^  he  hope  to  blind  me  by  such*  paltry  artifices? 
2.  At  what  hour  shall  If  boil  the  water  for  tea  ?  3.  You 
surely  would  not  be  so  bold  as  to  ask  him  (for)  a  gold 
watch.  4.  Are  you  quite  sure  that  the  door  was  bolted 
after  you  returned  last  night  ?  6.  I  was  not  bound  to 
believe  all  his  wonderful  stories.  6.  A  fire  broke  out 
this  morning  in  my  uncle's  house.  7.  You  are  too  well- 
bred  to  say  impertinent  things.  8.  He  conquered  a  large 
proWnce  without  striking  a  blow.  9.  The  arrival  of 
tliat  lady  in  the  toAvn  always  brings  me  good  luck.  10. 
You  should'^^  not  bui-st  out  laughing  every  time  that 
gentleman  speaks.  1 1 .  The  poor  girl  burst  into  teara 
when  she  heard  the  sad  news.     12.  By  the  by,  you 

•  See  Note,  page  99. 

t  Shall  I,  used  In  Kngiish  in  proposing  or  asking  leave  toilo  MniethinK,  U 
mt^ered  in  French  by  voulet-vout  qut. 


110  EXKBCISES   ON   IDIOMS. 

have  entirely  forgotten  to  repay  tliat  money'*  you  bor- 
rowed. 13.  To  enter  the  room  the  thieves  broke  the^ 
door  open.  14.  The  best  way  to  bring  about  what  you 
wish  wojild  be  to  see  the  gentleman.  15.  Could  it  not 
be  brought  about  in  any  other  way?  16.  "Were  they 
well  bred?  17.  Are  we  bound  to  answer  such  ques- 
tions ?  18.  "Will  you  bolt  the  door  when'^^  you  come  in 
this  evening?  19.  You  must  not  boil  all  the  potatoes 
to-day.  20.  It  is  three  years  since  I  began  business, 
and  I  have  succeeded  pretty  well.  2 1 .  That  man  brings 
ill-luck  wherever  he  goes.  22.  She  burst  out  laughing 
in  the  middle  of  our  discussion.  23.  Your  father  will 
blow  you  up,  if  you  don't  behave  better.  24.  By  the 
by,  where  was  your  mother  bom?  25.  You  must  boil 
these  vegetables  for  a  quarter  of  an  hour.  26.  He 
bolted  all  the  doors  before  going  to  bed.  27.  You  are 
not  bound  to  show  him  all  the  letters  you  receive.  28. 
They^^  were  not  at  all  well-bred  people.  29.  You  must 
not  burst  out  laughing  in  that  rude  manner*  when  you 
are  spoken  to.'^  30.  "You  have  brought  bad  luck  to  our 
family.  81.  "What  did  she  burst  into  tears  for?  32. 
Take  him  out  of  the  scrape  if  you  like ;  it  is  no  business 
of  mine,  33.  Is  not  your  brother  in  a  boai'ding  school 
in  London  ?  34.  By  the  by,  what  were  you  doing  all 
day  yesterday  ?-|-  35.  That  capon  is  too  large  to  be 
roasted ;  you  must  boil  it.  36.  I  hope  that  your  inter- 
view with  him  will  bring  you  good  luck. 

77. 
(Index,  IX.) 

1.  Gardez-vous  de  vous  Her  avec  lui ;  on  a  de  graves 
soupQons  sur  son  bonneur.  2.  On  ne  doit  ni  se  moquer  ni 
s'inqui^ter  des  qu'en  dira-t-on.  3.  Ce  qu'il  y  a  de  certain, 
c'est  que  voua  viendrez  avec  nous.  4.  Je  n'en  suis  paa 
bien  certain,  c'est  selon.     6.  Je  me  moque  bien  de  ce  qu'il 

•  In  that  rude  manner,  si  gromiirewent. 
t  All  day  yesterday,  toute  lajoumec  (Thier. 


EXERCISES   ON   IDIOMS.  Ill 

peut  dire  de  moi :  est-ce  que  tout  le  monde  ne  le  contiait 
pas  ?  6.  D^ciddment,  men  cher,  vous  vous  dcoutez  trop  : 
hier  vous  n'avez  rien  fait  de  la  journde,*  et  aiijourd'hoi 
vous  fites  restd  couch^  jusqu'k  midi.  7.  Prenez  garde  ; 
si  vous  n'avez  soin  de  vos  habits,  vous  serez  grond^.  8. 
Cela  lui  est  bien  ^gal;  c'est  un  tres-mauvais  sujet.  9. 
Vous  devez  etre  en  fonds  maintenant ;  il  n'y  a  que  trois 
jours  que  vous  avez  re9U  votre  mois.  10.  Pardon, 
Monsieur,  je  n'ai  regu  que  ma  quinzaine.  11.  Petit 
polisson,  vous  en  aurez  si  je  vous  y  prends.  12.  Chacun, 
dit  La  Rochefoucault,  trouve  k  redire  en  autrui  ce  qu'on 
tronve  k  redii-e  en  lui.  13,  C'est  bien  dur  pour  lui  d'etre 
ainsi  r^duit  k  la  raisere  ;  autrefois  il  ^tait  fort  bien  dans 
ses  affaires.  14.  II  a  ^t^  obligd,  il  y  a  un  mois,  de  rdunir 
ses  cr^anciers  et  de  leur  demander  du  temps.  15.  Tout 
son  mobilier  est  en  vente  ;  si  vous  voulez  I'acheter,  vous 
I'aurez  k  bon  compte.  16.  Je  vous  conseille,  mon  petit 
aiui,  de  charrier  droit,  autrement  je  vous  frotterai  les 
oreilles.  17.  Nous  voici  dans  une  vilaine  passe  ;  comment 
nous  tirerons-nous  de  Ik  1  18.  Ne  vous  occupez  pas  de 
M.  Louis  ;  c'est  k  M""*  Louis  qu'il  faut  vous  adresser  j 
IVL  Louis  est  un  zero. 

7a 

1.  I  went  last  night  to  see  the  mistress  of  that  girl ; 
she  gave  her  a  very  good  character.  2.  I  chanced  to 
arrive  before  him  and  get  the  situation.  3.  Take  care 
to  do  that  exercise  weU.  4.  You  must  take  care  what 
you  do  to  that  poor  child.  6.  I  shall  take  care  not  to  put 
him  to  so  much  trouble  this  time.  6.  When  I  get  my 
salary,  I  shall  be  in  cash  for  a  week  or  two.  7.  I  caught 
him  at  it  as  I  was  passing.  8.  As  the  case  stands,  you 
must  leave  to-night.  9.  I  fear  I  must  change  my  di'css 
before  dinner.  10.  I  shaQ  perhaps  go  with  you ;  that  will 
depend  on  ciicumstances.     11.  I  don't  care  what  people 


*  The  whole  morning,  the  whote  evfinp,  the  tchole  <brf,  tUc,  affcr  a  negsUou, 
,re  translated  liiDply  hj  dela  vuUmie,  de  la  $oiru,  <i»  lajonriue,  etc. 


112  KXEBCISES  ON  IDIOMS. 

say*  if  my  conscience  approves  my  actions.  12.  He  waa 
in  good  circumstances  three  years  ago.  13.  I  shall  call 
on  you  before  leaving  town.  14.  Ought  he  not  to  take 
care  what  he  does  in  such  a  difficult  affair?  15.  He 
took  good  care  not  to  iiTitatethe  poor  man.  16.  I  care 
for  my  honour  more  than  for  my  money.  17.  I  was  in 
cash  after  receiving  that  legacy.  18.  You  are  sure  to 
catch  him  at  it,  if  you  watch  him  this  evening.  19.  I 
caused  that  poor  man  to  drink  a  glass  of  wine.f  20. 
"Why  do  you  change  your  dress  so  often  in  the  day  ? 
21.  I  shall  be  in  good  circumstances  when'^^  I  ai'iive  at 
my  majority.  22.  He  will  catch  it  for  a  certainty,  if 
he  is  seen  here.  23.  Don't  stand  on  ceremony  with  us ; 
consider  yom'self  at  home.  24.  I  shall  take  care  to 
inform  him  of  that  circumstance  ia  my  next  letter.  25. 
When  did  you  catch  her  at  it  ?  26.  How  can  you  be 
successful  if  you  do  not  study  before  the  examination  ? 
27.  How  often  a  week  do  you  change  your  plans?  28. 
Was  he  in  good  circumstances  when  he  lived  in  London  ? 
29.  How  long  were  you  in  cash  after  you  received^  the 
payment  of  that  account?  30.  Whether^^^  you  walk  or 
ride,  I  don't  care.  31.  Should^^  she  not  call  on  the 
lady  to  thank  her  ?  32.  WUl  you  take  care  to  thank 
him  for  me  ?  33.  I  hope  you  don't  lose  youi*  time  in 
building  castles  in  the  air.  34.  What  did  he  cavil  at  ? 
85.  You  must  take  care  what  you  do.  36.  I  cannot 
but  acknowledge  that  we  were  both  wrong. 

79. 

(Index,  Z.) 

1.  Vous  ne  vous  en  tirerez  pas  si  facilement  que  vons  le 
pensez.  2.  II  est  venu  me  trouver  au  moment  ou  je 
d^cachetais  voire  lettre.  3.  Aprfes  tout,  est-ce  que  cela 
oe  revient  pas  au  merae  ?    4.  Fais  ce  quc§  dois,  advieune 

•  What  people  say,  U  gu'en  dira-t-on. 
t  See  Note,  page  63. 
X  See  Rule  82  {2o). 

{  In  proverbs  and  mottoes,  proDonns,  as  well  as  articles  (Rule  S),  are  oftea 
oniUt«d  for  the  sake  of  concision. 


KXKRCTSBS  OK  II)I0\r8.  113 

qne  poiirra.  6.  Mon  cher,  je  votw  f^icite  ;  vous  en  etea 
quitte  k  boii  marchd.  6.  Ne  vous  Stes-vous  pas  enrhum^e 
hier  soir  en  sortant  de  chez  nous  ?  7.  II  faisait  terrible- 
ment  froid,  il  gelait  k  pierre  fendre.  8.  Laissez-moi  mon 
petit  coin  ;  voUi  trois  ana  que  je  I'occupe ;  si  voua  vous 
y  mettiez,  je  ne  serais  pas  h.  I'aise  de  la  soirde;  9.  Je 
croyais  qu'il  n'y  avait  que  moi  pour  avoir  de  ces  id^es-Ilk. 
10.  Je  vais  tS^her  de  lui  faire  center  tout  ce  qu'il  sait ; 
j'en  aurai  le  coeur  net.  11.  Comme  il  sait  faire  patte  de 
velours  !  12.  Lorsque  j'ai  prononcd  le  nom  de  Jean,  elle 
a  rougi  jusqu'au  blanc  des  yeux.  13.  AUez  les  voir  en 
passant ;  je  suis  siir  qu'ils  vous  feront  mille  honnetet^s. 
14.  Vous  pouvez  monter  maintenant ;  la  bonne  a  fait 
votre  chambre.  15.  S'il  ose  me  frapper,  je  ne  ferai  ni 
nne  ni  deux,  je  lui  donnerai  la  moiinaie  de  sa  pi^ce,  ei 
quelque  chose  par-dessus  le  marcbd.  16.  Au  petit  bon- 
heur  !  si  nous  ne  rdussissous  pas,  nous  pourrons.  du  moins, 
nous  flatter  d'avoir  fait  de  notre  mieux.  17.  Cela  n'est 
vraiment  pas  maladroit,  je  ne  I'aurais  pas  cru  si  habile  que 
cela.  18.  C'est  Ernest  qui  a  remport^  tous  les  premiers 
prix  ;  il  est  beaucoup  plus  fort  que  moi  dans  toutes  les 
branches  ;  mais,  eu  histoire  et  eu  g^ographie,  je  I'ai  serr^ 
de  pr^s. 

80. 

1.  You  will  not  clap  your  hands  so  loudly  when^  you 
hear  what  your  father  says.  2.  The  weather  has  been 
extremely  cold  all  this  month.  3.  I  caught  cold  on 
Saturday  evening  whilst  we  were  fishing.  4.  Will 
you  come  to  tea  with  us  on  Monday  evening  ?  5.  She 
colours  up  when  any  one  addresses  her.  6.  How  comes 
it  that  you  have  only  written  ten  pages  of  your  book  ? 
7.  You  are  very  comfortable  in  this  arm-chsor.  8.  We 
did  not  get  clear  of  the  business  so  easily  a^  you  think. 

9,  1  may  clear  the  table,  since  you  have  all  finished. 

10.  I  have  had  such  a  cold  that  I  could  hardly  attend 
to  my  business.     11.  Will  you  come  to  me  to-night  at 


114  KXEECISES   Oir   IDIOMS. 

half-past  five  ?  12.  Come  what  may,  I  did  my  best 
to^*  succeed.  13.  Did  you  clap  your  hands  when  you 
heard  that  you  were  to  get  a  prize?  14.  I  shall  not 
clear  away  tilP°^  every  one  has  dined.  15,  I  have  been 
so  cold  all  day  that  I  think  I  am  going  to  be  ill.  16. 
She  will  come  to  tea  with  us  to-morrow  evening.  17. 
Poor  fellow !  all  his  projects  have  come  to  nothing.  18. 
You  did  not  come  off  with  much  glory  in  that  encounter. 
19.  Will  it*  not  come  to  the  same  thing  if  I  pay  you 
before  ?  20.  How  comes  it  that  you  are  always  too  late 
for  your  dinner?  21.  You  were  not  so  comfortable  in 
your  old  house  as  (you  are)  in  this  one.  22.  I  had  such 
a  cold  in  my  head  it  was  impossible  for  me  to  sing. 
23.  I  shall  certainly  catch  cold  if  I  am  obliged  to  sit 
near  this  open  window.  24.  You  must  feel  happy  thatf 
you  are  getting  clear  of  the  business  without  loss.  25. 
Do  not  clap  your  hands  so  loudly,  you  will  awaken  your 
mother.  26.  Has  not  the  weather  been  colder  this  year 
than  last?  27.  When  do  you  intend  to  come  to  see 
me  ?  28.  Come  along;  it  is  clearing  up;  we  shall  have 
a  fine  walk.  29.  How  long  have  you  had  a  cold? 
30.  We  came  to  an  understanding  before  parting.  31. 
Let  him  come  to  me  to-morrow  at  twelve  o'clock.  32. 
I  cannot  get  clear  of  that  horrible  confusion.  33.  K 
you  like,  we  shall  go  and  see  him  ;  he  lives  close  by. 
34.  How  comes  it  that  you  sing  (so)  much  better  than 
you  used  to  do? J.  35.  Did  you  not  catch  cold  after 
your  bath  ?  36.  Were  you  comiortable  in  such  a  small 
bed? 

8L 
(Index,  XI.) 

1.  Qu'il  8'en  fait  accroire,  cet  imbecile !  2.  Je  vous 
feral  incessamment  connaitre  un  fait  qu'il  vous  impoite 
beaucoup  de  savoir.     3.  Auriez-vous,  Monsieur,  la  bont^ 


•  See  Note  (♦),  page  100. 

t  See  Iiule8a(l>. 

t  Tban  you  used  to  do,  qu'ai  tiffoi*. 


EXKBCISES   09    IDIOMS.  115 

de  concher  ceci  par  dcrit  ?  c'eat  la  coutnine  dans  ce  pays. 
4.  Ne  voiis  ddiaugez  pas,  je  vous  prie  ;  je  ni'y  rendrai 
moi-meme,  k  moins  que  I'affaire  ne  vous  re;,'arde  person- 
nellement.  5.  Votre  pendule  est,  ce  me  semble,  en  fort 
inauvais  ^tat ;  elle  rient  de  sonner  dix-hnit  on  vingt 
heiires.  6.  N'allez  pas  lui  manquer  de  respect  au  moins,* 
c'est  lui  qui  fait  ici  la  pluie  at  le  beau  temps.  7.  Ce  petit 
monsieur  est  plein  de  lui-meme ;  dans  le  salon  de  lecture 
on  n'entend  que  sa  voix  dclatante  et  ses  gros  rires.  8. 
Quand  vous  voudrez.  Monsieur,  je  suis  k  vos  ordres. 
9.  Voyons,  mettez  la  main  sur  la  conscience,  et  dites-moi 
fraiichement  si  vous  pensez  que  la  conduite  que  vous  tenez 
vuus  fait  honneur.  10,  Vous  avez  beau  recourir  tour  k 
tour  aux  promesses  et  aux  menaces  ;  tout  cela  n'y  fera  ni 
chaud  ni  froid.  11.  Que  feriez-vous  k  ma  place  ?  lorsque 
j'entre,  les  voilk  tous  k  me  rire  au  nez.  12.  Ma  foi ! 
vous  voilii  'bien  malade  !  r^pondez-leur  sur  le  meme 
ton.  13.  Si  c'est  bien  comme  vous  le  dites,  s'il  n'a  pas 
repondu  k  la  lettre  que  vous  lui  aviez  dcrite,  je  pa.sse  con- 
damnation  sur  ce  point.  14.  Mais,  Monsieur,  j'ai  tout 
lieu  de  m'etonner  de  votre  intervention  :  en  quoi  cela 
vous  regarde-t-il,  s'il  vous  plait  ?  15.  Que  pensez-vous  de 
mon  cousin  ?  11  n'a  pas  I'air  d'avoir  invents  la  poudre, 
n'est-ce  pas  1  16.  II  perd  facilenient  la  carte  ;  lorsque  ma 
femnie  lui  a  adressd  la  parole,  il  est  restd  bouche  b^ante. 
17.  Que  je  preune  garde  k  moi,  dites-vous,  de  peur  qu'on 
ne  repete  ce  que  je  dis  !  cela  m'est  bien  ^gal,  c'est  le 
moindre  de  mes  soucis.  18.  Calmez-vous  donc,*mon  chcr 
ami,  Tous  ne  savez  pa«  vous  moJerer. 

89L 

1.  The  loss  of  his  mother  completed  his  misfortune. 
2.  I  think  he  will  not  consent  to  do  him  even  that 
Biuall  service.  3.  He  is*®  a  very  conceited  young  man. 
4.  You  need  not  concern  yom'self  about  hia  husinesai 

*  Au  moint,  at  all  eventa.  wbatcrer  elaeyoadA 


116  BXERCISES   ON    IDIOMS. 

5.  As  my  honour  was  concerned,  it  was  necessary  foi 
me  to  be  present.  6.  If  you  persist  in  such  shameful 
conduct,  you  cannot  wonder  that  your  friends  desert 
you.  7.  Was  not  your  brother  the  second  in  command 
in  that  engagement  ?  8.  You  shall  confine  yourself  to 
that ;  it  Vould  be  dangerous  to  excite  him  more.*  9. 
1  was  not  conscious  of  having  offended  him.  10.  It  is 
of  consequence  to  me  that  you  should  come.  11.  It  was 
of  consequence  to  do  that  at  once.  12.  Itf  is  of  great 
consequence.  13.  Do  you  wish  to  complete  your  mis- 
fortunes by  such  an  act  of  madness  ?  14.  Now,  sir,  I  am 
at  your  command ;  we  shall  go  when  you  like.  15. 
"Why  do  you  pursue  a  (course  of)  conduct  that  will  draw 
upon  you  the  contempt  of  all  honest  people  ?  16.  Could 
you  not  confine  yourself  to  that  ?  17.  I  am  conscious  of 
having  done  many  foolish  things.  18.  She  did  not  con- 
fine herself  to  that,  she  dared  to  strike  him.  19.  I 
always  take  care  not  to  mix  myself  up  with  their  gos- 
sip. 20.  May  I  not  confide  in  my  oldest  friend  1  21. 
Do  not  concern  yourself  about  my  affairs.  22.  Would  it 
not  be  of  consequence  to  your  father  to  have  the  letter 
early?     23.  Was  it  of  consequence  to  do  that  so  quickly? 

24.  If  my  life  is  at  stake,  that  is  of  great  consequence. 

25.  You  are  not  pursuing  a  (course  of)  conduct  that 
will  pleasej  your  friends.  26.  Why  should  I  not  con- 
fide in  those  that  have  been  so  kind  to  me?  27.  Do  not 
confine  yourself  to  that.  28.  Do  you  think  we  should'^" 
confine  ourselves  to  these  orders  ?  29.  To  complete  my 
misery,  I.lost  my  way  in  the  forest.  30.  You  are  too 
conceited,  my  friend.  31.  AVhy  do  you  concern  your- 
self so  much  about  things  that  do  not  concern  you  ?  32 
If  my  honour  is  not  concerned,  I  need  not  trouble  my- 
self about  it.  33.  Was  he  conscious  of  what  he  was 
saying  at  the  time  ?  34.  It  is  of  no  consequence.  35. 
It  is  of  consequence  to  do  well  what  we  have  to  do.  36. 
I  confided  in  his  honour,  and  he  has  kept  the  secret. 

*  Uort  is  translated  by  davantage  when  it  is  nsed  absolately,  that  is,  when 
It  is  not  followed  by  the  second  pai  t  of  tiie  comparison. 
t  See  Note  (*),  page  100. 
X  That  will  please,  de  nature  a  plairt  ^ 


KZERCISES    OK   ISIOHS.  Il7 

88. 

(Index,  XII.) 

1 .  VoilJfc  troifl  semaines  qu'elle  me  fait  la  mine,  mais  je 
ne  m'en  porta  pas  plus  mal.  2.  Comma  vous  voil^  fait ! 
vous  avez  de  la  boue  jusqu'aux  oreilles !  3.  Vous  m'avez 
ddfie  de  faire  tomber  la  conversation  sur  ce  sujet-1^ :  eh 
bien,  ne  m'en  suis-je  pas  tir^  avec  honneur?  4.  S'U  s'^tait 
abaissd  jusque-lk,  ses  rivaux  n'auraient  plus  rienk  craindre 
de  lui.  5.  En  revenant,  comme  il  faisait  noir,  il  a  pris  un 
foss^  plein  d'eau  pour  un  beau  sentier,  et  il  est  a.\\6  se 
Jeter  dedans.  6.  II  en  avait  par-dessus  la  tete.  7.  Comme 
VOU8  Stes  de  mauvaise  humeur  ce  matin !  8.  Je  n'ai  pas 
dormi  de  la  nuit,  je  n'ai  fait  que  tousser.  9.  Dfautbienpeu 
de  chose  pour  le  d^Cdncerter.  10.  Voyons,  ne  me  pressez 
pas  tant,  laissez-moi  le  temps  de  m'orienter.  11.  C'est 
moi  qui  f erai  les  frais  de  son  installation,  coMe  que  coftte. 
12.  A  combien  cela  peut-il  revenir?  13.  S'il  m'obsMe 
constamment  de  sa  presence,  nous  aurons  maille  k  partir 
entemble.  14.  C'est  un  monsieur  qui  n'a  pas  I'air  d'y 
toucher,  mais  11  en  faut  un  plus  malin  que  lui  pour  m'at- 
traper.  15.  II  faisait  nuit  noire  quand  nous  sommes 
arrives;  il  n'y  avait  pas  un  chat  dans  les  rues.  16.  Ma 
chfere  sceur,  tu  as  mis  ton  bonnet  de  travers  ce  matin,  maia 
ce  n'est  pas  une  raison  pour  faire  endever  tout  le  monde. 
17.  Si  votre  ami  n'avait  pas  la  tete  un  peu  feMe,  je  lui 
donnerais  du  fil  h.  retordre.  18.  II  n'y  a  pas  moyen  de 
■'entendre  avec  lui  ;  c'est  un  grus  bomru,  un  oura  mal 
Uch4. 

84. 

1.  You  are  constantly  doing  what  you  ought  not  (to 
do).  2.  He  turned  the  conversation  to  other  subjects. 
3.  Don't  tell  such  terrible  stories  again;  you  make  my 
flesh  creep.  4.  That  is  of  course,  if  your  father  per- 
mits you.  5.  He  paid  his  court  to  her  for  a  long  tune. 
3  I 


118  EXKUCISES    ON    IDIOMS. 

6.  You  are  so  cross,  it  is  impossible  to  live  with  j-ou. 

7.  You  were  in  no  danger  from  your  brother  during  hig 
illness.  8.  I  daresay  you  believe  the  story.  9.  I  dared 
him  to  make  such  a  speech.  10.  It  was  so  dark  we 
could  scarcely  find  the  road.  11.  That  invoice  must  be 
dated  the,  1st  of  Januaiy.  12.  You  are  covered  with  it 
up  to  your  very  neck.  13.  Why  is  the  letter  dated  the 
20th  of  September  ?  14.  It  will  not  be  daik  for  an  hour 
yet.*  15.  I  dare  you  to  approach  me.  16.  You  can- 
not be  in  danger  from  that  poor  little  beast.  17,  You 
should  not  be  cross  with  youi"  mother.  18.  How  long 
has  he  been  pajdng  his  court  to  that  young  lady  ?  19. 
That  is  of  course,  if  you  can  afford  it.  20.  Don't  speak 
of  him  to  me;  we  ai-e  at  daggers  drawn.  21.  Were  you 
not  covered  with  it  up  to  your  ears  ?  22.  I  shall  turn 
the  conversation  to  another  subject  immediately.  23. 
Keep  yourself  cool,  here  is  your  brother  coming.  24.  I 
daresay  she  will  come,  if  her  father  is  better.  25.  Why 
did  you  not  pay  your  court  to  that  lady  ?  26.  That  is 
of  course,  if  the  weather  permit  you.  27.  You  must 
not  cough  in  the  middle  of  my  speech.  28.  I  fell  in 
the  mud,  and  was  covered  with  it  up  to  the  eyes.  29. 
You  must  turn  the  conversation  to  music.  30.  They 
used  to  lay  all  the  travellers  under  contribution.  31 
You  will  be  cross  when  you  hear  the  result.  32.  You 
are  in  no  danger  from  that  slight  cold.  33.  I  daresay 
you  meant  well  enough.  34.  It  must  be  quite  dark 
before  I  can  venture  out.  35.  This  letter  was  dated 
the  ICth  of  April.     86.  Do  you  dare  me  to  du  it? 

86. 

(Index,  XTTT.) 

1.  D  s'est  otd  le  pain  de  la  bouche  pour  voua  donner 
one  bonne  Education.  2.  Ce  ne  sent  pas  lea  titres,  c'est 
le  travaU  et  la  vertu  qui  ddcident  du  m<^rite  ;  ceux-ci  de- 
pendent de  nous,  ceux-lk  dependent  du  hasard.  3.  L'avare 


"  For  an  bonr  yet,  avatit  unt  heure  did. 


EXERCISES   OK   IDIOUS.  119 

M  prive  du  n^cessaire  pour  entasser  des  richesses  qae  sea 
he'ritiersdissipentaussitotqu'ilslespossbdent.  4.  Ud^pend 
de  vows  que  tout  se  passe  biea.  6.  II  ne  depend  pas  de 
noos  de  n'etre  pas  pauvres,  mais  il  depend  de  nous  de  faire 
respecter  notre  pauvret^.  6.  Qu'est-ce  que  dira  M.  votre 
pfere,  qu'est-ce  que  pensera  M"ie  votre  mfere,  si  vous  allez 
vous  Jeter  dans  les  dettes  ?  7.  Soyez  tranquille;  si  I'on  vous 
attaque,  je  suis  Ik ;  je  prendrai  fait  et  cause  pour  vous. 
8.  Auriez-vous  la  bont^  de  lui  remettre  ce  paquet  en 
mains  proprea  ?  je  me  defie  de  ses  domestiques.  9.  Vcnis 
ne  savez  pas  le  prendre  :  avec  de  la  douceur  et  des  caresses 
vous  le  mfeneriez  au  bout  du  monde.  10.  Vous  croyez 
cela,  vous  ;  il  est  beaucoup  plus  fin  que  vous  ne  pensez  ; 
il  vous  en  revendrait.  11.  Vous  etes  un  de  ceux  qui 
croient  voir  des  dtoiles  en  plein  midi.  12.  Hier  on  eiit 
dit  qu'il  ^tait  k  deux  doigts  de  la  mort,  mais  maintenant 
il  n'est  pas  si  mal  k  beaucoup  prfes.  13.  Criez  plus  fort, 
elle  est  sourde  comme  un  pot.  14.  En  Ecosse,  pendant 
I'^t^,  il  fait  jour  beaucoup  plus  tot  et  beaucoup  plus  long- 
temps  qu'en  France.  15.  A  Paris,  au  mois  de  juin,  c'est 
k  peine  si  I'on  voit  clair  pour  lire  k  8  heures  du  soir.  16. 
Nous  buvions  six  ou  huit  verres  d'eau  min^rale  par  jour, 
et  nous  aUions  prendre  un  bain  de  deux  jours  I'un.  17. 
II  ne  tient  qu'k  vous  de  venir  avec  nous  ;  le  cheval  est 
atteld,  nous  partons  dans  cinq  minutes.  18.  Eh  bien, 
Boit !  je  pars ;  cette  petite  excursion  me  fera  un  plaisir 
intlnL 

86. 

1.  The  Icttor  bearing  the  date  of  the  21st  of  Jnnunry 
never  reached  me.  2.  1  promised  to  call  on  him  some 
day  next  week.  3.  It  will  be  broad  daylight  at  five 
o'clock  in  the  moraing.  4.  It  is  impossible  to  say  to  an 
hour  when  I  return.  5.  Can  you  tell  me  whose  deal  it 
is  ?  6.  He  was  put  to  death  in  the  most  cruel  way.  7. 
She  will  be  (found)  deficient  in  skill  at  the  last  trial.  8. 
Some  women  delight  in  scandal.     9.  His  letter  was  not 


120  EXJIECISES    ON    IDIOMS. 

delivered  in  time.  10.  You  cannot  depend  upon  a 
single  word  she  says.*  11.  That  depends  upon  circum- 
stances. 12.  He  deprived  himself  of  many  pleasures  in 
order  to  give  his  children  a  good  education.  13.  My 
dear  friend,  it  is  time  for  you  to  decide ;  we  are  leaving. 
14.  You  need  not  deprive  yourself  of  the  necessaries  (of 
life)  for  him.  15.  You  used  to  delight  in  such  tricks. f 
16.  Can  you  not  depend  upon  the  punctuality  of  that 
steam-boat?  17.  The  letter  must  be  delivered  before 
he  leaves  town.  18.  I  would  depend  on  him  rather 
than  on  his  brother.  19.  Put  that  poor  beast  to  death 
at  once.  20.  The  writings  bearing  the  date  of  that 
period  are  all  very  beautiful.  21.  Whose  deal  is  it 
now?  22.  Some  day  next  week  you  vsdll  hear  from 
me.  23.  She  is  an  excellent  servant,  but  you  don't 
know  how  to  deal  with  her.  24.  I  bid  defiance  to  any 
wholesale  dealer  to  sell  cheaper  than  I.  25.  Have  you 
not  deprived  yourself  of  your  fortune  to  assist  your  rela- 
tions? 26.  Your  account  bearing  the  date  of  2nd  No- 
vember is  wrong.  J  27.  I  hope  those  manners  will 
soon  grow  out  of  date.  28.  Some  evening  next  week 
we  shall  call  on  you.  29.  Can  you  not  depend  upon 
your  brother  ?  30.  It  must  have  been  broad  daylight 
when  they  entered  the  house.  31.  Could  you  not 
deliver  the  letter  yourself  ?  32.  I  know  to  a  day  when 
he  wiU  arrive.  33.  I  advise  you  to  act  deliberately  in 
such  an  important  affair.  34.  You  ought  to  know 
whose  deal  it  is.  35.  She  is  older  than  you;  you 
should  deal  with  her  more  politely.  36.  The  Christ- 
ians in  Syria  were  put  to  death  with  the  most  cruel 
torments. 

87. 

frndex,  XrV.) 

1.  Laissez-nous  done  tranquilles  ;  estce  que  cela  voua 
regarde  ?    2.  J'ai  oubli^  de  vous  charger  de  lui  faire  mea 

•  A  sinele  word  she  says,  atieune  de  nes  paroles. 
t  Stich  tricks,  ces  sorles  de  tours.      X  A  wrong  account,  uii  compte  inexact. 


eXEBClSSS   OK    IDIOMS.  121 

compliments.  3.  Quelle  peine  il  a  eue  k  s'arracher  k  cetfe 
mauvaise  liabitude  !  4.  Est-ce  que  cela  ne  la  regardait 
paa  ?  5.  Quand  vous  lui  ^crirez,  je  voua  prie  de  vouloir 
bien  me  rappeler  k  son  bon  souvenir.  6.  Le  plus  embar- 
rass^ est  celui  qui  tient  la  queue  de  la  poele.  7.  Je  suia 
entre  I'enclume  et  le  marteau  ;  si  j'y  vais,  elle  viendra 
peut-etre  de  son  c6t^ ;  si  je  n'y  vais  pas,  il  me  faudra 
peut-etre  attendre  huit  jours.  8.  J'ai  pris  ce  monsieur 
en  grippe  ;  il  m'a  I'air  faux  comme  un  jeton.  9.  Si  voua 
lui  rendez  ce  petit  service,  vous  verrez  qu'il  se  mettra  en 
quatre  pour  vous.  10.  Vous  m'avez  mis  dans  de  beaux 
draps  avec  les  histoires  que  vous  etes  all^  lui  conter.  11. 
Maintenant  elle  me  tient  k  distance  et  ne  me  salue  plus 
dans  la  rue.  12.  Comment !  est-ce  qu'on  se  rebute 
comme  cela  pour  la  moindre  chose  ?  13.  Laissez  Ik  cette 
besogne  ;  vous  etes  trop  distrait ;  vous  ne  faites  rien 
qui  vaille.  14.  Cela  ira  bien  quand  je  m'y  serai  mis  tout 
de  bon  ;  le  tout  est  de  m'y  mettre.  15.  II  n'y  a  que  la 
premier  pas  qui  coAte.  16.  Vous  finirez  cela  en  deux  ou 
trois  jours  ;  ne  dirait-on  pas  que  c'est  la  mer  k  boire  ? 
17.  Quand  je  la  vois  jouer  ainsi  h,  tort  et  k  travers,  sans 
raisonner  ce  qu'elle  fait,  cela  me  casse  bras  et  jambes.  18. 
N'allez  pas  les  voir  aujourd'hui ;  ils  ont  eu  des  diHicult^a 
ensemble  ;  madame  avait  mis  son  bonnet  de  travers. 

88 

1.  That  makes  little  diltVience  to  us.  2.  You  have 
had  great  difficulty  in  succeeding.  3.  I  served  up  din- 
ner as  soon  as  I  was  told.  4.  Are  not  the  streets  dirty 
to-day  ?  Yes,  very.*  5.  This  dish  invariably  disagrees 
with  me.  6.  I  was  greatly  disappointed  in  that  affair. 
7.  You  are  always  doing  harm  to  these  children.  8. 
This  box  will  do  for  the  one  I  lost.  9.  He  does  nothing 
but  diink  beer  all  day.  10.  I  have  (nothing)  to  do 
with  him.     11.  You  should  have  (nothing)  to  do  with 

•  In  snoh  answer  like  tliis  ("Tes,  rery,")  never  say  trh  by  itself,  but  lepeat 
Vie  preceding  adjective  or  adverb,  or  make  use  of  other  worda. 


122  EXEECISES   ON    IDIOMS. 

that  man.  12.  Please  convey  my  kind  regards  to  your 
father.  13.  I  think  my  brother  is  to  dine  out  to-day. 
14.  Does  not  this  close  atmosphere  disagree  with  yoiir 
health?  15.  He  would  not  do  harm  to  a  fly.  16.  How 
dirty  it  is  sometimes  in  this  quai-ter  of  the  town !  17. 
This  will  do  for  a  sail.  18.  She  must  serve  up  dinner 
before  it  gets  cold.  19.  The  English  do  nothing  but 
eat  and  drink  at  Chiistmas.  20.  She  has  great  difficulty 
in  walking.  21.  I  hope,  sir,  that  does  not  disappoint 
you.     22.  Give  it  to  her,  it  makes  no  difference  to  me. 

23.  I  wish  I  had  to  do  with  such  an  amiable  person. 

24.  Do  you  not  desire  your  kind  regards  to  my  brother? 

25.  This  fine  weather  should  agree  with  your  health. 

26.  Set  about  it  at  once ;  you  will  see  that  there  will 
be  no  difficulty  in  the  thing.  27.  I  cannot  bring  in  the 
dinner  till^*^^  your  father  comes.  28.  Have  you  had 
any  difficulty  in  procuring  your  brother  a  pension  ?  29. 
He  dismounted  and  came  to  embrace  us.  30.  You  may 
do  as  you  please,  I  have  nothing  to  do  with  it.  31.  I 
have  been  so  often  disappointed  in  my  hopes,  that  I 
almost  despair  of  success.  32.  Don't  be  afraid,  I  shall 
not  do  you  any  harm.  33.  Will  that  do  for  the  knife 
you  lost  ?  34.  He  does  nothing  but  sigh  all  day  long, 
85.  Had  I  nothing  to  do  with  it  ?  36.  I  should  have 
had  to  do  with  some  pretty  rogues. 


89. 

(Index,  3CV.) 

1.  Cast  assez  comme  cela,  .n'y  touchez  plus,  c'est  tout 
ce  qu'il  faut.  2.  Je  vous  d^fie  d'en  faire  autaut.  3. 
Nous  ferons  en  sorte  que  le  tout  soit  fini  dans  ti'ois  mois. 
4.  11  ne  fait  jamais  sec  dans  ce  pays-ci ;  comment  ferez- 
vous  done,  vous  qui  aimez  le  temps  sec  et  froid  avec  un 
beau  soleil  ?  6.  Est-ce  que  vous  pouvez  vous  passer  de  la 
Boci^td  de  votre  ivhre  1  je  vous  croyais  inseparables.  6. 
C'est  k  vous  de  lui  faire  la  premiere  visite  ;  allez  vite  le 
trouver.     7.  Est-ce  bien  ]k  tout  ce  qu'i]  faut  ?  ne  vous 


EXEBCISES   OK    IDIOUS.  123 

trompez-vous  pas  ?  8.  Cette  lettre  m'a  longtemps  tenu 
au  coeur.  9.  Je  ne  pouvais  lue  faire  a  I'idee  que  c'^tait 
bien  lui  qui  I'avait  dcrite.  10.  Faites  en  sorte  de  voua 
passer  de  sa  socidtd  ;  cela  n'en  ira  que  mieux.  11.  Jo 
crois,  ma  cousine,  que  vous  avez  ensorceld  cette  petite 
bete  ;  elle  ne  peut  pas  se  passer  de  vous  cinq  minutes. 
12.  Vous  qui  faites  I'entendu,  je  parie  bien  que  vous  n'en 
sauriez  faire  autant  qu'elle.  13.  11  ne  m'est  pas  plus  pos- 
sible de  voua  payer  pour  le  moment,  qu'il  I'est  de  tirer 
de  I'huile  d'un  mur.  14.  Si  vous  ne  lui  donnez  pas  un 
bon  pourboire,  il  vous  mettra  toute  I'affaire  sur  le  dos, 
vous  pouvez  y  compter.  15.  Si  vous  etes  toujours  1^ 
prfes  de  moi,  bavardant,  tiant  et  faisant  du  tapage,  il  n'y  a 
pas  moyen  d'ecrire  une  ligne  qui  ait  le  sens  commun.  16. 
Oil  voulez-vous  en  venir  avec  toutes  vos  hesitations  et 
toutes  vos  reticences  1  17.  Cela  ira  trfes-bien,  vous  avez 
parfaitement  reussi.  18.  Quelle  vilaine  petite  ville  que 
ceUe-l^  !  persoune  n'y  sort  du  cliez  soi ;  o'est  triste  comma 
on  enterrement. 

90. 

1.  That  story  has  nothing  to  do  with  whnt  we  nre 
Baying.  2.  You  would  do  right  to  call  on  that  gentle- 
man. 3.  You  would  do  wrong  to  punish  this  poor 
child.  4.  I  advise  you  not  to  drive  him  to  extremities. 
5.  I  have  done  the  same  twenty  times.  6.  I  can  do 
without  wine,  if  you  give  me  pure  water.  7.  That  will 
do ;  say  no  more  about  it.  8.  You  are  drawing  upon 
yoiirself  unmerited  abuse.  9.  It  is  very  dry  for  this 
season.  10.  You  are  dropping  water  at  every  stop. 
11.  It  is  your  duty  to  obey  your  parents.  12.  That 
story  dwells  still  upon  my  mind.  13  "Will  that  do? 
14.  Ho  will  di-aw  upon  himself  a  public  rebuke.  15. 
The  weather  has  not  been  so  dry  for  many  a  day.*  1 6. 
Did  you  not  drop  your  handkerchief  in  the  street?  17. 
Is  it  not  your  duty  to  fight  when  your  country  calls 

*  Many  a  day,  loiigtemp*.    See.  besides,  Kule  93  (10). 


124  EXERCISES  OS  IDIOflS. 

you?  18.  Does  not  that  dwell  upon  your  mind?  19. 
You  will  have  to*  do  without  luxuriesf  when  you  emi- 
grate. 20.  I  have  done  as  much  as  you.  21.  Do  so 
that  he  may  know  it.  22.  If  I  have  done  wrong 
in  reproaching  you,  I  am  sorry  for  it.  23.  I  should  be 
doing  right  to  expel  him  from  the  schooL  24.  When 
we^''  hava  to  do  with  rogues,  we  must  expect  to  be 
robbed.  25.  My  leaving^"  the  town  dwelt  long  upon 
his  mind.  26.  The  cab  drove  over  his  leg.  27.  I  deem 
it  a  duty  to  tell  her  what  has  happened.  28.  I  should 
think  you  are  double  my  age.  29.  I  shall  not  dwell 
upon  yoiir  misbehaviour  towards  me.  30  I  must  drop 
this  bag  at  the  next  comer.  J  31.  Have  I  not  done  as 
much  as  any  of  the  others  ?§  32.  Will  it  be  dry  enough 
to  take  a  walk  ?  33.  What  is  to  be  done  to  prevent  him 
from  coming  ?  34.  That  will  not  do.  35.  Has  he  not 
drawn  these  misfortunes  on  himself  ?  86.  Our  neigh- 
boiur's  wife  is  dying. 

91. 
(Index,  XVI.) 

1.  N'dtiez-vous  pas  en  train  de  liar  conversation  aveo 
elle  lorsque  jesuis  entr^  ?  2.  Je  vous  ai  adressd  la  parole, 
mais  vous  avez  fait  la  sourde  oreille.  3.  Bien  que  je  vous 
portasse  envie,  je  n'ai  pas  voulu  faire  cesser  un  entretien 
qui  vous  rendait  si  heureux.  4.  Dieu  salt  h,  quels  dangers 
j'ai  dchappe  !  5.  Enfin,  grdce  k  vous,  me  voici  h.  meme 
de  quitter  un  pays  oil  j'allaia  pourrir.  6.  Interrogez-les 
toujours ;  ne  Ikchez  pas  prise ;  ils  finiront  bien  par 
I'avouer.  7.  Faites  done  cesser  cet  affreux  piano,  voilii 
trois  heures  que  j'entends  le  commencement  du  meme  air. 
8.  EUe  a  fini  par  le  rend  re  fou.  9.  Le  mot  qui  t'^chappe 
est  ton  maitre  ;  celui  que  tu  retiens  est  ton  esclave.  10. 
Le  chien  et  le  chat,  ennemis  I'un  de  I'autre,  finissent  par 

♦  You  will  have  to,  t7  vous  faudra, 
f  hnxuriea,  les  Jouissances  du  luxe. 
X  At  the  next  corner,  au  premier  coin  de 
i  As  any  of  the  others,  qu'un  autre. 


rue. 


EXERCISES  ON  IDIOMS.  125 

rivre  en  bonne  intelligence.  11,  L'aniraal  ^chapp^  d'un 
pidge  s'y  reprend  dillicilement.  12,  Pardon,  Monsieur ; 
c'est  assez,  c'est  ra§me  plus  qu'il  ne  faiit,  13,  Vous  en 
parlez  bien  h.  votre  aise ;  il  semble,  avec  vous,  qu'il  n'y 
ait  qu'^  se  baisser  et  h.  en  prendre.  14.  Je  ne  sais  ce  que 
j'ai  ce  matin;  je  ne  suis  pas  dans  mon  assiette,  15.  11 
me  semble  que  cette  lettre,  au  lieu  de  vous  lier  les  mains, 
vous  laisse  les  couddes  franches,  16.  N'y  mettez-vous 
pas  du  votre  ?  est-ce  que  vrairaent  I'histoire  est  aussi  jolie 
que  cela  ?  17,  Non,  Monsieur,  je  ne  brode  pas,  je  vous 
I'assure ;  c'est  de  votre  ami  Louis  que  je  tiens  I'anecdote. 
18  II  faudra  repasser  plus  tard,  monsieur  u'est  pas 
visible. 

02. 

1.  He  turns  a  deaf  ear  to  all  that  I  sav.  2.  He  is 
engaged  in  putting  an  end  to  that  quarrel.  8.  His 
friends  will  enable  him  to  pay  his  debts.  4.  If  you  say 
that,  you  will  make  an  enemy  of  my  wife.  5,  She 
was  enabled  to  set  out  at  once.  6.  They  escaped  from 
their  enemies.  7.  You  endeavoured  to  enter  into  con- 
versation with  that  man.  8.  He  will  put  an  end  to 
your  difficuL  t  s,  9.  "We  have  enjoyed  that  drive  very 
much.  10.  Why  are  you  enraged  at  me?  11.  Will 
they  not  enable  you  to  buy  that  liouse  ?  12.  We  shall 
end  by  letting  it  to  another.  13.  Were  they  not  en- 
gaged in  writing?  14.  Let  us  not  enter  into  conver- 
sation with  hor.  15.  Will  you  not  end  by  marrying* 
her?  16.  Will  they  not  envy  him  his  success?  17. 
What  else  is  there  to  do?  18.  He  mustf  have  been 
very  hungry,  for  he  ate  very  heartily.  19.  They  will 
not  always  turn  a  deaf  ear  to  my  demands.  20.  I  re- 
gretted your  absence  very  much ;  there  was,  indeed, 
enough  to  laugh  at.  21.  What  else  would  there  be  to 
do  ?  22.  We  shall  endeavour  to  put  an  end  to  these 
quarrels.     23.  You  turned  a  deaf  ear  to  me  then.     24. 

•  Uarier  ineans  "  tn  give  away  in  marriage  " ;  ^poustr,  "  to  take  any  OM 
in  marriace  ";   te  marier,  "to  get  married." 
t  See  Note  (*),  page  104. 


126  EXEECISES   ON    IDIOMS. 

Make  yourself  comfortable,  that  soat  is  good  enough  for 
me.  25.  Would  you  consent  to  treat  him  on  a  footing 
of  equality?  26.  Let  us  endeavour  to  do  our  task 
well.^o  27.  If  you  stop  your  ears,  I  won't  speak  any 
more.  28.  She  .used  to  enliven  the  evenings  with 
songs.  29.  I  entered  into  conversation  with  them.  30. 
He  will  escape  from  that  snare.  31.  Be  easy;  he 
always  enjoys  himself  well.  32.  You  envied  my  hap- 
piness. 33.  Are  you  always  engaged  in  writing  ?  34. 
They  will  not  be  so  enraged  against  him.  35.  We  shall 
end  by  forgiving  her.  36.  They  will  always  envy  the 
fortunate. 

93. 

(Index,  XVn.) 

1.  U  ^tait  temps  que  je  vinsse  k  son  secours,  elle  n'en 
pouvait  plus.  2.  Elle  peut  se  vanter  de  I'avoir  ^chapp^ 
belle.  3.  C'est  une  vraie  vipfere  que  cet  individu,  11  mord 
a  droite  et  k  gauche  et  empoisonne  tout.  4.  II  y  a  long- 
temps  que  je  voulais  le  d^masquer  aux  yeiix  de  tout  le 
monde  ;  c'est  vous  qui  m*en  avez  empech^.  5.  Vous 
croyez  qu'il  se  repentira  ;  ne  vous  y  attendez  pas  ;  11  vous 
poussera  k  bout  comme  tout  le  monde.  6.  Allons,  ne  vous 
faites  pas  prier  ;  venez  avec  nous  ;  c'est  votre  oncle  qui 
fait  les  frais  de  cette  partie  de  plaisir.  7.  Est-ce  Ih.  la 
bague  dont  vous  faisiez  tant  de  cas  ?  est-ce  bien  celle  que 
vous  avez  laiss^  tomber  dans  la  riviere  ?  8.  C'est  bien 
elle  ;  c'est  une  bague  que  mon  pfere  m'avait  achetde,  et 
qui  lui  avait  coAt^  fort  cher.  9.  Celui  qui  passe  dans  la 
paresse  la  premifere  partie  de  sa  vie,  ne  doit  pas  s'attendro 
h  se  reposer  dans  la  vieillesse.  10.  C'est  Jh,  le  cas  que  vous 
faites  de  ce  qu'on  vous  donne  !  11.  Vous  y  regardez  d'un 
pen  trop  prfes  ;  avec  vous  il  faut  toujours  mettre  les  points 
sur  les  i.  12.  Pendant  I'^t^,  lorsque  les  classes  sont  fer- 
me'es,  lisez  quelque  bon  livre  fran^ais,  et  t4chez  de  faire 
mentalement  quelques  phrases  tous  les  jours  ;  cela  vous 
tieudra  en  haleine.     13.  R^pondre  k  une  question  par  une 


EXEKCISES    ON    IDIOMS.  127 

autre,  c'est  r^pondre  k  I'^cossaise ;  r^pondre  sans  rien 
dire,  c'est  repondre  en  Normand  14.  II  a  fait  tous  ses 
efforts  pour  vous  etre  agrdable ;  il  faut  lui  savoir  gr^  de 
Ba  bonne  volont^.  15.  Elle  a  ouvert  de  grands  yeux  en 
revoyant  Eugfene,  qu'elle  croyait  mort  depuis  plusieurs 
annee3.  16.  Cette  chaleur  est  vraiment  accablante ; 
nous  veuons  de  faire  une  toute  petite  promenade,  et  nous 
somiues  rendus.  17.  Ce'qu'il  m'a  dit  Ik  est  uue  defuitej 
je  suis  siir  qu'il  a  touchd  Targeat. 

94. 

1.  I  had  a  narrotv^  escape  last  night.  2.  He  will  set 
great  value  on  that  ring.  3.  We  excited  the  compas- 
sion of  everyone.  4.  You  will  exhaust  my  patience. 
6.  "VVc  were  quite  exhausted.  6.  You  were  not  expect- 
ing such  a  letter.  7.  Will  they  not  defray  the  expense 
of  that  lawsuit  ?  8.  He  lives  at  considerable  expense. 
9.  Those  paintings  are  very  expensive.^*  10.  I  set 
gi'eat  value  on  them.  1 1 .  You  will  excite  his  compas- 
sion. 12.  I  am  quite  exhausted.  13.  You  will  be 
exhausted  like  myself,  if  you  go  so  far.  14.  He  hopes 
that  I  shall  defray  the  expense  of  my  journey.  16.  Let 
him  not  expect  that.  16.  It*  will  be  very  expensive. 
17.  They  exhausted  my  patience  at  last.  18.  You 
would  set  gi-eater  value  on  that  book  if  you  were  able  to 
understand  it.  19.  Would  she  not  excite  your  compas- 
sion ?  20.  Your  account  is  right,f  with  that  exception. 
21.  I  was  at  considerable  expense  to^"*  prccure  him  that 
plc£isure.  22,  You  excite  my  compassion,  but  I  cannot 
help  joul ;  I  am  quite  exhausted.  23.  Do  not  set  any 
value  on  her  favour;  she  is  capricious.  24.  I  expected 
so.  25.  He  is  a  hypocrite  whom  you  must  expose. 
26.  I  thank  you  for  the  interest  you  evinced  in  that 
affair.  27.  He  endeavours  to  catch  the  eye  of  every- 
body.    28.  He  hoped  you  would  be  an  evidence  for  him 

•  See  Note  (•),  page  100. 
t  A  light  account,  un  rompte  exact. 

X  I  cannot  help  you,>«  ne  puis  vous  ctidtr,  otjtntpuit  qu'y  fair*,  or >(  n'M 
ptiuc  mail. 


128  EXEliClSES    ON    IDIOMS. 

in  that  unfortunate  circumstance.  29.  Who  •would 
ever  have  expected  that?  30.  The  wickedness  and 
cunning  of  that  lawyer  are  far  beyond  expression. 
31.  Never  ask  him  here;  he  is  an  eyesore  to  me.  32. 
My  uncle  used  to  give  me  five  francs  a  month  for  my 
petty  expenses.  33.  Is  it  not  he  who  defrayed  the  ex- 
penses of  your  education  ?  34.  Yes;  nobody  has  ever* 
evinced  more  kindness  and  generosity.  ^5.  I  will  never 
be  even  with  him.  36.  It  will  be  a  very  expensive 
education. 

85. 

(Index,  XVIII.) 

1.  II  s'en  faut  de  beaucoup  que  je  regrette  ce  mon- 
sieur ;t  qu'il  s'en  aille  et  ne  revienne  plus.  2.  II  ne  tient 
qu'^  elle  de  r^ussir,  elle  n'a  qu'k  le  vouloir.  3.  C'est  hier 
qu'on  a  fait  I'dlection  des  ofBciers.  4.  11  ne  tenait  qu'^ 
moi  d'etre  lieutenant.  5.  Je  ne  I'ai  pas  voulu  pour  ne 
pas  avoir  affaire  au  capitaine  Martin.  6.  II  y  a  trois  ans 
que  nous  nous  somraes  querelles  h,  propos  de  bottes.  7. 
Si  vous  voulez  me  laisser  fairs,  je  vous  raccommoderai. 
8.  II  s'en  faut  de  beaucoup  qu'il  soit  aussi  fier  que  vous 
le  pensez.  9.  N'allez  pas  donner  dans  ces  modes-Ik ;  c'est 
de  I'extravagance  toute  pure.  10.  Ne  nous  brouillons 
pas  pour  si  pen  de  chose  ;  tout  le  monde  se  moquerait  de 
nous.  11.  II  a  su  lui  faire  face.  12.  C'est  vrai,  ma  chere 
nifece,  voilk  de  trfes-belle  dentelle,  mais  ce  n'est  pas  pour 
vos  beaux  yeux.  13.  II  faut  avoir  du  front  pour  oser  se 
presenter  dans  le  monde  apres  un  tel  esclandre.  14. 
Comme  j'entrais  k  Liverpool,  figurez-vous  que  je  ren- 
contre mon  vieil  ami  Pierre  arrivant  du  Canada.  16.  C'est 
une  vraie  poule  mouill^e  que  votre  petit  cousin ;  il  a  peur 
de  son  ombre.  16.  C'est  pour  la  fete  d'hier  que  j'avais 
command^  cet  habit ;  reprenez-le  ;  c'est  de  la  moutarde 


•  Nobody  has  ever,  on  n'a  jamais. 

t  CSe  momitur  U  Bometimes  ui>e(i  ironically— Mat  fdlow. 


HXEBCISES  ON    IDIOiCS.  129 

apr^s  diner.  17-  Qu'il  prenne  garde  k  loi ;  s'il  continue 
k  frequenter  ces  jeuues  gens  paresseux  et  dissipds,  autant 
lui  en  peud  k  Toreille.  18.  II  est  ^crit  qu'on  ne  lue  laia- 
■era  pas  one  minute  de  repos. 

ee. 

1.  The  soldiers  faced  the  enemy  bravely.  2.  That 
was  only  fair.  3.  The  troops  fell  into  the  ambuscade. 
4 .  We  quarrelled  about  the  money  which  he  owes  me.  5. 
He  has  taken  a  fancy  for  that  lady.  6.  I  am  far  from 
wishing  that.*  7.  I  must  bid  farewell  to  my  sisters,  8. 
That  clock  goes  too  fast.  9.  We  failed  in  spite  of  our 
efforts.  10.  It  is  your  fault  if  you  do  not  succeed.-} 
11.  The  tiger  feeds  on  flesh.  12.  They  felt  almost  j 
offended  at  your  remarks.  13.  We  are  not  able 
to  face  that  danger.  14.  That  colour  is  no  longer  the 
fashion.  15.  I  think  you  will  fall  into  the  snare.  16. 
Would  they  really  quarrel  about  such  a  trifle?  17.  He 
would  not  have  such  a  fancy  for  her  if  he  knew  her 
better.  18.  His  friends  woiild  be  far  from  approving  it. 
19.  They  bade  us  farewell  kst  night.  20.  Will  that 
watch  go  too  fast  if  I  touch  it?  21.  I  hope  you  wUl 
not  fail  iu  that  affair.  22.  It  will  be  his  own  fault  if 
he  does  not  get  it.  23.  Were  you  not  hurt  at  his  con- 
duct? 24.  That  dress  is  no  longer  the  fashion.  25. 
Do  you  not  feel  reluctant  to  speak  to  him  of  all  that  ? 

26.  We  would  not  fall  into  that  snare  so  easily  as  you. 

27.  We  are  inuring  ourselves  to  fatigue.  28.  He  quar- 
relled with  his  father  about  the  la^y  for  whom  he  had 
taken  a  fancy.  29.  It  will  be  your  fault  if  you  faiL 
30.  AU  this  is  very  fair,  but  tell  me  the  pretext  of  their 
quarrel.  31.  She  is  in  great  fear  of  me.  32.  That 
flower  is  faded,  throw  it  away.     33.  Do  not  forget  to 

•  Seethe  Ist  sentence  of  Exercise  95. 

t  See  the  2nd  sentence  of  Ex'irclse  96. 

i  The  rowel  «  is  suppressed :— Ist.  In  the  monosyllables  k.  it,  me,  te,»e,de, 
ec  (pronoun),  ne  que,  when  coming  immediately  before  a  word  beKinning  with 
a  voM-cl  or  h  mute.  2nd.  \nju^que.  3rd.  In  puisqut  and  quoique,  bat  only 
before  il,  ilt,  elle.  ellet,  on,  un,  une.  4th.  In  en/rt  placed  before  reciprocal  rerbi 
and  also,  according  to  some  authors,  before  eux  and  ellti. 


130  EXERCISES   ON    CDIOMS. 

go  and  bid  farewell  to  your  cousin  before  you  go.  34. 
It  is  my  fault  if  I  am  not  a  captain.  35.  I  cannot  inure 
myself  to  such  fatigue.  36.  My  watch  is  too  fast  by 
five  minutes. 

07. 
(Index,  XIX.) 

1.  Quel  beau  temps  il  faisait  ce  matin,  et  quelle  affreuse 
plnie  nous  venons  d'avoir  !  2.  Ne  vous  attristez  pas  ;  le 
temps  va  se  remettre  au  beau  ;  voyez,  le  vent  emporte  tous 
les  nuages.  3.  La  pauvre  fiUe  a  le  coeur  gros  ;  je  Ini  ai 
dit  que  sa  tante  ne  viendrait  pas  la  prendre  cet  apres- 
midi.  4.  En  quoi  trouvez-vous  h  redire  h  ma  conduite  ? 
5.  Est-ce  que  je  ne  suis  pas  venu  vous  prendre  k  I'heure 
que  vous  aviez  marqude  vous-meme  ?  6.  C'est  cette  petite 
affaire  qui,  ton  in  ant  en  insurrection,  a  mis  le  feu  k  toute 
I'Europe.  7.  Si  le  temps  s'^tait  remis  au  beau  une  heure 
plus  tot,  nous  serions  partis  avec  eux,  et  nous  serious  bien 
loin  maintenant.  8.  Quel  raauvais  sujet  que  votre  cousin  ! 
je  ne  veux  plus  avoir  affaire  h  lui.  9.  On  I'avait  accusd 
de  lachet^,  mais  il  a  bravement  payd  de  sa  personne  dana 
cette  bataUle.  10.  Ne  me  parlez  pas  d'Honord  ;  c'est  un 
triste  sire,  il  est  egoiste,  faux  et  vaniteux.  IL  AUez  faire 
un  petit  tour  sur  le  bord  de  la  mer,  et  vous  verrez  que 
votre  migraine  s'en  trouvera  mieux.  12.  D^pechez-vous 
derepondre  h.  sa  question,  ou  il  trouvera  bien  le  moyen  de 
vous  faire  parler.  13.  II  s'est  pr^cipitd  au  fort  de  la 
melde,  et  s'est  battft  corps  k  corps  avec  le  general  ennerai. 

14.  Est-ce  que  vous  m'en  voulez  pour  cela  ?  est-ce  le 
calomnier  que  de  dire  qu'il  n'a  pas  invents  la  poudre  ? 

15.  Je  ne  me  porte  pas  trfes-bien  aujourd'hui  ;  mea 
rliumatismes  m'ont  repris.  16.  J'ai  vu  passer  votre  frhre 
dans  son  nouvel  uniforme  ;  il  avait  fort  bonne  mine.  17. 
J'entendais  dire  autour  de  moi  qu'il  dtait  beau  comme  un 
astre.  18.  Si  vous  allez  r^p^ter  cette  histoire  k  tout  Vjout 
de  champ,  vous  vous  en  mordrez  les  doigts,  c'est  moi  qui 
vous  le  prddis. 


£X£BCISi:S  017  IDIOMS.  18] 


98. 

1.  She  feels  herself  sick.  2.  The  weather  is  going 
to  he  fine  again.  3.  Henry  is  a  good  fellow.  4.  His 
brother  is  a  bad  fellow.  5.  Come  and  take  her  for*  a 
walk.  6.  Go  and  fetch  the  doctor.  7.  Do  not  take  itf 
amiss  if  I  say  so.  8.  She  finds  fault  with  all  I  do.  9. 
Will  you  find  it  worth  your  while?  10.  I  hope  it  will 
be  fine  to-morrow.  1 1 .  When''^^  it  is  fine  again,  we  shall 
go.  12.  Do  not  set  fire  to  that  paper.  13.  If  you  drink 
two  or  three  glasses  of  that  water  every  morning,  you 
win  find  yourself  much  the  better  for  it.  14.  Now  she 
feels  sick  at  heart,  because  I  gave  it  to  her  sister.  15. 
Your  brother  has  always  his  French  lesson  at  his  fingers' 
ends.  16.  I  advise  you  not  to  go  there  now,  I  am  sure 
you  wUl  find  nobody.  17.  WiU  he  not  go  and  bring 
me  the  book  I  spoke  of?  18.  No,  he  will  take  it  amiss 
if  you  ask  it  again.  19.  All  those  reproaches  are  un- 
just, I  don't  care  a  fig  for  them."  20.  He  wOl  not  find 
fault  with  your  conduct  on  that  occasion.  21.  We  found 
it  worth  our  while  to  sell  our  land.  22.  They  find  it 
worth  their  while  to  buy  it.  23.  I  fear  they  may  set 
fire  to  the  house.  24.  It  was  so  fine  last  week,  that  we 
bade  farewell  to  our  friends  and  went  to  the  country. 
25.  Come  and  fetch  me  at  half-past  two.  26.  What 
would  you  do  if  she  suddenly  felt  sick  ?  27.  Be  a  good 
follow  and  write  your  exercise.  28.  This  child  looks 
(so)  very  sorry ;  don't  hold  him  any  more.  29.  They 
set  fire  to  the  four  comers  of  the  house.  30.  You  should 
go  and  take  a  walk  when  the  weather  is  so  fine.  31. 
It  has  just  rained,  but  the  weather  has  set  in  fine  again. 

32.  Don't  go  any  more  ^vith  him ;  he  is  a  bad  fellow. 

33.  Go  and  fetch  the  doctor ;  she  is  unwell.  34.  Do 
not  go  ;*^  she  is  better.  35.  They  wasted  the  western 
provinces  by  fire  and  sword.  36.  Pray  do  not  take  it 
amiss,  if  I  do  not  go  out  with  you ;  I  must  not. 

•  For  a  walk,  pour /aire  une  promtmade. 

t  /{  cannot  be  expressed  here  in  Fiencli  as  it  stand*  (or  nothiiiR,  the  com. 
plenient  of  the  verb  being  tueje  le  due. 


132  EXEBCISES  ON  £DIOHS. 

99. 
(Index,  XX.)  '^ 

1.  Si  c'est  pour  rire  que  vous  I'avez  fait,  je  vous  par- 
doiine,  niais  que  je  ne  vous  y  reprenne  plus.     2.  Tout  c6 
que  je  desire  maintenant,  c'est  qu'il  me  fasse  parvenir  ce 
paquet  au  moins  une  heure  avant  mou  depart.     3.  Je 
ni'e'tonne  que  ses  parents  le  laissent  .s'etablir  ;  il  va  man- 
ger toute  sa  fortune,  il  ne  voit  pas  plus  loin  que  son  nez. 
4.  C'est  choisir  anssi  un  trfes-mauvais  moment  ;  rien  ne 
va,    6.  Si  vous  persistez  encore  quelques  semaines  dans 
YDS  bonnes  resolutions,  vous  recueillerez  les  fruits  de  votre 
perseverance,    6.  Comment !  c'est  h  ce  pauvre  gargon  que 
vous  en  voulez,  mais  il  se  mettrait  au  feu  pour  vous  !     7. 
Ce  monsieur,  qui  a  I'air  si  pauvre  qu'on  lui  ferait  volon- 
tiers  I'aumone,  est  sur  un  pied  d'amitie  avec  le  premier 
ministre,    8.  II  faut  pourtant  que  cela  finisse ;  je  vais  aller 
trouver  votre  irhre  et  le  raettre  au  pied  du  mur,     9.  Si 
vous  lui  laissez  prendre  tant  de  liberies,  bientot  il  vous 
mangera  la  laine  sur  le  dos.     10.  Cela  en  prend  bien  la 
toumure.    11.  Le  pauvre  gar9on  est  malheureux  comme 
les  pierres,  mais  il  fait  centre  fortune  bon   coeur.     12. 
AUons,  voyons,  reconcilioz-vous  vite  et  allez  faire  un  tour 
ensemble.    13.  Si  vous  voulez,  j'irai  avec  vous  autres.* 
14.  Ce  qu'il  y  a  de  bon  avec  vous  autres  Anglais,  c'est 
qu'on  a  toujours  son  franc  parler.     15.  Est-ce  que  vous 
n'aurez  pas  bientot  fini  tons  ces  reproches  et  toutes  ces 
plaintes  1  il  n'y  a  pas  Ik  de  quoi  fouetter  un  chat.     16.  II 
gMe  k  pierre  fendre  depuis  hier  matin  ;  je  suis  sftr  que  la 
riviere  est  d4jh.  prise.     17.  Vous  n'avez  pas  I'air  d'etre 
dans  votre  assiette ;  qu'est-ce  qu'il  vous  faut  ?    18.  A 
I'avenir  vous  aurez  soin  de  le  payer  rubis  sur  I'ongle  ; 
n'oubliez  pas  que  les  bona  comptes  font  les  bons  amis, 

100. 

1.    He  fired  at  Tiim  at  once.      2.   Tes,  but  the  other 

*  Voui  aulres  (not  followed  by  a  noun)  is  familiar.     Vous  aulret  Anglai*  il 
used  in  opposition  to  other  nations. 


EXEKCISES  OV  IDIOMS.  133 

held  firm.  3.  At  first  he  expected  to  Mghten  him.  4. 
I  thought  he  was  doing  it  for  fun.  5.  Will  you  not 
make  frientls  with  us  before  leaving  ?  6.  If  it  is  foggy 
m  the  morning,  we  shall  not  go.  7.  You  frighten  tlie 
children  with  your  tales.  8.  They  are  very  fond  of 
flowers.  9.  They  are  making  fools  of  us.  10.  That  coat 
docs  not  fit  you  well.  1 1 .  We  are  extremely  fond  of  music. 
12.  Do  not  make  fools  of  these  men.  13.  The  soldiers 
would"  ■  not  fire  on  the  people.  14.  His  laugh  is  forced- 
1 5.  I  know  you  are  doing  it  for  fun,  but  you  are  frighten- 
ing her.  16.  Why  would^^  you  not  make  friends  with 
her?  17.  I  hope  it  will  not  be  foggy  in  the  evening. 
18.  Will  they  be  firm  in  their  good  resolutions  ?  19.  ] 
hope  so,  but  for  aU  that  I  will  not  make  friends  with 
them.  20.  Hold  your  tongue,  'jon  will  frighten  her. 
•21.  Why  would  they  frighten  you?  22.  They  do  it  to 
ridicule  you.  23.  For  all  that  they  did  frighten  me  at 
first.  24.  It  is  for  fun  they  did  it.  25.  That  hat  does 
not  fit  you  at  all.  26.  Go  away,  you  frighten  me.  27. 
I  liked  that  preacher  from  the  very  first ;  he  is  so  free 
from  afiectation.  28.  Never  make  friends  again  with 
him.  29.  Never  ridicule  old  age  or  infirmity.  30. 
He  was  passionately  fond  of  his  children.  31.  For  all 
that  he  often  frightened  them,  and  would  "'^  never  make 
friends  with  his  daughter  who  had  left  his  house.  32. 
It  is  a  pity  he  is  so  fond  of  drink.  33.  Will  you  hold 
that  ladder  firm  till  I  come  down  ?  34.  Here  is  the 
small  sum  I  owed  you,  now  we  are  quits  and  friends. 
35.  Allow  me  to  say  this  is  not  done  like  a  friend,  and 
that  I  am  astonished  at  your  conduct.  36.  Let  us  be 
friends  again. 

101. 

(Index,  XXI.) 

1.  Cette  robe  que  vous  trouvez  si  chfere,  je  votis  la  feral 

avoir  presque  pour  rien.     2.  EIlc  s'eu  est  fort  bien  tir^e  *. 

qu'en  pensez-vou3  ?     3.  C'est  uu  homme  qui  salt  vivre, 

on  voit  qa'il  a  frequents  le  meilleur  moude.     4.  Qui  duut« 

3  K 


134  EXEKCISES   ON   IDIOMS. 

que  la  vertu  n'obtienne  t6t  ou  tard  sa  recompense  1  6. 
Me  voici  onfin  d^barrassde  de  ce  f  ripon  :  eh  bien  !  ne  m'en 
suis-je  pas  habilement  tir^e  ?  6.  Que  ne  vous  en  Stes-vous 
defaite  plus  tot !  7.  Le  moyen  de  se  d^faire  d'un  ennemi 
est  d'en  faire  un  ami.  8.  Avancez  done,  on  voit  bien  que 
vous  n'avez  plus  vos  jambes  de  quinze  ans,  vous  avez  lair 
bien  fatigud.  9.  II  faudra  que  je  me  fasse  faire  deux  ou 
trois  paires  de  chaussures  avant  de  me  mettre  en  voyage. 
10.  J'applaudis  de  toutes  mes  forces  k  la  lettre  que  vous 
venez  d'ecrire  ;  c'est  une  fameuae  epine  que  vous  vous 
etes  tirde  du  pied.  11.  Eh  bien,  M.  votre  pfere  vous  a 
bien  grond^,  n'est-ce  pas  ?  voilk  ce  que  c'est  que  d'etre 
paresseux,  12.  On  n'y  gagne  que  des  remords,  des  re- 
proches  et  quelquefois  des  coups.  13.  J'ai  envie  de  partir 
avec  ce  monsieur  pour  Paris  ;  il  me  promet  monts  et  mer- 
veilles.  14.  Oui,  attendez-vous-y  !  15.  Que  de'sirez-vous, 
demandait  Alexandre  k  Diogene  ?  que  vous  vous  otiez  de 
devant  mon  soleil,  repondit  le  philosophe.  16.  Comment ! 
est-ce  que  vous  allez  vous  mettre  en  colore  pour  si  pen  de 
chose  ?  17.  Cette  litterature  me  semblait  d'abord  triste, 
froide  et  monotone,  mais  maintenant  j'y  prends  goM. 
18.  Voici  d6jk  trois  heures  qui  sonnent ;  je  vais  etre  en 
retard  pour  mon  reudez-vous  ;  adieu,  je  me  sauve. 

102. 

1.  He  will  never  gain  his  point.  2.  He  is  quite  a 
gentleman.  3.  We  should  get  that  post  if  ^"  he  would 
assist  us.  4.  Will  she  get  her  cap  in  time  ?  5.  You 
get  angry  for  nothing.  6. 1  shall  get  that  place  for  you. 
7.  It  is  getting  late.  8.  You  will  not  gain  your  point 
at  the  very  first.  9.  Your  brother  set  out  last  night  for 
England,  did  he  not?  I  hope  he  will  gain  his  object. 
10.  I  got  home  rather  late,  and  found  the  door  shut.  11. 
They  got  angry  with  me  at  once.  12.  We  get  on  slowly, 
13.  He  ^^dll  never  make  his  way  in  the  world.  14.  Are 
you  gptting  out  of  that  difficulty  ?  1 5.  Yes,  I  am  begin- 
ning to  get  rich.      16.  We  are  getting  rid  of  a  bad 


KTERCrSES   OK   IDIOMS.  185 

neighbotir.  17.  I  think  you  would  get  on  in  the  ■world 
if  you  went  to  London,  18.  I  am  trying  to  get  lid  of 
his  friendship.  1 9.  If  you  can  get  me  that  situation,  I 
shall  give  you  five  hundred  francs.  20.  Get  rid  of  that 
dog;  he  docs  nothing  but  bark  the  whole  night.  21.  Let 
us  go  away  ;  it  is  getting  late.  22.  Don't  get  angry  with 
me  for  that.  23.  Of  whom  are  you  making  game?  24. 
His  coat  got*  torn  in  the  wood.  25.  That  novel  gets 
more  and  more  interesting.  26.  Do  you  know  your  friend 
has  got  on  very  well  ?  27.  Get  on| ;  if  you  always  stop, 
we  shall  never  arrive.  28.  The  doctor  killed  her  whilst 
wishing  to  rid  her  of  a  cold.  29.  Your  head  is  so  large 
that  you  should  order  a  hat  for  yourself  |  30.  Get  a 
third  class  ticket  for  me.  3 1 .  Get  into  the  train  quickly, 
it  will'-  leave  immediately.  32.  She  is  getting  melan- 
choly. 33.  The  goods  got  damaged  by  fire.  34.  She 
gained  her  point  by  using  the  greatest  prudence.  35.  It 
is  getting  dark,  do  you  know  ?  36.  I  am  happy  to  hear 
you  got  clear  of  that  difficiilty. 


103. 

(Index,  XXIX) 

1.  II  est  horn  mo  h,  se  tirer  d'affaire.  2.  Otez-vous  de 
Ik,  s'il  vous  |)1ait ;  c'est  ma  place.  3.  Un  Spartiate  ^tait 
puui  s'il  se  hvrait  aux  plaisirs  de  la  table.  4.  Je  lui  don- 
nerai  un  faineux  savon  si  je  I'y  attrape.  5.  Vous  ne 
sauriez  croire  h.  coinbien  de  suppositions,  d'inventions,  de 
calomnies  et  de  mensonges  ce  brusque  depart  a  donnd 
lieu.  6.  Est-ce  que  vous  croyez  que  je  me  tiens  pour 
battu  parce  que  vous  me  refusez  voire  appui  ?  7.  Quand 
on  a  de  I'esprit,  on  se  tire  d'affaire.    8.  Ote-toi  de  li,  que 


•  The  verb  to  get  Is  often  Immediately  followed  by  a  past  participle,  and 
translated  hy  ftre,  as  -  She  oot  frightened  by  Ifit  explosion,  Elle  fdt  (ffrayet 
par  Terplosion.  It  is  also  followed  by  an  adjective,  and  translated  by  devenir, 
and  sometimes  ufaire,  as— That  coat  is  getting  old,  Cet  habit  dbvibht  wietuf, 

or  8 E  FAIT  rt>ttT. 

t  Q«t  on.  avancet  done.    See  Note,  page  60. 

t  To  order  u  liat  for  yotirself,  vous  /aire  fairt  im  duipeau  sur  muur*> 


136  EXERCISES   ON    IDIOMS. 

je  m'y  mette.  9.  Si  vous  ne  vous  otez  pas,  vons  allez 
voiis  faire  tuer.  10.  Alexandre,  entendant  vanter  lea  ex- 
ploits de  son  pbre,  s'abandonna  h.  une  telle  fureur  qu'il 
immola  un  de  ses  meilleurs  officiers.  11.  S'il  continue  h 
m'impatienterde  la  sorte,  je  luidonnerai  du  fil  h  retordre, 
qu'il  y  compte  !  12.  Est-ce  que  vraiment  vous  abandon- 
nez  la  partie  ?  13.  II  me  semble  que  c'est  s'arreter  en  beau 
chemin.  14.  S'il  ose  jamais  vous  reprocher  la  lettre  que 
vous  lui  avez  dcrite,  c'est  moi  qui  lui  dirai  son  fait.  15. 
Les  amis  que  vous  vous  Stes  faits  dans  la  prosp^rit^  iie 
vous  serviront  pas  tons  dans  le  malheur.  16.  II  a  voulu 
me  dorer  la  pilule,  mais  j'ai  compris  I'affaire  du  premier 
coup.  17.  II  m'est  impossible  de  deviner :  je  jette  ma 
langue  aux  cMens.  18.  Le  professeur  nous  a  tous  tances 
d'importance,  aucun  de  nous  n'avait  fini  sea  devoirs. 

104. 

1.  He  gave  himself  up  to  Ms  passions.  2.  If  you  do 
that,  you  will  get  into  a  scrape.  3.  Her  conduct  gave 
rise  to  suspicions.  4.  My  aunt  gives  an  evening  party 
on  Thursday.*  6.  How  shall  I  get  out  of  that  scrape  ? 
6.  Did  you  give  him  occasion  to  find  fault  with  your 
conduct?  7.  How  stout  you  are  getting!  8.  On  her 
return,  her  mamma  gave  her  a  long  lecture.  9.  Get  out 
of  the  way  immediately.  10.  He  promised  to  give  us  an 
account  of  all  that  has  passed.  1 1 .  Will  you  give  us  an 
account  of  your  adventures  in  California?  12.  I  must 
give  in  my  account  once  g?  month.  13.  It  is  easier  to 
get  into  a  scrape  than  to  get  out  of  it.  14.  Do  you  give 
credit  to  all  he  tells  you  ?  1 5 .  Do  not  give  him  occasion 
to  give  you  a  lecture.  16.  His  going  away^^  will  give 
rise  to  evil  reports.  17.  Since  his  death  she  has  given 
herself  up  to  despair.  1 8.  I  shall  give  an  evening  party 
on  my  birth-day.  19.  I  will  give  it  to  her,  if  she  dares 
speak  to  me  or  even  look  at  me.  20.  If  you  wish  to  get 
out  of  the  scrape,  you  must  tell  me  first  how  you  got  into 

•  The  names  of  the  days  of  the  week  do  not  begin  in  French  with  a  capital. 


EXEBCISKS   OIT   IDIOMS.  137 

it.  21,  He  was  an^ry  because  I  said  lie  was  getting 
stouter  eveiy  day.  22.  To  give  an  evening  party  is  an 
ariluous  undertaking.*  23.  Ho  got  himself  into  a  scrape 
when  he  was  in  London.  24.  When  I  went  to  their 
house,  she  used  always  to  give  me  a  lecture.  25.  He 
gave  us  an  account  of  his  adventures  in  Paris.  26 .  Mary's 
conduct  gives  rise  to  great  doubts  in  my  mind  as  to  her 
honesty.  27,  The  aiFair  is  getting  more  confused  every 
dayf ;  you  had  better  give  it  up.  28.  His  farmers  used 
to  give  in  their  accounts  twice  a  year.  29.  If  you  say 
that,  you  will  give  your  master  occasion  to  reprimand 
you.  30.  Every  night  I  gave  her  an  account  of  what  I 
had  heard.  31 .  To  get  stout  is  a  frequent  thing  in  Eng- 
land.* 32.  On  receipt  of  the  money,  he  will  give  him- 
self up  to  every  kind  of  extravagance.  33.  John  was 
always  getting  into  a  scrape  at  school.  34.  Do  not  give 
occasion  to  scandalous  tongues  to  speak  of  you.  35.  If 
you  give  up  such  a  promising  affair,  what  will  people 
think  of  you  ?    36.  They  got  well  out  of  (that)  scrape. 

105. 

(Index,  XXIH.) 

1.  Maintenant  qti'il  est  parti,  allez  cTiercTier  votre  frbre 
et  nous  passerons  la  soiree  ensemble.  2.  Ne  voua  fiez  pas 
tant  k  sea  belles  maniferes  ;  elle  s'est  oubli^e,  I'autre  jour, 
jusqu'^  me  reprocher  les  cinq  livres  que  j'ai  voulu  lui  em- 
pnititer  et  qu'elle  ne  m'a  pas  pret^es.  3.  Que  de  maxivaises 
heures  nous  avons  pass^es  ensemble  !  4.  Ne  viendrez- 
vous  pas  au-devant  de  moi  quand  j'irai  voua  voir?  6. 
Elle  avait  cinq  milles  h,  faire  tous  les  soirs  et  tous  les 
matins.  6.  J'ai  oubli^  mon  livre  sur  la  petite  table  k 
gauche  en  entrant ;  allez  me  le  chercher,  s'il  vous  plait. 
7.  J'ai  appris  avec  plaisir  que  vous  faites  trfes-bien  vos 
affaires.     8.  Quand  il  se  laisse  aller  k  la  colore,  11  ne  se 

•  Begin  this  sentence  by  e'tst,  pointing  out  the  principal  word.    S«o,  be 
■Idrn,  Note,  page  66. 
t  te  getting  more  conftwed  every  iay,  t'unbrouWe  dejow  en  jour. 


138 


EXEUCISES  ON  IDIOIIS. 


poss^de  plus,  il  est  comme  enragd  9.  Nous  ^tions  vingt- 
cinq  ou  trente,  et  nous  avons  tous  bu  dans  le  merae  verrc. 
10.  Voyez  comme  les  petites  filles  sonfc  naturellement 
coquettes  ;  voil^  la  troisi^me  fois  que  cette  enfant  va  se 
mirer  depuis  un  quart  d'heure.  11.  Louis  et  Gustave  sont 
comme  les  deux  doigts  de  la  main  ;  il  n'y  a  rien  de  tel 
qu'un  malheur  comrauu  pour  vous  rendre  amis  intimes. 
12.  Comment  a-t-il  os^  se  presenter  chez  son  pere,  dites- 
vous  ?  parce  qu'il  sait  que  son  pfere  ne  pent  se  passer  de 
lui.  13.  Vous  avez  beau  vous  moquer  de  moi,  j'ai  dit  que 
je  lirais  toute  "I'Histoire  de  I'Europe,"  et  je  ne  ra'en 
d^dirai  pas.  14,  Je  vois,  mon  cher  Monsieur,  que  voua 
vous  abandonnez  facilement  k  vos  passions ;  cela  vous 
menera  loin.  15.  Devinez  qui  s'est  approch^  de  moi  dans 
le  pare  avec  I'intention  ^vidente  de  me  parler  ;  je  vous  le 
donneencent.  16.  Vous  pouvez  vous  fier  ^  ses  proraesses, 
c'est  de  I'or  en  barre.  17.  Si  vous  prenez  tous  les  jours 
cette  drogue,  cela  deviendra  bientot  une  habitude  im- 
p^rieuse,  et  vous  vous  en  trouverez  fort  mal.  18.  AUons, 
du  courage,  est-ce  qu'on  se  laisse  abattre  comme  cela  1 
TOUS  vous  chagrinez  pour  des  riens. 

106. 

1.  I  was  going  on  sure  gronnds  wlien  T  said  that.  2. 
Never  give  way  to  your  passions.  3.  She  went  a  mile 
of  the  wa>  with  me.  4.  They  gave  no  credit  to  his  asser- 
tions. 5.  Go  to  your  cousin  and  invite  her  to  come  hero. 
6.  You  will  be  glad  to  hear  that  I  was  successful,  7.  He 
went  so  far  as  to  deny  what  he  had  said  before.  8.  They 
would  glory  in  my  defeat.  9.  He  went  away  last  week. 
10.  Things  are  going  on  in  the  usual  way.  11.  Don't 
ask  him  anything,  he  is  not  worth  a  groat.  12.  Go  for 
the  doctor  immediately.  13.  She  said  she  would  go 
several  miles  with  her  friend.  14.  Be  sure  of  your 
gi-ounds  before  you  make  that  assertion.  15.  Whatever 
I  said  he  always  went  on  the  same  way.  16.  He  used 
to  gi\  e  way  to  immoderate  bursts  of  passion.    1 7.  Do  you 


EX££CISt:s  OS  IDIOMS.  139 

think  she  will  give  credit  to  such  a  story  ?  18.  I  was 
glad  to  licar  of  your  safe  arrival  at  Rotterdam.  19. 
Whilst  I  was  going  up  stairs  I  heard  a  knock  at  the  door. 
20,  He  used  to  glory  in  his  wickedness.  21.  They  go 
along  without  stopping  anywhere.  22.  I  used  to  go  for 
my  cousin  eveiy  day.  23.  Do  you  go  so  far  as  to  say  that 
to  me,  sir  ?  24.  I  would  go  to  my  uncle's  to-morrow  if 
1  were  asked.  25.  1  give  no  credit  to  what  such  a  man 
says.^'*  26.  I  shall  go  the  whole  ten  miles  with  you. 
27.  We  were  falling  shoit  of  provisions,  when.  8000  men 
came  to  the  rescue  of  the  town.*  28.  Go  down  staii-s 
and  tell  the  cook  I  want  her.  29.  It  would  be  of  no 
avail ;  he  would  go  on  in  the  same  way.  30.  Since 
your  brother  played  me  that  trick,  I  have  owed  him  a 
grudge.  31.  Will  you  go  to  your  mother  with  a  message 
trom^''  me  ?  32.  If  he  (should)  go  so  far  as  to  insult  me, 
I  shall  leave  him.  33.  You  might  go  for  a  chair  for  me. 
34.  That  is  just  what  he  glories  in.  35.  I  was  always 
glad  to  hear  that  she  was  coming  to  see  us.  86.  I  went 
to  meet  my  brother  at  LiverpooL 

107. 

(Index,  XXIV.) 

1.  11  a  perdu  sa  place,  11  fait  pitid  k  present,  11  vit  an 
jour  la  joiirn^e.  2.  Y  Stes-vous  maintenant  ?  devinez- 
vous  de  qui  nous  vc^ilons  parler  ?  3.  Je  n'y  suis  pas 
encore,  vous  feriez  mieiix  de  me  le  dire  sans  plus  de  d^lai, 
4.  Vous  etes  \k  tous  lea  quatre  k.  me  rire  an  nez  et  h,  me 
tenir  le  bee  dans  I'eau  ;  voyons,  dites-moi  de  qui  il  est 
question.  5.  Ne  vous  le  faites  pas  redire  cent  fois ;  allez- 
y  vite.  6.  Vous  n'y  etes  pas,  vous  en  etes  k  cent  lieues. 
7.  Ce  n'est  pas  h,  moi  qu'il  faut  vous  plaindre  de  votre 
mdsaventure,  je  n'y  suis  pour  rien.  8.  J'ai  failli  avoir  le 
pied  ^crasd  par  une  roue  tie  voiture  ;  il  ne  s'en  est  pas 
fallu  de  I'epaisseur  d'un  clieveu.  9.  Je  crois  qu'il  est  k 
Paris  et  que  son  oncle  le  m^ne  un  pea  rondement.     10. 


*  Totcti  if  translated  by  place  in  military  atyla. 


140  EXERCISES  ON  IDIOMS. 

II  n'y  a  pas  de  mal  k  9a ;  5a  lui  formera  le  caract^^re.  11. 
Je  suis  charme  de  voir  que  vous  n'etes  pour  rien  dans 
cette  affaire.  12.  II  ne  faut  pas  lui  laisser  prendre  ce 
mauvais  pli  ;  corrigez-le  k  temps.  13.  Gdndralenient  il 
aime  la  besogne  faite,  mais,  quand  il  est  en  train,  cela  va 
bien.  14.  S'il  venait  avec  moi,  il  m'ennuierait  de  ses 
Sottas  questions  tout  le  long  du  chemin  ;  je  ne  veux  pas 
de  lui.  15.  O'est  tres-facile  jusqu'k  present,  mais,  quand 
vous  en  viendrez  aux  verbes,  vous  m'en  direz  des  nouvel- 
les  ;  c'est  Ik  que  je  vous  attends.  16.  Si  vous  n'etes  pour 
rien  dans  cette  malheureuse  affiiire,  je  me  fais  fort  de  voTis 
faire  avoir  la  place  que  vous  sollicitez.  17.  Sa  liberty  ne 
tient  plus  qu'^  un  fil ;  si  vous  me  donnez  un  coup  de  main, 
k  nous  deux  nous  obtiendrons  sa  grdce  avant  un  mois. 
18.  Voulez-vous  bien  vous  taire  avec  toutes  ces  horriblea 
histoires  ?  vous  me  faites  dresser  lea  cheveux  sur  la  tete. 

108. 

1 .  I  am  in  the  habit  of  writing  two  hours  daily.  2. 
She  refused  to  shake  hands  with  me.  3.  He  had  a  hand 
in  that  affair.  4.  She  has  more*''  on  hand  than  she  can 
do.  5.  If  he  happens  to  know  that  you  came  with  me, 
he  will  be  very  angry.  6.  I  was  hardly  able  to  beKeve 
what  he  said.  7.  They  had  difficulty  in  believing  him. 
8.  You  Avill  hurt  my  hand.  9.  We  will  have  the  house 
painted  when  we  return.  10.  Yo^  have  guessed  right- 
ly; you  have  it  now.  11.  Have  you  that  on  good 
authority  ?  12.  The  best  thing  we  can  do  is^^  ^q  gg^  ^^^ 
at  once.  1 3.  They  had  better  tell  the  truth.  14,  Were 
they  in  the  habit  of  rising  early  ?  1 5.  He  wished  me  to 
tell  him  what  he  had  best  do.  16.  Beware  of  these  two 
swindlers,  they  go  hand  in  hand.  17.  You  would  have 
done  better  to  do  without  it.  18.  Have  no  hand  in  it, 
or  you  will  repent  it.  19.1  had  that  on  good  authority. 
20.  I  am  happy  to  see  your  father  so  well.  21.  I  have 
it,  I  know  how  to  manage  him  now.     22.  How  does  it 

*  See  Note  2,  page  17 


SXJEBCISES  Olf  IDI0H3.  141 

happen  that  you  did  not  go  to  meet  your  mother?  23. 
I  sliallhavc  my  coat  made  at  your  tailor's,  24.  It  hurts 
me  to  soo  you  suffer  so.  25.  The  hest  thing  these  gentle- 
men can  do  is  to  be  quiet.  26.  He  was  in  the  habit  of 
doing  so.  27.  The  tears  were  in  her  eyes  when  she 
shook  hands  with  me.  28.  I  will  have  no  hfind  in  it,  I 
assure  you.  29.  He  has  too  much  on  his  hands  at  pre- 
sent. 30.  Forgive  me,  I  meant  no  harm.  31.  You 
could  hardly  be  ready  in  time.  32.  She  was  hurting 
my  cat  when  I  entered.  33.  I  shall  have  my  hair  cut. 
34.  He  has  it,  he  has  found  out  the  reason.  35.  Unless* 
he  has  it  on  good  authority,  he  will  not  believe  it.  36. 
What  do  you  think  it  will  be  best  for  me  to  do  ? 

109. 
(Index,  XXV.) 

1.  E  fant  battre  le  far  quand  il  est  chaud.  2.  Quelle 
idde  s'est-elle  mise  en  tete  de  partir  ainsi  k  I'improviste  ! 
3.  Courez  aprfes  lui,  vous  le  rattraperez  ;  il  ne  fait  que  de 
pai"tir.  4.  N'etes-vous  pour  rien  dans  ce  depart  ?  5.  Je 
n'aurai  pas  de  ses  nouvelles  avant  troia  seraaines  d'icL 

6.  Taisez-vous  done,  de  quoi  vous  avisez-vous  de  parler  ? 

7.  La  fatale  nouvelle  nous  est  arriv^e  comma  nous  sortions 
da  table.  8.  Continuez  de  le  prot^ger,  vous  n'avez  pas 
affaire  k  im  ingrat.  9.  Je  lui  en  knicherai  deux  mots  ce 
Boir.  10.  Vous  jetez  trop  da  pierres  dans  son  jardin  ; 
voil.\  pourquoi  alia  vous  en  veut.  11.  Vous  avaz  mis  le 
doigt  dessus ;  c'est  bien  ]k  la  cause  de  son  ^oignement 
pour  luL  12.  Ella  me  I'a  fait  entendre  ce  matin  d'une 
maniera  k  ne  pas  m'y  tromper.  13.  Aussitot  qu'il  a  vu 
son  pfere,  il  a  pris  ses  jambas  k  son  cou.  14.  II  y  a  vrai- 
ment  de  quoi  se  f4cher  quand  on  volt  une  paraille  lettra  ; 
9a  n'a  ni  queue  ni  t§te.  15.  Que  voulaz-vous  qu'on  y 
fasse  ?  s'il  veut  absoluraant  partir,  laissez-Ia  faira.  16.  II 
est  grandemant  temps  que  nous  le  tirions  d'embarras ; 
cela  me  fait  de  la  peiue  de  le  voir  si  malhaureuz.    17.  En 

•  See  Role  93  (8). 


142  EXEBCISES  ON  IDIOMS. 

xoilk  assez  sur  ce  chapitre ;  j'ai  les  oreilles  rebattnes  de 
cette  histoire.  18.  Un  peu  de  patience,  s'il  vous  plait ;  il 
me  semble  que  vous  y  allea  bien  k  la  Wg^re. 

110. 

1.  I  think  you  have  something  to  do  with  it.  2. 
With  whom  have  you  to  do  ?  3.  Are  you  warm  ?  4. 
You  will  have  to  do  with  me.  5.  They  have  just  sold 
tlieir  horses.  6.  He  had  but  just  risen.  7.  We  have 
but  just  breakfasted.  8.  They  took  it  into  their  heads 
to  tra\  el.  9.  He  will  have  heard  from  them  by  this 
time.  10.  Have  you  heard  that  the  Queen  is  coming? 
11.  Who  is  hungry  ?  12.  I  think  it  will  not  be  hot  to- 
morrow. 13.  Hold  your  tongue.  14.  Will  you  not 
hold  your  tongue?  15.  They  were  very  warm  after 
walking.  16.  They  had  something  to  do  with  it.  17. 
We  will  have  something  to  do  with  it.  18.  Have  you 
any  business  with  me  ?  19.  Should  we  not  be  too  warm 
there  ?  20.  If  she  takes  it  into  her  head  to  stay  at  home, 
we  shall  be  very  glad.  21.  It  would  be  very  hot  in  this 
room  if  the  windows  were  not  open.  22.  They  had  just 
dined  when  she  came  in.  23.  We  should  have  heard 
the  news  by  this  time.  24.  In  that  case  they  would 
have  to  do  with  us.    25.  Had  you  not  just  called  at  their 

house  ?  26.  I  have  but  just  arrived  from  Paris.  27. 
Perhaps^s  j^g  ^ju  ^^-^^  j^  ^^^  j^jg  ^^^^^  ^^  ^^  ^-^^^.^  ^-^^^^ 

28.  WiU  you  give  me  a  hint  what  I  ought  to  do?  29. 
They  cannot  come  with  us,  they  have  company  to-night. 
30.  You  had  just  supped  as  I  came  in.  31.  They  have 
heard  it  said  that  he  is  a  bankrupt.  32.  We  have  never 
heard  it  said.  33.  We  should  be  too  hungry  if  we 
waited  till  ten  o'clock.  34.  I  had  heard  that  said  by  his 
enemies  35.  They  are  not  so  warm  now.  36.  He 
liurt  my  arm  with  his  cane. 

UL 

(Index,  XXVI.) 
1.  On  vous  a  jet^  de  la  poudre  aux  yeux,  vous 


EXESCISES  OK  IDIOMS.  143 

tomb^e  dans  le  panneau.  2.  On  voqb  fait  aocroire  tout  ce 
qii'on  veut.  3.  Prenez  exeraple  de  ce  monsieur ;  il 
s'informe  de  tout,  il  prend  note  de  tout ;  rien  ne  lui  est 
etranger.  4.  Si  vous  tenez  absolument  h,  lui  reprocher  son 
iiiconduite,  prenez  bien  garde  de  I'offenser ;  il  a  la  tete 
pres  du  bonnet.  5.  En  France  on  ne  se  pr^sente  pas  lea 
uns  aux  autres  avec  autant  de  formality  qu'en  Angleterre. 

6.  Je  vous  ferai  bien  avoir  cette  aifaire,  si  vous  y  tenez 

7.  lis  s'en  sont  joliment  donn^;  ils  n'ont  fait  qile  jouei 
toute  la  joumee  ;  c'dtait  h  qui  se  ferait  le  plus  de  niches, 

8.  Vous  ne  pouvez  pas  vous  faire  une  idde  du  monde  qui 
se  pressait  autour  de  ce  charlatan.  9.  Vous  ne  faites 
qu'aller  et  veuir  toute  la  journ^e.  10.  Comment  voulez- 
voiis  faire  des  progres  en  fran9ai8,  si  vous  n'dtudiez  pas 
plus  sdrieusement  ?  11.  II  y  a  plus  de  trois  mois  que  je 
n'ai  vu  la  campagne,  je  veux  m'en  passer  I'envie  samedi 
prochain.  12.  Auriez-vous  la  bont^  d'aller  k  vos  heures 
perdues'  prendre  quelques  renseignements  sur  ce  jeune 
homme  ?  13.  Je  suis  plus  content  de  vos  essais  qu'il  y  a 
un  mois ;  les  phrases  sont  moins  longues,  plus  correctes  et 
plus  variees  ;  il  y  a  un  mieux  r^el.  14.  C'est  une  guerre 
k  coup  d'^pingles  qu'on  vous  fait  depuis  trois  ans.  15.  Je 
vous  accompagnerais  bien  volontiers  k  Paris,  si  vous  ne 
me  trouviez  pas  de  trop.  16.  Le  monsieur  dont  vous 
parlez  est  fort  k  son  aise,  il  vit  de  ses  rentes.  17.  Vous 
oubliez  que  c'est  h,  ma  mere  que  vous  etes  redevable  de  la 
position  que  vous  occupez.  18.  Pour  peu  que  vous  insistiez 
avec  politesse,  vous  le  metirez  certaiuemeut  dana  vos 
interets. 

112. 

1 .  They  would  take  it  amiss  if  he  did  not  call  on  them. 
2.  But  he  is  not  inclined  to  go  there.  3.  No  matter,  he 
must  not  expose  himself  to  their  anger.  4.  If  he  remains 
but  a  little,*  that  will  please  them.     6.  You  are  injuring 


•  See  the  Uth  sentence  of  EserdM  111. 


144  EXEBCISES  ON  IDIOMS. 

that  man.  6.  I  have  no  intention  to  injure  him.  7.  Shall 
we  inquire  about  the  trains?  8.  No  ;  but  you  may  in- 
quire for  Mr.  11.  9.  He  is  imposing  on  you,  and  he  im- 
posed* on  my  brother  also.  1 0.  We  introduced  them  to 
all  our  friends.  11.  Do  you  not  intend  to  return  that 
book  ?  1 2.  They  have  not  yet  examined  the  accounts  of 
the  firm.  13.  Will  you  not  take  it  amiss  if  she  brings 
her  friend  with  her?  14.  If  they  had  remained  but  a 
little,  they  would  have  seen  the  review.  15.  How  hard 
of  hearing  she  is  !  16.  They  will  not  so  easily  impose 
on  me.  17.  Were  you  not  disposed  to  run  the  risk  of 
buying  those  lands  ?  18.  We  immediately  inquired  into 
that  affair.  19.  Do  you  believe  I  shall  remain  inactive 
the  whole  day?  20.  Will  you  not  introduce  him  to 
your  mother?  21.  Do  not  fear  to  apply  to  him ;  he  will 
be  indefatigable  for  you.  22.  They  have  foolishly  in- 
curred that  reproach.  23.  You  will  injure  me  much  if 
you  say  so.  24.  Did  you  ask  any  news  from  John  when 
he  came  in  ?  25.  They  would  impose  on  us  if  thej^  could. 
26.  Don't  ask  for  him,  he  is  very  busy.  27.  I  shall 
thank  you  to  make  some  inquiries  about  her.  28.  You 
will  incur  his  anger  if  you  injure  his  brothers.  29.  In- 
quire about  the  box.  30.  Ask  for  James  and  he  will 
inquire  about  it.  31.  Let  us  inquire  into  that  story. 
32.  We  shall  introduce  you  to  liim,f  if  you  wish.  33. 
Is  it  not  he  who  attends  to  your  interest  ?  Then  I  may 
rely  upon  him.  34.  They  have  often  imposed  on  us. 
35.  He  will  inquire  into  tiieir  conduct.  36.  You  must 
not  interrupt  me  so. 

113. 

flndex,  XXVII.) 

1.  Pardonnez-moi,  Monsieur,  je  crois  que  vous  ne  vous 
connaissez  gufere  en  peinture.  2.  C'est  vrai,  Monsieur,  je 
ne  faisais  que  plaisanter.     3.  Les  Romaius  avaient  un  ex- 

•  It  would  not  Boand  well  In  French  to  have  the  same  verb  repeated  in  the 
same  sentence ;  use  en  faire  accroire  for  the  first,  and  en  imposer  for  tiia 
second. 

t  See  Note,  page  15. 


EXEKCiaEs  on  IDIOMS.  145 

eellent  proverbe — * '  Qoe  le  savetier  s'en  tienne  h  sa  savate !" 
4.  Ayez  bien  soin  de  me  faire  dire  le  jour  et  I'heure  de 
votre  depart.  6.  Vous  pouvez  y  compter,  mais,  de  votre 
cot^,  ue  me  faites  pas  attendre.  6.  Elle  n'est  pas  si  sotte 
que  de  partir  k  votre  insu.  7.  Ayez,  s'il  vous  plait, 
robligeance  de  vous  en  tenir  k  ce  que  vous  avez  dit ;  sinoa, 
je  me  mets  de  la  partie.  8.  Tout  coinine  vous  voudrez, 
cela  m'est  parfaitement  ^gal.  9.  Comme  vous  vous  y  con- 
naissez  !  10.  Je  le  conuais  de  longue  main ;  il  veut  tou- 
jours  en  faire  k  sa  tete,  mais  il  s'en  mordra  les  pouces. 
11.  Agir  sans  avoir  r^flechi,  c'c^t  se  mettre  en  voyage 
sans  avoir  fait  de  prdparatifs.  12.  Continuez  d'dcrire  ; 
pendant  ce  temps  je  leur  conterai  la  petite  histoire  que 
j'ai  gardde  pour  la  bonne  bouclie.  13.  Est-il  bien  vrai 
qu'il  roule  maintenant  carrosse  ?  ce  n'est  pas  pour  rire 
que  vous  dites  cela  ?  14.  II  faut  qu'il  ait  I'ame  chevill^e 
dans  le  corps  pour  avoir  rdsistd  k  toutes  ces  drogues.  16. 
Je  le  reconnais  k  sa  voix ;  o'est  lui ;  gardez  votre  sang- 
froid. 16.  Seriez-vous  assez  bon  pour  lui  dire  cela  de  ma 
part  ?  17.  Vous  moquez-vous  du  monde  ?  est-ce  que 
vous  croyez,  par  hasard,  que  je  vais  me  charger  d'un 
pareil  message  ?  18.  II  a,  dit-on,  trois  dome-stiques  main- 
fceuaut,  et  hier  il  avait  k  peine  de  (|uui  vivro. 

114. 

1.  Would  you  be  so  kind  as  to  ring  the  bell  ?  Thank 
you.  2.  Let  him  know  that  she  is  coming.  3.  Are 
you  not  joking  in  saying  that  ?  4.  I  am  not  a  judge  of 
paintings.  6.  There  is  your  brother  walking  yonder ; 
1  know  him  by  his  ugly  hat.  6,  This  heat  is  really  in- 
supportable, I  am  knocked  up.  7.  Was  he  not  to 
take  a  journey  into  Spain  ?  8.  No ;  he  is  travelling 
in  Egypt.  9.  Do  me  the  kindness  to  hold  your  tongues. 
1 0.  They  knew  how  to  take  a  j est.  1 1 .  Are  you  a  judjre 
of  music  ?  12.  I  know  it  a  little.  13.  I  will  nottrovol 
with  you. — Well,  just  as  you  please.  14.  They  wero 
only  jesting.  15.  He  says  just  as  you  (say).  16.  Did 
you  not  tell  me  you  knew  that  gentleman  ?     I  know 


146  jeXIilKOISES   OK   IDI0H8. 

him  by  siglit  only.  17.  Do  not  keep  me  waiting.  18. 
Why  did  you  kick  that  dog  ?  19.  Be  so  kiud  as  to  let 
me  know  how  things  go  on.  20.  Keep  to  your  deter- 
mination. 21.  They  have  had  the  kindness  to  let  me 
know  their  plans  in  time.  22.  We  shall  keep  them  wait- 
ing till  we  are  ready.  23.  One  does  not  always  keep  tc 
his  good  resolutions.  24.  He  iasulted  them,  and  even 
kicked  them.  25.  They  let  them  know  that  thoy  were 
in  a  hurry.  26.  She  always  keeps  me  waiting.  27.  If 
your  watch  keeps  time  better  than  mine,  will  you  tell 
me  what  o'clock  it  is  ?  28.  You  know  what  to  think 
of  it  now.  29.  Did  you  do  it  ^vithout  the  knowledge  of 
your  father  ?  30.  She  knows  better  than  you  think. 
31.  Be  kind  to  the  oi-phans.  32.  He  does  not  know 
how  to  take  a  joke.  33.  They  wiU  begin  their  journey 
to-morrow  morning.  34.  Keep  to  that.  35.  Let  me 
know  where  you  axe  removing  to.*  36.  Just  as  you 
please. 

115. 
(Index,  XXVIII.) 
1.  Jean,  si  I'on  rit  et  si  I'on  fait  du  bruit,  c'est  h  vous 
que  je  m'en  prendrai.  2.  Pardon,  Monsieur,  voua  vous 
en  prenez  toujours  au  meme.  3.  J'ai  pens^  tomber.  4. 
Si  je  ne  vous  avals  soutenu  k  temps,  vous  seriez  torab^  en 
effet.  5.  Est-ce  Ih  tout  ce  qu'il  vous  reste,  3  fr.  35  cent.  ? 
6.  Oui,  mais  (n'allez  pas  me  rire  au  nez)  je  comptais 
toucher  de  I'argent  ce  soir.  7.  Nous  avons  tons  failli  pdrir 
dans  le  port.  8.  Les  deux  frferes  sont  jumeaux  et  se  res- 
semblent  comme  deux  gouttes  d'eau.  9.  Son  mari  I'a 
plautde  Ik  et  mbne,  dit-on,  une  vie  de  bob  erne.  10.  Quant 
k  elle,  elle  vivote  comme  elle  pent ;  elle  a  bien  de  la  peine 
k  joindre  les  deux  bouts  ensemble.  11.  Mourir  pour 
mouiir,  U  vaut  mieux  mourir  en  combattant  qu'en  f uyunt. 
12.  Vous  y  reconnaissez-vous  maintenant  ?  voyez-  vous 
oil  vous  etes  ?  Pas  le  moins  du  monde.  13.  Si  j'allais 
voir  votre  ami  M.  R.,  et  que  je  lui  demandasse  un  petit 


•  Where  you  are  removing  to,  uii  vous  alia  deineurer. 


KX£BCISES   OH   IDTOUS  147 

service,  me  refuserait-il  1  14.  La  fourmi  n'est  paa  prS- 
teuse  ;  vous  feriez  aiissi  bien  de  rester  ici.  15.  Piisse 
pour  cette  fois,  mais  tdeliez  qu'on  ne  vous  y  revoio  plus. 
16.  Je  ne  voudrais  pas,  pour  tout  au  monde,  apprSter  k 
rire  k  vos  deux  filles  ;  elles  sont  trop  malignea.  17.  Voua 
riez  jaune,  M.  I'usurier  ;  je  parie  dix  contre  un  qu'on 
vous  a  payd  en  ntonuaie  de  singe.  18.  Je  vous  conseillo 
de  gartler  uue  poire  pour  la  soif  et  de  n'y  toucher  qu'^  la 
deruiere  extremity. 

116. 

1.  If  he  docs  that,  we  will  laugh  in  his  face.  2.  He 
was  like  to  fall.  3.  It  was  hroad  daylight  this  morning 
at  five  o'clock.  4.  Let  him  go  out  at  once.  5.  Well,  he 
will  leave  you  in  the  lurch.  6.  It  will  be  too  late  to  lay 
the  blame  on  her  when  she  is  away.  7.  But  it  is  not  on 
her  that  yo:i  must  lay  it;  it  is  on  me.  8.  The  room  waa 
about  twelve  yards  in  length  by  eight  in  breadth.  9.  I 
have  only  nine  pounds  left.  10.  Hold  your  tongue,  and 
leave  me  alone.  11.  Do  not  let  the  dog  out.  12.  She 
has  let  him  out  ali-cady.  13.  If  you  do  not  succeed, 
my  dear  sir,  do  not  lay  it  to  me.  14.  I  shall  not  lay  it 
tA3  you  if  you  do  not  deserve  it.  15.  He  wUI  leave  it  to 
you,  so  do  just  as  you  please.  16.  I  think  she  willlay 
the  cloth  in  the  parlour.  17.  They  wUl  not  leave  you 
in  the  lurch.  18.  Thoy  were  like  to  fall  from  the  mast. 
19.  Will  it  not  be  daylight  before  seven  o'clock?  20. 
Let  me  alone,  I  want' to  think  of  what  has  been  said. 
21.1  shall  only  have  six  days  left  to  wait.  22.  Have  the 
kindness  to  let  them  out  of  the  room.  23.1  should  leave  it 
to  your  discretion  if  you  were  more  prudent.  24.  At  such 
a  replv  everybody  laughed  in  his  face.  25.  He  ia  lay- 
ing the  cloth  for  dinner.  26.  WiU''^^  you  not  lay  it  to 
help  him  ?  27.  I  was  like  to  laugh  in  his  face.  28. 
Let  my  papers  alone;  you  will  put  them  in  disorder.  29. 
It  was  not  daylight  when  she  let  the  dog  out.  30.  She 
laughed  in  the  face  of  the  people  when  they  triod  to 
throw  the  bl:.i)i.'  np  Ik  v.      31.  Is  it  not  you  who  saved 


148  EXEECISE8   ON   IDIOMS. 

the  life  of  my  brother  ?  82.  They  have  three  horsea 
left.  33.  Do  not  speak  to  him  ;  leave  him  alone.  34. 
They  were  like  to  die  of  sea-sickness.  35.  He  reproached 
me  for  haviaj;  been  laid  up  for  a  week.  36.  Never 
mind;  don't  pay  attention  to  what  he  says. 

117. 

(Ijidex,  XXIX,.) 

1.  La  paresse  chemine  si  lentement  que  la  pauvret^  ne 
tarda  pas  k  I'atteindre.  2.  Que  voub  avez  tard^  k  venir ! 
8.  Qu'il  a  Pair  b6te  !  4.  "Laviehumaine,"  ditBossuet, 
*'  est  semblable  k  un  ohemin  dout  I'issue  est  un  pr^cipico 
affreux.  Je  voudrais  retourner  sur  mes  pas  :  Marche, 
marche  :  11  faut  avancer  sans  cesse  vers  le  precipice."  5. 
Si  vous  pouvez,  Monsieur,  me  preter  un  peu  d'argent, 
tant  soit  peu,  je  vous  en  serai  reconnaissant  toute  ma  vie. 
6.  Je  vous  reconnais  bien  Ik ;  toutes  les  fois  que  je  vous 
vois,  c'est  la  meme  chanson.  7.  Est-ce  que  vous  n'aurez 
pas  bient6t  amassd,  par  vos  omprunts,  de  quoi  vivre  tran- 
quillement  de  vos  rentes  ?  8.  Si  le  coeur  vous  en  dit, 
nous  ddjeunerons  sur  le  boulevard,  et  nous  irons  passer 
le  reste  de  la  journ^e  k  Versailles.  9.  Attendez  un  moment 
que  je  jette  ce  mot  k  la  poste,  et  je  suis  k  vous.  10.  Si 
vous  n'dtiez  pas  prfes  de  moi,  oblig^,  comme  je  le  suis,  de 
garder  le  lit,  que  je  trouverais  le  temps  long  !  11.  Vous 
ne  tarderez  pas  k  vous  mieux  porter  ;  le  m^decin  vous  a 
trouvd  bonne  mine  aujourd'hui.  12.  Au  lieu  de  mettre 
men  argent  sous  clef,  j'ai  pri^  la  maltresse  de  I'hotel  de 
vouloir  bien  me  le  garder.  13.  II  gagne  sa  vie  selon  tout? 
apparence.  14.  Je  vous  en  demanderai  au  fur  et  k  mesure 
que  j'en  aurai  besoin.  15.  S'il  tarde  si  longtemps  k 
m'dcrire,  il  n'y  aura  pas  moyen  de  faire  marcher  1' affaire. 

16.  Vous  n'avez  plus  gufere  besoin  de  moi  maintenant ; 
laissez-moi  sortir,  je  vous  prie  ;  les  pieds  me  d^mangent. 

17.  Dans  combien  de  temps  arriverons-nous  ?  18.  Je  ne 
demande  pas  de  quoi  vivre  k  gogo,  je  cherche  simplemeut 
k  gagner  ma  vie. 


KXEBCISBS   ON   IDIOMS.  149 

118. 

1.  She  looks  sulky  to-day.     2.  She  looks  as  if  she 
wdshcd  to  avoid  us.     3.  Does  your  father  look  as  well 
as  usual  ?     4.  No ;  he  looks  ill  at  present.    5.  They  all 
look  sickly.  6.  How  long  will  it  be  before  they  arrive  ? 
7.  I  long  to  see  them  all.     8.  They  are  very  long  of 
coming.     9.  This  gentleman  looks  very  ill.     10.  Your 
brother  listens  to  reason,  but  you  do  not.*    11.  I  should 
like  to  know  who  told  you  so.     12.  You  aie  like  your 
brothc      13.   It  is  not  likely  that  they  can  come  so 
soon.     H.  At  least  they  will  not  be  long  of  coming. 
15.  He  is  like  a  monkey  with  that  jacket ;  it  does  not 
suit  him.    16.  Listen  to  reason  for  once.    17.  He  would 
like  to  know  where  we  got  that  news.     18.  "We  once 
lived- close  by.     19.  If  you  look  sulky  at  me  I  shall  go 
away.     20.  Try  not  to  look  so  sulky.     21 .  You  look  as 
if  you  had  a  headache.    22.  She  looked  very  well  when 
I  saw  her  last.f     23.  He  was  longing  to  see  his  mother. 
24.  She  will  not  be  long  of  coming.  25.  It  is  not  likely 
that  it  wiU  be  fine  weather  to-morrow,  it  is  so  foggy  to- 
day.    26.  WUl  you  hear  reason  or  not  ?     27.  He  ap- 
pears (to  be  a)  rich  (man).     28.  Who  is  it  that  always 
hears  reason  ?     29.  You  look  so  ill  that  you  frighten 
me.     30.  You  look  as  if  you  were  angry  with  him.  31. 
Does  she  look  ill  or  well  now  ?     32.  When  we  go  to 
Bath  street,!  we  will  live  close  by  you.     33.  How  long 
will  it  be  before  you  are  ready  ?    34.  If  you  put  on  that 
cloak  you  will  look  like  a  priest.      35.  If  you  are  long 
of  going  out,  you  will  lose  sight  of  her.    36.  They  look 
as  if  they  were  coming  this  way. 

119. 
(Index,  XXX.) 
I.  Je  crois  que  deux  de  vos  fenetres  donnent  sur  le  pare ; 

•  But  yon  do  not,  mai$  von*  pa*. 
t  When  I  saw  her  last,  la  demiere/oii  que  it  Tat  we. 
j  To  Bath  street,  dans  Bath  street.      But,  speaking  of  streets  In  France,  we 
n-.ay  unilerstand  the  preposition :  now  alUmt  rue  de  RivoU. 
3  L 


150  EXERCISES   OS   IDIOMS. 

V0U8  devez  avoir  de  Ik,  une  fort  belle  vue.  2.  Quelle  f^te 
je  me  fais  de  voua  avoir  chez  nowa  tout  Vet4  !  3.  J  e  ue 
me  fie  pas  beaucoup  k  cet  individu,  ne  le  perdez  paa  do 
vue.  4.  Tout  h,  coup  11  n'a  plus  su  que  dire  et  est  restd 
bouche  beante.  5  Vous  allez  faire  de  grosses  pertes  si 
vous  restez  ici.  6.  Allez  faire  un  tour,  vous  n'etes  pas  en 
veine.  7.  Quelle  fete  nous  nous  faisions  de  la  voir  cet 
^t^,  et  quel  ddsappointement !  8.  Notre  jardin  ne  donne 
pas,  comma  le  votre,  sur  la  grand'route,  ot  nous  n'avona 
pu  voir  passer  la  procession.  9.  Tous  ces  gens-lk  se  sont 
depuis  longtemps  perdus  de  reputation,  ne  reraettez  plus 
les  pieds  chez  eux.  10.  II  y  a  plus  de  six  mois  que  je  I'ai 
perdu  de  vue  ;  nous  ne  nous  ^crivons  plus.  11.  Ma  pre- 
sence ne  vous  a  guere  port^  bonheur.  12.  Maintenant 
que  je  m'en  vais,  vous  allez  avoir  meUleure  veine,  13.  Si 
vous  etes  chez  vous  k  onze  heures  moins  un  quart,  j'irai 
vous  dire  un  petit  bonjour  en  passant.  14.  II  la  croit 
sotte,  et  moi  je  lui  trouve  un  air  fort  dveill^.  15.  Vous 
en  etes  pour  votre  argent,  et  moi  pour  ma  place.  16. 
Quant  h  votre  place,  la  perte  n'est  pas  bien  grande,  et  une 
place  se  trouve  toujours  :  mais  qui  me  rendra  mes  beUes 
pieces  d'or  ?  17.  Q"^  veut-il  done  dire  avec  cetfce  lettre  ? 
je  n'y  comprends  plus  rien  ;  je  m'y  perds.  18.  Malgrd 
mon  guignon,  je  ne  me  tiens  pas  encore  pour  battu ;  allez 
toujours. 

120. 

1.  Look  after  that  horse  ;  he  is  lame.  2.  You  always 
bring  me  good  luck.  3.  So  much  the  better  for  you; 
but  I  have  had  Lad  luck  myself.  4,  He  is  at  a  loss  what 
to  say.  6.  My  window  looks  on  the  sea.  6.  Look  for 
my  snuff-box.'  7.  I  have  lost  sight  of  him.  8.  Did  he 
sustain  a  great  loss  when  they  became  bankrupt  ?  9. 
I  have  bad  luck  when  I  play  at  cards.  10.  She  will 
look  after  the  house  and  bring  him  good  luck.  11.  If 
your  parasol  has  not  yet  been  returned, -^^  jq^  ^jmy  give 
it  up  for  lost.  1 2.  We  sustained  a  loss  of  ninety  pounds. 
13.  We  had  bad  luck  then,     14.  Our  rooms  looked  on 


CX£BCISB8   OH    ISIOVB.  151 

the  garden.  15.  It  is  a  long  time  since  I  lost  sight  of 
them.  16.  I  shall  look  in  on  my  way  to  the  station. 
17.  I  hope  ray  presence  will  hring  you  good  luck.  18. 
Has  he  not  ruined  his  reputation?  19.  I  knew  that 
she  was  looking  forward  with  pleasure  to  our  visit.  20. 
Is  it  not  a  great  loss  you  have  met  with  ?  21 .  Don't  lose 
sight  of  him ;  I  am  afraid  he  wUl  rob  you.  22.  He  who 
is  lucky  at  cards  is  unlucky  in  marriage.  23.  You  lose 
your  temper  for  nothing.  24.  Be  kind  enough  to  look 
after  my  dog  when"^  I  am  away.  25.  Don't  go  any  more 
with  that  man ;  his  reputation  is  gone.  26.  Are  you  not 
looking  forward  with  pleasure  to  hearing  soon  from  your 
father?  27.  I  shall  try  to  find  a  house  which  looks  on 
the  hills.  28.  When  he  meets  me,  he  is  at  a  loss  what 
CO  say.  29.  That  man  always  brings  me  bad  luck.  30 
Don't  look  any  more  for  it ;  it  is  evidently  lost.  31. 
Wben  one  speaks  to  him  he  loses  his  self-possession.  32. 
The  loss  I  have  sitstained  is  not  very  considerable.  33. 
Now  that  his  partner  is  dead,  he  is  at  a  loss  wliat  to  do. 
34.  K  you  lose  sight  of  him,  you  will  not  see  him  any 
more.  35.  Look  to  that  if  you  please.  36  He  who 
looks  for  perfect  happiness  ia  this  world  is  mistukca.* 

121. 

(Index,  XXXI.) 

1.  Ce  n*cat  jamais  la  pauvret^,  c'est  I'ambition  seule 
qui  nous  rend  malheureux  at  dependants.  2.  On  ne  pourra 
se  servir  de  cet  ouvrage  sans  una  table  das  matiferes  exacte 
et  mdthodique.  3.  Faites-lui  place  pres  da  vous,  at  r^ 
conciliez-vous  tout  de  suite.  4.  Si  vous  faites  tant  d'em- 
barras,  vnus  ne  pourrez  jamais  tirer  parti  de  vos  talents. 
6.  Elle  n'a  pas  I'air  de  daviner  ca  que  j'ai  voulu  dire.  6. 
Est-ce  qua  vous  allez  vous  r^conciliar  avac  elle  lorsqu'elle 
partira  1  7.  Pas  si  bete  !  alia  tirarait  trop  bon  parti  de 
ma  condescandance.  8.  Le  chagrin  I'a  rendu  vieux  avant 
la  vieiUesse.    9.  N'allez  pas  faire  on  ooap  de  tete  h.  Paris ; 

•  Translate  by  e'esi  poiDtIng  out  the  principal  word 


152  EXERCISES   ON    IDIOMS. 

soyez  bien  sage  et  ^crivez-noua.  10.  On  lea  a  extermines 
les  una  apres  les  autrea ;  ils  y  ont  pass^  toua  jusqu'au 
dernier.  11.  J' enrage  de  penser  que  mon  coquin  de  neveu 
a  encore  fait  dea  siennea.  12.  Vous  voyez  que  maintenant 
je  parle  italien  ;  je  I'estropie  bien  un  peu,  maia  cela  va 
tout  de  meme.  13.  C'eat  un  homme  comma  on  n'en  voit 
guere  ;  il  a  fort  habilement  men^  aa  barque  par  une  mer 
trfea-difficile.  14.  C'eat  une  histoire  invent^e  que  voua 
noua  donnez  Ik,  j'eapfere ;  il  n'est  paa  poasible  qu'un  enfant 
soit  ai  cruel.  15.  C'est  un  filou  ;  apr^a  avoir  amaaad  de 
I'argent  par  dea  emprunts,  il  a  d^camp^.  16.  II  faut  que 
ces  gena-lh,  aient  perdu  la  tete ;  comment  ont-ils  pu 
avancer  de  I'argent  h.  un  homme  qu'ila  ne  connaissaient 
ni  d'Eve  ni  d'Adam  ?  17.  Qu'ila  s'arrangent !  c'eat  leur 
affaire  !  18.  Je  aaia  qu'ils  voua  ferout  bien  dea  caresaea, 
si  vous  allez  les  voir. 

122. 

1 .  Make  use  of  tWs  towel  to  dry  your  face.  2.  Manage 
80  tliat«'>  he  shall  not  see  you.  3.  Make  room  for  Mary. 
4.  He  makes  a  fuss  for  nothing.  6.  I  have  made  up  my 
mind  to  return  home.  6.  Make  up  for  your  fault  by 
obeying  your  father  in  future.  7.  She  makes  the  best 
of  aU  her  advantages.  8.  I  shall  make  it  up  with  him 
if  he  wishes.  9.  They  make  it  their  duty  to  listen  to 
him  always.  10.  I  cannot  make  out  what  she  means. 
1 1 .  Guess  what  I  have  in  my  hand.  12.  You  make  much 
of  him  now  that  he  is  rich.  13.  Riches  alone  will  not 
make  him  happy.  14.  If  you  will  not  make  use  of  this 
opportunity,  the  fault  will  be  all  your  own.  1 5 .  He  will 
manage  so  that  she  will  succeed.  16.  K  you  will  make 
room  for  me  beside  you,  I  shall  explain  to  you  what  I 
mean.  17.  I  am  told  you  have  again  done  a  mad-brained 
action.  18.  Why  does  he  not  make  up  his  mind  at  once 
to  accept  their  offer  ?  19.  You  must  buy  her  a  watch 
to  make  up  for  that  which  you  lost.  20.  He  will  not 
make  the  best  of  thes*.  circumstances.  21.  Will  they 
not  make  it  their  duty  to  call  on  him  ?    22.  We  made 


KXEBCISES   ON   IDIOMS.  159 

out  at  once  who  told  the  lie.  23.  If  she  makes  too  much 
of  him,  she  will  spoil  him.  24.  I  made  her  happy  by 
saying  that  you  were  well.  25.  We  shall  make  up  our 
minds  after  having  seen  the  goods.  26.  1  will  make  it 
my  duty  to  accompany  you  to  the  railway.  27.  My 
child,  you  must  try  to  make  the  best  of  the  education  I 
have  given  you.  28.  We  shall  manage  so  that  he  wUl 
know  nothing  of  it.  29.  As  soon  as  he  saw  you,  he  made 
off.  30.  Did  you  make  out  what  he  meant  ?  31.  He  has 
made  it  up  with  his  brother  after  a  long  separation.  32. 
What  a  fuss  he  is  making !  33.  Please  do  not  make 
use  of  the  information  I  have  given  you.  34.  He  knew 
how  to  make  himself  agreeable.  35.  They  would  not 
make  way  for  that  carriage.  36.  It  is  time  to  make  up 
your  mind. 

123. 
(Index,  XXXH.) 

1.  J'ai  bien  envie  de  partir  avec  lul,  mais,  si  je  le  pro- 
pose, je  suis  presque  certain  d'essuyer  un  refus.  2.  Elle 
ne  disait  jamais  franchement  sa  fajon  de  penser ;  de  ]k 
tons  ses  malheurs  et  les  miens.  3.  Au  milieu  de  ce  grand 
monde  ou  vous  allez  vivre,  faites  bien  attention  h  votre 
conduite.  4.  Tout  le  monde  aura  lea  yeux  sur  vous.  5. 
Prenez  garde  de  rien  dire  qui  nuise  k  vos  amis.  6.  Qu'a- 
t-elle  done  pour  etre  si  gaie  1  7.  Qu'y  a-t-il  ?  8.  Est-ce 
bien  ]^  ce  que  vous  avez  voulu  dire  ?  9.  Je  n'ai  fait  que 
dire  un  mot,  et  elle  s'est  mise  k  fondre  en  larmes.  10.  11 
faut  certes  avoir  bien  envie  de  disputer  pour  ne  pas  con- 
venir  de  ce  qu'il  dit  Ik.  11.  Que  ne  lui  dites-vous  votre 
fagan  de  penser?  vous  verrez  qu'U  vous  en  saura  gr^. 
12.  Allez  au  devant  de  lui,  et  recevez  le  avec  le  plus  grand 
respect.  13.  Vous  voilk  joli  gargon !  comment  allez-vous 
vous  tirer  de  Ik  1  14.  Nous  nous  ^tions  dispute  trbs-vive- 
ment  la  veille,  et  le  lendemain  il  est  venu  me  serrer  la 
main  comme  si  de  rien  n'^tait.  15.  Cela  n'^tonne  que 
vous  ;  vous  mesurez  tout  le  monde  k  votre  aune.  16.  Je 
partirais  bien  volontiers  avec  vous,  si  j'avais  I'esprit  trau- 


154  EJLKKC18E8    ON    IDIOMS. 

quille  sur  cette  petite  somme  que  je  dois  payer  demain. 
17.  Qu'il  cela  ne  tienne,  j'aurai  beavicoup  de  plaisir  k  voua 
avancer  ce  qu'il  vous  faudra  pour  faire  face  k  vos  engage 
meuts. 

124. 

1,  Ho  has  no  politeness.  2.  What"  ails  you  ?  3.  Whnt 
is  the  matter  in  question  ?  4.  It  is  no  matter  of  yours. 
5.  Did  you  mean  that  he  is  polite  ?  6.  You  meddle  too 
much  with  other  people's  aifairs.  7.  At  least  I  do  not 
meddle  with  yours.  8.  "We  have  a  mind  to  go  to  meet 
her.  9.  I  advise  you  as  a  friend  not  to  meddle  with  it. 
10.  They  always  speak  their  minds  freely.  11.  Mind 
you  don't  fall  in  going  down  stairs.  12.  He  changed  hia 
mind  on  that  subject.  13,  No  matter,  his  opinion  is 
usually  correct.  14.  "What  do  you  mean  ?  15.  I  mean 
that  you  are  wrong.  16.  Pay  no  attention  to  his  de- 
mand. 17.  At  any  rate  speak  your  mind  freely.  18. 
But  do  not  speak  it  (freely)  before  them,  they  are  deceit- 
ful. 19.  Have  you  a  mind  to  go  for  a  walk  ?  20.  It  is 
all  one  to  me.  21.  "WTiat  was  the  matter  with  your 
father  ?  22.  I  do  not  know  what  was  the  matter  with 
him.  23.  He  had  a  great  mind  to  call  for  them,  and  ask 
what  they  meant.  24.  Mind  your  own  affairs.  25.  Do 
not  interfere  with  mine.  26.  I  merely  took  it  into  my 
hand  to  look  at  it.  27.  Is  it  that  you  meant?  28.  I 
have  a  mind  to  go  to  hear  that  sermon.  29.  I  met  her 
in  the  street  as  I  was  coming  here.  30.  You  make  my 
mouth  water.  31.  This  gentleman  means  better  than 
you  think.  32.  You  will  bear  in  mind  to  tell  him  that 
we  reckon  upon  him  for  that  affair.  33.  She  has  no 
manners.  34.  Elizabeth  bore  malice  to  Mary  for  twenty 
years.  35.  Whether^"^  you  come  or  not,  it  is  all  one  to 
me.     36.  Are  you  not  to  meet  with  them  to-night  ? 

125. 

(Index,  XXXIH.) 
1.    J^urit^z-vous  la  bontd  de  me  dire  le  qiiantieme  da 


EXERCISES  Om  IDIOJIS.  155 

mois  ?  2.  Si  nons  somines  au  13,  c'est  apr^s-demain  qne 
je  vais  toucher  mon  mois.  3.  Je  croyais  que  voua  ^tiez 
pay^  tous  les  trois  mois.  4.  Oiii,  mais  nous  recevons  un 
k-compte  tous  les  mois.  5.  II  a  pris  cela  pour  de  I'argent 
comptant.  6.  Ne  revez  plus  k  ces  chimeres,  vous  perdez 
tout  votre  temps.  7.  T4chez  de  tirer  parti  de  I'^ducation 
que  vous  avez  re^ue.  8.  Si  vous  vous  defiez  toujours  de 
vos  forces,  vous  n'aniverez  jamais  k  rien.  9.  Apr^s  de 
longues  iiifortunes,  on  m^onnait  le  bonheur  lorsqu'il  se 
pr^sente,  et  I'on  s'en  m^fie.  10.  Ddfiez-vous  de  ceux  qui 
se  defiant  de  tout  le  monde.  11.  Je  pense  bien  qu'il 
voudra  de  I'argent  comptant,  il  ne  pent  pas  faire  credit 
12.  Est-ce  que  vous  prenez  pour  argent  comptant  toutea 
les  nouvelles  qu'il  fait  courir  ?  13.  11  fallait  voir  ces  deux 
femmes  se  disputer,  c'^tait  impayable.  14.  Ses  promesses 
ne  me  touchent  pas  plus  que  ses  menaces  :  autaut  en  em- 
porte  le  vent.  15.  Je  crois  que  monsieur  aime  h  rire,  et 
qu'il  veut,  comme  on  dit  vulgairement,  nous  faire  voir  dea 
dtoiles  en  plein  midi.  16.  Vous  vous  apercevez  sans  doute 
de  I'absence  de  votre  cousine  ;  elle  est  allde  faire  ses 
adieux  h  sa  soeur  ;  elle  part  demain  de  grand  matin.  17. 
II  y  a  ^videmment  quelque  chose  que  je  ne  sais  pas ; 
est  ce  qu'il  faut  absolument  qu'elle  parte  ?  18.  C'est  de 
rigueur,  et  il  n'y  a  Ul  aucun  myst^ra 

126. 

1.  He  mistakes  mc  for  my  sister.  2.  They  were  mis- 
taken in  their  calculations.  3.  We  mistrust  that  woman, 
and  we  advise  you  to  mistrust  her  also.  4.  Formerly 
you  paid  everything  reaily  money,  but  now  you  are  al- 
ways sliort  of  money.  5.  It  is  txue ;  I  hoped  to  receive 
some  from  my  father  yesterday.  6,  Let  us  have  no 
more  of  't.  7.  It  was  fine  weather  yesterday,  but  it 
was  muddy  in  town.  8.  It  is  too  much  to  think  that  I 
shall  do  all  your  work.  9.  He  has  just  gone  to  the 
bank  ;  he  will  receive  his  money  without  delay.  10.  I 
always  mistmsted  his  oCers  of  service.      11.   You  mis- 


156  EXEBCISES  OK  IDIOUS. 

trust  every  otjc.  12.  Don't  be  afraid  ;  they  will  not 
mistake  you  lor  him.  13.  If  you  think  to  deceive  us, 
you  will  be  mistaken.*  14.  It  is  rather  too  much  to 
say  that  I  interfere  in  your  aflPairs.  15.  I  have  just 
changed  my  mind;  it  is  too  muddy  to  go  out.  16.  1 
have  a  mind  to  pay  every  one  ready  money.  17.  But 
if  people  do  not  pay  you  ready  money  ?  18.  Have  you 
received  the  money  which  you  expected?  19.  Guess 
how  much  he  was  mistaken  in  his  calculation.  20.  It 
will  be  muddy  even  in  the  park  to-day.  21.  He  never 
mistrusts  what  he  says.  22.  They  do  not  think  you 
have  made  a  mistake.  23.  It  grieved  me  to  see  that 
poor  old  man  mourning  for  the  death  of  his  son.  24. 
During  the  ceremony  I  did  nothing  but  muse  upon  the 
news  I  had  just  received.  25.  Can  you  tell  me  what 
day  of  the  month  it  is  ?  26.  It  is  too  bad  to  tell  him 
that  to  his  face.  27.  Do  not  mistake  rudeness  for  frank- 
ness. 28.  Ought  he  not  to  make  the  most  of  his  talents  ? 
29.  We  should  get  it  for  much  less.  30.  Is  it  not  too 
muddy  to  go  there  on  foot  ?  31.  Put  aside  the  question 
of  money  ;  no  more  of  it.  32.  You  say  that  you  mis- 
trust me,  but  I  will  pay  you  ready  money.  33.  Do  you 
think  that  you  have  made  the  most  of  that  opportunity  ? 
34.  Yes,  by  all  means.  36.  You  are  always  musing 
over  that  grief.  36.  Should  one  mourn  so  long  for 
such  a  trifle  ? 

127. 

(Index,  XXXIV.) 

1.  J'ai  beau  lui  refuser  de  I'argent  chaque  fois  queje 
lui  ^cris  ;  11  ne  laisse  pas  de  m'en  demander  toua  les  deux 
ou  trois  mois.  2.  Ce  n'est  pas  sans  peine,  j'en  suis  sur, 
qu'il  se  voit  forc^  d'avoir  recours  k  vous.  3.  II  n'a  pas 
meme  le  n^cessaire.  4.  A  d'autres !  ce  n'est  pas  k  moi 
qu'il  en  fera  accroire.  5.  Est-ce  que  co  n'est  pas  une 
folie  d'en  agir  ainsi  avec  celui  qui  le  nourrit  ?  6.  II  est 
plus  bete  que  me'chant ;  quoiqu'il  se  soit  mal  comports  k 

*  Turu  into,  it  w  you  u/io  viU  bt  mittaien. 


KXEECISES  OS  IDIOMS.  X67 

votre  ^gard,  ne  laissez  pas  de  lui  envoyer  quelque  argent. 

7.  11  ne  tient  h  rien  que  je  ne  lui  en  envoie  moi-uieme. 

8.  Qu'est-ce  que  cela  vous  fait,  dix  ou  douze  livres  de  plus 
ou  de  moins  ?  vous  etes  uu  vrai  Crdsus.  9.  Vous  avez 
tant  d'argent  que  vous  ne  savez  qu'en  faire.  10.  Et  pour- 
taut,  depuis  le  matin  jusqu'au  soir,  vous  ne  faitea  que 
vous  plaindre  de  la  misere  des  temps.  11.  Je  me  vois 
forcd,  Monsieur,  de  vous  refuser  la  favour  que  vous  avez 
sollicite'e ;  soyez  persuadd  que  je  le  fais  bien  k  regret. 

12.  II  m'a  dii;  sans  fafou  que  cela  ne  me  regardait  point. 

13.  Ce  n'est  pas  k  moi  qu'il  faut  vous  en  prendre  si  votre 
cousine  bat  la  campagne.  14.  A  la  bonne  heure  au  moins ! 
voila  une  bonne  lettre,  cela  coule  de  source.  15.  A  pro- 
pos,  Monsieur,  veuillez  accepter  mes  remerciments  pour 
le  z^le  que  vous  avez  deploy^  dans  raon  affaire.  16.  II 
n'y  a  pas  de  quoi,  Monsieur,  c'est  bien  k  votre  servico. 
17.  Je  vois  trfes-souvent  votre  ami  Henri,  puisque  nous 
demeurons  porte  k  porte.  18.  Tous  les  matins  il  sort  4 
huit  heures,  tir^  k  quatre  ^pingles. 


128. 

1.  I  nearly  fell.  2.  If  you  have  the  necessaries  of 
life  do  not  complain.  3.  You  do  not  absolutely  need 
the  luxuries.  4.  One  may  do  without  them.  6.  It  is 
nonsense  to  pay  attention  to  her  complaints.  6.  You 
do  nothing  but  talk.  7.  That  is  nothing  to  you.  8. 
She  is  not  nearly  so  pretty  as  her  sister.  9.  Do  you 
need  ready  money  ?  10.  I  wish  you  all  good-night. 
11.  Have  they  not  even  the  necessaries  of  life?  12. 
They  are  almost  dying  of  hunger.  13.  Would  it  not  be 
non.sense  to  take  oU'ence  at  his  speech  ?  14.  He  did 
nothing  but  annoy  us.  15.  Nonsense!  he  was  endea- 
vouring to  enliven  you  by  his  gaiety.  16.  It  was  nothing 
to  him  ;  why  should  he  have  interfered  with  the  busi- 
ness ?  17.  They  stand  in  need  of  clothes  and  food.  18. 
I  was  nearly  dying  of  cold  and  hunger.  19.  In  case 
of  need  you  may  have  the  necessaries  of  life  fi'om  me. 


158  EXEBCISES  ON  IDIOtfS. 

20.  Was  she  not  under  the  necessity  of  writing  to  yon 
about  it?  21.  Pay  no  attention  to  it ;  it  is  a  mere 
nothing.  22.  I  should  like  to  know  why  she  always 
thrusts  her  nose  among  my  papers.  23.  Let  us  not  go 
before  it  is  quite  dark.  24.  Your  objection  is  nothing 
to  the  point.  25.  We  sat  up  all  night  playing  at  whist, 
and  went  to  bed  at  half-past  five.  26.  What  a  shame  ! 
27.  Although  he  does  not  like  me,  he  nevertheless  comes 
now  and  then  to  see  me.  28.  Don't  vex  yourself  for 
such  a  trifling  loss  ;  it  is  a  mere  nothing.  29.  You  do 
nothing  but  play  and  gossip  in  that  corner.  30.  Come 
to  me  in  case  of  need.  31.  She  nevertheless  thinks  I  am 
guilty.  32.  What  is  that  to  you  ?  33.  We  are  under 
the  necessity  of  becoming  bankrupt.  34.  Still  if  you 
had  the  necessaries  of  life  !  35.  Do  you  not  know  me  ? 
we  are  next  door  neighbours.  36.  They  did  nothing 
but  look  at  me  during  the  lesson. 

129. 
(Index,  XXXV.) 

1.  Tout  est  bien  fini  maintenant ;  les  voilk  parties ;  il 
n'y  a  plus  rien  h.  espdrer.  2.  Que  de  bonnes  occasions  vous 
m'avez  fait  manquer  !  3.  Vous  n'avez  que  faire  de  vous 
plaindre  ;  cela  ne  vous  avancera  gufere.  4.  Ne  prenez  pas 
ce  que  je  vous  dis  Ik  en  mauvaise  part.  5.  Faites-raoi  le 
plaisir  de  lui  dire  que,  s'il  recommence,  je  le  tancerai 
d'importance.  6.  II  ne  demandait  pas  mieux  que  de  venir 
avec  nous,  mais  nous  ne  nous  souciions  gnhre  de  sa  com- 
pagnie.  7.  Quel  horame  singulier  que  M.  voire  cousin  ! 
8.  Le  voilk  qui  se  fait  vieux  maintenant.  9.  J'espfere  que 
vous  ne  corapterez  pas  cela  pour  une  visite  ;  vous  n'avez 
fait  qu'entrer  et  sortir.  10.  II  ne  regard e  pas  h  I'argent ; 
pour  lui  c'est  une  question  d'amour-propre.  11.  Elle  se 
plaint  k  tout  bout  de  champ  de  la  pluie,  dn  froid  et  de  la 
chaleur,  comme  si  c'etait  de  ma  fante.  12.  J'ai  beau  lui 
faire  observer  que  tout  le  monde  en  souffre  comme  elle  ; 
elle  se  croit  persdcut^e  et  s'obstine  k  se  regarder  comme  la 
plus  mallieuretise  des  femraes.     13.   II  y  a  des  gens  qui 


EXEBCISES   OS   IDIOMS.  159 

ne  peuvent  se  decider  k  rien ;  ila  veulent  et  ne  veulent 
pas  ;  ce  sout  des  fldaux  pour  lea  gens  d^cid^a.  14.  Je 
crois,  mon  cher  ami,  qu'on  vous  a  mout^  la  tete  ;  autre- 
ment  vous  n'attacheriez  pas  tant  d'importance  h  ces  baga- 
telles. 15.  Parlez-moi  k  coeur  ouvert  :  est-il  vrai  que 
I'affaire  soit  manque'e  ?  16.  Soyez  des  notres  ;  le  plus  fort 
de  I'aifaire  est  fait ;  uoua  r^ussirons  d'erablde,  17.  Est-co 
que  801)  air  egard  ne  vous  frappe  pas  ?  cela  saute  aux  yeux 
de  tout  le  monde.  18.  Encore  un  coup  je  le  rdpfete,  il  ne 
tient  qu'k  lui  de  rdussir  ;  il  ne  I'aura  jamais  plus  belle. 

130. 

1.  It  occurs  to  me  that  you  have  missed  the  best  op- 
portunity. 2.  You  never  let  slip  the  opportunity  of  ob- 
liging them.  3.  He  had  no  occasion  to  go  there.  4. 
That  gave  occasion  to  his  enemies  to  speak  against  bim, 

6.  If  they  take  offence  at  that,  it  is  all  one  to  me.  6. 
I  have  no  objection  to  pay  one  pound  odd  for  a  good  hat. 

7.  All  was  over  before  we  arrived.  8.  I  shall  have  oc- 
casion to  call  for  them  in  the  afternoon.  9.  I  lent  them 
an  odd  volume  of  Walter  Scott ;  I  hope  they  will 
take  offence  if  I  ask  it  back.  10.  It  is  all  over  with  us; 
we  are  losing  right  and  left.  11.  In  my  opinion  we  have 
no  occasion  to  tear  them.  1 2.  Go  away,  you  only  annoy 
me.  13.  We  have  no  objection  to  join  you  there.  14. 
He  is  an  odd  kind  of  man,  he  takes  offence  at  everything. 
15.  You  have  the  odds  against  you,  but,  if  you  triumph, 
what  a  glory  for  you!  16.  In  doing  that  shall  we  not 
gi\e  occasion  to  disagreeable  reports V  1 7.  All  will  be 
ov  er  before  she  arrives.  18.  Allow  me  to  observe  to  you 
that  the  young  lady  is  waiting.  19.  Will  you  do  me 
the  plciisurc  of  dining  with  me  on  Friday  week?  20. 
I  require  a  pair  of  boots,  will  you  oblige  me  by  lending 
me  one  pound  odd  to  buy  them?  21.  Odd  or  even, 
which  will  you  have?  22.  He  had  no  objection  to  go 
abroad.  23.  If  you  require  me,  send  for  me.  24.  He 
was  an  odd  sort  of  man,  a  man  of  ten  thousand  ;  he  di- 
piivcd  himself  of  the  necessaries  of  life,  and  gave  aU  his 


160  EXEBCISES   ON    EDIOMS. 

income  to  the  poor.  25.  You  had  no  occasion  to  speak 
to  him.  26.  If  yon  give  occasion  to  find  fault  with  your 
conduct,  I  shall  discharge  you.  27.  She  often  gives  me 
occasion  to  reprove  her.  28.  If  you  have  occasion  for 
that  sum,  you  have  only  to  let  me  know.  29.  Do  not 
take  offence  at  that.  30.  Do  not  give  him  occasion  to 
laugh  at  you.  31.  They  had  no  occasion  to  go  out, 
without  my  permission.  32.  It  seems  to  me  that  some- 
body has  over-excited  you.  33.  He  was  merely  speak- 
ing to  her.  34.  I  have  no  occasion  for  your  services. 
35.  It  was  all  over  with  them.  36.  Did  you  see  two 
odd  gloves  on  the  table  ? 

131. 

(Index,  XXXVI.) 

1.  Je  ne  croirais  pas  que  lea  choses  se  fussent  pass^es 
de  la  sorte,  si  des  personnes  graves  ne  I'attestaient.  2.  H 
n'y  a  pas  raoyen  de  plaisanfcer  avec  lui,  il  prend  tout  en 
mauvaise  part.  3.  C'est  bien  dommage  qu'il  y  regards  de 
si  pres  ;  sans  cela  ce  serai  t  un  si  bon  homme  !  4.  Est-ce 
qu'il  n'y  a  pas  moyen  de  faire  taire  ce  polisson-1^  ?  6. 
Attendez  qu'il  vienne  vous  trouver  ;  ce  n'est  pas  h  vous 
de  lui  faire  la  premiere  visite.  6.  Ce  pauvre  enfant  dtait 
en  haillons  ;  il  avait  la  tete  et  les  pieds  nus  ;  j'en  avais 
vrainient  pitid.  7.  A  la  guerre  comme  k  la  guerre  :  en 
voyage  il  n'y  faut  pas  regarder  de  si  prfes.  8.  II  n'a  pas 
eu  I'honnetete  de  me  faire  part  de  son  mariage.  9.  II  ne 
tient  qu'k  vous  de  m'en  d^barrasser  pour  toujours  ;  dites 
un  mot,  et  tout  eat  fait.  10.  C'est  bien  dommage  que 
vous  n'ayez  pas  affranchi  votre  lettre.  11.  II  y  regarde  do 
Bi  pres  qu'il  vous  en  voudra  longtemps.  12.  Ce  n'est  que 
quand-il  m'a  fait  toucher  la  chose  au  doigt  et  k  I'ceil  que 
je  me  suis  rendu.  13.  II  semble  que  vous  ayez  pris  ^ 
tache  de  I'irriter  :  vous  voici  mainteiiant  dans  de  beaux 
draps.  14.  Vous  aurez  beau  dire  et  beau  faire,  c'est  h 
vous  que  I'on  fera  payer  les  pots  cassis.  16.  Je  vous  djs 
eu  bon  fraugais  que  vous  n'etes  qu'un  paresseux  ;  si  ceh 


EXEBCISES  OS  IDIOMS.  161 

ne  vous  fait  pas  honte,  tant  pis  pour  vous.  16.  Que  pen- 
sez-vous  de  cette  Ie9on  ?  vous  n'en  avez  paa  I'air  bieu  en- 
thousiasm^.  17.  Je  la  trouve  passable  ;  il  y  a  k  prendre 
et  k  laisser.  18.  Cette  dame  a  les  bras  longs  ;  c'est  k  elle, 
non  k  moi,  qu'il  faut  vous  adresser. 

182. 

1 .  Pack  up  immediately ;  the  train  will^  soon  leave. 
2.  I  beg  your  pardon,  we  have  time  yet.  3.  Will  she 
take  a  part  in  the  concert  to-night?  4.  It  is  in  her 
power  to  do  so.  5.  There  is  no  possibility  of  pleasing 
you,  you  are  so  particular.  6.  I  am  going  to  pay  a  visit 
to  my  aunt.  7.  Take  pity  on  her.  8.  It  is  a  pity  that 
you  are  in  such  a  hurry.  9.  Will  you  not  play  a  game 
at  whist  with  us  ?  10.  Be  so  polite  as  to  invite  her  also. 
11.  It  was  in  her  power  to  take  a  part  in  the  game.  1 2. 
If  you  are  not  going  to  any  party  to-morrow,  come  and 
play  a  hand  at  whist  with  us.  13.  Ask  pardon  of  that 
gentleman.  14.  We  are  a  small  party  of  friends,  will 
you  not  come  with  us?  15.  Beware  of  spoUing  his 
books,  he  is  particular  about  them.  16.  Will  they  not 
take  a  part  in  the  discussion  ?  17.  They  would  have 
taken  a  part  in  it,  if  they  had  been  invited.  18.  There 
will  be  no  possibility  of  packing  up  our  luggage  in  time. 
19.  He  will  have  no  pity  on  their  misfortunes.  20. 
There  was  no  possibility  of  discovering  the  truth.  21. 
Will  they  be  so  polite  as  to  caU  for  us  ?  22.  It  would 
be  a  pity  not  to  see  such  a  famous  man.  23.  If  we 
take  a  part  in  the  ceremony  we  shall  see  him.  24.  It 
is  your  turn*  to  play.  25.  It  was  not  my  place  to  speak 
first.  26.  Is  there  no  possibility  of  sending  for  him 
now?  27.  It  wiU  be  in  his  power  to  conic  soon.  28. 
He  knows  his  rights,  and  is  particular  about  them.  29. 
Have  no  pity  on  his  vices,  but  spare  his  friends,  I  beg 
you.  30.  It  is  in  your  power  to  refuse  or  to  accept  the 
proposal.  3 1 .  Was  there  no  possibility  of  going  to  meet 
them?     32.  Would  it  not  be  a  pity  to  miss  the  oppor- 

*  (fest  i  vous  i  nicaoa  it  it  your  turn  to ;  tfest  &  voui  de  meaoa  it  m  pour 
place,  your  duty,  to. 


162  EXEKCISES  ON   IDIOMS. 

tunity  ?  33.  Was  it  not  their  place  to  yield  to  the 
orders  of  their  superiors?  34.  They  have  not  taken 
part  in  the  plot.  35.  If  it  were  in  your  power  to  do 
that,  would  you  do  it  ?  36.  We  hope  they  will  pay  ua 
a  visit  when  they  come. 

133. 

(Index,  XXXVII.) 

1.  Ce  n'est  pas  la  peine  de  vous  cacher,  je  vous  ai  bien 
vxi  ;  ne  faites  done  pas  I'enfant.  2.  Quand  on  I'interroi^e, 
11  feint  de  ne  pas  comprendre,  se  met  k  pleurer  et  ne  rdpond 
rien.  3.  II  faut  souffrir  les  maux  que  Dieu  envoie.  4. 
En  le  mettant  au  fait  de  ce  qui  s'est  passd,  vous  lui  rendez 
un  fort  mauvais  service.  5.  Passez  votre  habit,  et  allons 
faire  un  tour.  6.  Je  vous  conseille  de  ne  pas  lui  e'chauffer 
les  oreilles,  il  est  un  pen  vif.  7.  "Vous  voici  en  fort  belle 
passe ;  vous  allez  vous  rendre  k  Paris,  et  il  ne  tiendra  qu'Ji 
vous  de  faire  fortune.  8.  II  fait  le  bon  apotre,  mais  ne 
v<jus  y  fiez  pas.  9.  Si  vous  le  mettez  au  fait  du  petit  tour 
que  nous  lui  preparons,  nous  ne  nous  amuserons  plus 
gufere.  10.  Que  d'afironts  il  lui  faut  essuyer  pour  se  con- 
server  en  place  !  11.  Commencez  par  mettre  votre  vanity 
de  cotd,  et  vous  verrez  que  cela  ne  coAtera  pas  si  cher  que 
vous  le  dites.  12.  Veuillez  sonner,  je  vous  prie.  13.  II 
^iaient  bons  amis  il  y  a  une  demi-heure  ;  les  voilk  tout  h 
coup  h.  s'injurier  sans  rime  ni  raison,  h  se  chamailler  et  k 
se  prendre  aux  cheveux.  14.  C'est  une  vi'aie  querelle 
d'Allemands.  15.  Je  crois  que  vous  faites  la  petite  bouche. 
16.  Aucun  des  faits  qu'elle  avait  mis  en  doute  ne  s'est 
trouv^  vrai,  apres  examen.  17.  C'est  un  livre  aprfes  lequel 
j'ai  longtemps  soupird  ;  je  I'acheterai  coftte  que  coAte. 
18.  Quand  je  lui  demande  le  paiement  de  mon  petit 
compte,  il  me  renvoie  aux  calendes  grecques. 

134. 

1.  Do  not  ask  so  many  questions,  you  annoy  us.  2. 
He  could  not  put  up  with  her  airs.     3.  She  pretended 


EXJ!:KClii£S  OS  IDIOMS.  163 

to  be  sict.  4.  He  pretended  not  to  observe  it.  6. 
You  may  put  off  your  engagement  if  you  think  proper. 
6.  If  that  report  prove  true,  we  are  ruined.  7.  He 
lays  by  some  money  every  week.  8.  Put  him  in  mind 
of  his  promise  to  pay  you.  9.  To  what  purpose  ?  he 
will  never  do  it.  10.  You  are  putting  the  cart  before 
the  horse.  11.  Do  not  put  him  up  to  it.  12.  They 
were  forced  to  put  up  with  his  excuses.  13.  Do  not 
pretend  to  be  surprised  at  seeing  them.  14.  "We  should 
like  to  know  what  he  will  do  with  all  the  money  he  puts 
by.  15.  That  is  nothing  to  the  purpose.  16.  You  pre- 
tend to  be  rich,  and  you  are  not  so.  17.  They  pretended 
not  to  hear  his  allusions.  18.  Pretend  not  to  see  that 
poor  woman.     19.    The  judge  postponed  his  decision. 

20.  They  will  as  usual  put  the  cart  before  the  horse. 

21.  Do  not  put  him  iu  mind  of  his  faults.  22.  I  fear 
that  story  may  prove  too  true.  23.  You  may  tell  him 
so,  but  it  will  be  nothing  to  the  purpose.  24.  You 
must  not  question  what  he  says.  25.  He  will  pretend 
to  be  generous  before  you.  26,  I  asked  if  they  would 
put  aside  a  few  books  for  us.  27.  They  said  yes,  if  I 
would  put  them  in  mind  of  it.  28.  Why  do  you  put  up 
with  his  insolence  ?  29.  I  am  certain  that,  had  I  gone 
there,  he  would  have  picked  a  quarrel  with  me.  30. 
We  shall  postpone  our  visit  till  another  day.  31.  We 
will  put  her  up  to  your  Kttle  tricks.  32.  If  you  are 
willing  to  put  up  with  his  extravagance,  it  is  all  one  to 
me.  33.  I  shall  bear  his  impertinence  no  longer.  34. 
They  postponed  their  letter  on  purpose.  35.  Do  not 
question  that  man  so  much,  or  you  wiU  put  him  up  to 
voiir  intentions  with  respect  to  him.  36.  Do  they  ques- 
tion his  right  to  inherit  that  money  ? 

135. 
(Indez,  XXXVm.) 

1.  D^pechez-vous  de  vous  en  aller,  11  va  faire  un  temps 
affreux.  2.  J'aime  mieux  attendre  un  quart  d'heure  quo 
de  m'exposer  k  recevoir  toute  cette  pluie  snr  le  dos.     3. 


164  EXEBCISES  ON  IBTOHS. 

Je  serais  perc^  jusqu'aux  os  avant  d'etre  h  moitid  chemin. 
4.  Ne  vous  en  remettez  pas  k  iin  autre  du  soiii  de  votre 
honneur  :  nul  n'y  est  plus  interesse  que  vous.  5.  Votre 
observation  n'a  aucuiie  espbce  de  rapport  avec  ce  qu'ello 
vient  de  dii'e.  6.  Ce  petit  bonhomine-lk  vous  fera  hon- 
neur. 7.  En  4te,  quand  il  pleut,  la  campagne  reverdit. 
8.  La  terr.e  est  seche,  je  ne  pense  pas  qu'il  pleuve  aujour- 
d'hui.  9.  Je  me  mettrais  en  route,  lors  meme  qu'il  pleu- 
vrait  des  hallebardes.  10.  Au  train  dout  vous  y  allez,  uion 
bon  ami,  vous  ii'en  finirez  jamais.  11.  Raison  de  plus 
pour  que  vous  me  donniez  un  coup  de  main.  12.  Si  vous 
avez  jamais  compte  sur  lui  pour  vous  rendre  le  plus  l^ger 
service,  vous  pouvez  rayer  cola  de  vos  tablettes.  Ifti 
Aidez-moi  done  un  peu,  le  titre  de  cet  ouvrage  ne  me  re- 
vient  pas.  14.  Comment !  vous  voulez  que  je  lui  derive 
de  but  en  blauc  une  lettre  si  impertinente  !  vous  allez  un 
peu  vite  en  besogne,  15.  On  n'en  vient  k  ce  moyen-15,  que 
quand  on  a  dpuisd  tons  les  autres.  16.  Nous  dcrirons 
cette  lettre  k  tete  reposee  et  nous  attendrons  jusqu'k  de- 
main  :  la  nuit  porte  conseil.  17.  Au  lieu  de  travailler  sitot 
aprfes  votre  dejeuner  et  votre  diner,  vous  feriez  bien  de 
vous  distraire  un  peu.  18.  Ce  petit  gamin  se  fait  ton  jours 
tirer  I'oreille  quand  on  lui  commando  quelque  chose. 

136. 

1.  It  is  raining  fast  just  now.  2.  I  like  rain  better 
than  sleet.  3.  He  lent  his  money  at  the  rate  of  four 
per  cent.  4.  He  will  not  reach  Edinburgh  before  six 
o'clock.  5.  You  will  never  reach  that  position.  6.  If 
we  do  not  give  them  that  explanation,  they  will  have 
reason  to  be  offended.  7.  Hear  reason  for  once,  I  beg 
you.  8.  I  shall  refer  it  to  an  arbitrator.  9.  Do  they 
not  reflect  credit  on  their  teachers  ?  10.  He  is  rejoiced 
at  their  success.  11.  That  story  relates  to  what  you 
told  us  tliis  morning.  12.  They  rejoice  at  coming  back 
to  Scotland.  13.  Here  we  are  out  of  the  reach  of  our 
enemies.  14.  I  think  it  is  going  to  rain  fast.  15.  No 
matter ;  you  will  soon  reach  home.    16.  Pray  be  quiet; 


SXKRdSES  OS  IDIOHS.  16A 

do  you  wish  to  pick  a  quarrel  with  them?  17.  They 
will  have  reason  to  rejoice  at  it.  18.  "We  went  at  the 
rate  of  twenty  miles  an^  hour.  19.  Make  haste,  or  we 
will  go  without  you.  20.  We  are  as  quick  as  we  can 
be.  21.  Why  would  they  not  refer  it  to  John's  decision? 
22.  If  you  be  quick  you  wiU  see  the  queen  pass.  23. 
They  would  rather  lose  their  money  than  follow  his  coun- 
sel. 24.  What  cause  have  you  to  be  dissatisfied  with 
her?  25.  I  have  no  reason  to  be  angry  with  them.  26. 
We  hope  you  will  reflect  (a*edit  on  our  choice.  27.  It 
was  pouring  of  rain  when  we  reached  the  steamer.  28. 
Does  not  that  engl•a^^ng  relate  to  the  death  of  Caesar  ? 
29.  Will  not  those  children  be  quiet  ?  30.  He  has  rea- 
son to  complain  of  your  extravagance.  81.  He  referred 
it  to  us.  32.  If  you  refer  it  to  me,  I  will  give  you  a  flat 
refusal.  33.  Would  you  not  rather  have  a  situation 
in  Paris  than  in  London  ?  34.  We  reached  Dublin  in 
six  hours.  35.  Can  you  reach  the  flower  growing  on 
tLut  rock  ?     36.  It  is  out  of  my  reach. 

187. 
(Index,  XXXrS.) 

1.  II  est  alM,  comma  ua  fou,  donner  de  la  tete  centre  son 
oncle  qui  entrait.  2.  N'est-ce  pas  de  vous  qu'il  s'agit  ? 
8.  n  me  aemble  qu'il  n'avait  pa3  le  droit  de  me  rappeler 
mes  prome-sses,  puisqu'il  n'avait  pas  tenu  les  siennas.  4. 
II  ne  faut  pas  toujours  se  fiar  k  I'enseigiie.  5.  Parfois  on 
est  trahi  par  ceux  sur  lesquels  on  comptait  le  plus.  6.  Si 
tu  le  vois,  rappelle-lui  qu'il  a  promis  de  me  fairs  cadean 
d'un  beau  fusil.  7.  Est-ce  que  tu  te  fies  k  ses  promesses  ? 
quant  k  moi,  je  ne  fais  pas  plus  de  cas  de  ses  paroles  que 
si  elles  n'existaient  pas.  8.  II  s'agit  maintenant  de  savoir 
qui  de  vous  a  tort ;  je  parie  bien  que  c'est  Victor.  9.  A 
quoi  voulez-vous  que  je  me  ddcide  ?  je  ne  sais  vraiment  de 
quel  bois  faire  fleche.  10.  Ne  vous  mettez  pas  en  peine 
de  votre  frere  ;  il  va  son  petit  bonhomme  de  chemiu. 
11.  Si  vous  ne  vous  reposez  une  heure  ou  deux  apr^s  le 
diner  vous  ne  ferez  rien  qui  vaille.     1 2    Vous  avez  tout 

f  M 


i  66  KXEUCISES  ON  EDIOMS. 

le  temps  de  faire  un  tour  dans  le  jardin,  la  bonne  est  en 
train  de  faire  votre  chambre.  13.  Est-ce  que  vous  ne  vous 
souvenez  pas  de  ce  petit  monsieur  qui  avait  tou jours  un 
proverbe  k  la  bouche,  et  que  nous  avions  sumommd  Sancho 
Pan^a  ?  14.  Je  me  rappoUe  bien  qu'il  y  avait  un  homme 
comme  cela  dans  mes  connaissances  il  y  a  deux  ou  trois  ans, 
mais  je  ne'me  remets  pas  sa  figure.  15.  Eh  bien,  on  le  dit 
aujourd'hui  riche  corame  un  Cr^sus.  16.  Lea  oreilles  me 
tintent,  on  doit  parler  de  moi  quelque  part.  17.  Votre 
frfere  s'est  fort  mal  conduit  h.  mon  ^gard,  aussi  je  la  lui 
garde  bonne.  18.  Je  me  suis  mis  sur  le  pied  de  ue  plus 
faire  de  visites. 

138. 

1 .  One  cannot  rely  on  that  man.  2.  Get  rid  of  him  as 
soon  as  possible.  3.  Do  you  not  remember  that  we  saw 
him  in  London  ?  4.  It  is  reported  that  he  has  been  twice 
bankrupt.  5.  That  reminds  me  that  we  have  a  right  to 
examine  his  pretensions.  6.  You  are  right  to  refuse  to 
become  his  partner.  7.  They  have  resolved  to  have 
recourse  to  legal  means  to  recover  their  goods.  8.  We 
will  repair  to-morrow  to  our  lawyer's  to  inquire  as  to  the 
way  to*  get  rid  of  him.  9.  Do  not  reproach  him  with 
laziness,  he  has  done  his  utmost.  10.  The  question  is, 
to  know  if  they  have  a  right  to  share  in  our  profits.  11. 
How  did  you  run  your  head  against  that  wall  ?  12.  I 
cannot  resolve  to  leave  him.  1 3.  Have  you  run  over 
Macaulay's  new  work?  14.  It  requiresf  great  attention, 
but  I  sliallrun  over  it  to-night.  15.1  will  not  rely  upon 
your  assistance  in  future.  16.  Rely  upon  ui\-  discretion. 
17.  We  shall  remember  your  services,  and  also  remind 
the  government  of  them.  18.  Why  do  you  reproach 
them  for  having  done  that?  19.  It  was  reported  that 
the  Exchange  had  taken  fire  last  night.  20.  I  resolved 
to  stay  here,  but  he  resolved  to  n-pair  to  Naples.  21. 
You  repeat  continually  the  same  thing.    22.  Intliatcase 

•  To  Inquire  as  to  the  way  to,  pour  demandet  la  maniii-e  de. 
t  It  requires,  if  exiffe. 


B?CETICISE8  ON  IDIOMS.  1(>7 

\rould  YOU  haA^e  had  a  right  to  ask  for  the  protection 
of  the  British  consul?  23.  (Jet  that  fowl  roasted  for 
supper.  24.  One  does  not  know  on  whom  to  rely.  25. 
Wesliall  not  roast  those  pheasants  till  he  comes.  26.  He 
is  a  tiresome  fellow,  but  we  cannot  get  rid  of  him.  27. 
They  would  be  right  to  refuse  to  associate  with  her.  28. 
Glance  over  this  book,  and  tell  me  what  you  think  of  it. 
29.  He  sold  the  goods  in  rttaU  to  get  rid  of  them  more 
quickly.  30.  Remember  me  kindly  to  your  grandmamma- 
Si.  I  have  no  relish  for  that  sort  of  novels,  they  tire  me. 
32.  The  duke  repaired  to  the  plain  in  order  to  review 
his  troops.  33.  You  must  not  be  under  restraint  with 
me.  34.  A  report  was  spread  tliat  the  king  had  resolved 
to  dismiss  his  ministers,  35.  He  was  reluctant  to  con- 
fess hia  fault.     36.  They  were  just  rising  &om  dinner. 

130. 

(Index,  Xli.) 

1.  Cast  hier  seulemcut  qu'on  me  I'a  fait  dire,  je  ne 
pouvais  gufere  venir  phis  tot.  2.  Elle  s'est  content^e  de 
me  aerrer  la  main  et  de  me  jeter  un  regard  d'adieu.  3. 
C'est  ce  matin  que  j'ai  envoy^  chercher  le  m^decin  ;  elle 
se  trouvait  plus  mal.  4.  Contentez-vous  d'exceller  dans 
lea  choses  de  votre  profession.  5.  Maintenant  qu'il  est  en 
mer  au  lailieu  d'^trangers,  pense-t-il  k  ceux  qu'il  laisse 
derri^re  lui  ?  6.  II  etait  tard  quand  ils  ont  mis  k  la  voile. 
7.  J'espere  que  vous  me  ferez  aavoir,  deux  ou  troia  jours 
d'avance,  le  jour  de  votre  depart:  j'irai  avec  vous  jusqu'^ 
la  gare.  8.  Ne  hii  faifces  pas  voir  la  lettre  de  votre  frfere, 
il  irait  a'en  vanter  par  toute  la  vLUe.  9.  On  n'y  voit  goutte 
pour  lire  aon  journal  ;  guidon,  allumez  le  gaz.  10.  Je 
vols  ce  que  c'est ;  il  veut  vous  laisser  tout  le  travail  et 
garder  pour  lui  tout  le  b^ndfice.  11.  Envoyez-le  done 
promener  ;  est-ce  que  vous  allez  aacrifier  voa  int^rets  aux 
sieiis  ?  12.  Je  ne  savaia  pas  qu'il  edt  la  conscience  si  large : 
ni  vous  lion  plus,  je  pane  ?  13.  Dites  done,  Ernest,  ne 
feriez-voua  pas  bien  d'aller  jusque  chez  votre  oncle,  ne 


168  EXEBCTSBS  ON  IDIOMS. 

fdt-ce  que  par  manibre  d'acquit?  14.  Sortez  sans  faire 
Bemblant  de  rien,  et  allez  faire  un  bout  de  toilette  ;  vous 
n'dtes  vraiment  pas  presentable.  15.  Avant  d'aller  plus 
loin,  voyons  oil  en  sont  les  affaires.  16.  Je  crois  etre  sur  la 
voie  ;  j'irai  jusqu'au  bout ;  je  veux  en  avoir  le  coeur  net. 
17.  Le  pauvre  gargon  s'est  mis  en  quatre  pour  vous  faire 
plaisir,  et  voici  que  vous  le  rdcompensez  par  une  longue 
kyrielle  de  reproches  ;  ce  n'est  pas  bien.  18.  Elle  venait 
tons  les  soirs  faire  sa  partie  de  whist,  et  tous  les  soira 
j'allais  la  reconduire  chez  elle. 

140. 

1.  The  fleet  set  sail  on  the  20th  of  July  to  demand 
satisfaction  from  the  Chinese.  2.  The  admiral  sent  word 
to  the  commissioners  that  he  should  take  satisfaction  for 
the  injuries  done*  to  our  merchants.  3.  They  were  forced 
to  remain  satisfied  with  that  reply.  4.  But  they  were 
not  convinced  of  the  truth  of  that  reason.  5.  I  can 
scarcely  walk.  6.  Send  for  the  surgeon  and  let  him  see 
your  foot.  7.  I  do  not  see  at  all  in  this  room.  8.  He  is 
second  to  none  in  the  world.  9.  Why  do  sailors  scn;ple 
to  set  sail  on  Friday  ?  10.  They  will  send  for  me  if  he 
comes.  11.  Send  word  that  I  am  here.  12.  Do  not  let 
her  see  that  book.  13.  Beware  of  that  grocer ;  he  will 
not  scruple  to  cheat  you.  14.  Are  you  satisfied  with  the 
truth  of  his  statements  ?  15.  We  can  hardly  believe  him. 
16.  And  yet  we  scruple  to  expose  him.  17.  You  will 
scarcely  get  out  of  that  scrape  without  suffering  great 
losses.  18.  I  was  happy  to  hear  that  you  had  arrived 
safely.  1 9.  Come  with  us,  we  shall  have  a  sail  till  dinner 
time.  20.  The  information  you  gave  me  satisfies  me  fully. 
21.  Sailors  like  to  live  by  the  sea-side.  22.  On  land  they 
are  second  to  none.  23.  Would  he  not  scruple  to  eat  meat 
on  Friday?  24.  Why  should  you  scruple  to  tell  her  that? 
25.  You  will  see  nothing  at  all  there.  26.  If  she  had 
more  experience,  she  would  be  second  to  none.  27.  That 
telescope  will  show  us  the  spots  on  the  sun.     28.  Will 


•  The  Injuries  done,  let  oifefiJW/a** 


EXERCISBS   ON    IDIOMS.  169 

it  show  the  mountains  in  the  moon?  29.  Did  he  give 
him  satisfaction  for  the  insult  offered  to*  his  father?    30. 

I  fear  they  may  scruple  to  tell  us  all  the  truth.  31.  Do 
not  he  satisfied  with  learning  the  half  of  it.  32.  We 
shall  not  set  sailf  till  the  train  arrives.  33.  He  will  not 
be  satisfied  with  such  a  small  salaiy.  34.  He  will  be 
quite  right.  3  5 .  We  sh  all  get  out  of  the  scrape  as  quickly 
M  we  can.     36.  Qo  on,  you  are  upon  the  scent. 

141. 

(Index,  Xlil.) 

1.  Taisez-vous  done,  vous  me  fendez  la  t§te  avec  vos 

cris.     2.  Mon  cher  Monsieur,  permettez-m(  i  de  vous  dire 

que  vous  ne  savez  pas  la  maniere  de  vous  y  prendre.     3. 

II  fait  I'entendu,  et  il  ne  salt  ni  A  ni  B.  4.  EUe  m'a  prid 
de  m'asseoir,  mais  j'ai  pr6i4r4  rester  debout.  5.  Quand 
il  lui  faxidra  se  mettre  au  travail  k  six  heures,  elle  trouvera 
la  chose  un  peu  dure.  6.  A  quelle  heure  dites-vous  qu'il 
lui  faudra  commencer?  7.  Gardez,  je  vous  prie,  le  silence 
Bur  ce  detail ;  elle  ne  voudrait  plus  partir.  8.  lis  ne 
r^ussiront  jamais ;  voil^  deux  foia  que  je  les  remets  sur 
pied,  et  trois  fois  qu'ila  font  faillite.  9.  Veuillez  faire 
silence  dans  ce  coin,  vous  etes  toujours  k  bavarder.  10. 
Ceux  qui  disent  ce  qu'il  faut  taire,  taisent  ordinairement 
ce  qu'il  faut  dire.  11.  Vous  ne  savez  pas  vous  en  servir, 
vous  ne  vous  y  prenez  pas  bien,  ce  n'est  pas  comme  9a. 
12.  Est-ce  que  je  ne  vous  sers  pas  bien  1  est-ce  que  je  ne 
vous  rends  pas,  en  cette  occasion,  un  service  d'ami  ?  13. 
Taisez-vous,  et  songez  aux  choses  que  vous  dites.  14.  Si 
vous  gardez  le  silence  Ik-dessus,  je  vous  en  saurai  gr^  toute 
ma  vie.  15.  A  peine  avais-je  commence  k  le  gronder  qu'il 
a  d^camp^  sans  demander  son  reste.  16.  Vous  n'avez 
qu'k  lui  rappeler  les  services  que  vous  lui  avez  rendus ; 
e^est  le  prendre  par  son  endroit  sensible.  17.  Qui  n'en- 
tend  qu'une  cloche  n'entend  qu'un  son.  18.  II  est  bas  perc^ 
depuis  quelque  temps,  il  ne  sait  plus  k  quel  saint  se  vouer. 

•  Tlie  insult  offered  to,  /  insuile  faile  a. 

t  When  speaking  of  a  steamer,  to  $«t  $ail  <a  translated  hj  partir. 


17C  EXMKCiSES  ON  IDTOHS. 


142. 


1,  That  sofa  will  serve  as  a  bed.  2.  Don't  be  afrnH, 
the  will  not  dare  to  show  her  face.  3.  I  hope  you  will 
be  silent  respecting  his  mistake.  4 .  He  set  about  it  with 
good  will.  5.  You  set  up  for  a  learned  person,  and  you 
are  not  so.'  6.  They  set  up  again  the  statue  thrown  down 
by  the  lightning.  7.  We  shall  be  sheltered  here  from 
the  rain.  8.  It  was  dark  and  raining  fast  when  they 
were  shipwrecked.     9.  Be  sUent  while  she  is  speaking. 

10.  Ask  that  poor  old  man  to  sit  down  in  the  corridor. 

1 1 .  He  always  takes  the  wrong  side  of  the  question.  1 2 . 
Anything  serves  him  as  a  pretext  for  idleness.*  13. 
They  refused  to  do  him  (a)  service.  14.  Are  you  not 
afraid  of  being  sea-sick?  15.  'Not  at  all,  I  am  a  very 
good  saUor.  16.  They  set  up  for  bootmakers,  but  they 
were  only  cobblers.  1 7.  He  was  bankrupt,  but  his  friends 
set  him  up  again.  18.  They  sheltered  him  from  censure 
by  paying  his  debts.  19.  Two  days  after  sailing  from 
Greenock,  they  were  shipwrecked  on  the  coast  of  Ireland. 
20.  "We  were  silent,  not  knowing  what  to  say.  21.  You 
were  wrong  to  be  silent  respecting  such  a  crime.  22.  If 
you  believe  them,  you  wiU  take  the  wrong  side  of  the 
question.  23.  If  they  ask  you  to  sit  down,  don't  do  it. 
24.  I  shall  ask  them  to  sit  down  till  I  am  ready.  25. 
Are  you  really  siding  against  us?  26.  That  parasol 
serves  also  as  an  umbrella.  27.  If  he  does  not  set  about 
his  lesson  just  now,  it  will  soon  be  too  late.  28.  We 
will  be  silent  respecting  your  conduct,  if  you  promise  to 
behave  better  in  future.  29.  This  large  glass  will  serve 
as  a  cup.  30.  Set  it  up  again,  it  has  just  fallen.  31.  If 
you  were  in  my  shoes,  you  would  not  say  that.  32.  He 
thought  they  would  be  shipwrecked  in  that  old  ship. 

33.  If  your  task  is  not  yet  done,  set  about  it  at  onco. 

34.  You  don't  know  the  way  to  set  about  it.  35.  Dout 
set  up  for  a  learned  man,  my  dear  sir;  make  shoes  and 
boots,  you  will  succeed  better.  36.  He  never  takes  the 
right  side  when  it  is  possible  to  take  the  wrong. 


•  Pretext  '.or  i(Uenrja,/>r(toc(«#>Mr  «m  rim/airt. 


EXERCISES  OV  1010118.  171 

143. 
(Index,  XUI.) 
1.  Cette  horloge  retarde  d'une  demi-heure,  d^pechong- 
noxia  de  partir.     2.  Ah  9a!  qui  de  nous  va  porter  la  parole? 

3.  II  est  loin  encore  d'etre  d^cidd  h,  vous  faire  ses  excuses. 

4.  Mais  U  m'a  avou^  qu'il  avait  quelquefois  la  t^te  prfes  du 
bonnet :  c'est  toujours  cela.  5.  II  s'y  est  pris  on  ne  sait 
comment ;  ce  qu'il  y  a  de  certain,  c'est  qu'elle  ne  pent  se 
passer  de  hii.  6.  Si  eUe  veut  arriver  avant  qu'il  tombe  de 
la  neige,  elle  n'a  pas  de  temps  h,  perdre.  7.  H  est  temps, 
je  crois,  de  nous  mettre  k  table,  passons  dans  la  salle  k 
manger.  8.  Que  n'a-t-il  pass^  quelques  jours  avec  nous  ! 
9.  II  n'a  pas  d'ordre,  c'est  un  panier  percd ;  il  ddpense 
tout  ce  qu'il  gagne.  10.  J'ai  connu  une  vieille  dame  qui 
avait  passe  sa  jeunesse  aux  Indes-Orientales,  et  qui  croyait 
qu'elles  faisaient  partie  d'une  autre  planete.  11.  Figurez- 
vous  qu'elle  m'avait  promis  de  venir  faire  ma  robe 
aujourd'hui  et  qu'elle  m'a  fait  faux  bond.  12.  II  va  son 
chemin,  disant  tout  ce  qui  lui  vient  par  la  bouche  et  m^ 
disant  du  tiers  et  du  quart.  13.  Votre  frere  a  I'esprit  un 
pen  bouche,  j'ai  eu  tort  de  lui  parler  si  vertement.  14.  II 
fallait  an  contraire  lui  remonter  le  courage,  il  est  si  facile- 
ment  abattu.  15.  Vous  savez  que  j'avais  un  diffi^rend 
avec  votre  cousin ;  au  lieu  de  le  partager  par  la  moitid, 
nous  nous  sommes  querelas  hier  matin.  16.  J'avais  une 
dent  de  lait  contre  luL  17.  Tirez  le  rideau  lh.-dessus  ;  je 
n'aime  pas  k  entendre  parler  de  querelles  entre  mes  amis. 
18.  Ne  vous  inqui^tez  pas,  vous  arriverez  tant  bien  que 
mal ;  yous  avez  encore  de  la  marge. 

144. 

1.  "We  were  sittins;  dovm  to  table  when  he  came  in. 
2.  I  am  sleepy.  3.  Surely  that  clock  is  too  slow.  4.  It 
wns  not  too  slow  yesterday.  5.  They  fell  into  the  snare 
at  once.  6.  Who  had  laid  a  snare  for  them  ?  7.  Their 
brofncr.  hut  he  was  sorrA'  for  it  afterwards.  8.  See  how 
thin  that  poor  animal  is ;  he  is  nothing  but  skin  and 


172  EXEBCISES   ON   IDIOMS. 

bone.  9.  To  speak  plainly,  you  have  no  ri,s:ht  to  spend 
money.  10.  You  spend  your  time  somehow  or  other, 
but  quite  uselessly.*  11.  It  is  snowing  as  heavily  as 
(it  snowed)  on  Wednesday.  12.  If  you  are  sleepy,  go 
to  bed.  13.  He  will  be  very  sleepy  the  whole  day  to- 
morrowf  if  he  travels  all  night.  14.  If  she  falls  into 
that  snare;  and  spends  her  money  extravagantly,  her 
mother  will  be  sorry  for  it.  15.  Has  he  fallen  into  the 
snare  laid  for  him  ?  1 6.  The  clock  will  be  too  slow,  if 
you  touch  it.  17.  If  it  is  too  slow,  he  has  no  time  to 
spare.  1 8.  He  would  not  spend  so  much  money  if  he 
had  to  work  for  it.l  19.  He  spends  his  time  pleasantly 
at  the  coast.  20 .  They  will  not  sit  down  to  table  before 
six  o'clock.  21.  You  spend  more  money  than  you  have 
a  right  to  do.  22.  WiU  you  not  be  too  sleepy  to  write 
that  letter  before  going  to  bed  ?  23.  His  watch  is  never 
too  slow,  and  yet,  somehow  or  other,  he  is  always  late. 

24.  She  spends  her  time  looking  in  at  shop  windows. 

25.  In  fact,  to  speak  plainly,  she  is  very  idle.  26.  I 
fear  it  will  rain  to-morrow.  27.  It  is  so  cold  that  I 
think  it  wiU  rather  snow.  28.  I  should  be  very  sorry 
for  it,  as  I  mean  to  go  to  the  country.  29.  Sit  closer  to 
make  room  for  your  new  friend.  30.  He  would  not  have 
fallen  so  easily  into  the  snare,  if  he  had  not  been  so  vain. 
31.  If  you  spend  your  time  foolishly  in  youth,  you  will 
be  sorry  for  it  when  it  is  too  late.  32.  Somehow  or 
other  you  always  take  the  bad  side  of  a  question.  33. 
They  were  so  sleepy  that  they  could  not  pay  attention  to 
what  we  told  them.  34.  If  that  child  rises  so  early,  he 
will  be  very  sleepy  before  seven  o'clock.  35.  He  always 
speaks  for  the  rest.  36.  I  put  your  letter  in  the  post  in 
time  for  to-night's  mail,  so  you  may  sleep  soundly. 

145. 
(Index,  XLm.) 
1.  Vous  qui  Stes  connaisseur,  comment  trouvez-vous  ce 


•  Quite  uselessly,  cTwie  manihre  lout  a  fail  inutilt. 

t  The  whole  clay  to-irmnow,  toitte  lajournee  de  demam 

X  If  be  had  to  work  for  it,  $'tl  luifaUail  travailler  pour  le  gagrnr. 


KXKBCISES  ON  IDIOICS.  173 

tableau  ?    2.  n  y  a  nn  d^faut,  9a  sante  anz  yenx.    3.  Lea 

orages  qn'il  a  fait  cette  annde  ont  devast^  nos  plus  riches 
provinces.  4.  Ne  badinez  jamais  avec  I'honneur des autres. 
5.  Tenez-vous-en  \h,  au  moins,  et  ne  changez  pas  d'id^  k 
toute  heure  du  jour ;  vous  etea  une  vraie  girouette.  6. 
Faites-le  monter,  mais  suivez-le  pas  k  pas  et  ne  le  perdez 
pas  de  vue  un  instant.  7.  AUons  done  !  vous  vous  mo- 
quez  de  nous  ;  voulez-vous  nous  faire  accroire  qu'il  est 
sorti  le  vainqueiir,  seul  centre  six  ?  8.  Mon  cher  ami, 
voilk  quinze  jours  que  nous  ne  vous  avons  vu,  vous  de- 
venez  rare  comme  les  beaux  jours.  9.  H  s'est  ^veilM  en 
sursaut  et  criant  k  txie-tete  :  "  Au  secours  !  au  meurtre  ! 
on  m'a8sa.ssine ! "  10.  II  faut  en  finir  avec  toutes  ces  que- 
relles.  11.  N'est-ce  pas  vingt  kilomHres  qu'il  a  fait  ce 
matin  tout  d'une  haleine  ?  12.  II  ne  fait  que  badiner  ;  il 
n'est  pas  homme  k  vous  tenir  tete,  13.  Ne  vous  imaginez 
pas  que  je  sois  venu  ici  pour  enfiler  des  perles.  14.  Je  me 
soucie  de  votre  mauvaise  humeur  comme  de  I'an  quarante. 
15.  J'ai  sud  sang  et  eau  pour  vous  faire  avoir  votre  place, 
et  voilk  comme  vous  m'en  r(?compensez.  16.  Quand  vous 
vous  y  mettez,  vous  n'y  allez  pas  de  main  morte.  17.  Soyez 
tranquille  s'il  vous  menace  ou  a'il  ose  vous  rdsister,  je 
saurai  lui  faire  mettre  les  poucea.  18.  II  ne  faut  pas  aller 
par  quatre  cbemins,  dites-lui  franchement  votre  fa^on  de 
penser, 

146. 
1.  He  bantered  me  about  my  opinions.  2.  But  I 
Btoorl  out  against  him.  3.  I  am  afraid  you  forgot  to 
put  a  stamp  on  your  letter.  4.  Is  not  that  striking?  5. 
Although  I  was  bom  in  a  southern  climate,  I  cannot 
stand  heat.  6.  You  should  stand  to  what  you  said.  7. 
He  did  not  stick  to  what  he  had  said,  and  put  me  in  a 
scrape.  8.  I  walked  eleven  kilometres  this  morning  at 
a  stretch  9.  They  tell  old  women's  stories  all  evening. 
10.  "We  waited  a  long  time  for  you.  11.  With  still 
greater  reason  you  should  have  waited  for  them.  12. 
He  started  out  of  his  sleep  at  their  arrival.  13.  Do  you 
intend  to  make  a  long  stay  in  Si  otland  ?    14.  You  must 


174  EXEBCTSKS   OK    IDIOMS. 

not  make  sport  of  such  a  serious  subject.  15.  Two 
friends  of  old  standing  do  not  fall  out  for  such  a  tritie. 
16.  In  his  eyes,  a  laugh  stands  for  an  argument.  17. 
The  resemblance  between  you  and  your  sister  is  very 
striking.  18.  Make  her  come  up  stairs.  19.  They  stood 
out  against  all  his  persuasions  and  arguments.  20.  He 
stood  by  them  till  the  last  hour.  21.  Some  stools  stood 
for  chairs.  22.  They  always  stand  out  against  him. 
23.  If  you  stand  by  that  man,  you  will  be  punished  like 
himself.  24.  Would  you  make  a  stranger  of  him  who 
rendered  you  so  many  services  ?  25.  We  stick  to  our 
former  opinion.  26.  If  you  stick  to  that,  I  would  not 
wish  to  be  in  your  place.     27.  How  could  I  cope  with 

Mr.  M. ?  he  is  much  stronger  than  I.  28.  It  is  more 

than  a  month  since  we  have  seen  him  ;  he  is  becoming  a 
gi-eat  stranger.  29.  I  wish  he  would  hold  to  his  first 
engagements.  30  Respect  my  old  friend ;  after  me  he 
will  be  a  father  to  you.  31.  Ask  the  lady  up  stairs. 
32.  Is  not  your  reputation  at  stake  in  this  affair  ?  33. 
Stand  out  against  him,  and  you  will  see  that  he  will 
yield.  34.  Don't  be  so  greedy ;  he  gave  you  tliree  shil- 
lings :  that  is  something.  35.  The  authorities  came  im- 
mediately to  the  spot.  36.  I  seldom  go  to  see  him,  for 
be  is  always  telling  idle  stories. 

147. 

(Index,  XLIV.) 

1.  Si  je  ne  m'y  prends  pas  autrement,  je  n'en  vienrlrai 
jamais  k  bout.  2.  Ne  manquez  pas  de  m'dcrire  quand 
vous  serez  en  Amdrique.  3.  Tais-toi  done,  tii  ne  dis  que 
des  betises.  4.  Essaie  toujours ;  peut-etre  rdussiras-tu, 
6.  L'accident  est  arrivd  comme  elle  se  mettait  h  table.  6. 
J'abandonnerais  tout,  si  je  savais  ne  pas  reussir.  7.  Si 
je  vous  y  reprends,  I'ami,  je  vous  apprendrai  k  vivre.  8. 
Allons  done  un  peu  prendre  I'air  avant  de  nous  mettre  k 
table.  9.  Ne  manquez  pas  de  me  rappelor  k  son  bon 
gouveuir,  ditea-lui  que  je  ne  fais  que  penser  k  elle.  10  Je 
parie  qu'il  prendra  tout  cela  puur  de  I'argent  cumptaiit. 


EXEHCISES   ON  IDIOILb.  17.5 

11.  On  appelle  science  du  monde  le  grand  art  de  r^narir  et 
de  plaire.  12.  Ces  mani^res  d'agir  ne  ine  conviennent  paa 
le  moins  du  monde.  13.  Que  de  mauvais  sang  vous  m'avez 
fait  faire  quand  nous  dtions  k  la  campagne  !  quelle  mau- 
vaise  tete  vous  aviez  !  14.  II  a  jurd  ses  grands  dieux  que 
ce  qu'il  venait  de  dire  ^tait  la  pure  v^rit^.  15.  Monsieur, 
▼ous  le  prenez  bien  haut ;  k  qui  croyez-vous  avoir  affaire  t 
16.  Nous  aliens  faire  un  petit  voyage  au  bord  de  la  mer : 
cela  vous  va-t-il  ]  Stes-vous  des  ndtres  ?  17.  Cela  me  va, 
j'en  suis.  18.  II  y  a  dix  k  parier  qu'il  vous  dounera  cinq 
ou  six  ans  de  moins  que  vous  n'avcz. 


14& 

1.  Be  Bure  not  to  speak  to  hun.  2.  Do  not  take  it  ill 
if  I  scold  you  when  you  talk  nonsense.  3.  George  the 
Fourth  succeeded  his  father.  4.  If  it  be  gunny  we  will 
take  an  airing  in  the  Bois  de  Boulogne.  5.  She  has  just 
succeeded  in  gaining  a  certificate.  6.  Be  sure  not  to  teU 
him  that,  as  he  will  not  take  it  well.  7.  Why  do  you 
take  away  my  book  ?  don't  you  see  I  am  reading  it  ?  8. 
If  you  aie  required*  to  write  all  these  letters,  you  have 
a  heavy  task  before  you.  9.  She  said  she  would  be  sure 
to  come  to  see  me  in  London.  10.  Do  you  really  think 
80  ?  11.  He  will  succeed  his  uncle,  if  he  studies  not  to 
disobey  him.  12.  If  you  succeed  in  convincing  him,  let 
me  know.  13.  She  sometimes  talks  nonsense.  14.  The 
sun  was  so  sti'ong  yesterday  that  we  could  not  go  out. 
15.  He  is  sure  to  believe  you.  16.  I  will  be  sure  not  to 
say  one  word  about  it  to  her.  17.  Sit  down  to  table  im- 
mediately, and  don't  wait  for  him.  18.  To  be  sure,  we 
shall  see  you  with  mucli  pleasure.  19.  Helen  and  I  took 
cin  airing  in  the  park  hist  night.  20.  I  will  take  away 
that  batl  boy  if  he  does  not  behave.  21.  Doii't  look  so 
sulky,  I  shall  take  you  to  the  opera.  22.  Why  did  yon 
talk  'so  uiuch  nonsense  to  your  cousin  ?  23.  That  trial 
wiU  be  the  talk  of  the  whole  country.     24.  She  takes  an 

*  U  you  are  required,  <'«  voiu  font. 


176  EXERCISES   ON    IDIOMS. 

airing  every  mominp;  before  breakfast,  she  likes  getting 
up  early.  25.  Charles  will  succeed  if  he  works  hard, 
26.  It  was  so  very  hot  in  Brussels  that  we  were  not  able 
to  walk  much.      27.  Good-bye,  we  shall  talk  it  over. 

28.  He  took  all  the  prizes  that  were  given  in  his  class. 

29.  Tell  the  doctor  to  be  sure  to  come.  30.  Adelaide  is 
sure  not  to  tell  him.  31.  WiU  you  really  try  to  come  ? 
To  be  sure  I  will.  32.  At  Brighton  we  used  to  sit  dowii 
to  breakfast  at  a  very  early  hour.  33.  He  will  take  ha- 
with  him  to  Italy.  34.  You  should  not  drink  so  much, 
my  dear  fellow,  you  will  talk  nonsense.  35.  Don't 
trouble  yourself  about  that ;  I  shall  take  it  npon  myself. 
36.  Do  I  not  always  take  your  remarks  well  when  yon 
tell  me  my  faults  ? 

149. 

(Index,  XLV.) 

1.  Pour  le  coup  o'est  trop  fort,  main  tenant  on  ne  peut 
plus  dire  sa  fa9on  de  penser.  2.  Un  de  ces  jours  vous  vona 
en  mordrez  les  doigta.  3.  A  la  longue  on  se  fait  k  tout. 
4.  Est-ce  que  vous  Stes  toujours  mal  avec  elle  ?  5.  Oui  ? 
Allons  done  !  est-ce  que  deux  soeurs  ne  devraient  pas  tou- 
jours ^tre  bien  ensemble  ?  6.  S'il  tonnait  k  gauche,  les 
anciens  croyaient  que  c'dtait  un  heureux  jn-^sage.  7.  Ne 
frottez  plus  cette  tache,  9a  s'en  ira  k  la  longue.  8.  I>u 
train  dont  9a  va,  ma  bourse  sera  bientot  plus  l^g^re.  9. 
Ecrivez  k  votre  ami,  et  priez-le  de  vouloir  bien  aller  au 
rendez-vous  k  I'heure  convenue.  10.  II  arrangera  l'aifaii*e 
pour  vous  ;  o'est  ce  que  vous  avez  de  mieux  h  faire.  11. 
Avant  toutes  choses,  recommandez-lui  bien  de  no  pas  trop 
faire  aller  sa  langue  ;  qu'il  s'attache  k  bien  observer  son 
advei'saire,  k  le  voir  venir.  12.  II  n'y  a  rien  de  plus  in- 
supportable que  ce  monsieur,  11  se  jette  a  la  tete  de  tout 
le  monde.  13.  Je  vous  prierai,  Monsieur,  de  vouloir  bien 
me  passer  le  sel  et  le  poivre.  14.  Veuillez  done  passed' 
chez  elle  ce  soir,  ne  fAt-ce  qu'un  moment.  15.  Ce  n'eft 
pas  gr4ce  k  elle  que  vous  avez  re9u  cetie  lettre ;  elle  a  fait 


EXEBCISES  OS  IDIOMS.  177 

toot  son  possible  pour  empecher  qu'on  ne  votis  derive.  16. 
Votre  plus  court  parti  est  d'aller  vous-nieme  k  Paris  ;  par- 
tea  ce  soir.  17.  Puisqu'il  s'entdte,  je  ne  lui  laisserai  pas 
oet  ouvrage,  duss^-je  y  perdre  cent  francs  !  18.  De  fil  en 
aiguille,  il  en  est  Tenu  k  parler  de  I'dpreuve  que  yous 
venez  de  subir. 

100. 

1 .  He  treats  me  always  with  great  kindness.  2. 1  shall 
show  you  his  likeness  some  time  or  other.  3.  She  lives  on 
very  bad  terms  with  her  friends.  4.  As  to  that  I  can  say 
nothing.  5.  Tell  him  to  be  sure  to  come  in  good  time. 
6.  If  you  think  proper  to  go,  do  so.  7.  That  is  just  the 
thing  for  him.  8.  I  should  think  so.  9.  He  is  always 
thirsty.  10.  Till  then,  not  a  word.  11.  I  assure  yon  it 
is  no  such  thing.  12.  It  is  not  always  convenient*  to 
speak  one's  thoughts.  13.  We  lived  upon  good  terms 
with  each  other  as  long  as  we  lived  in  London.  14.  She 
would  not  think  it  proper  to  go  by  herself.  15.  He  will 
succeed  with  time.  1 6.  Distrust  those  who  have  a  smooth 
tongue.  17.  That  will  just  be  the  thing  for  her.  18. 
He  declared  that  it  was  no  such  thing.  19.  If  you  eat 
that  you  will  be  thirsty.  20.  Speak  out  your  thoughts 
without  any  reserve,  sir.  21.  Till  then,  adieu.  22.  She 
is  always  late ;  she  never  comes  in  time.  23.  Some  time 
orotherl  shall  answer  his  letter.  24.  They  used  to  treat 
her  with  kindness.  25.  He  came  in  good  time  for  dinner. 
26.  If  I  refused  to  do  that,  we  should  be  upon  bad  terms 
with  each  otherf  for  a  whole  week.  27.  Don't  accept  any 
favour  from  that  man,  he  will  always  cast  it  in  yonr  teeth. 
28.  Do  you  think  it  proper  to  go  out  alone  so  late  at 
night  ?  I  29.  They  said  that  was  just  the  thing  for  them. 
30.  We  were  so  thirsty  that  we  were  always  drinking 
beer.  31.  If  you  give  hini  notice  §  in  time,  he  would 
come  to  the  wedding.     32.  He  will  treat  her  with  kind- 


•  Convenient,  tpportim. 

t  With  each  other,  ememble. 

i  So  late  at  night,  a  une  heure  ti  emaneet- 

5  To  give  notice,  prevenir:  the  weddii.g.  In  noet 


178  EXEKCnCSES  ON  IDIOMS. 

ness.  33.  You  willrepent  some  time  orother.  34. 1  should 
speak  out  my  thoughts  were  I  in  your  place.  35.  That 
would  be  just  the  thing  for  you.    36.  I  should  think  so. 

161. 

(Index,  XLVl.) 

1.  Vous  n'^tes  pas,  je  I'espfere,  sans  les  moyens  de  r6- 
pondre  k  cette  attaque  que  vous  avez  si  longtemps  pro- 
voqu^e.  2.  Maintenant,  Mademoiselle,  c'est  k  vous  k 
parler.  3.  Ne  rougissez  pas,  vous  y  serez  bientot  faite. 
4.  Pardon,  Monsieur,  je  crois  que  je  ne  m'y  ferai  jamais. 
6.  J'ai  beau  faire  tout  mon  possible  ;  les  expressions 
m'echappent,  mes  idees  s'embrouiUent,  et  je  reste  k  court. 
6.  Vous  en  avez  agi  fort  mal  avec  moi,  avouez-le.  7. 
Voua  vous  entendiez  h  me  faire  enrager.  8.  Que  va-t-elle 
devenir,  maintenant  que  la  voilk  toute  seule  au  mUieu  de 
ces  Strangers  ?  9.  En  toute  chose  fais  ce  que  tu  dois,  et, 
quelle  que  soit  I'opinion  du  vulgaire,  ne  t'en  inquifete  pas. 
10.  Usez,  n'abusez  pas,  dit  le  proverbe.  11.  Je  deman- 
derai  k  votre  irhre  si  tout  ce  que  vous  me  dites  Ui  est  vrai, 
car  vous  etes  sujet  k  caution.  12.  S'il  ne  marche  pas  droit, 
je  lui  ferai  voir  du  pays.  13.  On  attribue  au  chevaleresque 
Francois  I"  ces  deux  vers:  "Souvent  femme  varie,  bien 
fol*  est  qui  s'y  fie  ! "  14.  II  est  inconvenant  de  rir«  ainsi 
au  nez  des  gens.  15.  Je  vous  rembourserai  bien  entendu 
lea  sommes  que  vous  allez  verser  pour  moi.  16.  Tout  a 
4t6  fini  en  moins  de  rien.  17.  A  dire  vrai,  je  n'aurais  pas 
pu  faire  votre  affaire  aussi  bien  que  votre  ami  de  Londres. 
18.  II  crie  mis^re  k  tout  bout  de  champ. 


168. 

1 .  Do  not  trouble  yourself  about  Lim.    2.  Would  you 
be  at  the  trouble  to  write  that  to  him  ?    3.  If  you  don't, 

*  Fol  is  the  old  masculine  for  fou;  It  is  still  used  beft)re  a  vowel :  guel/o. 
enfant  I 


KX£BClS£i)  ON  IDIOMS.  t'i^ 

you  will  bring  yourself  into  trouble.  4.  She  wishes  to 
become  a  governess.  5.  She  herself  turned  her  husband 
out  of  doors.  6.  When  I  told  him  the  news  he  turned 
pale.  7.  I  used  to  be  very  uneasy  about  him  when  he 
was  away.  8.  She  was  quite  unprovided  with  the  mate- 
rials necessary  for''  her  work.  9.  They  understand  how 
to  manage  him.  10.  I  always  use  quiU.  pens.  11.  Will 
you  undertake  to  let  him  know  what  has  happened? 
12.  He  uses  me  kindly  when  I  go  to  visit  him.  13,  She 
used  to  be  always  in  trouble  about  something.  14.  K I 
promise  to  use  you  well,  will  you  come  ?  15.  Don't  give 
yourself  the  trouble  to  shut  the  door ;  ring.  1 6.  That  boy 
is  always  in  trouble.  17.  By  that  manoeuvre  he  brought 
himself  into  trouble.  18.  Tired  with  the  world,  Charles 
V  turned  monk.  19.  I  will  turn  him  out  of  doors,  if 
he  refuses  to  obey  my  ordei-s.  20.  She  turns  pale  at  the 
sight  of  blood.  21.  We  shall  be  very  uneasy  about  that 
affair  till  it  is  settled. f  22.  I  am  unprovided  with  the 
money  necessary  for  my  journey.  23  TJse  this  pen ;  it 
is  better  than  that  one.  24.  Do  you  understand  how  to 
do  that?  25.  Why  are  you  so  uneasy  about  him?  26. 
K I  can  get  nothing  else  to  do,  I  will  turn  soldier.  27. 
Would  you  turn  your  only  child  out  of  doors  ?  28  Were 
I  you,  J  I  would  not  trouble  myself  about  it.  29.  It  was 
a  sight  to  make  the  bravest  turn  pale.  30.  If  you  for- 
get, I  shall  be  unprovided  with  the  instructions  that  are 
requisite.  31.  My  brother  used  me  as  his  tool  in  that 
affair.  32.  I  shall  never  understand  how  to  do  it.  33. 
He  will  use  you  ill  if  he  gets  you  into  his  power.  34. 
My  friends  forget  me  when  I  am  in  trouble.  35.  To  re- 
fuse would  be§  to  bring  one's  self  into  trouble.  36.  Will 
you  be  at  the  trouble  to  ring  the  bell  for  me  ? 

168. 

(Index,  XliVn.) 
1.  Vous  avez  bean  faire,  vous  n'en  viendrez  pas  ik  boat, 

•  Necessary  for.  neeeuaire  4. 

t  Tillit  is  settled,  taiK^uV/teaeMrapoff^^Tte. 


Were  I  von,  a  votre  place. 
See  Role  48  (6). 


180  EXEKCISES  ON  IDIOMS. 

2.  Je  vais  aller  faire  un  tour  ;  si  vons  voulez  venir  avec 
moi,  nous  irons  voir  votre  oncle.  3.  Est-ce  que  vous  avez 
vraiment  envie  d'aller  jusque  Ik?  4.  Est-ce  L^,  le  cas  que 
vous  faites  de  mes  presents  ?  5.  C'est  un  gar^on  qui  se 
fait  trop  valoir.  6.  lis  sont  partis  tons  les  quatre  en  mSme 
temps  et  out  couru  k  qui  mieux  mieux.  7.  Je  parie  que 
ce  n'est  pas  Edouard  qui  est  arrive  le  premier.  8.  Je  crois 
que,  s'il  me  fallait  y  aller  h.  pied,  je  n'en  aurais  pas  la  force. 
9.  IJ  avait  beau  se  demander  pourquoi  elle  s'en  dtait  all^e, 
il  ne  pouvait  en  deviner  la  raison.  10.  L'honnetet^  de- 
fend que  nous  pariioas  k  coup  sflr.  11.  II  ne  peut  pas 
venir  faire  un  tour  avec  nous,  il  a  du  monde  cliez  lui.  12. 
J'ai  beau  frotter,  9a  ne  veut  pas  s'en  aller.  13.  Des  gros 
mots  ils  en  sont  bientot  venus  aux  voies  de  fait.  14.  Que 
de  mauvais  sang  vous  vous  faites  !  vous  vous  ingdniez  k 
vous  rendre  malheureuse.  15  Quand  vous  verrez  la  chose 
de  plus  pves,  vous  serez  de  mon  avis.  16.  Je  sais  parfaite- 
ment  qu'il  ne  regarde  pas  k  I'argent  et  qu'il  d^pense  tout 
ce  qu'on  lui  donne.  17.  Est-ce  que,  par  hasard,  vous 
voulez  jouer  au  plus  fin  avec  moi,  mon  petit  ami  ?  18.  Je 
crois  que  vous  feriez  bien  de  reculer  pour  mieux  sauter. 

154. 

1.  Will  you  take  a  walk  with  me  to-night?  2.  Yes,  1 
am  used  to  walking  every  evening.  3.  Do  you  vouch  for 
the  ti'uth  of  what  you  say  now  ?  4.  It  will  be  of  no  use 
for  you  to  deny  it.^  5.  It  is  in  vain  for  me  to  ask  her ; 
she  wiU  not  go.  6.1  set  great  value  on  that  ring ;  it  was  a 
gift  from  my  mother.  7.  They  walked  from  Edinburgh 
to  Glasgow  in  two  days.  8.  I  will  venture  to  say  they 
did  nothing  of  the  kind.  9.  I  will  lay  a  wager  they  did. 
10.  Let  us  wait  upon  your  master  as  soon  as  ho  comes  to 
town.*  1 1 .  The  V  were  very  badly  waited  on  at  that  hotel. 
12.  Go  to  his  office  and  wait  for  an  answer.     13.  That 


1  Do  not  use  avoir  beau  in  this  sentence,  as  a  clause  containlnK  aroir  beaa 
most  always  be  followed  by  another,  explaining  or  complctiiig  the  first 
*  To  come  to  town.  «e»ir  en  nille. 


BXEBC1SB8  ON  IDIOMS.  181 

is  jnst,  vrhnt  he  used  to  do  when  he  was  with  me.  14. 
It  is  of  no  use  to  try  to  dissuade  him,*  he  is  so  olistinnto. 
1  ;>.  It  is  vain  for  you  to  talk,  I  will  not  do  it.  1 6.  Was 
tliat  the  fine  picture  you  value  so  much  ?  17.1  ventured 
to  say  he  was  quite  wrong.  iS.  He  laid  a  wager  that 
the  ministry  would  be  defeated  on  that  question.  ^19. 
We  waited  for  him  two  days.  20. 1  am  always  best  waited 
on  in  my  own  house.  21  .We  shall  wait  upon  her  ns  soon 
as  we  arrive.  22.  Will  you  not  walk  with  me  half-way  ? 
23.  They  walked  every  day  in  the  wood.  24  Takes 
walk  with  me ;  you  will  enjoy  it,  fhe  weather  is  so  fine. 
25  Don't  vex  me  so  much.  26.  He  kept  me  wailing 
three  hours  27.  I  always  walk  to  church,  I  never*dri\e. 
28.  I  can  assure  you  he  values  your  services  highly  29. 
That  girl  waits  on  me  better  than  any  servant  I  ever  had. 
30.  Wait  for  the  carriage,  and  we  shall  aU  take  a  drive, 
81 .  Never  lay  a  wixger  with  that  man,  he  will  cheat  you. 
82  I  (will)  venture  to  say  she  will  not  refuse  me  twice. 
33.  He  set  too  great  a  value  on  the  services  that  he  had 
rendered  us.  34  It  would  be  in  vain  for  me  to  attempt 
to  gain  a  prize,  I  am  too  stupid.  35.  Would  it  be  of  no 
use  for  you  to  try  ?  36.  That  is  exactly  \\  liut  they  u«ed 
to  do  with  us. 

165. 

(Index,  XI. Vm.) 

1.  II  manque  trois  feuillets  k  mon  livre;  comment  vals- 
je  me  tirer  d'afFaire  ?  2.  Si  vous  ne  prenez  pas  de  para- 
pluie,  vous  aerez  tremp^  jusqu'aux  os  3.  Dans  ce  pays-ci 
il  plant  presque  toujours.  4.  Cette  ombrelle  ne  voua 
servira  de  rien ;  dans  cinq  minutes  elle  sera  en  moroeaux. 
6.  Comhien  de  kilomfetre.'»  vous  reste-t-il  k  faire  ?  6.  11 
ne  manque  k  ce  paysage  qn'nne  colline  et  un  ruissean.  7. 
M.  votre  oncle  vient  de  sortir,  que  lui  voulez-vous  ?  8. 
Moi  1  Je  veux  le  voir  et  lui  parler,     9.  Je  viens  de  faire 


*  n  tie  tert  de  rien  de  rouJnir  le  ditsvader;  If  we  were  to  translate  to  tty  by 
tSchtr  or  t>tayer,  \i  would  >uund  very  ill:  Il  ne  serf  h*  rien  p%  ticker  DC  u 


182  EXUKCISES   09    IDIOMS. 

huit  milles  h  pied  expres  pour  cela.  10.  La  aeule  pens^e 
que  je  pouvais  d'un  mot  d^tourner  ce  malheur,  me  met 
le  ddsespoir  dans  I'ame.  11.  A  premifere  vue  il  n'a  pa? 
I'air  de  maiiquer  d 'intelligence,  mais  vous  verrez  qu'il 
est  facile  k  ddsorienter.  12.  Le  pauvre  gar§on  est  malade 
depuis  pi-fes  de  trois  ans ;  il  ne  tient  plus  ;  il  n'a  qu'un 
souflBe  de  vie.  13.  Chaque  matin  je  faisais  cinq  ou  six 
kilomfetres  k  pied  pour  me  donner  de  I'appdtit.  14.  Venez 
done  prendre  un  air  de  feu,  il  ne  fait  pas  chaud  dehors. 
16.  Vous  avez  pris  le.bon  chemin  ;  c'est  par  ici  qu'il  faut 
passer.  16.  II  n'y  a  pas  de  milieu,  il  faudra  que  vous  en 
passiee  par  ou  je  veux.  17.  Nous  en  sommes  revenus  il  y  a 
aujourd'hui  huit  jours,  et  nous  y  retouruerons  aujourd'hui 
eu  huit.     18.  En  somme,  ce  voyage  m'a  passablement  plu. 


156. 

1.  Emily  was  wet  to  the  skin  the  night  before  last 

2.  The  weather  was  very  bad,  it  was  pouring  with  rain. 

3,  That  young  man  is  deficient  in  politeness ;  he  is  a 
perfect  boor.  4.  I  wonder  what  he  could  possibly  want 
with  me.  5.  Yon  complain  incessantly  of  the  heat;  you 
are  always  warm,  even  in  the  coldest  weather.*  6.  Yes; 
but  it  really  is  such  warm  weather  at  present,  I  cannot 
stand  it.  7.  Please  speak  to  her  yourself,  I  know  your 
opinion  goes  a  great  way  with  her.  8.  You  will  have  no 
peace  with  him  unless^^i  you  give  him  what  he  wants. 
9.  Were  your  friends  all  well  when  you  left  Paris  ?  10. 
Do  go  and  see  what  that  villanous-looking  man  wants 
with  my  carpet  bag;  I  am  sure  he  will  steal  it.  11.  I 
would  walk  the  whole  three  hundred  miles,  if  I  thouglit 
I  could  get  employment  when  I  arrived  in  London.  12. 
Do  not  try  to  shake  his  opinion,  he  is  wedded  to  it.  13. 
I  will  explain  their  position  to  you ;  this  large  stone  is 
the  fort,  as  it  were,  and  these  are  the  enemy's  troops. 
14.  If  that  obstinate  girlf  persists  in  going  out,  she  will 


•  In  the  coldest  weather,  qmndil/ait  le  plus /raid. 
f  Obstinate  girl,  peliU  obstinee. 


EX£KCI.SES  ON  IDIOMS.  183 

get  wet  to  the  Bkin.  15.  She  will  never  be  well  aa 
long  as  she  is  so  careless  of  herself.  16.  He  was  so 
warm  that  he  went  without  a  cravat,  and  wore  a  straw 
hat.  1 7.  Well,  I  don't  wonder;*  we  did  just  the  same 
thing  when  we  were  at  Cadiz,  the  weather  was  so  warm 
there.  18.  It  is  well  for  you  that  your  father  is  wealthy. 
19.  She  had  all  her  own  way,  and  yet  she  was  nevei 
pleased.  20.  When  I  said  to  him  that  I  was  very  much 
in  wantj  of  a  new  bonnet,  he  gave  me  money  to  get  one. 
21.  George  asked  me  what  I  wanted  with  such  a  large 
sum  of  money.  22.  I  replied,  as  I  am  in  want  of  every- 
thing, dresses,  bonnet^s,  gloves,  and  ribbons,  it  is  not  too 
much.  23.  Can  you  imagine  what  she  wants  with  me ; 
I  am  very  curious  about  her  visit.  J  24.  She  cannot  walk 
even  one  mile  without  being  tired.  25.  Were  I  to  put 
on  my  greatcoat,  I  should  be  too  warm.  26.  Foreigners 
abuse  the  climate  of  Scotland ;  they  say  it  is  never  warm 
there.  27.  I  need  not  tell  you  that  you  are  welcome  to 
all  my  books.  28.  Shall  I  not  be  in  your  way  if  I  come 
to-night  when  Henry  is  there?  29.  No ;  we  shall  want 
you  to  play  at  whist.  30.  She  is  always  well  in  cold 
weather;  it  is  the  heat  that  knocks  her  up.  31.  He  re- 
fused to  accompany  me^  not  to  run  the  risk  of  being  wet 
to  the  skin.  32.  Imagine  yourself  obliged  to  remain 
motionless  in  this  cold  weather.  33.  What  I  particularly 
require,  is  money.  34.  He  wrote  to  ask  what  I  wanted 
with  him  on  Thursday.  35.  I  replied  that  what  I 
wanted  with  him  was,  to  give  me  some  important  infor- 
mation.    36.  I  shall  do  it  as  well  as  I  can. 


167. 

(Index,  XTiTX.) 

1.  Un  honnete  homme  n'a  que  sa  parole.  2.  Le  jen 
n'en  vaut  paa  la  chandelle.  3.  Dieu  salt  s'il  m'en  veut  I 
4.  Je  voudrais  bien  savoir  de  combien  il  est  riche,  ob 


*  I  don't  wonder,  r«to  ne  m'^lofuu  peu. 

t  To  be  very  much  In  want,  avoir  him  bttoin  or  grand  I 

1 1  am  Ter/  cnrions  ahonf  her  visit,  la  visitt  m'intrtgut  bean 


184  EXERCISES   ON    IDIOMS. 

faqiiin-lk, !  6.  Voua  avez  eu  bien  tort  de  ne  pas  venir ; 
vous  m'avez  manqud  de  parole.  6.  Quand  le  ciel  est  rouge 
au  couchant,  le  paysan  assure  qu'il  fera  du  vent.  7.  Voua 
d^cidez  sans  oxamen  qu'il  a  eu  tort  de  tenter  cette  entre- 
prise  ;  et  je  croia,  moi,  qu'il  en  retirera  honneur  et  profit. 

8.  Qiielque  obstin^e  que  vous  soyez,  Maderaoi.'?elle,  il  fau- 
dra,  bon  grd  mal  grd,  que  vous  vous  rendiez  h  I'^vidunce. 

9.  Vous  n'avez  pas  6t6  Ik  1  Si.  10.  Vous  dites  que  non, 
je  dis  que  sL  11.  Tu  te  fadies,  I'ami,  done  tu  as  tort. 
12.  Maintenant  que  vous  avez  tout  ce  que  vous  rdclamiez, 
en  etes-vous  plus  avance'e  1  13.  Honnete  ou  non,  il  est 
certain  qu'il  a  de  I'esprit  jusqu'au  bout  des  doigts.  14. 
Ah  9a  mais  !  est-ce  que  vous  croyez  que  je  vais  travailler 
pour  le  roi  de  Prusse  1  15.  Allons,  du  courage  !  il  ne 
faut  pas  Jeter  ainsi  le  manche  aprfes  la  cognde.  16.  Ne  lui 
parlez  pas  de  son  frfere ;  ils  ont  eu  des  mots  ensemble  ;  ils 
ne  se  voient  plus.  17.  Je  crois  que  ce  petit  bonhomme 
n'a  plus  la  tete  k  lui ;  je  n'ai  pu  lui  arracher  une  parole  do 
la  journde.  18.  II  parle  frauQais  k  faire  pitie  ;  ildevrait 
etre  ddfendu  par  la  loi  d'estropier  ainsi  une  langu©  vivance, 

158. 

1 .  Tou  must  not  bear  me  ill  will  on  that  account,  I  am 
vei7  sorry  for  it  now.  2 .  Willing  or  unwilling,  I  suppose 
I  must  go  3.  There  is  nothing  I  should  be  more  will- 
ing to  do  than  that.  4.  Yon  can  ha  /e  no  idea  how  windy- 
it  was  when  we  wentnp  Arthur's  Seat.  5.  Jane  wishes 
very  much  to  see  Home.  6. 1  wonder  if  she  will  ever  have 
that  desire  fulfilled.  7.  Take  care,  he  is  not  a  man  to 
mince  his  words.  8.  Yes,  but  then,  you  see,*  I  know 
that  he  always  breaks  his  word;  one  cannot  rely  upon 
him.  9.  And  the  annoying  part  of  the  matter  is,  he 
grows  worse  and  worse.  1 0 ,  He  assured  us  that  we  would 
not  bo  the  worse  for  it,  if  we  complied  with  his  reiiuest. 
11.  That  maiiiuis  is  said  to  be  worth  three  hundred  and 

•  Tou  set  is  often  used  In  English  conversation  without  any  meaning,  u  » 
mere  expletive.    It  must  be  avoided  In  French. 


ETERCISES  ON  IDIOUS.  186 

sixty  five  thousand  pounds  per  annum,*  and  yet  he  gets 
out  cl  ids  carriage  on  the  other  sile  of  the  bridge  in  order 
to  save  the  toll.  12.  He  is  wrong  to  be  so  miserly ;  he 
cannot  carry  his  riches  away  with  him,  13.  He  said  I 
could  not  wrong  liim  by  these  remarks,  his  character  be- 
ing above  suspicion.  14.  You  are  certainly  wrong  to 
lay  yourself  open  to  such  a  charge.  15.  if  I  should 
ever  be  worth  one  thousand  pounds  per  annum,  I  shall 
travel  all  over  the  world.  16.  She  will  certainly  be  none 
the  woi"sc  for  it.  17.  Our  butler  grew  worse  and  worse 
every  day;  he  was  never  sober. f  18.  If  you  break  your 
word  to  me  once,  I  shall  never  trust  you  again ;  I  am  not 
a  man  to  allow  myself  to  be  twice  deceived.  J  19.  You 
will  find,  sir,  that  I  am  as  good  as  my  word.  20  I 
wonder  why  that  pretty  girl  married  that  tiresome  old 
man  ?  21.  Because  he  was  rich ;  she,  poor  and  ambitious, 
wished  very  much  to  be  a  leader  of  fashion;  §  such  is  the 
world.  22.  Your  brother  writes  a  very  bad  hand;  he  is 
wrong  not  to  take  lessons.  23  Willing  or  unwilling, 
she  was  compelled  to  listen  to  his  sallies  of  wit.  24. 
He  was  quite  ■willing  to  do  anything  we  wished.  25. 
Mary  declares  she  will  not  go  out  in  the  boat  to-night,  it 
is  too  windy.  26.  To  wrong  the  defenceless  is  the  basest 
of  crimes.  27.  You  would  be  very  wrong  indeed  not  to 
go.  28.  Would  you  not  bear  me  ill  will  were  I  to  play 
you  such  a  trick  ?  29.  You  shall  do  it  willing  or  un- 
willing; I  insist  upon  it.  30.  The  colonel  said,  a 
gentleman  never  broke  his  word.  31.  Do  you  not 
wonder  to  see  so  many  stupid  people  make  their  way  in 
the  world?  32.  When  he  died,  it  was  discovered  that 
he  was  not  worth  a  shilling. 


•  Per  annnm,  de  rtiiU. 

t  Sober,  hjttai. 

tJene  iua  pea  homme  a  me  laisttr  tromptr  di-vj  Ml. 

\  A  leader  of  fasbion,  une  da  rtina  <U  la  nioUe. 


[jj:^  All  xhb  bifpioolt  Itooms  ake  KXPLAnno)  m  thb 

**  EJBT,"    AND    AaKANe£D    10    COUJtKSfOJfJ)    WiXH 


INDEX 


iDIOMATICAL    VERBS. 


not  to  know  A  from  B, 

not  tu  abate  an  inch, 

to  abhor, 

to  be  abhorred  by, 

to  be  able, 

to  be  above  (th.),  to  scorn, 

to  be  above  (doing,  eta.), 

to  care  about,  to  trouble  one's 

self  about, 
to  be  about,  to  be  engaged  in,    Hre  occup4  A. 
to  set  about  (th. ),  se  mettre  d. 

to  take  a  roundabout  way,         /aire  un  grand  cUtour  ;  aUer 

Men  loin. 
to  be  abroad,  Stre  d  VUranger. 

to  tell  (th.)  abruptly,  without  ( dire  (th.)  de  but  en  Wane. 

circumlocution, 


(n«  aavoir  ni  A  ni  B. 
( ne  pas  en  d4mordre. 
avoir  horreur  de. 
Stre  en  horreur  d. 
pouvoir ;  etre  en  6tat  de. 
didaigner. 
Stre  tropfier  pour, 
se  soucier  de;  ae  mettre  en 
peine  de. 


to  abuse  (p. ),  to  rail  at, 


to  abuse  (th.), 

to  launch  out  into  abase, 

to  accomplish  (th.)  with  ease, 

to  account  for  (a  fact), 

to  account  for  (to  give  an  ac-  rendre  compte  de. 

count), 
to  call  (p.)  to  account  for, 


injurier ;  dire  des  injures  &\ 
{dire  des  sottisea  d  ;  (chanter 
pouilles  d. 

abuser  de. 

se  ripandre  en  invective*. 

avoir  ban  march4  de. 

expliquer. 


faire    rendre    (or    demander) 
compte  d  (p. )  de  (th. ) 
to  give   an  account  of  one's    rendre  compte  de  sa  conduite, 

conduct, 
to  give  an  account  of  one's  self,  se  faire  connaitre ;  dire  qui  {Fon) 

to  tell  who  one  is,  est  ;  d^diner  ses  qualit4s. 

to  take  into  account,  tenir  compte  de;  faire  la  part  de. 

to  balance,  to  settle,  an  account,  arriter  un  compte;   r6gler  un 

compte. 
to  turn  to  account,  mettre  d  profit. 

to  accastom  one's  self  to^  se  faire  a ;  s'accoutumer  d. 


188 


miOMATICiUt    VEEB8. 


n. 


to  aclie, 

to  acknowledge  a  better, 

to  acquaint  (p. )  with, 

to  get  acquainted, 

to  beacquahitedwiththehouse, 

to  improve  upon  acquaintance, 

to  be  auion>;  acquaintances, 

to  act  cautiously, 

to  act  foolishly, 

to  act  like  a  man, 

to  act,  to  personate, 

to  act  as  a  master, 

to  act  contrary  to  reason, 

to  be  taken  in  the  very  act, 

to  be  in  the  very  act  of, 
to  add  fuel  to  the  fire. 


avoir  mal  d.^ 

cccuser  d  (p.)  riception  dp.  sa 

lettre. 
/aire  part  de  (th.),  /aire  satoir 

(th.)  a  (p.) 
/aire  connamance. 
{savoir  lesetres  du  log'is. 
gagner  d  ^tre  connu. 
etre  en  pays  de  coimaissancea. 
menager  le  terrain, 
/aire  une/olie,  une  sottiae. 
/aire  voir  qu\o7i)  a  du  caevr. 
jouer  le  rdle  de  ;  /aire, 
agir  d'autorit4. 
agir  en  depit  du  hon  sens. 
€tre  pris  sur  le/ait,  en  flagrant 

dclit.^ 
etre  en  train  de. 
mettre  le/eu  aux  itoupes ;  jeter 

de  Vlmlle  sur  le/eu. 
adres^er  la  paroled  (p.) 
prendre  les  dtvanta. 
profiler  de. 
exploiter  (p. ) 
donner  prise  sur  soi. 


to  address  (p.),  to  accost, 

to  get  in  the  advance, 

to  take  advantage  of  (th.), 

to  take  advantage  of  (p.), 

to  give  one's  enemies  an  ad  van 

tage, 
to  show  (th. )  off  to  the  best  ad-  mettre  (th.)  dans  son  beau  jour, 

vantage, 
to  affect  the  manners  of, 
to  be  able  to  afford  to, 
to  be  afraid  of, 


trancher  de. 

avoir  les  moyens  de. 

avoir  peur  de ;  craindre. 


to  take  after, 

to  be  of  an  age  to, 

to  be  of  age, 

not  to  be  of  age, 

to  agree  to  it, 

to  agree  in,  or  on, 

to  have  agreed  on  (th.), 


III. 

tenir  (th.)  de. 

etre  en  dge  de,  d'dge  dk 

Stre  majeur. 

itre  mineur. 

en  convenir. 

Stre  dCaccord  sur. 

itre  convenu  de  (tli.) 


1  See  Rule  27  (3rd). 

•  This  expressloa  cannot  be  followed  by  a  subordinate,  clanse  dependtni; 
on  It  If  you  have  to  translate  such  a  sentence  as  this:  lie  u;m  taken  in  tht 
vet-y  aet  of  ietlingfirtto  the  King's  palace,  turn  it  into:  Hewds  setting  fireto  dit 
Kin'/s palace,  when  he  mas  taken  in  the  very  act,  or:  Ue  set  Jire  to  tht  Kiug'i 
palace,  they  took  him  in  the  very  act. 


TSIOHATICAX    yEKIiS. 


189 


to  agree  to  whatever  (one)  pro- 
poses, 

to  agree  with  (i»  regard  to  one^a 
health), 

to  ail, 

to  aim  a  gnn  at  (p.), 

to  aim  at  (th.)* 

to  lie,  to  sleep,  in  the  open  air, 

to  enjoy  the  cool  air, 

to  let  the  air  into  a  room, 

t<)  be  alive  to, 

to  allow  for,  to  make  allow- 
ances for, 

to  allow  so  much  a  year, 

to  allow  that,  to  admit,  that, 

to  allude  to  (p.  or  tb.), 

to  allude  to  (p.),  to  make  an 
iii:>iiiuatiun  a<jainst  (p.), 

to  let  it  alone, 


en  passer  par  oh  {Von)  veuL 

Jaire  du  bienA» 

avoir. 

eoticJier  (p.)  enjoue. 

riser  d,  aspirer  d. 

coudier  e»  plein  air,  au  grand 

aii     L  la  belle  6loile. 
preiuire  le/rais. 
donner  de  Uair  d  une  chambre. 
sentir,  ressentir,  vivement. 
faire  la  part  de  (th.) ;  pa»8er 

quelque  chose  d  (p.) 
faire  une  pension  de. 
admettre  que. 
/aire  alluision  d. 
en  avoir  d,Xen  vouloir  d. 


en  rester  Id  ;  ien  lenir  UL 


IV. 


to  alter  one's  mind, 
to  be  amazed  at  (th.). 


to  speak  ambiguously, 

to  make  amends  to  (p.), 

to  be  amisa, 

to  amount  to  the  same  thing, 

to  amuse  one's  self  very  much, 

to  be  very  much  amused, 
to  do  (th.)  anew, 
to  be  angry  at  or  about  (th.), 
to  be  anj^ry  with  (p.), 

to  annoy  (p.), 

to  be  annoyed, 

to  be  an  annoyance  to, 

to  answer  for  it, 

to  give  a  sharp  answer, 

to  be  anxiuus  about, 

to  be  anxious  for  (tb. ), 
to  be  very  anxiuus  to, 

to  have  a  keen  appetite, 
to  apologize  for, 
to  apply  to  (p.), 


dianger  d^avis  or  dPidie. 
{tomber de  son  haut ;  (tombet 

des  rnies. 
parler  a  mots  couvertt. 
didommager  (p.)  de. 
aller  vial, 
revenir  au  mSme. 
( s'en  donner  a  coeur-joie. 

/cure  (th.)  sur  nouveavx fraia. 
itrefdcM,  piqu6,  irriU,  de. 
etrefdchA  contre ;  en  vouloir  a  ; 

se  metire  en  colore  conire. 
{/aire /aire  du  mauvaissang  d. 
{^se/aire  du  mauvais  sang, 
tmportuner,  tracasser. 
en  ripondre. 

t  donner  un  coup  de  dent. 
Stre  en  peine  de;   itre  inquiet 

sur  or  de. 
avoir  (th.)  d  cceur. 
{avoir  bien  envie  de;   cUsirm 

beaucoup. 
( manger  comme  quatre, 
/aire  des  excuses  de. 
^adresser  d,  avoir  recours  d. 


190 


IDIOMATICAl    VEBBS. 


to  apply  to  (th.), 

to  apply  too  late, 

to  appoint  (a  day,  etc.), 

to  make  an  appointment  with 

(P). 
to  approve  that, 
to  be  too  apt  to, 
to  be  asiiamed  of, 
not  to  be  ashamed  of, 
to  make  (p.)  ashamed, 


t^appliquer  d. 
s'y  jyrendre  (rop  tard. 
arrUer,  fixer  (unjour,  etc.) 
donner  7-endez-vom  a  (p.) 

trouver  bon  que  (with  subj.) 
ii'Stre  que  trop  porU  d. 
avoir  honte  de. 

vHavoir  pas  honte  de  ;  oaer  bien, 
/aire  honte  d  {p.)  de  (th.) 

V. 

sHnformer  de. 
/aire  dea  questions  (t* 
inviter  (p.)  d  diner. 
/aire  entrer. 

dormirpro/oruUment;  Hredam 
un  profond  sommeil, 
., ,    ^  opiner  du  bonnet. 

to  lend  assistance  (in  danger),   preter  main-forte. 
to  assume  airs,  le  prendre  sur  un  ton. 

to  assume  consequential  airs,     (/aire  legros  dos  ;  se  rengor-rr; 

( trancher  de  Piui/tortant. 
to  assume  on  one's  self,  to  take  se  porter  /ort  de  ;  prendre  sur 

on  one's  self,  soi  de. 

to  be  astounded  at,  n'en  pas  revenir. 

to  be  attached  to  (th.),to  value  tenir  d. 
(th.). 


to  ask  for,  to  ask  after, 
to  ask  (p.)  questions, 
to  ask  (p. )  to  dine, 
to  ask  (p.)  in, 
to  be  fast  asleep, 

to  assent  blindly, 


to  attempt  impossibilities, 

to  attend  on  (a  sick  person), 
to  attend  (as  a  physician), 
to  attend  (one's  duty), 
to  attend  (a  class), 
to  attend  to. 


{vouloir  prendre  la  lune  avec 

les  dents, 
soigner. 
traiter. 
se  rendre  d. 
suivre. 

/aire  attention  A;  s'occuper  de  ; 
(empliat.)  tenir  la  main  d. 
to  attend  on  (p.),  servir,  Stre  au  service  de  (gener ); 

etre   de   service   aupr^    de 
(particul.) 
toattend  (gen)  to  one's  business,  s'occuper  de  ses  affaires. 
to  be  attended  by,  itre  accompagn4  de. 

to  be  attended  with,  amener  d  sa  suite,  trainer  apris 

soi. 
to  pay,  to  give,  attention,  /aire,  prSter,  attention. 

to  be  all  attention,  itre  tout  oreille. 

to  be  all  attention  to  (p.),  to  be  (en  itre  aux  petits  soins  avee 

very  attentive  to  (p.),  (p.) 

to  direct  one's  own  attention  to,  porter  son  attention  d. 


EDIOKATXCAI,  VERBS. 


191 


to  direct  another's  attention  to, 
to  take  off  a  person's  attention, 

to  attribute  (th.)  to  (p. ), 
to  avail  nothiug  (to), 

to  avail  one's  self  o£, 
to  awake  in  a  fright, 
to  be  wide-awake, 
to  be  aware  of, 
not  to  be  aware  of, 
to  take  away  from, 

to  be  away  from  home, 

to  have  a  very  awkward  look, 


appder  Vattcntion  de  (p.)  sur. 
donner  des  distractions  d  ;  di»- 

traire. 
faire  Iwnneur  d  (p.)  de  (th.) 
ne  seroir  d  rieti,  ne  seroir  de 

rien  {de.) 
profiler  de. 
s^iveiller  en  aursatU. 
€tre  iveilM  ;  itre  aur  ses  garden. 
Stre  pr&venu  de  ;  savoir. 
ignorer, 
prendre,  6ter  (th.)  d  (p.);  em- 

mener  (p.) 
itre  absent. 
( avoir  fair  6ten  empruntS. 


to  be  a  bachelor, 
to  be  back  presently, 


VI. 

B 

Stre  gar^on. 

ne  faire  qu^aUer  et  venir ;  n- 
venir  d  i'instant. 
to  bring  (p.)  upon  one's  back,  («e  mettre  (p.)  d  dos. 

about  one's  ears, 
to  back  (p. ),  to  put  one's  shoul-  ( pousser  d  la  roue. 
der  to  the  wheel, 


to  back  out, 

to  be  bad  weather, 

to  be  badly  off, 

to  be  badly  off  for, 

to  bake, 

to  nibble  at  the  bait, 

to  bandy  (p. )  about, 

to  be  bankrupt, 


revenir  sur  ses  pas. 

/aire  mauvaii  temp    ^'mp.) 

itre  malheurevx. 

avoir  grand  besoin  de. 

faire  cuire  aufour. 

mordre  d  Phamefon. 

renvoyer  (p. )  de  Calphe  d  Pilate. 

/ai>c/a»Z/Jte  (legal  failure);/ai« 

banqueroute  (fraadolent). 
{pincer  sans  rire. 
marchandcr. 
perdre  au  change, 
y  avoir  (imp. ) 


to  banter  with  a  serious  face, 

to  bargain  for,  to  haggle, 

to  lose  by  the  bargain, 

there  to  be, 

to  be  (folloioed  by  an  infinitive),  devoir. 

to  l)e(a<aptoce), to  happen  tobe,  se  trouver. 

to  be  a  father  to,  servir,  teuir  lieu,  de  ;>rp  4. 

to  be  always  {withapre8.parL),  ne  faire  que. 

VII. 

to  bear  one's  self,  ie  comporter. 

to  bear  good  will  to,  juire  amiti6d. 

to  bear,  to  keep,  company  with,  temr  conipaynie  d. 


192'  IDlOMATICAt   VERBS. 

to  bear  witness  to,  rendre  (/moignctge  de,  ilre  «- 

muin  de. 
to  bear  with  anything,  ( se  laisser  tondre  la  lahie  sur  k 

d08. 

to  bear  up  against  misfortune,  /aire  contre  fortune  hem  aeur. 
to  bear  iU  will  to,  savoir  mauvais  (jr6  d  ;  en  van- 

loir  d;  garder,  avoir,  de  la 

rancune  contre. 
to  beat  into  a  person's  head.'       (Jburrer  (th. )  daiis  la  tSte  A  (p.) 
to  beat  about  the  bush,  (battre  la  campa(f»e  ;  {tourncr 

avtourdupot,  amuser  letapin. 
to  beat  (p.)  to  a  mummy,  battre  (p.)  comme pldtre. 

to  become,  se/alre  ;  devenir. 

to  become  of  (p. ),  devenir  ;  aXler  devenir  (future), 

to  become,  to  suit,  to  fit,  aller  bien  A. 

to  be  in  bed,  to  be  conlined  to  etre  au  lit,  garder  le  lit. 

one'^  bed, 
to  go  to  bed,  se  couclier  ;  aller  se  coucher. 

to  iiave  a  bee  in  one's  bonnet,    (avoir  un  grain  defolie. 
to  beg  of  (p.)  to,  pWer  (p.)  de. 

to  beg  alms,  tendre  la  main  ;    demander 

Paumdne. 
to  beggar  all  description,  rendre  toute  description  impnm- 

sante. 
to  begin  to,  to  set  about,  cmnmencer  d  ;  se  metlre  d. 

to  begin  worse  than  ever,  recommencer  de  plus  belle. 

to  begin  by  the  best,  ( manger  son  pain  blanc  U 

premier. 
to  behave,  se  comporter ;  se  conduire. 

to  behave  well  or  ill  to  (p. ),       agir  bien  ou  mal  envera. 
to  be  past  all  belief,  ^tre  incroyable. 

to  be  hard,  dillicult  to  believe,  etre  dur  d  dig4rer. 
to  believe  (p.),  croire. 

to  believe  (th.),  croire  ;  ajouterfoi  d. 

to  believe  in,  croire  a.  ^ 

to  ring  the  bell,  sonner  ;  tirer  la  sonneUe. 

to  bell  the  cat,  attacher  le  grelot. 

to  belong  to  (a  club,  etc.),  etre  dt,. 

to  be  benefited  by,  se  trouver  mieux  de, 

to  be  bent,  or  set,  against  (th.),  se  raidir  contre. 
to  be  bent  upon  (tii.),  ^tre  d6ter7nin4  d. 

to  be  benumbed  with  cold,         (ne  pas  se  sentir  defroid,  Stre 

transi. 

1  "  Croire  quelqne  chose,  c'est.  I'lstimer  vdritable  :  Je  erois  ce  que  vous  mt 
d  tes.  Croire  h  iiielqiie  chose,  c'est  y  ajouter  U>\,  y  avoir  confiaiice,  s'y  fii-r: 
Je  tie  erois  pas  a  I'tfiicaciUde  ce  remede.  Croire  quelqirun,  c'est.  ajouter  foi  k 
ce  qiril  (lit :  /'  "f  faul  pas  croire  les  menleiirs.  Croire  a  quelqn'un,  c'est 
croire  &  son  e.\i>ti'iice.  Croire  aux  sorciers,  c'est  croire  qu'il  y  en  a;  croire 
Ils  sorciers.  c'est  croire  ce  qu'ils  disent" — (Littrd.) 


miOMATICAX    VERBS.  193 

to  be  beside  one's  self,  Stre  Iiors  de  soi. 

to  do  one's  best,  /aire  de  son  mieux,  /aire  tout 

son  possible. 
to  make  the  best  of,  Urer  parti  de,  /aire  valorr. 

to  be  better  (health),  «e  i>orter  mieux,  oiler  vtieux, 

to  be  better  (impers.),  ixUoir  mieux. 

to  get  better  of  a  serious  illness,  revenir  de  loin. 
togettliebetter  (of  a  child, etc.),  venir  d  bout  de. 
to  bid  good  morning,  souhaiter  le  bonjow, 

to  bid  good  night,  souhaiter  le  bonsoir. 

to  kill  two  birds  with  one  stone,  /aire  d'une  pierre  deux  coups. 
to  kee^j  (th.)  for  the  last  bit,      (yarder  (th.)  pour  la  honiie 

bouche. 
to  have  a  bit  of  time,  ( avoir  un  bout  de  temps. 

not  to  be  to  blame,  n'en  pouvoir  mais. 

to  be  blessed  with,  avoir  le  bonheur  de  poss6der. 

VIII. 

to  blind,  to  deceive  (p. ),  (jeter  de  la  povdre  aux  yeux  4. 

to  blow  up,  to  scold,  ( en  donner  d, ;  ( donner  un  «a- 

von  d. 
to  blow  up  (with  powder),         /aire  sauter. 
to  blow  hot  and  cold,  souffler  le  chaud  et  le/roid. 

to  make  blunders  in  speaking,  (/aire  des  cuirs. 
to  say  (th  )  bluntly,  plainly,      ( dire  (th.)  debut  en  blanc. 
to  be  in  a  boarding  school,         itre  en  pension. 
to  i)e  a  busybody,  itre.  un  officieux. 

to  lK)il,  /aire  bouillir. 

to  be  so  bold  as  to,  prendre  la  liberU  de. 

to  bolt,  /ermer  (th.)  o«  verrou. 

to  have  one's  share  in  the  booty,  ( avoir  sa  part  au  (juteau. 
to  he  a  great  bore  to,  ( Stre  la  bite  noire  de. 

to  1)6  bound  to,  itre  obliyi  de. 

to  be  bound  to  observe  (moder-  itre  tenu  (k 

ation,  etc.), 
to  be  in  the  wrong  box,  ««  tromper. 

to  break  out  {speaking  o/ a /ire)^  prendre  dL 
to  break  open  (a  desk,  etc.),      /orcer. 
to  break  loose,  tfichapper. 

to  break  forth,  Mater. 

to  break  a  person's  heart,  /endre  le  coeui  a  (p. ) 

to  break  in,  s'introdnire  ;  pirMrer  de/oree, 

to  break  the  ice  (fig. ),  /aire  lea  premiers  pas, 

to  break  off,  rompre  ;  cesser. 

to  break  off  there,  to  stop  there,  en  daneurer  Id  ;  en  rester  ld>; 

s'eh  lenir  Id. 
to  break  through,  percer  ;  se /aire  jour. 

to  breuk  one's  engagement,        mummer  au  reudez-vouM. 


194 


IDIOMATICAI.   VEEBi 


to  break  up  (meeting, ball,  eto.)i  «c  s&prrpr. 

to  break  up  (sitting,  camp),        Ure  leve. 

to  give  breath  to,  laisser  reprendre  hnlcinc  A. 

to  run  one's  self  out  of  breath,  courir  d  perte  d'haleine. 

to  breathe  one's  last,  rendre  le  dernier  souptr. 

to  breathe  not  a  word  about  it,  (  ne  pas  en  souffler  mot. 


to  be  well  bred, 

to  bribe  (p.), 

to  bribe  the  porter, 

to  bring  (p.), 

to  bring  (th.), 

to  bring  (p. )  in  contact  with, 

to  bring  to  light, 

to  bring  (th.)  about, 

to  bring  good  luck, 

to  bring  ill  luck, 

to  bring  (p.)  off, 

to  be  as  brisk  as  a  beo^ 


avoir  bon  ton  ;  Stre  bien  rU,  bien 

4lev4. 
{ graisser  la  patte  A  (p,) 
{gra'uiser  le  marteau. 
amener. 

porter;  apporter. 
mettre  (p. )  en  rapport  avee, 
mettre  aujour. 
venir  d  bout  de. 
porter  bonheur, 
porter  malheur. 
tirer  (p.)  d'affatre. 
{ Stre  6veUU  comme  une  pot4e  de 

aouria. 
( avoir  le  corps  tout  moiUu. 
(  en  dicoudre  avec  (p.) 
Hre  A  charge  a. 
briUer  defond  en  comble. 
(  venir  se  briiler  a  la  chandelle. 


to  feel  all  bruised, 

to  have  a  brush  with  (p.), 

to  be  a  burden  to, 

to  burn  down  to  the  ground, 

to  burn  one's  wings  at  the 

candle, 
to  burn  the  candle  at  both  ends,  {briiler    la    chandelle  par  lea 

deux  bouts. 
to  burst  out  laughing, 


to  burst  into  tears, 
to  begin  business, 
to  give  up  business, 
to  understand  business, 


rire  aux  Eclats,  partir  tCun  6clat 

de  rire. 
fondre  en  larmea. 
s'^tablir. 

c4der  ses  affaires, 
entendre  les  ajTalres ;  ^y  eon- 
nnttre ;  {entendre  le  numtro. 
to  be  full  of  business,  to  be  over  {avoir  des  affaires  par-dessus 

head  and  ears  in  business,  les  yeux. 

to  make  a  bustle  or  a  noise  in  {/aire  bien  claquer  sonfouet. 

the  world, 
to  bustle  about,  to  fuss  about,  faire  le  nicessaire,  VempvessL 
to  buy  second-liand,  a^heter  de  hasard. 

to  buy  hap-hazard,  acheter  vaille  que  vaiBe. 

to  be  by  one's  self,  itre  aevL 


to  cnll  (at  a  place), 
to  call  on  (p. ), 


tx. 

c 

pafotfir  (dnrifi  un  endroH), 
passer  cUtz  ;  aller  voir. 


rWOMATICAX    VEBBS. 


195 


to  call  to  witness, 

to  call  aside, 

t«>  ciili  together, 

to  call  up  (p.), 

to  call  all  means  to  one's  aid, 

to  call  each  other  names, 

to  take  care  to, 

to  take  care  (to  beware), 

to  take  uaie  what  (one)  does, 

to  take  care  not  to, 

to  care  for  or  aboat^ 

to  be  over  careful  of  one's  self, 

to  carouse  (at  table), 

to  carry  coals  to  Newcastle, 

to  carry,  to  gain,  the  day, 

to  carry  forward, 

to  carry  it  over  (p. ), 

to  carry  (th. )  too  faf, 

to  carry  it  on, 

to  alter  the  case, 

to  be  a  hard  case  for, 

to  be  in  cash, 

to  be  out  of  cash, 

to  cast  reflections  upon, 

to  build  castles  in  the  air, 
to  make  (p. )  one's  cat's  paw, 

to  catch  it, 
to  catch  (p.)  at  it, 
to  catch,  to  watch,  opportuni- 
ties, 
to  cause  (followed  by  a  verb), 
to  give  cause  to  (suspicions, 

Htc), 

Dot  to  be  the  cause, 

to  be  cautious  of, 

to  cavil  at  (th.), 

to  use  ceremonies,  to  be  cere- 
monious, 

to  be  in  the  chair, 

to  champ  the  bit, 

to  chance  to,  to  have  the  good 
luck  to, 

to  stand  the  chance, 


prendre  d  tSmoin. 

appeler  de  c6ti  ;  prendre  A  part 

(usembler;    r6umr;   convoquer. 

/aire  monter. 

(/aire  sonner  la  grosse  cloche. 

ae  dire  des  horreura. 

avoir  soin  de. 

prendre  garde. 

prendre  garde  A  ce  qt^((m)/ait. 

n^avoir  garde  de,  ae  bien  garder 

de. 
fie  aoucierde;  ifembarraaaerde; 

tenir  d. 
,  i>'6c(nUer  trop. 
/aire  ripaiUe. 
porter  de  Ueau  d  la  mer,  or  dla 

riviire. 
avoir  gain  de  catiae. 
reporter. 

r  importer  aur  (p. ) 
pouaaer  trop  loin, 
poursuivre ;  coniintter. 
changer  le  cos. 
itre  bien  dur  pour, 
itreen/onda. 
itre  aans  argent, 
bldmer  ;  critiquer  ;   ( donner  «n 

coup  de  langue  d  (p. ) 
bdtir  dea  cMteaux  en  Espagne, 
{/aire  tirer  d(p.)aea  marrona 

du/eu. 
( en  avoir ;  itre  grond6. 
y  prendre, 
itre  d  taffiU  dea  oecaaiona, 

/aire. 

donner  prise  A. 

n'en  pouvoir  maia. 

Hre  en  garde  centre. 

trouver  d  redire  a  (th.) 

/aire  dea  cirimonies,  (/aire  dea 

/a^ona. 
itre  president, 
ronfjer  eon  /rein, 
avoir  le  bonheur  de  ;  parvenir  (L 

courir  la  chance. 


196 


IDIOMATICAL    VEEBS. 


to  change   one's  dress,  one's 

liaeu,  etc., 
to  give  a  character  to  (p.), 
to  ask  about  a  person's  charac- 
ter, 
to  have  a  private  chat  with, 
to  have  cheap,  to  get  cheap, 
to  give  (p.  )'choice  of  accepting 

or  refusing, 
to  bo  a  mere  cipher, 
to  be  in  bad  circumstances, 
tobeinmiddlingcircumstances, 

to  be  in  good  circumstances, 

to  be  in  uarrow  circumstances, 


changer  d' habit,  de  linge,  etc. 

dormer  dea  renseignements  sur. 
oiler  aux  informations,  preiulrt 

des  informations,  sur. 
s'entretenir  en  particulier  avec. 
avoir  d  ban  compte. 
mettre  d  (p.)  fe  marcM  d  la 

main, 
itre  moins  que  rien ;  Stre  un  z6ro. 
etre  mal  dans  ses  affaires, 
n^etre  ni  bien  7ii  mal  dans  ses 

affaires. 
Stre  bien  dans  ses  affaires , 

{ avoir  de  quoi. 
itre,  or  vivre,  a  Vitroit. 


to  be  an  -ommonly  civil  to, 
to  clamber  up, 
to  clap  hands, 
to  clean  the  room, 
to  get  clear  of  (th.), 


faire  mille  honnSte'ds  d, 
grimper  au  haul  de. 
battre  des  mains, 
faire  la  chambre. 
ae  {bien)  tirerde;  ee  (bien)  d&mSlet 
de.  . 

to  clear  away  (a  table  after   desservir. 

meals), 
to  make  a  clear  house,  faire  maison  nette. 

to  clear  up  that  point,  en  avoir  le  cosur  neL 

to  be  clever,  avoir  des  m,oyens. 

to  live  close  by,  demeurer  a  deux  pas. 

to  stick  closetoaperson'sskirts,  serrer  (p.)  deprks. 
to  live  in  clover,  ( mvre  d  gogo,  ( 4tre  eomms  U 

po'isson  dans  Veau. 
to  coax,  {faire  patte  de  velours  d  (p.); 

amadouer  (p.) 
to  pay  (p. ) back  in  his  own  coin,  donner  a  (p.)  la  monnaie  de  M 

pidce. 


to  be  cold. 


to  have  a  cold  ;  co  have  a  cold 

in  one's  head, 
to  catch  cold, 
to  colour  up, 
to  colour  up  to  the  eyes, 
to  come  in, 
to  come  near, 
to  come  off,  to  get  off. 


avoir  frmd  (p.);  faire  froid 
(weather,  imp.);  Ure froid 
(things). 

Ure  enrliumA ;  avoir  un  rhurne 
ds  cerveau. 

t^enrhumer. 

rougir. 

{rotigirjusqu'au  blanc  des  yeux, 

entrer. 

s'approcher  de. 

ae  tirer  d^ affaire  :  en  itre  quitte. 


IDIOHA.TICAL   TEBBS. 


197 


to  come  to  (p. ), 

to  come  to  blows, 

to  come  to  nothing  (projects), 

to  come  to  pass, 

to  come  to  tea, 

to  come  to  tlie  same  thing, 

to  come  to  an  understanding 

with, 
to  come  in  the  way, 
to  be  comfortable. 


venir  trcuvtr. 
en  venir  lux  viafns. 
«'fin  (Uler  enfun.iie. 
arriver,  se  passer, 
venir  prendre  le  th4. 
revemr  au  mSme. 
s'entendre  avee. 

gurvenir  ;  se  presenter, 
itre  bien ;  ae  trouver  bien ;  ttred 
Vaiae. 


XL 


commander  en  premier,  en  se- 
cond, etc. 
{/aire  la  plvie  et  le  beau  tempt. 


to  command  a  grave  connten-  prendre,  sedonner,un  air  grave. 
ance, 

to  be  first,  second,  etc.,  in  com- 
mand, 

to  have    everything  at  one's 
command, 

tohavenocommandof  one'sself,  ne  pas  savoir  ae  modirer. 

to  be  at  one's  command,  etre  aux  ordres  de. 

to  commit  to  writing,  coucher  par  icrit. 

to  keep  within  compass,  se  renfermer  dans  de  juste* 

limites ;  se  contenir. 

to  compel  (p.)  to  decide  one   mettre  d  (p.)  2e  marcM  A  la 
way  or  other,  main. 

to  compose  one's  self,  se  calmer. 

to  complete  (one's  misfortunes),  mettre  le  comhled  (sesmalheura). 

to  put  (p.)  out  of  conceit  with  digoAter  (p.)  de  (th.) 
(th.), 


to  be  conceited, 

to  concern  one's  self  with  or 

about, 
to  be  one's  concern, 


( if  en  f aire  aeeroire  ;  iire  pkitt 

de  soi-meine, 
se  mSler  de. 

regarder  personeUemewL 
to  be  concerned  for  (p.  or  th. ),  etre  affligi  pour. 
to  be  concerned  in,  ilre  intiressi,  sHnt&resser,  H  or 

dans. 
to  be  out  of  condition,  itre  en  mauvais  itat. 

to  pursue  a  course  of  conduct,  lerur  une  conduite. 
to  confide  in,  sefier  a  ;  compter  sur. 

to  confine  one's  self  to  that,       s'en  tenir  Id. 


to  be  utterly  confounded, 
to  get  confused, 

to  connive  at, 

to  make  it  a  matter  of  con- 
science to, 


rester  tout  con/us. 
{perdrela  carte;  (th.  being 

subject)  s'embrouHler. 
/ermer  les  yeux  sur. 
se/aire  conscience  dt. 


198 


IDIOMATICAL   VERBS. 


to  be  conscious  of,  avoir  la  consdence  de. 

not  to  consent  to,  «c  refuser  a. 

to  be  of  consequence  to  (p.),  importer  a  (imp.) 

to  be  of  consequence  (to  do),  importer  de  (faire)  (imp.) 

to    be  of   great  consequence  tirer  d  consequence, 
(speaking  of  things). 


xn. 


to  consider  twice  before  doing 

a  thing, 
to  consider,  or  to  make,  one's 

self  at  home, 
to  be  consistent, 
to  make  one's  self  conspicuous, 
to  be  constantly  (doing), 
to  put  the  best  construction 

upon, 
to  be  contented  with  that, 
to  contradict  one's  self, 
to  contribute  the  most  to, 
to  put,  to  lay,  under  contribu- 
tion, 
to  contrive  to, 
to  seek  one's  convenience, 

not  to  be  convenient  for  (p.)  to, 
to  turn  the  conversation  to, 
to  engross  all  the  conversation, 
to  keep  one's  self  cool, 

to  look  coolly  on  (p.). 

to  make  a  fair  copy  of, 

to  act  the  coquette, 

to  cost, 

to  be  covered  with  it  up  to, 

to  be  a  coward, 

to  cough, 

to  keep  one's  countenance, 

to  put  (p.)  out  of  countenance, 

to  countenance, 

to  pluck  up  one's  courage, 

to  summon  up  all  one's  courage, 
to  pay  one's  court  to, 
to  crack  a  jest. 


y  regarder  A  deuxfoia, 

faire  comme  chez  soi ;  (in  a  bad 
sense)  ne  pas  se  gener. 

Stre  consequent. 

s'afficher. 

ne  cesser  de. 

dormer  la  meiUewre  mterprdta- 
tiond. 

e'en  tenir  Id. 

se  couper. 

faire  lesfrais  de. 

melfre  a,  contribution. 

r&ussir  d  ;  parvenir  A. 

aimer  ses  aises  ;  chercher  80$ 
ai^es. 

n'Stre  pas  possible  a  (p.)  de. 

faire  tomber  la  conversation  fjtr. 

tenir  le  d4  dans  la  conversation. 

se  poss6der  :  ganler  son  sang- 
froid. 

( battrefroid  a  (p.) 

rnettre  (th.)  au  net. 

faire  la  tout  aimable. 

coilter,  revenir,  d. 

(en  avoir  jusqu'd. 

( saigner  du  nez  ;  n'avoir  pat 
de  sang  dans  les  veines. 

towtser;  avoir  une  mauvaise 
totix. 

faire  bonne  contenance  ;  garder 
son  s4riettx. 

diconcerter  (p.) 

favoriser. 

prendre  son  courage  d  deum 
mains. 

s^armer  de  courage. 

faire  la  (or  so)  cour  A- 

dire  un  bon  mot. 


tDIOlIATICAL    TEKB8. 


199 


to  be  cracked, 

to  make  one's  flesh  creep, 

to  cringe, 

to  be  creditable  to  (p.), 

to  be  cross, 

tohaveacrow  to  pluck  with  (p. ) 
to  cry  for  joy,  for  sorrow,  etc., 
to  go  to  cuffs, 

to  be  cunning  and  deceitful, 

to  cut  a  figure. 

to  cut  (p.)  short, 

to  cut  out  work  for  (p.), 


{Stre  timbre,  {avoir  la  tSte  fSl4e. 
{/aire  venir  la  chair  de  poule  d 

(P) 
/aire  le  chien  couc/iant. 
/aire  honneur  d  (p.) 
itre     de     mauoaise     humeur 

(gener.) ;  /aire  la  mine  d  (p. ) 
( aooir  maille  d  partir  avec. 
pleurer  de  joie,  de  c/ui'jrin,  etc. 
en  venir  aux  mot;j-» ;  en  venir 

avx  coups. 
( rCavoir  pas  Fair  dy  toucher. 
/aire /jure, 
couper  la  parole  A  (p  ) 
( donner  dufild,  retordre  A  (p.) 


to  be  at  daggers  drawn, 

to  dally  with, 

to  dance  atteudance. 

to  be  in  danger  of  one's  life, 

to  be  in  no  danger  from, 

to  dangle  about, 

to  dare  say, 

to  dare,  to  bid  defiance, 

to  be  dark, 

to  be  in  the  dark  about, 

to  dash  through  thick  aud  thin, 

to  be  dated  the, 


itre  d  couteaitx  tiris. 

sejouer  de. 

se  mor/ondre,  {/aire  le  pied  dt 

grue. 
courir  risque  de  perdre  la  vie. 
n'avoir  rien  d  cvaiiidre  de. 
( Ure  penclu  aux  c6t6s  de. 
croire  bien  que. 
d6jier  (p.)  de. 
/aire  nuit,  /aire  sombre,  /aire 

noir  (imp.) 
6tre  dans  Ciynorance  eur. 
se  Jeter  a  tort  et  d  trav&ra. 
itre  dat6  du. 


XIII. 

to  grow  out  of  date,  passer  de  mode, 

to  be  daylight,  broad  daylight,  /aire  jour,  /aire  grand  jour 

(imp.) 


to  deal  with  (p.), 

to  know  how  to  take  (p.),  to 

deal  with  (p.), 
to  deal  in  (trade), 

to  be  a  wholesale  dealer, 
to  put  to  death, 
to  be  near  death, 
to  run  into  debt, 

to  decide, 

t(>  come  to  a  decision  at  last. 


en  Tiser  avec. 
savoir  prendre  (p.) 

/aire  commerce  de  ;  itre  mat' 

chand  de. 
itre  marckand  en  gros. 
mettre  d  mort ;  /aire  viourir. 
{  itre  d  deux  doigts  de  la  mort 
/aire  des  dettes  ;  .tc  jeter  dana 

les  dettes ;  s'endetler. 
prendre  (son)  parti, 
{/aire  le  saut. 


200 


ISIOMATIOAL   V£RBtJ. 


to  be  npon  the  decline  (pers.), 

to  be  taken  in  the  very  deed, 

to  deem  it  expedient  to, 

to  undertake  the  defence  of, 

to  bid  defiance  to, 

to  be  deficient  in, 

to  act  deliberately, 

to  delight  in, 

to  be  the  delight  of, 

to  deliver  (th.)  to  the  person 

himself, 
to  deliver  (a  letter), 
to  deny  in  toto, 
to  take  one's  departure, 
to  depend  on  or  npon  (a  pers. 

being  subject), 
to  depend  upon  (th.  being  evb- 

ject), 
to  deprive  one's  self  of, 


Stre  sur  le  retout. 

Mre  pris  sur  le  faii. 

juger  d,  propos  de. 

prendre  fait  et  cause  pour. 

differ  (p.)  de. 

manquer  de. 

aller  pas  d  pas,  pied  d  pied. 

prendre  plaisir  A  ;  aimer  d  ;  w 

plaire  d. 
/aire  les  dAlices  de. 
remettre  en  mains  proprea. 

remettre. 

a'inscrire  enfavx  eontre. 

partir  ;  s'en  alter. 

/dire  fond,  compter,  sur;  «e  T»- 

poser  de  (th. )  sur. 
d4pendre  de. 

s'dter ;  se  priver  de. 


XIV. 


to  have  a  design  upon  (th.),  &  Xen  rotdoir  A. 

longing  for, 
to  follow  out  one's  design, 
to  desire  one's  kind  regards  to, 


to  be  very  destitute, 

to  determine  to, 

to  dictate  in  everything, 

to  die  a  natural  death, 

to  have  a  difficulty  to,  in, 

to  bring  (p.)  into  difficulties, 

to  be  in  a  sad  dilemma, 

to  dine  out, 

to  serve  up,  to  bring  in,  dinner, 
to  dine  with  Duke  Humphrey, 
to  dine  well  at  a  friend's  table, 
to  direct  (a  letter), 
to    have    the  direction,    the 
trouble,  the  embarrassment, 
to  be  dirty  (streets,  etc.), 
to  disagree  with  (health). 


to  disappoint  (a  person  being 

subject  of  the  verb), 
to  di.^appoint  (a  thing  being    contrarier  (p.) 

subject  cf  the  verb). 


pousser  sa  pomtt. 

faire  ses  amities,  nes  compli- 
ments, presenter  ses  i  •cspecta,  4. 

X  avoir  les  dents  longues. 

se  decider  d. 

trancher  sur  tout. 

( mourir  de  sa  belle  mort. 

avoir  de  la  peine  d. 

{mettre  (p. )  dansde  beavx  draps. 

Stre  entre  Venclume  et  ie  mat' 
teau. 

diner  en  ville. 

servir  le  diner. 

( diner  par  cceur. 

faire  honneur  d  un  diner. 

adresser ;  mettre  Vadresse  A. 

( tenir  la  queue  de  la  jwele. 

faire  sale  ;  faire  crotti  (imp.) 
incommoder  ;  faire  mai  d  ;  dd- 

ranger, 
{faire  faux  bond  d  (p.) 


IDIOM  ATICAL    VEEB8.  201 

to  be  disappointed  in  one's  ex-  Ure  tromp4,  frusiri,  cUt^,  datu 

pcetations,  ses  esp6rance». 

to  disapprove  of,  trouvermauvaUiqueiwith  anhj.) 

to  1)6  discouraged  by  the  least  serebuter  pour  la  moindre  chose. 

thing, 
to  discover  one's  self,  sefaire  connattre. 

to  say  (til.)  without  disguise,     dire  (th.)  en  toutes  lettres. 
to  take  a  dislike  to,  prendre  un  d4goiit  pour  (p.  or 

th.) ;  (prendre  (p.)  en  grippe. 
to  dismount,  mettre  pied  d  terre.^ 

to  dispense  with,  se  passer  de. 

to  be  displeased  with  one's  self  se  savoir  mauvais  gri  de. 

for, 
to  fall  into  disrepute,  tomber  dans  le  discredit. 

to  keep  one's  distance,  «e  tenir  A  distance  ;  garder  sa 

distance  ;  ne  pas  s'oublier. 
to  keep  (p.)  at  a  distance,  tenir  (p.)  d  distance;  tenir  (p.) 

dans  le  respect. 
to   be   fond  of   disturbances    aimer  Us  6clats. 

(about  trifles), 
to  cause  divisions,  to  embroil  brouiller  les  cartes. 

matters,  to  sow  dissensions, 
to  do  one's  best  to,  /aire  tout  ce  qu'on  pent  pour  ; 

( se  mettre  en  quatre  pour. 
to  be  doing  well,  Stre  en  bonne  roic. 

to  have  done  with,  enjinir  avec  ;  rompre  avec. 

to  do  a  bad  action,  a  crime,       /aire  un  mauvais  coup, 
to  do  for  (p.),  (/aire  son  affaire  A  (p.)  ;  (en- 

/oncer  ;  (couler. 
to  do  for  (instead),  tenir  lieu  de. 

to  do  nothing  good,  ne/aire  rien  qui  vaiUe. 

to  do  one's  part,  /aire  son  devoir. 

to  do  as  one  pleases,  en /aire  A  sa  tSte. 

to  do  as  one  pleases  with  (p.),    avoir  (p. )  dans  sa  manche, 
to  do  harm  to  (p. ),  /aire  mal  a. 

to  do  nothing  but,  ne/aire  que. 

to  do  nothing  of  the  kind,  n^ en /aire  rien. 

to  have  to  do  with  (p. ),  avoir  affaire  d. 

XV. 

to  have  something  to  do  with  avovr  quelque  chose  de  eommvn 

(th.),  avec. 

to  have  nothing  to  do  with,  n'avoir  rien  de  commun  avec 

to  do  right  to  (do),  /aire  bien  de. 

to  do  wrong  to  (do),  /aire  mal  de. 

to  do  so  that,  /aire  en  sorte  que. 

^  Hence  avoir  un  pied-it-terrt,  to  have  a  lodging,  a  place  to  btop  at 


203 


ISIOUATICAX    VEUBS. 


to  do  the  same  or  as  much, 
never  to  do  any  other  thing, 
to  do  without, 
to  be  in  doors, 
to  be  out  of  doors, 
to  be  double  the  age, 
to  be  no  doubt  whatever, 
to  drain  the  cap  to  the  very 

dregs, 
to  draw  upon  one's  self, 
to  draw  blood  from  a  stone, 
to  draw  lots, 
to  be  in  full-dress, 

to  drink  the  health  of, 
to  sit  drinking, 
to  drink  like  a  fish, 
to  be  given  to  drink, 
to  give  drink-money, 
to  drive  to  despair, 
to  drive  to  extremities, 
to  drive  over  (p.), 
to  take  a  drive, 

to  drop, 

to  drop  acqnaintance  with  (p.), 

to  be  dry  (weather), 

to  be  due  to  (p.)  by  rights, 

to  be  dull,  sad, 

to  return  to  one's  duty, 

r,o  swerve  from  one's  duty, 

to  be  on  duty, 

to  dwell  upon  (th.), 

to  dwell  upon  one's  mind, 

to  be  dying, 


en  /aire  autant. 

n" en  /aire  jamais  cTattbrtt. 

ne  passer  de. 

Stre  d  la  maison. 

Stre  dehors. 

avoir  deux/ois  Vdge. 

n'y  avoir  pas  d,  s'y  tromper. 

''oire  le  calice  jusqu'A  la  lie. 

s'attirer. 

( tirer  de  rhuile  <Fun  mur. 

( tirer  A  In  courte  paille. 

4tre  en  grande  toilette  ;  Stre  en 

grande  tenue  (military). 
boire  a  la  sanU  de. 
( Stre  a  boire. 

( boire  comme  un  templier. 
( aimer  la  bouteille. 
donner  un  pourboire. 
rSduire  (p.)  au  dises)yoir. 
pousser  (p.)  d  bout, 
passer  sur  le  corps  a. 
/aire  une  promenade  en  voiture  ; 

se  promener. 
laisser  tomher. 
cesser  de  voir  (p.) 
/aire  sec  (imp.) 
revenir  de  droit  d  (p. ) 
( itre  triste  comme  un  bonnet  tU 

nuit. 
rentrer  dans  le  devoir. 
s'Scarter  de  son  devoir. 
Stre  de  service. 
s'arrSter  sur. 
tenir  au  coeur  A. 
se  mourir  ;  (  «'en  aXltr, 


to  have  a  good  ear, 

not  to  have  a  good  ear, 

to  tarn  a  deaf  ear  to^ 

to  set  by  the  ears, 
to  stop  one's  ears, 


XVI. 

E 


avmr  de  Voreille  ;  avoir  roreille 

juste, 
n'avoir  pas  d'oreille  ;   manquer 

d^oreille. 
/aire  la  sourde  oreille  A  ;  /ermcr 

Voreille  A  (th.) 
mettre  aux  prises, 
se  boucher  les  oreilles. 


IDIOMATICAL    VKRBS, 


203 


to  wliisper  (th.)  into  one's  ears, 
tu  take  it  at  one's  ease, 
to  take  one's  ease, 
to  be  at  one's  ease, 
to  ease  one's  mind, 
to  eat  tlie  chicken  in  the  egg, 
to  eat  heartily, 
to  pretend  to  eat  little, 
to   take   effect   upon    (p.),   to 
leave  their  mark  upon  (p.), 
to  make  a  violent  effort, 
to  give  (p.)  elbow-room, 

to  embellish  a  story, 

to  lay  an  emphasis  upon, 

to  enable  (p.)  to, 

to  be  enabled, 

to  draw  towards  an  end, 

to  come  to  an  end, 

to  put  an  end  to, 

to  answer  or  to  serve  an  end, 
to  end  in  or  with, 
to  endeavour, 

to  gain  from  the  enemy, 

to  make  an  enemy  of  (p.), 

to  engage  (a  seat,  a  newspaper, 

etc.), 
to  engage  (a  servant,  etc.), 
to  engage,  to  pledge  one's  self 

to, 
to  be  engnged, 
to  be  engaged  in, 
to  enjoy  one's  self  constantly, 
to  enjoy  one's  self  well, 
to  enjoy  (a  walk,  a  sail,  etc.), 
to  enliven  with, 
to  be  enough  for  (p.), 
tobeenough  (to  complain,  eta), 
to  be  enraged  at, 

to  enter  into  an  agreement  to, 

to  enter  into  conversation, 

to  give  an  entertainment, 

to  be  entitled  to, 

to  envy, 

to  be  an  epoch  in, 


chuchoter,  dire  (th.)  d  roreille. 
( en  prendre  bien  d  son  aise. 
se  mettre  cl  son  aise. 
( Stre  dans  son  assiette. 
se  tranquilliser, 
manijcr  son  bl6  en  herhe. 
{manger  comme  quatre. 
(/aire  la  petite  bouc/ie. 
(Uteindre  sur, 

(  donner  un  coup  de  collier. 

{ laisser  d  (p.)  lea  candies  /ran- 
ches. 

( mettre  du  sien  ;  broder. 

appuyer  sur. 

mettre  (p. )  en  4tat  de. 

€tre  d  meme  de  ;  pouvoir. 

tendre  d,  tirer  vers,  sa  fin. 

avoir  une  fin. 

m,ettre fin  d ;  /aire  cesser;  en 
finir  atfec. 

remplir  un  ohjet. 

finir  par. 

s'efforcerde;  /aire  Urns  seseforta 
pour. 

prendre  sur  Pennemi 

se/aire  un  ennemi  de  (p.) 

retenir. 

arrSter. 
s'eniiaqer  d. 

n^6tre  pas  visible. 

Stre  occupi  d. 

( se  donner  du  hon  tempt, 

se  bien  amuser. 

aimer  beaucoup. 

iqayer  par. 

sujjire  d. 

y  avoir  de  quoi  (se  plaindre). 

Stre  irri/J,  jfurieux,  de  (th. )  con- 

tre  (p.) 
s'enyager  d. 
lier  conversation, 
recevoir  du  monde. 
avoir  des  droits  d. 
envier  (th.)  ;  porter  envic  d  (p.) 
faire  Spoque  dans. 


204 


IDIOMATICAi  TEBJJS. 


to  be  equal  to  (with  a  verb),      ^re  deforce  d. 

to  be  equal  to  tlie  emergency,    etre  ala  Iiauteur  de.lantxMtion 

to  treat  on  afootingof  equality,  trailer  cT^gal  a  4gaL 

to  escape  from,  4clMpper  d. 


XVII. 


to  make  one's  escape, 
to  have  a  narrow  escape, 
to  narrowly  escape  banging, 
to  esteem  it  a  favour  to  (do), 
to  esteem  it  a  favour, 
to  esteem,  to  value  (th.), 

to  give  an  evasive  answer, 
to  be  even  with, 

to  be  an  evidence,  a  vritness, 

to  evince, 

to  be  scrupulously  exact, 

to  give  example  rather  than 

precept, 
to  admit  of  no  exception, 
to  take  exception  at, 
to  exchange  jests, 
to  excite  the  compassion  of, 
to  be  excited  at, 
to  keep  (p.)  in  exercise, 
to  exert  one's  self  to, 

to  exert  one's  self  to  theutmost, 
to  exhaust  (p.), 
to  exhaust  one's  patience, 
to  be  quite  exhausted. 

to  expect  (th.), 

to  expect  (p.)  every  minute, 

to  expect  entreaties, 
to  answer  one's  expectations, 
to  fall  short  of  one's  expecta- 
tions, 
to  defray  the  expense  of, 
to  be  at  expense  (gener.), 
to  be  expensive, 
to  expose  (p.), 


s'ichappt'r,  se  eauver. 
( Vichapper  hdle. ' 
jfriner  la  corde. 

etre  fort  obl'uje  a  (p. )  de  ffaire). 
regarder  comme  unefaveur. 
faire  cas  de,  atta^fter  de  la  va- 

Ifur  d. 
J  ripondre  ere  Normand. 
itre  quitte  avec  ;  ( rendre  la  pa- 

reUle  d. 
servir  de  Umoin. 
faire  voir. 

(  mettre  lea  points  8ur  lea  L 
precher  (Texemple. 

ne  point  souffrir  d^excejytion. 

se fornialiser  de ;  s^offeiuir  de. 

faire  assaut  de  pUuaawteriea. 

faire  piti6  d. 

prendre  feu  d. 

tenir  (p. )  ew  haleine. 

se  donner  de  la  peine  pour ;  (ae 

mettre  en  fravi. 
faire  torn  ses  efforts  pour. 
(  mettre  (p. )  sur  les  dents, 
pousner  (p. )  d  hout. 
rien  pouvoir  plus  ;  ( Stre  rendu , 

{etre  sur  les  dents, 
s'attendre  d. 
attendre  (p.)  d^un  instant  d 

I'autre. 
se  faire  prier. 
ripondre  d  ses  esp4raneea. 
frustrer  son  attente. 

faire  lesfrais  de. 
faire  des  dApenses. 
coAter  clier. 
d6mas(]uer. 


1  Tills  expression  cunnot  be  followed  by  a  complement.     //«  liad  a  narrmt 
tscaptfrom  being  killed  is  tianslated  simply  liy :  //  ta  echappe  Mlt 


IDIOMATICAL    VERBS. 


205 


to  expose  one's  self  to  danger, 
to  lie  exposed  to  (one's  anger, 

etc.), 
to  be  far  above  expression, 
to  speak  extempore, 
to  mn  into  extremes, 

to  be  driven  to  extremities, 

to  eye  from  head  to  foot, 

to  stare  with  one's  eyes  wide 

open, 
to  have  an  even  eye, 
to  catch  the  eye  of, 
to  have   eyes  in  the  back  of 

one's  head, 
to  be  an  eyesore  to  (p.), 


fawt  hon  marchi  de  son  em-pa. 
4tre  en  butte  d. 

passer  toute  expression, 
purler  d'abond a Jice;  improviser. 
se  Jeter  dans  les  extremes ;  pas- 
ser d'un  extrime  d  Pautre. 
Stre  riduit  atix  aI>ois. 
toiser  (p.) 
ouvrir  de  grands  yeux. 

( avoir  le  compos  dans  Vceil. 

sefaire  remarquer  de. 

(  avoir  dea  yeux  au  bout  dea 

doigts. 
(itre  la  bite  noire  tie  (pi) 


xvin. 

F 

to  face,  /hire  face  fk. 

to  do  (th.)  for  (p.'s)  fair  face,      (/aire  (th.)  pour  Usbeauxyeux 

de. 
to  have  a  face  of  brass,  ( avoir  du  front,  du  toupet. 

not  to  dare  to  show  one's  face,  n'oser  se  monirer. 
to  stare  or  to  look  full  in  the  {regarder  (p.)   enire  lea  deux 


face, 
to  say  (th.)  in  one's  face, 
to  be  facetious  and  witty, 
to  be  a  fact  that, 
to  be  faded, 

to  fail  (not  to  succeed), 
to  fail  (in  business), 
to  be  faint-hearted. 


yevx. 
dire  (th.)  d  brUle- pour  point, 
avoir  le  mot  pour  rire. 
Stre  defait  que. 
itre  passi  ;   avoir  perdu  de  »a 

fratckeur. 
manquer  (son)  but. 
faire  faillite. 
( itre  une  poule  mmiUUe. 
to  try  to  keep  fair  with  both  (  vouloir  manager  la  cliivre  et  U 


sides, 
to  be  fair  (things), 
to  fall  at  full  length, 
to  fall  in  with, 
to  fall  into  (a  snare), 
to  fall  into  the  clutches  of, 
to  fall  out, 
to  fall  short  of, 
to  fall  to  the  ground,  (fig.,  th.  tomher  danjt  Veau. 

being  subject)  to  be  useless, 
to  fall  upon  (th.),  faire  main  basse  aur, 

to  fall  upon  (the  enemy),  donner  aur. 


chou. 
itre  juste. 

tomber  de  son  long. 
rencontrer. 
donner  dana. 
( tomber  sous  la  patte  de. 
sequereller;  aebrouiller;  rompre. 
cornmencer  d  manquer  de. 


206 


IBIOMATICAL   VERBS. 


to  fall  upon  (p.)  treacherously, 
to  fall  out  of  thefrying-pau  in- 
to the  fire, 

to  be  much  fallen  of^ 
to  be  false  to  (p.), 
to  allege  falsehood  for  the  pur- 
pose of  eliciting  truth, 
to  makeone'sself  familiarwith, 

to  pretend  to  be  familiar, 
to  take  a  fancy  for, 
to  be  far  from, 

to  go  further  and  fare  worse, 
to  bid  farewell, 
to  be  in  fashion, 

to  be  too  fast  (a  watch,  etc.), 
to  be  worn  out  with  fatigue, 

to  use,  to  inure,  one's  self  to 

fatigue, 
to  tell  plainly  (p.)  of  his  faults, 
to  be  the  fault  of, 
not  to  be  the  fault  of, 
to  be  in  fear  of, 
to  put  (p.)  in  fear, 
to  go  about  fearlessly, 

to  feather  one's  nest, 

to  show  the  white  feather, 

to  be  stripped  of  one's  feathers, 

to  fee  or  bribe  the  porter 

to  feed  on, 

to  feel  reluctant  to, 

not  to  feel  as  usual, 

to  feel  one's  way, 

to  feel  hurt  at. 


prendre  en  traUre. 

( touiber    de  la  poele  dans  la 

braise ;  tomber  de  Clutrybde 

en  Scylla. 
( ne  battre  plus  que  d^une  aUe. 
tromper. 
plaider  le  faux  pour  savoir  le 

vrai. 
se  rendre  familier,  «c  /amilio' 

riser,  avec. 
/aire  le  familier. 
prendre  du  goiU  pour. 
8' en  falloir  de  beaucovp  que 

(imp.) 
tomber  de  mat  en  pis. 
dire  adieu  a. 
Stre  d  la  mode,  Stre  de  mode  ; 

itre  de  mise. 
avancer. 
( Stre  rendu ;  n*en  pouvoir  plua 

de  fatigue  ;  itre  rou6. 
sefaire,  s'endurcir,  d  la  fatigue. 

dire  d  (p. )  ses  v4rit6». 

ne  tenir  qu'd  (imp.) 

n'en  pouvoir  maia. 

craindre,  avoir  peur  de. 

faire  peur  a. 

aller  partout  tite  levSe,  le  front 

lev6. 
faire  son  nid. 

(saignerdunez;  (faire  lepoltron. 
(y  laisser  de  ses  plumes. 
( graisser  le  marteau. 
se  nourrir  de. 

iprouver  de  la  repugnance  d. 
( ne  pas  Stre  dans  son  assiette. 
marcher  d  tdtons. 
se  trouver  offens4  de. 


XIX, 

se  trouver  mal;  n'Stre  paa  bien, 
avoir  le  coeur  gros. 
Stre  un  bon  enfant. 
Stre  un  mauvais  sujet. 
Stre  un  triste  sire,  un  pauvre. 
sire. 

to  be  hail  fellow  well  met  with  traiter  (p.)depairAeom,pagnon, 
(u.). 


to  feel  sick  (sudilenly), 
to  feel  sick  at  heart, 
to  be  a  good  fellow, 
to  be  a  bad  fellow, 
to  be  a  sad  fellow, 


EDIUHAXICAL   VERBS. 


207 


to  come  and  fetch  (p.), 

to  go  and  fetch, 

to  tight  a  battle, 

to  begin  to  tight^ 

to  be  fighting, 

to  tight  bravely, 

to  fight  hand  to  hand, 

to  make  a  good  tigure, 

to  stand  in  file, 

to  find  oiie'sself  the  better  forit, 

to  find  the  door  shut,  to  find 

no  one  at  home, 
not  to  find  it  amiss  if, 

to  find  fault  with  (th. ), 

to  find  it  worth  one's  while, 

to  have  (th.)  at  one's  fingers' 

ends, 
to  have  a  finger  in  the  pie, 
to  bite  one's  fingers  for  it, 

to  be  fine  (weather), 
to  be  fine  njjain, 
to  set  fire  to, 


venir  prendre, 
aller  cherchm: 
livrer  une  balaille. 
en  venir  aux  indina, 
itre  aux  prists, 
payer  de  sa  pernonne. 
se  hattre  corps  d  corpt. 
repr^senter  bien. 
/aire  queue, 
•ten  trouver  nUeux. 
( trouver  visage  de  boit. 

ne  pas  trouver  mauvaut  que 

(aubj.) 
( trouver  d  redire  d  (th. ) 
( y  trouver  son  compte. 
( savoir  sur  le  bout  du  doigt, 

( avvinr  part  au  g&teau. 

( e'en  mordre  les  doigts  (or  le» 

pouces). 
/aire  beau  (imp.) 
se  remettre  au  beatt. 
mettre  le/eu  d. 


XX. 

to  go  through  fire  and  water    ( «e  mettre  aufeu  pour  (p.) 
for  (p.). 


to  fire  at, 

to  be,  to  hold,  firm, 

to  be  firm  in, 

to  fish  in  troubled  waters, 

to  fit,  to  fit  well  (p.). 


tirer  aur ;  faxre/eu  sur. 
tenirbon. 
persister  dans, 
picher  en  eau  trouble, 
aller  bien  d. 


to  fitlike  a  glove,  to  suit  to  a  T,  (  aller  comme  un  gant. 


to  be  well  fitted, 
to  be  flat  (trade), 
to  flatter  (p.)  grossly, 

to  be  foggy, 

to  be  passionately  fond  of, 


not  to  be  very  fond  of, 

to  be  fond  of  drink, 

to  make  a  fool  of, 

to  make  a  fool  of  one's  self, 


( trouver  chaussure  d  son  pied. 

ne  pas  aller. 

{donner  deCencensoirparlenez 

d(p.) 
/aire  du  brouillard  (imp. ) 
aimer  beaucoup  ;  (tre  passionrU 

pour;    itre  coiffi  de ,   s'itre 

fugoui  de ;  aimer  d  la/olie. 
n'aimer  gu^re. 
( aiiner  la  bouteille. 
se  moquer  de  ;  sejouer  de. 
se/aire  moi/tier  de  soi. 
to  be  forbidden  the  use  of  (th.),  etrc  a  rimlex  (ih.  being  subj.  in 

French). 


208 


EDIOilATICAX    TEEB8. 


to  force  a  laugh, 

to  force  ( p. )  to  expl  ain  one's  self, 
to  have  uo  foresight, 

to  take  time  by  the  forelock, 
never  to  forget  while  one  lives, 
to  tell  (p.)  his  fortune, 
to  be  born  to  good  fortune, 
to  raise  one's  fortune, 

to  bear  np  against  bad  fortune, 
to  forward  (aletter,  parcel,  etc. ), 
to  go,  to  crawJ,  on  all  fours, 
to  set  the  fox  to  keep  the  geese, 
to  be  frank,  to  be  free  and  open, 
nut  tobeinagoodframeof  mind, 
to  be  free  from  affectation, 
to  make  very  free, 

to  freeze  intensely, 

to  fret  and  fume, 

to  make  friends  with, 

to  be  on  friendly  terms, 

to  frighten, 

to  frighten  to  death, 

to  do  a  thing  for  fun, 

to  furnish  one's  self  with, 


(  rire  du  bout  des  Ikvres,  m  dea 
dentil. 

(  mettre  (p. )  au,  pied  du  mur. 

{ ne  pas  voir  plus  loin  que  8<m 
nez. 

{ prendre  V  occasion  auxcheveux. 

n^oublier  (th.)  de  sa  vie. 

dire  a  (p. )  sa  bonne  aventurc. 

( itre  n4  coijfd. 

itre  Partisan  de  sa  propre  for- 
tune. 

/aire  contre fortune  bon  coeur. 

faire parvenir  (th.)  a,  (p.) 

( marcher  d  quatre  patten. 

enfermer  le  loup  dans  la  bergerie. 

( avoir  le  cosur  sur  les  l^vres. 

( ne  pas  itre  dans  son  ctssiette. 

avoir  du  naturel. 

prendre  bien  desUbertis;  prendre 

degrandes  liberies;  s'4manciper. 

geler  a  pierre  fendre. 

Jeter  feu  etjlamme. 

se  riconcilier  avec. 

itre  sur  un  pied  d'amiti^. 

faire  peur  a. 

faire  mourir  de  peur. 

(faire  une  chose  pour  rire. 

se  pourvoir  de. 


XXI. 
6 

(  courir  la  pritentaine. 
riussir  dans  ses  projets,  ae*  de»- 
scins. 

to  gain  one's  point,  arriver  a  ses  fins. 

to  play  a  high  or  dangerous  jouer  gros  jeu. 
game. 


to  gad  about, 

to  gain  one's  object, 


to  be  interested  in  the  game, 
to  make  game  of, 
to  be  a  gentleman, 

to  get,  to  order, 

to  get  (built,  etc.), 

to  get,^  to  obtain,  to  gain. 


ne  piquer  au  jeu. 

se  moquer,  se  jouer,  de. 

it/re  un  homme  comme  U  fautj 

savoir  vivre. 
faire  faire. 
faire  {bdtir,  etc.) 
ohtiuir,  gagner. 


1  The  English  verb  to  get  has  so  many  different  meanings  that  the  best 
way  to  translate  it  is  to  replace  it  at  once  by  some  synunymous  verb.uol 
baving  siucb  various  significationa. 


roiOMATlCAL    TE&BS. 


209 


to  get,  to  possess, 

to  get  augry  with^ 

to  get  away, 

to  get  (th.)  for  (p.), 

to  get  home, 

to  get  late, 

to  get,  to  take,  a  liking  for, 

to  get  loose, 

to  get  on  (the  way), 

to  get  on  (ia  the  world), 

to  get  over  a  great  ditliculty, 

to  get  out,  to  clear  oti^  to  get 

off, 
to  get  rich, 
to  get  rid  of, 


avoir,  powi6der. 

«c  mettre  en  colore  contrt. 

t^en  oiler  ;  ( at  aauuer. 

/aire  avoir  (th.)  d  (p.) 

arriver  chez  aoL 

aefaire  tard  (imp.) 

prendre  goilt  a. 

se  trouver  d6gag6. 

avancer. 

/aire  son  chemin. 

( se  tirer  une  ^pine  dti  pied. 

se  tirer  de  ;  s'en  tirer. 

iienrichir. 

te  dA/oure  de;  ae  d^barrasaer  dt. 


XXTT. 


to  get  into  a  scrape, 

to  get  out  of  a  scrape, 

to  get  stout, 

to  get  out  of  the  way, 

to  get  friends, 

to  get  a  name, 

to  gild  the  pill, 

to  give  an  account  of, 

to  give  in  one's  account, 

to  give  credit  to  (th.), 

to  give  it  to  (p. ), 

to  give  (p.)  his  own, 

to  give  it  up, 

to  give  up  guessing, 

to  give  (p.)  as  good  as  he  gets, 


to  give  up  an  enterprise  which 
would  succeeii, 

to  give  largely, 

to  give  a  lecture  to,  to  repri- 
mand, 

to  give  occasion  to  (p.), 
to  give  au  evening  party, 
to  give  rise  to, 
to  give  one's  self  up  to, 


«e  mettre  dans  Fembarraa  ;  (  « 

/aire  dea  afairea. 
le  tirer  d'affaire  ;  (  retirer  mm 

6pingle  dujeu. 
prendre  de  Fembonpomt. 
idler. 

ae/aire  dea  uviis. 
ee/aire  une  reputation, 
dorer  la  pilule, 
/aire  le  rdcit  de,  rendre  coinpU 

de. 
rendre  sea  comptet. 
ajouter/oi  d. 
( <7»  dire  d. 
dire  a  (p.)  aon/aU. 
abandonner  la  jmrtle. 
(Jeter  sa  langue  aux  chient. 
(  river  le  clou  a  (p.) ;  ( rendre  d 

(p.)  la  monnaie  de  aa  piice; 

r6pondre  vertement. 
i^arrSter  en  beau  rkemm. 

donner  d  pleines  maina. 

{/aire  une  mcratriale,  une  ae- 
monce,  lale(;on;  {tancer  dim' 
portance  ;  donner  un  aavott. 

donner  lieu  d  (p. )  de. 

donner  une  aoir6e. 

/aire  nattrt  :  produire. 

a^abandormtr  d  ;  ae  livrer  d 


210  IDIOMATICAX    VEEBS. 

XXIII. 

to  give  (p.)8omethingtodo(fig.),  (  dormer  dufil  d  retordr^.  A  (p.) 
to  give  way  to,  se  laisser  alter  d  (th. ) ,  c4der  d  (p. 

or  th. ) ;  lacker  la  bride  d  (th.) 
to  be  glad  to  hear,  apprendre  avec  plaiakr. 

to  look  at  one's  self  in  a  glass   «e  mirer. 

(with  pleasure), 
to  drink  out  of  a  glass,  hoire  dans  un  verre. 

to  take  a  gloomy  view  of  every-  voir  tout  en  noir. 

thing, 
to  glory  in,  seglorifier  ;  se/airegloire,  Hon- 

neur,  de. 
to  be  hand  and  glove,  itre  amis  intimes;  [StredeuxtStes 

sous  un  bonnet  :  ( &tre  comme 

les  deux  doigts  de  la  main. 
to  go  (to  go  away),  partir. 

to  go  abroad,  aller  d  V6tranger. 

to  go  along,  passer  son  chemin. 

to  go  back  (upon  one's  decision)  s^en  d4dire. 
to  go  in  company  (th.    being  marcher  de  front. 

subj. )  to  go  together, 
to  go  for  (to  fetch),  cMer  chercher. 

to  go  off,  Idcher  pied. 

to  go  on,  to  proceed,  passer  outre. 

to  go  on  the  same  way,  {aller  toujours  sofiv  train. 

to  go  so  far  as  to,  s'oublierjvsqu'd  ;  s'aviser  de. 

to  go  to  (p.),  <*^'6^  trouver ;  aller  chez. 

to  go  (a  mile,  etc.),  /aire. 

to  go  upon  sure  grounds,  itre  siir  de  sonjait ;  aller  A  coup 

sHr. 
to  go  hard  with  or  against  (p. ),  tourner  mal  pour  (p. ) 
to  go  a-head,  continuer. 

to  go  to  make  inquiriee,  aller  aux  renseignements. 

to  go  to  meet  (p.),  aller  au-devant  de,  d  larencon- 

tre  de.^ 
to  go  near,  faillir. 

to  go  near  to,  ne  pas  etre  iloign^de. 

to  go  at  a  snail's  pace,  (  aller  d  pas  de  tortiu. 

to  go  at  full  speed,  aller  comme  le  vent. 

to  go  at  a  good  rate,  aller  bon  train. 

to  go  up  stairs,  monter;  aller  en  haul. 

to  go  down  stairs,  descendre  ;  aller  en  baa. 

to  go  through,  traverser  ;  souffrir. 

to  go  througl)  niid  through,        percer  d'outre  en  outre. 


1  Alter  a  la  rencovtre  de  is  never  followed  by  a  personal  pronoun,  the  pns. 
scssive  adjective^  ma.  ta,  sa,  etc.,  being  used  instead  :  a  ma  rencontre,  a  ta 
rencontre,  a  sa  rencontre,  eW^ 


XDIOMAXICAXi    r£&B8. 


311 


to  go  without, 

to  tMs  going,  to  go,  all  wrong, 

to  be  going  ou  (speaking), 

to  be  as  good  as  gold, 

to  be  worth  one's  weight  in 

gold, 
to  have  one's  pockets  lined 

with  gold, 
to  give  (p.  or  th.)  for  lost. 


se  passer  de. 

oiler  lie  traven, 

itre  en  train. 

( itre  de  Cor  en  bam, 

vaUnr  eon  pesant  d'or. 

( itre  tout  COU8U  d^or. 


regarder  (p.  or  th.)  conuiM 

perdu, 
avoir  la  bontd  de. 
toumer  mal. 
prouver  ce  que  ton  diL 
elre  un  bavard. 
savoir  ban  yr6  d  (p.)  de. 
faire  de  la  peine  d. 
se  chagriner  pour  den  rieng. 
g'atlrister  mal  a  propos. 
{ n' avoir  pas  le  sou  ;  n'awAr 

pan  une  obole. 
gayner  du  terrain, 
iddier  pied,  cedar  le  terrain. 
defendre  son  terrain ;  tenir  bom, 

/erme. 
to  throw  into  the  background,  rtjeter  au  second  plan,  dan* 

Sombre  ;  faire  oublier. 


to  be  so  good  as  to, 

to  come  to  no  good, 

to  make  good  what  one  says, 

io  be  a  gussip, 

to  be  gratetiU  to  (p.), 

to  grieve  (p.), 

to  grieve  for  trifles, 

to  grieve  without  cause, 

not  to  be  worth  a  groat, 

to  gain  ground, 
to  give  ground, 
to  stand  one's  ground. 


to  speak  upon  good  grounds, 

to  grow,  or  to  fall,  short  of, 
to   grow,    or  become,   good 

friends, 
to  grow  into  a  habit, 
to  grow  old. 


parler  avec  connaissance  d* 

cause, 
comniencer  d  manquer  de. 
devenir  bons  amis. 

devenir  habitude, 
se  faire  vieux. 


to  grow  handsomer  every  day,  ( ne  faire  que  croUre  et  embellir. 
to  owe  a  grudge  to  (p. ),  i^la  garder  bonne  d  ;  ( avoir  une 

dent  contre. 
to  look  gruff,  to  have  a  gruff  avoir  Pair  ribarbatif. 

look, 
to  be  on  one's  guard  against       «e  pr&inunir  contre  (th.) ;  itre 

(th.),  with  (p.),  sur  le  qui-vive  avec  (p.) 

to  be  off  one'»  guard,  n^Slre  pas  sur  ses  gardes. 

to  give  (p.)  ten  times  to  guess  le  donner  d  (p.)  en  dix. 

it  in, 
to  leave  (p.)  to  guess,  le  laisser  d  (p.)  d  deviner. 

to  be  a  good  guesser,  a  bad    deviner  bien  ;  deviner  vuU, 

guesser, 
to  go  up  to  (p.),  s'approc/ter  de. 

to  go  on  the  water,  or  out  for    aller  se  promener  en  bateau,  or 

a  sail,  sur  Ceau. 


212 


IDIOMAUCAL   VEBBS. 


XXIV. 
H 


to  get  into  tte  liabit  of, 

to  be  in  the  habit  uf, 

to  break  one's  self  of  a  habit, 

to  contract  a  bad  habit, 

to  grow  into  a  habit, 

to  take  (p.)  by  the  hair, 

to  tear  one's  hair, 

to  split  a  hair, 

to  be  within  a  hair's  breadth  of, 


to  make  one's  hair  stand  on  end, 

to  go  halves  with  (p.), 

to  be  half  seas  over, 

to  carry  it  with  a  high  hand 

over  (p.), 
to  have  a  hand  in, 
to  have  no  hand  in, 
to  shake  hands  with, 

to  go  hand  in  hand, 

to  have  on  one's  hands, 

to  Uve  from  hand  to  mouth, 

to  lend  a  hand, 
to  take  it  in  hand, 
to  be  hand  and  glove^ 


to  get  one's  hand  in  again, 
to  hand  about, 

to  be  handsome, 

to  be  very  handy  at, 

to  hang  by  a  thread, 

to  happen  to, 

to  be  happy  to  see  (p.), 

to  be  able  hardly, 

to  harm,  to  hurt, 

there  to  be  no  harm  in  (imp. ), 
to  mean  no  harm, 

to  do  (th.)  in  haste,  to  bring  it 
to  1^  hasty  conclusion. 


prendre  Vhahitude  <ie. 

avoir  Vhabitudt  (it. 

86  d6faire  d^une  habitude, 

prendre  un  mauvaia  pit. 

devenir  habittide. 

prendre  (p.)  aux  cheveux. 

s^arracher  lea  cheveux. 

( Xfendre  «»  cheveu  en  qualre. 

{ ne  pas  a'en  fcUloir  de  V6pais- 

aeurd'un  cheveu  ;  ( itre  a  deua 

doigta  de. 
faire  dresser  lea  cheveux. 
ae  mettre  de  moitU  avec  (p.) 
( Stre  entre  devx  vine, 
{mener  (p.)  rondement,  metier 

tambour  battant. 
avoir  part  A. 
n'Stre  pour  rien  dana. 
donner  une  poign6e  de  main  d,; 

aerrer  la  main  a. 
agir  de  concert ;  a^  entendre, 
avoir  aur  lea  braa. 
vivre  aujour  lejour;  vivre  au 

jour  la  joumie. 
( donner  un  coup  de  main, 
ae  faire  fort  de. 
( ^re  comrne  lea  deux  doiijta  de 

la  main;  etre  deux  tiles  soua 

un  bonnet ;  itre  a/mia  intimea. 
ae  rejliire  la  main, 
donner  de  main  en  mctm;  paa«ee 

a  la  ronde. 
itre  bien. 
etre  tr^-adroit  d. 
lenir  a  unfit, 
venir  d. 

itre  cliarmd  de  voir  (p.) 
avoir  de  la  peine  d. 
faire  mal  a  (proper) ;  faire  de 

la  peine  d  (tigurat.) 
n'y  avoir  pa^  de  mal  d  (imp.) 
ne  pas  aonger  a  mal ;  ne  pat  y 

entendre  m^ilice. 
bruequer  tme  of  aire. 


rOIOMATICAL    VERBS.  213 

to  hate  work,  ( aimer  la  hexogriKfaiU. 

to  have  (meaning  to  caase),        faire.^ 

to  have  it  (a  fact),  itre  aufait ;  (y  itre  ;  devmer. 

to  have  (it)  on  good  »athority,  savoir,  tenir,  de  bonne  part. 

to  have  best  do,  avoir  de  miextx  d/aire. 

to  have  better,  /aire  nueux  de. 

XXV. 

to  have  something  to  do  with  it,  y  itre  pour  fjuelque  ehoae, 

to  have  to  do  with  (i>.),  avoir  affaire  d. 

t(l  have  just  (before  a  verb),      venir  de. 

to  have  but  just,  ne/aire  que  de, 

to  have  but  just  (dined,  etc.),    sortir  de. 

to  have  a  borne,  avoir  un  chez  sol. 

to  have  ueitherhoasenur  home,  n'avoir  ni/eu  ni  ^'etfc 

to  have  company,  avoir  du  monde. 

to  have  designs  upon,  avoir  dea  mies  sitr. 

to  have  a  mint  of  money,  ( itre  tout  cousu  (Var. 

to  have  no  further  use  for,         n'aroir  plus  hesoin  de. 

to  have  a  mouth  from  ear  to  ear,  ( avoir  la  houche  f endue  ft»- 

qu'avx  oreilles, 
to  have  wherewithal,  ar>oir  de  quoi. 

to  mn  all  hazards,  risquer  le  tout  pour  le  ton' 

to  come  into  one's  head,  to  enter  venir  d,  la  tSte  de  ;  passer  />ar  la 

one's  head,  tSte  de. 

to  take  into  one's  head  to,  se  mettre  en  tSte  de  ;  s^aviaer  de, 

to  do  (th.)  out  of  one's  own   faire  (th.)  desonekef. 

head  or  accord, 
to  have  neither  head  nor  tail,    \^rC avwr niqueuenitile;  (n'at'otr 

ni  pieda  nijambea. 
to  hide  one's  head,  $e  cacher  la  figure. 

to  be  headed  by,  avoir  d  »a  t^te. 

to  be  hot-headed,  ( avoir  la  tete  pria  du  bonnet ; 

avoir  la  tete  chaude. 
to  be  in  charming  health,  te  porter  d  ravir. 

to  hear  of  or  from  (p.),  avoir,  recevoir,  des  nouvelles  de. 

to  hear  of  (th. ),  to  bear  said,     apprendre  ;  entendre  dire. 
to  hear  not,  {/aire  le  tourd. 

to  be  happy  to  hear,  apprendre  avec  pfaisir. 

to  hear  out,  entendre  jusqu^au  bout. 

to  hear  fine  news  about  (p.)    en  apprendre  de  belles  sur  It 

{ironic. ),  compte  de  (p. ) 

to  ask  to  be  heard,  demander  la  parole. 

to  be  tired  of  hearing,  ( avoir  les  oreiUes  rebattves  da, 

to  Ix!  hard  or  dull  of  bearing,    avoir  Vor&Ue  dure  ;  entendrt 

rather  deaf,  dur, 

to  be  within  hearings  ttre  d  portie  dCentendr*. 

to  have  at  heart,  avoir  d  eaxir  de. 


214 


rOIOMATICAX    VT5KB8. 


to  have  by  heart, 

to  have  the  h^^art  to, 

to  put  (p.)  out  of  heart, 

to  put  (p. )  into  a  heat  or  a  pas 

sion, 
to  take  to  one's  heels, 


to  be  the'heir  of, 

to  help  (at  tiible), 

to  help  (p.)  out  <>f  trouble, 

to  send  for  help, 

there  to  be  no  help  for, 

to  do  without  help, 

to  speak  highly  of, 

to  think  highly  of, 

to  hint,  to  give  a  hint, 

to  give  a  broad  hint, 

to  give  some  hints  on  the  sub- 
ject, 
to  hint  at  (p  \ 

to  hit  home, 

to  hit  theri<,lit  nail  on  the  head, 

to  hit  right, 

to  have  hit  it, 

to  hold  off, 

to  hold  on, 

to  hold  np  one's  head, 

to  hold  one's  tongue, 

to  let  go  one's  hold, 

to  encourage  (p.)  upon  the 
point  of  honour,  to  j'lque  (p.) 
on  the  score  of  honour, 

to  keep  (p.)  in  hope, 

to  draw  in  one's  horns, 

to  be  hot  (p.), 

to  be  hot  (th.), 

to  be  hot  (weather), 

to  keep  good  hours, 

to  keep  late  hours, 

to  have  a  house  of  one's  own, 

to  humble  the  pride  of, 

to  put  (p.)  out  of  humiiur, 

not  to  be  in  a  humour, 


savoir,  poss^der,  par  eceur. 

avoir  le  courage  de. 

/aire  perdre  courage  A  (p. ) 

inettre  {^.)  encolire ;  {ichanffer 
la  bile  d. 

(prendre  seajamhes  d  son  con  , 
ijouer  des  talons;  {prendre 
la  cU  des  champs. 

h^riter  de. 

srrvir  (th.)  d  (p.) 

tirer  (p.)  d'embarras. 

envoyer  chercher  main-forte. 

n'y  avoir  pas  de  remMe  d  (imp. ) 

(  voler  de  ses  propres  ailes. 

dire  du  bien  de. 

penser  avantageusement  de. 

donner  a  entendre  ;  faire  en- 
tendre ;  dire  d  demi-mot. 

/aire  entendre  d'une  manihre  A 
ne  fms  shj  tromper. 

( en  toucher  quelqjies  tnot$. 

( Jeter  des  pierres  dans  le  jardim 
de. 

porter  coup. 
( viettre  le  doigt  detaus. 
frapper  ju^te. 
( y  Stre. 

se  tenir  d  distance, 
tenir  toujours. 
tenir  la  tSte  droite. 
se  taire. 
Idcher  prise. 
piquer  (p. )  d^honneur. 


tenir  (p)  en  haleine. 

( rentrer  ses  comes  ;  (  mettre  de 

Veau  dans  son  vin. 
avoir  chaud. 
Stre  chaud. 
faire  chaud  (imp.) 
avoir  des  heures  r4gl4e». 
( ^tre  un  coureur  de  nuiL 
avoir  pignxm  sur  rue. 
( rabaisser  le  coquet  d. 
mettre  (p. )  de  mauvaise  humeur. 
( n'itre  pas  en  train. 


tDIOKATICAX   YERB8. 


216 


to  be  in  a  talkative  humour  or  itre  eh  tram  de  parler. 

mood, 
to  be  hungry, 
to  be  ravenously  hungry, 
to  have  a  hunt  for, 
to  settle,  to  do  up,  things 

hurriedly. 


avoir /cum. 

( avoir  untfavm  de  loup. 
se  inettre  d  la  recherche  d«. 
bdder  une  affaire. 


to  be  in  a  hurry, 

to  do  things  in  a  hurry, 

to  hurry  out  o£, 

to  hart, 

to  be  hurt. 


itre  press4. 
/aire  les  choses  A  la  hdte. 
aortir  pricipitamment  de. 
/aire  du  mal  d  (proper) ; 

du  tort  d  (fignrat.) 
avoir  du  mal. 


to  be  much  afraid  of  being  hurt,  (  avoir  bien  peur  pour  sa  peau, 

to  hush  up  the  business,  itoufferr  taffaire. 

to  fall  into  hysterica,  avoir  une  altaque  de  net/t. 

XXVL 

I 
to  have,  to  entertain,  an  idea,  avoir,  ae/aire,  une  idia, 
to  idle,  to  saunter,  to  hang     hattre  le  pav6. 
about, 

if,  to    trouver  mauvaia  que  (subj.) 


to  take  it  ill  or  amiss 

take  offence. 
to  be  taken  ill, 
to  feel  ill, 
to  feel  ill  all  over, 
to  be  dangerously  ill, 
to  get,  to  grow,  impatient, 
to  govern  (p.)  imperiously, 
to  impose  on  or  upon. 


to  be  imposed  upon. 


ttyrriber  malade. 

ae  sentir  mal,  malade. 

( avoir  mal  partout. 

ktre  entre  la  vie  et  la  morL 

a'impatienter. 

(  mpjier  (p.)  dla  ba^u^tte. 

en  impoaer  d;en/aire  accroire  A; 
donner  le  change  A  ;  surpren- 
dre  la  religion  de;  ( en  donner 
d garden d,  {en  conter d. 

en  tenir. 


not  to  allow  one's  self  to  be  im-  ne  paa  prendre  le  change. 
posed  upon. 


to  wish  an  impossibility. 


{vouloir  prendre  la  lune  avec 

les  dents, 
ae  p6n6trer  de. 
profiler  d'un  avantage. 
/aire  des  progr^  dans. 
Stre  (ffront4  comme  un  page. 
aller  et  venir. 


to  impress  one's  self  with, 

to  improve  an  advantage, 

to  improve  in  (study,  etc.), 

to  be  very  impudent, 

to  be  in  and  out, 

to  be  inactive,  to  sit  with  one's  reater  lea  bras  croia^. 

hands  folded, 
to  feel  a  very  great  inclination  ae  aentir  une  enviedimeauriede. 

to. 


216 


IDIOMATICAL   TEBBS. 


to  be  inclined  to, 
to  live  upon  one's  income, 
to  be  incumbent  on  (p.)  to, 
to  incur,  to  bring  on  one's  self, 
to  be  indebted  to  (p.)  for, 
to  be  indefatigable  for  (p.), 
to  indulge  one's  self  with  (th.), 
to  treat  one's  self  to, 

to  indulge  one's  self  too  much, 

to  take  information,  to  inquire 
about, 

to  supply  (p.)  with  informa- 
tion, 

to  repay  with  ingratitude, 

to  injure  (p.), 

to  inquire  of  (p.)  about, 

to  inquire  for  (p. ), 
to  inquire  into  (th.), 
to  be  inquisitire  about  (th.), 
to  insist  on, 

to  intend  to,  to  have  an  inten- 
tion to, 
to  intend  for  (p  ), 
to  attend  to  the  interests  of, 

to  bring  (p.)  over  to  one's  inte- 
rest, 
to  promote  the  interests  of, 
to  have,  to  feel,  an  interest  in, 
to  interrupt  (p.),  to  cut  short, 
to  introduce  (p.)  into  (a  room), 
to  introduce  (p.)  to  (p.), 
to  intrude  upon  (p.), 
to  strike  the  iron  while  it  is 

hot, 
to  irritate  stUl  more. 


itrt  enclin,  ports,  diaposd,  d. 

t>iwre  de  ses  rentes. 

Stre  du  devoir  de{p.)  de. 

a'altirer. 

4tre  redevable  d  (p.)  de. 

( «e  mettre  en  quatre  pour  (p.) 

86  rigaler  de ;  ( «'en  donner  d 
cceur-joie ;  ( a'en  passer  V en- 
vie. 

8^4couter  trop. 

prendre  des  renseignementa  sttr. 

fournir  des  renseignffments  «ttr 

(th.)  d  (p.) 
payer  (p.)  d' ingratitude, 
/aire  tort  a  ;  faire  injure  &, 
aHnfcyrmerd  (p.)  de  (tli.);  (fo- 

mander  des  nouvelks  a  (p. )  (^ 
demander. 
examiner. 

Stre  curieux  de  aavoir  (th.) 
tenir  d. 
avoir  intention,  orl'intention,  de. 

destiner  A. 

veiller  aux  intSrSts  d«  ;  soigner 

les  int4rSts  de. 
mettre  (p.)  dans  ses  int^rStt, 

favoriser  les  intSrits  de. 

Stre  int4res86,  sHntSre-tser,  A, 

couper  la  parole  d  (p.) 

faire  entrer. 

pr4senter  a. 

importuner  ;  cUranger. 

battre  le  fer  pendant  qu'il  eat 

diaud. 
Jeter  de  VhviU  mar  le/eu. 


xxvn. 


to  be  jealous, 

to  be  full  of  jests, 

to  be  in  jest, 

to  turn  to  a  jest, 

to  know  how  to  take  a  jest, 

to  understand  jesting. 


{86  mettre  martd  en  tSte. 
avoir  toujours  le  mot  pour  rirt, 
plaisanter. 

toumer  en  plaisanterie, 
entendre  raillerie. 
entendre  la  raillerie. 


ICIOHAIICAX   TKEBS. 


217 


to  iest  abont  (th.), 

to  join  in  the  sport, 

to  begin  a  journey, 

to  take  a  journey,  to  be  on  a 

journey, 
to  fill  with  joy, 
to  weep  for  joy, 
to  be  a  judge  of, 
to  leave  (p.)  to  ju'lge, 
to  pass  judgment  upon  one's 

self, 
to  rise  upin  jndgmetit  against, 
to  be  just  the  thing  for. 


raiUer. 

«e  mettre  de  la  partie, 
se  mettre  en  voyage, 
foure  «n  voyage,  itre  en  voyage^ 

voyager, 
eombler  dejoie. 
pleurer  de  joie. 
«e  connattre  en. 
en  laisser  {fi.)jug«, 
passer  condanuiatioa, 

accuser. 

itrt  Paffaxn  d& 


to  keep  to  (th.), 

to  keep  apart, 

to  keep  the  best  bit  to  the  last, 

to  keep  a  carriage, 

to  keep  by  or  in  storey 

to  keep  a  bouse, 

to  keep  a  servant, 

to  keep  straight  on, 

to  keep  one's  seat, 

to  keep  one's  temper,  to  keep 

cool, 
to  keep  in  health, 
to  keep  (reading), 
to  keep  time  (watch), 
to  keep  within  doors, 
to  keep  in  one's  situation, 
to  keep  to  the  rule, 
to  keep  one  waiting, 
to  keep  good  watch, 
to  kick, 

to  kill  two  birds  with  one  stone, 
to  kill  by  inches, 
to  kill  with  kindness, 

to  be  killed  on  the  spot, 
to  pay  in  kind, 

to  be  kind  to, 

to  be  80  kind  as  to, 


ien  tenir  d. 

{/aire  bande  a  part. 

( garder  (th.)  pour  la  bonnt 

bouche. 
router  carrosse;  avoir  6quipa,ge. 
tenir  en  r^erve. 
tenir  une  maison. 
avoir  un  domestique. 
aller  tout  droit. 

ne  pas  86  d6ranger  ;  resterama. 
garder  son  sang-froid. 

rester  en  sanU. 
eontinuer  de  (lire. ) 
aller  bien. 
rester  a  la  jnaison. 
se  maintenir  dans  sa  position 
rester  Jidde  d  la  rigle. 
/aire  attendre. 
faire  bonne  garde, 
donner  des  coups  de  pied  A. 
{/aire  d^une  pierre  deux  coups, 
/aire  mourir  d  petit  fetL 
tuer  de  caresses  ;  ( manger  de 

caresses, 
rester  sur  le  carreau. 
payer  en  nature  ;  {payer  de  la 

mAine  monnaie. 
avoir  de  la  bonUpour;  itre  Ixm 

pour, 
itre  assez  bon  pour ;  avoir  la 

bonti,  Uobligeance,  lacomplau 

aaace,  de. 


218  IDIOUATICAX   YEBBS. 

to  do  a  kindness  to  (p.),  faire,  une  amUiS  d  ;  rendrc  ser- 

vice A.  • 

to  fall  on  one's  kneea,  tomber  d  genotix,  se  meUre  d 

genoux. 

to  knock  (p. )  down,  assommer,  terrasser. 

to  be  knocked  up,  {Stre rendu. 

to  know  (by  senses),  to  be  ac-    connattre.^ 
quainted,. 

to  know  (by  mind),  to  be  aware  savoir. 
of, 

to  know  (th.)  from  (th.),  distinguer  (th.)  de  (th.) 

to  know  thoroughly,  savoir  d  fond ;  ( aavoir  aur  le 

bout  du  doigt. 

to  know  by  name,  connattre  de  nom. 

to  know  by  sight,  connattre  de  vm. 

to  know  of  old,  connattre  de  longue  main. 

to  know  (p.)  by  (his  walk,  etc.),  reconnaUre  (p.)  d  (sa  marche, 

etc. ) 

to  know  how  things  go  on,         itre  au  courant ;  6tre  au  courant 

des  affaires. 

tolet(p.)knowhowthing8goon,  mettre  {p.)  au  couranL 

to  know  better,  n'etre  pas  si  sot. 

to  know  what  to  think  of  it,      so.voir  d  quoi  s'en  tenir. 

to  know  nothing  of  the  world,    ( n' avoir  jamais  perdu  de  vue  le 

clocher  de  son  village. 

to  let  know,  faire  connattre,   faire   savoir, 

faire  dire  (th.)  d  (p.) 

to  be  very  knowing  (  en  savoir  long. 

to  have  just  sufficient  know-  en  savoir  juste  assez  pmur. 
ledge  of  a  thing  to  be  able  to, 

to  have  a  thorough  knowledge  Urefort,  Ureferr6,  sur. 
of  (science), 

to  knuckle  to  or  under,  to  yield,  ( mettre  les  pouces ;  ae  rendre. 

XXVIIL 
L 
to  labour  under  great  difficul-    lutter  eontre  de  grandes  diffU 
ties,  cuUM ;     avoir    de    grandes 

difficult^  d  surmonter. 
to  have  one's  labour  for  one's    en  itre  pour  sa  peine. 

pains, 
to  be  laid  up,  Slreforc^  de  garder  la  ckambre  ; 

garder  le  lit. 
to  see  how  the  land  lies,  tonder  le  terrain  ;  {prendre  Pair 

du  btireau. 


0)  With  the  exception  of  ne  connattre  que  (to  Xnow  nobody,  or  nothing,  but) 
omwaUre  cannot  be  followed  by  a  conjunction.  ' 


lOIOHATICAL    7EUBS. 

to  have  landed  property,  avoir  pignon  aur  rue, 

to  take,  to  go  on,  a  lark,  /aire  une  escapade, 

to  be  late  (impers.),  d/re  tard  (imp.) 

to  be  late  (persons,  watches,  ilre  en  retard. 

etc.), 

to  be  too  late  (impers.),  n'Stre pltis  tempa  de  (imp., 

to  laugh  heartily,  to  have  a  rire  de  bon  caeur. 

good  laugh, 
to  laugh  immoderately. 


219 


to  laugh  in  the  face  of, 
to  laugh  in  one's  sleeve, 
to  laugh  on  the  wrong  side  of 
the  mouth. 


(  rire  d  gorge  d4ploy6e  ;  ( rire  d 
se  tenir  lea  cdtea ;  rire  aux 
larmes., 

rire  au  nez  de. 

rire  aouscape,  rire  danasabarbe. 

( rire  de  travera  ;  ( rire  jaune  ; 
( rire  du  bout  dea  denta  ;  ( rire 
comme  un  chien  qui  ovale  une 
guSpe. 

ae  chatouiller  pour  at  f aire  rire. 


to  laugh   without  canse,   to 

strive  to  appear  cheerful, 
to  laugh  at  a  creditor, 
to  be  the  laughing-stock, 
to  afford  subject  for  laughter, 
to  launch  forth  into  abuse, 

to  takethelawintoone'shands,  sefaire  justice  d  aoi-m&me. 
to  lay  ten  to  one,  parier  dix  contre  un. 

to  lay  waste  with  fire  and  sword,  mettre  tout  dfeu  et  d  aang. 


payer  (p. )  en  monnaie  de  singe, 
itre  lejouet,  la  riaie,  de. 
appriter  a  rire  d  (p. ) 
«e  ripandre  en  invectivea. 


to  lay  up  for  a  rainy  day, 
to  lay  the  blame  on. 


to  lay  the  cloth, 

to  lay  hold  on  or  o^ 

to  lay  it  to, 

to  lead  a  wandering  life^ 

to  turn  over  a  new  leaf, 

to  be  leaning  upon, 

to  leave  it  to, 

to  leave  in  the  lurch. 


(  garder  une  poire  pour  la  soif. 
rejeter  la/aute  sur;  a'en  prendre 

d;  {mettre  tout  aur  le  doa 

de ;  donner  tort  d;  prendre 

(p.)  dpartie. 
w/ettre  la  nappe,  metbre  le  coiir 

vert, 
taimr. 
ien  prendre  d  (p. )  <2e  (th. ) 

fmener  une  vie  de  bofiSme. 
changer  de  (jamme. 
avoir  lea  coudes  appuy^s  sur. 
«'en  remettre,  e'en  rapporter,  d, 
( planter  Id  ;  { laisser  en  plant 


to  leave  no  stone  unturned  to,  remuer  ciel  et  terre  pour. 

to  be  upon  one's  last  legs,  tirer  d  safin. 

not  to  leave  (p.)  a  leg  to  stand  ( mettre  (p.)  au  pied  du  mur. 

upon, 

to  be  (th  ree  inches)  in  length  by  avoir  [troia  poucea)  de  long  aur 

(two)  in  breadth,  (deux)  de  large  ;  avoir  {troia 

poucea)  de  longueur  aur  {ileux) 

de  largeur;  itre  long  de  {troia 

poucea)  et  large  de  {deux). 


220 


miOMATICAl.    TEEB8. 


to  go  great  lengths, 

to  let  alone  (p. ), 

to  let  alone  (th.), 

to  let  go  one's  hold, 

to  let  out, 

to  let  the  cat  out  of  the  bag, 

to  be  liable  to, 

to  take  gr@at  liberties, 

to  set  at  liberty, 

to  lie  scattered  about  (speaking 

of  papers,  etc.), 
to  save  the  life  of, 
to  lead  a  fast  life, 
to  be  a  good  life, 
to  keep  life  and  soul  together, 
to  give  a  lift,  a  helping  band, 
to  view  things  in  their  best 

light, 
to  be  light  or  daylight,  broad 

daylight, 
to  be  as  like  as  two  peas, 

to  have  like  to,  to  be  like  to, 


to  like  (a  place), 


aller  bien  loin. 

laisser  tranquille,  or  en  repot. 

ne  pas  toucher  d. 

Idcher  prise. 

laisser  sortir. 

( dicouvrir  le  pot  au  rose, 

Stre  sujet,  exposi,  d. 

( s'4manciper. 

mettre  en  liberty. 

itre  tout  en  dAsordre  ;  trainer, 

sauver  la  vie  d. 

mener  la  vie  d  grandes  guidet, 

avoir  la  vie  dure. 

ivivoter. 
donner  un  coup  de  main, 
voir  tout  en  couleur  de  rose. 

/aire  jour ;  /aire  grand  jour 

(imp.) 
se  ressembler  comme  deux 

gouttes  d^eau. 
petiser  ;  faillir  ;  peu  s'en  fatit 

que  (imp.) 
se  plaire  d. 


XXIX. 


to  look  like  (p.),  to  be  like, 

to  render  like  for  like, 

to  have  a  liking  for  (p.), 

to  drop  a  line  by  post, 

to  be  on  the  list  of  competitors, 

to  listen  to  reason, 

to  take  literally, 

to  live  well, 

to  live  in  clover, 

to  live  on  or  by, 

to  live  in  common, 

to  live  close  by, 

to  get  an  honest  livelihood, 

to  seek  a  livelihood, 

to  make  a  living, 

to  load  with  favours, 

to  lock, 

to  lock  up, 

to  be  long  of,  to  tarry, 

to  think  it  so  long. 


ressembler  A. 

(  rendre  la  pareille. 

avoir  du  goUt  poor. 

Jeter  un  mot  d  la  paste, 

Sire  sur  les  rangs. 

entendre  raison. 

prendre  (th.)  d  la  lettre,  aupied 

de  la  lettre. 
faire  bonne  chirt. 
vivre  d  gogo. 
vivre  de. 

faire  bourse  commune, 
demeurer  ia  pris. 
gagner  honn^tement  sa  vfa, 
chercher  d  gagner  sa  vie, 
gagner  sa  vie. 
combler  de  bien/aits. 
fermer  a  cU. 
mettre  sous  cU. 
tarder  d. 
fy-ouver  le  temps  si  long. 


IDIOMATICAX    TEHB8. 


221 


to  know  the  long  and  the  short 

of  it, 
to  long  for,  to  have  a  longing  for, 

to  look  (to  appear), 
to  look  ill  or  well, 
to  look  better  (p.), 
to  look  like  or  as  if, 

to  look  very  mucb  as  if, 
to  look,  to  be,  ladylike, 
to  look  solky. 


connattre  le  fort  et  le  faible  dt 

(th.) 
avoir  un  grand  dUnr  de ;  ao*- 

pirer  apris. 
avoir  Pair. 

avoir  bonne,  or  mauvaiae,  mine, 
avoir  meilleure  mine, 
avoir  Fair  de  ;  {prendre  la  tour- 

nure  de. 
avoir  bien  la  mine  de. 
avoir  Pair  distiugui. 
/aire  la  ynine. 


XXX 


to  look  after  or  to  (th.), 

to  look  for, 

to  look  for  a  knot  iu  a  balrash, 

to  look  forward  with  pleasure 
(before  a  verb), 

to  look  on  (said  of  a  room,  win- 
dow, etc.), 

to  look  lovingly  at,  to  ogle, 

to  look  cool  upon  (p.);  to  keep 
aloof  from  ;  to  tarn  the  cold 
shoulder  to, 

to  look  sharp, 

to  look  sharp  after, 

to  look  about  one, 

to  look  in, 

to  look  over,  to  glance  over, 
to  be  ill  looked  upon,  disliked, 
to  be  well  looked  upon,  liked, 
to  keep  a  sharp  look  out, 

to  lose  one's  reputation, 

to  lose  sight  of, 

to  lose  one's  temper, 

to  sustain,  to  suffer,  to  meet 

with  a  loss, 
to  be  at  a  loss  what  to  say, 
to  be  quite  at  a  loss, 

to  be  lost  in  apologies,  thanks, 

etc., 
to  be  lost  to  (all  feeling,  etc.). 


avoir  goin  de. 

chercker. 

chercher  midi  d  qitatorze  heures, 

aefaire  unefite,  un  plaisir,  de, 

donner  aur  ;  avoir  vue  mm*. 

(Jaire  les  yeux  doux  d 
baltrefrotd  d. 


avoir  Fair  &veUl6  ;  ae  dicker. 
■ntrveUler  goigneusement. 
avoir  lea  yeux  ouverta  ;  avoir 

Voalouvert. 
faire  une  petite  visile  ;  {dire  un 

petit  bonjour. 
Jeter  lea  yeux  -sur  ;  parcourir. 
itre  mal  vu. 
itre  bien  vu. 
{Streaurlequi-vive;  avoir  VeaH 

ouvert. 
ae  perdre  de  reputation, 
perdre  (p.  or  th.)  de  vue. 
perdre  aon  aang-froid ;  perdre 

la  tete. 
eaauyer,  faxre^  une  perte, 

ne  aavohr  que  dire. 

{Stre  au  bout  de  son  latin,  de 

son  rouleau  ;  a^y  pei-dre. 
ae  confondre  ea  excuses,  en  re- 

merctmrnts,  etc. 
avoir  perdu  {lout  sentiment,  etc.) 


222  IDIOMATICAL    VERBS. 

to  give  (th.)  up  for  lost,  regarder  (th.)  comme perdu;  en 

/aire,  or  prendre,  son  deuil. 

not  to  give  it  up  for  lost,  ne  pas  ae  tenir  pour  battu, 

to  give  one's  love  to,  /aire  ses  amitiSs  d. 

to  send  one's  love  to,  /aire/aire  ses  amitiia  d. 

to  be  in  love  with,  ^tre  amouretix  de. 

to  be  in  luck,  to  be  lucky,         Stre  en  honheur,  avoir  du  6o»i- 

heur,  jouer  de  bmiheur. 

to  be  always  in  luck,  ( 4tre  n6  coiff6 ;  Ure  en  veine. 

to  have  bad  luck,  avoir  du  malheur;  jouer  de  mal' 

heur  ;  avoir  du  guignon. 

to  bring  good  luck,  bad  luck,    porter  bonheur,  porter  malheur, 

to  have  a  lucky  hand,  avoir  la  main  heureuse. 

XXXI. 

M 

to  be  mad,  itre/ou  ;  avoir  perdu  la  tSte. 

to  do  a  mad  or  hare-brained  /aire  un  coup  de  tSte ;  {fairedes 
action,  siennes. 

to  be  exceedingly  well-made,  Mre  fait  d  peindre;  ( itre  fait 
handsome,  au  tour. 

to  make  (before  an  adjective),    rendre. 

to  make  light  of,  faire  bon  inarck4  de  ;  faire  peu 

de  cas  de. 

to  make  much  of,  faire  grand  cas  de  ;  faire  des 

caresses,  des  amities,  d. 

to  make  much  of  one's  self,        8^4couter  beaucoup. 

to  make  mountains  of  molehills,  J/aire d'une  moucheun  iUphant. 

to  make  out  (th.),  deviner  ;  trouver ;  comprendre, 

to  make  it  one's  duty  to,  ae  faire  un  devoir  de. 

to  make  it  up  with  (p. ),  se  raccommoder,  se  r4coruMier, 

avec. 

to  make  the  best  of,  tirer  parti  de  ;  faire  valoir. 

to  make  the  best  of  a  bad  game,  se  tirer  d! affaire  le  mieux  qu''on 

peut. 

to  make  up  for  (th.),  rearer  (figur.),  remplacer  (pro- 

per.) 

to  make  up  for  (th,)  by,  se  rattraper  de  (th.)  sur. 

to  make  up  one's  mind  to,  prendre  le  parti  de. 

to  make  a  fuss,  faire  de  I'embarras. 

to  make  room  or  way  for,  faire  place  d. 

to  make  use  of,  se  servir  de. 

to  make  one's  mouth  water,       {faire  venir  I'eau  d  la  houche  d 

(p.) 
to  make  hay  while  the  sun    baltre  le  fer  pendant  qu'il  est 

shines,  chaud. 

to  make  money,  yugner,  amasser,  de  I'argenL 


IBIOHATICAJ.   TESBS. 


223 


to  make  off, 

to  manage  one's  affairs  well, 

to  manage  so  that, 

to  mangle  a  word. 


( dUcamper ;  (filer. 
( menet  bien  sa  barque, 
/aire  en  gorte  que. 
e-ttropier  un  mot. 


xxxn. 


to  have  manners,  to  be  polite, 

well  bred, 
to  improve  in  maimers. 
to  mark  well, 
to  get  married, 
to  be  master  of  a  langnage, 
to  be  a  match  for, 

to  find,  to  meet  with,  one's 
match, 

to  match  (th.)  with  (th.), 

to  have  sufficient  materials, 

to  be  the  matter  (th.), 

to  be  the  matter  (p.), 

to  come  to  the  matter,  to  the 

point, 
to  find  matter,  subject,  reason, 
to  settle  matters, 
to  mean, 
to  mean  well  (gener.), 

to  mean  well  to  (p.), 
not  to  mean  to  do  it, 
to  mean  no  harm, 

to  have  the  means  requisite  to 
(do), 

to  measure  other  people's  com 
by  one's  own  bushel, 

to  be  measured  for  (a coat,  eta ), 

to  abstain  from  meat  (by  re- 
ligion), 

not  to  abstain  from  meat, 

to  meddle  with  or  in,  to  inter- 
fere, 

to  meddle  with  everything, 

not  to  meddle  with  it, 
to  meet  (by  chance), 
to  meet  (on  purpose,  by  ap- 
pointment). 


savoir  vivre  ;  avoir  du  javotr 

tnvre. 
devenir  civil. 

noter  bien  ;  remarqtier  bien. 
Be  marier. 

po8s6der  une  langue  dfond. 
itre  en  6tat  de/aire  tiled,  ;  Stre 

de  la  force  de. 
trouverplua/ortqueaoi;  trouver 

son  maitre ;  ( trouver  chaua- 

sure  d  son  pied, 
assortir  d,  or  avee. 
( tailler  en  plein  drap. 
y  avoir,  ttrt  qitatMm  de  (imp.) 
avoir. 
venirau/aiL 

trouver  de  quoi. 

arranger  lea  choses;  ^arranger. 

vouloir  dire. 

avoir  de  bonnes  intentions  ;  itr$ 

de  bonne  foL 
vouloir  le  bten  de. 
ne  pas  lefaire  expri*. 
(  ne  pas  y  entendre  maliee  ;  n» 

pas  songer  A  maL 
itre  en  mesure  de.      * 

meaurer  les  autre*  d  son  aume, 

faire  prendre  sa  mesure  pour. 
/aire  maigre. 

/aire  graa. 
se  mMer  de. 

mettre  le  nez  oil  Con  n'a  qn» 

/aire, 
ne  pas  ify  /rotter, 
rencontrer. 
r^mndrs  ;  allar  trouver  ;  voir. 


224 


EDIOMATICAL    TEEBS. 


to  meet  half  way,  to  divide  the  fairechacunlamoiti^  dv  chemin; 

diflference,  ae  rencomrer  d  mi-chemin:  par* 

layer  le  diff^reiid  (figurat.) 
to  meet  with  (an  accident),         arriver. 
to  meet  with  (an  obstacle),        rericontrer. 
to  meet  with  a  rebuff,  a  denial,  en  avoir  le  dimenH. 
to  meet  with  a  refusal,  essayer  un  refits. 

to  come  to  'meet,  venir  au-devant  de. 

to  go  to  meet,  aller  au-devant  de. 

to  meet    (expenses,    engage-   /aire  face  a. 

ments),  • 

to  make  both  ends  meet, 


(joindre  lea  deux   houts  en- 

8end)le. 
avoir  la  m4moire  courte .,  (  avoir 
une  m^Tnoire  de  li^vre. 
to  mend,  to  improve,  through   gefaire  avec  le  tempg. 
time  (things), 


to  have  a  short  memory. 


to  mend  matters, 

to  be  middling  (health), 

to  be  middling  (things). 


amAliorer  les  choses, 

aller  tout  doucement. 

itre  passable  ;  ( Ure  entre  le  ziat 

et  le  zest ;  ( Stre  romme  ci  com- 

me  fa. 
^tre  au  coeur  de  Vhiver, 
s^adoucir. 
/aire  venir  Veau  au  movdin. 


to  be  in  the  midst  of  winter, 

to  get  milder  (weather), 

to  bring  grist  to  the  mill, 

to  have  a  millstone  about  one's  (  avoir  la  corde  au  ccm. 

neck, 
not  to  mince  the  matter,  to    ( ««  V avoir  point  mdch6. 

tell  a  thing  plum  and  plain, 
to  mind  (th.). 


to  be  easy  in  one's  mind, 
to  be  of  sound  mind, 
to  be  oat  of  one's  naind, 

to  bear  in  mind, 
to  have  a  mind  to, 
to  have  (th.)  in  mind, 
to  open  one's  mind  to, 
to  know  one's  own  mind, 
to  change  one's  mind, 
to  mind  trifles, 


to  have  everything  to  one's 

mind, 
to  dwell  upon  one's  mind, 
to  speak  one's  mind  freely, 


tfoccuper  de,  faire  attention  ft, 

prendre  garde  (before  a  verb). 
avoir  Fesprit  tranquille. 
6tre  sain  d'esprit. 
Sire  hors  de  son  bon  sens  ;  omnr 

perdu  la  iSte. 
ne  pas  oublier. 
avoir  envie  de. 
avoir  (th.)  present  d  PeapriL 
a'ouvrir  d. 

aavoir  ce  que  Fon  veut. 
changer  d'avis,  d'opinion. 
iarr&ter  d  des  bagatelles;  ^a- 

m,user  aux  bagatelles  de  la 

porte. 
avoir  tout  d  aouhaiL 

tenir  au  coeur  d. 
dire  franchement  aa  fat^on   d« 
penser  ;  dire  sa  pensdr.. 


miOKATICAL   TEHBS. 


225 


to  tell  one's  mind  (about  some- 
thing unpleasant), 
to  be  very  mischievous, 

to  misconstrue  everything, 
to  be  this  minute  (gone,  etc.), 
to  miss  the  mark, 
to  miss  (p.  or  tb.), 
to  mistake  one's  oum, 


dire  tout  ee  que  Von  a  tnir  It 

coeur. 
(  itre  michaiU  comme  un  due 

rotige. 
prendre  tout  d  contre-seru. 
ne/aire  que  de  {partir,  etc.) 
( iiianquer  ton  coup, 
tfapercevmr  de  Cabsence  de. 
se  tromper  d'tuymme. 


to  mistake  for, 

to   mistake  (tb.),  to  be  mis 

taken  in, 
to  make  a  mistake, 
to  mistrust,  to  doubt,  to  sua 

pect, 
to  mix  (tb.)  with  (th.), 
to  keep  St.  Monday, 
to  be  short  of  money, 
to  receive  money, 
to  be  worth  any  money. 


xxxm. 

prendre  pour. 

«e  tromper  de,  ttur  ordcuia. 


/aire  une  m^prise. 
«c  m4Jier,  se  d4fier,  de. 

mSler  (tb.)  avec  (th.) 
{/aire  le  lundi. 

Stre,  se  trouver,  court  d'argent. 
recevoir,  toucher,  de  CargenL 
itre  impayable  (tigurat. ) 


to  have  money  about  one's  self,  avoir  de  V argent  sur  soi. 


avoir  de  Fargent  en  caisse, 

placer  de  Vargtnt. 

placer  de  Fargent   d  fondt 

perdxis. 
Jeter  V argent  par  lesJenStres. 


to  have  money  by, 
to  invest  money, 
to  sink  money, 

to  throw  away  one's  money, 

to  turn  everything  into  money,  /aire  argent  de  tout. 

to  make  the  most  of,  tirer  parti  de  ;  /aire  valoir. 

to  mourn  for  (th.),  tfaffliger  de, 

to  move  (to  stir),  ( bouger. 

to  move  (from  one's  residence^  d&m&ntiger. 

to  be  continually  on  the  move,  ne  pouvoir  retter  en  plaoi. 

to  be  too  much,  too  bad,  etre  trop/ort  (de. ) 

to  be  too  much  or  too  many.      Sire  de  trop. 

to  be  muddy,  /aire  crotU  (in^) 

to  muse  upon,  to  dream  of,        rever  d. 


to  nail  np  a  door,  a  window, 

to  hit  the  nail  on  the  head, 
to  be  good-natured, 
to  be  naughty  (children), 
t*  be  at  nought. 


N 


condamner  une  parte,  ume  /eitt- 

tre. 
{jnettreledoiytdessua  ;  {ffitre. 
etre  cTun  bon  natureL 
{/aire  le  nUchanL 
{ itre  d  quia. 


226 


rDIOMATICAl   TERB8. 


to  come  to  nought, 
near,  nearly,  almost, 


to  be  nearly  falling,  dying,  etc., 

to  be  not  nearly  so, 

to  be  as  neat  as  possible, 

to  have  the  necessaries  of  life, 

to  be  under  the  necessity  of, 

to  make  a  virtue  of  necessity, 

to  stand  in  need,  to  need, 

♦•o  have  a  sort  of  negligence, 

carelessness,    nonchalance, 

about  one, 
to  be  next  door  neighbours, 
to  feather  one's  nest, 
nevertheless, 
to  wish  a  good  night, 
to  stay  out  all  night, 
to  pass  a  sleepless  night, 
to  sit  up  all  night, 
to  be  quite  night, 
to  say  no, 
to  nonplus  (p.), 
to  talk  nonsense,  to  rave. 


to  be  nonsense  to, 

to  lead  by  the  nose, 

to  thrust  one's  nose,  or  fingers, 

into, 
to  note  down,  to  take  note  of, 
to  take  notice,  to  observe, 
to  amount  to  nothing, 

to  make  nothing  of,  to  make 

light  of, 
to  do  nothing  but, 
to  be  nothing  to  (p.), 
to  be  nothing  to  (th.), 
to  take  no  notice  of, 

to  make  up  a  number, 

to  nurse,  tocoddle.one'sself up, 

to  have  a  hard  nut  to  crack. 


ne  pas  r6ussir. 

peu  s'en/aut,  il  ne  tient  d  rien, 

que  (with    the    subjunctive 

and  ne  before.) 
manquer  de  tomber,  de  mourir, 

etc. 
n^etrepas  d  beaucouppr^  aussi. 
Stre  tir4  d  quatre  6pingles. 
avoir  le  n4cessaire. 
se  voir/orc4  de. 
/aire  de  n6ce8sit4  virtu, 
avoir  besoin  de. 
avoir  du  laiaser -oiler. 


demeurer  porte  d  porte. 
/aire  son  nid. 
ne  laisser  pa^s  de, 
dire,  sotihaiter,  le  bonsoir  A. 
ne  pas  rentrer  de  toute  la  nuit, 
{passer  une  nuit  blanche, 
(passer  la  nuit. 
/aire  tout  d/ait  nuit  (imp.) 
dire  que  non. 
{mettre  (p.)  A  quia. 
d4raisonner ;  dire  des  sottises  ; 

(  dire  des  bStises;  ( coiiier  des 

balivemes ;  ( battre  la  cam- 

pagne. 
itre  absurde,  une/olie,  une  sot- 

tise,  de. 
(mener  par  le  bout  du  nez. 
l/ourrer  le  nez  dans. 

prendre  note  de. 
reinarquer,  observer, 
riavancer  en  rien  ;  ne  signi/er 

rien. 
ne  /aire  aucun  cos  de;  eroire 

que  ce  n'est  rien  de. 
ne  /aire  que. 
ne  point  regarder. 
ne  rien /aire  d. 
ne  /aire  aucune  attention  A  ;  ne 

/aire  semblant  de  rim. 
/aire  nombre. 
( se  dorloter. 
avoir  du/il  A  retordre. 


XDIOMATICAL   YEBBS. 


227 


to  take  an  oath, 
to  take  one's  oath  npoa  it, 
to  sow  one's  wild  oats, 
to  meet  an  objection, 
to  have  no  objection, 
to  oblige. 


X  vxy, 

0 


to  be  obliged  to  (do). 


prSter  aerment 

en  mettre  la  Tnain  au/eu, 

Jeter  aes  premiera  feitx. 

oiler  au-devarU  cCune  objection. 

me  demander  pat  mieux  qtie  de. 

/aire  le plaisir  d  (p.)  (^ (before  a 

verb.) 
itre  tenu  d. 
to  observe  (th.)  to  (p.),  to  point  /aire  observer  (th.)  d  (p.) 

out, 
to  endeavour  to  surmount  an    enfoncer  une  parte  ouverte. 

obstacle  that  does  not  exist, 
to  be  obstinate  in, 
to  obtain  a  hearing, 
to  be  obvious,  to  be  evident, 
to  have  occasion  for,  to  require,  avoir  beaoin  de. 
to  have  no  occasion  for,  ri avoir  que/aire  de. 

to  give  occasion,  donner  lieu  or  aujet  de  (before  a 

verb.) 
to  have  the  odds  against  one's   avoir  affaire  dk  forte  partie. 

self, 
to  be  made  of  odds  and  ends. 


a'obatiner  d. 

tefaire  4couter. 

itre  ivideiU  ;  ( satUer  aux  yeux. 


to  be  (a  mile)  oS, 

never  to  be  off  one's  le^ 

to  be  well,  or  badly,  oil", 


(  itre  fait  de  piices  et  de  mor- 

ceavx, 
Stre  d  (u»  miUe)  de  digtanee. 
(  itre  toujoura  aur  aea  jambea. 
itre  bien,    or    mal,    dana  aea 
affairea. 
to  get  well  oS,    to  com*  off    en  itre  qvitte  d  ben  marehi. 

cheaply, 
to  take  offeaoe  at,  ioffenaer,  ae  piqtier,  aefdcher, 

de;  prendre   en   mauvaiae 
part. 
to  ogle,  faire  lea  yeux  dovx  d  ;  lancer 

dea  ceilladea  d. 
to  be  old  enough  to^  itre  d'dge  A,  or  en  dge  de. 

to  get,  to  grow,  old,  vieiUir  ;  ae  faire  vieux. 

to  beneitheroff  noron(thing8h  n'itre  ni  Fun  ni^autre. 
to  be  neither  off  nor  on  (pers.),  voxdoir  et  ne  vouloir  paa. 
to  be  all  one  to,  itre  6(jal  d  ;  ifyre  la  mime  ekoae 

pour. 
to  be  one  of  ua,  itre  dea  nitres;. 

only,  merely,  ne  faire  que. 

to  lay  open,  mettre  d  d^cowtert 

to  speak  openly,  pnrler  d  coeur  ouverL 

to  do  it  upeuly,  ne  point  ien  cachet. 


228 


LDlOilATICAX   VEUBS. 


to  operate, 

to  be  of  opinion, 

to  have  a  fair  opportunity, 

to  miss,  to  let  slip,  the  oppor- 
tunity, 

to  seize  the  opportunity, 

to  seize  opportunity  by  the 
forelocK, 

to  oppose  (th. ), 

to  be  out  (pers.), 

to  be  out  (fire), 

to  be  out  of  order, 

to  be  out  of  patience^ 

to  make  an  outcry, 

to  outface  (p.), 

to  outwit  (p.), 

to  be  almost  done  out, 

to  over-excite  (p. ), 

to  overrate  (th.), 

to  pay  (p.)  back  in  his  OWQ  coin, 

to  tell  (p.)  his  own, 

to  have  nothing  of  one's  own, 


faire  effet. 

Stred'uoia. 

avoir  beau  jeit. 

manqner,  laisser  ichapper,  lata* 

ser  passer,  I'occasion. 
( prendre  la  halle  au  bond, 
{prendre   V occasion  aux  che- 

veux. 
mettre  de  Vempichement  d. 
itre  sorti. 
Stre  4teint. 
itre  dArangi. 
perdre  patience. 
Jeter,  pousser,  les  hauts  cria. 
rompre  envisiire  avec  (p.) 
( dajner  le  pion  d;  itre  plus  fin 

que. 
( ne  battre  plus  que  d'une  aile. 
monter  la  tSte  A  (p.) 
attacker  trop  d'importance  A. 
( rendre  la  pareilh  d  (p. ) 
dire  a,  (p.)  son  fait, 
n^ avoir  rien  en  prqprem 


XXXVI. 


to  mind  one's  "  Ps  and  Qs," 

to  pack  off, 

to  pack  up, 

to  have  a  pain  in, 

to  palm  or  bribe  (p.), 

to  beg  one's  pardon, 

to  take  a  part  in, 

to  part  with  or  from  (p.), 

to  part  with  or  from  (th.),  to 

give  up, 
to  be  particular, 
to  be  particular  in  or  about, 

to  go  to  a  party, 
to  waver  between  two  parties, 
to  be  a  small  party  of  friends, 
Co  pass  round,  to  hand  round, 

to  be,  to  put  one's  self,  in  a  pas- 
sion, to  fire  up, 


( mettre  leg  points  aur  lea  i. 

plier  bagage ;  {/aire  son  paqueL 
/aire  sa  malle. 
avoir  rnal  d. 
( graisser  la  patte  A  (p.) 
demander  pardon  d. 
prendre  part  d,  or  dana, 
se  siparer  de  ;  quitter. 
ee  d6/aire  de;  c4der. 

y  regarder  de  prig;  tenir  d. 
itre  difficile  sur;  itre  exiyeant 

pour, 
alter  en  soiree. 
{ nager  entre  deux  eattx. 
Stre  en  petit  comit4. 
/aire  passer  de  main  en  main  S 

/aire  passer  d  la  ronde. 
itre  en  coUre  ;   se  mettre  en  cO' 

lire;  s^emporter;  s'iehauffer; 

prendre  /eu;    {prendre   lOi 

'moucbe. 


IDIOMAnCAL    TSBB8. 


229 


tobeina  violent  passion  against  ( te  manger  le  blatie  des  yeux. 
one  auother, 


to  be  passionate, 
to  be  too  patient, 

to    bear    one's    misfortunes 

patiently, 
to  be  a  pattern  to, 


I  avoir  la  Ute  pria  du  bonneL 
(  se  laiaser  Umdre  la  laine  aur  le 

dos. 
prendre  son  mal  en  patietice. 

Ure  un  modile  pour ;  aervir  de 
module  d. 

to  pave  the  way,  preparer  lea  voiea. 

to  pay  for  it,  ( le  payer  bien. 

to  make  (p. )  pay  for  the  damage^  (fairepayer  d  (p. )  leapotaeaae^A. 
to  pay  to  the  uttermost  farthing,  ( payer  rubia  aur  C  angle. 
to  pay  a  bill  when  due,  payer  un  billet  a  CicliAance, 

to  be  able  to  pay,  itre  solvable,  avoir dequoi payer. 

to  pay  one's  addresses  to,  faire  aa  cour  d. 

to  pay  attention  to,  /aire  attention  d. 

to  pay  the  carriage  or  postage,  affranchir. 
to  pay  no  regard  to  (th.),  riavnlr  aucun  6gard  d. 

to  pay  a  visit  to,  rendreuneviaited;/aireviaited, 

to  pay  one's  respects  to,  presenter  aea  reapecta  d. 

to  hold  one's  peace,  to  keep    ae  taire. 

sQence, 
to  keep  the  peace,  ne  paa  troubler  Cordre  pubUe. 

to  be  penniless,  ( itre  aana  le  aou. 

to  perform  a  duty,  remplir  un  devoir;  t^acquittar 

d'un  devoir, 
jouerde. 


to  perform  on,  to  play  on  (a 
violin,  etc.), 

to  put  one's  self  in  a  violent 
perspiration,  in  a  heat, 

to  yield  to  persuasion,  to  evi- 
dence, 

to  use  set  phrasee, 

to  pick  out, 

to  pick  up,  ramtiaaer, 

to  be  in  a  fine  pickle,  to  get  in-  ( itre,  i&brt  vnia,  dona  de  beaia 


ae  mettre  tout  en  eau  ;  auer  d 

grosses  gouttea. 
ae  rendre  d  PMdenee. 

/aire  dea  phrases, 
choiair. 


to  a  scrape  or  dilemma, 
to  have  a  finger  in  the  pie, 
to  tear  into  pieces, 

to  have,  to  take,  pity  on ;  to 

show  pity  to, 
to  take  place,  to  bappcu, 
to  have  the  best  plac«, 
to  plague  (p.),  to  t(;ise, 
to  make  (tL)  plaiu, 


drapa. 

(  avoir  la  main  d  la  pdte. 
mettre  en  piicea  ;  d4chirer  en 

morceaux. 
avoir,  prendre,  pitii  de  ;  avoir 

campaaaion  de. 
avoir  lieu,  arriver,  ae  paaaer. 
( Stre  aux  premitrea  logea. 
{/aire  enrayer  (p.) 
expliquer,  6claircir,/aire  toucher 

{,i)i.)audoigtetdPaeiL 


230  IDIOKATICAL    TEKBS. 

to  be  plain  with  (p.),  parler  franehement  d,  (p.) 

to  give  fair  play,  to  have  fair     donner  or  /aire  beau  jeu  df 

play,  avoir  beaujeuL 

to  play  on  the  piano,  joiier  du  piano. 

to  play  a  game  at,  /aire  mie  pariie  de. 

to  play  the  fool,  {/aire  la  Mte. 

to  play  childish  tricks,  /aire,  se/aire,  des  mehM. 

to  play  fast  and  loose,  hiaiser. 

to  plead  (one's  Jige),  a^excmer  but. 

to  be  pleased  with,  itrecontent,8atis/ait,charm4,de. 

to  be  pleased  with  one's  self,      (  itre  content  de  sa  petite  per- 

Sonne. 
to  do  what  one  pleases,  to  have  (  avoir  aes  coiuUes /ranches. 

full,  free,  scope, 
to  take,  to  find,  pleasure  in,      prendre  plaisir,  ae  plaire,  d  ; 

trour>er  du  plaisir  dans. 
to  pledge  one's  honour,  en  donner  aa  parole  d^honneur; 

jurer  aur  son  honneur. 
to  be  as  pliant  as  a  willow,         i  Stre  aouple  comme  un  gant. 
to  pocket,  (empocher. 

to  be  to  the  point,  aMer  au/ait,  au  but. 

to  come  to  the  point,  to  the    venir,  arriver,  au/ait,  A  laquea- 

question,  tion,  d  Vessentiel. 

to  make  a  point  of,  to  make  it  prendre  A  tdche  de. 

one's  business, 
to  point  at,  montrer  au  doigt. 

to  point  out,  montrer,  indiquer. 

to  point  out  a  fault,  relever  une/aute. 

to  be  so  polite  as  to,  avoir  Phonnetetd  de. 

to  be  always  poring  over  books,  ( Stre  colU  aur  des  livrea. 
to  pose  (p.),  (mettre  {p.)  d  quia. 

there  tobe  no  possibility  to  or  of,  n'y  avoir  pas  moyen  de  (imp.) 
to  take  pot;luck,  ( diner  A  la/ortune  dupot. 

to  plead  poverty,  aiUguer  la  nuatre  ;  chanter  nth 

skre. 
to  be  in  one's  power  (impera),  ne  tenir  qu'A  (p.)  de  (imp.) 
to  have  extensive  power,  {avoir  lea  bras  longa.  i 

to  have  full  power,  ( taUler  en  plein  drap. 

to  give  full  powers,  ( donner  carte  blanche, 

to  practice  (music),  Hudier. 

to  speak  in  praise  of,  faire  I'Sloge  de. 

to  have  the  precedence,  avoir  le  pas  sur  (p.) 

to  look  very  demure,  precise,  (/aire  la  eucrie. 

(said  of  a  woman), 
to  preclude  one's  self  from,         ne  priver  de. 
to  be  in  the  same  predioamaut,  ( ilre  logi  A  la  mSme  auelffne. 

box, 
to  prejudice  a  person's  mind,    monter  la  tfte  d,  (p.) 


IDIOUATICAL   TE&B8.  831 

to  be  prejudiced  against,  ttre  pr&oenu  conbre. 

to  presume  to  trouble  (p.),         te  penneUre  de  d&rangtr  (p. 

XXXVII. 
to  be  presiimptnoQB,  ne  douter  de  rien. 

to  pretend  to  be,  /aire  le,  la,  les. 

to  pretend  to,  /aire  semblant  de  ;  femdre  de. 

to  pretend  to  great  matters,      /aire  Vhomme  dHmportance. 
to  prevail  on  (p.)  to,  engager,  d^ider  (p.)  d. 

to  be  prevailed  upon,  «e  lainser  entrainer, 

to  prevent  (th.)  from  taking  pr&oemr  (th.) 

place, 
to  prevent  (p.  or  tb.),  empScher. 

to  be  a  prey  to,  Stre  enproie,  ae  Iwrerenproie,  du 

to  pride  one's  self  on  (th.),  to    se  faire  gloire  or  honneur,  ae 

take  pride  in,  glorijier,  de. 

to  be  in  the  prime  of  life,  itre  a  lajleur  de  Vdge. 

to  act  up  to  one's  principles,      agir,  ae  conduire,  aidvant  aea 

principea. 
to  proceed  to  (a  place),  te  rendre  d. 

toproceed  with  (a  journey, eta),  reprendre  ;  continuer. 
to  procure  (th.)  for  (p.),  /aire  avoir  (th.)  d  (p.) 

to  form  idle  projects,  /aire  de^  projeta  en  Pair. 

to  promise  wonders,  to  promise  promettre  inonta  et  men)eille$. 

mountains  of  gold, 
to  am  use  (p.)  with  fair  promises,  ( tenir  (p.)  le  bee  dans  Feau. 
to  pronounce  the  word,  to  out   Idcher  le  mot ;  trancher  le  mot. 

■with  it, 
to  be  proof  against,  itre  d,  V4preuve  de. 

to  have,  to  feel,  a  propensity     avoir  du  penchant  pour. 

towards, 
to  make  the  first  proposal,  the  /aire  lea  premieres  avancet. 

advances, 
to  have  a  very  fine  prospect,      {itre  en /art  belle  paaae. 
to  prove  one's  self  {generous,    ae  morUrer. 

etc.), 
to  prove,  to  become,  devemr. 

to  prove  true  or  to  be  trae,        ae  trouver  vrai,  se  rialiaer. 
to  lay  in  provisions,  /aire  aes  provisions. 

to  provoke  (p.),  ( ichauffer  lea  oreUlea  de  (p.) 

to  manage  an  affair  prudently,  (aller  doucement  en  besogne. 
to  pull  the  bell,  tirer  la  aonnette,  sonner. 

to  pull  one  another  by  the  hair,  ae  prendre  aux  cheveux. 
to  be  a  mere  puppet,  ilre  un  vrai  mannequin. 

to  work  and  toil  for  no  purpose,  {/aire  de  la  boviUie  pour  lea 

chats. 
to  answer  one's  purpose,  /aire  Paffaire  de. 

to  suit  one's  purpose,  /aire  son  affaire  ;  eonvenir  d  ; 

( arranger. 


232 


miOHATIOAX   VERBS. 


to  answer  ▼arious  purposes, 
to  talk  to  the  purpose, 
to  be  nothing  to  the  purpose, 
to  be  to  no  purpose, 
to  exert  one's  self  to  no  pur- 
pose for  (th.), 
to  keep  the  strings  of  the  purse, 
to  push  one's  self  forward, 
to  put  CpO  about, 
to  put  by  or  aside,  to  lay  by, 

to  put  the  cart  before  the  horse, 

to  put  an  end  to, 

to  put  in  an  appearance, 

to  put  in  mina, 

to  put  off  (to  postpone), 

to  put  ofif  for  ever, 

to  put  out  of  joint,  to  dislocate, 

to  put  on  (a  coat), 

to  put  on  one's  hat, 

to  put  on  a  wrong  scent, 

to  put  one's  self  about  for, 

to  put  to  the  sword, 

to  put  up  at  (an  hotel), 

to  put  up  (p.)  to  it, 

to  put  up  with  (to  bear,   to 

endure), 
to  put  up  with  (to  be  satisfied 

with), 
to  put  up  with  an  a£front, 
to  be  puzzled  to. 


$ervir  d  pltmewra  usaget. 

purler  d  propoa. 

{lie  f aire  rien  d  F affaire. 

n^abozitir  d  rien. 

ae  battre  leajlanca  portr. 

( tenir  les  cordons  de  la  bourse. 

se  pousser. 

d^ranger. 

Toettre  d  pmrt  or  de  c6M;  ^par- 

gner. 
mettre  la  cTuurrue  devcmt  let 

bceufa. 
mettre  fin  d  ;  faire  cesser, 
faire  acte  de  presence, 
rappeler  (th.)  d  (p.) ;  faire  ret- 

souvenir  (p.)  de. 
remettre  ;  ajoumer. 
( renvoyerauxcalendesgrecquea. 
se  ddmettre. 
{passer, 
se  couvrir. 
mettre  en  dAfaVL 
se  dAranger  pour, 
passer  aufil  de  l'6pie. 
descendre  d. 
mettre  (p. )  a»  fait ;  ( donner  le 

mot  d. 
essuyer ;  souffrir;  supporter. 

se  contenter  de;  se  aoumettre  d. 

( boire  tm  affront, 
avoir  de  la  peine  d. 


to  be  in  s  quandary,  io  a 

dilemma, 
to  pick  a  quarrel  with. 

to  begin  a  quarrel  with  (p.), 

to  take  up  a  quarrel, 

to  make  a  quarrel  with  (p.), 
to  fight  out  a  quarrel, 
to  quash  the  matter, 
to  question  (p.), 
to  question  (th.), 


Stre  bien  embarrassi,  ne  savoir 

d  quoi  se  r6soudre. 
ehercher  quereUe  d  ;  chercher 

noise  d. 
se  prendre  de  querelle  avec  (p. ) ; 

quereller  (p.) 
6pouser  une  querelle ;  ipoutir 

la  querelle  de  (p.) 
{faire  une  sc^ne  d. 
vider  une  querelle. 
assoupir  F  affaire 
faire  des  questions  d. 
douter  de  ;  mettre  (th. )  en  doute. 


XDIOMATICAX   VEBS8. 


388 


zxxvm. 

feo  be  qnestion  of,  a'agirde;  Stre  queatUm  rf«(!n)p.) 

to  start  a  qnestiuo,  ( lever  le  lUvre. 

to  call  in  question,  mettre,  r&ooquer,  en  doute. 

to  be  quick,  se  d4pScher. 

to  be  quick  in  one'e  proceedings,  ( aMer  vite  en  besogne. 

to  be  quiet,  rester  tranquille. 

to  be  quits,  Stre  quittet. 


to  rack  one's  brain  aboat  (th.), 

to  be  all  the  rage, 

to  rail  at  (p.), 

to  rail  bitterly  at  (p.), 

to  rain, 

to  rain  fast,  to  ponr  with  rain, 

to  raise  money, 

to  raise  an  outcry  against, 

to  ramble  alwut  the  country, 

all  over  the  world, 
to  ramble  about, 
to  ransack  one's  brains, 
to  talk  at  random, 
to  rap  the  knuckles,  to  give 

one  over  the  fingers, 
to  be  in  raptures, 
to  walk  at  a  great  rate, 
to  have  rather, 
to  rave, 
to  reach  fth,), 
to  reach  (a  place), 
to  bring  up  the  rear, 
to  have  reason,  cause, 
to  have  every  reason  to, 
to  have  reason  to  be  satisfied 

with, 
to  give  reason,  room,  cause, 
to  be  satisfied  with  •  reason, 

to  be  reasonable, 

to  receive  injury  (goods), 

to  reckon  one's  chickens  before 

they  are  hatched, 
to  be  out  in  one's  reckoning, 
to  reconcile  one's  self  to, 


se  mettre  VesprU  d  Is  torture 

powr. 
/aire  fureur. 

( marcher  sur  le  pied  d  (p.) 
( dire  pia  que  pendre  de  (p.) 
pleuvoir;  tomher  de  Peau  (imp.) 
pleuvoir  d.  verse  (imp. ) 
se  procurer  de  Pargent. 
( crier  haro  sur. 
courir  le  pays,  courir  le  monde. 

( battre  le  pavi, 
se  mettre  Fesprit  d  la  torture, 
parler  d  tort  et  d  trovers. 
(  dormer  sur  les  doigta  d  (p.) 

(  Stre  aux  anges. 

marcher  a  grands  pat, 

aimer  mievx. 

( battre  la  campagne. 

atteindre. 

arriverA. 

fermer  la  marehe. 

avoir  sujet  or  lieu  do, 

avoir  tout  lieu  de. 

avoir  a  se  louer  de. 

dormer  sujet  or  lieu  de. 

ae  contenter,  »e  payer,  d^ume 

raison. 
entendre  rtuson. 
Stre  endommagi. 
( vendre  la  peau  de  Fours  avarU 

de  Pavoir  pris. 
4fre  loin  de  son  compte. 
)te  /aire  d  ;  a^accoutumer  d. 


234 


IDIOMATXCAI.   YESSa. 


to  have  reconrae  to, 

not  to  know  what  to  have  re- 
course to, 

to  recover  from  illness, 

to  recover  one's  senses, 

not  to  recover  from  one's  sar- 
prise, 

to  reduce  one's  pretensions, 

to  refer  to  (p.), 

to  give  (p.)  a  reference  to, 

to  have  respectable  references, 
good  recommendations, 

to  reflect  credit  on, 
to  speak,  or  act,  without  re- 
flection, 
to  do  (th,)  with  due  reflection, 
to  cast  reflections  upon, 

to  give  a  flat  refusal, 

to  meet  with  a  refusal, 

to  have,  to  show,  regard  for, 

to  be  regardless  of. 

to  rejoice  at, 

to  relate  to  (th.), 

to  relax  one's  mind  after  work, 

to  release  (p.)  from  a  promise, 

to  afford  relief  to, 

to  have  a  relish  for, 
to  be  reluctant  to  (do), 


avoir  recours  A  (p.  or  th. ),  en 

venir  a  (th. ) 
( ne  eavoir  plus  de  quel  boia 

fairejl^he. 
relever  de  maladie. 
revenir  d  aoi. 
n'en  pas  revenir. 

( mettre  de  Veau  dans  son  vin. 

s'enremettred,;  «'e»  rapporterd. 

renvoyer  (p. )  d  ;foumir  de  bom 
rensdgnements. 

pouvoir  donner  de  bona  ren- 
seignements  ;  avoir  de  bonnes 
recommandations. 

/aire  honneur  d. 

(  aUer  d  travers  ehoux. 

/aire  (th.)  d  tite  repn  <^e. 

bldmer;  critiquer;  {donnerim 
coup  de  langue  A  (p.) 

refuser  net. 

essuyer  un  re/us. 

avoir,  Umoigner,  des  igard* 
powr. 

nefaire  aucun  cos  de. 

se  rdjouir  de. 

avoir  rapport  A. 

se  distraire. 

diigager  (p.)  (Tune  promesse, 

apporierdusoulagemenld;  sou- 
lager. 

avoir  du  goUt  pour. 

(  se  /aire  tirer  VordUe  pour ;  ri- 
pugnerd  (p.)  defaire. 

XXXIX. 

sefier  A  (p.) ;  compter  sur  (n. 

or  th.) 
se  souvenir  de  (p,  or  th.)  ;   se 
*.  _-         1.     /    X.-   ^,    ,     ,    .       rappehr{th.);seremettre(x}.) 
toremember(p.)kmdlyto(p.),  rappel^  (p.)  au  bon  souvenir 

de  ;  dired  (p.)  Men  de*  chose* 
.  .  J  ,    .    -  delapartde  (p.) 

to  remind  (p.)  of,  rappeler  (th. )  d  (p.) 

to  remove  the  cloth,  Ster  le  couvert. 

to  repair  to  (a  place),  ae  rendre  d.  ' 

to  be  quick  in  one's  repartees,    avoir  la  repartie  prompte  ;  itrt 

vifd  la  riposte. 


to  rely  on  or  upon, 
to  remember, 


n>IOMATICAL    TEKBS. 


285 


to  repeat  (tb.)  continually, 

to  ase  repetitions, 

to  raise,  to  spread,  a  report, 

to  reproach  (generally), 
to  reproach  (p.)  for  or  with, 
to  reprove  (p.)  gently, 
to  be  a  man  of  resolution, 
to  take  a  resolution  to  (in  de- 
fiance of  general  custom  or 
public  opinion), 
to  resolve  to, 


to  resort  to  (a  place), 

to  resort  to  violence, 

to  present  one's  respects  to, 

to  rest  upon  (p.)  to, 

to  rest  assured, 

to  restore  (p.)  to  reason, 

to  be  under  restraint, 

to  put  a  violent  restraint  upon 

one's  self, 
to  resume  one's  drudgery, 
to  retail  (goods), 
to  retire  to  one's  country, 
to  be  apt  to  retract, 
to  retrench  from, 
to  return  immediately, 
to  have  returned, 
to  review, 
to  revive  (trade), 
to  get  rid  of, 
to  ride, 
to  take  a  ride,  a  drive, 

to  ride,  to  drive,  through  (a 

place), 
to  give  cause  for  ridicule, 
to  make  one's  self  ridiculous, 

to  do  nothing  right, 
to  be  right  to, 
to  have  a  right  to, 
to  rise  from  (meals), 
to  give  rise  to. 


( avoir  toujoura  A  la  houeke  ; 

( rabdcher. 
ae  r4p6ter  ;  iiser  de  reditea. 
aemer,  /aire  courir,r6pandrt, 

un  bruit, 
faire  dea  reproches  d  (p.) 
reprocher  (th. )  A  (p. ) 
reprendre  (p. )  avec  bonU. 
avoir  de  la  tSte. 
ae  mettre  aur  le  pied  de. 


ae  riaoudre  d;  ae  determiner  d; 

ae  dScider  d ;  prendre  le  parti 

de. 
frequenter. 

avoir  recoura  aux  voiea  dafaU. 
presenter  8es  reapecta,  offrir  sea 

hommagea,  d. 
d^pendre  de  (p. )  de. 
ae  tenir  pour  aasurd. 
(  remonter  la  tSte  d  (p.) 
ae  gSner,  ae  contraindrt, 
ae  faire  violence. 

( reprendre  le  collier  de  miaire. 

vendre  en  detail. 

( aller  planter  sea  clioiue. 

avoir  aon  dit  et  son  d4diL 

prendre  aur. 

ne  faire  qu^ aller  et  venir. 

itre  de  retour. 

/aire  la  revue,  paaaer  en  revue. 

reprendre  vigueur. 

ae  dSarraaaer,  ae  d^/aire,  de. 

aUer  dchevai. 

/aire  une  promenade  (d  cheval, 

en  voiture). 
parcourir  (un  endroit)  d  cheval, 

en  voiture. 
prSter  au  ridicule, 
se  rejuire  la /able,  la  riaSe,  de 

tout  le  monde. 
ne/aire  rien  qui  vaiUe. 
avoir  raiaon  de. 
avoir  le  droit  de, 
aortir  de. 
faire  nattre:  donnernaiasaneed. 


236 


IBIOMAXICAI.   TEBBS. 


to  be  an  early  riser, 

to  be  a  late  riser, 

to  risk  one's  life  without  hesi- 
tation, 

to  roast, 

to  give  the  rod  for  one's  own 
back, 

to  roll  in  riches, 

to  make  room  for, 

to  clean  the  room, 

to  be  rough,  sharp,  round,  with 

(P-) 
to  treat  (p.)  roughly, 
to  rouse  the  sleeping  lion, 
to  make  a  row  with, 
to  rub  on,  to  jog  on, 

to  be  on  the  brink  of  ruin, 
to  be  in  the  highway  to  ruin, 
to  make  it  a  rule  to, 

to  ran  away, 


to  run  one's  head  against, 

to  run,  to  glance,  over  (a  book), 

to  run  over  (p.), 

to  run  up  and  down, 

to  run  through  one's  property, 

to  run  into  excess, 

to  ran  (p.)  through  the  body, 


{Stre  mafinenx. 

( Stre  un  grand  dormeur. 

lie  pas  marchander  sa  vie. 

/aire  rdtir. 

( dormer  des  verges  pour 

etter. 
nager  dam  Vopulence. 
faire  place  A. 
faire  la  cliambre. 
parlerdurement,  parlerfraneh& 

ment,  d. 
(mener  (p.)  tambour  battant. 
{^.veUler  le  chat  qui  dart, 
{faire  une  seine  a  (p. ) 
( aller  son  petit  train,  son  petit 

bonhomme  de  chemin. 
Stre  d,  deux  doigts  de  sa  j)erte. 
prendre  le  chemin  de  Vhdpital. 
ae/aire  une  r^le  de;  avoir  pour 

rtgle  de. 
ienfuir  ;   ( prendre  la  clef  des 

champs ;  ( prendre  ses  jambes 

d,  son  cou. 
donner  de  la  tSte  contre, 
Jeter  les  yeux  sur ;  parcourir. 
passer  sur  le  corps  A. 
courir  fds  et  lA. 
monger  son  bien. 
donner  dans  I'excis. 
passer  son  6p4e  au  travera  du 

eorpa. 


XI.. 

8 


to  sacrifice  one's  self  for, 
to  be  safe, 

to  be  not  safe  to  (impers.), 
to  arrive  safely, 

to  have  a  sail, 

to  set  sail, 

to  be  a  good  sailor, 


( ae  mettre  en  quatre  pottr. 

itre  en  silret4,  hors  de  danger. 

(  ne  pa^  faire  bon  de. 

ar river  dbon  port ;  arriver  sans 
accident. 

ae  promener,  faire  une  prome- 
nade, en  bateau. 

mettre  d  la  voile ;  partvr. 

faire  tm  bon  marin ;  avoir  le 
pied  inarin. 

to  demand,  to  give,  satisfaction  demunder,  donner  or faireraison 
for,  de  (th.)  d  (p.) 


IDIOMATICAL   VEKB8. 


237 


to  have,  to  take,  to  obtain,     avoir  or  tirer  raUon  de. 

satisfaction  fur, 
to  satisfy  (p.)  fully, 
to  be,  to  remaia,  satisfied  with 

(th.). 
to  be  satisfied  aboat. 


ne  laisser  rien  a  d4sirer  A  (p.) 
•e  contenter  de. 


to  be  satisfied  abont  it, 

to  be  satisfied  with  the  tmth 

of  (th.), 
to  serve  (p.)  with  the  same  sauce, 
to  be  saucy, 
to  say  (th.)  in  (p's.)  face, 

to  say  on, 

not  to  complete  what  on* 

wished  to  say, 
to  put  (p.)  on  a  wrong  scent, 

to  be  quick  of  scent, 
to  be  upon  the  scent, 
to  be  a  scholar, 

to  have  full,  free,  scope^ 

to  get  out  of  a  scrape, 

to  scream, 

to  scruple  at  or  to, 

not  to  be  over-scrupulona^ 

to  second  a  motion, 

to  be  second  to  none, 

to  buy  (th.)  second  hand, 

to  keep  one's  views,  designs, 

secret, 
to  be  security  for, 
to  see  (p.)  to  the  door, 
to  see  (p.)  home, 
to  see  that  a  thing  is  done^ 
to  see  through  it, 
not  exactly  see  it, 
to  see  how  matters  stand, 
not  to  see  at  all, 
not  to  see  clearly, 
to  see  what  (p.)  means, 
to  let  see,  to  show. 


itre  tatisfait;  avoir  V esprit  en 

repoi*  sur. 
en  avoir  le  cceur  net 
Stre  eonvaincu  de  la  viriU  de. 

{payer(p.)delamSmeTnonnaie. 

{/aire  F impertinent. 

{  dire  (th. )  au  nez  de,dla  barbe 

de. 
parler  toujourt. 
rengatner  son  compliment. 

donner  le  change  d  ;  favrt  pren- 
dre le  change  A. 

{ avoir  du  nez. 

itre  sur  la  vote, 

itre  homm^  de  lettrea  ;  itre  fort 
instruit. 

avoir  libre  carriire  ;  ( avoir  le* 
coud6es  /ranches. 

te  tirer  d!embarras,  d'affaire, 
d'un  mauvais  pas. 

Jeter,  or  pousser,  un  eri,  or  dea 
cris. 

te/aire  scrupule  de. 

( avoir  la  conscience  large. 

appuyer  une  motion. 

ne  le  c4der  d  personne. 

acheter  (th.)  de  rencontre,  dt 
hasard. 

eacher,  or  eouvrir,  sonjeu. 

ripondre  pour. 

eondmre  tp.)  jiismi'd  la  parte. 

reconduire  (p.)  ehez  luL 

tenir  la  jnain  A. 

voir  ce  que  c^est. 

ne  pas  saisir  tris  bien. 

voir  oil  en  sont  les  affairet, 

( n'y  voir  goutte, 

voir  trouble. 

voir  venir  (p.) 

/aire  voir  (th. )  A  (p.) 


238 


n>IOHATICA£   YEBBS. 


to  seek  redress, 

to  seek  a  ueedle  in  a  pottle  of 

hay,  to  search  for  a  needle  in 

a  haystack, 
to  seize  on  or  npon, 
to  have  one's  self-possession, 
to  lose  one's  self-possession, 
to  sell  by  private  contract, 
to  sell  by  auction, 
to  send  up  one's  name, 
to  send  (p.)  about  his  business, 

to  send  for, 

to  send  word  to, 

to  bring  (p. )  to  his  senses, 

to  be  sensible  of  (th.), 


demander  justice. 
(  chercher  une  aiyuille  datu  uni 
boite  defoin. 

ae  saisir  de;  a'emparerde;  aaiair. 

( avoir  sa  tite. 

(perdre  la  tSte. 

vendre  d  V amiable. 

vendre  auxenchires,  ordPencan. 

aefaire  annoncer. 

(  envoyer  promener,  ( envoyer 

paltre. 
envoyer  chercher  ;  /aire  vemr. 
/aire  savoir,  /aire  dire,  d. 
vultre  (fi.)  d  la  raison. 
savoir,  ne  pas  ignorer ;  voir. 


XLI. 


to  serve  for  or  tM, 
to  serve  one  right, 
to  do  a  service  to, 
to  be  of  any  service  to^ 
to  set  about  (th.), 

to  set  about  it, 
to  set  at  defiance^ 
to  set  fire  to, 
to  set  up  for, 

to  set  up  again, 

to  set  a  good  example  to, 

to  set  (p.)  at  ease, 

to  set  by  the  ears, 

to  set  off  without  waiting  for 

anything  more, 
to  set  a-going, 
to  set  to  rights, 

to  set  value  on  or  apon, 

to  set  the  others  on, 
to  set  a  watch, 
to  set  in  (cold,  etc.), 
to  be  set  on,  to  be  bent  on, 
to  settle  an  account, 
to  settle  to  (th.), 
to  get  settled,  to  find  a  situa- 
tion, a  berth, 


servir  de. 

trailer  (p. )  eomme  (ilj  le  m&rite, 

rendre  service  or  un  service  d. 

itre  utile  d,  servir. 

ae  mettre  d,  s'occuper  de,  at 

metlre  d/aire. 
a'y  prendre, 
mettre  au  d4fi. 
mettre  le/eu  d. 
ae  donner  pour ;  /aire ;  a'4riger 

en. 
remettre  sur  pied, 
donner  d  (p.)  un  bon  exemple. 
mettre  (p. )  d  Vaise. 
Tnettre  aux  priaes ;  brouUler. 
( ne  paa  demander  aon  reate. 

{/aire  oiler;  donner  le  branle. 
remettre  tout  d/ait;  remettre  en 

ordre. 
attacker  de  la  vcdeur  d ;  (aire 

casde. 
( mettre  les  autrea  en  train, 
mettre  une  montre  d  I'heure.. 
se/aire  sentir. 
etre  d6termin4  d, 
arrSter  un  compte, 
s^arreter,  se/xer,  i. 
ae  caaer. 


JSIOHATICAL    VERBS.  239 

to  shade  one's  self  from,  se  meUre  d  Cabri  de. 

to  shake  hands,  dormer,  se  donner,  une  poigntf 

de  mains. 
to  sham,  to  pretend,  innocence,  (/aire  le  ban  apdtre. 
to  shame,  jfaire  hotUe  d. 

to  be  lost  to  all  shame^  avoir UnUehonte  bue. 

to  share  in,  avoir  part  d. 

to  share  the  profit,  {partager  le  gdteau. 

te  shelter  one's  self  from,  se  mettre  A  Vabri  de. 

to  cast  a  sheep's  eye  to,  on,        (faire  des  aeillades  d  ;  fture  Im 

yevx  doux  d. 
to  sheer  off,  prendre  le  large. 

not  to  know  what  shift  to  make,  {ne  savoir  de  quel  bois  fain 
to  be  put  to  one's  last  shift,       fikcke;  ( ne  savoir  d  quel  saitU 

se  votter ;  ne  xavoir  oil  donner 

de  la  tite;  en  Stre  aux  ex- 

pidients. 
to  be  shipwrecked,  faire  naufrage. 

to  shiver  with  cold,  grelotterdefroid. 

to  be,  to  stand,  in  (p's.)  shoes,  Stred  la  place  de  (p.) 
to  walk  in  (p's.)  shoes,  courir  sur  les  bris^es  de. 

to  go  a  shopping,  alter  faire  des  empletles. 

to  be  short  of,  manquer  de  ;   itre  court  dt, 

to  be  short  of  cash,  ( etre  bos  percd. 

to  turn  (p.)  the  cold  ehoalder,   {battrefroid  d  (p.) 
to  show  one's  face,  se  montrer,  paraitre. 

to  show  (p.)  in,  faire  entrer. 

to  show  (th.),  /aire  voir  (th.)  d  (p.) 

to  make  a  great  show  of,  faire  parade  de. 

to  shrink  from,  reenter  deva/nt. 

to  shut  the  door  in  one's  face,   fermer  la  porte  au  nob 
to  shut  in  or  up,  enjermer. 

to  be  sick,  avoir  mat  au  eceur, 

to  be  sea-sick,  avoir  le  mat  de  mer. 

to  be  sick  of  (th.),  6tre  d4g<AU  ;  itre  las  ds. 

to  side  with,  itre  du  jxirU  de. 

to  side  against,  itre  contre. 

to  take  the  right  or  tite  wrong  prendre  le  bon  or  le  t$uiuvai» 

side,  c6U. 

to  hear  both  sides,  ( entendre  les  deux  cloches. 

to  attack  (p.)  on  bu  weak nde,  prendre  (p.)  par  son  eadmiH 

ifensibte. 
to  set  the  sideboard,  dresser  le  hvffeL 

to  see  a  sight,  voir  un  spectacle. 

to  have  a  sight  of,  voir. 

to  require,  or  to  have,  only  to  n'avoir  qu'un  geste  dfaxrt. 

make  a  sign, 
to  silence,  imposer  silence  d ;  fermer  la 

houehe  a ;  rabattre  U  coquet  d . 


240 


IDIOMATICAL   TBBBS. 


to  be  silent, 

to  be  as  silent  as  the  grave, 

to  be  silent  respecting, 

to  say  a  silly  thing, 

to  be  silly, 

to  look  silly, 

to  sing  at  sight, 

to  remain^single, 

to  sink  down, 

to  sink,  to  founder, 

to  invite,  to  ask,  to  at  down, 


«e  taire ;  /aire  silence. 

y  avoir  un  silence  de  mort. 

garder  le  silence  sur;  taire  (th.) 

dire  une  sottise. 

{/aire  la  bite. 

(avoir  Pair  bete, 

chanter  a,  livre  ouvert. 

Tester  fille,  rester  garden, 

s'en/oncer. 

colder  d/ond,  covler  bos. 

/aire  a^eoir;  prier  de  s'asteotr. 


XLH, 


to  sit  down  (to  meals), 

to  sit  for  one's  portrait, 

to  sit  up  at, 

to  sit  up  with  a  sick  ,lGrsoI^ 

to  sit  close, 

to  be  out  of  a  situation, 

to  try  one's  skill, 

to  skin  a  flint, 

to  be  nothing  bat  skin  and 

bone, 
to  be  slack  (trade), 
to  slander  each  other, 
to  slap  (p.)  in  the  face, 
to  be,  to  feel,  sleepy, 
to  sleep  (in  such  a  place  or  such  coucher. 

a  bed), 
to  sleep  soundly,  (securely), 
to  sleep  like  a  top. 


se  mettre  d  table, 
poser  pour  son  portrait, 
passer  la  nuit  d. 
neiller  un  malade. 
se  serrer. 
etre  sur  le  pav4. 
essayer  son  sav(jir/aire. 
( tondre  un  cbu/. 

n'avoir  que  la  peau  et  les  as ; 
(  avoir  lapeau  collde  sur  les  os. 
ne  pas  aller,  languir. 
ae  d4chirer. 
donntr  un  soufflet  d. 
avoir  sommeil. 


to  pretend  to  be  sleeping, 

to  sleep  very  late, 

to  sleep  one  s  self  sober, 

to  start  out  of  one's  sleep, 

to  laugh  in  one's  sleeve, 

to  do  (\,h.)  slily, 

to  slip,  to  make  a  slip, 

to  slip  away  from  the  company,  Juusser  compagnie. 


dormir  sur  les  deux  oreilles. 
(dormircomme  un  sabot,  comnat 

une  marmotte. 
/aire  semblant  de  dormir. 
dormir  la  grasse  matinie. 
cuver  son  vin. 
s'iveiller  en  sursaut. 
rire  sous  cape, 
/aire  (tb. )  d  la  sourdine, 
/aire  un/aux  pas. 


to  give  the  slip  to, 

to  be  too  slow  (a  clock,  etc.), 

to  be  slow  of  comprehension, 

to  smell  close, 

to  have  a  smoke, 

to  lay  a  snare  for  (p.), 

to  fall  into  a  snare^ 

to  be  so  so^ 


{faire/aux  bond  d  (p.) 
retarder. 

( avoir  V esprit  bouchi. 
sentir  le  renferm4. 
/umer  un  cigare,  une  pij)e. 
tendre,  dresser,  un  pi4ge  A  (p. ) 
donner  dans  un  piige. 
aller  tout  doucemeni. 


IDIOKAHCAL   TBBB8. 


241 


to  follow  softly,  ( suivre  (p. )  A  pas  de  loup. 

to  sing  the  same  song  over  and  ( n'avoir,  ne  sarmir,  qu'une  chtm- 

over  agaiu,  son. 

to  rub  upon  the  sore,  to  toach   toucher  d  la  chair  vive. 

to  the  quick, 


to  be  sorry  for  (th.) 

to  be  sorry  for  (p.), 

to  be  sorry  to  (do), 

to  be  still  Boand  in  wind  and 

limb, 
to  call  a  spade  a  spade, 


itre/dch4  de  (th.) 
Stre  fdcM  pour  (p. ) 
4trefdchide(faire.) 
( avoir  bon  pied  boa  ceU. 

appeler  un  chat  u»  chat. 


to  have  no  time  to  spare,  to  lose,  n'avoir  pas  de  temps  d  perdrt. 


to  have  some  spare  time, 
to  have  to  spare, 

to  spare  (p.)  the  hearing  of 

(th.), 
to  have  some  spare  ones, 
to  speak  clearly,  intelligibly, 
to  speak  for  itself, 
to  speak  highly  of, 
to  speak  plainly, 
to  speak  sharply, 
to  speak  ill  of  everybody, 
to  be  fair  spoken, 
to  speak  right  or  wrongs 

to  begin  to  speak, 
to  speak  for  the  rest, 
to  speak  the  word, 
to  speak  for  and  against, 
not  to  speak  any  more  i»f, 
to  have  the  tarn  to  speak, 
to  speak  the  tmth, 
to  spend  (money). 


( avoir  de  la  manje. 

en  avoir  de  reste ;   en  avoir  de 

plus  qu'U  rienfavA. 
faire  d  (p.)  grdce  de  (tb.) 

( en  avoir  de  reehange. 

parle.r  francais. 

parler  tout  seiU  ;  parier  de  aoi. 

dire  du  bien  de. 

parler  franchemerU. 

parler  v&rtement. 

( TnMire  du  tiers  et  du  quart 

X  donner  de  Ceau  b4nite  de  cour. 

(  dire  tout  ce  qui  (noM)  vientpar 

la  bouche. 
prendre  la  parole, 
porter  la  parole, 
trancher  le  mot ;  Idcher  le  moL 
touffler  le  chaud  et  le/roid. 
tirer  le  rideau  mtr. 
avoir  la  parole, 
dire  la  vSriU. 
dipenser. 


to  spend  money  in  an  eatttav^  jeter  F argent  par  lesfentlriM. 
gant  manner. 


to  spend  (time), 

to  spend,  to  waste,  one's 
words, 

to  labour  under  great  depres- 
sion of  spirit, 

to  be  in  high  spirits. 


passer. 

prodiguer  aes  paroles  en 

perte. 
Stre  abattu  ;  itre  aceabU. 

( itre  en  train  ;  Stre  tris-gai. 


to  revive  (p's.)  spirits,  to  cheer,  remontfr  le  courage  d  (p.) 

tu  have  a  spite,  a  pique,  against  en  vouloir  d ;  ( avoir  un«  deal 

(p.),  contre. 

to  split  the  difference,  pariager  le  diff&rend  par  t^ 

moitid. 


242 


IDIOUAXICAT.   TBHB6. 


to  Bpoil  (th.)  entirely, 
to  be  the  sport  of, 


aMmer  (th.) 
Ure  lejouet  de. 


XTiTn. 

to  make  sport,  to  banter  about,  badiner  aur. 

to  make  sport  of  or  with  (p.),    semoquer,  sejmier,  de. 

to  show  (p.)  fine  sport. 


to  spread  like  wildfire, 


{/aire  voir  du  pays  d  (p.) 

(«e  r6pandre  comme  une  tacht 

d^huile,  comme  une  matmaiiic 

nouvelie. 
/aire  une  voie  cCecm. 
piquer  des  deux, 
dissiper,  manger, 
donner  a  (p.)  «n  covp  da. 


to  spring  a  leak, 

to  clap  spurs  to, 

to  squander  away, 

te  stab  (p.)  with  a, 

to  show,  to  send,  to  ask  (p.)  up /aire  mx>7iter. 

stairs, 
to  set  all  at  stake, 
to  stamp  (letters,  etc.), 
to  put  a  postage  stamp  to  » 

letter, 
to  be  of  the  right  stamp, 
to  stand  out  against,  to  cope 

with, 
to  stand  by  (to  defend), 
to  stand  for, 
to  stand  to  (an  opinion),  to 

stick  to,  1  ^  ^ 

to  stand  upon,  to  value,  one's    tenvr  d  «a  r6puta»on. 

reputation 


risquer  le  tout  pour  U  tout 

tinibrer. 

affranchir  une  lettre. 

(  Hre  marqu6  au  bon  coin, 
tenir  tite  a,  risister  a. 

eoutenir,  d6/endre,  tenir  pour, 
tenir  lieu  dt. 
»'en  tenir  d. 


to  stand  upon  a  trifle, 

to  stand  off, 

to  stand  out  to  sea, 

to  stand  aside, 

to  stand  upon  ceremony, 

to  stand  staring, 

to  stand  (cold,  etc.), 

to  come  to  a  stand,  to  a  stop, 


se  tenir  d  peu. 
{prendre  le  large, 
gagiier  le  large, 
ae  ranger  de  cdti. 
{/aire  dea  c6rimoniea. 
/aire,  ouvrir,  de  grands  yeux. 
supporter. 
s'arrSter  ;  /aire-  une  pause. 


to  put  (p.)  to  a  stand,  to  anon-  {mettre  (p.)  au  pted  du  mur ; 


plus, 

to  De  friends  of  old  standing, 
to  stare, 

to  stare  at,  on,  upon, 
to  stare,  to  look  (p.)  broad  in 

the  face, 
to  be  ill-starred, 
to  start  out  of  one's  sleep, 
to  get  the  start, 
to  have  the  start  of  (p.)  by 
(two  hours). 


{mettre  (p.)  d  quia. 
4tre  amis  de  vieille  date 
/aire,  oumr,  de  grands  yeux. 
regarder  /xenient. 
regarder  (p.)  en  face. 

6tre  7i4  sous  une  mauvaise  itoilti, 

a'^vcillei'  en  sursaut. 
prendre  les  devants 
avoir  (devx  heures)  d'  ava/nce  sur 
(p.) 


IDIOICATICAI.   TEBBS. 


248 


to  stark,  tres^iUir. 

to  starve  wHb,  mourir  de. 

tostay  for,  towaitfor(p.  orth.),  atteiidre  {p.  or  tli.) 

to  stay  at  an  hotel,  dvmeurer  ct  un  hdtet 

to  make  a  stay,  /aire  un  a^jour. 

to  step  out  of  (a  carriage),  descendre  de. 

to  take  steps  to,  te  mettre  en  mesure  de. 

to  be  in  a  stew,  to  be  on  thorns,  ( ttre  aur  le  gril,  Stre  aur  de» 

4pinea. 
to  stick,  to  hold  to,  to  keep  to,  «'en  temr  d. 
to  sit,  to  stand,  still,  rester  trangttUle. 

not  to  stir  oat,  ( ne  pas  bouger  de  ehez  sot. 

to  stir  no  more  than  a  post,  to  ( n«  bouger  pas  plus  qu'une 

stand  motionless,  bUche. 

to  leave  no  stone  unturned,        remuer  del  et  terre. 
not  to  leave  one  stone  sUtiding  ne  pas  laisser  pierre  sur  pierre. 

on  another. 


to  pat  a  stop  to^ 

to  lie  in  store  for, 

to  have  in  sUjre, 

to  tell  an  (idle)  story, 

to  become  a  stranger, 
to  get  quite  a  stranger, 

to  make  a  stranger  of  (p.), 


mettre  fin  d  ;  /aire  cesser  ;  en 

finir  avee, 
ttre  riservi,  Stre  en  riserve,poui . 
(  en  avoir  de  recliange. 
/aire  un  conte  ;  ( dire  or  eotUer 

des  somettes. 
devenir  rare ;  ndgUger  (p.) 
{devenir  rare  comme  les  beaux 

jours, 
trailer  (p. )  en  itranger. 


to  be  an  utter  stranger  to  (p.),  Stre  tout  d/ait  inconnu  A. 


not  to  care  a  straw, 

to  pick  straws  (to  be  idle), 

to  lay  great  stress  upon, 

to  be  strict, 

to  strike  home, 

to  strike  with  the  fisi^ 

to  strike  like  a  porter, 

to  strike  one's  colours, 

to  be  striking,  to  be  evident, 

to  touch  the  principal  string, 

to  have  two  stringstoone's  bow,  avoir  deux  cordes  a  son  arc 

to  strip  (p.)  of  his  money,  ( mettre  (p.)  a  see. 

to  strive  with  all  one's  might,    suer  sang  et  eau. 

to  study,  to  be  undergoing  a  /aire  see  itudes. 
complete  course  of  educa- 
tion, 

to  be  studious,  to  stody  to,        ^itudier  d. 

to  study  hard,  travaiUer  ferme  :  (pioehfr. 


{s'en  soucier  comme  de  Van 

quaranle. 
( enfikr  des  perles. 
insister  fortement  sur. 
y  regarder  de  pris. 
/rapper  juste. 

donner  des  coups  de  poing  d. 
{/rapper  comme  un  sourd;  (  m 

pas  y  alter  de  main  morte. 
bcusser  pavilion. 

fsauter  aux  yeux. 
toucher  la  grosse  corde. 


244 


JDIOMATICAI.   VEEBd. 


to  study  the  law,  fairt  son  droit. 

to  be  all  stuff  and  nonsense,      /aire  pitU. 
to  style  one's  self,  se  donrier  le  litre  de, 

to  remain  in  submission  to  (^.)  filer  doux. 

from  fear,  to  sing  small, 
to  make  (p. )  submit,  {/aire  mettre  lea  pouces  A. 

to  subscribe  to  (th.),  a'abonner  d. 

to  make  alL  things  subservient   rapporter  tout  d  ses  inUrStt. 

to  one's  own  interest, 


XlilV. 


to  succeed  to,  to  come  after, 

to  succeed,  to  be  successful, 

to  suit  one's  self  to  the  times, 

to  look  sulky, 

to  sum  up  the  evidence, 

to  sum  up  what  one  has  said, 

to  put  one's  Sunday  clothes  on, 

to  supplant  (p.}« 

to  be  sure  (of  or  that), 

to  be  sure  to, 

to  be  sure  not  to, 

to  make  sure  of, 

to  keep  (p.)  in  suspense, 

to  swarm  with, 

to  swear  by  all  that  is  good, 

to  draw  the  sword, 

to  put  to  the  sword, 

to  waste  with  fire  and  sword, 


succdder  d. 

r4ussir  d ;  venir  d  bout  de. 

/aire  comme  lea  autres, 

/aire  la  mine. 

/aire  le  r4sum4. 

se  r^sumer. 

a'endimancher. 

courir  sur  les  brisies  de;  {eouper 

Vherbe  sotis  le  pied  d, 
s'assurer. 

ne  pas  manquer  de. 
se  garder  Men  de. 
s'assurer  de. 
tenir  (p. )  en  suspens  ;  ( tewlr 

(p.)  le  bee  dans  Veau. 
Stre  rempli  de. 
ijurer  ses  grands  dieitx. 
mettre  V4p6e  d  la  main, 
passer  aufil  de  V6p6e.;  paster 

par  les  armes. 
mettre  d  feu  et  d  »amg. 


to  sit  down  to  table, 

to  rise  from  table, 

to  turn  the  tables, 

to  turn  the  tables  on  or  upon 

(p.). 
to  take  literally, 
to  take  after  (p.), 
to  take  an  airing, 

to  take  away. 

to  take  care, 

to  take  care  (to  beware), 

to  take  care  not  to, 


se  mettre  d  table. 

se  lever,  sortir,  de  table. 

tourner  la  m6daille. 

(  renvoyer  le  d6,  la  balle,  d  (p. ) 

prendre  (th.)  au  pieddela  lettre, 
ressembler  a,  tenir  de. 
prendre  I'air  ;  /aire  une  pro- 

menade. 
emporte.r,  enlever,  emmener. 
avoir  sain  de. 
prendre  garde, 
ae  bien  garder  de;  n'wooir  ga/rdt 

de. 


CDIOMATICAI.    VEBBB. 


246 


to  take  one's  departure, 
to  take  for  granted  that, 
to  take  to  one's  heels, 
to  take  a  high  tone, 
to  take  (p.)  in,  to  deceive 
to  take  (p. )  (to  a  place), 
to  take  it  in,  to  believe  impli- 
citly, 
to  take  well  or  ill. 


to  take  (th.)  ill, 

to  take  ill  or  amiss  if, 

to  take  (a  letter,  eto.)  to^ 

to  take  a  Joke, 

to  take  notice  of, 

to  take  (prizes), 

to  take  it  upon  one's  sel^ 

to  take  (p.)  to  be, 

to  take  (p.)  to  be  (20  years)  old, 

to  take  to  (th.), 

to  take  down, 

to  be  taken  up  with,  to  be  en- 
grossed with, 
to  take  effect, 
to  take  a  trip, 
to  tell  tales, 
to  talk  nonsense, 
to  talk  big, 
to  talk  of  indifferent  things, 

to  talk  of  things  one  does  not 

know, 
to  talk  it  over, 
to  talk  to  the  purpose, 
to  be  the  talk  of, 
to  be  a  head  taller  than, 
to  tantalise  (p.), 
to  have  a  hard  task, 
to  suit  the  taste  of, 
to  teach  (p.)  manners,  good 

breeding, 
to  tear  in  pieces,  to  attack  tooth 

and  nail, 
to  tell  (p.)  fine  stories, 
to  lose  temper,  to  keep  one'« 

temper, 


partir,  s'en  aUer. 

poser  en  fait  (pie. 

( prendre  mes  jainbet  d  son  eon. 

( le  prendre  hien  haiU. 

( Tnettre  (p,)  dedans. 

mener,  eonduire. 

( prendre  pour  de  Pargent  eomp- 
tant. 

prendre  bum  ou  mat  (th.);  pren- 
dre (th.)  en  borme,  en  man- 
vaise  part. 

prendre  (th.)  de  travera. 

trouver  mauvaia  que  (subj. 

porter  {une  lettre,  etc)  d. 

entendre  raitterie. 

/aire  attention  d  ;  remarqtUT. 

remporter  (de%  prix, ) 

( en  fain  ton  affaire. 

prendre  quelqu'un  pour. 

donner  A  (th. )  (vingt)  ana. 

prendre  du  goilt  pour;  {jtwrdrt 
d.     . 

prendre  note  de. 

itre  occwpi  de,  foeeuper, 

porter  eo^up. 
/aire  u»  petit  voyaga. 
/aire  dea  contes. 
( dire  des  bitises. 
( le  prendre  bien  haut. 
purler  de  la  plide  et  du  beau 

temps, 
(parler  comme  tm  amcugle  dea 

coulews. 
enreparler. 
parler  juste, 
/aire  Fentretien  de. 
d^passer  (p.)  de  la  tite. 
tenir  (p. )  le  bee  dans  Fean^ 
avoir /ort  d  /aire, 
itre  du  goilt,  au  goUt,  de. 
apprendre  d  (p. )  d  vivre. 

( dichirer  d  belles  dents. 

( la  donner  bonne  d  (p. ) 
perdre  patience  ;  garder  son 
sang-/roid. 

K 


246  rDIOMATICAi    VEEB8. 

to  put  (p.)  in  bad  temper,  (fairtfaire.  du  mauvaia  sang  d 

(P) 
to  be  good  tempered,  bad  tern-  avoir  le  caractdre  bien/ait,  mal 
pered,  /ait. 

XliV. 
to  be,  to  live,  upon  good  or     Stre  bien,  it/re  mal,  avee. 

bad  terms  with, 
to  put  to  the  test,  mettre  d  Vipreuve. 

to  stand  the  test,  guhir  Vipreuve. 

to  thank  (p.)  for  (at  table),        prier  (p.)  de  donner. 
to  speak  thick,  parler  gras ;  grasseyer, 

to  think  over  it,  y  refiicMr. 

to  think  it  amiss  if,  trouver  mauvaia  que  (subj.) 

to  think  proper  to,  juger  convenable  de. 

to  think  well  or  ill  of,  avoir  bonne,  or  mauvaiae^ 

opinion  de. 
to  be  just  the  thing,  itre  (son)  affaire. 

to  be  thirsty,  avoir  soif. 

to  speak  out  one's  thoughts,       dire  safaqon  de  penaer. 
to  be  threadbare  (said  of  coats),  montrer  la  corde. 
to  throw  about,  •  6parpiUer. 

to  throw  aside,  mettre  au  rebut. 

to  throw  one's  self  on  every*      aejeter  d  la  tite  de  tout  le  monde, 

body, 
to  thunder,  tonner  {imp.) 

to  take  the  time  from,  r€gler  sa  montre  sur. 

to  comply  with  the  times,  a'accamvioder  aux  tempa. 

to  have  a  fine  time  of  it,  to  pass  ( se  donner  du  ban  tempa. 

one's  time  cheerily, 
to  talk  the  time  away,  amuser  le  tapis. 

to  come  in  time,  in  good  time,   venir  d  temps  pour  ;  venir  d 

propos  ;  venir  d  point  nommi. 
to  hit  the  time,  prendre  bien  son  tempa. 

to  be  tired  out,  ( etre  sur  les  dents. 

to  have  one's  tongue  well  oiled,  ( avoir  la  langue  bien  pendue. 
to  have  a  sharp  tongue,  (  avoir  la  langue  bien  affil4e. 

to  have  a  very  smooth  tongue,  (  avoir  la  langue  dorie. 
to  let  one's  tongue  run,  (/aire  aller  sa  langue. 

to  have  it  at  the  tip  of  one's      Vavoir  aur  le  bout  de  la  langue. 

tongue, 
to  cast,  to  throw,  (tb.)  in  (p's. )  reprocher  (tb.)  A  (p.) ;  {jeter 

teeth,  (th. )  au  nez  de. 

to  go  to  it  tooth  and  nail,  ne  pas  y  aller  de  main  m^yrta. 

to  toss  up,  (jouer  d  croix  ou  pile. 

to  trace  back,  /aire  remonter;  reporter. 

to  trade  in,  /aire  commerce  de. 

to  translate  at  sicrht,  traduire  d  livre  ouvert. 


IDIOMATICAL    VERBS. 


247 


to  tre&fc  (p.)  with, 

fco  treat  with  kindness, 

to  trespass  on  (p's.)  time, 

to  make  a  trial, 

to  play  tricks  to  each  other, 

to  be  tried, 

to  tritie  with, 


r6galer  de. 
/aire  des  amities  d. 
abiiser  des  moments  de. 
Jaire  I'ipreuve  de. 
( se  Jaire  des  nicJiea. 
itre  jug6. 
aejouer  de. 


SXVI. 
to  trouble  one's  self  about,         t'em^arrasser,  finquiiter,  ae 

mettre  en  peine,  de. 
to  cause  trouble  to  (p.),  to  pat  causer  de  Cembarras  d. 

(p. )  to  trouble, 
to  be  at,  to  give  one's  self,  the  prendre,  se  donner,  la  peine  de. 

trouble  to, 
to  take  a  great  deal  of  trouble,  se  donner  du  mal. 
to  be  in  trouble,  itre  dans  la  peine. 

to  bring  one's  self  into  trouble,  se  mettre  dans  la  peine,  dans 

Vembarras. 


prendre  la  lihertd  de  charger 

(p.)  de. 
( enjouer  d^une  bonne  d  (p.) 
/aire  sa  malle. 
sejier  d. 
/ier,  confier  (th.)  A. 


to  trouble  (p.)  with  (th.), 

to  play  (p.)  a  good  trick, 
to  fill,  to  pack,  one's  trunk, 
to  trust  to, 
to  trust  (p.)  with, 

to  trust  (p.)  with  untold  gold,   donner  a  (p.)  le  hon  Dieu  sons 

con/ession. 

Jaire  de  son  mieux, 

/aire  ses  efforts  pour. 

se/aire,  devenir. 

mettre  &  pro/it,  tirer  parti  de. 

ditoumer  la  Ute. 

voir  le  revers  de  la  m^dailh. 


implicitly, 
to  try  one's  best, 
to  be  trying  to, 
to  turn,  to  become, 
to  turn  to  good  accoant» 
to  turn  aside, 
to  turn  the  tables. 


not  to  know  to  which  hand  to  ( n«  savoirAquel  saint  se  votier. 
turn, 


to  be  a  turn-coat, 

to  turn  the  conversation  to, 

to  turn  out  of  doors, 

to  turn  pale. 


( tourner  cosaque. 
Jaire  tomber  la  conversation  avT, 
m£ttre  a  la  porte  ;  eJuisser. 
changer  de  visage  ;  pdlir. 


to  be  unacquainted  with, 

to  take  (p.)  unawares, 

to  quit  a  certainty  for  an  uu- 

certainty, 
to  be  uncomfortable, 
to  be  unconcerned  at, 


ignorer,  ne  pas  connattn, 
prendre  au  d4pourvu. 
quitter  le  certain  pour  Vinee^ 

tain, 
itre  mal  d  son  aise. 
voir,  reaarder,  (fun  ceii  see. 


248 


IDIOMATICAL   VERBS. 


to  be,  to  feel,  anconscious  of, 

to  be  undeceived  about  (p. ), 

to  uudergo  an  operation, 
to  be  underhand,  deceitful, 
to  undermine  (p.), 

to  understand  how  to^ 
to  let  (p.)  understand, 

to  be  understood  (th.), 

to  undertake  to, 

to  be  uneasy,  anxious,  about, 

to  leave  unfinished, 

to  remain  unfinished, 

to  behave  in  an  ungrateful 

manner  to  (p.), 
to  live  unhappily  together, 
to  unite  (th.)  with  (th.), 
to  be  unlucky, 

to  be  unprovided  with, 
to  buy  (th. )  unseen,  blindfolded, 
to  be  very  untidy, 
to  say  whatever  comes  upper- 
most, 

to  urge  the  necessity  of  (th.), 
to  urge  (p.)  strongly  or  con- 
tinually, 
to  use, 

to  make  a  good,  or  bad,  use  of, 
to  be  of  use, 
to  be  out  of  use,  obsolete, 

to  use  (p.)  well  or  ill, 

to  use  one's  self  to, 


n'avoir  pas  la  conscience  de ;  m 

pas  se  sentir. 
itre  cUtrompe  sur  le  compte  de 

(p.) 
se  /aire  optrer. 
itre  en  dessous. 
{couper  rherbe  sous  le  pied  de 

(P) 
t^entendre  d. 
donner  a  entendre  d  (p.);  /aire 

comprendre  d  (p.) 
s'enteridre. 
se  cJiarger  de. 
itre  inquiet  sur;  s^inqriidter  de; 

itre  en  peine  de. 
laisser  en  plan, 
tester  en  plan, 
payer  (p.)  dHngratUvde. 

/aire  mauvais  minage, 

mSler  (th.)  d  (th.) 

( avoir  du  guignon  ;  (  itre  en 

guignon. 
itre  sans;  n^ avoir  pas  de. 
acheier  (th.)  les  yevx/ermia. 
itre  tout  d4braUl6. 
( dire  tout  ce  qui  (nous)  vient  A 

la  bouche ;  ( dire  tout  ce  qvi 

(nous)  passe  par  la  tite. 
/aire  valoir  la  rvicessiU  de. 
pousser  (p.)  Vipie  dans  lea 

reins, 
se  servir  de. 
user  bien,  on  nuil,  de. 
itre  utile  a  (p.),  servir  d  (p.) 
itre  hors  d^usage  ;  riiire  plus 

d'usage. 
en  user,  agir,  bien  ou  mal,  omect 

trailer  bien  ou  mal. 
^accouiumer  d;  se  /aire  d. 


to  be  used  to  do, 

to  be  of  no  use  for, 
to  use  (p.)  very  ill, 
Ui  usher  in. 


zxiVn. 

avoir  eoutume  de ;  Ore  rompu 

d. 
ne  servir  de  rien. 
{traiter  (p.)  de  haul  en  has 
introduire,  annoncer 


auoMAncAi.  TEssa. 


249 


to  be  in  vain  for, 
to  set  value  on, 

to  Bet  too  great  a  value  npon 

one's  self, 
to  value  highly, 
not  to  value  money, 
to  be  of  some  value, 
to  be  at  variance, 
to  vent  one's  anger,  grief,  etc, 

to  venture  to  say, 
to  vex  (p.), 

to  be  vexed, 

to  be  a  victim  to, 

to  vie  in  cunning, 

to  vie  with  one  another, 

to  take  a  nearer  view  of, 

to  use  violence, 

to  be  in  good  voice, 

to  come  to  the  vote, 

to  vouch  for  the  trath, 


V 
avoir  bean. 
attacker  du  prix,  de  Pimpor- 

tance,  a  ;  faire  cos  de. 
tefaire  trop  valoir  ;  {/aire  le 

rencMri. 
faire  grand  cos  de. 
tie  pas  regarder  a  Cargent. 
avoir  qudque  valeur. 
tie  pas  a^accorder. 
,  exluder  sa  colore,  aa  dotilew, 

etc. 
ne  pas  craindre  de  dire, 
(faire  faire  du  mauvais  tang 

d(p.) 
{se  faire  du  mauvais  tang, 
elre  en  butte  a. 
jouer  du  plus  fin. 
{/aire  a  qui  mieux  mieux. 
voir,  observer,  depltisprbs, 
en  venir  aux  votes  defaiL 
ilre  bien  en  voix, 
aller  aux  voix. 
garatUir  la  v6rit6. 

W 


f aire  la  gageure,le pari;  parier. 

tenir  le  pari. 

aitendre. 


to  lay  a  wager, 
to  accept  the  wager, 
to  wait  for, 
to  wait  on  or  upon  (to  serve),    servir. 
to  wait  on  or  upon  (to  visit),      aller  voir. 
to  wait  fora  better  opportunity,  {reculer  pour  mieux  tauter, 
to  wait  till  doomsday,  ( attendre  soum  Porme. 

to  keep  waiting,  faire  attendre. 

to  walk  (for  pleasure),  se  promeiier. 

to  t&ke  a  walk,  faire  une  promenade^  un  iovr 

de  promenade,  un  tour. 


to  walk  (two  miles), 
to  walk  over, 

to  walk  a  lung  way, 
to  take  the  wall, 
to  wander  from, 
to  want  (th. ), 


XLvm. 

faire  (deux  miUesJ  d  pied, 
parcourir  (un  endroitj  a  pied  ; 

pousser  jusque. 
foAre  une  tongue  traite. 
prendre  le  haul  du  pavi, 
^^carter  de. 
manquer  de.' 


1  This  T*.-b  is  also  used  imper«onally:— /J  tm  manqwf  trots  fhmet. 


250 


IDIOMATICAI-   TERBS. 


to  want  of  or  with  (p.), 

to  want  with  (th.), 

to  be  ill  want  of  (th.), 

to  relieve,  it>  supply,   one's 

wants, 
not  to  be  waiting  in, 
to  attack  (p. )  wantonly, 
to  levy,  to  make,  to  wage,  war 

against, 
to  be  warm  (persons), 
to  be  warm  (weather), 
to  warm  one's  self, 
to  warrant  it, 
to  waste  powder  and  shot^ 
to  waste  time, 
to  watch  over, 
to  be  on  the  watoh, 
to  set  a  watch, 
to  be  in  hot  water, 
to  be  in  low  water, 
to  waver  between  two  parties, 
to  be  in  a  wavering  condition, 

to  make  vt^ay  for  (p.), 
to  be  in  the  way, 
to  go  the  right  way  in, 
to  nave  one  s  own  way. 


to  get  out  of  the  way, 

to  go  a  great  way  with  (p.), 


to  go  down  the  wrong  way, 

to  lead  the  way, 

to  lose  one's  way, 

not  to  know  one's  way, 

to  put  (p.)  on  the  right  way, 

not  to  know  what  way  to  turn, 

to  find  out  the  best  way, 

not  to  be  in  (my)  way, 

to  be  (my)  usual  way  to, 

to  be  very  weak, 

to  wear  away, 

to  wear  badly, 

to  wear  well. 


vouloir  d. 

vouloirfairc  de, 

avoir  besoin  de. 

subvenir,  tuffire,  attx  bvtoina  de, 

ne  pas  manquer  de. 
{attaquer  (p. )  d  propos  de  bottea. 
/aire  la  guerre  d. 

avoir  chand. 
/aire  chaud  (imp.) 
{prendre  un  air  de  fen. 
en  r4pondre. 

( tirer  sa  poudre  aitx  moineaux. 
perdre  le  temps, 
avoir  Voeil  aur. 
{avoir  Pceil  au  guet. 
rigler  une  montre. 
( Stre  aur  le  gril ;  { griller. 
itre  baa  pcrc4. 
{ nager  e?  tre  deux  eaux. 
{ itre  cowme  I'oiaeau  aur  la 

branckt. 
faire  p'ace  d. 
gSner,  embarrasser, 
ee  Men  prendre  d. 
/aire  aes  /antaisiea ;  /aire  sea 

volontSs ;  en  /aire  d  sa  tSte  , 

ne  prendre  conseil  que  de  aa 

tSte  ;    { avoir  le  champ  libra ; 

( avoir  sea  coud4e8 /ranches, 
itter  deUb  ;  se  ranger, 
avoir  beaucoup  d'influence  aur 

(p.) ;  /aire  beaucoup  d'efet 

««r(p,) 
descendre  de  travera. 
marcher  en  tile  ;  conduire. 
se  perdre. 
Stre  disorients. 
Tnettre  (p.)  sur  la  vote, 
ne  savoir  oil  donner  de  la  tSte. 
( trouver  le  joint  (figurat.) 
n'Stre  pas  de  (ma)  pro/eaaio*. 
{ Stre  (mon)  ordinaire  de. 
n'avoir  qu'un  aouffle  de  vie. 
user,  conaumer. 
n'Stre  paa  d'un  bov,  user, 
itre  d'un  bon  uaer. 


IDIOMATICAI,    VfcRBS. 


25] 


to  be  wearable,  fashionable, 

to  be  bad  weather, 

to  be  fine  weather, 

to  be  fine  weather  again, 

to  weather  the  storm, 

to  be  wedded  to  an  opinion, 
to  weep  for  (joy,  etc.), 
to  weep  bitterly, 
to  be  worth  one's  weight  in 

gold, 
to  give  a  hearty  welcome  to 

(p.). 
to  be  welcome, 
to  be  welcome  to  (th.), 
to  be  well  (health), 

to  be  well  (things), 

to  be  well  for, 

to  be  well  up  in  the  good 

graces  of, 
to  put  a  spoke  in  the  wheels, 

to  be  wet  to  the  skin, 

to  know  which  is  which, 

to  while  one's  time  away, 
to  be  worth  one's  while, 
to  find  it  worth  one's  while, 
to  have,  to  be  full  of,  whims, 
to  whisper. 


itre  de  mwe. 

/aire  mauvain  tempg  (imp.) 

/aire  beau  temps  (imp.) 

se  remettre  au  beau. 

r6sister  d  la  tempite  ;  /aire  tSie 

a  I'orage. 
( etre  coijfe  cCune  opinion, 
pleurerde  (joie,  etc.) 
pleurer  d  chaudes  larmes. 
valoir  sonpesant  d'or. 

/aire/Sie  di. 

Sire  le  bienvenu. 

itre  au  service  de  (p.) 

«c  bien  porter  ;  etre  en  bonne 

sant6  ;  allcr  bien. 
aUer  bien. 
itre  heureux  pour. 
Stre/ort  avant  dans  lea  bonnet 

grdces  de. 
Jeter,  or  mettre,  des  bdtons  dans 

les  roues, 
etre  tremp6  jtisqu'aux  os  ;  ( itr^ 

tremp4  comme  une  soupe. 
tavoir  dustinguer  Pvnde  fautre. 

Pun  d^avec  VavJbrt. 
tuer  le  temps, 
valoir  la  peine  de. 
y  trouver  son  compte, 
( avoir  des  lunea, 
dire  d  ForeiUe. 


2XIX. 


to  bear  (p.)  ill-will, 
to  be  willing  to, 


to  win  over, 

to  get  wind  of  the  thing, 
to  have  a  good  windfall, 
to  be  windy, 

to  wink  at  (a  fault,  etc.), 
not  to  be  the  wiser  for  it, 
to  wish  well  to  (p.), 
to  wish  (p.)  a  ha])py  new-year, 
to  wish  at  Jericho, 
to  wish  one's  self  a  hundred 
miles  away, 


en  vouloir  A. 

itre  prSt  d  ;  ne  demander  pa» 

mieux  (que  de). 
gagner. 

avoir  vent  de  la  chase, 
avoir  une  bonne  aubaine. 
/aire  du  vent  (imp.) 
/erjner  les  yeux  sur. 
ne  pas  en  itre  plus  avanci, 
vouloir  du  bien  d. 
souhaiier  la  bonne  ann6e  d. 
( envoyer  (p. )  au  Mississippi, 
vouloir  itre  d  cent  pieds  tout 

terre. 


2li-2 


IDIOMATICAL    TERES 


to  wish  very  much  to, 

to  be  full  of  wit, 

to  have  one's  wits  about  one, 

to  be  at  one's  wits  end. 


to  seek  foV,  to  strain  after,  wit, 

to  be  thought  a  wit, 

to  torture  one's  wits, 

to  find  out  some  wit  in  (th.), 

to  live  by  one's  wits, 

to  be  frightened  out  of  one's 

wits, 
to  be  extremely  ^itty, 

to  wonder  at, 

to  be  no  wonder  that, 

to  be  wont  to, 

to  send  word  to, 

to  be  a  man  of  his  word, 

to  break  one's  word, 

to  take  (p.)  at  his  word, 
not  to  dare  to  say  a  word, 
to  let  slip  a  word, 
to  pronounce  the  word,  to  let 

out  the  word, 
to  have  words, 

not  to  mince  one's  words, 
not  to  get  a  single  word  from, 
to  work  by  the  job, 
to  work  iot  the  bishop,  for  a 

bad  pay-master, 
to  work  for  a  dead  horse, 
to  be  a  hard  worker, 
to  fall  in  the  world, 
to  laugh  at  what  the  world 

may  say, 
to  grow  worse  and  worse, 
not  to  be  the  worse  for  it, 
to  make  bad  worse, 
to  have  the  worst  of  it, 

to  be  worse  oflf, 

to  change  for  the  worse^ 


mourir  cTenvie  de. 

p6tiller  d'esprit. 

4tre  sur  sen  (jardea  ;  avoir  ita 
presence  d'esprit. 

itre  au  bout  de  son  latin,  de  son 
rouleau  ;  {ne  savoir  plus  df 
quel  bois /aire Jl^che ;  {ne  sn 
voir  d  quel  saint  se  voicer. 

/aire  de  Vesprit. 

passer  pour  un  homme  cPesjmt. 

se  creuser  Vesprit. 

( entendre  finesse. 

itre  un  chevalier  dHndustrie. 

{perdre  la  tSte. 

(  avoir  de  Vesprit  jv^qu'au  bout 

des  doigts. 
sVAonner  de. 

rCitre  pas  4tonnant  que  (sabj.) 
avoir  coutume  de. 
faire  savoir  a. 
etre  homme  de  jjarole. 
mnnquer  a,  ne  pas  tenir,  au 

parole  ;  s'e«  didire. 
prendre  (p.)  au  mot. 
n^oser  souffler. 
Idcher  un  mot. 
Idcher  le  mat ;  trancher  le  mot 

( avoir  des  mots  ;  (  se  prendre 

de,  mots. 
(  ne  pas  mdcher  ses  paroles, 
ne  pas  arracher  une  parole  de. 
travailler  aux  pieces. 
( travailler  pour  le  roi  dePrusae. 

travailler  sans  avancer. 
(  etre  un  grand  piocheur, 
ne  pas  rdussir;  {se  casser  le  na^ 
se  moquer  du  qu^en  dira-t-on. 

aller  de  mal  en  pis,  depisen  pis, 

ne  pas  s^en  trouver  pins  mal. 

{Jeter  le  manche  aprds  la  cogn6«. 

avoir  le  dessous  de  ;  en  avoir  le 
dementi. 

itre  moins  avanci. 

( changer  son  cheval  borgne  eon- 
Ire  un  aveugle. 


IDIOMATICAX    TE£BS.  253 

to  be  worth  (persons),  6tre  riche  de ;  avoir. 

to  be  worth  two  of  him,  her,  it,  en  valoir  bxen  un  autre. 

not  to  be  worth  a  penny,  n'avoir  pas  un  sou  vaiUanL 

not  to  be  worth  much,  ne  pas  valoir  grand'chose. 

to  be  wrecked,  /aire  nau/rage. 

to  sing  most  wretchedly,  ( chanter  d/aire  pitU. 

to  write  a  beautiful  band,  avoir  une  belle  ecriture, 

to  write  trash,  barbouiller  du  papier. 

to  be  wrong  to,  avoir  tort  de. 

to  be  in  the  wrong,  avoir  tort;  itre  dans  ton  tort. 

to  be  in  the  wrong  box,  se  tromper. 

to  do  wrong,  tnal  agir,  malfaire. 

to  do  wrong  to  (p.),  to  wrong  (p.),  faire  du  tort  d  (p. ) ;  wutre  A. 

to  say  yes,  ( dire  que  oui,   ( dire  que  «.* 

to  yield,  baisser  pavilion  ;  cider. 


1  Translate  yt*  by  ti  when  yon  want  to  Bffirm  strongly  after  •  negatire 
sentence,  in  other  words,  when  you  contradict  in  tlie  affirniatiTe ;  as— Yoa 
say  nu,  I  say  yes,  Voiu  dilet  que  non,  je  dit  qut  ai.  Yon  bare  not  been  ttec^ 
have  yon?  Yea,  Fota  N'f  SMtpat  Se,  n'ut-ctpa»1  SL 


INDEX 


TO 


IDIOMATICAL  SENTENCES, 

FAMILIAR  PHRASES.  PROVERBS.  ETC. 


A  pin  a  day  is  a  groat  a  year ;  tune  ipingle  par  jomr  fait  huit 

take  care  of  tbe  pence  and      sous  par  an. 

the  pounds  will  take  care  of 

themselves  ;  a  penny  saved 

is  a  penny  gained, 
to  the  best  of  his  ability,  de  son  nuetix. 

according  as  one  is  able,  selon  ses  moyena. 

what  is  it  about  ?  what  is  the    de  quoi  s^agit-il  ?  de  qum  est-il 

matter  ?  question  ? 

mind  what  yoa  are  about,         faites  attention  d  oe  que  vout 

faites. 
there  is  a  report  abroad  to  the  h  bruit  court  que  ;  on  ripani  ^t 

efiFect  that  ;  it  is  reported,  bruit  que. 

of  (my)  own  accord,  de  (mon)  propre  mouvement. 

according  to  (your)  accoaatk  or   d  (vous)  entendre  ;  selon  (vout). 

to  you, 
not  on  any  account,  pas  pour  rien  au  monde. 

by  all  accounts,  au  dire  de  tout  le  monde, 

on  (my)  account,  par  rapport  a  (moi). 

short    accounts    make  long      les  boris  comptes  font  les  bona 

friends,  amis. 

be  is  quite  accustomed  to  do  it,  {U  en  fait  metier  et  marehan- 

disc. 

U. 

he  is  acquainted  with  the  most  ( il  sait  le  fin  dufin. 

secret  springs  of  affairs, 
he  is  au(]uainted  with  every    tii*<''*t  la  carte  du  pays. 

particuLar, 
in  the  very  act  of,  en  train  de. 

to  add  to  one's  misfortunes,       pour  surcroU,  or  comble,  de 

malheur. 
I  have  given  orders  not  to  ad-  je  Vai  consign^  d  ma  porte. 

mit  him  here, 
no  admittance,  on  n'entre  pas;  d^fen.'^e  (Fentrer 

much  ado  for  nothing,  beaucoup  de  bruit  pour  rien. 


250  IDTOMATICAI.   SENTEITCES. 

after  much  ado,  aprhs  bien  de  la  peine. 

without  much  ado,  ceremony,    saris  autre  forme  de  prods ; 

sans  plus  de/agons. 

he  made  no  more  ado  about  it,  ( il  ri'en  a  fait  ni  une  ni  deux. 

be  advised  by  me,  suivez  mon  conseU;  croyez-moi, 

faites  ce  que  je  vovs  dis. 

that'8yottrafFair,yourtumnow,  (d  vous  la  balle. 

he  has  re-established  his  affairs,  ( il  est  revenu  sur  Veau. 

that  is  another  affair,  (cela  change  la  th^e;  (c'est  um 

autre  paire  de  manches. 

M  affairs  stand,  au  point  oit  en  sont  les  affaires 

(or  les  choses). 

other  people's  misfortunes  affect  J  mal  d'autrui  n'eat  que  songe. 
us  but  little, 

your  affection  {or  hatred)  is  re-  vous  Stes  payi  de  retour. 
paid  ;  you  are  paid  back  in 
your  own  coin, 

aforesaid,  ci-dess7i,t. 

I  am  not  afraid  of  his  threats  {fen  ai  bien  vu  iFautreat 
{or  of  the  dangers  you  pre- 
dict to  me), 

m. 

after  the  French  faahipn,  a  la/ran^aise. 

day  after  day,  from  day  today,  de  Jour  en  jour;  d^un  jovr  ft 

I'autre. 
against  one's  will,  d  contre-cmur. 

every  age  has  its  pleasures,        Xily  a  des  hochets  pour  tout 

dge. 
he  has  rather  an  agreeable  per-  il  est  assez  bien  fait  de  sa  per- 
son, Sonne. 
agreed,                                          d^accord, 
what  are  you  aiming  at  ?            oii  voulez-vous  en  venir  ? 
he  is  aiming  at  your  money,       c^est  a  votre  argent  qu'il  en  vcut. 
no  man  alive,                               personne  au  monde. 
the  company  is  all  alive,             la  soci6i6  est  tout  anim4e,  or 

( tout  en  Pair. 
after  all,  ( au  bout  du  compte. 

is  that  all  ?  n^est-ce  qu£  cela  ? 

if  that  is  all,  s'il  ne  tient  qu'a,  cda. 

when  all  comes  to  all,  enfin  ;  ajjres  tout. 

for  all  you  can  say  and  do,  ( vous  avez  beau  dire  et  beau 

faire. 
that  is  all  he  could  find,  {Une  trouva  que  cela  pour  tout 

potage. 
grasp  all,  lose  all,  qui  trop  embrasse,  mal  6treint. 

it  is  all  one  to  me,  cela  m^eit  6gal. 

it  is  all  one,  (  chou  pour  chou. 


IDIOMATICAL    SENTENCES.  257 

almost,  nearly,  A  peu  pris. 

let  me  alone,  laimez-moi  tranquUle. 

let  him  alone,  yon  are  not  a      ne  votis  jouez  pas  d  lui,  il  edt 
match  for  hiia,  pltu/ort  que  vous, 

TV, 

let  well  alone,  le  tnieux  est  Fennemi  du  bien  ; 

tionest  Men,  qvi'on  s'y  tienne. 

come  along,  venez  done  ;  allons,  ventz. 

amendment  is  repentance,  t  gy*  s'ameTide  se  repent. 

amicably,  de  gr4  a  gr&,  d,  CamiabU. 

nothing  comes  amiss  to  him,       ( tout  lui  va. 

be  begins  to  get  angry,  ( la  moutarde  lui  monte  aunez, 

it  will  never  answer,  eela  n'iro  pas. 

he  brought  on  himself  a  roagh  ( U  i est  fait  relancer  d'trnpor- 
answer,  tance. 

be  has  anticipated  his  revenae,  {Ua  mang6  son  bU  en  herhe. 

wearing  apparel,  oH^ets  d'habillements. 

it  would  appear,  d  ce  qu^Uparait ;  U  y  a  appct- 

rence. 

there  is  every  appearance,  Uy  a  Unite  apparenee. 

there  is  no  appearance  of  it,      il  n'y  parait  pas. 

do  not  judge  of  things  by  their  ( VhabU  nefait  pas  le  moine. 
outward  appearances, 

they  made  an  April  fool  of  him,  onluiadonni  unpoisson  d'avriL 

it  is  of  no  use  arguing,  I  think  vous  prSchez  un  converti. 
like  yon, 

a  far-fetched  argument;  ( «n  argument  tiri  par  les  cho 

veux. 

arm  in  arm,  bras  dessus  bras  dessous. 

a  shallow  artifice,  tune  finesse  cousue  defil  blane. 

an  artist  is  known  by  his  per-  A  Pceuvre  on  eonnatt  Vouvrier. 
formance, 

as  I  see,  as  it  seems,  d  ee  queje  vois ;  d  ce  qvtUparait, 

as  for,  quant  d. 

it  is  as  much  as  there  is,  or  as  <^est  tout  au  plus. 
you  can  say  ;  that  is  the  ut- 
most, 

V. 

putting  aside,  dedncting,  ahstracHon  faite  de, 

assiduity  makes  all  things  easy,  d  force  dc  forger  on  devient 

forgeron. 
you  may  assure  yourself  that,    tenez-vous  pour  dit  que. 
I  am  quite  astonished,  ( les  bras  m'en  tombenL 

there  they  are  at  it,  les  y  voild. 

attend  to  your  business,  faites  attention  d  ce  qtte  now 

faites. 


258 


IDIOMATICAL    SENTENCES. 


I  will  attend  to  him  in  a  minute,  {je  suis  d  ltd  dans  une  mmuta. 
I  don't  know  which  to  attend  je  ne  sais  auquel  entendre 

first, 
for  aught  I  know,  as  far  as  I  autant  que  je  sache, 

know, 
of  what  avail  is  it '  d  quoi  bon  ?  que  sert  de...f 

A  quoi  sert  de...? 
It  avails  nothing,  it  is  of  no  use,  cela  ne  sert  a  rien,  de  rien. 
on  an  average,  en  moyenne  ;  Fun  dans  Vavire , 

( Vun  portant  Vautre. 
awaj  with  you,  allezvous-en  ;  hors  d'icL 

VI. 


pour  prendre  la  chose  deplus 
haul. 


to  go  further  back, 

(a  few  years)  back,  ago.      .        ilyade  cela  (quelques  anuses). 
if  you  undertake  that  affair,  1  (^si  vousentreprenez cette  afaire, 

will  back  you,  jg  pousserai  d,  la  roue. 

it!«  toobad  (to),  ^est  par  trap  fort  (de). 

\.i  is  not  so  bad  as  he  looks,  or  inn'estpas  si  diabU  qu'U  ea 

his  bark  is  worse  than  hi?  *  -^ 

bite,  he  is  not  so  black  as  he 

is  painted, 
a  spent  ball, 

he  has  the  ball  at  his  foot, 
the  bargain  stands,  holds, 
it  is  a  capital  bargain. 


noir. 


une  balle  morte. 
Xilale  pied  d  V6trier. 
le  marcM  tient. 

t^est  un  marclU  d^or,  une  affairt 
d^ar. 

into  the  bargain,  over  and  above,  par-dessus  le  marcM. 
great  bargains  are  pickpockets,  Xon  se  mine  souvent  en  bona 

marcMs. 


barking  dogs  seldom  bite, 
it  would  be  as  well, 
be  that  as  it  may, 
how  can  that  be  1 
how  can  that  possibly  be  1 
that  may  be, 

it  may  be  so ! 

let  it  be  so !  agreed  1  done  I 

it  shall  not  be  so, 

if  I  were  to  die, 

if  it  were  not,  were  it  not  for, 

but  for, 
that's  it, 

that  is  not  it. 


ehien  qui  aboie  ne  mord  pas. 
autant vaut,  or atUantvaudraiL 
quoi  qu'il  en  soit. 
comment  cela  se  peut-H  t 
(fc  moyen  que  cela  .soit? 
pevt-Stre ;  cela  se  pevi  ;  cela  sc 

peut  bien. 
je  veux  le  croirel 
soit! 

je  n^entends  pas  cela. 
si  ie  venais  d  mourir. 
sans. 

c'cst  cela ;  (^ est  bien  eela  ;  {?ay 

est. 
ec  n^estpaacela  ;  (voua  n'y  6tcs 

pa*. 


IDIOMATICAL    SEKTENCE8.  259 

it  is  with  you  as  with,  U  en  est  de  vous  comme  de. 

it  is  just  so  with  me,  c'e^st  exactement  ce  qui  m^arritK. 

it  was  well  for  hiui  that  be  was  hien  lui  a  pris  d'itre  averti 

warned, 
what  is  that  to  met  (qu'eat-ce  que.  cela  me  fait  f 

it  is  not  for  yon,  (  ce  n'est  pas  pour  voua  que  le 

/our  chauffe. 

vn. 

beyond  or  past  bearing,  endar-  au-delA  de  UnU  ce  qu'on  peut 

ing,  supporter. 

it  becomes  yoa  indeed  to,  e^est  blen  a  voua  de;  U vous skd 

bien  tie. 
it  does  not  become  you  to  (com-  vous  avez  mauvaise  grdce  de 

plain,  etc.),  {vous plaindre,  etc.) 

I  will  go  before,  je  preiidrai  les  devants. 

I  beg  to  apprise  you,  fal  Phonneur  de  vous  informer. 

one  word  begets  another,  J  un  mot  en  entrahie  un  autre. 

our  affair  begins  well,  (  cela  s^emmanehe  bien. 

and   he  began  to   cry  most      it  le  voild  d  pleurer  d  chaudea 

bitterly,  larmes. 

the  beginning  is  the  worsts         t^  n^y  a  que  le  premier  pas  qui 

coHte. 
let  us  begone,  partons. 

I  advise  you  to  behave  properly,  {je  vous  conseiUe  de  charrier 

droit. 
it  is  past  all  belief,  cela  passe  touie  eroyance. 

to  the  best  of  my  beli^  autant  que  jepuis  le  eroire  ;  A 

ce  queje  crois. 
I  believe  you  i  je  crois  bien  ! 

I  believe  so,  je  crois  que  out. 

I  believe  not,  je  eroisque  non;je  ne  le  crois  pat. 

one  would  not  believe  it,  c^est  A  n'y  pas  croire, 

if  they  are  to  be  believed,  d  les  en  croire. 

is  that  the  first  bell  7  est-ce  Id  le  premier  coup  ? 

do  your  best,  your  worst  1  help  Jaites  ce  que  voua  voudrez/  {ar- 

yourself  !  rangezvous. 

one  had  best,  mieux  vaudrait, 

it  is  better  (imp.),  U  vaut  mieux. 

[  had  better,  jeferais  mieux  (de). 

I  had  better  not,  faurais  tort  (de);  je/eraia  mai 

(de). 
I  thought  better  of  it,  je  me  suis  ravish. 

it  cannot  be  better,  nothing  can  c'est  on  ne  peut  mieux  ;  rien  de 

be  better,  mieux. 

ha  is  not  much  the  better  for  it,  ( il  n'en  eM  pas  beaucoup  plus 

yrajs ;  il  n'en  eat  pat  plus 

avancA, 


260  rDIOMATICAL   SKNXENCE8. 

better  late  than  never,  mieux  vaut  tard  que  jamais. 

the  better  day  the  better  deed,  J  bonjour  bonne  oeiwre. 
it  is  better  to  beud  than  to      il  vaut  mieux  plier  que  de 

break,  romjyre. 

between  this  and  (to-morrow),  d^ici  a  (de.main.) 
between  wind  and  water,  afleur  d'eau. 

between  us,  I  do  not  think...,   de  vous  a  moi,  je  ne  poise  jjas.. 

VIII. 

that  is  beyond  me,  cela  me  passe. 

to  the  highest  bidder,  au  plus  ojprant. 

he  bids  fair  to  become   an      ( il  est  en  passe  de  devenir  of- 

officer,  ficier. 

no  bills  allowed,  ddfense  d'afficher. 

the  time  to  settle  one's  bill,        le  quart  d'heure  de  Rabelais. 
a  bird  in  the  hand  is  worth  two  un  tiens  vaut  mieux  que  deux  tu 
in  the  bush,  Vauras,  or Xfalouette  en  main 

vaut  mieux  que  I'oie  qui  vole. 
birds  of  a  feather  flock  to-      qui  se  ressemble  s' assemble. 

gether, 
every  crow  thinks  his  own  bird  J  d  chaque  oiseau  son  nid  est 

the  whitest,  beau. 

there  is  no  catching  old  birds    +  on  ne  prend  pas  les  vieux 

with  straws,  oiseaux  d  la  pip6e. 

fine  feathers  make  fine  birds,     X  la  belle  plume  fait  le  bel  oiseau. 
a  little  bird  told  me,  ( vion  petit  doigt  me  Va  dit. 

not  a  bit,  pas  le  mains  du  monde;  {pas  un 

brin. 
Bless  me  !  indeed  I  really !  you  ( Dieu  me  b6nisse  !  ( par  exem- 

don't  say  so  ?  pie  ! 

you  cannot  make  black  white,    d  Vimpossible  nul  n'est  tenu. 
it  is  only  a  momentary  blaze,  or  ce  n'est  qu^unfeu  de  paille. 

a  puff  of  anger, 
his  blood  boils,  le  sang  lui  bout  dans  les  veines. 

your  story  made  her  blood  cur-  ( votre  histoire  luiafait  venir  la 

die,  chair  de  poule. 

one  cannot  draw  blood  from  a  ( ore  ne  saurait  tirer  de  VhuiU 

stone,  d'wn  mur. 

without  striking  a  blow,  earn  coupf^rir. 

he  is  true  blue,  ( il  est  franc  du  collier. 

a  blunder,  unpas  de  clerc. 

I  trembled  in  every  limb,  je  tremblais  de  tout  mon  corps. 

he  is  a  great  bore  to  me,  ( c^est  ma  bSte  noire. 

there  is  something  at  the  bot-    il  y  a  qu^lque  chose  Id-dessaus. 

torn  or  beneath  that, 
his  bread  is  buttered,  il  ne  met  pas  d'eau  dans  son  vin. 

in  a  breath,  d^une  haleine  ;  tout  d'une  ha- 

Itine. 


IDIOHATICAX   SEXTElfCES. 


261 


he    breaks    everj    thing    he  U  a  la  main  malheureuae 

touches, 
the  pitcher  goes  so  often  to  the 

well  that  it  is  broken  at  last, 
as  you  have  brewed,  so  must 

you  drink, 


bribes  can  get  in  without  knock- 
ing, 
on  the  very  brink  of, 
trade  is  not  brisk, 
as  broad  as  it  is  long, 
he  burnt  his  fingers, 
a  burnt  child  dreads  the  fire, 
on  business, 
go  about  your  business, 

it  is  no  business  of  yours, 

it  is  no  business  of  mine,  I  don't 

enter  into  that,  he  must  go, 
mind  your  own  business, 
what  business  is  that  of  yours  ? 

it  is  your  business  to, 

I  wiU  make  it  my  business, 

business  is  so  and  so, 

the  business  will  not  pay  the 

cost ;  that  game  won't  pay, 
It  is  but  (three  weeks)  till ... , 

but  yesterday, 

but  for, 

it  is  but  trying,  or  striving, 

I  don't  care  a  button  for  it. 


it  is  buying  a  pig  in  a  poke, 
by  the  king's  authority, 
by  trade  a  joiner, 
by  the-by,  by  the  way, 

by  and  by, 
by  all  means, 

by  no  means, 

let  bygones  he  bygones, 


tant  va  la  cruche  dt  Peau  qu^A 

la  fin  elle  se  casse. 
( vous  av&s/aU  la/auU,  vous  la 

boirez;  (comme  on  fait  son 

lit  on  se  couche. 
J  les  presents  sont  toujoura  bien 

regus. 
d  deux  doigts  de. 
le  commerce  ne  va  pas. 
( bonnet  blanc  et  blanc  bonnet, 
U  s'y  est  6chaud4. 
chat  ichaudS  craint  Feaufroide. 
pour  affaire. 
( allez  vous  promener  ;  {passex 

votre  chemin. 
eela  ne  vous  rerjarde  pas. 
ije  n' entrepot  la-dedans,  UJavi 

qu'il  parte. 
mSlez-vous  de  vos  affaires. 
de  qv/}i  vous  mAlez-voiis  ?  est-ee 

que  cela  vous  regarde  f 
c'est  d  vous  de. 
fenferai  mon  a f aire;  je  tw'en 

charge. 
( cela  va  et  vient. 
( le  jeu  ne  vautpasla  chandelle. 

U  ny  a  plus  que  (trois  semaines) 

cFicid.... 
hier  encore, 
sans  ;  rieM  iU. 

il  rCen  coUte  pas  tant  d^essayer. 
{je  ne  m^en  soude  pas  plus  que 

de  Pan  quarante  ;  {jenem'en 

m,oque  pas  mal. 
X  c'est  acheter  chat  en  poehe. 
de  par  le  roL 
menuisier  de  son  m6tier. 
M,  propos  ;  en  passani  ;  soit  dil 

en  passant ;  par  parentliise. 
tout  de  suite,  tout  d  Vheure. 
d  tout  prix  ;  quoi  qu^il  en  co&te , 

al)solument. 
pa.f  du  tout ;  pas  le  mains  du 

monde. 
fl  nefaut  pas  r^veiller  le  chat 

qui  dort.        g 


262 


mOKAIICAL   S£NI£NCSBS. 


as  well  as  (I)  can  or  could, 
I  can,  or  cannot,  but, 
it  is  a  feather  in  his  cap, 
I  dou't  care, 


ZX. 

.  c 


de  (mon)  mieux. 
je  ne  puis  m^empScher  de. 
J  c'est  une  bague  au  doigt. 
{ga  nicest  bien  4gal ;  {je  irCch 

moque  bien  ;  ( qu'esi-ce  que  f a 

7ne  fait? 
what  do  I  care  for  all  his  com-  (j'ai  bien  affaire  de  ses  compli- 


pliments  ? 
in  a  sad  case, 
in  which  case, 
should  the  case  occur, 
this  is  not  the  case, 

I  think  it  a  very  hard  case, 
u  the  case  stands. 


menls! 
( dans  une  vilaitie  passe, 
attquel  cas. 
le  cas  dcMant. 
U  n'en  est  pa*  ainai ;  U  n'«t  est 

rien. 
cela  me  semble  bien  dur. 
la  chose  itant  ainsi ;  au  point 

oil  en  eont  les  choses. 
tela  est  clair. 
boil  chien  ckaase  de  race. 
( la  nidt  taus  les  clmts  sont  gris. 
i  c^est  lefeu  et  I'eau. 
(Je)  vous  frotterai  les  oreilles. 


it  is  a  clear  case, 

cat  after  kind, 

all  cats  are  grey  in  the  dark, 

they  agree  like  cat  and  dog, 

you  will  catch  it, 

it  is  no  catch,  it  is  no  great  thing,  ( ce  n'est  pas  le  diable. 

how  ceremonious  you  are !         (  voila  bien  des  histoires! 

certain  it  is  that,  ce  qu'il  yade  certain,  c^est  que. 

certainly,  doubtless,  d  coup  sHr. 

to  a  certainty,  pour  sHr  et  certain. 

it  is  no  more  like  than  chalk  w(ily  a  autant  de  difference  que 

like  cheese,  dujour  a  la  nuit. 

don't  risk  all  your  fortune  on  J  iZ  ne  faut  pas  meltre  tous  ses 

one  chance,  ceufi  dans  un  panier. 

charity  begins  at  home,  cJtarit4  bien  ordonn^e  commence 

par  soi-m&me. 
the  best  is  the  cheapest  in  the  J  on  n'a  jamais  bon  marcM  de 

®°"'  ,  mauvaise  marchandise. 

come,  cheer  up !  allons,  courage  ! 

he  has  eaten  his  chicken  in  the  (  U  a  mangi  son  bU  en  herbe 

egg, 
he  is  a  chip  of  the  old  block,      ( c'est  un  4chantillon  de  la  pi^ce; 

(Uest  fits  de  son pdre ;  il  est 
tu^A-oi     11^      r  1-       •  de  la  vieille  roche. 

the  difficulty  of  choosing  among  Pembarras  du  choix,  Vembarrai 

so  many,  ^^  ricliesses 

a  circular  (to  announce  births,  „^  leUre  de /aire  part 

deaths,  or  marriages),  a  fune-  ^^ 

ral  letter. 


IBIOMaTICAI,  SEHrXENCBS.  263 

that  depends  on  circumstances,  eela  dipend  dea  exrconatanoes  ; 

(c^eataelon. 


the  maid  is  cleaning  yonr  room,  la  bonne  fait  voire  ehambre. 
it  is  all  clear  gain  to  (me),  c^est  autant  de  gagn6pour  {mot. ) 

it  clears  up,  le  temps  s'^claircit ;  le  temps  «e 

d4couvre. 
that  is  clever  enough,  (  cela  n!est  pas  maladroit. 

those  who  think  themselves  the  ( lea  plus  hupp6s  y  sontpris. 

cleverest  are  often  caught, 
close  liy,  quite  at  hand,  near,    tout  pr^. 
close  fisted,  dur  a  la  desserre. 

cut  your  coat  according  to  your  t  selon  ta  bourse  gouveme  ta 

cloth,  boucfie. 

in  plain  clothes,  en  habit  bourgeois. 

a  suit  of  clotlies,  mi  luxbillement  complet. 

cloudy  mornings  turn  to  fair  apris  la  pluie  le  beau  temps. 

evenings, 
the  coast  is  clear,  (  il  n^y  a  plus  de  danger. 

the  cobbler  must  stick  to  his  chacun  son  metier. 

last, 
Cocagne,  pays  de  Cocagne. 

a  cock  and  a  bull  story,  «n  coq-d-l'dne  ;  J  tin  conte  de 

mxi  vi&re  I'oie. 
every  cock  crows  upon  his  own  un  coq  e,<it  bien  fort  sur  son 

dunghill,  famier. 

I  will  pay  him  back  in  his  own  {je  lui  donnerai  la  monnaie  de 

coin,  sa  pi^ce. 

that  is  of  your  own  coinage,       ( cela  est  de  voire  crA. 
he  coloured  up,  le  rouge  lui  monta  au  visage. 

a  ragged  colt  may  make  a  good  J  m4chant  poulain  pent  devenir 

hdrse,  bon  cheval. 

come  along,  venez  done  ;  allons,  venez. 

come  what  may  I  {vogue  la  galere;  {au  petit  bon- 

heur  !  advienne  que  poui-ra  ! 

arrive    qui   plante .'    d    tout 

hasard  ! 

first  come,  first  served,  t  les  jjreiniers venus  vont devant 

how  comes  it  that,  comment  sefait-U  que...?  (with 

subj.) 
if  any  obstacle  comes  in  the    s^il  survient  qttelque  obstacle. 

way, 

XI. 
the  whole  town  is  in  a  commo-  {toute  la  ville  est  en  Pair, 

tion, 
a  good,  gay  companion,  «»  f'on  vivanL 


264 


IDIOMATICAL  SENTENOM. 


on  m' a  ford  la  TROtn. 

( mafoi,  vousvoUA  Men  maladol 

( eela  me  passe. 

eela  ne  le  regarde  pas. 
U  y  va,  U  s'agit,  de  man  Tton- 
neur ;  mon  honneur  est  enjeu. 
A  Urns  ceux  qu'il  appartiendra. 
( e'est  le  moindre  de  mes  soucis. 

les  parties  int^ressies. 
Us  se  sont  donn6  le  mot. 
t  a  gens  de  village  trompette  de 
hois. 

je  passe  condamnation. 

A  la  d^bandade. 

{ tZ  riest  pas  sorcier  ;  U  n^a  pas 

invents  lapoudre. 
( mettez  la  main  surlaconscience. 

qui  ne  dit  mat  consent. 

( eela  nefait  ni  cliavd  nifroid. 


I  have  been  compelled  to  do 
that, 

you  have  not  ranch  to  complain 
of,  or,  is  that  all  ? 

that  is  beyond  my  comprehen- 
sion, 

that  does  not  concern  him, 

my  honour  is  concerned,  at 
stake, 

to  all  whom  it  may  concern, 

this  is  my  least  concern,  trou- 
ble, 

the  parties  concerned, 

they  act  in  concert, 

every  one  must  be  treated  ac- 
cording to  his  own  condi- 
tion, rank, 

I  confess  I  am  wrong, 

confusedly,  without  order, 

he  is  no  conjuror,  no  great 
genius, 

speak  according  to  your  con- 
science, 

silence  gives  consent, 

it  is  by  no  means  a  matter  of 
consequence, 

xn. 

let  me  consider,  (  donnez-moi  le  temps  de  m'ori- 

enter. 
taking  every  thinginto  consider-  tout  bien  examinS. 

ation,  all  things  considered, 
considering,  cm  4gard  A. 

in  contempt  of,  au  mApris  de. 

contentment  is  better  than      contentement  passe  ricnesMa, 


riches, 

everybody  contributes  to  it, 
if  you  can  conveniently, 
the  conversation  turned  to  or 

upon, 
be  cool,  keep  your  temper, 
at  prime  cost, 
cost  what  it  may, 
I  know  that  to  my  cost, 


chacun  y  m^t  du  sien. 
«i  eela  ne  vous  gene  pas. 
la  conversation  roula  «tw 

ne  votis  ewportez  pas. 

auprix  coiitant. 

coAte  que  co&te. 

{je  sais  ce  qu'en  vaut  Paune. 


1  know  tnac  vo  luy  uuou,  \y<>  """^  ^  '±-^-  -""-  • - 

the  business  will  not  clear  the  ( lejeu  ne  vaut  pas  la  chandelU. 

cost,  .        ^  J 

a  churchyard  cough,  (  une  toux  qui  sent  le  aapin. 

I  could  not  do  otherwise  than,  {je  ne  pouvais /aire  autrement 

qvue. 


IDIOUAllCAX  BESnZSCES. 


265 


bis  conntenance  falls, 
his  courage  fails  him, 
screw  np  yoar  courage^ 
that  is  of  coarse, 


in  the  coarse  of  the  day, 
he  is  a  little  cracked, 
my  3esh  creeps, 
the  cream  of  the  jest, 

there  is  not  a  living  creatnre, 

what  poor  creatures  we  are  ! 
he  came  back   qaite  crest- 
fallen, 
he  is  crying  like  a  child  that 

has  lost  his  rattle, 
a  fine  show,  and  a  small  crop, 
she  is  very  cross  to-day, 
I  shall  have  a  crow  to  plack 

with  him, 
tbat  is  the  crowning  of  it, 
he  is  an  anlicked  cub,  a  boor, 
he  is  a  canning  fellow,  shrewd 

one, 
he  is  a  canning  old  fox, 

do  not  trust  him,  he  is  more 
canning  than  yon. 


ilperd  cotUenance. 

U  courage  lui  manque. 

allons!  courage! 

( cda  va  sans  dire  ;  cela  va  de 

soi  ;  comme  de  raison  ;  bien 

erUendu. 
dans  le  courant  de  la  joumie. 
{U  estun  peu  tinibri. 
(fai  la  chair  de  povle. 
{ le  ban  de  la  farce;  {Uplaiaant 

de  Vaffaire. 
il  n'y  a  pas  dme  qui  vive  ;  {U 

n'y  a  pas  un  chat. 
(  qtCestce  que  de  nous  ! 
U  est  revenu  avec  sa  courte  honte, 

( U  crie.  comme  un  aveugle  qui  a 

perdu  son  bdton. 
t  belle  THontre,  peu  de  rapport. 
( elle  a  mis  son  bonnet  de  (ravers, 
{faurai  maille  a  partir  avee 

lui. 
U  ne  manquait  plus  que  cela. 
( <^est  un  ours  mat  lechi. 
( U  riest  pas  manchoL 

(  c^est  un  vieux  routier,  un  Jin 

matois. 
ne  rotM  fiez  pas  d  Iw,  ( il  voun 

en  revendrait. 


op  hill  and  down  dale, 
he  has  been  in  many  dangers, 
I  dare  say  it  is,  very  likely, 
as  dark  as  pitch, 

it  grows  dark,  it  is  getting 

dark, 
till  dark. 


par  monts  et  par  vaux. 

t  il  a  vu  le  Ump. 

je  vous  crois ;  c'est  possible. 

( notr  comme  dais  un  four,  or 

comme  dans  un  sae. 
il  sefait  nuit. 

jusqvCd,  la  AMtt 


xm. 


bearing  the  date  of  the, 
from  this  day,  henceforth. 


from  day  to  day, 
in  the  face  of  day. 


en  date  du  ;  daU  du. 

d,  dater   d^aujourd'hui,   de  ce 

jour;  d  partir  (Caujourd'kui, 

de  ce  jour. 
de  jour  en  jour, 
d  la  face  du  soleil. 


266 


EDIOMATICAI.  SENTENCES. 


the  next  day, 
every  other  day, 
some  day  next  week, 
to  a  day, 

every  day  is  not  Sunday, 
by  daylight,' 

it  is  daylight  at  8  in  the  even- 
ing, 
at  dead  of  night, 
as  good  as  dead, 
dead  men  tell  no  tales, 
as  deaf  as  a  post. 


U  lendeinain. 

de  deux  jours  Vun. 

unjour  de  la  semaine  prochame. 

d  unjour pr^. 

ce  n'est  pas  tous  les  jours  f6te. 

en  plein  jour. 

on  voit  clair  A  8  heures  du  aoir. 

au/ort  de  la  nuit. 
&e8t  comme  s'il  itait  mort. 
morte  la  bete,  mort  le  venin. 
(  sourd  comme  un  pot. 


none  is  so  deaf  as  he  that  won't  il  n^y  a  point  de  pire  sourd  que 


hear, 

by  a  great  deal  (after  a  nega- 
tion), 

whose  deal  is  it  ? 

it  is  death  to  me, 

death  stares  him  in  the  faee^ 

out  of  debt,  out  of  danger, 

he  deceives  himself, 


celui  qui  ne  veutpas  entendre. 
d  beaucoup  prts. 

d  qui  est-ce  d/airef  d  donner  ? 
(  c^  est  ma  mort. 
til  a  la  mort  tntre  les  dents. 
t  qui  «c  doit  rien  n'a  rien  ct 

craindre. 
( il  croit  voir  des  4toiles  en  plein 

Tnidi. 
ilfaut  qu'une  porte  soit  ouverte 

ouftrm6e. 
cela  n'est  pas  de  mon  ressori. 


d  son  corps  defendant. 


one  must  decide  some  way  or 

other, 
it  is  Mot  for  me  to  decide,  to 

judge,  about  it. 
in  his  own  defence, 
one  must  never  bid  defiance  to  Une  faut  jamais  dijicr  unfou. 

a  madman, 

by  degrees,  peu  d  peu  ;  par  degris. 

with  as  little  delay  as  possible,  dans  le  plus  bref  dAlai. 
the  least  delay  may  be  preju-  il  y  apkril  en  lademeure. 

dicial, 
all  is  not  lost  that  is  delayed,    ee  qui  est  diffM  n'est  pas  perdu. 
he  is  as  demure  as  if  hntt&r  (  on  dir ait  ([uHl  n'y  tov4:1ie  pas. 

woiild  not  melt  in  his  mouth, 
I  don't  deny  it,  je  ne  rrCen  defends  pas. 

depend  apou  it,  comptez-y;  comptez   Id-desstu  . 

croyez-m'en. 
it  depends  entirely  on  yourself,  cela  ne  tient  qu^d  vous, 

xrv. 

a  desperate  disease  must  have   aux  grands  maux  Us  grartdt  «■ 

a  desperate  cure,  m^des. 

oiie  good  turn  deserves  another,  J  d  beau  jeu,  beau  retour. 
he  has  well  deserved  it,  it       ( il  ne  fa  pas  voU. 

served  him  right. 


miOMATICAL  SENTENCEa. 


267 


by  or  at  the  desire  of, 

it  is  my  desire  that  you  (do), 

a  desperate  attempt, 

at  dessert, 

it  is  tlie  devil  rebuking  sin, 


d  la  prih'e  de. 
je  vous  prie  de  (/aire), 
un  coup  de  desespoir. 
entre  la  poire  et  le/romage. 
:  le  renard  preche  aux  poidcs. 


when  tlie  devil  was  sick,  the  (  quand  le  diable  se/ait  vieux, 
devil  a  saint  would  be ;  when      t^  devient  ermite. 
the  devil  got  well,  the  devil 
a  saint  was  he. 


talk  of  the  devil,  and  he  ap- 
pears, 

diamond  cut  diamond,  tit  for 
tat, 

were  I  to  die  for  it, 

the  die  is  cast, 

it  was  within  a  tarn  of  a  die, 

that  makes  no  difference, 


( quand  on  jJarle  du'loup,  on  en 

voil  la  quetie. 
{fn  centre  Jin,  d  bon  chat  bon 

rat. 
dulil  m'en  coHter  la  vie. 
le  sort  en  estjetd. 
( il  n'a  tenu  qtCd,  nn  clieveu  ;  U 

s'en  est  peu/allu. 
UnHmporte;  peu  importe;  {eela 
nefait  rien. 
that  makes  no  difference,  or   peu  m'importe  ;  ( cda  ne  me/ait 

little  difference,  to  nie,  rien. 

don't  let  that  make  any  differ-  qu'd  cela  ne  tienne  1 
ence,    or   obstacle,    or   hin- 
drance, 
that  makes  a  difference,  ( cela  fait  quelque  chose. 

that  makes  a  great  difference,    (  cela  fait  beaiicoup. 
there  is  no  difference,  ( c'est  bonnet  blanc  et  blanc  bon* 

net ;  (  c^  est  jus  vert  ou  verjus. 
tliere  has  been  a  small  differ-     ( ils  out  eu  des  difficulty  enson- 

ence  between  tliem,  ble. 

it  is  not  a  very  difficult  thing,  (ce  n" est  pas  la  mer  a  boire. 
that  is  the  difficulty,  ( c^est  Id  le  diable, 

there  ia  no  difficulty  in  the     (  cela  va  tout  seuL 

thing, 
the  lieginning  is  the  onlydiffi-  il  n^y  a  que  le  premier  pas  qui 

culty,  caAte. 

it  is  looking  for  difficulties      ( c'est  chercher  midi  d  quaUmu 


where  there  are  none, 
by  dint  of, 
that  disappoints  me, 
I  am  disappointed  in  that 

youth, 
the  plot  is  discovered, 
it  disheartens  me  altogether, 
the  dish  wears  its  own  cover, 
he  is  a  wolf  disguised  in  sheep's  (  Ufait  le  bon  apdtre. 

clothing, 
your  atlviceisnotdisinterested,  vous  ites  orftvre,  M.  Josar. 


heures. 
d  force  de, 
cela  me  contrarie, 
ce  jeune  homine  ne  remplif.  pas 

m,e8  esp&rances. 
( la  mSche  est  ii^entie. 
( cela  me  casse  bras  et  jambes. 
tel  maltre  tel  valet. 


268 


rUIOMATIC/lL  SENTENCES. 


I  shonld  not  dislike  to  stay  in  je  ne  me  ddplairais  pas  lei 

this  place, 
a  dismal  sight,  un  spectacle  affreux. 

without  any  distinction  of,         sans  distinction  He  ;  sans  acccp 

tion  de. 
distrust  is  the  mother  of  safety,  defiance  estmtre  de  sftreti. 
I  have  nothing  to  do  with  it,     ccla  ne  me  ref/arde  pas. 
I  will  have  nothing  to  do  with  je  m'en  lave  les  mahut. 
it, 

XV. 

(cela  vatil?  estce  bicn  cojnme 

cela  ? 
cela  suffit ;  c'est  tont  ce  qu'il 
faut ;  c'est  hien  comme  cela. 


will  that  do  T 

that  will  do  (that  is  enough), 


(  cela  va  ;  cela  ira. 

(  cela  ne  va  jms. 

( cela /era  mon  affaire. 


that  will  do  (that  will  fit), 

that  won't  do, 

that  will  just  do  for  me,  just 

suit  me, 
all  would  not  do,  nothing  would  rien  n'y  faisaU. 

do, 
do  not  do  it  any  more, 


but  how  could  one  do  other- 
wise ! 
please  do ! 
don't,  I  say, 
there  is  no  doing  with  that, 

there  is  no  doing  that, 

these  are  fine  doings, 

I  have  done, 

have  done  speaking, 

what  is  to  be  done? 
I  am  done  for, 
no  sooner  said  than  done, 
what  is  done  is  not  to  do. 

It  is  Tobit  and  his  dog, 

love  me,  love  my  dog, 

what  !  keep  a  dog  and  bark 

myself, 
every  dog  has  his  day. 


que  cela  h'arrive  plus  ;  rCy  re- 
tournez  pas ,  (threateningly) 
que  cela  vous  arrive  encore  ! 

le  moyen  de/aire  aatremenll 

je  vous  e.n  prie  ! 

laissez  done  ! 

( il  rHy  a  pas  moyen  de  marcher 

avec  cela.  ^ 
{il  n'y  a  pas  moytn  de  fain 

cela. 
vous  enfaites  de  heUe» ,' 
fai  dit ;  faifini. 
Jinissez  de  parler;  ( en voUd  aa- 

sez  de  dit. 
que  faut-il  f aire  * 
( «ie  voild,  enfonc6. 
aussitdt  dit,  aussitSt  fait. 
( ce  qui  est  fait  n^est  pas  d 

faire. 
Xc'est  saint  Roch  et  son  chicn. 
X  qui  m'aime,  aime  mon  c/iien. 
i  on  ne  prend  pas  des  valeta 

pour  se  servir  soi-meme. 
chaque  chose  a  son  temps. 


1  There  is  vo.  followed  by  a  present  participle,  Is  generally  translated  by 
il  n']i  a  pax  moyen  de. 


EDIOMATICAt   SENTENCES. 


269 


an  old  dog  will  learn  no  tricks,  X  quand  on  est  vieux,  on  n'est 

plus  en  6tat  cTapprendre. 


barking  dogs  don't  bite, 
he  will  lay  it  at  your  door, 


ehien  qui  aboie  ne  mord  pas. 
(Ule  mettra  sur vtitre  dos,  sur 
votre  compte. 

there  is  no  doubt,  U  n'y  a  pas  de  doute  ;  cela  ne 

fait  aucun  doute  ;  cela  est 
hors  de  doute. 
up  and  down,  here  and  there,   fa  et  la. 
I  have  drained  my  glass  to  your  {fai  bu  a  votre  sanU  rubis  sut 


good  health, 
in  full  dress, 

one  nail  drives  out  another, 

what  is  he  driving  at  ? 

now  the  ale  is  drawn  it  mast 

be  drunk, 
as  you  have  brewed,  so  yon 

must  drink, 
ever  drinking,  ever  dry, 
as  drunk  as  a  lord, 
drunken  folks  seldom  take 

harm, 
she  is  a  very  drudge, 
every  one  his  due, 

we  must  give  the  devil  hia 

due, 
in  the  dusk  of  the  evening, 

it  is  high  Dutch  to  me, 
it  is  your  duty  to, 

I  deem  it  a  duty  to, 


as  in  duty  boond. 


Fongle. 
en  grande  toilette,  en  grand 

costume, 
un  clou  chasse  Pautre. 
oil  en  veut-U  venir  ? 
(puisque  le  vin  est  tiri,  Ufaut 

le  boire. 
( comme  on /ait  son  lit  on  se 

couche. 
( plivi  on  boit,  plus  on  veut  boire. 
( gris  comme  un  cordelier, 
(ilyaun  dieu  pour  les  ivrognes. 

€est  un  souffredouleur. 

d  chacun  son  dH;  d  tout  seigneur 

tout  konneur. 
{U  ne  faut  pas  faire  le  diable 

plus  noir  qtCil  est. 
tur  la  brune  ;  t  entre  chien  et 

loup. 
{je  rCy  entends  goutte. 
il  est  de  votre  devoir  de  ;  c^est  d 

vous  de  (it  is  for  you  to...j 
Je  crois  de  mon  devoir  de  ;  je 

crois  qtCU  est  de  mon  devoir 

de. 
eomme  c'est  de  ton  deookr. 


XVI. 

E 
(je  vous frotterai  les  oreiUe*. 
( les  murs  ont  de*  oreilles 
{  ce  qui  entre  par  une  oreille  sort 
par  rartre. 
snarling  curs  never  want  torn    X  chien  hargneux  a  toujours  les 

ears,  oreilles  d4chir6es. 

they  are  early  peo)>le,  f  Us  sont  matinfux. 


I  shall  box  your  ears, 
walls  have  ears, 
'n  at  one  ear,  and  ont  at  the 
other. 


270  IDIOMAIICAL    SENTENCES. 

in  good  earnest,  tout  de  hon  ;  sirknsement ;  de 

bonne /oi;  raillerie  a  part. 
an  earthly  thing,  chose  au  monde. 

you  don't  do  au  earthly  thing,  ituus  nefaites  ceuvre  de  voa  dix 

doigts. 
an  easy  life,  (  une  vie  de  chanoine. 

it  is  easy  for  you  to  speak,         vous  en  parlez  blen  d  voire  aise. 
»ne  would  think  it  was  as  easy  (U  se/nble  qu'il  vHy  ait  qu'd  se 

as  kissing  one's  hand,  bakner  et  a  en  prendre. 

eating  needs  just  a  beginning,    ( FappMit  vient  en  mangeant. 
one  cannot  eat  one's  cake  and  X  on  ne  pent  avoir  le  lard  et  la 

have  it,  cochon. 

he  forgets  eating  and  drinking,  il  en  perd  le  boire  et  le  manger. 
in  words  nearly  to  this  effect,    A  peu  prds  en  ces  termes. 
possession  is  eleven  points  of  J  la  possession  eat  la  meilleure 

law,  de  toutea  lea  pn^tenticma. 

what  else  ?  anything  else  T         qu^y  a-t-il  encore .   quoi  encore  t 
nowhere  else,  nulle  autre  part ;  nulle  part 

ailleurs. 
it  embarrasses  me  much,  ( cela  me  donne  de  la  tablature. 

each   emulat'-fl,  emulated,  hia  e^eat,  c'4tait,  d  qui... (condit.) 

neighbour   jo..., 
with  emulat;on  ;  in  emalation  d  I'envi ;  (  d  qui  mieux  mieux, 

of  each  other, 
enclosed,  herewith,  sous  ce  pli  ;  ci-inclus. 

there's  an  end  of  it,  that  is  all,  ( tout  est  dit. 
he  has  the  better  end  of  the      ( il  tient  le  groa  bout  du  bdton, 

staff, 
he  cares  not  which  end  goes      il  laiase  tout  au  kaaard  aans  ae 

forward,  soucier  de  rien. 

there  is  no  end  of  it,  cela  n'a  pas  de  Jin ;   cela  n'en 

finit  paa. 
it  is  endless,  (  c^eat  la  mer  a  boire. 

it  would  be  an  endless  task  to  on  n'enjiniraii  pas,  ai  Von  row- 
relate,  lait  raconter . . . 
beware  of  making  him  your      ( prenez  garde  de  voua  le  mettre 

enemy,  d  doa. 

he  is  engaged  in,  il  est  occup4  d. 

I  have  enjoyed  that  walk  (or     cette  promenade  (cette  prome- 

drive,  or  sail)  very  much,  nade  en  voiture  ou  en  bateau) 

m'a  fait  beaucoup  de  plaiair, 
m^a  bien  amua6,  nCa  bien  (U- 
verti. 
more  than  enough,  plus  quHl  n'en  faut. 

enough  of  that,  ne  parlons  plua  de  cela. 

that's  enough,  c'esl  assez ;  c^en  eat  assez. 

he  has  enough  of  it,  (il  en  a  son  compte. 

be  that  has  not  enough  has      +  qui  n'a  snffisance  n'a  rien. 

nothing, 


tSIOMATICAI.  SENTENCES. 


271 


enough  is  as  good  as  a  feast, 


I  gave  them  a  plentiful  enter- 

tainment, 
an  enthusiast,  a  fanatic, 
in  Ike  same  envelope, 
better  be  envied  than  pitied, 

ere  long,  shortly, 

ere  now, 

error  is  no  crime^ 


J  on  est  assez  riche  quand  on  a 

le  niceasaire;  assez  vatU  tMi 

festin. 
tje  lea  ai  traitds  a  bouche  que 

veux-tu. 
un  cerveau  br&U. 
sous  le  mSme  pli. 
il  vaut  mieuxfaire  envie  que 

pita, 
sous  pen  ;  dans  peu  ;  bientdL 
auparavant ;  avant  ce  jow. 
erreur  n'ett  pas  crime. 


XVH. 


even  though,  if  thougb, 

even  men  wept, 

even  reckonings  make  lasting 

friends, 
the  evening  crowns  the  day, 
at  all  events. 


that  is  an  everyday  occurrence, 

every  one  of  us, 

every  man  for  himself  and  God 

for  us  all, 
evil  will  betide  you, 
evil  be  to  him  that  evil  thinks, 
of  two  evils  choose  the  least, 

extraordinary  evils  require  ex- 
traordinary remedies, 

evil  got,  evil  spent ;  or  ill  got 
ill  spent, 

exactly  so, 

after  the  example  o£, 

with  that  exception, 

in  exception  to  thegeneral  rule, 

exchange  is  no  robbery, 

a  shuffling  excuse, 

beyond  one's  expectation, 
contrary  to  one's  expectations, 

petty  expenses, 
exi>erience  is  the  teacher  of 
ioola. 


lors   mSme    que;   quand   bien 

mAme;  dussije, dusses-tu,  etc. 
U  n'y  a  pas  jitsqu'aux  hommes 

qui  ne  versassent  des  larmes. 
les  bona  compteafont  lea  bon$ 

amis, 
la  Jin  couronne  roeuvre. 
en  tout  cas  ;  d,  tout  6v6nemani  ; 

de  toute  manidre  ;  vaUle  que 

vaille. 
cela  se  voit  torn  lea  jours, 
tons  tant  que  noua  aommea. 
ciiacun  pour  soi  et  Dieu  ponir 

tous. 
il  vous  en  prendra  maL 
honni  soil  qui  mal  y  penae. 
de  deux  maux  Ufaut  chovnr  le 

THoindre. 
aux  granda  maux  les  grands  re* 

mides. 
bien  mai  a^qiua  ne  profile  pat, 

c'est  cela  mSme. 

d  Vexemple  de. 

a  cela  prea. 

contre  la  rtgle  g6n4rale, 

( ^change  n'est  paa  vol. 

i  une  d4/aite,  une  mauvaiae  eav 

ciwe. 
au-deld  de  son  attente. 
contrairement  d,  son  attente;  par 

extraordinaire, 
menus  frais. 
t  V experience  est  la  mailream  des 

fous. 


272 


IDIOMATICAl.  SENTENCES. 


to  a  certain  extent, 

to  a  great  extent, 

to  such  an  extent, 

extremes  meet, 

farther  than  the  eye  can  reach, 

his  eyes  were  starting  from  his 

head, 
do  you  not  see  it  ?  it  lies  just 

under  yoirr  eyes, 
a  man  may  see  it  with  half  an 

oye, 
two  eyes  see  better  than  one, 

in  the  land  of  the  blind  one- 
eyed  people  are  kings, 

the  master's  eyes  make  the 
horse  fat, 

the  master's  eye  makes  every- 
thing thrive, 

he  is  an  eye  sore  to  me,  a  bore, 


d  OTJusqu'a  un  certain  point. 

grandement  ;  d  un  hant  degri. 

a  un  si  haut  degr6  ;  si  loin. 

lea  extrSmes  se  touclient. 

a  perte  de  vue. 

les  yeux  lui  sortaient  de  la  tSte. 

est-ce  que  vou3  ne  le  voyez  pas  f 

( il  vous  cHve  les  yeux. 
( un  aveugle  y  mordrait. 

(deux  yeux  y  voient  mieux 

qu'un. 
au  royaume  des  aveugles  les  bor- 

gnes  sont  rois. 
X  Vceil  du  maitre  engraisse  le 

cheval. 
J  tant  vaut  Vhomme,  tant  vaut 

sa  terre. 
( c^est  ma  bete  noire;  (&est  mon 

cavaliemar. 


xvin. 


p 


he  came  back  with  a  long  face, 
in  matter  of  facts, 
all  faggots  are  not  alike, 
the  business  has  completely 

failed, 
it  is  a  complete  failure, 
fair  means, 
all  this  is  very  fair, 
that  is  not  fair, 
fair  words  cost  nothing, 

fair  and  softly  goes  far, 

this  is  coming  a  day  after  the 

fair, 
you  speak  fairly, 
if  a  man  once  fall,  all  will  tread 

on  him, 
when  the  fruit  is  ripe  it  must 

fall  off, 
he  is  false,  deceitful, 
on  familiar  terms, 
Lb  i.^  as  familiar  as  a  spaniel 

dog, 


( il  revint  avec  un  pied  de  nez. 
lorsquHl  Skagit  defaits. 
{ily  a  fagots  et  fagots. 
J  adieu  paniera,  vendanges  aont 

faites. 
( c'est  un  coup  manquL 
moyens  de  douceur. 
( tout  ceci  est  bel  et  bon. 
cela  n'est  pas  de  bonne  guerre. 
X  beau  parler  n^icorche  pas 

langue. 
pas  a,  pas  on  va  bien  loin. 
( r^est  de  la  moutarde  api-is 

dtner. 
vous  j)arlez  d'or. 
J  quand  I'arbre  est  A  terre,  tout 

le  monde  court  au/x  hranches. 
quand  la  poire  est  mure,  ilfaut 

qu'elle  tombe, 
( il  est  faux  comme  unjeton. 
sur  unpied  de  familiarity. 
J  il    est  familicr    comme     lea 

epttrcs  de  Cic6ron  ;  ( il  mange 

dans  la  maia. 


tDIOKATICAL  SENTEirCES. 


27S 


familiarity  breeds  contempt, 

an  odd  fancy, 

it  is  a  mere  fancy, 

I  take  a  fancy  (to), 

how  far  is  it  ? 

so  far  as  to, 

in  80  far  as, 

80  far  so  good, 

as  far  as  one  can  see, 

far  from  it,  from  that, 

far  be  it  from  me, 

this  is  going  too  far,  thia  is 

rather  too  much, 
the  bill  of  fare, 
farewell, 
I  don't  bid  farewell,  we  shall 

meet  again, 
fools  make  fashions  and  wise 

men  follow  them, 
as  fast  as,  according  as, 
he  is  as  fat  as  a  mullet, 

a  like  fate  awaits  him, 

it  is  fated  that  I  shall  see  him 
every  day, 

like  father,  like  son, 

whose  fault  is  it  ? 

there  is  no  fear  of  him  (he  is 
not  to  be  feared), 

there  is  no  fear  of  him  (mean- 
ing/or him), 

there  is  nothing  like  a  miser's 
feast, 

he  is  a  smell-feast,  a  spnnger, 

he  feathers  his  nest  with  it, 

birds  of  a  feather, 
birds  of  a  feather  flock  together, 
fine  feathers  mak«  tine  birds, 
he  is  better  fed  than  taught. 


lafamiliarM  engendre  le  TnApria. 
unefantaisie  bizarre. 
ee  n'est  que  pure  imagination. 
U  me  prend  /antaigie  (de). 
combten  y  a-t-ilt 
fus(ju'd. 
en  tant  que. 
6  est  bien  jusqvUd. 
d  perte  de,  vue. 

( tant  «'en  faut  que  cela  soH; 
{tant s" enfant;  bienloindeict. 
loin  de  mot  (de). 
ceci  passe  la  railUrie, 

la  carte. 

portez-vous  bien  ;  adieu. 

sans  adieu,  notu  nousreverrons. 

X  les/ous  inventent  lea  modes  et 

lea  sages  les  suivenL 
aufuT  et  d  mesure  que. 
{Uest  gras  comme  un  moine,  or 

comme  un  chat  d^ermite. 
( autant  lui  en  pend  a  VoreUle, 
U  est  4crit  que  je  le  verrai  tou$ 

les  jours, 
tel  pbre  tel  fils. 
d  qui  la  Jaute  f 
U  n'est  pas  d  craindre. 

il  n^y  a  rien  d  craindre  pour  hiL 

X  il  n^est  chire  que  de  vilain. 

t  c'est  un  chercheur  def ranches 

lippies. 
il  en  fait  son  profit,  ( t^  en  fait 

ses  choux  gras. 
gens  de  mSm^farine. 
qui  se  ressemble  s'assemile, 
la  belle  plume/ait  le  bel  oiseau, 
til  est  mieux  nourri  qu'instruiL 


XTX. 

there  is  a  fellow-feeling  among  ila  se  sont  donn6  le  moL 

them, 
there's  no  fence  against  slander,  X  i^  '>*!/ »  point  dc  rempart  cen- 
tre la  vUdisance, 


274 


IDIOMATIUAL   aBNTJSJSrCES. 


vour  hands  are  not  fettered, 
his  fever  is  returned, 
I  don't  care  a  fig  for  it, 

in  the  thick  of  tlie  fight, 
fight  dog,  fight  bear. 


( vous  avez  voa  eotutees /ranches. 

lafiivre  Fa  repris. 

(je  ne  m'en  soucie  pas  plus  qut 

de  rien. 
aufort  de  la  mSlie. 
qu'ils  86  battent  sHls  veulent,  jt 
ne  m^en  mets  pas  en  peine. 
will  make  you  find  a  tongue,  je  vousferai  bien  parler. 
»  will  make  you  find  your  legs,  ye  vous  donnerai  des  jambes  ;ji 

vousferai  bien  marclier. 
I  cannot  find  it  in  my  heart  to,^^  ne  puis  me  risoudre  a. 
it  is  very  fine  for  you  (to  try),  fo^w  avez  beau  (/aire). 
as  fine  as  five-pence,  ( leau  comme  un  astre,  ( beat, 

comme  un  jour  de  Pdques. 
they  gave  him  over  the  fingers,  ( „»  lui  a  donn6  sur  les  angles. 
they  are  finger  and  thumb,         ( ^e  sent  le^  deux  doigts  de  la 

hand  and  glove,  main 

he  has  more  in  his  little  finger  ^on  petit  doigt  vaut  plus  que 
than  thou  hast  m  thy  whole      ^^^^  ^^  ^ 
body, 
by  fire  and  sword,  avec  lefer  etle/eu. 

a  burnt  child  dreads  the  fire,      ^  ^j^f  '^^UamU    craint  Peau 

W^ie^""^'  '^*  **"*  '^^'''^^{u7aiasinvent6lapoudrc 


first,  at  first, 
from  the  very  first, 
at  first  sight. 


ZX. 

d'ahord. 
tout  d'abord. 

d  premiiire  vue  ;  dtt  premier 
abord. 
the    priest  christens   his  ovfiit  ^t  bien  fou  qui  s'oublie. 

child  first, 
'tis  good  fishing    in    troubled  (•^/«J^&o»  pec/iercw  caw  ^rottJfe. 

water, 
I  have  other  fish  to  fry,  I  havei'a*  6ie»  d'autres  affaires  en 


something  else  to  do, 
by  fits  and  starts, 

that  fits  you  like  a  glove, 

I  flatter  myself  that, 

in  flesh  and  blood, 

every  one  lias  a  fling  at  him, 

he  could  get  oil  out  of  a  flint, 

on  the  same  floor, 

a  flow  will  have  an  ebb, 

the  fly  on  the  coaeh-wheel, 


t4te. 
par  accds  ;  A  bdtons  rompua; 

par  sauts  et  par  bonds. 
( cela  vous  va  comme  un  gant, 
faime  d  croire  que. 
( en  chair  et  en  os. 

fchacun  lui  lance  un  lardon. 
il  tirerait  de  Vhuile  d'un  mur. 
de  plain  pied, 
tout  flux  a  son  reflux. 
la  moucke  du  coche. 


there  are  more  flies  caught  with  J  on  prendplus  de  mmiches  avet 
honey  tlian  vint-gar.  du  mitl  qu'avec  du  viruiigre. 


tDIOilATlCAL  stany^cEs. 


275 


■AS  follows, 

it  does  not  follow  that, 

he  follows  iu  the  steps  of  hia 

forefathers, 
short  follies  are  the  best, 

he  is  a  downright  fool, 
one  fool  makes  many, 
you  take  as  for  fools, 

bray  a  fool  in  a  mortar,  he  will 

never  be  the  wiser, 
every  man  has  a  fool  in  hia 

sleeve, 
a  foolish  question  deserves  no 

answer, 
on  foot, 

he  missed  his  footing, 
for  all  that, 

forbearance  is  no  acquittance, 
forewarned,  forearmed  or  half- 

armed, 
I  am  forewarned  now, 
we  must  forget  all  that, 

forget  and  forgive, 
from  forgetful n ess, 
I  forgive  you  this  time,  but 

don't  try  that  again, 
forpve  me  this  fault,  and  I  will 

forgive  you  the  next, 
we  must  forgive  our  enemies, 
for  form's  sake, 

in  the  orilinary  forni, 

a  matter  of  mere  formality, 

for  form's  sake, 
and  so  forth,  and  so  on, 
it  is  my  good  fortune  (to), 
we  must  bear  up  against  bad 

fortune, 
fortune  favours  him  when  he 

tliinksle  ist  of  it, 
foul  in  the  cradle  and  fair  in 

the  s<i<ldle, 
there  is  nothing  like  going  to 

the  fountain  head, 
when  the  fox  preaches,  let  the 

geese  beware, 


ainni  qu'il  suit :  comme  ii  amL 
ce  n'fint  pas  a  dire  que. 
ban  chien  chaase  de  race. 

leg  plus  eourtes  foliea  sont  tou^ 

jours  lea  meilleures. 
( c'f.-it  un  sot  en  trois  lettres. 
la  folie  se  gajne. 
( votoi  nous  prenez  pour  des  gens 

de  Vautre  monde. 
J  d  laver  la  tele  d'un  More  on 

perd  sa  Ussive. 
(  chacun  a  sa  marotte. 

t  d  sotte  f^emande  point  de  ri- 

ponse. 
d  pied. 

le  pied  lui  a  manqui, 
avec  lout  cela. 

(ceqiii  est  differi  jCestpasperdik 
(  un  averti  en  vaut  deux. 

je  me  le  tlindrai  pour  dit. 

( U  fauX  passer  Fdponge  ld-de»- 

8US. 

Kins  rancune. 

par  ou\U. 

{passe  pour  eettefois,  mai»  qua 

je  ne  voua  y  reprenne  plus, 
{piisse-moi  le  s6n6,  etje  tepaa- 

serai  la  rhubarbe. 
( d  tout  p6ch6  mis^ricorde. 
pour  la  forme  ;  par  numiirt 

d'arquit. 
en  la  forme  accoutumie. 
une  a  f aire  de  pure  forme  ;  WM 

pure  forme, 
et  ainsi  de  suite, 
fai  le  bonheur  (de), 
Ufautfaire  contre  fortune  box 

caenr. 
( le  bien  vient  en  dormant. 

tun  (aid, enfant  detent  quekpur- 

fois  un  bel  homme. 
X  il  n'eat rien  de  telque  de  puiaer 

d  la  aource. 
t  quand  le  renard  priclie,  prenea 

;/  ir.le  d  von  pouUa. 


276  miOHATICAX   SENTENCES. 

better  the  latter  end  of  a  feast  J  il  vaut  mieux  venir  d  la  fin 

than  the  beginning  of  a  fray,      d'unfed'tn  qu'au commence' 

ment  d'un  combat. 
he  is  free  spoken,  {il  a  son  franc  parler. 

they  do  not  frequent,  or  see.  Us  ne  se  voieiit  pas,  ils  ne  ae 

each  other,  they  have  fallen      voientplus. 

out, 
it  is  not  .the  cowl  that  makes     ( IWiabit  ne  fait  pas  le  moine. 

the  friar, 
this  is  not  done  like  a  friend,     ce  n^est  pas  Id,  un  trait  d'ami. 
short  reckonings  make  long        ( les  bons  comptes  font  lea  bans 

friends,  amis. 

a  friend  is  never    known    till  on  ne  connati  Pami  qu^au  besoin, 

you  have  need ;  a  friend  in 

need  is  a  friend  indeed, 
we  are  quits  and  friends,  (  nous  aommes  qvittea  et  Ixms 

a77iis. 
what  a  fright  you  look  t  (  comme  votts  voUd,  fagotti  vous 

voild  dfaire  peur  / 
to  a  frightful  degree,  d  faire  peur, 

the  river  is  frozen,  la  riviere  est  prise. 

in  full,  en  entier. 

in  full  of  all  demands,  pour  solde  de  compte. 

as  full  as  it  can  hold,  aussi  plein  que  possible, 

as  full  as  an  egg,  {plein  comme  un  ce,uf. 

further,  moreover,  de  plus, 

till  further  order,  jusqiCd  nouvel  ordre. 

the  furthest  way  about  is  the    les  plus  courts  chemins  ne  eont 

nearest  way  home,  pas  toujours  les  meilleurs. 

what  a  fuss  for  nothing  I  {qm  d'histoires  (or  que  de  bruit) 

pour  rien  ! 
they  make  more  fuss  about  it    ( i^  n'y  a  pas  de  quoifoxtetter  ua 

than  it  deserves,  chat. 

for  the  future,  in  future^  d  Favenir, 

XXL 

G 

light  gains  make  heavy  purses,  J  les  petits  profits  enriehissent 

full  gallop,  ventre  d  terre, 

what  is  sauce  for  the  goose  is  J  ce  qui  est  bon  d  prendre  est 

sauce  for  the  gander,  or  what      ban  d  rendre, 

is  good  to  give  is  not  bad  to 

take, 
MB  gay  as  a  lark,  gai  comme  un  pinson. 

you  have  set  the  fox  to  keep     vous  avez  enferm/6  le  loup  dan» 

the  geese,  la  bergerie. 

children  must  be  treated  il  faut  mener  lea  enfanta  par  la 

gently,  douceur. 


IDIOMATICAI.   SENTENCES. 


277 


what's  bred  in  the  bone  never  la  caque  sent  toujours  le  ha- 


gets  out  of  the  flesh, 

I  wish  you  may  get  it  ! 
eee  now  what  you  get  by  dis- 
obe-lieuce, 


reng,  J  chassez  le  naturel,  U 

revient  au  galop, 
( attendez-vous-y  ! 
(voild  ce  que  c'est  que  cPav^ir 

d6.sob6i ;  voild,  ce  qv!on  gayiie 

d  <l6soMir. 


you  will  get  nothing  by  it,         U  ne  vous  en  reviendra  rien. 


XXII. 


get  out  of  my  sight, 

it  is  not  easy  to  get  at  you, 

my  head  is  giddy, 

I  hope  you  don't  give  it  up, 


6tez-vov3  de  devant  moi. 
(  vo^^8  rietes  pas  abordable. 
la  tcte  me  toume. 
fesp^re  que  vous  ne  vous  tenez 
pas  pour  battu. 

it  has  given  me  much  pleasure    fai  4t6  trts-heureux  de  (voir). 
to  (see), 

xxm. 

at  a  glance,  (Fun  coup  (ToeiL 

all  is  not  gold  that  glitters,        tout  ce  qui  brille  n^estpaa  or. 

the  affair  goes  or  drags  on  V affaire  tire  en  longueur. 

heavily, 
I  am  going  immediately,  fy  vais  de  ce  pas. 

how  goes  it  with  you  ?  how  are  (  comment  cela  va-t-ilt 

you? 
who  goes  there  ?  qui  vive  ? 

you  don't  know  what  is  going    ( vous  ne  savez  pas  de  quoi  U 

on,  retourne. 

it  goes  against  me  to,  fai  de  la  repugnance  A. 

you  go  oil  too  fast  (figurat.),      ( comme  vous  y  allezi 


that  will  never  go  down  with 

him, 
that  coat  will  not  go  on, 

it  is  no  go,  that  won't  do, 
he  shall  not  get  away  with  it  so, 


( il  ne  powra  jamais  digirer 

cela. 
(je  ne  puis  paa  entrer  dans  cet 

habit, 
{fanevapasj  fa  ne  prend  pas. 
{ il  me  la  paiera;  il  n'en  est  pa* 
quitte  d  si  bon  march6. 
tell  me  with  whom  thou  goest  dis-moi  qui  tu  liantes,  etje  te 
and   I   will  tell  thee  what       dirai  qui  tu  ea. 


thou  doest, 
now  they  are  gone, 
as  God  would  have  it, 
please  God  or  God  send  that, 
can  I  do  you  any  good,  any 

service  ? 
BO  said  so  done,  he  made  hit 

words  good, 
3 


les  voild  partis. 

par  un  effet  de  la  Providence, 

Dku  veuille  que. 

puis-je  vous  €tre  de  qttelqus 

utility  ? 
ce  qui/ut  ditfut/atL 


278  IDIOMATICAl   SEKTENCE8. 

•what  is  the  good  of  that  ?  A  quoi  bon  f 

that's  another  good  one  !  (  en  voild  bien  cCune  autre  f 

the  good  suffer  for  the  bad,        les  bom  patissent  pour  lea  mau- 

vain. 
it  is  an  ill  wind  that  blows  no-  d  quelque  chose  mcUheur  eat  bon. 

body  good, 
in  the  name  of  goodness,  t  au  nam  de  tout  ce  quHl  y  a  de 

bon. 
ill-gotten  goods  seldom  thrive,  J  bien  mal  acquis  profite  rare- 

ment.   ■ 
he  is  a  goose,  c^ent  un  oison  ;  U  est  sot  comme 

un  dindon. 
he  takes  that  for  gospel,  U  croit  cela  comme  Vivangile. 

it  is  not  all  gospel  that  he  says,  tout  ce  qu'il  dit  n^estpaa  mot 

d'^vangile. 
he  regards  neither  law  nor       +  U  n'a  ni/oi  ni  loL 

gosj)el, 
granted,  d" accord  ;  soit. 

granted  it  be  so,  suppos4  que  cela  soit. 

grasp  all,  lose  all,  qui  trop  embrasse  mal  6treint. 

the  great  folk,  {les  gros  bonnets. 

he  thinks  himself  a  great  man,  ( il  se  croit  le premier moutar diet 

du  Pape. 
it  is  no  great  thing,  ( ce  n'est  paa  le  P6rou. 

it  grieves  me  to  tell  you,  U  m^en  codte  de  vous  dire. 

without  a  groat,  penniless,  ( sans  le  sou  ;  sans  un  sou. 

upon  sure  grounds,  d  bonnes  enseignes. 

it  grows  or  draws  towards  the  la  Jin  du  jour  approcTie  or 

close  of  the  day,  s'approche. 

ill  weeds  grow  apace,  mauvaise  herbe  croit  toujours. 

at  a  guess,  en  devinanU 

for  your  guidance,  pour  votre  gouverne. 

out  of  gunshot,  kors  de  la  portie  du  canon,  or 

dujusiL. 

XXIV. 
H 
haliita  ever  remain,  don't         {quia  buhoira. 

cliaiige, 
I  had  best  do  ;  the  best  thing  ce  qu^fai  de  mieuxd/aire,. 

I  can  do  is...,  c'e«<  de... 

1  had  better,  jeferais  mieux  de. 

he  has  taken  a  hair  of  the  dog  %  il  a  pris  du  poll  de  la  bSte. 

that  bit  him, 
it  is  splitting  a  hair,  $  e*eatfendre  un  cheveu  en 

quatre. 
to  a  bair-breadLb,  (d  V^paisseur  d^un  cheveuprisj 

a  uti  chtvtu  pres. 


ISIOUATICAI.    SENTENCES.  279 

yoo  halt  before  you  are  lame,    ( vowi  criez  avant  qv^on  vou» 

icorche. 
that  smells  of  the  hal  ter,  X  cela  tent  la  hart. 

the  finishing  hand,  touch,  la  dernikre  main. 

at  hand,  reaidy  at  hand,  sous  lamain ;  toutpris;  aupr^s, 

hands  oflF !  (  d  baa  les  maim  !  viy  touchez 

pas. 
ray  hand  is  in,  je  suia  en  train. 

whilst  my  hand  is  in,  or  whilst  pendant  que,  or  puisque,  fat 

I  am  at  it,  la  main  d  la  pdte. 

with  a  book  in  his. hand,  «n  liiTe  a  la  main. 

they  go  hand  in  hand,  (  Us  s^entendent  comme  larrons 

enfoire. 
a  cold  hand,  a  warm  heart,       froiden  mains,  chaudes  amours. 
I  wash  my  hands  of  it,  je  rvHen  lave  Us  mains. 

by  handfuls,  d  pleines  mains. 

he  takes  things  by  their  smooth  ( il  prend  les  choses  par  le  ban 

handle,  bout,  par  U  '  ->»  c6t^ 

in  his  own  handwriting,  de  sa  propre  main. 

his  life  hangs  on  a  thread,  sa  vie  ne  tient  qu'd  unJlL 

if  it  should  so  happen,  le  cas  dcJi^ant. 

I  happened  to  be  there,  il  arnva  queje  me  trouvais  Ht, 

how  does  that  happen  ?  comment  cela  sefait-Uf 

happen  what  will,  let  what  will  advienne  que  pourra  ! 

haiipen, 
may  he  have  a  happy  lot !  ( le  ban  Dieu  le  b4nisse  I 

as  happy  as  a  king,  content  comme  un  roi. 

as  hard  as  iron,  dur  comme  lefer;  dur  comme  U 

cuir. 
as  hard  as  a  rock,  dur  comme  un  rocher. 

it  is  too  hard  upon  me,  c'est  trap  m^en  voidoir, 

narm  watch,  harm  catch,  J  qui  mal  vent,  mal  lui  vient ;  d 

qui  mal  veut,  mal  arrive. 
out  of  harm's  way,  hors  de  danger ;  en  siiret^ 

in  haste,  en  hdte  ;  d  la  hdte  ;  press^. 

the  more  haste,  the  worse       plus  on  se  hdte,  mains  on 

speed,  avance. 

take  off  your  hat,  dicouvrez-vous. 

hats  off  !  chapeaux  bas  ! 

you  count  your  chickens  before  voiis  complex  sans  votre  hdte. 

they  are  hatched;  you  reckon 

without  your  host, 
I  hate  the  sight  of  him,  (il  est  ma  b^te  noire. 

suspicion  haunts  the  guilty        les  wupgoiiM  poursuivent  Vesprit 

mind,  du  coupable. 

now  I  have  it,  (wi'y  voUd. 

there  T  will  have  him,  chst  Id  que  je  Vattevds. 

she  would  not  have  him.  die  n'a  paa  voulu  de  ltd. 


280 


OIOILATICAL   SESTESCBB. 


XXV. 


his  head  runs  on  nothing  but,    il  n'a  en  tSte  que.. 

que... 
this  wine  goes  to  the  head, 
headforemost,  headlong, 
over  head  and  ears, 
a  great  head  and  little  wit. 


U  ne  rive 


ce  vin  parte,  or  donne,  d,  la  tSte. 

&  corps  perdu,. 

pardessus  la  tSte. 

X  grosse  tSte,  peu  de  sens. 


a  fool's  head  never  grows  grey,  tete  defou  ne  hlanchit  point. 
you  have  hit  the  nail  on  the      (  vous  y  Stes  ;  (  vous  avez  mis  It 

head,  doigt  dessits. 

I  won't  hear  of  that,  je  u'entends  pas  cela. 

I  have  heard  it  said  that  your  je  me  suis  laiss4  dire  que  votre 

cousin  has  failed,  I  hope  it      cousin  avail  fait  faiUite,  fes- 


is  not  true, 
his  heart  is  breaking, 
his  heart  is  bursting, 
his  heart  is  full, 
he  takes  it  to  heart. 
Heaven  forbid  ! 
the  business  goes  heavily  on, 
that  is  Hebrew  to  him, 
you  seem  very  heedless, 


in  the  height  of  summer, 
help !  help ! 

help  yourself !  settle  it  as  you   ( arrangez-vous  I 
best  can  ! 


p^re  que  cela  n'est  pas  vraL 
U  a  la  mort  dans  V&me. 
cela  luifait  crever  le  coeur, 
U  a  le  coeur  gros. 
cela  lui  tient  au  cceur, 
le  del  (m')  en  prSserve. 
Vaffaire  tralne  en  longueur, 
( c^est  de  Valgebre  pour  lui. 
( il  me  semhle  que  vous  y  allez 

Men  a  la  l4gh'e. 
au  coeur  de  V4t6. 
a  mx}i !  au  secours  I 


I  cannot  help  it, 


je  n'y  puis  rien  ;  je  ne  puis  (or 
je  ne  saurais)  qu'y/aire  ;  je 
n'en  peux  mais  ;  ( c'est  plus 
fort  que  m^i. 

que  voulez-vous  que  fy  fosse  f 

on  n'y  peut  rien  ;  on  ne  saurait 
qu'yfaire. 

qu'yfaire?  que  voulez-vous qu' on 
yfasse?  que  voulez-vous ! 

je  ne  puis  m'empScher  de  dire. 


how  can  I  help  it? 
it  cannot  be  helped  ! 

how  can  it  be  helped  f 

1  cannot  help  saying, 

that  neither  helps  nor  hinders,  ( cela  nefait  ni  chaud  nifroid. 
every  little  helps,  un  peu  d' aide  fait  grand  bien, 

60  help  me  God  !  fen  prends  Dieu  a  tevioin. 

help  thyself,  and  Heaven  will   aide-toi,  le  del  faidera. 
help  thee. 


he  is  a  perfect  Hercules,        & 
that's  neither  here  nor  there, 
in  a  high  strain, 
it  is  high  time, 


(il  est  fort  comme  un  Ttire, 
cela  nefait  ni  chaud  ni  froid, 
sur  un  ton  devd. 
il  eat  grandement  tempa. 


JDIOUATICAL   8ENTEXCE8. 


281 


he  is  always  on  his  high  horse,  (il  est  toujovrn  monti  siir  cU* 

ichasBes,   or  aur  sea  granda 

chevaux. 
par  monts  et  par  vatix. 
il  n'y  a  ni  parentd  ni  amiU6  qyi 

tienne. 
un  avis  asaez  clair. 
d  tout  hasard. 
un  coup  heureux  ;  ( u»  coup  de 

raccroc. 
plus  lieureux  que  aage. 


np  hill  and  down  dale, 

no  ties  of  blood  or  friendship 

can  hinder  him, 
a  broad  hint, 
hit  or  miss, 
a  lucky  hi^ 


more  by  hit  than  by  wit,  more 

lucky  than  wise, 
hither  and  thither, 
it  is  his  hobby, 
every  man  has  his  hobby, 

the  proverb  holds  good, 
home  is  home,  be  it  ever  so 

homely, 
a  downright  honest  man, 
.  honesty  is  the  best  policy, 

honour  to  whom  honour  is  due, 
by  hook  or  by  crook, 
it  is  bis  last  hope, 
it  is  a  good  horse  that  never 
stumbles, 

I'll  win  the  horse  or  lose  the 

saddle, 
there  is  hot  work  there, 
as  hot  as  a  peppercorn  (pers.), 
at  a  lucky  hour, 
there  is  a  full  house, 
a  man's  house  is  his  castle, 

a  cheerful  household, 
how  now  ? 

how  so  ?  how  is  that  ? 

how  does  it  happen  that...  ? 
how  does  it  come  that...  ? 

this  is  my  humour,  or  temper- 
ament, 

out  of  bnmnur,  in  an  ill  hum- 
our,  temper, 

huiiiier  will  break  through 
stuue  walls, 


fa  et  Id,. 

cest  son  fort 

( chacun  a  sa  marotte,  or  son 

dada. 
le  proverbe  ne  ae  d&ment  pas. 
X  il  n'y  a  pas  de  petit  chez  soi, 

( une  bonne  pdte  d'homme. 

la  probiti  est  la  meilleure  poli- 
tique. 

a  tout  seigneur  tout  honneur. 

( de  brie  et  de  broc. 

&est  sa  planche  de  salut. 

X  il  n'y  a  si  ban  cheval  qui  n« 
bronche ;  il  n'y  a  ai  bon  cochtr 
qui  ne  verse. 

( tout  ou  rien. 

(  U  y  fait  chaud. 

(  vif  comme  la  poudre, 

dans  un  bon  moment 

la  salle  est  pleine. 

t  le  charhonnier  est  mattre  daru 

sa  malson, 
vnjoyeux  intirieur. 
que  vtut  dire  ced  ?  qu*y  a-t-U  t 

eh  bien  ? 
eommentcela?  par  quel  hasardf 
comment  sefaitU  (jue...?  d'oU 

vient  que...? 
je  suis  ainsifait 

de  mauvaise  humeur. 

la  f aim  cliasse  le  ioup  du  5dk 


282 


IDIOMATICAL   SEfTTENCES. 


hunger  is  the  best  sauce, 
they  must  hunger  in  frost,  that 

will  not  work  ia  heat, 
a  hungry  man  is  an  angry  man, 
in  a  hurry, 
there  is  no  hurry, 

you  cry  before  you  are  hurt, 

it  hurts,  it  grieves,  me  to  see, 
hush  1  he  is  coming, 


+  il  Tt'est  sauce  que  cTappgtU. 
vous  chantiez,  fen  suit  fort  am, 

eh  bien!  danspz  viaintenant. 
ventre  affairU  n' a  point  d'oreillea. 
avec  precipitation  ;  a  la  Mte. 
U  n^y  a  rien  qui  presse;  ( la  foire 

n'est  pas  sur  le  pont. 
( voxis  criez  avant  qu'on  voua 

icorche. 
cela  me  fait  de  la  peine  de  voir. 
( chut !  le  void  qui  vienU 


XXVI. 

I 

idle  hours,  spare  time,  leisure  heures  de  loisirt,  heureaper* 

time,  dues. 

idle  talk,  paroles  oiseuses. 

idleness  is  the  mother  of  vice,  l'oisivet4  est  la  mire  du  vice. 


if. ..but  a  little, 

as  if  one  should  say, 

without  ifs  or  ands, 

it  is  a  piece  of  ignorance  and 

presumption, 
an  ill-timed  reproach, 
immediately, 

I  am  all  impatience. 


pour  pen  que. 

comme  si  Von  disait;  comme  qui 

dirait, 
(sans  si  ni  mais ;  ( sans  barguU 

gner;    {sans  tant  marchan- 

der. 
6est  Gros-Jean  qui  remontre  d 

son  cur4. 
un  reproche  hors  de  saison. 
tout  de  suite,  a  Vinstant,  sur-le- 

champ, 
{je  niche  sur  pied. 


one  cannot  do  impossibilities,    d  ^impossible  nul  n'est  tenu ; 

t  on  ne  peut  pas  peigner  un 
cheval  qrd  rHa  pas  de  crins. 
truth  may  Sometimes  be  im-  le  vrai  peut  quelquefois  riUre 
probable,  truth  is  sometimes      pas  vraisemblable. 
stranger  than  fiction. 


there  is  an  improvement, 
some  improvement  might  be 

made  there, 
ten  times  in  twelve, 
by  inches. 


{ily  a  du  mieux. 

Uy  aid,  quelque  chose  dfaire. 

dixfois  sur  dome. 

pied  a  pied;  a  petit  feu;  (d 

coups  d'ipingles. 
{je  n'en  rabattrai  rien. 
U  est  grand  et  g6n6reux  en  tout 


I  won't  bate  an  inch  on  it, 
he  in  noble  and  great  every 

inch  of  him, 
give  him  an  inch,  and  he  wiU    {si  on  lui  donne  grand  commt 

take  an  ell,  U  doigt,  il  prenr'  grand  commt 

U  brag. 


roiOSIATICAI.  SENTENCES.  283 

if  yon  feel  inclined  to  it,  si  Penvie  vova  fn  prend. 

if  it  is  inconvenient  for  you  to,  si  cela  vom  derange,  sicela  voua 

gine,  de. 
indeed  (irony) !  {par  exemple  ! 

indeed  (surprise)  I  conivfient !    vraimetU !    (Mont 

done! 
indirect  praise,  louamje  <Utoum6e. 

indirect  dealing,  votes  detournies, 

indirect  conveyance,  voie  d^toumee. 

be  is  much  inferior  to  him,        {U  ne  lui  va  pcutjusqu'A  la  che- 

ville  du  pied. 
I  am  as  innocent  of  it  as  the       {f^^  ^^^  auaai  ignorant   que 

child  unborn.  Fen/ant  qui  est  d  naitre. 

without  inquiry,  tans  s'in/oniier ;  sans  demander 

(  or  prendre)  d' informations. 
insensibly,  by  degrees,  he  told   ( defil  en  aiguille  il  noua  conta 

T3S  all,  tout. 

inside  out,  4  Fenvera. 

insomuch  that  wei,  ^est  ce  qui  fait  que  nous. 

by  instalments,  partiellement ;  par paiementt 

partieU. 
for  instance,  par  exemple. 

in  one  instance,  dans  un  cos. 

on  the  tenth  instant,  le  dix  couranL 

to  all  intents  and  purposes,        d  tous  4gards. 
to  the  intent  that,  with  intent  d  Veffet  de. 

to, 
without  intermission,  d'arrache-pied. 

I  hope  I  don't  intrude,  {fesph-e  queje  ne.  suis  pas  de 

trap. 
it  is  not  of  his  own  invention,    ( cela  n^est  }xis  de  son  crU 
it  ia  good  in  itself,  c^est  bon  en  soL 

XXVU. 
J 

there  are  more  Jacks  than       ily  a  plus  d'un  Ant  d  lafohn 
one,  qui  s'appelle  Martin, 

Jack  of  all  trades,  homme  a  toutes  mains. 

green  jars  against  blue,  le  vert  jure  avec  le  bleu. 

yon  jest,  vous  vous  nuxjuez. 

in  jest,  pour  plaisanter ;  pour  rire. 

though  in  jest,  tout  en  riaut. 

many  a  true  word  is  spoken  in  on  dit  souvent  la  viriU  en  riant, 
jest, 

»  pretty  job,  une  belle  affaire. 

a  sad  job,  uncfdcheuse  affrire. 

an  ugly  job^  une  vilaine  affaire 


;;84 


rDIOMATICAt  aENTENCES. 


it  is  a  good  job  when  it  is  well 

over, 
are  you  joking  T 
not  a  jot, 

not  a  jot  is  wanting  to  it^ 
no  joy  without  alloy, 
to  the  best  of  njy  judgment, 
great  wits  always  jump  to- 
gether, 
just  by,  close  by, 
just  as  you  say, 
just  so, 
just  as  yon  please, 

just  tell  me, 
let  us  just  see, 

he  is  just  the  man  for  that  sort 
of  tbiug, 


t  on  est  heureux  quand  on  en  eat 

quitte- 

ivous  moquez-votis  du  monde  ? 
pas  un  iota  ;  ( paa  un  brin ; 
Hen  du  tout. 
(  U  n'y  manque  pas  un  iota, 
il  Ti'est  pas  deplamrsans  pnne. 
autant  que  je  puis  en  juger. 
lea  beaux  esprits  se  rencontreni. 

icipris. 

Unit  comme  vous  dUe$. 

exactement. 

tout  comme  il  vous  plaira  ;  tout 

comme  vous  voudrez. 
dites-moi  un  peu. 
voyons  un  peu. 
il  n'y  a  que  lui  pour  cela. 


the  meat  will  not  keep  well, 
I  have  just  enough  to   keep 

body  and  soul  together, 
the  kettle  calls  the  pot  black, 
the  key  is  in  the  door, 
wounded  in   twelve  battles  ! 

that  man  won't  kill  1 

he  is  neither  kith  nor  kin  to 
me, 

nothing  of  the  kind, 

a  piece  of  kindness, 

a  great  many  relatives  and 
scarce  a  friend, 

when  knaves  fall  out,  honest 
men  come  by  their  own, 

there  is  a  knock  at  the  door, 

as  is  well  known, 

one  does  not  know  if  he  will 
not  some  day  require  the  as- 
sistance of  such  a  person,  or 
thing, 

you  would  not  know  him 
again, 

I  know  now  where  I  am, 

I  will  let  him  know  who  I  am ! 


la  viande  ne  ae  gardera  pas. 
je  n'ai  que  de  quai  vivre. 

J  la  pelle  se  moque  dufourgon, 

la  clef  est  d  la  parte. 

{bless4    dans    douze   bataillesl 

cet  homme  a  Vdme  chevill4e 

dans  le  corps. 
il  ne  rn'est  ni  parent  ni  aUi4 ; 

{je  ne  le  connaia  ni  dCEoe  m 

d'Adam. 
rien  de  la  sorte. 
une  bontd. 
beaucoup  de  parents  et  peu 

d'amis. 
+  quand  les  larrons  se  battent, 

les  larcins  se  dicouvrent. 
onfrappe  d  la  porte. 
comme  on  le  sait  bien. 
il  nefaut  pas  dire:  ''Fontaine, 

je  ne  boirai  pas  de  ton  eau. " 


vous  ne  le  reconnattriez  paa ;  U 

n'est  pas  reconnaisfsable. 
je  me  reconnais  maintenant. 
je  lui  apprendrai  quije  suia. 


IDIOMAXICAL  SENTENCES. 


285 


everybody  knows  him, 

I  know  the  short  and  the  long 
of  it,  or  all  the  outs  aud  ins 
..fit, 

you  ought  to  have  knowm  bet- 
ter, 

to  the  best  of  my  knowledge, 

speak  to  the  best  of  your 
knowledge, 

from  knowledge  of  the  circam- 
stances, 

with  the  knowled;:;e  of, 

without  the  knowledge  o^ 


(U  est  connu  eomme  k  loup 

blanc. 
{je  sals  le  court  et  le  long  de 

cette  affaire. 

vous  saviez  bien  que  vous  ne 

deviez  pas  f aire  cela. 
autant  queje  sache. 
parlez  sans  reserve,  dites  tout 

ce  que  vous  savez. 
en  connaissance  de  cauMm 

au  vu  et  au  8U  de, 
d  Vinsu  de. 


God  tempers  the  wind  to  the 

shorn  lamb, 
his  lamp  is  burning  out,  be  is 

dying, 
let  us  first  of  all  see  how  the 

land  lies, 
everything  falls  into  his  lap, 
as  large  as  life, 
at  last, 

that  will  not  last  long, 
better  late  than  never, 
too  late, 
dog  latin, 

and  they  began  Iaughin<T, 
the  last  laugh  is  the  best,  or 

let  them  laugh  who  win, 
lazy  folks  take  most  pains, 

I  shall  make  him  turn  over  a 

new  leaf, 
at  the  very  least, 
not  io  the  least,  not  at  all, 

with  your  leave,  permission, 

where  did  you  leave  oflF? 
I  leave  you  to  judge  if..., 
since  we  must  leave,  it  is  bet- 
ter..., 
I  have  (one  pound)  lefi^ 


XXVUJL 
L 

J  d  brebis  tondue  Dieu  mesure  le 

vent. 
U  n'y  a  plus  d'huile  dans  la 


{voijons  d'abord  de  quel  cdti 

vient  le  vent, 
tout  lui  riussit  d  souhaiL 
de  grandeur  naturelle. 
enfin. 

( cela  n'ira  pas  loin, 
il  vaut  mievx  tard  que  jamais, 
apr^  coup, 
du  latin  de  cuisine, 
et  de  rire. 
rira  bien  qui  rira  le  dernier. 

J  les  paresseux  font  le  plus  de 

chemin. 
{je  lui/erai  chanter  une  autre 

chanson, 
pour  le  moins  ;  tout  au  moins. 
nullement;  en  aucune  maniere; 

pas  le  moins  du  monde. 
avec  voire  permission ;  ne  voua 

en  deplaise. 
oil  en  etes-vous  resti  ? 
je  vous  lalsse  d  penser  si. 
parlir  pour  partir,  il  vaui 

mieux.... 
il  me  rcste  (une  livre). 


286 


rDlOMATICAt  SENTENCES. 


tbere  is  still  some  leffc, 

scarcely  any  is  left, 

at  your  leisure,  spare  moments, 

he  is  not  given  to  lend, 

let  it  be  for  this  time  only, 

let  me  alone  for  that, 

show  me  a  liar  and  I'll  show 

you  a  thief, 
the  difference  lies  in  this, 
as  much  as  lies  in  me, 
whatever  lies  in  my  power, 
don't  let  your  things  lie  about 

in  that  manner, 
I  would  not  go  for  my  life, 

for  the  life  of  me, 

a  short  life  and  a  merry, 

during  his  or  her  liff^time, 
as  light  as  a  feather. 


il  en  reste  encore. 

il  vCen  rente  "pre^qxie  plus. 

d  vos  heures  perdues. 

{ lafourmi  rCest  pas  prSteiise. 

(passe  pour  cettefoia. 

voiis  pouvez  vous  en  rapporter  d 

mot. 
qui  dit  menteur  dit  voleur. 

la  diffirence  consiate  en  oeeL 
antant  qu'il  est  en  moi. 
tout  ce  qui  dipend  de  moi. 
(  ne  laisfiez  pas  trainer  vos  af' 

/aires  comm^  cela. 
je  nHraia  pas  quand  U  a'agirait 

de  ma  vie. 
pour  tout  au  monde. 
apr^  moi  le  ddluge!-  courte  el 

bonne,  c'eat  wm  devise, 
de  son  vimint. 
IJger  conime  une  plume. 


XXIX. 


I  should  like  to  see  it, 
I  should  like  to  know, 
I  don't  like  his  looks, 
and  the  like, 

the  like  was  never  known, 


she  is  very  ladylike, 

that  is  something  like  what  it 

should  be  ! 
that  is  just  like  him  I 


that  is  done  like  yon  ! 


that's  very  much  like  my 

brother, 
it  is  like  enough, 

it  looks  very  like  it, 

like  will  to  like,  or  like  loves 

like, 
it  is  not  likely  that, 


je  serais  curieux  de  le  voir, 
je  voudrais  bien  sai-oh: 
(  sa  mine  ne  me  revient  pas, 
et  autres  de  la  sorte  ;  et  d'aufrea 

choses  semhlables. 
c'est  une  chose  iiioule,  sans  exem- 

pie  ;  on  n'a  jamais  rien  vu  de 

pareil. 
elle  a  Cair  tr^s  comme  il/auL 
a  la  bonne  heure  ! 

voild  comme  il  est ;  ( c'est  un 

plat  de  son  mAtier  ;  je  le  re- 

connais  bien  Id  ! 
voild  de  vos  traits  /  voild  bien 

de  vos  traits  I  je  vous  recon- 

nais  hien  Id  ! 
[je  reconnais  bien  Id  monfr^rel 

c'est  assez  vraisemblable,  or 

croyable. 
( cela  en  a  tout  Fair, 
{qui se  ressemble s' assemble, 

il  n'y  a  pas  d'apparence  que. 


IDIOMATICAL  SENTE>CE8. 


287 


In  all  likelihood, 

he  is  hard  put  to  it  for  a  live- 
lihood, 

if  you  like, 

every  mau  to  his  liking,  or 
taste, 

she  looked  all  roses  and  lilies, 

he  put  his  head  in  the  lion's 

den, 
everybody  does  as  he  lists, 

pleases, 
do  as  you  list  with  it, 

by  little  and  little, 

ever  so  little, 

witliin  a  little, 

little  strokes  fell  great  oaks, 

many  a  little  makes  amickle, 

enough  to  live  on, 

should  I  live  long  enough, 

for  a  living, 

loaded,  covered,  with  shame, 

under  lock  and  key, 

all  his  life  long, 

all  day  long, 

in  the  long  run, 

how  long  will  it  be  before, 

I  long  to, 

he  longs  to  be  out, 


gold  looks  well  upon  green, 


selon  toute  apparenee. 

( il  tire  le  diable  par  la  queue. 

( «t  le  caeur  vous  en  dit. 

cliacun  vit  a  sa  mode  ;  chacun 

prend  son   plaisir    oil  il  U 

trouve. 
elle  avail  un  teint  delis  etde 

roses. 
X  U  s'est  confess^  au  renard. 

chncunfait  comme  il  Ventend. 

{faUesen  des  ckoux  ou  des 

raves. 
aufur  et  a  mesure;  petit  dpetiL 
tant  soil  peu. 
d  peu  de  chose  pris. 
X  petit  a  petit  Voiseaufait  son 

nid. 
les  petits  ruisseavx  font  Us 

grander  rirntres. 
de  qtioi  vivre. 
si  Dieu  me  prite  vie. 
pour  vivre. 
couvert  de  honte. 
sous  clef. 

toute  sa  vie  durant. 
( toute  la  sainte  joumie. 
d  la  longue. 
dans  combien  de  temps, 
il  me  tarde  de. 
( les  pieds  lui  d^mangent,  or  lui 

brident, 
V or  fait  bien  avee  le  vert. 


XXX. 


by  his  looks  you  would..., 
look  about  you,  take  care  of 

yourself,  beware, 
a  cat  may  look  at  a  king, 

one  must  look  before  one 

leaps, 
lit-  is  always  on  the  look-oat, 
I  am  at  a  loss, 


d  le  voir,  vous... 
prenez  garde  l  vaiu. 

{un  chien  regarde  Uen  «m 

6veque. 
il  yfaut  regarder  d  deitxfoia. 

tc^est  un  dinicheur  de  merles, 
{je  suis  au  bout  de  mon  latin  ; 

{je  ne  aaia  de  quel  boisfaire 

fiiche. 


288 


IDIOMATICAX  SENTENCES. 


I  have  lost  my  money  thereby, 
all  is  uot  lost  that  is  delayed, 

better  lost  than  found, 
that  is  not  lost  which  comes 

at  last, 
neither  for  love  nor  money, 

he  loves  his  business, 
love  me,  love  my  dog. 


love  will  creep  where  it  can- 
not go, 

a  low  fellow, 

his  reputation  begins  to  rua 
low, 

luck  for  the  fools,  and  chance 
for  the  ugly, 


{j^en  suvt  pour  mon  argent, 
ce  qui  est  dij'4r4    n'est   pas 

perdu, 
la  jyerte  n^est  pas  grande. 
U  vaut  mievx  tard  qv£  jamais. 

pas  pour  tout  Vor  du  monde  ;  ni 
j/ar  argent  ni  par  pritres. 

{(l  a  le  coeur  au  mAtier. 

J  qui  m'aime  aime  mon  chien  ,■ 
+  qui  aime  Bertrand  aime  son 
chien. 
'Pamour  ae/ourre  partouL 

un  pied  plat. 

sa  reputation  commence  d  bain- 

ser. 
aux  innocents  lea  maina  pleinns 


M 
he  is  as  mad  as  a  March  hare,    ( il  est  fou  A  courir  lea  champs; 

( il  est  fou  d  lier. 
it  makes  me  mad  to,  it  enrages  f  enrage  de. 
me. 


ready-made  clothes, 

a  made-up  story, 

he  made  up  for  his  losses  in 

that  affair, 
a  maid  of  all  work, 
in  the  main,  for  the  main, 

the  main  point, 

there  is  the  main  poinf:. 

I  can  make  nothing  of  it, 

between  man  and  man, 

to  a  man, 

he  is  a  man  of  ten  thousand, 

manage  it  as  yon  can, 
let  me  manage  matters, 


habillementa  covfectionnda. 

une  histoire  invent6e. 

{il  s'est  bien  remplumd  dans 

cette  affaire. 
une  bonne  pour  tout /aire. 
en  somme ;  au  bout  du  compte  ; 

en  g4n6ral ;  d  tout  prendre, 
lefinde  I' affaire. 
X  c'est  Id  que  git  le  li^vre. 
{je  m'yperds,je  rCy  congoia  rien. 
cPhomme  d  homnie. 
jusqu^au  dernier, 
c^est  un  homme  comme  U  ff  CfUa 

pen. 
{ arrangez-voua. 
laiaaez-moi  fairt. 


after  the  English  manner, 
in  a  friendly  manner, 
many  a  time, 
many  a  care. 


XXXII. 

d  Vanglaiat. 
avec  amitii. 
maintesfois. 
pl-us  d^un  aouci. 


IDIOilATTCiLL   8EXTEXCES. 


289 


there  is  one  too  many  here, 

he  is  too  many,  or  too  much 
for  lue, 

many  men,  many  minds, 

one  must  not  have  too  many 
irons  in  the  tire, 

near  the  mark, 

over  the  mark, 

there  are  no  marks  on  it, 

mark  well !  observe !  take  no- 
tice, 

good  wares  make  quick  mar- 
kets, 

marry  in  haste  and  repent  at 
leisnre, 

like  master,  like  man, 

he  who  takes  a  partner,  takes 
a  master, 

for  that  matter,  as  for  that, 

no  matter  !  that  is  nothing  ! 

it  is  no  matter  of  yours. 

It  is  no  great  matter,  or  task, 

upon  the  who'e, 

as  matters  stand, 

as  if  nothing  were  the  matter, 

you  may  do  it  if  you  like,  but 

I  will  not  meddle  with  it, 
by  all  means, 

li«  would  have  it  by  all  means, 

by  no  means, 

there  are  several  means  to  one 

end, 
what  does  that  mean  T 

what  is  meant  by...? 

meanwhile, 

beyond  measure, 

after  meat  comes  mustard, 

till  we  meet  again, 

many  littles  make  a  mickle, 

a  abort  memory, 
to  the  best  of  my  memory, 
within  the  memory  of  man, 
the  least  said  is  the  soonest 
mended, 


il  y  aid  quelqu'un  de  trop. 
il  est  trop  fort  pour  moi. 

autant  (TJiommes,  autant  cTavis, 
X  il  ne/aut  pas  cliasser  deux 

litvres  d  la/ois. 
pris  de  la  r6alM  or  vM.t^. 
au-dessus  de  la  rdaliU  ;  exagiri, 
U  n'y  paralt  pas. 
notes  Men. 

t  marchandise  qui  plait  eat  d 

devii  vendue. 
+  tel  se  marie  a  la  hdte  qtu  8*en 

repent  d  loisir. 
tel  mattre  tel  valet, 
t  qui  a  compagnon  a  maUre. 

au  reste,  quant  d  cela. 

ri'importe.'  cela  nefait  rien. 

cela  ne  vous  regarde  pas. 

(  ce  n^est  pas  granfTchose ;  {ce 
n'est  pas  bien  difficile. 

aprts  tout ;  d  tout  prendre. 

au  point  oil  en  sont  les  chases. 

( comrne  si  de  rien  n'itait. 

perrais  a  vous  de  lefaire,  mais 
moi  je  ne  nCen  m^lerai  pets. 

ceriainement ;  par  tous  les  mo- 
yens. 

il  le  voulait  d  toute  force. 

en  aucune  maniire  ;  nullement. 

tous  cliemins  vont  d  Borne. 

qu'estce  d  dire?  d  quoi    cela 

rime-t-U? 
que  veut  dire...?  que  gignife  ..t 
en  attendant ;  sur  ces  entrefaitea. 
d  toute  outrance  ;  avee  exd*. 
( moutarde  apris  diner, 
au  revoir  ;  jusqu'au  revoir. 
les  petits  ruisseaux  font  let 

grandes  rivitres. 
( une  m&moire  de  liivre. 
autant  qu'il  m'en  nouvienne. 
de  m4moire  d^homme. 
X  trop  gratter  euit,  trop  parler 

nuit. 


290 


IDIOMATICAL   SENTEXCES. 


do  not  mention  it  I 

it  is  not  worth  mentioning, 

he  merely  took  it  in  his  hand, 

as  merry  as  a  cricket, 

it  is  good  to  be  merry  and  wise, 

he  who  wishes  to  be  merry  is 

not  al\va3's  so, 
the  more  the  merrier, 
you  are  in  a  fine  mess  1 
they  are  well  met, 
I  will  have  nothing  to  do  with 

it, 
I  know  what  mettle  he  is  made 

of, 
in  the  very  middle  of, 
in  the  middle  of  winter, 
with  all  one's  might, 
with  might  and  main, 


rCy  faites  pas  attention;  {iln'p 

a  pas  de  quoi. 
cela  ne  vaut  paa  la  peine  cCen 

purler, 
il  n' a  fait  que  le  prendre  d  la 

main, 
gal  comme  un  pinson. 
il  CHt  bon  de  se  r^jouir,  mats  non 

jms  a  Vexcts. 
7i'est  pas  toujours  gai  qui  veut. 

plus  on  est  de  fous,  plus  on  rit, 

(  vov^  voild  joli  gargon  ! 

a  ban  chat  bon  rat. 

{je  ne  veuxpag  nCyfrottet. 

je  sais  de  quel  boia  il  se  chaujfe, 

au  beau  milieu  de. 

au  cosur  de  Vhiver. 

d  tour  de  bras. 

de  toutes  forces;  d  corps  perdu; 

a  cor  et  d  cri. 
( c'est  sa  vache  d  lait. 


he  is  as  good  as  a  milk  cow  to 

him, 
every  miller  draws  water  to  his  chacun  tire  de  son  c6t6, 

own  mill, 
never  miud, 


do  not  mind  him, 
I  do  not  miud  it, 

do  not  mind  that !  don't  let 
that  stand  in  the  way  1 

do  not  mind  me, 

when  every  one  minds  his  own 
busiueijs,  affairs  go  on  well, 

if  you  have  a  mind, 
make  your  mind  easy,  the  af- 
fair will  succeed, 

you  don't  know  your  own 

mind,    * 
you  will  never  put  that  out 

of  my  mind, 
his  greatest  delight  is  mis> 

chief, 


c^est  4gal!  rCiviporte!  peu  fm« 

porte  !  qyjUd  cela  ne  tienne. 
ne  faites  pas  attention  a  lui. 
cela  m'est  4gal ;  je  n'y  pense 

pas. 
ne  faites  pas  attention  d  cela  I 

qu'd  cela  ne  tienne  ! 
ne  vous  embarrassez  pas  de  mot. 
t  quaiid  chacun  se  mSle  de  son 

m6tier,   lea  vaches  sont  bien 

gardies. 
( si  le  cceur  vous  en  dit. 
( vous  pouvez  dormir  sur  Pune 

et  Vautre  oreille,    Vaffairt 

riussira. 
vous  ne  savez  ce  que  vous  voulez. 

( vous  ne  m'dterez  jamais  cela 

de  la  tite. 
( il  tie  respire  (or  demande)  que 

plaies  et  boasea. 


miOMATICAL   BESTESCia, 


29] 


•  tniscbievoas  act,  un  mauvais  tour. 

a  misfortune  soon  happens,        un  malfieur  est  hlentAt  arriv4. 
misfortunes  never  come  single^  vn  malheurne  vient jamais  setU, 
I  miaa  (a  volume),  t^  me  maitque  (un  volume)  ;  J6 

trouve  qu'il  me  manque  (un 
volume). 
■  missis  as  good  as  a  mile,  the  faute  d'un  point,  or  -pour  un 
mert^^st  trifle  ia  often  a  bar  to     point,  Martin  perdit  ton  dne. 
success, 

zxzin. 

par  migarde. 

moments perdus ;  momenta  de 

loisir. 
au  moTnent  oil  (or  que),  fut.  or 

past ;  dans  le  moment  oii  (or 

que),  past. 
argent  comptanL 
menus  plaisirs. 
ceci  aune  grande  valeur  (proper)  j 

ced  est  impayable  (figurat. ) 
(  r argent  luifond  dans  Us  mains, 
cet  argent  ne  le  minera  pas  loin. 


by  nadstake, 

spare   moments,  leisure  mo 

ments, 
the  moment  that, 


ready  money, 

pocket-money, 

this  is  worth  any  money. 


money  burns  his  pocket, 
that  money  won't  go  a  great 

way, 
make  money  of  that!   there's 

a  nut  for  you  to  crack  ! 
it  is  as  good  as  ready  money, 
no  money,  no  pater  nosier, 
money  governs  the  world. 


( arrangez  tout  cela  !  iirez-vou$ 

dela! 
( e^est  de  For  en  barre. 
( point  d^ argent,  point  de  aviaae, 
V argent  fait  tout. 


he  would  make  me  belie  \'e  that  (iZ  veut  me  /aire  voir  de» 
the  moon  is  made  of  green      4toiles  en  plein  midi. 
cheese, 
by  moonlight,  au  clair  de  la  lune, 

that  is  moonshine,  it  is  as  light  (  autant  en  emporte  le  ve$U, 
as  air. 


more  and  more, 

the  more  so, 

no  more  of  it, 

no  more  of  that, 

no  more  ceremony,  a  truce  to 

compliments,  etc., 
the  more  the  merrier, 


de  plus  en  plus, 
d  plus  forte  raison, 
n'en  parlons  plus. 
(  en  voild  assez  sur  ce  chapttre. 
treve  de  c4r6inonies,   de  compli- 
ments, de  railleries,  etc 
plus  on  est  defous,  plus  on  riL 


the  more  haste,  the  worse  speed,  plus  on  se  hdte,  mains  on  avance. 

the  next  morning,  le  lendemain  matin. 

eurly  in  the  morning,  le  matin  de  bonne  heure:  de  hon 

matin,  de  grand  matin. 
%  rolling  stone  gathers  no  moss,  pierre  <ini  roule  n'amasse  pat 

mouMC 


293 


IDIOMATICAL   SENTENCES. 


they  are  cast  in  the  same 

mould, 
be  mounterl  upon  hisliigh  horse, 
the  mouiitaia  hasbrougbt  forth 

a  mouse, 
AS  poor  as  a  church  mouse, 
by  word  of  mouth,  verbally, 
it  is  in  everybody's  mouth, 
he  that  sends  mouths,  sends 

meat, 
for  much  less, 
as  much  again, 
much  will  have  more, 
must  he  ?  is  it  obligatory? 
by  mutual  agreement, 
there  is  some  mystery  in  it, 

you  don't  know  the  mystery, 
the  secret,  of  it, 


les  deux  font  la  paire. 

il  monta  sur  ses  grands  chevnux, 
la    montagne    a    enfant6   une 

80uris. 
gueux  comme  un  rat  d'4glis&, 
de  vive  voix. 
tout  le  moiide  en  parle. 
+  Dieu  2)ourvoit  aux  besoins  de 

ses  creatures. 
d  beaucoup  moins. 
unefois  aidant. 
Vappitit  vient  en  mangeant, 
est-ce  de  rigueur  ? 
de  gr4  a  gr6. 
(U  y  a  quelque  anguille  sous 

roche. 
{ voics  ne  saiiez  pas  le  dessous 

des  cartes. 


XXXIV. 

N 
down  on  the  nail,  cash  down,    ( ruhls  mr  Vongle ;  espicet  son- 


one  nail  drives  out  another, 
you  hit  the  nail  on  the  head, 

do  not  name  it, 


an  assumed  name, 


give  a  dog  a  bad  name,  and 

then  hang  him, 
a  good  name  is  better  than 

riches, 
if  one's  name  be  up,  one  may 

lie  a-bed, 
a  narrow  mind, 
a  narrow  understanding, 
that  is  natural,  that  comes  from  cela  coule  de  source. 

the  heart, 
in  its  natural  state, 
from  nature, 
it  is  near  twelve  o'clock, 
he  is  not  nearly  so  proud  as 

you  say, 


nantes. 
tm  clou  chasse  V autre. 
( vous  y  ites ;  ( vous  avezmis  le 

doigt  dessu^. 
( rCyfaites  pas  attention  ;  il  n'y 

a  pas  de    quoi   (in  answer 

to  thanks). 
un  nom  de  guerre ;  un  nom  de 

plume  (for  an  author). 
quand  on  veut  noyer  son  chien, 

on  dit  qu'il  a  la  rage, 
bonne  renommee  vaut  mietix  qut 

ceinture  dorde, 
J  des  qu^on  a  de  la  vogue,  on  a 

sa  fortune  faiie. 
un  esprit  Mroit. 
une  intelligence  bom6e. 


au  natttrel. 
daprts  nature, 
t  il  s'en  va  midi. 
il  liest  pas  d  beaucoup  prls  rf 
fer  que  vous  le  dites. 


IDIOMATICAL   SENTElfCES.  293 

near,  nearly,  peu  a'en  faut,  il  ne  tient  a  rien, 

que  (with  the  subj.  and  ne 
before), 
a  neat  or  clever  trick,  «n  tour  adroit. 

it  is    necessary  notwithetaud-  encore  faut-U  qve... 

ing..., 
if  it  is  necessary,  e'il  y  a  lieu. 

necessity  knows  no  law,  nicesaiU  ri'a  point  de  lot. 

necessity  is  the  mother  of  in-  n6ce6«it4  est  mere  de  rbidu^trie, 

vention, 
one  mischief  comes  on  the  neck  un  Tnalheurne  vient  jamais  seul. 

of  another, 
in  case  of  need,  if  need  be,         au  besoin  ;  s'il  lefaui. 
what  need  is  there  of . . .  ?  ( qml  besoin  y  a-t-U  de?  d  quoi 

ion? 
what  need  you  care  1  de  quoi  voua  mettezvous  en 

peine  ? 
you  will  have  need  of  me  some  ( vousviendrezcuxre&m<mfour. 

day  or  other, 
a  friend  is  known  in  tune  of  on  connalt  T ami  au  besom. 

need, 
that  affair  is  quite  neglected,      ^^^  ^  comme  U  plaU  A  Dieu. 
a  good  lawyer  is  a  bad  neigfa-  +  ^„  avocat,  mauvais  voisin. 

hour, 
he  has  trodden  upon  a  nettle,     ^  „  marcM  sur  une  mauvaise 

herbe. 
he  nevertheless  comes  to  see  me,  il  ne  lalsse  pas  de  venir  me  voir. 
it  is  quite  new  to  me,  (c' est  pour  inoi  du fruit  nouveav. 

what  is  the  news?    anythiag quelles  nouvelles  y  a-t-U?  q%£y 

new  ?  at-U  de  nouveau? 

no  news  is  good  news,  point  de  nouvelles^  bonnes  nou- 

velles. 
what  next  1  aprt'i  ?  ensuite  ?  quoi  encore  ? 

a  diflSculty  next  to  impossible,  une  d''fficult4  presque  impossible 

a  r6soudre. 
if  he  is  not  a  rogue,  he  is  nextg'U  n'est  pas  unfripon,  Une  a'en 

akin  to  one,  faut  ffuire. 

a  nice  child,  „„  ggntu  en/ant. 

a  nice  walk,  yne  promenade  agriable. 

to  a  nicety,  ^  point ;  par/aitement. 

in  the  nick  <^f  time,  ^  poi,ji  nomm^. 

by  night,  in  the  night,  de  nuit,  pendant  la  nuU. 

»  sleepless  night,  ,^„p  „j,j^  d'iiisomnie ;  une  nuit 

^    •  u.r  11  blanche. 

at  nightfall  j  ^^^  ^j^^  ^  ^ 

willl,n|lll  bongr^^malcrri. 

more  noise  than  work,  ij^  bruit  que  de  hesogne. 

he  18  at  a  nonplus.  (^  „^  ^^.^  ^^J^^  ^.^^  .  -^-^  ^^  ^ 

r/uia. 


294 


IDIOMATICAX   SENTENCES. 


nonsense, 

nor  I  eitber, 

good  for  nothing, 

next  to  uotliing, 

(Ue  got  ^ngry)  for  nothing, 

it  is  a  mere  nothing,  a  trifle, 
as  if  nothing  at  all  was  the 

matter, 
where  nothing  is  to  be  had,  the 

king  loses  his  right, 
he  is  beneath  my  notice, 

without  seeming  to  take  any 

notice  of  anything, 
he  took  no  notice  of  me, 

how  now  ?  what  is  it ! 

now  and  then, 

now  for  that  letter, 

now  I  think  of  it,  will  you...  ? 

aowhere, 


aUons  done  !  ah  bah  !  (4  cTautrea  I 

ni  moi  non  plus. 

hon  d  rien  ;  vaurien. 

presqtte  rien. 

( d  propos  de  rien  ;  ( d  propos 

de  hottes. 
( c^est  une  mis^re. 
(  C07nme  si  de  nen  rCitait, 

X  oil  il  rCy  a  rien,  le  roi  perd  ees 

droits, 
il  ne  vaut  pas  la  peine  queje  lui 

riponde. 
sans  f aire  semblant  de  rien. 

il  n'a  pas  fait  semblant  de  me 

voir, 
qu'est-ce?  qu'ya-t-il?  eh  bienf 

que  veut  dire  ceci? 
de  temps  en  temps, 
voyons  maintenant  cetle  lettre, 
Apropos,  voulez-vou8.„  f 
nulle  part. 


he  is  sowing  his  wild  oats, 
money  is  no  object  to  me, 
is  that  your  object  ? 
there  is  no  objection, 

as  occasion  requires, 
there  is  no  occasion, 
there  is  no  occasion,  no  neces 

sity,  for  it, 
what  occasion  is  there  for. 
on  every  occasion, 

it  occurs  to  me  that, 

odd  or  even, 

one  pound  odd  shillings, 

an  odd  kind  of  a  man, 

an  odd  volume, 

at  odd  times, 

farther  off, 

one  mile  ofif, 

be  off,  get  away. 


XXXV. 

0 

ilfaut  que  jeunesse  se  passe, 
je  ne  regarde  pas  d  Vargent. 
est-ce  lace  qv  vous  avez  en  vue? 
U  n'y  a  pas  d' objection;  cela  ne 

fait  pas  de  difficidtd. 
suivant  (or  selon)  V occasion. 
( il  n^y  a  pas  de  quoi. 
( il  n'en  est  pas  besoin  ;  il  »'j/  a 

pas  besoin. 
qu'eM-il  besoin  de  (or  qtie). 
d  tout  propos ;  ( d  tout  bout  de 

champ. 
U  me  vient  d  Vid6e  que. 
pair  ou  non. 

une  livre  et  quelques  schellings. 
un  homme  singiilier,  bizarre, 
un  volume  dipareilU. 
dans  les  moments  perdua. 
plus  loin. 

A  un  mille  dHci,  de  kL 
allez-vou^-en. 


IBIOHAIICAL   SEKTEKCES. 


295 


the  fever  is  off,  has  left, 

the  affair  is  off, 

if  be  is  well  off,  let  him  keep 

so, 
there  is  no  offence, 

how  often  ? 

he  would  get  oil  ont  of  a  flint, 

how  old  would  yon  take  me  to 

be? 
I  am  old, 

he  will  not  live  to  be  old, 
on  the  right  baud,  on  the  left 

hand, 
say  on, 
and  so  on, 

off  and  on,  by  fits  and  starts, 
at  once, 


for  once^ 

once  more, 

once  in  a  way, 

ten  to  one, 

he  only  took  it  into  his  hand, 

if  that  be  the  only  obstacle, 
only  there  is  this  to  be  said, 

at  the  first  onset,  at  once, 
that  window  does  not  open, 
there  is  a  good  opening  for  you, 

let  us  speak  openly, 

in  my  opinion, 

have  you  come  to  that  opinion  ? 

you  stand  well  in  his  o[iii)iou, 

•    you  are  in  his  good  books, 

if  I  see  an  opportunity, 

you  will  uever  have  a  fairer 

opportunity, 
opportunity  makes  a  tbief, 
opportunity  lost  cannot  be  re- 
called, 
an  order  (for  tradesmen), 
in  regular  order, 


la^vreacessi, 

V affaire  eM  nianquie. 

a'U  est  bien,  qu'il  s'y  tienne. 

U  n'y  a  pas  de  mal ;  ( tZ  n'y  a 

pas  de  quoi. 
comhien  defois  f 
(  il  tirerait  de  VhuUe  d'un  mur. 
quel  age  me  donneriez-vous  ? 

{Je  date  de  loin. 

( il  nejera  pan  de  vieux  os. 

a  main  droite,  d  main  gauche. 

dites  toujour*. 

et  ainsi  de  suite;  et  ainsi  du  reste, 

a  bdtons  rompus. 

d  la/ois,  or  en  mime  temps  (at 

the  same  time);  tout  de  suite 

(immediately) ;  (out  d  coup 

(suddenly). 
unefois  dans  (votre)  vie;  une 

bonne  fois. 
encore  unefois ;  encore  un  coup, 
unefo'is  rHest  pas  couiume. 
dxx  contre  un. 
il  n' a  fait  que  le  prendre  d  la 

•main. 
s'U  ne  tient  qu^d  cela. 
seulement  (or  viais)  il  nefaiU 

pas  oublier  ceci. 
d'emhUe. 

cetteftnetre  ne  tfouvre  pas. 
vous  avez  Id  des  clvances  de  ri- 

uisir. 
parlous  a  coeur  ouvert. 
d  man  avis  ;  selon  moi. 
en  itesvous  log6  Id  ? 
( v<yas  He»  bien  dans  sespapiert, 

si  fy  vois  lieu. 

( vous  ne  Vaurez  jamais  vltu 

belle. 
V occasion  fait  le  larron 
J  V occasion  manqu6e  ne  serth 

trouve  pas. 
une  commande. 
d  tour  de  rdle. 


296 


EDIOMAIICAX   SKNTEKCES. 


among  otlier  things, 

every  other  day, 

it  is  quite  another  things 

out  of  compassion, 
oat  with  it  I 

out  of  siglft  ont  of  mind, 

he  (or  that)  is  never  to  be  out- 
done; nothing  can  be  better  ; 
he  has  left  nothing  further 
to  be  don«, 

all  is  over, 

it  is  all  over  with  him, 

over  and  above, 

nothing  over, 

the  most  difficult  part  is  over, 

the  happiest  of  his  days  are 
over, 

might  overcomes  right, 

I  told  him  his  own,  or  his 
faults,  plainly. 


entre  autrea. 

de  deux  jours  Vun. 

( c^est  une  autre  paire  de  man- 

ches. 
par  compassion. 
( voyons,  achevez  !  ( dites  ce  que 

c^est !  finissez. 
loin  des  yeux,  loin  du  cceur ;  lea 

absents  ont  toujour s  tort, 
aprks  lui  (aprha  cela)  il  faut 

tirer  l'4chelle. 


tout  eatfini. 

e'en  est  fait  de  luL 

pardessus. 

rien  de  reste. 

le  plus  fort  est  fait. 

( il  a  mangi  son  pain  blane  le 

premier. 
les  gros  poissons  mangent  lea 

petits. 
(je  lui  ai  dit  aea  v&ritia  (or  son 

fait). 


XXXVI. 

p 

il  n'y  a  pas  de  profit  sans  peine, 
il  n'est  pas  de  rose  saris  6pinea. 
&est  un  couple  heureux. 
une  voiture  d  deux  chevaux. 
pdle  comme  la  mort,  or  comm* 

un  mort. 
cela  tomhe  sous  le  sens, 
line  somme  insiqnifiante. 
.pardon  !  je  voua  demande  par- 

don! 
quant  a  moi. 
sur  ce  chapitre ;  aur  cet  article^ 


without  pains  no  gains, 
no  pleasure  without  pain, 
there  is  a  happy  pair, 
a  coach  and  pair, 
as  pale  as  ashes, 

that  is  a  palpable  case, 
a  paltry  sum, 
pardon  me, 

for  my  own  part,  as  for  me, 

on  this  particular, 

you  must  not  be  so  particular,  il  n'y  fauL  paa  regarder  de  si 

pr^. 
there  is  a  party,  a  meeting,        il  y  a  reunion  toua  lea  soira. 

every  eveiiiiig, 
give  your  patience  another      ayez  encore  un  peu  de  patience, 

pull, 
patience  brings  all  things  about,  tout  vient  d,  point  d  qui  sait  at- 

tendre. 


ibiohatio^lL  sentences. 


297 


I  paid  him  in  his  own  coin, 


you  will  pay  nothing  for  it, 
tliL^  l)ail  must  pay, 
that  does  not  pay, 

whoever  does  the  damage  must 

pay  for  it, 
he  wanted  to  make  a  cat's  paw 

of  me, 
it  is  a  slip  of  the  pen, 
penny  wise  and  pound  foolish, 

no  penny,  no  paper, 

no  performance  ! 

at  his  peril, 

there  is  pick  and  choose. 

I  bad  to  swallow  that  pill, 

take  council  of  your  pillow, 

or  Bleep  on  it, 
there  it  is  the  shoe  pinches, 
it  is  a  pity, 
it  is  a  great  pity, 
it  is  a  thousand  pities, 

the  more  is  the  pity,  so  much 

■the  worse, 
in  the  first  place, 
in  the  next  place, 
in  the  last  place, 
a  word  out  of  pt  )ce^ 
it  is  your  place  lo, 
in  plain  terms, 

the  plain  truth, 

a  plain  counten  ince^ 

a  plain,  blunt  fellow, 

fair  play  ! 

one  must  not  play  a  bear's 

play, 
M  you  please, 

yon  (he,  she,  etc)  may  do 

what  (you)  please..., 
if  1  please, 
will  yoa  please  to  sit  down. 


(y«  lui  ai  donrU  la  monnaie  cU 
sa  pace;  je  lui  ai  rendu  la 
pareille. 

U  n'e7i  coute  Hen. 

X  Qui  ripond  paie. 

( fe  jeu  ne  vaut  pas  la  than- 
delle. 

( qui  casse  lea  verres  Us  paie, 

( il  vouluit  me  /aire  tirer  les 

■marrons  du/eu. 
c'est  ttn  mot  ichapp4  A  la  plume. 
J  manager  d'une  petite  somme  et 

proditjue  d'une  grande. 
(point  d' argent,  point  de  Suisse, 
reldche  ! 

d  ses  risques  et  perils, 
{il  y  a  a  prendre  et  d  laisser. 
( il  m'a  fallu  avaler  cette  pilule 

(or  cette  couleuvre,) 
la  nuit  parte  conseil, 

( c'est  Id  que  le  hdt  le  blesse. 

c'est  dornvrmge  {de). 

6 est  bien  dommage  {de). 

c'est  grand  dommage  ;  dtst  bien 

fdcheux. 
tant  pis. 

d'abord  ;  en  premier  lieu, 

puis ;  ensuite. 

enfin  ;  en  dernier  lieu. 

un  vwt  d6plac6. 

e'est  d  vous  de. 

en  termes  tris-clairs ;  {en  ban 

franqais. 
la  pure  v4rit4;  lafranehe  virU6, 
une  physionomie  ordinaire. 
{ un  homme  tout  rond. 
franc  jeu!  partie  igale! 
jeu  de  main,  jeu  de  vila'tn. 

eomme  bon  vous  semble ;  comma 

vous  votidrez. 
d  vous  (d  lui,  d  elle,  etc.)  per- 

mis  de... 
si  cela  me  plait. 
donnez-vous  la  peine  de  vous  as* 

seoir. 


298 


IDIOMATICAL    8ENXENCES. 


please  tell  him  to, 
you  are  pleased  to  say  so, 
it  is  a  pleasure  to  see  you, 
it  gives  me  much  pleasure  to, 
you  complain  in  the  midst  of 

plenty, 
this  is  the  juain  point, 
point  blank, 

now  we  are  come  to  the  point, 
never  buy  a  pig  in  a  poke, 
honesty  is  the  best  policy, 

«  breach  of  politeness, 

as  poor  as  a  church  monse, 
a  cottage  in  possession  is  better 

than  a  kingdom  in  reversion, 
is  it  possible !  you  don't  say  so ! 
by  return  of  post, 
poverty  is  no  vice, 
it  is  not  worth  powder  and 

shot, 
as  much  as  lies  in  my  power, 

bad  practices,  <yr  habits, 
practice  makes  perfect, 

sparing  of  praise, 

indirect  praise, 

I  pray  you  !  pray  do  ! 

the  pressure  of  the  times, 
on  or  under  pretence  of. 


veuillez  lui  dire  de. 

cela  V0U8  plait  a  dire. 

vous/aites  plaisir  d  voir. 

je  suis  /leuretix  de. 

( vous  criez  famine  aur  un  ta$  de 

bU. 
4^  est  le  principal. 
d  bout  portant ;  d  bnUe-pouV' 

point, 
nous  y  voild  ! 

X  n'achetez  pas  chat  en  poche. 
la  probity  est  la  meilleure  polU 

tique. 
une  infraction  avx  lois  de  la 

politesse. 
{ gueux  comme  un  rat  d'Sglise. 
un  tiens  vaul  mieux  que  deux  tu 

I'auras. 
U  se  pourrait  I 
courrier  pour  courrier. 
pauvreti  n'est  pas  vice. 
( le  jeu  ne  vaut  pas  la  chan- 

delle. 
autant  qu'il  est  en  monpouvoir; 

de  tout  mon  pouvoir. 
mauvaises  habitudes, 
d  force  de  forger  on  devientfor- 

geron. 
sobre  d'4loges. 
louange  d6toum4e. 
je  vousprie;  je  vousenprie;  de 

grdce. 
la  misdre  des  temps. 
souspr6texte  de ;  sous  eouleur  de. 


xxxvn. 

that  pretended  doctor,  ce  soi-disani  m^decin. 

there  is  a  pretty  quantity  of  it,  il  n^y  en  a  pas  mal. 


nothing  shall  prevent  me, 
at  any  price, 
beyond  all  price, 
the  lowest  price, 
tell  me  the  lowest  price, 
from  principle, 
a  private, 
a  private  talk, 
privately, 

he  is  a  man  of  acknowledged 
probity. 


je  n'en  aurai  pas  le  d6mcnti, 
d  tout  prix;  coUte  que  cotite. 
hors  de  prix. 
le  plus  juste  prix. 
dites-moi  le  prLv  au  plus  juste, 
par  principe. 
un  simple  soldat. 
un  tSte-d-Ute. 
tSte-d-tSte. 

c^est  un  homme  de  la  vieiUe 
roche 


IDIOUAXICAL   8£NI£NC£»  299 

apromiseraademnstbefal&IIed,  ehose  promts:  chose  diU. 
it  is  one  thing  to  promise,  and  promettre  et  tenir  eont  deux. 

another  to  perforin, 
court  promises,  t  de  Ceau  b^nite  de  cour. 

in  proof  of  this,  as  a  proof  of  it,  pour  preuve  de   cela  ;  pour 

preuve  ;  {A  telles  enseiyiiea 
que. 
it  is  not  proper  to  say  so,  ce  Ji'est  pas  bien  de  le  dire. 

if  you  think  proper,  si  ton  votis  semble. 

properly  speaking,  d  proprement  parler. 

a  prophet  has  no  honour  in  bis  nul  n'est  prophite  en  son  pay*. 

country, 
in  proportion  as,  d  mesure  que. 

in  proportion,  aufur  et  d  mesure. 

all  proved  in  vain,  toutfut  en  vain. 

it  is  not  within  my  province  or  cela  n^est  pas  de  man  reaaort 

sphere, 
witliout  provocation, wantonly,  de  gaieli  de  coeur. 
for  the  purpose  of,  dans  Le  but  de. 

on  purpose,  expris. 

to  little  purpose,  d  peu  d'effet  ;  en  vain. 

to  much  purpose,  d  grand  effet  ;  bien  ulilemenl. 

to  no  purpose,  uselessly,  sans  effet ;  en  pure  perte. 

it  is  nothing  to  the  purpose,      cela  ne  dit  rien;  cela  ne  fait  rien, 

cela  ne  signijie  rien. 
that  will  not  answer  my  pur-     (  cela  nefera  pas  mon  compte. 

pose, 
man  proposes  and  God  dis-      riiomme propose etDieu  dispose, 

poses, 

Q 

a  groundless  quarrel,  une  quereUe  d' AUemands. 

a  queer  fellow,  ( un  dr6le  de  corps  ;  (  un  drdle 

de  citoyen;  {un  drdle  de  sire. 
that  is  without  question,  as  a    (  cela  va  sans  dire. 

matter  of  course, 
it  is  out  of  the  question,  U  ne  pent  pas  en  Stre  questum. 

if  it  is  a  fair  question,  si  c'est  une  question  a  /aire,  si  ce 

tHest  pas  une  indiscr6lion. 
there  can  be  no  question  about  ce  n^est  plus  une  question. 

it, 
the  question  is  which  of  us...,    c^est  d  gut  de  nous... 

XXX  vm. 

aa  quick  as  lightning,  prompt  comme  Viclair. 

quick  at  meat,  quick  at  work,  X  q^i  mange  vite  ti-availle  vHe. 

he  is  quicWn  business,  c'e/fi  m»  homm^  d'exjy^ditlon. 

he  that  gives  quickly  givea  1 9"»  donne  tdt  donnt  deux  fotx 
twice. 


300 


IDIOMATICAX   SENTENCES. 


be  quiet, 

as  quiet  aa  a  mouse, 

omittance  is  no  quittance, 


restez  tranquille;  taviez-voHs. 
( tranquille  comme  un  petit  mini 

Jean, 
aouffler  n'est  pas  jovet. 

R 


within  a  radius  of  (two  miles),    d  (deux  milles)  d  la  ronde. 


the  storm  is  ragin^ 

it  is  likely  to  rain, 

the  rain  has  set  in, 

it  is  raining, 

it  is  raining  cats  and  dogs, 

small  rain  lays  great  dust, 


ilfait  un  temps  affreux, 
le  temps  est  a  la  phiie 
le  temps  est  bien  d  la  plate. 
U  pleut ;  il  tombe  de  Veau. 
( il  phut  des  hallehardes. 
petite  pluie  ahat  ffrand  vent. 


respect  every  one  according  to  ct  tout  seigneur  tout  honnciir, 

his   rank,   honour  to  whom 

honour  is  due, 
a  writer  of  the  first  rank,  un  4crivain  du  premier  ordre. 

one  rascal  calls  the  other  rogue,  J  la  pelle  se  moque  dufourgon. 
at  any  rate,  cost  what  it  may,    d  tout  prix,  coilte  que  coAte. 
at  the  rate  of,  d  raison  de. 

at  the  rate  he  goes  on,  ( ati  train  dont  il  y  va. 

if  things  go  on  at  this  rate,        (si  cela  continue  ;  A  ce  compte- 


within  reach,  out  of  reach, 
he  is  out  of  reach, 


Id. 


d  la  porlie,  hors  de  la  port4e. 
on  ne  pent  pas  le  rejoindre  ;  il 

est  hors  d^atteinte. 
la  lettre  m'est  parvenue, 
m'j/  voild  arriv4. 
d  bon  droit. 
d  pltis  forte  raison, 
raison  de  plus  pour... 
le  simple  bon  sens  le  vem  ahist. 
il  y  a  lieu  de  croire  que... 


the  letter  reached  me, 

I  have  reached  it  now, 

with  good  reason, 

with  still  greater  reason, 

another  reason  why..., 

it  stands  to  reason, 

there  is  reason  to  suppose 

that..., 
he  will  not  go,  he  has  his  rea-  ( il  nHra  pas,  et  pour  cause. 

sons  for  it, 
for  reasons  best  known  to  my-  poiir  raisons  d  moi  connuea, 

self, 
for  what  reason  did  they  quar-'d  quel  propos  se  aont-Ua  que- 

rel?  rell^sP 

that  is  not  what  I  had  reckoned  ( ce  n'est  pas  Id  mon  compte. 

upon, 
never  reckon  upon  that,  ( rayez  cela  de  vos  fablettes. 

reckon  not  your  chickensbefore  qui  compte  sans  son  hdte  compte 

they  are  hatched ;  or,  he  who      deux/ois. 

reckons    without    his    host 

reckons  twice ;  or,  catch  your  • 

hare  before  you  cook  it, 


IDIOM ATICiX  SEXTEirCEB. 


801 


Bbnrt  reckonings  make  long 
friends, 

I  cannot  recollect  his  name  at 
present, 

to  the  best  of  my  recollection, 

as  red  as  Bre, 

in  reference  to,  in  w  with  re- 
gard to, 

upon  reflection,  on  second 
tliougbts, 

that  is  not  to  be  refused, 

my  kind  regards  to, 

regard  being  had  to, 

as  regular  as  clock-work, 

for  regularity's  sake, 

in  the  reign  of, 

I  am  not  his  relative, 

with  reluctance. 


Iti  bons  comptes/ont  les  bona 

amis, 
son  nam  ne  me  reoient  pas. 

autant  qu'U  ni'en  souvienL 
rouge  comme  It  feu. 
par  rapport  d. 

toute  r&flexion  faite. 

( cela  n'est  pas  de  refv*. 

mes  amitUs  a, ;  mille  chases  d. 

eu  4gard  d. 

( r6yl4  comme  un  papier  de  mu- 

sique. 
pour  la  rtgle;  pour  plus  de  rigvr 

larit4. 
sous  le  rdgne  de. 
je  ne  lui  suis  rien  j  ilne  mfeat 

rien. 
A  contre-cceur. 


rely  upon  it, 

there  is  a  remedy  for  every 

thing, 
if  I  remember  rightly, 
give  my  kind  remembrance  to 

him, 
to  the  best  of  my  remembrance, 
three  removals  are  as  bad  as  a 

fire, 
they  are  mere  reports, 
it  is  reported  that, 
there  is  no  resemblance  be- 

tween  the  things, 
what  has  been  resolved  on  ? 
it  is  resolved  upon,  the  die  is 

cast, 
it  is  a  firm  resolution, 
there  is  still  some  resource  left, 
with  respect  to  (th.), 
with  respect  to  (p.), 
in  that  respect, 
in  all  respects, 
in  some  respects, 
it  respects,  regards,  concerns, 
it  is  a  want  of  respect, 


comptez-y !  comptez  Id-dessua  I 
ily  a  reinide  d  tout. 

sifai  bomie  mimmre. 
dites-lui  mille  choses  (or  Men  dea 

choses)  de  ma  part, 
autant  queje  puis  m^ en  souvenir, 
ttrois  d4m6nagem.ent8  valent  un 

incendie. 
( ee  sont  des  on  dits. 
on  dit ;  le  bruit  court  que. 
cela  ne  se  ressemble  pas. 

qu'a-t-on  arr6U  t 
ledi  en  estjeti. 

(^est  un  parti  pris, 

U  7j  a  encore  de  la  ressource. 

par  rapport  a  ;  quani  d, 

d  regard  de. 

d  cet  6gard, 

d  tous  igards. 

sous  qudques  rapports. 

U  s'agit  de. 

c'est  un  manque  d^igarda. 


302 


IDIOKAnCAX   SENTENCES. 


respecting, 

among  the  rest, 

tlieie  is  no  enjoyment  when 

one  is  under  restraint, 
let  us  resume  our  discourse,  let 

us  return  to  our  subject, 
as  rich  as  a  Jew, 

he  who  pays  his  debts  is  grow- 
ing rich, 
that  is  right,  well  and  good. 


right  or  wrong, 
right  and  wrong,  indiscrimi- 
nately, 
with  good  right, 
is  it  right  so  ? 
all  right, 
on  the  right  side, 
it  is  a  fault  on  the  right  side, 

that  served  him  right ! 

abundance  of  right  hurts  not, 

my  ears  are  ringing,  tingling, 

at  sunrise, 

advisers  run  no  risk, 

at  your  risk, 

it  is  robbing  Peter  to  pay  Paul, 


I  have  a  rod  in  pickle  for  him, 
one  must  do  at  Rome  as  the 

Romans  do, 
that  does  not  take  much  room, 
in  a  front  room, 
in  a  back  room, 
a  reading  room, 
covetousness  is  the  root  of  all 

evils, 
no  rose  without  a  thorn, 
as  rough  as  a  bear, 
as  round  as  an  apple, 


d  Tegard  de. 
entre  autrea. 
oiiily  a  de  la  gSn«  il  n'y  a  pat 

de  plaisir. 
revenons  d  no8  moutona. 

( riche  comme  un  juif,  eomme 

un  Crisus. 
{ qui  paie  ses  defies,  or  qui  ^aC' 

quilte,  s'enrichit. 
cela  est  de  justice  ;  cela  est  de 

droit ;   c^est  bien ;   c'est  cela  ; 

a  la  bonne  heure. 
d  tort  ou  d  raison. 
d  tort  et  d  travert. 

d  bon  titre. 

est-ce  bien  ainsi  ? 

tr^s-bien  ;  tout  va  bien. 

du  bon  c6t4. 

( c'est  se  plaindre  que  la  maride 

est  trap  belle. 
( c'est  bien  fait/  J  c'est  pain 

binit. 
J  surabondance  de  droit  ne  nuU 

pas. 
{leg  oreill^  me  tintent,  or  me 

cornent. 
au  lever  du  soleil. 
les  conseilleurs  ne  sent  pas  Us 

payeurs. 
d  vos  risques  et  perils. 
X  c'est  d4couvrir  St.  Pierre  pour 

couvrir  St.  Paul ;  ( c'est ,  fa  ire 

un  trou  pour  en  boucher  un 

aidre. 
{je  la  lui  garde  bonne. 
(  ilfaut  hurler  avec  les  loups; 

( dlagxterrecommedlaguerre. 
cela  ne  tient  pas  un  gros  volume 
sur  le  devant. 
sur  le  derriire. 
un  cabinet  de  lecture. 
V avarice  est  la  source  de  tous  let 

via  net. 
il  n'est  point  de  rose  sans  6pines. 
( grossier  comme  un  ours. 
(  rond  comme  une  bouie. 


IDIOMATICAL    SENTENCES. 


808 


you  must  not  rouse  the  sleep- 
ing lion,  let  sleeping  dogs  lie, 
there  is  the  rub, 

rude  behaviour, 

rude  treatment,  rough  usage, 

the  knight  of  the  rueful  couu- 
teuauce, 

there  is  no  rule  without  excep- 
tion, 

a  rumour  abroad,     . 

nothing  hut  that  woman  runs 
in  his  head. 


il  nefaut  pas  iveiller  le  chat  qui 

dort. 
( voUd  le  hie  ;  t  e'est  lA  que  git 

le  likvre. 
une  conduite  grossiire. 
un  traitaiient  dur,  or  sivtre. 
le  chevalier  de  la  triate  figure. 

il  rCy  a  point  de  rigle  sans  ex- 
ception, 
un  bruit  qui  court, 
il  s'eat  coiff6  de  cettefemme. 


XL. 

S 


par  maniire  d'acquiU 


put  the  saddle  upon  the  right    bldmez  eelui  qui  a  tort. 

horse, 
for  fashion's  sake,  for  form's 

sake, 
for  talking's  sake, 
for  the  sake  of, 
it  is  not  for  your  sake. 


he  is  not  worth  his  salt, 


par  mani^re  d^entretien, 

pour  I'amour  de. 

( ce  n^est  pas  pour  voa  beaux 

yeux. 
{ilnevautpaslepainqu'ilmange. 


he  finds  a  salve  for  every  sore,  X  i^  trouve  d  diaque  trou  une 

cheville. 
I  do  the  same,  e'est  ce  que  je/ais. 

show  us  a  sample  of  your  skill,  donneznous  un  6cliantillon  de 

votre  savoir-faire. 


I  am  not  satisfied  with  such 

reasons, 
it  is  so  much  saved  out  of  the 

fire, 
saving  his  riglits, 
be  saving,  or  economical, 
trifling  savings, 

hunger  is  the  best  sance^ 
I  say,  sir  ! 
say  on, 

as  if  one  should  say, 
that  is  to  say, 
that  is  not  proper  to  say, 
so  to  say,  if  I  may  say  so, 
you  are  pleased  to  say  so, 
you  don't  say  so  ?  are  yi>u  jo- 
king! 


je  ne  me  paie  pas  de  ces  raisona- 

Id. 
{e'est  autant  deprissurVennemi. 

sans  prejudice  de  ses  droits. 
XUfautfaire  vie  qui  dure, 
des  economies  de  bouts  de  chan- 

delles. 
X  il  n'est  sauce  que  d^appdtit, 
( dites  done,  Monsieur, 
dites  toujours. 
( comme  qui  dirait. 
c^estd-dire. 
cela  ne  .te  dlt  pas. 
pour  ainsi  dire, 
cela  vous  plait  a  dire, 
est-ce  pour  rire  que  vout  dUe$ 

cela  ?   vous  riez  f  cela    n'eat 

pas  possible  ? 


804 


IDIOMATICAX    SENTENCES. 


does  that  mean  to  say...? 
yon  onijht  to  have  said  so 

sooner, 
that  is  saying  much, 
as  tlie  saying  rana, 


■ayinf;  anfl  doing  are  diflferent 

tilings, 
no  sooner  said  than  done, 
I  can  scarcely, 
upon  a  new  score, 

upon   what    score  ?    on    what 

grounds  ?  by  what  right  ? 
what  a  scrawl  I 
at  sea, 

by  the  sea-side, 
pray  be  seated  f 

the  secret  is  found  out, 
with  a  sedate,  cool,  mind, 
let  me  see  !  let  us  see  I 
we  shall  see  that  I 

you  are  not  fit  to  be  seen, 
we  have  not  seen  you  for  a 

long  time, 
he  sees  no  farther  than  his 

nose, 
seeing  is  believing, 
as  it  seems, 

wi'  'lout  seeming  to  observe, 
a  godsend,  a  wriudfall,  a  irea- 

sure  trove, 
against  all  common  sense, 
a  long  series  of  reproaches, 
seriously,  joking  aside  or  apart, 


est-ce  d  dire  que...? 
il/allait  done  le  dire/ 

c'est  heaucoup  dire. 

( covime  dit  Vautre  ;  comme  on 

dit ;  comme  diicnt  les  honnt» 

gens, 
{/aire  et  dire  sont  deux. 

aussitSt  dit  aussitSt  fait. 

fai  de  la  peine  a. 

sur  nouveavx  frais  ;  A  nouveav 

compte. 
pour  quelle  raison?  A  quel  litre  i 

en  vertu  de  quoi  ? 
( quels  pieds  de  mouche  / 
en  mer. 

au  bord  de  la  mer. 
vetdllez  vous  asseoir ;   donnes 

votis  la  peine  de  vous  asseoir. 
(  on  a  d4coi(vert  le  pot  au  rose, 
de  sens  rassis :  d  tete  repos6e. 
voyons ! 
c'est  ce  que  nous  allons  voir; 

nous  vcrrons  Men. 
( vous  unites  pas  presentable. 
(  c'est  du  fruit  nouveau  que  de 

vous  voir. 
( il  ne  voit  pas  plug  loin  que  le 

hoiit  de  son  nez. 
voir,  c'est  croire. 
a,  ce  qu^il  paralt. 
sans /aire  semb/ant  de  Hen. 
une  bonne  trouvaille. 

en  dipit  du  bon  sens. 

( une  kyrielle  de  reproches. 

raillerie  a,  part. 


XLI. 


it  serves  him  right. 


the  way  to  set  about  itr 

a  set  of  men, 

a  dangerous  set, 

that  business  is  settled, 

settle  it  between  you  ;  agree, 

a  severe  cold  in  the  head. 


c'est  bi  en  fait!  J  c^  est  pain  h^nit 

il  ne  I'a  pas  voU  ' 
la  maniire  de  s'y  prendre 
une  reunion  d'hommea. 
(  une  clique  danrjereuse. 
c'est  une  affaire  conclu^ 
J  accordez  vos  flutes. 
un  tjros  r/iume  de  cerveait. 


EDIOHATICAL  SENIJiNCJiS. 


305 


you  are  not  easily  shaken  in  vous  iles/erme  mir  vot  itriert, 

your  opiiiiou, 

it's  a  bliuuie  !  c'est  honteuxl 

for  shauie  !  fi  done  I  fi  ! 
how  many  will  fall  to  my  share?  cond/ien  m'en  reviendrO't-U  f 

sharp  words,  des  paroles  vives. 

as  sharp  as  a  needle,  Jin  comme  un  rasoir. 

who  makes  himself  a  sheep,  iqui  at  fait  br^is,  U  loup  le 


him  the  wolf  eateth, 
sheer  nonsense, 
all  that  shines  is  not  gold. 


mange, 
pure  sottise.  • 

tout  ce  qui  reluU  rCeat  pas  or. 
none  go  vvor^e  shod  than  shoe-  Les  cordonniera  sont  Its  plus  vufl 

makers'  wives,  chaueses. 

in  short,  bref ;  en  un  mot;  enfin. 

the  short  and  the  long  of  it       (en  un  mat  comme  en  cent... 

is..., 
should  he  happen  to  know,        «'tZ  venait  a  savoir. 
one  shoulder  of  mutton  draws  rapjtitit  vieni  en  mangeanL 

dosvu  another, 
a  feigned  sickness,  une  maladie  de  commande. 

sickness  comes  on  horseback      ies  maladies  viennent  a  chevai 

and  leaves  on  foot,  et  sen  retournent  a  pied. 

by  the  waterside,  or  brink,  or    au  bord  de  Ceau. 

edge, 
an  both  sides,  de  part  et  d'auire. 

I  am  on  your  side,  je  suis  des  vdtres. 

the  right  side  (of  a  stuff,  etc.),. I' end roit  {d'une  itoffe,  etc.) 
the  wrong  side  (of  a  stuff,  etc.),  I'envers  {d'une  itoj'e,  etc.) 
every  tiling  has  a  wrong  and  a    chaque  m4daille  a  son  revere. 

right  side. 


a  due  sight, 

a  grand  sight, 

oat  of  sight,  out  of  mind, 

he  is  short-sighted, 

dlence  gives  consent, 
what  a-siuipletou  he  is  I 

what  a  simpleton  you  are  to. 
it  is  sinful  to, 

»re  should  not  require  the 
death  of  the  sinner, 


une  chose  belle  d  voir. 

un  spectacle  superbe. 

loin  des  yeux,  loin  du  cosur;  lea 

abnenis  ont  toujours  tort 
( il  ne  voit  jias  plus  loin  que  eoH 

nez. 
qui  ne  dit  m.ot  consent, 
quel  pauvre  sire  1  U  eat  bien  de 

son  village, 
que  vous  etes  bon  de...! 
c'est  p6cher  que  de ;  e*est  vii 

2>ech6  de, 
d  tout  p6c1i4  mid6rieordc 


XLIL 


how  is  he  situated? 
he  is  in  a  situation. 


quelle  est  aa  position  ? 
il  est  en  place. 


806 


IDIOMATICAl.  SENTENCB8. 


be  is  ont  of  a  situation, 
the  highest  sifuations  are  the 
most  exposed  ;  high  winds 
blow    on    high    hills ;    the 
higher  the  tree,  the  greater 
the  fall, 
the  miser  would  skin  a  flint, 
be  is  just  skin  and  bone, 
slander  is  worse  than  a  sword, 

sleep  upon  it, 
he'  who  sleeps  dines, 
there's  many  a  slip  between 
the  cup  and  the  lip, 

on  the  sly,  by  stealth, 

a  sly  blow, 

a  smart  answer,  a  cutting  an- 
swer, 

a  smart  reply, 

a  smart  sayinc. 

he  shall  smart  for  it  some  day 
or  other, 

he  is  all  smiles  and  kindness, 

there  is  no  smoke  without  fire, 

there  is  a  snake  in  the  grass 

.    (fig-). 

it  snows, 

there  has  been  a  heavy  fall  of 

snow, 
Mr.  so  and  so, 
if  so, 
so  far  so  good, 

00  on,  so  forth, 

somehow, 

somehow  or  other, 

that  is  something ! 

be  gave  me  a  guinea,  it  is  some* 

thing, 
the  sooner  the  better, 
the  more  my  sorrow, 

sorrow  treads  upon  the  heels 

of  mirth, 
verj'  sorry, 
a  strange  sort  of  a  man 


( U  est  sur  le  pavS. 
t  aux  grands  portavx  battent  le 
grands  vents. 


( Favare  tondrait  un  art/. 

( t^  n'a  que  la  peau  et  les  os. 

tun  coup  de  langue  est  pire 
qu'un  coup  de  lance. 

la  nuit  porte  conseil. 

qui  dort  dine. 

tde  la  coupe  aux  Uvres  il  y  a 
loin  ;  X  de  la  main  a  la  bouche 
se  perd  souvent  la  soupe. 

en  cachette. 

un  coup  de  Jamac. 

une  riponse  mordante, 

une  vive  r4plique. 

un  mot  Jin. 

(U  lui  en  cuira  quelquejour, 

( ilfait  patte  de  velours. 

I  il  n'y  a  pas  defumie  sans  feu. 

{il  y  a  quelque  anguiUe  sous 

roche. 
il  neige  ;  il  tombe  de  la  neige. 
il  est  tomM  beaucoup  de  neige. 

M.  un  tel. 

a' it  en  est  ainsi;  si  c'est  ainsi. 

eela  va  Men  jufqu'ici ;  jusfjuHb 

present  cela  ne  va  pas  maL 
et  ainsi  de  suite, 
tant  bien  que  mal. 
on  ne  sail  comment 
( parlez-moi  de  cela  !     . 
il  m'a  donn6  %ine  guinde,  c'est 

toujours  cela. 
le  plus  tdt  sera  le  mieux. 
plus  fen  ai  de  chagrin/  t^est 

justement  ce  qui  m^afflige. 
X  tel  qui  rit  vcndredi,  dimanclie 

pleurera. 
trdsfdche;  d6soU. 
( un  drole  dUiomme  ;  {un  dr6lt 

de  corps. 


IDIOMATICAL  8ENTENCBS.  807 

his 'book  la  much  sought  after,  on  a'arrache  son  livre. 
a  niaa  of  sound  priuciples,         un  homme  bien  pensant. 
a  tall  spare  man,  un  grand  Iiomme  sec. 

spare  moments,  des  moments  libres,  de  loisir. 

if  you  like  it,  do  not  spare  it,    (si  vous  le  trouvez  ban,  ne  vou$ 
,  en/aites  pasfaute. 

can  you  spare  (p.  or  th.)  for  an  pouvez-vous  vous  passer  de  (p. 

hour  ?  or  th.)  pour  une  heure  ? 

spare  to  speak  and  spare  to    Xfaute  de  parler  on  meurt  sans 

speed,  confession. 

■o  to  speak,  pour  ainsi  dire. 

they  speak  broken  French,        {Us  icorchent  lefran^aia, 
you  speak  recklessly,  ( vous  cassez  les  vltres. 

to  his  honour  be  it  spoken,        soil  dit  d  son  honneur. 
he  haa  spoken  severely  against  {ila  tiri  aur  moi  d,  boulets  roW' 

me,  ges. 

too  long  speeches,  des  discoura  d  perte  d'haleine. 

full  speed,  ventre  A  terre;  A  toutes  jamhes. 

God  speed  you  I  Dieu  vous  protege  I 

a  spendthrift,  un  panier perc6,  un  mange-Unit, 

in  high  spirits,  en  grande  gaiety  ;  fort  en  trahx. 

there  is  spirit  in  the  piece,         ily  a  de  la  verve  dans  la piice. 
he  owes  you  an  old  spite,  {ila unedent de laitcontre voua, 

he  is  a  very  good  spoil-sport,     (  c^est  un  vrai  rabat-jiAe. 

a  marplot, 
one  must  spoil  before  he  spins,  apprenH  n'est  pat  maitre, 

one  must  creep  before  he 

walks. 
In  wanton  sport,  with  a  cheer-  de  gaieti  de  cceur, 
•    ful  heart, 

xiiin. 

on  the  spot,  sur  les  lieux  ;  sur-leehamp, 

he  finds  spots  in  the  sun,  U  trouve  des  taches  au  soleiL 

he  spunges  upon  you,  t  H  6st  sur  vos  crochets. 

his  life,  his  honour  is  at  stake,  Uyvadesa  vie,  de  son  hon^ 

neur. 
you  play  for  a  great  stake,         vousjouez  grosjeu. 
up  stairs,  down  stairs,  en  haul,  en  bas. 

a  private  staircase,  un  escalier  d6r6b6. 

stand  off !  keep  off  !  au  large  t 

how  can  one  stand  it  f  comment  peut-on  y  tenir  t 

I  cannot  stand  it,  je  n'y  Hens  plus. 

as  matters  stand,  aur  le  pied  (or  au  point)  oit  en 

sont  Us  choses. 
and  so  it  stands  now,  voUA  oil  en  sont  lea  chores. 

I  am  at  a  stand,  {mevoild  les  braa  crois^s. 

a  man  of  good  standing,  un  homme  qui  a  une  bonne  poiA 

^  tion. 


808  IDIOMATICAL  SENTENCES. 

we  are  friends  of  old  standing,  nou8  sommea  amis  de  vi&tU 

date. 
you  startled  me,  vous  rrCavezfait  peur. 

while  the  grass  grows,  the  steed  Ufavi  vivre  en  attendant. 

starves, 
by  stealth,  secretly,  d  la  dirobie,  en  cachette.  en 

tapinois. 
it  is  loclcing  the  stable  door  Zc^ est  fermer  ricurie  qtumdles 

when  the  steed  is  stolen,  chevaux  sont  dehors. 

step  by  step,  pas  d  pas. 

within  a  step  of,  a  deux  pas  de. 

he  sticks  at  nothing,  il  ne  sefait  scrupule  de  rien. 

he  sticks  at  no  difficulty,  U  ne  s'arrSte  cL&vant  aucune 

difficulty. 
he  sticks  to  his  work,  ( U  est  clou6  sur  sa  besogne. 

1  do  not  know  where  it  sticks,  je  ne  sais  a  quoi  cela  tient. 
we  stick  in  the  same  mire,  we   ( nous  voild  dans  le  mime  hour- 

are  in  the  same  box,  bier. 

as  stifiF  as  a  poker,  raide  comme  une  barre  defer. 

still  more  so,  a  plus  forte  raison. 

he  never  stirs  abroad,  (il  est  toujours  dans  sa  taniire. 

a  stitch  in  time  saves  nine,         (  un  point  fait  d  temps  en  sauve 

mille. 
that  goes  against  his  stomach,  le/xeur  ne  lui  en  ditpas. 

or  the  grain, 
»  rolling  stone  gathers  no  moss,  pierre  qui  route  n'amasse  pas 

mousse. 
store  is  no  sore,  you  can't  have  abondance  de  biens  ne  nuit  pas. 

too  much  of  a  good  thing, 
after  a  storm  comes  a  calm,       apris  la  pluie  le  beau  temps.    ■ 
the  best  of  the  story,  le  plus  beau  de  Vhistoire. 

an  old  woman's  story,  une  hisioire  de  bonne  femme;  un 

conte  d  dormir  debout. 
it  is  an  invented  story  !  c'est  un  conte  fait  a  plaisir  I 

all  idle  stories  !  ( chansons  que  tout  cela  ! 

the  same  story  over  again  !        ( toujours  Ui  mime  chanson  t 
the  story  goes  on  to  say,  on  ajoute. 

as  the  story  goes,  d  ce  que  dit  Vhistoire. 

that's  another  story,  ( c^est  une  autre  paire  de  man- 

ches  ! 
straight  along,  tout  droit. 

aa  straight  as  a  dart,  ( droit  comme  unjone,  un  i,  un 

cierge. 
you  should  do  it  in  a  straight-  ( t^  nefaut  pas  oiler  par  quatre 

forward  way,  chemins. 

■trange  to  say,  to  relate  !  chose  itrangel 

he  is  quite  a  stranger  to  me,       (je  ne  le  connais  ni  d'Eve  m 

dAdam. 


IDIOHATICAL   SEITrENCES. 


309 


he  is  not  gone  there  to  pick 

straw, 
at  a  stretch, 
strictly  speaking, 
it  has  struck  one, 

he  strikes  home, 

in  a  string,  one  after  another, 

one  mnst  not  tonch  upon  that 
string, 

a  master-stroke, 

there  is  no  struggling  with  ne- 
cessity, 

as  stubborn  as  an  ass, 

you  look  stupefied, 

it  is  Tery  stupid, 
as  stupid  as  an  owl. 


( U  n'y  est  paa  alU  pour  enfiler 

des  perles. 
tout  iTune  haleine  ;  (Tun  traU. 
d  proprement  parler. 
il  est  une  keure  sonjide  ;  nne 

heure  est  sonnie. 
U  emporie  la  piece. 
A  la  queue  ;  les  uns  apris  les 

autres. 
&est  une  corde  qu'il  tie  fatU  pa* 

toucher, 
un  coup  de  mattre, 
ilfaut  cMer  d  la  nicessiU. 

fentSU  ( or  tStu)  comme  un  dne. 
vous  avez  Fair  de  revenir  de 
Pontoise. 
(  €est  bien  bSle. 

(bite cormne une oie ;  toteomme 
une  base. 


XlilV. 


his  book  did  not  succeed, 

a  quiet  success, 

a  success  beyond  measure, 

all  of  a  sudden, 

suffice  it  to  say, 

that  is  sufficient  to, 

sufficient  unto  the  day  is  the 

evil  thereof, 
that  suits  me,  done  !  ' 

one  must  suit  one's  feli  to  the 

times,  to  circumstances, 
a  sum  over  and  above, 
at  sunrise, 
at  sunset, 
in  the  bright  son, 
there  is  neither  sun,  xua  dust, 

nor  rain,  abroad, 
the  sun  shines  upon  all  ali!;e, 
ft  is  sunny,  the  sun  is  very 

high, 
a  bright  sunshine, 
when  two  Sundays  come  to* 

gether, 
sore  enough, 
to  be  sure  t 


3 


son  livre  n^a  pas  prU. 

un  succis  d'estiiiie. 

un  succisfou. 

tout  a  coup. 

qu'il  guffise  de  dire. 

U  vl  enfant  pas  davantage  pour. 

d  ehaquejour  suffit  sa  peine. 

icela  me  va,  fen  suis  I 
a,  la  guerre  comme  a  la  ffuerre. 

une  som.7ne  en  sus. 

an  lever  du  soldi. 

au  coucher  du  soleil. 

en  plein  soleil. 

t  ilfait  un  lamps  de  demoiseUe 

le  soleil  luit  pour  tout  le  monde. 
Ufait  soleil,  grand  soleiL 

( un  beau  soleil. 

( la  semaine  des  trots  jeudit. 

A  coup  sHr. 

certainement ;  mais  certains 
tnent. 


310  IDIOMATICAX   SENTENCES. 

Bure !  I  seat  it,  tout  de  hon,  sans  plaisanter,  k 

I'ai  envoys. 
1  am  quite  sure  of  it,  (fen  mettrais  ma  main  au/eu. 

sure  bind,  sure  find,  mifiance  est  mere  de  sHrete. 

surprising  to  relate  I  chose  siirprenante  I 

I  suspected  it  I  je  m^en  doutais  Men  ! 

one  swallow  does  not  make  a  X  une  hirondelle  ne  fait  pas  le 

summer,  nor  one  woodcock  a      printempa  ;    (une  /oia    n'esl 

winter,  pas  cotitume. 

I  would  swear  to  it,  {fenjurerais  I  fen  Uveraia  la 

main  ! 
you  made  a  sweet  business  of  vov^  avez  Jait  Id,  time  beUe 

it,  affaire. 

my  head  swims,  la  tSte  me  toume. 

do  not  utter  a  syllable  of  it,       n'en  dites  rien  ;  nefaite*  aem- 

hlant  de  rien. 

T 

the  tables  are  turned,  la  midaille  eat   renversSe  ;   lea 

affaires  ont  changi  deface. 
that  won't  take,  (  f a  we  prend  pas. 

take  all  together,  on  the  whole,  A  tout  prendre. 
take  it  or  not  !  ct  prendre  ou  A  laisser. 

what  he  said  was  taken  up,        ( ce  qu^U  a  dit  n^estpaa  tombS  d 

terre. 
that's  a  thorn  taken  ont  of  his  ( il  a^est  tiri  une  forte  ipine  du 

side,  pied. 

the  talk  of  all  the  town,  Ventretien  de  toute  la  vide. 

they  talked  of  yon  at  dinner,     Ufut  question  de  voua  d  dtner. 
all  that  is  idle  talk,  it  is  as    ( autant  en  emporte  le  vent. 

light  as  air, 
he  that  talks  much,  lies  much,  t  fes  grands  parleura  aont  de 

grands  m^nteura. 
he  is  an  idle  talker,  (^est  un  diseur  de  riena. 

from  taste,  par  goiU. 

every  one  to  his  taste,  chacun  a  son  goUt. 

tastes  differ,  XlesgoHtaneserapportent point, 

there  is  no  disputing  of  tastes,  on  ne  dispute  pas  des  goUts  ni 

des  couleura. 
you  are  better  fed  than  taught,  vov^  itea  trop  bien  nourri  et 

trop  mal  appria. 
with  tears  in  his  eyes,  lea  larmes  aux  yeux. 

tears  came  into  his  eyes,  lea  larmea  lui  aont  venuea  aux 

yeux. 
don't  tell  me  that !  tell  that  to  { d  d'autrea  I 

the  marines  ! 
that  is  my  temper,  je  auia  ainaifait. 

it  is  ten  to  one,  Uy  a  dix  d  parier  centre  un. 


IDIOHATICAIi  SENTENCES. 


Sll 


a  tender  pointy 


tm  point  dilkat ;  un  point  aeci- 
breux. 


XliV. 


on  these  terma, 

no  thanks  to  him, 

thank  God, 

he  may  thank  me  for  it, 

he  may  thank  himself  for  it, 

that's  it, 

as  to  that, 

and  then  it  is  that..., 

there  you  are  right, 

there  is  the  main  pointy 

through  thick  and  thin, 

stop  thief ! 

set  a  thief  to  catch  a  thief, 

he  is  thin-skinned,    touchy, 

quick-tempered, 
it  IS  no  such  thing; 

there  is  the  thing, 
one  of  two  things, 
of  all  things,  above  all  things, 

from  one  thing  to  another,  he 

came  to  speak..., 
poor  thing  ! 
it  is  just  the  thing, 

it  is  the  best  thing  I  can  do, 

that  s  a  good  thing  I 


it  is  quite  another  thing; 

the  thing  is  to, 
as  things  go, 

I  should  think  so  I 
this,  that,  and  the  other, 
gather  thistles,  expect  prickles, 
no  thoroughfare,  no  road  this 

way, 
though  it  were  only     , 


d  ces  conditions-Ui. 
ce  n' est  pas  grdce  d  lui. 
Dieu  merci !  grdce  d  Dieu  ! 
c'est  d  mot  qu'U  doit  cela. 
il  ne  pent  s'en  prendre  qu^d,  Itii- 

mime,  c^est  safaute. 
€est  cela  ! 

quant  a  cela  ;  pour  le  coup, 
et  (^est  alors  que... 
en  cela  vous  avez  raison. 
X  c^est  Id,  que  gtt  le  lievre. 
d  travera  tou8  les  obstacles;  d 

tort  et  d  travera. 
au  voleur  !  au  voleur  I 
( d  voleur  voleur  et  demi. 
U  nefaut  pas  lui  marcher  aur 

le  pied, 
point  du  tout ;  eda  n'est  pa* 

vrai. 
( voila  ce  que  c'eat. 
de  deux  c/iosea  Vune. 
avant  (or  aur)  totUe  choae  ;  par- 

desxus  toutea  chosea. 
( dejil  en  aiguille,  U  en  vint  d 

parler... 
la  pauvre  creature  I 
( cela  fait  V  affaire;  cela  ira  tria- 

bien. 
deal  ce  quefai  de  nrueux  a/aire; 

^eat  mxm  plua  court  parti, 
fen  auis  bien  aise  ;  fen  suia  bien 

content;  voild,quieat  excellent; 

( roiZd  qui  eatfameux. 
iiast  tout  autre  choae  ;  ( c'eat  un« 

autre  paire  de  manchea. 
U  t^agit  de. 
(  par  le  tempa  qui  court ;  ( du 

train  dont  pa  va. 
je  le  croia  bien  ! 
( et  ci  et  f o. 

qui  s'y/rotte  t^y  piquit. 
on  ne  paaaepcul 

nef&t-ce  que... 


812 


IDIOMATICAL   SENTENCES. 


even  though,  were  I, 

I  thought  better  of  it  eince  last 

night, 
a  thought  strikes  me, 
at  the  very  thought  of  it, 
his  coat  is  threadbare, 
his  throat.is  paved, 
I  was  thunderstruck  by  it, 

ticket  of  admission, 

single  ticket, 

return  ticket, 

good  tidings, 

it  is  rather  too  tight, 

my  shoes  are  too  tight^ 

till  then, 

till  to-morrow, 

for  that  time, 

from  that  time, 

from  time  to  time, 

by  this  time, 

in  a  short  time, 

in  a  proper  time  and  place, 

all  in  good  time, 

at  the  appointed  time, 

at  the  same  time, 

some  time  or  other, 

with  time,  in  the  long  run,  at 

length, 
in  his  father's  time, 
just  in  time  to, 
that  comes  just  in  time, 

this  time  I  have  you, 

time  hangs  heavy  upon  my 

bauds, 
as  times  go, 
we  shall  see  when  the  time 

comes  ! 
time  lost  is  never  found  again, 

a  mouse  in  time  may  cut  a 
cable, 

ill-timed, 

he  is  quite  tiresome  to  me. 


quand  Man  mSme  ;  dussi-je. 
je  me  suis  ravish. 

U  me  vient  une  idde. 

rien  que  d^y  penser. 

( son  habit  montre  la  corde. 

Ji7  a  le  gosier  pav6. 

( les  bras  mien  tombaient;  c'dtait 

un  coup  defoudre  pour  moi. 
billet  d'entrie. 
billet  dialler, 
billet  dialler  et  retour. 
de  bonnes  nouvelles. 
e^est  un  peu  juste, 
(je  suis  dans  la  prison  de  St. 

Cr4pin. 
en  attendant ;  jusque-ld, 
d  demain. 
pour  lor  a. 
dds  lors. 

de  temps  en  temps, 
a  Vheure  qu^U  est ;  maintenanL 
sous  peu. 
en  temps  et  lieu, 
toutes  choses  en  leur  temps, 
d  VJieure  convenue. 
en  mSme  temps, 
un  jour  ou  I'autre  ;  un  de  ccs 

jours, 
d  la  longue. 

du  vivant  de  son  ptre. 

d  temps  pour. 

( cela  vient  comme  mar6e  en 

carime. 
( pour  le  coup  je  vous  y  prends. 
le  temps  me  dure. 

ipar  le  temps  qui  court, 
alors  comme  alors  I 

le  temps  perdu  ne  se  recouvre 

point, 
avec  le  temps  on  vient  d  bout  de 

tout ;  Z  petit  d  petit  Voiacau 

fait  son  nid. 
hors  de  saison ,  d  contre-temps, 
{je  le  parte  sur  mea  ipaules. 


IDIOKAnCAL   SENTENCES. 


818 


tit  for  tat, 

his  tongue  is  always  wagging, 
your  tongue  runs  before  ybur 

wit, 
you  have  a  tongue  in  your  head, 
a  tongue  gives  a  deeper  wound 

than  a  sword, 
what    the    heart    thinks    the 

tongue  speaks ;  or,  near  the 

heart,  near  the  month, 
it  was  a  slip  of  the  tongue, 
too  much  of  one  thing  is  good 

for  nothing, 
topsy-turvy, 
it  totters, 
the  beaten  track, 
every  one  to  his  trade, 
a  transparent  artifice, 
it  is  but  trash, 
time  travels  fast,  time  flies, 
a  capital  treat, 
it  is  a  treat  to  see  you, 
such  as  the  tree  is,  such  is  the 

fruit, 
it  is  my  first  trial, 
in  a  trice,  in  less  than  no  time, 
he  has  played  him  a  clever 

trick, 
he  ie  at  his  tricks  again, 
within  a  trifle, 
such  a  trifle, 
that  is  but  a  trifle, 

we  have  not  come  to  trifle 

away  our  time, 
in  what  trim  she  is  ! 
they  have  caused  him  much 

trouble, 


( d  bon  chat  hon  rat ;  ( c'est  urn 

prit6  rendu, 
( sa  langue  va  tovjours. 
vous  parlez  avant  de  petuer. 

( avec  unt  langue  onvaA  Borne. 
X  un  coup  de  langue  eat  jnre 

qu'un  coup  de  lance. 
X  de  Vabondance  du  coeur  la 

bouche  parle. 

la  langue  lui  afourchd. 
Vexcta  gdte  tout, 

sens  dessus-dessovs, 

(  fa  branle  dans  le  manche, 

ie  saltier  battu. 

cliacun  son  metier. 

t  une  finesse  cousue  defil  blane. 

(  ce  n^est  que  de  la  drogue, 

le  temps  va  vite. 

( unfameux  r4gal. 

c'est  une/ete  de  vous  voir, 

tel  arbre  tel  fruit. 

c^est  man  coup  (Tessai. 

en  mains  de  rien. 

{U  lui  a  serm  unplat  de  son 

metier, 
{il  va  encore /aire  des  sienne*. 
d  peu  de  chose  pris. 
ri  peu  de  chose. 
(  U  n'y  a  pas  Id  de  quoi/ouetter 

un  chat. 
(  nous  ne  sommes  pas  venus  id 

pour  enfiler  des  perles. 
( comme  la  voild  fagot4e  ! 
on  lui  a  fait  voir  du  pays. 


JSJ^Vl. 


it  is  not  worth  the  trouble, 

every  one  has  his  troubles, 
yoa  have  played  the  truant, 

if  it  lie  true  that, 
that  is  true  enough. 


( le  jeu  ne  vant  pas  la  ehan- 

deJle. 
chcicun  a  sd  croix  d  porter, 
vous  avez  fait  Ficole  buisson- 

niire, 
«i  tant  est  que. 
e^eat  bien  vrai. 


314 


IDIOMATICAX    SENTENCES. 


it  is  his  best  trump  (fig.)t 
you  are  not  to  be  trusted, 
that  is  trusting  to  a  broken 

reed, 
to  tell  the  truth, 
all  truths  must  not  be  told  at 

all  times, 
it  is  only  truth  that  can  give 

offence, 
at  every  turn, 

each  in  his  turn,  by  turns, 

it  is  my  turn  to, 

it  is  your  turn  now, 

it  is  done  to  a  turn,  to  a  tittle, 

a  good  turn, 

one  good  turn  deserves  another, 

think  twice  before  you  speak 

once,  second  thoughts  are 

best, 
if  things  were  to  be  done  twice, 

all  would  be  wise, 
he  will  not  need  to  be  told  so 

twice  ;  one  telling  will  be 

enough  for  him, 
in  the  twinkling  of  an  eye, 


t  c^e^t  son  cheval  de  bataiUe, 
vous  6te8  sujet  A  caution, 
bien/ou  qui  s'yfie. 

d  dire  vrai !  d,  vrai  dire  I 
toute  v4rit4  rieat  paa  bonne  d 

dire. 
il  n'y  a  qw  la  vMU  qvi  blesse, 

d  tout  propoa  ;  d  tout  bout  de 

champ, 
d  tour  de  rfiU  ;  tour  d  tour, 
e'est  d  moi  d. 
( d  vous  la  balle, 
<^est  cuit  d  point 
un  service. 
J  d  beaujeu  beau  retour;  uu 

service  en  vaut  un  autre. 
Xpensez  dexvxfois  avant  de  par- 

ler. 

sijeunesse  savait,  et  si  vieillease 

pouvait  / 
Une  sele  laissera  pas  dire  deux 

fois. 

en  un  din  ttaU, ;  en  noint  d$ 
rien. 


be  it  nnderstood,  it  being  on- 
derstood, 

that  is  understood, 

an  undue  rigour, 

unexpectedly, 

there  shall  be  no  unfairness, 

unfit  for  service, 

if  you  say  that,  you  will  un- 
hinge him, 

unknown  to  me, 

unprepared, 

you  shall  not  go  long  unpun- 
ished, 

a  good  action  never  remains 
unrewarded, 

it  is  unseemly  to,  onbeoomiug 
to, 

he  is  up, 


U 

bien  entendu. 

e^est  entendu  ;  cela  va  sans  dire. 

une  rigueur  outrie,  excessive. 

d  Vimproviste. 

il  n^y  aura  pas  de  passe-droit. 

hors  de  service. 

( si  votLS  dites  cela,  voujs  le  met- 

trez  hors  des  gonds. 
d  mon  insu. 
au  dipourvu. 
( vous  ne  le  porterezpas  bien  loim, 

un  bienfait  n' est  jamais  perdu. 

U  est  mconvenant  de. 

Uestlevt. 


IDIOHAXICIX  SXNTKCrCES. 


816 


it  is  up  now,  ifestfini  maintenant, 

be  is  hard  up,  U  est  tr^-gini;  U  eat  aux  aioU. 

up  and  down,  fa  et  Id. 

there  are  ups  and  downs  in  life,  ily  a  du  haul  et  du  baa  dans  la 

vie. 
they  have  been  looking  for  you  on  voua  a  ekercM  par  monta  et 

up  and  down,  par  vaux. 

heels  uppermost,  ( lea  qtuitre/era  en  Fair. 

upside  down,  aena  deaaua-deaaoua. 

XLVH. 
it  is  of  no  use  for  you  to  try,      voua  avez  beau /aire, 
what  is  the  use  of,  of  what  use  d  quoisert  de...?  que  aertde..J 


is  it  to...? 
what  use  is  it  for  me  to...T 
of  what  use  is  that  tomeT 
it  is  of  no  use, 
that  is  of  no  matter  of  use^ 

it  is  a  useless  blow, 
as  usual, 

it  is  the  utmost  if, 
at  the  utmost, 
utterly. 


d  quoibon...f 
que  gagnerai-je  d...f 
d  quoi  cela  peut-U  me  aervirf 
c'eat  inutile. 
{ cela  aert  comme  une  dnquitme. 

roue  d  un  carroase. 
dest  un  coup  d'4p4e  dana  Veau. 
eomme  d  r ordinaire;  comme  de 

coutume. 
( (^est  tout  le  bout  du  monde. 
d  tout  rompre. 
de  fond  en  comble. 


a  vagabond,  a  vagrant, 
a  vain  efifort, 
it  is  labour  in  vain, 
as  vain  as  a  peacock. 


un  homme  aana  aven. 
un  coup  d^4p4e  dana  Team, 
Zc^eat  battre  Veau. 
fier  comme  un  pava. 


XIjVILL 


do  you  so  little  value...? 
as  long  as  I  have  a  drop  of 

blood  in  my  veins, 
nothing  venture  nothing  win, 
that  will  vex  him  much, 

the  very  day, 

the  very  thought,  even  the 

thought, 
at  first  view, 

with  a  view  to, 
b^  open  violence 
visibly, 
on  a  visit. 


eatxmez-voua  «  pev,  f 

tant  quHl  me  reatera  une  goutte 

de  aang  dana  lea  veines. 
qui  ne  risque  rien  n^a  rien. 
{cela  lui /era /aire  du  mauvaie 

aang. 
le  jour  mime, 
la  aeulepenaie. 

d  premie  vue  ;  au  premier 

abord. 
dans  rintention  de. 
d/orce  ouverte. 
d  vued'ceiL 
en  maite. 


316 


miOHATICAL  SENTENCES. 


his  voice  breaks, 
the  voice  of  tlie  peopI«  is  the 
voice  of  God, 


sa  voix  mue. 

la  voix  du  peuple  est  la  voiz  dt 
Dieu. 


it  is  ten  minutes'  walk, 
as  I  was  walking,  1  saw..., 
for  want  of, 
what  do  you  want  ? 


W 

ily  a  dix  minutes  de  marche. 
tout  en  me  pronicnantj'ai  vu... 
faute  dt. 
que  voulez-votis  ? 


there  wants  three  francs  of  the  il  manque  trots  J'rancs  d  ta 


sum, 
how  much  is  wanting  ? 
there  is  but  little  wanting, 
you  are  wanted, 
for  wanton  sport. 


eomm^. 
de  comhien  s^enfaut-il  f 
U  ne  s'en/aut  yutre. 
on  vous  demaixle. 
de  gaieli  de  cceur. 


a  warm  man,  a  man  well  to  do  ( uu  richard ;  (  un  gros  man- 
ia the  world,  a  man  of  means,       sieur  ;  (  un  homme  qui  a  de 

quoi ;  (  un  homm£  qui  a  du 


it  is  a  fair  warning  for  one  to 

stand  on  his  guard, 
I  warrant  it, 
waste  paper, 
my  mouth  waters  at  it, 
he  is  in  low  water, 

smooth  water  runs  deep, 

the  right  way, 

the  wrong  way, 

half  way, 

this  way, 

that  way, 

which  way  ? 

on  the  way, 

in  every  way, 

this  way  and  that^ 

on  my  way  to, 

on  my  way  from, 

a  great  way, 

it  is  the  shortest  way, 

there  is  no  other  way. 


there  are  more  ways  to  the 
wood  than  one, 


quibu». 
e^est  un  avis  au  lecteur. 

je  vous  en  r6ponds. 

du  papier  de  rebut. 

(  Veau  m'en  vient  a  la  bouche. 

( les  eaux  sont  basses  chez  lui; 

( il  est  bas  i^erc6. 
U  n'y  a  pire  eau  que  celle  qui 

dort. 
le  bon  chemin  (proper),  la  bonmi 

mxtniere  (fig.) 
2e  mauoais  cliemin  (proper),  la 

mauvaise  manidre  (fig. ) 
d  moiti4  chemin  ;  d  mi-chemin. 
par  ici ;  de  ce  c6t4-ci. 
par  Id  ;  de  ce  cdt4-lA. 
par  oit  ? 

en  chemin  ;  chemin  faisant. 
de  toute/afon. 
fd  et  Id. 

commefallaisd;  en  allanti 
comme  je  revenais  de. 
bien  loin, 
c'est  le  plus  court  chem,in  (prop.) ; 

c^est  le  plus  cozirt  parti  (fig.) 
U  n'y  a  pas   d' autre  chemin 

(prop,);  il  n'y  a  pas  de  milieu 

(fig-) 
tout  cliemin  mine  d  Rome. 


tDIOMATICAL   8ENTEN.;ES. 


317 


every  one  in  his  own  way, 
the  weakest  goes  to  the  wall^ 


contentment  is  the  greatest 

wealth, 
this  stuff  will  wear  well, 
it  is  not  wearable, 
in  this  cold  weather, 
in  this  hot  weather, 
he  is  a  perfect  weathercock, 
ill  weeds  grow  apace, 
this  day  week, 


and  welcome, 

you  are  welcome  to  it, 

he  was  as  welcome  as  a  dog  at 

a  welding, 
it  was  as  well  for  you, 
very  well  for  you,  but..., 
it  is  very  well  for  you  to, 
well  or  ill, 

as  well  as  he  can  or  could, 
well  none  !  well  and  good  i 
Ul  is  irell  that  ends  well. 


well !  I  aever  I 

as  it  were, 

if  it  were  not  for  him,  bat  for 

him, 
I  will  tell  ^ou  what, 
what  of  it .'  what  of  that  f 

what  is  that  to  you  ? 

anywhere, 

for  this  long  while, 

whilst  I  am  about  it,  while  my 

hand  is  in, 
when  the  whim  strikes  him, 

what  whim  has  got  into  your 
head? 


chaeun  a  «a  maniirt. 

Xle  plug  faille  eat  tovjouri 
6crag6 ;  les  battiu  patent  sou- 
vent  Camende. 

eontentement  passe  richesses. 

cette  6toffe  est  cTun  bon  user, 
cela  n'ent  pas  de  mise. 
par  lefroid  qu'il/ait. 
par  la  chaleur  qu'ilfaiL 
c'est  une  vraie  girouette. 
mauvaise  herbe  crott  toujours. 
U  y  a  aujourd'hui  huit  jours 

(past),   aujourd'hui   en   huit 

(future,  y 
t^est  bien  a  voire  service, 
il  est,  or  c'est,  d  voire  service, 
{on  Ca  regu  comine  un  chien 

dans  unjeu  de  quilles. 
bien  vous  a  pris  de. 
{passe  encore  pourvous,  mait... 
vous  avez  beau, 
tant  bien  que  mal. 
de  son  mieux. 
d  la  bonne  heure  ! 
la  fin  couronne  Caeuvre;  qui  vent 

la  fin  veut  les  moyens ;  rira 

bien  qui  rira  le  dern  ier ;  t  tout 

est  bien  quifinit  Lieu, 
ett-ce  bien  possible  I  a-t-onjO' 

mais  vu! 
pour  ainsi  dirt, 
sans  lui. 

\je  vous  dirai  ce  que  c'cst. 
(  eh  bien  !  apris  ? — qu'est-ce  d 

dire  ? 
qyCeat-ce  que  cela  vous  fait  t 
n'importe  oil. 
depuis  longtemps. 
tandia  que  fat  la  main  d  la 

pdie. 
( qnand  il  a  ses  luhieJi ;  { quand 

la  lubie  lui  preiid. 
(  quelle  mouche  voua  aptqui  t 


^Ilfa  avjowrdhvi  huitjowt  gu'Q  0U  vam:  H  tte»dra  ato<mnfhui  tn  htiit. 


318 


IDIOMATICAL  STENTKNCitS. 


aa  white  as  a  sheet, 
as  white  as  snow, 
on  the  whole,  in  general, 
apon  the  whole, 

buy  a  house  ready  built,  bat 
mould  your  wife  to  your 
own  mind, 

whether  he  wills  or  not, 


blanc  eomme  un  iinceuL 

blanc  comme  neige. 

en  g6n4ral. 

A  tout  prendre ;  en  somme  ;  au 

r6sum6. 
J  maison/aite  et/emme  A  faire. 


bon  gri  meU  gri;  tnalgri  lui. 


XT.TX 
will  yon  not  T  n'est-ce  pas  t 

he  has  already  a  will  of  his     il  a  dija  des  volonUa. 

own, 
there's  no  forcing  one's  will ;   les  volont4a  aont  librtM. 

a  wilful  man  must  have  his 


way, 
where  there  is  a  will  there  is 
away, 

willing  or  not,  willing  or  un- 
willing, 
willingly, 
let  them  laugh  who  win. 


quand  onadela  bonne  volont4, 
on  ne  manqve  pas  de  moyena; 
vouloir,  c'est  pouvoir. 
hon  gr6  mal  gr6  ;  de  gri  ou  de 

force, 
de  plein  gr4. 

rira  bien  qui  rira  le  dernier. 
there  is  something  in  the  wind,    {il  y  a  quelque  chose  qui  couve, 
it  was  a  windfall,   treasure     ( c'itait  une  bonne  aubaine. 


trove, 
God  tempers  the  wind  to  the 

shorn  lamb, 
it  is  an  ill  wind  that  blows 

nobody  good, 
a  little  wine, 

wine  makes  him  very  gay, 
good  wine  needs  no  bush, 
one  cannot  fly  without  wings, 

as  much  as  one  can  wish, 
sallies  of  wit, 
it  is  with  us  as  with..., 
without  rhyme  or  reason, 
we  can  do  without  that. 


t  a  brebia  tondue  Dieu  mesure  le 

vent. 
d  quelque  chose  malheur  est  bon. 

un  doigt  de  vin. 

U  a  le  vin  gai. 

bon  vin  n^apas  besoin  d'enseigne. 

Z  on  ne  pent  pas  voler  sans  2>li^- 

men. 
A  plaviir  ;  A  discretion, 
des  saillies. 

il  en  est  de  nous  comme  de... 
sans  rime  ni  raison. 
nous  n^attendons  pas  apris  cela. 


his  conversation  is  very  witty,  sa  conversation  pdt'dle  d^esprit. 
a  woman  must  have  her  way,    ce  quefemme  veut,  Dieu  le  veui 

ce  n^est  pas  6tonnant ;  il  n'y  a 

rleii  d'etonnant. 
par  extraordinaire  ;    chose  ex- 
traordinaire. 


no  wonder, 

for  A  wonder, 

that*  a  a  nine  days'  wonder. 


c'e»f  une  m,erveille  d'un  jour. 


IDIOHATICa^   SENTEirCES. 


819 


I  wonder  if,  when,  bow,  why, 

fair,  fine  words, 
good  words, 

high  words, 

vain  words,  empty  words, 

by  word  of  mouth,  vivd  voce, 

a  word  with  you, 

take  my  word  for  it, 

I  will  not  say  a  word  about  it, 

it  won't  go  any  farther, 
more  words  than  deeds, 
an  honest  man  is  as  good  as 

his  word, 
a  word  to  the  wise  is  enough, 


a  hard  work  indeed, 

a  work  requiring  much  time, 

that  is  not  the  work  of  a  few 

hours, 
•  man's  work  is  from  sun  to 

son,  but  a  woman's  work  is 

never  done, 
they  will  make  short  work  of 

you, 
the  workman  is  known  by  his 

work, 
he  is  a  hard  worker, 
for  all  the  world, 
it  is  the  way  of  the  world,  such 

is  the  world,  such  is  life, 
to  make  it  worse  I  to  make 

matters  worse, 
do  your  worst, 

let  the  worst  come  to  the  worst, 
he  is  worth  his  weight  in  gold, 
it  is  not  worth  while, 
the  labourer  is  worthy  of  his 

hire, 
a  soft  answer  turns  away  wrath, 
that  is  the  wrong  book, 
that  is  wrong, 

that  is  wrong  of  him. 


je  m^itonne  bien  si,  etc. ;  je  vou- 
drais  bien  savoir  si,  etc. 

de  belles  paroles. 

de  bonnes  paroles  ;  de  donees 
paroles. 

des  paroles  tnves  ;  de  gros  mots ; 
dks  injures. 

des  paroles  en  Pair. 

de  vive  voix. 

un  mot !  fai  un  mot  d  voru  dire. 

croyez-m'en. 

( eda  n'ira  pas  plus  loin. 

plus  de  bruU  que  de  besogne. 
un  honnete  homme  n'a  que  sa 

parole. 
X  le  sage  entend  d,  demi-mot ;  ( d 

bon  entendeur  un  demi-mot 

suffit ;  d,  bon  entendeur  salut. 
( un  travail  de  cheval. 
un  ouvrage  de  longue  haleine. 
eela  ne  se/ait  pas  du  jour  au 

lendemain. 
X  unefemme  n'a  jamais  faiL 


voire  prods  sera  hientdtfait. 

d  Pceuvre  on  connatt  Vouvrier. 

( <^e8t  un  piocheur. 
pour  tout  au  monde. 
ainsi  va  le  mande. 

pour  surcrott  de  malheur. 

(faites  ce  que  vous  voudrez  !  ear- 

rangez-vous. 
au  pis  alter, 
il  vaut  son  pesant  cPor. 
{lejeu  ne  vaut  pas  la  chandelle. 
toute  peine  m^iie  salaire. 

petite  pluie  abat  grand  vent, 
ce  n'est  pas  le  livre  qu'il/aut. 
^est  mnl ;  ce  v! est  pas  juste  ;  ce, 

n'est  pas  cela. 
c'est  mal  a  lui ;  <^est  rtial  de  sa 

part 


320 


rOIOMATICAX   SEin-ENCBS. 


one  year  with  another,  on  an 

average, 
as  yellow  as  gold, 

oh' yes  i  yea  indeed  ! 

yes, 

in  a  fortnight  from  yesterday, 

but  yesterday, 

if  young  meu  had  sense  enough 

and  old  men  strength  enough, 

all  might  be  well, 
a  young  devil,  an  old  aaiut. 


aiin6e  commune;  ann4e  m/yyenne; 

bon  an  mal  an. 
jaune  comme  de  I'or  ;  jaunt 

comme  uji  coing. 
(  oh  que  si ! 
( si  fait !  si!  mats  si  I 
cChier  en  quinze. 
hier  encore, 
sijeunesse  savait,  et  si  vieillesae 

pouvait ! 

quand  le  diable  devient  viewx,  U 
$e/aU  ermite. 


^59^7 


UC  SOUTHERN  REGO'.A 


A     000  677  882 


